An account of several late voyages & discoveries to the south and north towards the Streights of Magellan, the South Seas, the vast tracts of land beyond Hollandia Nova &c. : also towards Nova Zembla, Greenland or Spitsberg, Groynland or Engrondland, &c. / by Sir John Narborough, Captain Jasmen Tasman, Captain John Wood, and Frederick Marten of Hamburgh ; to which are annexed a large introduction and supplement, giving an account of other navigations to those regions of the globe, the whole illustrated with charts and figures.
      
       
         
           1694
        
      
       Approx. 727 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 269 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images.
       
         Text Creation Partnership,
         Ann Arbor, MI ; Oxford (UK) :
         2006-06 (EEBO-TCP Phase 1).
         A52618
         Wing N154
         ESTC R18669
         12040160
         ocm 12040160
         52975
         
           
            This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of
             Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal
            . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission.
          
        
      
       
         Early English books online.
      
       
         (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A52618)
         Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 52975)
         Images scanned from microfilm: (Early English books, 1641-1700 ; 572:1)
      
       
         
           
             An account of several late voyages & discoveries to the south and north towards the Streights of Magellan, the South Seas, the vast tracts of land beyond Hollandia Nova &c. : also towards Nova Zembla, Greenland or Spitsberg, Groynland or Engrondland, &c. / by Sir John Narborough, Captain Jasmen Tasman, Captain John Wood, and Frederick Marten of Hamburgh ; to which are annexed a large introduction and supplement, giving an account of other navigations to those regions of the globe, the whole illustrated with charts and figures.
             Narbrough, John, Sir, 1640-1688.
             Tasman, Abel Janszoon, 1603?-1659.
             Wood, John, Captain.
             Martens, Friedrich, 1635-1699.
             Robinson, Tancred, Sir, d. 1748.
          
           2 pts. (xxix, [7], 196; 207 p., 19 leaves of plates (7 folded)) : 2 folded maps.
           
             Printed for Sam Smith and Benj. Walford ...,
             London :
             1694.
          
           
             Probably edited by Tancred Robinson. Cf. DNB and E.G. Cox, Reference guide to the lit. of travel, v. 1, p. 8-9.
             Reproduction of original in British Library.
          
        
      
    
     
       
         Created by converting TCP files to TEI P5 using tcp2tei.xsl, TEI @ Oxford.
         Re-processed by University of Nebraska-Lincoln and Northwestern, with changes to facilitate morpho-syntactic tagging. Gap elements of known extent have been transformed into placeholder characters or elements to simplify the filling in of gaps by user contributors.
      
       
         EEBO-TCP is a partnership between the Universities of Michigan and Oxford and the publisher ProQuest to create accurately transcribed and encoded texts based on the image sets published by ProQuest via their Early English Books Online (EEBO) database (http://eebo.chadwyck.com). The general aim of EEBO-TCP is to encode one copy (usually the first edition) of every monographic English-language title published between 1473 and 1700 available in EEBO.
         EEBO-TCP aimed to produce large quantities of textual data within the usual project restraints of time and funding, and therefore chose to create diplomatic transcriptions (as opposed to critical editions) with light-touch, mainly structural encoding based on the Text Encoding Initiative (http://www.tei-c.org).
         The EEBO-TCP project was divided into two phases. The 25,363 texts created during Phase 1 of the project have been released into the public domain as of 1 January 2015. Anyone can now take and use these texts for their own purposes, but we respectfully request that due credit and attribution is given to their original source.
         Users should be aware of the process of creating the TCP texts, and therefore of any assumptions that can be made about the data.
         Text selection was based on the New Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature (NCBEL). If an author (or for an anonymous work, the title) appears in NCBEL, then their works are eligible for inclusion. Selection was intended to range over a wide variety of subject areas, to reflect the true nature of the print record of the period. In general, first editions of a works in English were prioritized, although there are a number of works in other languages, notably Latin and Welsh, included and sometimes a second or later edition of a work was chosen if there was a compelling reason to do so.
         Image sets were sent to external keying companies for transcription and basic encoding. Quality assurance was then carried out by editorial teams in Oxford and Michigan. 5% (or 5 pages, whichever is the greater) of each text was proofread for accuracy and those which did not meet QA standards were returned to the keyers to be redone. After proofreading, the encoding was enhanced and/or corrected and characters marked as illegible were corrected where possible up to a limit of 100 instances per text. Any remaining illegibles were encoded as <gap>s. Understanding these processes should make clear that, while the overall quality of TCP data is very good, some errors will remain and some readable characters will be marked as illegible. Users should bear in mind that in all likelihood such instances will never have been looked at by a TCP editor.
         The texts were encoded and linked to page images in accordance with level 4 of the TEI in Libraries guidelines.
         Copies of the texts have been issued variously as SGML (TCP schema; ASCII text with mnemonic sdata character entities); displayable XML (TCP schema; characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or text strings within braces); or lossless XML (TEI P5, characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or TEI g elements).
         
          Keying and markup guidelines are available at the
           Text Creation Partnership web site
          .
        
      
       
         
         
      
    
     
       
         eng
      
       
         
           Voyages and travels.
           Magellan, Strait of (Chile and Argentina)
           Spitsbergen Island (Norway) -- Description and travel -- Early works to 1800.
        
      
    
     
        2005-09 TCP
        Assigned for keying and markup
      
        2005-10 Aptara
        Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images
      
        2006-01 Mona Logarbo
        Sampled and proofread
      
        2006-01 Mona Logarbo
        Text and markup reviewed and edited
      
        2006-04 pfs
        Batch review (QC) and XML conversion
      
    
  
   
     
       
         
         
         
           AN
           ACCOUNT
           Of
           Several
           LATE
           Voyages
           &
           Discoveries
           TO
           THE
           SOVTH
           and
           NORTH
           .
        
         
           TOWARDS
           The
           Streights
           of
           Magellan
           ,
           the
           
             South
             Seas
          
           ,
           the
           vast
           Tracts
           of
           Land
           beyond
           
             Hollandia
             Nova
          
           ,
           &c.
           
           ALSO
           Towards
           
             Nova
             Zembla
             ,
             Greenland
          
           or
           
             Spitsberg
             ,
             Groynland
          
           or
           Engrondland
           ,
           &c.
           
        
         
           BY
           Sir
           JOHN
           NARBOROUGH
           ,
           Captain
           JASMEN
           TASMAN
           ,
           Captain
           JOHN
           WOOD
           ,
           and
           FREDERICK
           MARTEN
           of
           Hamburgh
           .
        
         
           To
           which
           are
           Annexed
           a
           LARGE
           Introduction
           and
           Supplement
           ,
           GIVING
           An
           Account
           of
           other
           NAVIGATIONS
           to
           those
           Regions
           of
           the
           GLOBE
           .
        
         
           The
           Whole
           Illustrated
           with
           CHARTS
           and
           FIGURES
           .
        
         
           London
           :
           Printed
           for
           
             Sam.
             Smith
          
           and
           
             Benj.
             Walford
          
           ,
           Printers
           to
           the
           
             Royal
             Society
          
           ,
           at
           the
           
             Prince's
             Arms
          
           in
           S.
           
           Paul's
           Churchyard
           ,
           1694.
           
        
      
       
         
         
         
           To
           the
           Honourable
           SAMUEL
           PEPYS
           ,
           
             Esq
          
           SECRETARY
           OF
           THE
           Admiralty
           of
           England
           ,
           TO
           K.
           CHARLES
           and
           K.
           JAMES
           II.
           
        
         
           
             SIR
             ,
          
        
         
           THE
           Design
           of
           this
           Dedication
           is
           neither
           to
           flatter
           ,
           nor
           to
           beg
           ;
           but
           barely
           to
           present
           you
           with
           a
           simple
           and
           hearty
           Acknowledgment
           of
           your
           Kindness
           and
           Generosity
           to
           the
           Publick
           ,
           in
           communicating
           your
           exact
           Memorials
           ,
           in
           advancing
           the
           Progress
           of
           Useful
           Knowledge
           ,
           and
           encouraging
           Men
           of
           Letters
           ,
           or
           Invention
           :
           which
           Noble
           Endowments
           of
           
           Mind
           render'd
           you
           most
           Worthy
           of
           those
           High
           Stations
           ,
           wherein
           you
           have
           been
           Eminent
           ,
           as
           well
           in
           the
           Chair
           of
           Philosophy
           ,
           as
           Navigation
           ;
           and
           the
           same
           will
           preserve
           you
           through
           all
           Ages
           in
           the
           good
           Esteem
           of
           the
           best
           part
           of
           Mankind
           .
           No
           Revolution
           ,
           no
           Storm
           ,
           no
           Time
           ,
           can
           shake
           such
           Foundations
           .
        
         
           
             Monumentum
             Aere
             perennius
             .
          
        
         
           
             Sir
             ,
          
           
             Your
             most
             devoted
             Servants
             ,
             
               
                 Samuel
                 Smith
                 ,
              
               
                 Benjamin
                 Walford
                 .
              
            
          
        
      
       
         
         
           THE
           BOOKSELLER's
           PREFACE
           ,
           OR
           INTRODUCTION
           .
        
         
           
             THE
             Advantages
             of
             taking
             judicious
             and
             accurate
             Journals
             in
             Voyages
             and
             Itineraries
             ,
             are
             so
             great
             and
             many
             ,
             as
             the
             Improvements
             of
          
           Geography
           ,
           Hydrography
           ,
           Astronomy
           ,
           Natural
           and
           Moral
           History
           ,
           Antiquity
           ,
           Merchandise
           ,
           Trade
           ,
           Empire
           ,
           
             &c.
             that
             few
             Books
             can
             compare
             with
             them
             either
             for
             Profit
             or
             Pleasure
             .
             Therefore
          
           Ramusio
           ,
           the
           De
           Brys
           ,
           Hackluit
           ,
           Purchas
           ,
           John
           de
           Laet
           ,
           Thevenot
           ,
           
             &c.
             have
             begun
             a
             very
             commendable
             Design
             ,
             and
             their
             Works
             are
             like
             to
             be
             always
             useful
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Collection
             now
             published
             ,
             containing
             some
             curious
             Voyages
             ,
             and
             accurate
             Journals
             ,
             never
             before
             printed
             ,
             both
             towards
             the
          
           South
           and
           North
           ,
           
             beyond
             and
             through
             the
          
           Magellan
           Streights
           ;
           
             as
             also
             to
          
           Greenland
           or
           Spitsberg
           ,
           Nova
           Zembla
           ,
           and
           Groneland
           or
           Groyneland
           .
           
             'T
             will
             be
             necessary
             to
             
             premise
             in
             general
             ,
             what
             other
          
           Navigators
           
             have
             gone
             before
             to
             those
             parts
             ,
             and
             what
             additional
             Knowledge
             may
             be
             reap'd
             from
             the
          
           ensuing
           Work
           ;
           
             in
             doing
             of
             which
             ,
             we
             shall
             observe
             Order
             of
          
           Place
           and
           Time.
           
        
         
           
             First
             of
             some
             Discoveries
             and
             Navigations
             towards
             the
             Southern
             Parts
             of
             the
             Globe
             ,
          
           South-West
           and
           South-East
           .
        
         
           A.
           D.
           1519.
           
           Ferdinand
           Magalianes
           ,
           a
           Portuguese
           
             Gentleman
             ,
             upon
             some
             disgust
             taken
             at
             his
             Master
             King
          
           Emanuel
           ,
           
             applied
             himself
             to
             the
             Court
             of
          
           Castile
           ,
           
             offering
             to
             make
             great
             Discoveries
             of
             the
             rich
          
           Spice-Islands
           
             by
             the
             West
             ,
             and
             to
             sail
             round
             the
             Globe
             .
             He
             was
             furnish'd
             with
             five
             Ships
             and
             250
             Men
             ,
             by
             the
             Command
             of
          
           Charles
           V.
           
             They
             departed
             from
          
           Sevil
           
             August
             10.
             1519.
             and
             after
             having
             in
             vain
             attempted
             to
             pass
             through
             by
             the
             great
             River
          
           La
           Plate
           ,
           
             and
             having
             winter'd
             in
          
           Port
           S.
           Julian
           ,
           
             they
             found
             out
             a
             great
          
           Streight
           
             leading
             into
             the
             South
             Sea
             ,
             called
             afterwards
             ,
             by
             the
             Inventor's
             Name
             ,
             the
          
           Magellan
           Streight
           ;
           
             through
             which
             he
             was
             the
             first
             that
             passed
             from
             the
          
           Atlantick
           
             into
             the
          
           Pacifick
           Ocean
           ,
           
             and
             so
             round
             the
             Globe
             home
             again
             by
             the
          
           Molucco
           '
           
             s
             and
          
           Cape
           of
           Good
           Hope
           ,
           
             having
             spent
             above
             three
             years
             in
             this
             Circumnavigation
             .
             Entring
             the
             Streight
             of
             his
             own
             Name
             ,
             he
             found
             on
             the
             Shoar
             many
             Sepulchres
             or
             Graves
             ,
             whither
             the
             Inhabitants
             resort
             in
             the
             Summer
             time
             to
             bury
             their
             Dead
             ;
             he
             also
             observ'd
             a
             great
             Whale
             thrown
             up
             ,
             and
             many
             Bones
             .
          
        
         
           Anno
           Dom.
           1525.
           
           Garcias
           de
           Loyasa
           a
           Spaniard
           ,
           
             entred
             into
          
           Magellan's
           Streight
           ,
           
             and
             gave
             Names
             to
             several
             Places
             ;
             as
             did
             also
          
           Simon
           de
           Alcazova
           
             in
             the
             year
          
           1534.
           
           
             Afterwards
             the
             Bishop
             of
          
           Placentia
           
             fitted
             out
             three
             Ships
             ,
             in
             the
             Year
             1539
             ,
             
             one
             of
             which
             got
             through
             the
             Streights
             of
          
           Magellan
           to
           Arica
           in
           Peru.
           
        
         
           Anno
           Dom.
           1577.
           
           Sir
           Francis
           Drake
           ,
           
             with
             five
             Ships
             and
             Barks
             ,
             and
             I64
             Men
             ,
             began
             his
             Famous
             Voyage
             round
             the
             Globe
             ;
             sailing
             through
             the
             aforementioned
             Streight
             of
          
           Magellan
           
             to
             the
             Coasts
             of
          
           Peru
           ,
           New
           Spain
           ,
           Mexico
           ,
           and
           California
           ;
           
             returning
             to
          
           England
           ,
           
             by
             the
          
           East
           Indies
           ,
           and
           Cape
           of
           Good
           Hope
           .
           Captain
           John
           Winter
           
             was
             separated
             from
             Sir
          
           Francis
           
             upon
             their
             Entrance
             into
             the
          
           South
           Sea
           ,
           
             and
             by
             Storms
             was
             forced
             back
             again
             into
             the
             Streights
             of
          
           Magellan
           ,
           
             through
             which
             he
             repassed
             home
             ,
             being
             the
             first
             that
             sailed
             from
             the
          
           Pacifick
           
             into
             the
          
           Atlantick
           Ocean
           ,
           
             through
             these
             Streights
          
           .
           Ladriller
           ,
           a
           Spaniard
           ,
           
             being
             sent
             from
          
           Chili
           ,
           
             to
             attempt
             this
             passage
             ,
             was
             driven
             back
             by
             Storms
             and
             the
             approach
             of
             Winter
             .
          
           Anno
           1579.
           
             the
             Viceroy
             of
          
           Peru
           ,
           
             thinking
             that
             Sir
          
           Francis
           Drake
           
             was
             sailed
             to
             the
          
           Magellan
           Streights
           ,
           equipt
           Don
           Sarmiento
           
             in
             the
             Port
             of
          
           Lima
           
             with
             two
             Ships
             to
             pursue
             him
             .
             This
          
           Spaniard
           coasted
           Chili
           and
           Patagonia
           ,
           
             entring
             the
          
           Streights
           ,
           
             and
             so
             passed
             to
          
           Brasil
           .
           Sarmiento
           
             upon
             his
             return
             to
          
           Spain
           ,
           
             perswaded
             ▪
          
           Philip
           II
           ,
           
             to
             send
             two
             Colonies
             to
             plant
             and
             fortifie
             in
             the
          
           Streights
           of
           Magellan
           ,
           
             in
             order
             to
             prevent
             and
             obstruct
             the
             Navigations
             ,
             Depredations
             ,
             or
             Settlements
             of
             the
          
           English
           and
           Dutch
           
             in
             those
             parts
             ;
             but
             they
             all
             miscarried
             partly
             by
             Shipwrack
             ,
             partly
             by
             Famine
             ,
             and
             the
             Barbarities
             of
             the
          
           Patagons
           .
           
             This
             happened
             in
             the
             years
          
           1584
           ,
           1585
           ,
           1586.
           
           
             The
             Project
             was
             contrary
             to
             the
             Advice
             of
             the
          
           Duke
           of
           Alva
           .
        
         
         
           Sir
           Francis
           ,
           
             in
             the
          
           Magellan
           Streight
           ,
           
             saw
             several
             of
             the
          
           Patagons
           ,
           
             or
             Inhabitants
             ,
             in
             their
             Canoes
             and
             Huts
             ;
             their
             Boats
             were
             made
             of
             the
             Barks
             of
             Trees
             and
             Seal
             Skins
             very
             artificially
             interwoven
             ,
             the
             Head
             whereof
             was
             semilunar
             .
             They
             painted
             their
             Faces
             either
             with
             an
             Earth
             or
             a
             Vegetable
             .
             In
             their
             Huts
             ,
             made
             of
             Boughs
             and
             Skins
             of
             Fishes
             ,
             he
             found
          
           Sea-Wolves
           
             and
             huge
             Muscles
             ,
             whose
             Shells
             they
             sharpen
             so
             with
             rubbing
             of
             Stones
             ,
             that
             they
             cut
             every
             thing
             with
             them
             .
             Their
             Fresh
             Water
             was
             kept
             in
             Vessels
             made
             of
             the
             Barks
             of
             Trees
             ,
             and
             their
             Vestments
             were
             chiefly
             made
             up
             of
             the
             Skins
             of
          
           Penguins
           ,
           Seals
           ,
           
             and
             other
             Animals
             peculiar
             to
             the
             Climate
             .
          
        
         
           Anno
           Dom.
           1586.
           
           
             The
             third
             Circumnavigation
             of
             the
             Globe
             was
             undertaken
             and
             performed
             by
          
           Thomas
           Candish
           
             
               Esq
            
             who
             very
             prosperously
             finish'd
             that
             in
             two
             Years
             and
             two
             Months
             ,
             which
             took
             both
          
           Magellanus
           
             and
             Sir
          
           Francis
           Drake
           
             three
             years
             in
             compassing
          
           .
        
         
           Anno
           1593.
           
           Sir
           Richard
           Hawkins
           
             made
             his
             Voyage
             into
             the
          
           South
           Sea
           
             by
             the
             same
             Sreight
             that
             the
             aforementioned
             Navigators
             did
             before
             him
             .
             He
             gives
             the
             most
             accurate
             Description
             of
             the
             Tree
             that
             bears
             the
             famous
          
           Winter-bark
           ,
           
             see
             his
          
           Observations
           in
           fol.
           Printed
           1622.
           pag.
           88.
           
           This
           Spicy
           Aromatick
           Tree
           
             (
             says
             he
          
           )
           bears
           Leaves
           of
           a
           whitish
           Green
           ,
           not
           unlike
           the
           Aspen
           ;
           and
           bears
           its
           Fruit
           in
           Clusters
           like
           the
           Hawthorn
           ,
           but
           that
           it
           is
           green
           ;
           each
           Berry
           of
           the
           bigness
           of
           a
           Pepper-corn
           ,
           and
           every
           one
           of
           them
           containing
           within
           four
           or
           five
           Grains
           or
           Seeds
           ,
           twice
           as
           big
           as
           Mustard
           Seed
           ,
           which
           broken
           are
           white
           within
           and
           bite
           like
           the
           good
           Pepper
           ;
           the
           Bark
           hath
           the
           
           Taste
           of
           all
           Sorts
           of
           Spices
           ,
           very
           Stomachick
           and
           Medicinal
           .
           We
           found
           it
           in
           all
           places
           of
           the
           Streights
           where
           any
           Trees
           grew
           .
           Here
           are
           abundance
           of
           Muscles
           ,
           very
           refreshing
           Diet
           and
           full
           of
           Pearl
           ;
           also
           Limpets
           ,
           and
           incredible
           Numbers
           of
           Penguins
           and
           Seals
           .
        
         
           Anno
           Dom.
           1598.
           
           
             The
             Fourth
             Circumnavigation
             of
             the
             Globe
             was
             performed
             by
          
           Oliver
           Noort
           a
           Dutchman
           ,
           
             his
             chief
             Pilot
             being
             Captain
          
           Melis
           an
           Englishman
           ,
           
             who
             had
             accompanied
             Mr.
          
           Candish
           
             in
             his
             Voyage
             .
             This
          
           Noort
           
             steer'd
             much
             the
             same
             Course
             with
          
           Magalianes
           ,
           Drake
           ,
           and
           Candish
           ,
           
             having
             spent
             near
             three
             years
             in
             encompassing
             the
             Earth
             .
             He
             saw
             ,
             upon
             the
             Land
             of
          
           Patagonia
           ,
           
             some
             Deer
             ,
             a
             sort
             of
          
           Bufalo
           ,
           and
           Ostriches
           .
        
         
           
             We
             may
             note
             here
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             Year
          
           1589
           ,
           the
           Delight
           of
           Bristol
           ,
           
             one
             of
             the
             Consorts
             of
          
           John
           Chidley
           
             
               Esq
            
             and
             Mr.
          
           Paul
           Wheel
           ,
           
             got
             into
             the
             Streights
          
           of
           Magellan
           ;
           
             but
             meeting
             with
             Misfortunes
             ,
             was
             forced
             back
             ,
             having
             reach'd
             only
          
           Cape
           Froward
           .
           
             Also
             in
             the
             year
             1598.
          
           
           Verhagen
           '
           
             s
             Fleet
             ,
             under
             Sir
          
           James
           Mahu
           ,
           Simon
           de
           Cordes
           ,
           Sebald
           de
           Wert
           ,
           
             &c.
             wherein
          
           William
           Adams
           ,
           
             was
             chief
             Pilot
             ,
             suffered
             great
             Miseries
             in
             these
             Streights
             .
             This
          
           Sebald
           de
           Wert
           gave
           Clusius
           
             a
             description
             of
             the
             Winter-bark-Tree
             growing
             up
             and
             down
          
           Patagonia
           .
           
             They
             preserv'd
             themselves
             mith
          
           Geese
           ,
           Ducks
           ,
           
             vast
             large
          
           Muscles
           ,
           Penguins
           ,
           Seals
           ,
           
             &c.
             
             Returning
             out
             of
             the
             Streight
             ,
             and
             sailing
             Southwards
             they
             discovered
          
           Sebald's
           Isles
           .
        
         
           Anno
           Dom.
           1614.
           
           George
           Spilbergen
           
             General
             of
             a
          
           Dutch
           
             Fleet
             of
             six
             Ships
             ,
             passed
             through
             the
             Streights
             of
          
           Magellan
           
             and
             the
          
           South
           Sea
           
             to
             the
          
           
           East
           Indies
           ,
           from
           whence
           he
           returned
           by
           the
           
             Cape
             of
             Good
             Hope
          
           to
           the
           Texel
           ,
           having
           been
           out
           about
           three
           years
           .
           This
           was
           the
           Fifth
           Circumnavigation
           of
           the
           Globe
           .
        
         
           
             Ann.
             Don.
             1609
             ,
             1610.
             
             Pedro
             Fernandez
             Giros
          
           a
           Portuguese
           ,
           and
           Captain
           
             Ferdinand
             de
             Quir
          
           a
           Spaniard
           ,
           do
           both
           affirm
           ,
           That
           they
           sailed
           at
           several
           times
           above
           800
           Leagues
           together
           on
           the
           Coast
           of
           a
           
             Southern
             Continent
          
           ,
           until
           they
           came
           to
           the
           height
           of
           15
           degrees
           of
           
             South
             Latitude
          
           ,
           where
           they
           found
           a
           very
           fruitful
           ,
           pleasant
           ,
           and
           populous
           Country
           .
           Giros
           began
           to
           take
           his
           Course
           in
           the
           height
           of
           the
           Streights
           of
           Magellan
           .
           This
           vast
           Tract
           of
           Land
           perhaps
           may
           be
           one
           side
           of
           ,
           or
           may
           belong
           to
           ,
           
             Jansen
             Tasmen's
             Land
             ,
             Van
             Diemen's
             Land
             ,
             Zelandia
             Nova
             ,
             Hollandia
             Nova
             ,
             Carpentaria
             ,
          
           and
           
             New
             Guiney
          
           ;
           which
           the
           Dutch
           afterwards
           coasted
           ,
           detected
           ,
           and
           gave
           Names
           to
           many
           Bays
           ,
           Rivers
           and
           Capes
           ,
           in
           the
           Years
           1619
           ,
           1622,1627
           ,
           1628
           ,
           1642
           ,
           and
           1644.
           from
           the
           Equinoctial
           to
           44
           deg
           .
           
             South
             Lat.
          
           
        
         
           The
           Hollanders
           have
           indeed
           made
           the
           greatest
           Discoveries
           towards
           the
           South
           
             Terra
             Incognita
          
           ,
           which
           they
           have
           not
           yet
           divulg'd
           .
           
             Dirk
             Rembrantse
          
           about
           15
           or
           16
           years
           ago
           published
           ,
           in
           
             Low
             Dutch
          
           ,
           a
           short
           Relation
           out
           of
           the
           Journal
           of
           Captain
           
             Abel
             Jensen
             Tasmen
          
           upon
           his
           Discoveries
           of
           the
           South
           
             Terra
             Incognita
          
           in
           the
           year
           1642
           ,
           to
           the
           Southward
           of
           
             Nova
             Hollandia
             ,
             Vandemen's
             Land
          
           ,
           &c.
           
           'T
           is
           remarkable
           that
           all
           the
           Circumnavigators
           of
           the
           Globe
           enter'd
           into
           the
           
             East
             Indies
          
           ,
           either
           by
           the
           Philippines
           or
           the
           Molucco's
           ,
           being
           peradventure
           hindred
           from
           passing
           round
           more
           Southwards
           by
           that
           
           vast
           long
           Chain
           of
           Land
           ,
           which
           seems
           to
           stretch
           almost
           from
           the
           Equinosctial
           to
           the
           50
           degree
           of
           
             South
             Lat.
          
           Therefore
           they
           generally
           steer'd
           upon
           the
           
             South
             Sea
          
           ,
           either
           for
           the
           
             Isles
             of
             Salomon
          
           ,
           or
           those
           called
           the
           Ladrones
           .
        
         
           
             Anno
             Dom.
             1615.
             
             Will.
             Cornelius
             Schouten
          
           of
           Horn
           ,
           and
           
             Jacob
             le
             Maire
          
           of
           Amsterdam
           ,
           undertook
           the
           Sixth
           Circumnavigation
           of
           the
           Globe
           ,
           by
           a
           new
           Passage
           Southwards
           from
           the
           Streights
           of
           Magellan
           in
           
             Terra
             del
             Fuogo
          
           ,
           which
           they
           happily
           discovered
           and
           passed
           ,
           finding
           out
           
             Sebald's-Isles
             ,
             Staten-Land
             ,
             Maurice-Land
             ,
             Barnevelt-Isles
             ,
          
           and
           so
           by
           
             Cape
             Horn
          
           ,
           in
           the
           57deg
           .
           of
           
             S.
             Lat.
          
           they
           found
           out
           a
           new
           way
           into
           the
           
             South
             Sea
          
           ;
           called
           ever
           since
           
             Le
             Maire's
             Streight
          
           ,
           in
           this
           Voyage
           they
           gave
           Names
           to
           several
           Islands
           and
           Countries
           ,
           returning
           to
           Holland
           by
           the
           
             East
             Indies
          
           ,
           having
           been
           out
           two
           years
           and
           Eighteen
           days
           .
           Aftewards
           a
           
             Spnish
             Fleet
          
           ,
           under
           
             Bartolemeo
             Garcias
             de
             Nodal
             ,
             Anno
          
           1618.
           sailed
           through
           
             Le
             Maire's
             Passage
          
           :
           and
           in
           the
           year
           1623.
           part
           of
           
             Prince
             Maurice
          
           his
           Fleet
           steered
           the
           same
           Course
           ,
           discovering
           some
           small
           Isles
           .
           Nodal
           saw
           People
           near
           
             Le
             Maire's
             Streight
          
           ,
           all
           painted
           and
           clad
           with
           Birds
           Skins
           ;
           they
           fed
           upon
           yellow
           Flowers
           like
           Marigolds
           .
        
         
           
             Anno
             1643.
             
             Brewer
          
           ,
           or
           Brower
           ,
           went
           another
           way
           into
           the
           
             South
             Sea
          
           ,
           by
           a
           Passage
           called
           after
           his
           own
           Name
           ,
           which
           is
           east
           of
           
             Le
             Maire's
             Streight
          
           ;
           but
           whether
           Brewer
           went
           through
           a
           New
           Streight
           with
           Land
           on
           each
           side
           ,
           or
           had
           a
           wide
           Sea
           on
           the
           East
           we
           cannot
           inform
           you
           ,
           having
           never
           seen
           the
           Diary
           of
           his
           Voyage
           :
           but
           most
           Maps
           make
           it
           a
           new
           Streight
           ,
           the
           perhaps
           he
           might
           sail
           near
           the
           same
           
           Course
           which
           Captain
           Sharp
           afterwards
           did
           ;
           they
           who
           have
           his
           Voyage
           may
           soon
           determine
           this
           Doubt
           .
        
         
           The
           Southern
           part
           of
           
             Terra
             Magellanica
          
           ,
           commonly
           called
           
             Terra
             del
             Fuego
          
           ,
           from
           the
           great
           Fires
           seen
           upon
           it
           by
           the
           Sailors
           ;
           seems
           ,
           by
           the
           Observations
           of
           the
           Dutch
           ,
           to
           be
           divided
           into
           many
           Isles
           and
           Streights
           leading
           into
           both
           Seas
           .
           The
           Country
           appears
           mountainous
           ,
           with
           fair
           and
           green
           Vallies
           ,
           Springs
           ,
           Rivulets
           ,
           and
           much
           Herbage
           .
           The
           Creeks
           are
           fit
           for
           Shipping
           ,
           Water
           and
           Wood
           being
           plentiful
           .
           The
           Air
           is
           tempestuous
           from
           the
           vast
           quantity
           of
           Vapours
           from
           both
           Oceans
           .
           The
           Natives
           paint
           their
           Bodies
           ,
           and
           deck
           themselves
           with
           Shells
           and
           Skins
           .
           They
           make
           their
           Baskets
           and
           Nets
           of
           Rushes
           ,
           out
           of
           which
           they
           twist
           Lines
           ,
           and
           hanging
           Hooks
           made
           of
           Stone
           ,
           and
           baited
           with
           Muscles
           ,
           they
           take
           abundance
           of
           Fish
           .
           Their
           Knives
           are
           made
           of
           sharpened
           Bones
           ,
           and
           all
           their
           Arrows
           are
           armed
           with
           them
           .
           Their
           Canoes
           are
           like
           the
           
             Venetian
             Gondola's
          
           .
           For
           the
           Description
           of
           the
           Northern
           part
           of
           
             Terra
             Magellanica
          
           ,
           commonly
           called
           Patagonia
           ,
           we
           refer
           the
           Reader
           to
           Sir
           John
           Narbrough's
           Journal
           ,
           printed
           at
           the
           beginning
           of
           this
           Collection
           .
        
         
           
             Anno
             1669.
             
             His
             Majesty
          
           of
           
             Great
             Britain
             ,
             His
             Royal
             Highness
          
           the
           Duke
           of
           York
           ,
           and
           seveothers
           of
           the
           Nobility
           ,
           design'd
           a
           better
           Discovery
           of
           Chili
           ;
           in
           order
           whereunto
           two
           Ships
           were
           sent
           out
           under
           the
           Conduct
           of
           that
           great
           Navigator
           and
           worthy
           Commander
           Sir
           
             John
             Narbrough
          
           ,
           who
           returned
           
             June
             1671
          
           ,
           having
           been
           out
           above
           two
           years
           ,
           passing
           and
           repassing
           the
           Streights
           of
           Magellan
           ,
           and
           coasting
           Patagonia
           and
           Chili
           .
           His
           Observations
           and
           Draughts
           are
           the
           most
           judicious
           and
           exact
           of
           of
           any
           that
           went
           before
           him
           .
        
         
         
           Anno
           1680.
           and
           1681.
           
           Captain
           Sharp
           made
           many
           bold
           Adventures
           on
           several
           Islands
           and
           Coasts
           in
           the
           
             South
             Sea.
          
           In
           his
           return
           ,
           he
           being
           quite
           out
           of
           all
           hopes
           of
           recovering
           the
           Streights
           of
           Magellan
           ,
           or
           those
           of
           
             Le
             Maire
          
           or
           Brewer
           ,
           was
           forced
           to
           seek
           for
           a
           Passage
           farther
           South
           than
           by
           
             Cape
             Horn
          
           ;
           he
           went
           to
           about
           60
           deg
           .
           
             South
             Lat.
          
           meeting
           with
           many
           Islands
           of
           Ice
           ,
           Snow
           ,
           Frosts
           and
           Whales
           ,
           departing
           from
           a
           small
           Place
           ,
           named
           by
           him
           the
           
             Duke
             of
             York's
             Island
          
           ,
           in
           the
           
             South
             Sea
          
           ,
           he
           steered
           near
           800
           Leagues
           to
           the
           Eastward
           ,
           and
           afterwards
           as
           many
           to
           the
           Westward
           .
           The
           first
           Land
           he
           saw
           in
           those
           three
           Months
           was
           the
           
             Island
             of
             Barbadoes
          
           ;
           so
           that
           Land
           in
           the
           Streight
           of
           
             Le
             Maire
          
           ,
           and
           in
           
             Brewer's
             Passage
          
           ,
           must
           be
           Islands
           ,
           and
           not
           join'd
           to
           any
           great
           
             Southern
             Continent
          
           ,
           as
           suppos'd
           by
           some
           :
        
         
           Since
           these
           Attemps
           and
           Undertakings
           ,
           several
           English
           Ships
           have
           passed
           into
           the
           
             South
             Sea
          
           both
           by
           the
           Streights
           of
           Magellan
           ,
           and
           by
           the
           South
           of
           
             Cape
             Horn
          
           ;
           but
           what
           Trade
           they
           manage
           in
           those
           Parts
           ,
           or
           what
           Discoveries
           they
           have
           made
           ,
           or
           what
           Articles
           and
           Treaty
           they
           are
           engaged
           in
           with
           the
           Spaniard
           ,
           we
           cannot
           inform
           the
           Reader
           ,
           being
           no
           Merchants
           our selves
           ,
           nor
           having
           seen
           any
           Journals
           or
           Voyages
           of
           those
           Quarters
           of
           the
           World
           ,
           besides
           those
           before-mentioned
           .
        
         
           
             In
             these
             Navigations
             to
             the
             Streights
             of
          
           Magellan
           ,
           
             through
             the
          
           South
           Sea
           ,
           
             and
             by
             the
          
           East
           Indies
           
             home
             again
             ,
             the
             Common
             things
             noted
             in
             the
             several
             Voyages
             ,
             (
             beside
             the
          
           Winds
           ,
           Longitudes
           ,
           Latitudes
           ,
           Variations
           of
           the
           Compass
           ,
           Tydes
           ,
           Soundings
           ,
           &c.
           )
           are
           Flying
           Fishes
           ,
           Dolphins
           ,
           Albacores
           ,
           Bonito's
           ,
           Sharks
           ,
           Tropick
           Birds
           ;
           The
           Sea
           Weeds
           
           called
           Sargasso
           and
           Tromba
           ;
           the
           Aromatick
           Tree
           bearing
           Winter's
           Spicy
           Bark
           ;
           Guanico's
           or
           Indian
           Sheep
           ,
           a
           Species
           
             of
             small
          
           Camels
           ;
           
             Infinite
             Numbers
             of
          
           Penguins
           ,
           Seals
           ,
           Muscles
           ,
           Whales
           ,
           Ostriches
           ,
           
             &c.
             
             These
             observed
             in
             sailing
             to
             and
             through
             the
             Streights
             of
          
           Magellan
           ,
           
             by
             the
             several
             Navigators
             aforementioned
          
           .
        
         
           
             In
             the
          
           Islands
           
             on
             the
          
           South
           Sea
           ,
           Coco-trees
           ,
           Plantanes
           ,
           Bonana's
           ,
           Pine
           Apples
           ,
           Indian
           Figs
           ,
           Limes
           ,
           Hogs
           
             with
             Scent-bags
             on
             their
             Backs
             ,
             a
             sort
             of
          
           Coney
           ,
           Monkeys
           ,
           Goats
           ,
           Turtle
           ,
           Almonds
           
             of
             four
             sorts
          
           ,
           Sugar
           Canes
           ,
           Oysters
           
             on
             Trees
          
           ,
           &c.
           
        
         
           
             Entring
             upon
             the
          
           Molucco's
           Nutmeg
           Trees
           with
           Mace
           ,
           Clove
           Trees
           ,
           Birds
           of
           Paradise
           ,
           
             and
             great
          
           Heats
           .
        
         
           
             On
             the
             Islands
          
           of
           Java
           ,
           Sumatra
           and
           Borneo
           ,
           the
           Faufel
           Palm
           or
           Arek
           ,
           Pepper
           Shrubs
           ,
           Betele
           Shrubs
           ,
           Jacks
           ,
           Mango's
           ,
           Durio's
           ,
           Cajou's
           ,
           Jambo's
           ,
           Papaio's
           ,
           Arbor
           Rays
           ,
           Arbor
           Tristis
           ,
           Bambou's
           ,
           Ginger
           ,
           Cardamums
           ,
           Lacca
           Trees
           ,
           Benzoin
           Trees
           ,
           Camphire
           Trees
           ,
           Tamarinds
           ,
           Cassia
           ,
           Mirobolanes
           ,
           Cubebs
           ,
           Costus
           ,
           Galanga
           ,
           Bangue
           ,
           Dutroy
           ,
           Snake-wood
           ,
           Calambac
           ,
           Lignum
           Aloës
           ,
           &c.
           
        
         
           
             Towards
             the
             Gulf
             of
          
           Bengal
           ,
           Elephants
           ,
           Rhinocerots
           ,
           Lions
           ,
           Tygers
           ,
           Crocodiles
           ,
           
             &c.
             Upon
          
           the
           Maldives
           and
           Ceylon
           ,
           Maldiva
           Nuts
           floating
           ,
           Woods
           of
           Cinamon
           Trees
           ,
           Oranges
           ,
           Limons
           ,
           
             Plantations
             of
          
           Rice
           ,
           
             great
             Varieties
             of
          
           Palms
           ,
           &c.
           
        
         
           
             At
             the
          
           Cape
           of
           Good
           Hope
           ,
           Hippopotami
           ,
           Zebra's
           ,
           Gazells
           ,
           Jacalls
           ,
           Flammants
           ,
           Penguins
           ,
           
           Pelicans
           ,
           Ostriches
           ,
           Cassowares
           ,
           
             vast
             numbers
             of
          
           Divers
           ,
           Duckers
           ,
           
             and
             other
          
           Sea
           Birds
           ,
           
             great
             Varieties
             of
          
           Crustaceous
           and
           Testaceous
           Animals
           ,
           of
           Lizards
           ,
           Serpents
           ,
           &c.
           
        
         
           
             At
             the
          
           Canary
           Islands
           ,
           several
           Vulcano's
           ,
           Brimstone
           ,
           the
           Fountain
           Tree
           in
           Ferro
           ,
           the
           Rhodium
           Plant
           ,
           Euphorbium
           ,
           Dates
           ,
           Gum
           Dragon
           Trees
           ,
           &c.
           
        
         
           But
           we
           must
           note
           here
           ,
           that
           besides
           and
           since
           the
           aforementioned
           Navigators
           and
           Voyagers
           ,
           more
           particular
           and
           fuller
           Observations
           have
           been
           made
           upon
           several
           of
           those
           parts
           of
           the
           World
           towards
           the
           East
           and
           
             West
             Indies
          
           ,
           by
           Physitians
           and
           Others
           ,
           who
           have
           resided
           long
           in
           those
           Regions
           ,
           or
           else
           received
           rich
           Collections
           from
           thence
           .
           But
           as
           to
           the
           most
           
             Northerly
             Countries
          
           all
           we
           have
           is
           from
           the
           Navigators
           .
           The
           best
           of
           whose
           Observations
           are
           all
           contained
           in
           the
           Volume
           we
           here
           publish
           .
        
         
           
             'T
             is
             now
             high
             time
             to
             hasten
             to
             the
          
           North
           ,
           
             and
             to
             give
             a
             short
             Chronological
             Account
             of
             the
             several
          
           Navigations
           and
           Discoveries
           
             made
             towards
             the
          
           North
           East
           and
           North
           West
           ,
           viz.
           Nova
           Zembla
           ,
           North
           East
           Greenland
           or
           Spitsberg
           ,
           and
           North
           West
           Greenland
           ,
           
             commonly
             called
          
           Groneland
           and
           Engronelandt
           .
        
         
           Anno
           Dom.
           1380.
           
           Nicolo
           and
           Antonio
           Zeni
           ,
           
             two
             rich
          
           Venetians
           
             and
             Brothers
             ,
             sailed
             from
          
           Gibraltar
           ,
           
             intending
             for
          
           Flanders
           and
           England
           ,
           
             but
             by
             great
             Storms
             were
             driven
             Northwards
             to
          
           Friseland
           ,
           Iceland
           ,
           Groneland
           or
           Engronland
           ,
           
             for
             which
             we
             refer
             the
             Reader
             to
          
           Hackluyt
           and
           Purchas
           .
        
         
         
           Anno
           Dom.
           1497.
           
           John
           Cabot
           and
           Sebastian
           Cabot
           
             his
             son
          
           ,
           Venetians
           ,
           
             were
             sent
             out
             of
             England
             by
          
           Henry
           VII
           .
           
             These
             ,
             after
             their
             Return
             ,
             gave
             an
             Account
             and
             Draught
             of
             some
          
           North
           West
           
             parts
             of
          
           America
           ,
           
             and
             brought
             four
             of
             the
             Natives
             back
             with
             them
             .
          
        
         
           Anno
           Dom
           ,
           1553.
           
           Sir
           Hugh
           Willoughby
           
             went
             out
             to
             discover
             a
          
           North
           East
           
             Passage
             ,
             and
             sailed
             above
          
           160
           Leagues
           North
           Easterly
           from
           Seynam
           ,
           
             which
             lies
             in
          
           70
           deg
           .
           North
           Lat.
           
             'T
             is
             very
             probable
             he
             landed
             on
          
           Nova
           Zembla
           and
           Greeland
           ,
           
             from
             whence
             the
             Cold
             and
             Ice
             forced
             him
             to
             return
             more
             Southerly
             ,
             till
             he
             came
             to
          
           Arzina
           ,
           
             a
             River
             in
          
           Lapland
           ;
           
             where
             ,
             the
             next
             Spring
             ,
             that
             great
             Man
             with
             all
             his
             Company
             were
             found
             frozen
             to
             death
             in
             the
             Ship
             ,
             in
             this
             year
             the
          
           Russia
           Company
           
             began
             to
             incorporate
          
        
         
           Anno
           Dom.
           1556.
           
           Stephen
           Burrows
           ,
           
             searching
             a
          
           Passage
           
             by
             the
          
           North
           East
           
             to
             the
          
           Indies
           ,
           
             sailed
             to
          
           80
           deg
           .
           7.
           min.
           
             and
             thence
             to
          
           Nova
           Zembla
           ,
           
             having
             been
             in
             all
             likelyhood
             upon
          
           Greenland
           ,
           
             by
             the
             desolate
             Land
             ,
             the
             blue
             Ice
             ,
             and
             great
             numbers
             of
             various
             Fowls
             ,
             which
             be
             mentions
             .
          
        
         
           
             About
             this
             time
             the
          
           Russia
           Company
           
             was
             established
             ,
             and
             sent
             yearly
             ships
             and
             factors
             ,
             and
             presently
             after
             Ambassadours
             from
             Queen
          
           Elizabeth
           .
        
         
           Ann.
           Dom.
           1576
           ,
           1577
           ,
           1578
           ,
           Sir
           Martin
           Forbisher
           ,
           
             made
             three
             several
             Voyages
             to
             find
             out
             a
          
           North
           West
           
             Passage
             ,
             in
             which
             he
             made
             several
             new
             Discoveries
             of
             great
          
           Sreights
           ,
           Bays
           Islands
           and
           Capes
           ,
           
             as
             well
             as
          
           Land
           
             on
             both
             sides
             ,
             to
             all
             which
             he
             gave
             Names
             .
             His
             Men
             brought
             home
             great
             store
             of
             glittering
          
           Marchasites
           ,
           
             which
             the
          
           London
           Goldsmiths
           
           
             took
             to
             be
             Gold
             Oars
             .
             He
             met
             with
             Inhabitants
             on
             the
             Shores
             of
             the
          
           Streight
           
             called
             by
             his
             Name
             ;
             their
          
           Canoes
           
             were
             made
             of
          
           Seal-skins
           
             at
             top
             ,
             but
             wood
          
           Keels
           :
           
             They
             exchanged
             Salmon
             and
             other
             Fish
             ,
             for
             Toyes
             :
             In
             their
             Tents
             abundance
             of
          
           Red
           Beans
           
             were
             found
             ,
             like
             unto
             those
             of
          
           Guinea
           :
           
             But
             more
             of
          
           Frobisher
           '
           
             s
             Observations
             in
             our
             Supplement
             at
             the
             end
             of
             this
             Work
          
        
         
           Anno
           Dom.
           1580.
           
           Arthur
           Pet
           ,
           and
           Charles
           Jackman
           ,
           
             sailed
             all
             over
             these
             Northern
             Seas
             ,
             and
             passed
             into
          
           Waigats
           Streights
           ,
           
             plying
             along
             the
             East
             part
             of
          
           Nova
           Zembla
           ,
           
             so
             far
             as
             the
             Ice
             would
             give
             them
             leave
             ,
             and
             finding
             no
             possibility
             of
             Passage
             ,
             returned
             back
             the
             latter
             end
             of
             the
             year
          
        
         
           Anno
           1583.
           
           Sir
           Humfrey
           Gilbert
           ,
           
             by
             the
             instigation
             of
          
           Secretary
           Walsingham
           ,
           
             sailed
             to
          
           Newfoundland
           ,
           
             and
             the
             great
             River
             of
          
           S.
           Laurence
           in
           Canada
           ,
           
             which
             he
             took
             Possession
             of
             in
             the
             Name
             of
             Queen
          
           Elizabeth
           ,
           
             and
             setled
             a
             Fishing-Trade
             there
          
           .
        
         
           An.
           Dom.
           1585.
           
           Mr.
           John
           Davis
           
             was
             employ'd
             to
             search
             out
             to
             the
          
           North-West
           ,
           
             beyond
             where
          
           Frobisher
           
             went
             :
             he
             made
             further
             Discoveries
             in
             those
             Parts
             ;
             which
             see
             in
          
           Hakluyt
           ,
           and
           Purchas
           ,
           This
           Davis
           
             made
             three
             Voyages
             to
             the
          
           North-West
           :
           
             During
             his
             stay
             at
          
           Cape
           Desolation
           ,
           
             he
             found
             many
             pieces
             of
             Fur
             and
             Wooll
             ,
             like
             to
             Beaver
             ,
          
           and
           exchanged
           Commodities
           with
           the
           Country
           People
           .
           Upon
           the
           Rocks
           and
           in
           the
           Moss
           ,
           grew
           a
           Shrub
           whose
           fruit
           was
           very
           sweet
           ,
           full
           of
           red
           juice
           like
           currans
           ,
           perhaps
           't
           is
           the
           same
           with
           the
           New-England
           Cranberry
           ,
           or
           Bear-Berry
           ,
           
             (
             lall'd
             so
             from
             the
             Bears
             devouring
             it
             very
             greedily
             ;
             )
             with
             which
             we
             make
             Tarts
             .
          
           Vitis
           Idaea
           palustris
           fructu
           majore
           apud
           Josselin
           ,
           de
           
           
             Nova
             Anglia
          
           .
           The
           Natives
           often
           repair'd
           to
           him
           in
           their
           Canoe●s
           ,
           bringing
           with
           them
           Stag's
           Skins
           ,
           white
           Hares
           ,
           small
           Cod
           ,
           dry
           Caplin
           ;
           several
           Copper
           Oars
           ,
           Muscles
           ,
           &c.
           
           In
           his
           returning
           out
           of
           the
           
             Fretum
             Davis
          
           (
           see
           our
           Chart
           of
           the
           Northern
           Reigons
           )
           he
           meets
           marvellous
           store
           of
           Sea
           Fowl
           ,
           and
           Cod
           ,
           Woods
           of
           Pine-Apple
           ,
           Spruce
           ,
           Elder
           ,
           Ewe
           ,
           or
           Yew
           ,
           Withy
           ,
           Birch
           ,
           Geese
           ,
           Ducks
           ,
           Black-Birds
           ,
           Thrush
           ,
           Jayes
           ,
           Partridge
           ,
           Pheasant
           ,
           &c.
           
           Black
           Pumice-stones
           ,
           and
           Salt
           ,
           kerned
           upon
           the
           Rocks
           ,
           white
           and
           glistering
           ;
           Unicorn
           ,
           and
           other
           Whales
           .
           See
           more
           of
           Davis
           in
           our
           supplement
           at
           the
           end
           of
           this
           Volume
           .
        
         
           
             An.
             Dom.
             1594
             ,
             1595
             ,
             1596.
             
             William
             Barents
             ,
          
           a
           Dutchman
           ,
           made
           three
           several
           Voyages
           to
           the
           North-East
           ,
           at
           the
           Charge
           of
           the
           
             United
             Provinces
          
           ,
           in
           the
           last
           of
           which
           ,
           he
           was
           compell'd
           to
           winter
           in
           
             Nova
             Zembla
          
           ,
           about
           the
           75
           
             deg
             .
             of
             North
             Lat.
          
           In
           these
           Voyages
           they
           Discovered
           Bear
           ,
           or
           Cherry-Island
           ,
           and
           went
           upon
           Greenland
           .
           These
           Dutch
           Navigations
           were
           written
           by
           
             Gerart
             de
             Veer
          
           ,
           and
           contain
           great
           variety
           of
           curious
           Observations
           ,
           to
           which
           Mr.
           Boyle
           owns
           himself
           much
           beholden
           ,
           in
           the
           composing
           his
           History
           of
           Cold.
           They
           conversed
           with
           ,
           and
           described
           the
           Samoyeds
           ;
           coasted
           
             Nova
             Zembla
          
           ,
           giving
           Names
           to
           several
           Points
           ,
           Capes
           ,
           Bays
           ,
           Islands
           ,
           &c.
           
           They
           discovered
           the
           
             Bernacle
             Goose
          
           ,
           or
           Clakis
           ,
           sitting
           upon
           their
           Eggs
           ,
           under
           the
           80th
           .
           
             deg
             .
             North
             Lat.
          
           They
           give
           good
           Descriptions
           of
           the
           Whales
           ,
           Morses
           ,
           Birds
           ,
           &c.
           and
           relate
           Phoenomena
           of
           Cold
           (
           during
           their
           melancholy
           winter
           Abode
           there
           )
           with
           ingenuity
           and
           judgment
           .
        
         
         
           
             An.
             Dom.
             1611.
          
           
           That
           worthy
           Seaman
           Sir
           
             Thomas
             Button
          
           ,
           Servant
           to
           
             Prince
             Henry
          
           ,
           pursued
           the
           North-West
           Discoveries
           ,
           at
           the
           instigation
           of
           that
           glorious
           young
           Prince
           .
           He
           passed
           
             Hudsons
             Streight
          
           ,
           and
           leaving
           
             Hudsons
             Bay
          
           to
           the
           South
           ,
           sailed
           above
           200
           Leagues
           to
           the
           South-West-ward
           ,
           over
           a
           Sea
           above
           80
           Fathom
           deep
           ,
           and
           discovered
           a
           great
           Continent
           ,
           called
           by
           him
           
             New
             Wales
          
           ;
           where
           ,
           after
           much
           misery
           and
           sickness
           in
           his
           wintering
           at
           
             Port
             Nelson
          
           ,
           he
           beat
           and
           searched
           the
           whole
           Bay
           with
           great
           Industry
           ,
           (
           called
           afterwards
           
             Button's
             Bay
          
           ,
           )
           even
           back
           again
           almost
           to
           
           Digge's
           Island
           .
           He
           discovered
           the
           great
           Land
           he
           called
           
           Cary's
           Swans-nest
           .
           Many
           men
           were
           lost
           during
           his
           abode
           in
           that
           River
           ,
           named
           by
           him
           
             Port
             Nelson
          
           ,
           in
           
             North
             Lat.
             57
             deg
             .
             10
             min.
          
           tho
           he
           kept
           three
           Fires
           in
           his
           Ship
           all
           the
           Winter
           ,
           and
           was
           supply'd
           with
           great
           store
           of
           white
           Partridges
           ,
           and
           other
           Fowl
           ,
           of
           which
           his
           Company
           is
           reported
           to
           have
           kill'd
           1800
           Dozen
           ,
           besides
           some
           Deer
           ,
           Bears
           ,
           and
           Foxes
           .
           on
           the
           Shores
           of
           those
           
             North-West
             Bays
          
           grows
           abundance
           of
           
             Orpine
             ,
             Sorrel
          
           ,
           and
           Scurvygrass
           ,
           very
           much
           Angelica
           ,
           whose
           Root
           the
           Gronelanders
           eat
           .
           They
           kill
           Morses
           ,
           and
           make
           their
           Cords
           ,
           or
           Ropes
           of
           Whalebone
           .
        
         
           
             In
             the
             years
             1610
             ,
             1612
             ,
             1615
             ,
             1626.
             
          
           Mr.
           
             Hudson
             ,
             James
             Hall
          
           ,
           and
           
             William
             Baffin
          
           ,
           proceeded
           much
           further
           in
           the
           North-West
           Parts
           ,
           giving
           Names
           to
           their
           several
           Discoveries
           ;
           which
           may
           be
           seen
           in
           the
           Northern
           Maps
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           Collection
           of
           Voyages
           ,
           as
           also
           in
           our
           Supplement
           at
           the
           end
           .
        
         
           The
           
             King
             of
             Denmark
          
           observing
           the
           progress
           of
           his
           Neighbours
           in
           the
           Northern
           Seas
           ,
           began
           to
           send
           out
           Ships
           for
           making
           Discoveries
           ,
           in
           the
           year
           1605
           ;
           
           1606
           ,
           1607
           ,
           but
           these
           performed
           little
           .
           At
           last
           in
           the
           year
           1619
           ,
           he
           equipp'd
           
             John
             Munck
          
           with
           two
           Ships
           ,
           who
           tracing
           Forbisher
           and
           Hudson
           ,
           came
           to
           the
           63
           
             deg
             .
             20
             min.
          
           where
           he
           was
           forced
           to
           winter
           ,
           and
           called
           it
           
             Muncks
             Harbour
          
           ,
           and
           the
           Country
           
             New
             Denmark
          
           .
           (
           It
           seems
           to
           be
           near
           
             Diggs
             Island
          
           .
           )
           See
           
             Muncks
             Voyage
          
           ,
           Printed
           in
           French
           at
           Paris
           ;
           also
           our
           Supplement
           at
           the
           end
           .
        
         
           
             In
             1608.
             
             Henry
             Hudson
          
           was
           sent
           out
           by
           the
           
             English
             Company
          
           to
           discover
           the
           
             North
             Pole
          
           ;
           he
           proceeded
           to
           the
           
             82
             deg
             .
             of
             Lat.
          
           as
           also
           did
           
             Thomas
             Marmaduke
          
           of
           Hull
           ,
           1612.
           who
           saw
           divers
           Islands
           beyond
           that
           ,
           and
           gave
           names
           to
           divers
           Places
           upon
           Greenland
           .
           He
           went
           upon
           
             Nova
             Zembla
          
           in
           June
           and
           July
           ,
           and
           observed
           Deer
           feeding
           here
           and
           there
           on
           green
           places
           ,
           tho
           at
           that
           very
           time
           of
           the
           year
           it
           freezes
           in
           that
           Climate
           .
        
         
           
             In
             the
             year
             1610.
          
           the
           Company
           began
           to
           apply
           themselves
           to
           the
           killing
           of
           Morses
           ,
           and
           to
           the
           
             Whale
             Fishing
          
           ,
           which
           they
           found
           most
           plentiful
           about
           
             Cherry
             Island
          
           ,
           and
           Greenland
           ;
           they
           began
           also
           to
           find
           those
           long
           Bones
           commonly
           called
           
             Unicorns
             Horns
             .
             In
             the
             years
          
           1611
           ,
           1612
           ,
           1613
           ,
           1614
           ,
           1617
           ,
           1619
           ,
           1620
           ,
           1622.
           the
           
             English
             Company
          
           ,
           finding
           these
           Northern
           Expeditions
           so
           very
           profitable
           ,
           encreas'd
           the
           number
           of
           their
           Shipping
           to
           13
           ,
           or
           14
           yearly
           ,
           under
           the
           Conduct
           of
           
             Poole
             ,
             Fotherby
             ,
             Edge
             ,
             Heley
             ,
          
           and
           others
           ,
           who
           gave
           names
           to
           several
           Sounds
           and
           
             Points
             ,
             &c.
          
           
        
         
           Yet
           we
           find
           little
           worth
           relating
           of
           Greenland
           till
           1630.
           in
           which
           year
           some
           English
           ,
           commanded
           by
           
             Captain
             Goodler
          
           ,
           were
           forced
           to
           wander
           up
           and
           down
           the
           Country
           ,
           and
           to
           Winter
           there
           .
           A
           full
           Relation
           
           whereof
           being
           Published
           by
           Dr.
           
             W.
             Watts
          
           ,
           we
           shall
           refer
           the
           Reader
           thereunto
           .
        
         
           Some
           English
           also
           wintered
           in
           
             Greenland
             in
             the
             year
             1633.
          
           and
           another
           Company
           in
           1634
           ;
           the
           last
           all
           perished
           there
           .
        
         
           
             In
             these
             several
             Navigations
             to
          
           Greenland
           ,
           
             our
             Men
             gave
             Names
             to
             many
             places
             ,
             as
          
           Hackluit's
           Headland
           ,
           Whale-Bay
           ,
           Horn-Sound
           ,
           
             from
             the
          
           long
           Bones
           
             call'd
             the
          
           Unicorns
           ,
           Ice-Point
           ,
           Bell-Point
           ,
           Lowness-Isle
           ,
           Black-Point
           ,
           Cape-Cold
           ,
           Ice-Sound
           ,
           Knotty-Point
           ,
           Deer-Sound
           ,
           Smiths-Bay
           ,
           Hope-Island
           ,
           Edges
           Island
           ,
           Wyches
           Island
           ,
           Bear-Island
           Charles
           Island
           .
           
             Afterwards
             the
          
           Dutch
           
             gave
             other
             Names
             of
             their
             own
             to
             these
             places
             ,
             which
             has
             bred
             some
             confusion
             in
             Maps
             and
             Books
             .
          
        
         
           Our
           men
           that
           wintered
           in
           
             Greenland
             ,
             1630.
          
           lost
           the
           light
           of
           the
           Sun
           
             October
             14.
          
           and
           saw
           him
           not
           again
           till
           
             February
             3.
          
           
           Those
           that
           staid
           there
           in
           1633
           ,
           say
           ,
           that
           
             Octob.
             5.
          
           was
           the
           last
           day
           they
           perceived
           the
           light
           of
           the
           Sun
           ,
           tho
           they
           had
           a
           twilight
           ,
           by
           which
           they
           could
           read
           ,
           till
           
             Octob.
             17.
          
           
           On
           the
           22.
           the
           Stars
           were
           plain
           to
           be
           seen
           all
           the
           24
           hours
           ,
           and
           so
           contiuued
           all
           Winter
           .
           Jan.
           15.
           they
           perceived
           ,
           for
           6
           or
           7
           hours
           about
           noon
           ,
           so
           much
           light
           as
           to
           read
           by
           it
           .
           
             Feb.
             12.
          
           they
           saw
           the
           Rays
           of
           the
           Sun
           upon
           the
           tops
           of
           the
           Mountains
           ,
           and
           the
           next
           day
           his
           whole
           Body
           .
           Our
           men
           that
           remained
           in
           
             Greenland
             ,
             1634.
          
           left
           in
           writing
           before
           they
           perished
           ,
           that
           the
           Sun
           disappeared
           
             October
             10.
          
           and
           was
           seen
           again
           
             Feb.
             14.
          
           
           The
           Dutch
           that
           wintered
           in
           
             Nova
             Zembla
          
           in
           1596.
           lost
           the
           Sun
           on
           
             Novemb.
             4.
          
           but
           the
           Moon
           in
           her
           highest
           degrees
           was
           seen
           night
           and
           day
           .
           
             Jan.
             24.
          
           they
           saw
           the
           edge
           of
           the
           Sun
           above
           the
           Horizon
           .
        
         
         
           The
           difference
           of
           these
           appearances
           ,
           doth
           not
           proceed
           from
           different
           Refractions
           ,
           but
           from
           the
           difference
           of
           Latitude
           ,
           in
           which
           the
           English
           and
           Dutch
           wintered
           ,
           tho
           the
           cold
           in
           
             Nova
             Zembla
          
           exceeded
           that
           felt
           in
           Greenland
           .
           In
           these
           Countries
           there
           is
           a
           continued
           Day
           for
           four
           or
           five
           months
           in
           the
           year
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           a
           perpetual
           Night
           for
           three
           months
           ,
           so
           for
           the
           most
           part
           there
           is
           either
           all
           Light
           ,
           or
           all
           Darkness
           .
        
         
           The
           English
           that
           were
           necessitated
           to
           winter
           in
           Greenland
           ,
           liv'd
           upon
           Venison
           (
           of
           which
           there
           is
           great
           store
           ,
           perhaps
           't
           is
           of
           the
           Rhin-deer
           )
           upon
           
             Morses
             ,
             Bears
             ,
             Foxes
          
           ,
           &c.
           
           The
           Bears
           Flesh
           was
           tolerably
           pleasant
           and
           wholsom
           ,
           but
           the
           Liver
           made
           their
           skins
           peel
           off
           ;
           which
           was
           also
           observed
           by
           the
           Dutch
           that
           wintered
           in
           
             Nova
             Zembla
          
           .
           As
           the
           Sun
           and
           Day-light
           began
           to
           appear
           ,
           the
           Fowls
           ,
           and
           Foxes
           crept
           abroad
           ,
           for
           which
           they
           set
           Traps
           and
           Springs
           ,
           and
           so
           took
           vast
           numbers
           :
           The
           Foxes
           proved
           wholsom
           Food
           ,
           for
           by
           it
           the
           Dutch
           were
           also
           relieved
           in
           their
           Scurveys
           .
           In
           May
           they
           found
           great
           store
           of
           Eggs
           laid
           by
           Willocks
           .
           The
           cold
           had
           prodigious
           Effects
           on
           our
           Men
           in
           Greenland
           ,
           and
           on
           the
           Dutch
           in
           
             Nova
             Zembla
          
           ,
           as
           blistering
           and
           ulcering
           their
           Flesh
           ,
           freezing
           their
           Sack
           and
           Spirits
           ,
           stopping
           their
           Clocks
           ,
           freezing
           everything
           by
           the
           fire
           side
           ;
           all
           which
           
             Captain
             James
          
           suffer'd
           in
           the
           Island
           of
           Charleton
           ,
           tho
           only
           in
           the
           51
           Deg.
           of
           
             North
             Lat.
          
           whereas
           the
           English
           and
           Dutch
           winter'd
           in
           75
           and
           
             78
             Deg.
             of
             North
             Lat.
          
           In
           the
           building
           of
           Houses
           ,
           Tents
           ,
           and
           Cabins
           ,
           upon
           these
           melancholy
           occasions
           ,
           't
           was
           found
           expedient
           to
           make
           them
           under
           ground
           ,
           and
           to
           line
           them
           with
           the
           skins
           of
           Beasts
           ,
           thereby
           to
           keep
           out
           the
           sharp
           impressions
           of
           the
           air
           .
        
         
         
           Authors
           are
           a
           little
           confus'd
           in
           the
           History
           of
           Whales
           ,
           some
           reckon
           up
           
             10
             Species
          
           ,
           but
           Wormius
           and
           Bartholine
           ,
           make
           them
           up
           22.
           giving
           them
           various
           Names
           from
           their
           difference
           in
           Colours
           ,
           in
           Fins
           ,
           in
           Teeth
           ,
           in
           Whalebone
           ,
           in
           Spouts
           ,
           in
           Oyl
           ,
           in
           
             Sperma
             Ceti
             ,
             &c.
             
             Rondeletius
             ,
             Gesner
             ,
             Bellonius
             ,
             Schonveld
             ,
             Faber
             ,
             Clusius
             ,
          
           and
           Tulpius
           ,
           seem
           indeed
           to
           describe
           6
           or
           7
           distinct
           sorts
           of
           Whales
           ,
           as
           the
           
             Balaena
             Vulgaris
          
           ,
           the
           
             Balaena
             Vera
          
           ,
           the
           Orca
           or
           
             Balaena
             dentata
          
           ,
           (
           perhaps
           our
           Grampus
           ,
           )
           the
           Physeter
           or
           Whirle-Pool
           ,
           the
           Cete
           or
           Pot-Walfish
           ,
           the
           Monoceros
           or
           Unicorn
           Whale
           .
           The
           Trumpa
           Whale
           or
           Spouter
           ,
           may
           perhaps
           be
           the
           Physeter
           ,
           and
           the
           
             Sperma
             Ceti
          
           Whale
           the
           Pot-Walfish
           ,
           thothe
           Spout
           and
           
             Sperma
             Ceti
          
           may
           be
           common
           to
           many
           of
           them
           .
           We
           find
           in
           the
           
             Philosophical
             Transactions
          
           ,
           Numb
           .
           205.
           
           
             An
             Account
             of
          
           Whales
           
             by
             Sir
             Thomas
             Sybbalds
          
           ,
           who
           has
           had
           opportunities
           of
           viewing
           them
           on
           the
           Coasts
           of
           Scotland
           ,
           and
           therefore
           seems
           to
           be
           more
           exact
           than
           other
           Writers
           ;
           but
           we
           having
           never
           read
           this
           Book
           ,
           must
           be
           content
           to
           refer
           the
           Reader
           to
           it
           ;
           expecting
           in
           the
           mean
           time
           more
           clear
           distinctions
           of
           them
           from
           the
           Excellent
           Mr.
           Ray
           ,
           in
           his
           intended
           Synopsis
           of
           Fishes
           and
           Birds
           .
        
         
           
             Anno
             Dom.
             1653.
          
           
           The
           
             King
             of
             Denmark
          
           resolv'd
           to
           advance
           the
           Northern
           Trade
           and
           Discoveries
           ,
           and
           therefore
           equipp'd
           ,
           and
           set
           out
           three
           Ships
           ,
           with
           Orders
           to
           take
           the
           most
           exact
           Account
           of
           all
           the
           Coasts
           and
           Places
           they
           came
           at
           ,
           and
           to
           Report
           them
           at
           their
           return
           with
           all
           possible
           Curiosity
           ,
           that
           thereby
           the
           Voyage
           might
           be
           every
           way
           beneficial
           .
           They
           passed
           the
           
             Weygat
             Streights
          
           ,
           and
           found
           some
           Inhabitants
           of
           
             Nova
             Zembla
          
           in
           their
           Canoes
           ,
           or
           little
           
           Fishing-Boats
           :
           These
           people
           were
           very
           nimble
           on
           Foot
           ,
           and
           were
           cloath'd
           with
           Vestments
           of
           the
           Skins
           of
           great
           Birds
           ,
           like
           Penguins
           ,
           and
           Pelicans
           ,
           with
           the
           Feathers
           upon
           them
           .
           Their
           Boots
           were
           made
           of
           the
           Hides
           of
           Morses
           ,
           or
           great
           Seals
           ;
           they
           had
           Quivers
           at
           their
           backs
           full
           of
           Arrowes
           ,
           with
           a
           Hatchet
           of
           Fish-Bones
           ;
           their
           Temper
           untractable
           and
           indocil
           ,
           abhorring
           our
           Beer
           ,
           Spirits
           ,
           and
           Meats
           .
           Leaving
           
             Nova
             Zembla
          
           they
           streer'd
           to
           Greenland
           .
           These
           Countries
           afford
           no
           Trees
           ,
           or
           Shrubs
           ,
           except
           a
           little
           Juniper
           ,
           and
           a
           few
           dwarf
           Firs
           ;
           abundance
           of
           
             Moss
             ,
             Heath
          
           ,
           a
           sort
           of
           
             Cabbage
             ;
             Lettice
             ,
             Scurvygrass
             ,
             Sorrel
             ,
             Snake-weed
             ,
             Harts-tongue
             ,
          
           a
           kind
           of
           Strawberry
           ,
           divers
           species
           of
           Ranunculus
           ,
           and
           Houseleek
           .
           In
           the
           Holes
           and
           Rocks
           infinite
           quantity
           of
           Fowls
           Nests
           ,
           whose
           dung
           with
           the
           Moss
           washed
           down
           ,
           makes
           a
           mould
           in
           the
           Valleys
           or
           Clefts
           ,
           which
           produce
           the
           aforementioned
           Plants
           ;
           otherwise
           the
           Country
           is
           generally
           made
           up
           of
           vast
           heaps
           of
           Rocks
           ,
           broken
           Stones
           ,
           and
           Ice
           heaped
           up
           from
           many
           Generations
           .
        
         
           Of
           Water-Fowb
           there
           is
           incredible
           variety
           ,
           and
           in
           so
           great
           abundance
           ,
           that
           with
           their
           flight
           they
           darken
           the
           Sun
           ,
           and
           cover
           the
           Sea.
           There
           are
           also
           great
           quantities
           of
           
             Dog-Fishes
             ,
             Lobsters
             ,
             Gernels
             ,
             Star-Fish
             ,
             Mackrel
             ,
             Dolphins
             ,
          
           &c.
           a
           sort
           of
           Sea-Spider
           found
           in
           Whales
           Stomachs
           .
           For
           all
           which
           see
           the
           
             French
             Relations
          
           of
           the
           
             Danish
             Voyages
          
           ,
           Printed
           at
           Paris
           both
           by
           
             M.
             Peyrere
          
           ,
           and
           Martiniere
           .
        
         
           
             Anno
             Dom.
             1630.
          
           
           Captain
           
             Luke
             Fox
          
           was
           sent
           out
           in
           His
           
             Majesties
             Pinnace
          
           the
           Charles
           ,
           Victualed
           for
           18
           Months
           ,
           young
           Sir
           
             John
             Wolstenhome
          
           being
           Treasurer
           ,
           to
           search
           out
           a
           
             North-West
             Passage
          
           .
           He
           traced
           
             Frobisher
             ,
             Hudson
             ,
             Davis
             ,
             Baffin
             ,
          
           and
           
           Button
           ;
           meeting
           with
           Whales
           ,
           much
           Ice
           ,
           and
           Fowls
           .
           He
           built
           a
           Pinnace
           in
           River
           Nelson
           ,
           where
           he
           found
           several
           remains
           left
           there
           by
           Sir
           
             Thomas
             Button
          
           :
           he
           observed
           abundance
           of
           small
           spruce
           Fir-Trees
           on
           both
           sides
           that
           River
           almost
           covered
           with
           moss
           ,
           and
           other
           sorts
           of
           Trees
           ,
           but
           small
           ;
           the
           Valleys
           had
           good
           grass
           ,
           Black-Berries
           ,
           Strawberries
           ,
           Vetches
           ,
           Venison
           ,
           &c.
           but
           no
           Natives
           or
           Inhabitants
           to
           be
           met
           with
           in
           this
           place
           ,
           tho
           in
           other
           parts
           of
           these
           Seas
           he
           saw
           several
           Savages
           .
           Captain
           James
           departing
           from
           England
           soon
           after
           Captain
           Fox
           ,
           upon
           the
           same
           design
           ,
           they
           both
           met
           and
           caress'd
           each
           other
           near
           
             Port
             Nelson
          
           ,
           in
           the
           month
           of
           
             August
             .
             Fox
          
           got
           home
           before
           winter
           ,
           but
           the
           other
           was
           forced
           to
           stay
           till
           the
           next
           Summer
           .
           Of
           which
           ,
           more
           in
           the
           following
           Paragraph
           ,
           and
           in
           our
           Supplement
           at
           the
           end
           .
        
         
           
             Anno
             1631.
          
           
           The
           most
           ingenious
           Captain
           
             Thomas
             James
          
           was
           employ'd
           by
           the
           inquisitive
           Merchants
           of
           Bristol
           ,
           to
           attempt
           and
           discover
           a
           
             North-West
             Passage
          
           into
           the
           South-Sea
           ,
           and
           was
           designed
           for
           so
           difficult
           a
           work
           by
           
             King
             Charles
             the
             First
          
           ;
           who
           was
           pleased
           to
           command
           him
           to
           publish
           his
           Voyage
           in
           the
           
             year
             1633.
          
           wherein
           he
           gives
           a
           very
           accurate
           and
           judicious
           Account
           of
           the
           hardships
           both
           in
           going
           ,
           wintering
           ,
           returning
           ;
           as
           also
           of
           the
           
             Streights
             ,
             Capes
             ,
             Bays
             ,
             Tydes
             ,
             Soundings
             ,
          
           Variations
           of
           the
           Compass
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           
             Natural
             Rarities
          
           both
           Philosophical
           and
           Mathematical
           ,
           together
           with
           a
           Plat
           or
           Card
           ,
           and
           divers
           Tables
           .
           Out
           of
           this
           Journal
           Mr.
           Boyle
           confesses
           that
           he
           took
           many
           Passages
           and
           Phaenomena
           related
           in
           his
           
             History
             of
             Cold.
          
           This
           excellent
           Navigator
           seems
           to
           be
           of
           opinion
           ,
           that
           there
           is
           no
           passing
           by
           the
           North-West
           to
           
             China
             ,
             Japan
             ,
             &c.
          
           
           His
           
           Reasons
           may
           be
           read
           at
           large
           in
           his
           Journal
           printed
           at
           London
           ,
           in
           
             Quarto
             ,
             1633.
          
           
           Yet
           in
           the
           year
           1667.
           this
           design
           was
           renewed
           ,
           and
           undertaken
           by
           several
           of
           the
           Nobility
           of
           England
           ,
           and
           Merchants
           of
           London
           ,
           who
           equipp'd
           and
           sent
           out
           
             Zachariah
             Gillam
          
           Commander
           in
           the
           
             Nonsuch
             Ketch
          
           :
           he
           passed
           through
           
             Hudson's
             Streights
          
           ,
           then
           into
           
             Baffins
             Bay
          
           ,
           to
           the
           Latitude
           of
           75.
           from
           thence
           Southerly
           to
           the
           Lat.
           of
           51.
           or
           thereabruts
           ,
           in
           a
           River
           now
           called
           
             Prince
             Ruperts
             River
          
           :
           he
           found
           here
           a
           Friendly
           Correspondence
           with
           the
           Natives
           ;
           built
           a
           Fort
           called
           
             Charles
             Fort
          
           ;
           returned
           with
           good
           success
           ;
           and
           laid
           the
           Foundation
           of
           an
           advantageous
           Trade
           in
           those
           parts
           .
           But
           in
           the
           year
           1687.
           this
           place
           was
           seized
           upon
           by
           the
           French.
           See
           more
           of
           Captain
           
           James's
           Voyage
           and
           Discoveries
           in
           our
           Supplement
           at
           the
           end
           .
        
         
           
             Anno
             1671.
             
             Frederick
             Martens
          
           ,
           an
           Hamburger
           ,
           undertook
           the
           
             Greenland
             Voyage
          
           ,
           upon
           a
           desire
           ,
           as
           may
           be
           suppos'd
           ,
           in
           great
           part
           to
           satisfie
           the
           Curiosity
           and
           Enquiries
           of
           the
           
             Royal
             Society
          
           ;
           which
           be
           performed
           in
           his
           admirable
           Diary
           printed
           in
           
             High
             Dutch
          
           in
           Quarto
           ,
           being
           assisted
           therein
           by
           the
           famous
           Fogelius
           .
        
         
           
             Anno
             1676.
          
           
           The
           industrious
           and
           most
           ingenious
           Captain
           Wood
           ,
           was
           again
           sent
           out
           by
           his
           
             Majesty
             King
             Charles
             the
             Second
          
           ,
           to
           make
           a
           more
           perfect
           Discovery
           of
           the
           
             North-East
             Parts
          
           for
           a
           passage
           to
           the
           East-Indies
           :
           He
           went
           no
           further
           than
           the
           76
           Degree
           of
           
             North
             Lat.
          
           where
           he
           lost
           his
           Ship
           on
           the
           Coast
           of
           
             Nova
             Zembla
          
           .
           His
           opinion
           is
           ,
           there
           is
           no
           sailing
           this
           
             North-East
             Way
          
           to
           
             China
             ,
             Japan
          
           ,
           &c.
           
           The
           like
           opinion
           Captain
           James
           hath
           given
           of
           
           the
           
             North-West
             Passage
          
           ,
           being
           both
           perswaded
           thereunto
           by
           the
           
             stretching
             of
             the
             Land
          
           ,
           by
           the
           
             distraction
             and
             reversion
             of
             half
             Tides
             ,
          
           by
           the
           
             motion
             of
             the
             Ice
          
           ,
           &c.
           besides
           the
           Fogs
           ,
           Snow
           ,
           Frosts
           ,
           vast
           Islands
           of
           Ice
           ,
           and
           the
           Weather
           ,
           are
           insuperable
           .
        
         
           Mr.
           Witsen
           in
           his
           Letter
           to
           the
           
             Royal
             Society
             Anno
             1691.
          
           writes
           against
           the
           
             North-East
             Passage
          
           to
           Japan
           :
           he
           retracts
           his
           former
           Opinion
           of
           making
           
             Nova
             Zembla
          
           join
           upon
           the
           Continent
           with
           Tartary
           ,
           having
           since
           been
           better
           inform'd
           .
           He
           thinks
           the
           
             Tartarian
             Points
          
           may
           run
           very
           far
           North
           ,
           and
           perhaps
           reach
           to
           America
           .
           Captain
           Wood
           fancies
           ,
           that
           
             Nova
             Zembla
          
           and
           Greenland
           are
           the
           same
           Continent
           ,
           If
           these
           Conjectures
           of
           Captain
           James
           ,
           Captain
           Wood
           ,
           and
           Mr.
           Witsen
           ,
           concerning
           the
           North-East
           ,
           and
           
             North-West
             Passages
          
           to
           the
           East-Indies
           should
           not
           be
           true
           ,
           yet
           the
           difficulties
           of
           sailing
           those
           ways
           would
           be
           invincible
           .
        
         
           But
           now
           it
           seems
           convenient
           to
           come
           to
           the
           
             present
             Work
          
           ,
           and
           to
           give
           an
           account
           what
           is
           contained
           therein
           .
           The
           Authors
           are
           Four
           ,
           viz.
           Sir
           
             John
             Narborough
          
           ,
           Captain
           
             Jansen
             Tasman
          
           ,
           Captain
           Wood
           ,
           and
           
             Frederick
             Marten
          
           .
        
         
           I.
           Sir
           
             John
             Narborough
          
           is
           so
           well
           known
           in
           England
           ,
           and
           so
           famous
           beyond
           the
           Seas
           ,
           that
           I
           need
           say
           nothing
           of
           his
           great
           Abilties
           .
           His
           Voyage
           into
           the
           South-Sea
           is
           mentioned
           before
           ,
           but
           this
           is
           the
           first
           time
           of
           Publishing
           it
           .
        
         
           II.
           Captain
           
             Abel
             Jansen
             Tasman's
             Voyage
          
           from
           Batavia
           in
           the
           
             Island
             of
             Java
          
           ,
           to
           the
           
             South
             Terra
             Incognita
          
           is
           the
           more
           considerable
           ,
           in
           that
           't
           is
           the
           Discovery
           of
           a
           
             New
             World
          
           ,
           not
           yet
           known
           to
           the
           English.
           
        
         
         
           'T
           is
           probable
           by
           
             Abel
             Jansen
             Tasman's
          
           Navigation
           ,
           that
           
             New
             Guinea
             ,
             New
             Carpentaria
          
           ,
           and
           
             New
             Holland
          
           ,
           are
           a
           vast
           prodigious
           Island
           ,
           which
           he
           seems
           to
           have
           encompassed
           in
           his
           Voyage
           ,
           setting
           out
           from
           Batavia
           to
           Maurice
           Isle
           ,
           East
           of
           Madagascar
           ;
           from
           whence
           bearing
           away
           South
           to
           49
           deg
           .
           of
           
             South
             Lat.
          
           and
           then
           East
           and
           by
           North
           to
           
             Lat.
             42
          
           and
           44
           ,
           he
           fell
           upon
           those
           new
           Tracts
           of
           Land
           call'd
           
             Van
             Diemen's
          
           ,
           and
           afterwards
           upon
           
             New
             Zealand
          
           ,
           to
           the
           South-East
           of
           
             New
             Holland
          
           ;
           returning
           to
           Batavia
           through
           part
           of
           the
           South
           Sea
           (
           wherein
           he
           Discover'd
           new
           Islands
           )
           and
           so
           Northwards
           of
           
             New
             Guinea
          
           to
           the
           Molucco's
           ,
           and
           Java
           .
        
         
           III.
           Captain
           Wood
           was
           a
           most
           excellent
           Navigator
           :
           He
           ,
           together
           with
           Sir
           
             Cloudsly
             Shovel
          
           ,
           accompanied
           Sir
           
             John
             Narborough
          
           to
           Chili
           :
           Afterwards
           he
           was
           sent
           by
           
             Charles
             II.
          
           to
           Discover
           a
           
             North-East
             Passage
          
           to
           China
           and
           Japan
           by
           
             Nova
             Zembla
          
           and
           Tartary
           ;
           of
           which
           you
           have
           here
           an
           Abstract
           never
           Printed
           before
           .
        
         
           
             IV.
             Frederick
             Marten
          
           of
           Hamburgh
           Published
           his
           Observations
           made
           in
           Greenland
           in
           the
           
             High
             Dutch
          
           ,
           a
           Language
           little
           understood
           in
           England
           .
           His
           Voyage
           being
           the
           last
           and
           best
           was
           much
           desired
           here
           ,
           it
           being
           full
           of
           Draughts
           and
           curious
           Remarks
           ;
           the
           Copying
           and
           Translating
           of
           which
           ,
           are
           perform'd
           with
           all
           possible
           diligence
           .
        
         
           These
           four
           make
           up
           the
           Volume
           ,
           together
           with
           many
           new
           Carts
           and
           Designs
           ,
           drawn
           upon
           the
           several
           places
           ,
           which
           do
           much
           illustrate
           the
           Work
           ,
           and
           improve
           both
           Natural
           and
           
             Mathematical
             Science
          
           .
           To
           these
           we
           thought
           fit
           to
           tack
           a
           Supplement
           containing
           some
           Observations
           on
           Groneland
           ,
           or
           Engroneland
           ,
           
           as
           also
           upon
           some
           Northern
           
             Islands
             ,
             North-East
          
           ,
           and
           North-West
           .
        
         
           'T
           is
           to
           be
           lamented
           ,
           that
           the
           
             English
             Nation
          
           have
           not
           sent
           along
           with
           their
           Navigators
           some
           skilful
           
             Painters
             ,
             Naturalists
          
           ,
           and
           Mechanists
           ,
           under
           publick
           Stipends
           and
           Encouragement
           ,
           as
           the
           Dutch
           and
           French
           have
           done
           ,
           and
           still
           practise
           daily
           ,
           much
           to
           their
           Honour
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           Advantage
           .
           The
           English
           have
           Capacity
           ,
           Industry
           ,
           and
           Judgment
           in
           these
           Matters
           ,
           equal
           to
           ,
           if
           not
           beyond
           their
           Neighbours
           ,
           
             Sint
             Maecenates
          
           ,
           We
           are
           apt
           to
           imitate
           a
           
             certain
             Prince
          
           in
           every
           thing
           ,
           except
           in
           the
           most
           glorious
           and
           best
           Part
           of
           him
           ,
           
             viz.
             The
             Encouraging
             and
             Rewarding
             great
             Men
             in
             all
             Professions
             ,
             and
             the
             promoting
             Arts
             and
             Sciences
             with
             his
             Treasure
             :
          
           A
           Secret
           which
           some
           Ministers
           think
           not
           fit
           to
           practise
           ,
           or
           perhaps
           may
           be
           insensible
           of
           ,
           for
           want
           of
           penetration
           .
           This
           makes
           a
           great
           Figure
           in
           the
           present
           and
           future
           Ages
           ,
           covers
           many
           Spots
           and
           Deformities
           ,
           and
           secures
           the
           best
           Heads
           ,
           and
           Hands
           to
           carry
           on
           ,
           and
           effect
           
             great
             Designs
          
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           CONTENTS
           OF
           THE
           INTRODUCTION
           .
        
         
           
             
               NAvigations
               towards
               the
               South
               ,
               from
            
             page
             6
             ,
             to
             p.
             15.
             
             
               As
               those
               of
            
             Magellan
             ,
             Drake
             ,
             Candish
             ,
             Hawkins
             ,
             Olivert
             Noort
             ,
             Sebald
             de
             Wert
             ,
             Spilbergen
             ,
             Fernandez
             Giros
             ,
             Tasman
             ,
             Schouten
             ,
             and
             Le
             Maire
             ,
             Brewer
             ,
             Sharp
             ,
             
               and
               others
            
             .
          
           
             Terra
             Magellanica
             Described
             ,
             p.
             12
          
           
             General
             Occurrences
             in
             the
             Southern
             Navigations
             ,
             p.
             13
             ,
             14
             ,
             15.
             
          
           
             Navigations
             towards
             the
             North
             from
             
               p.
               15
            
             ,
             to
             26.
             
          
           
             
               As
               those
               of
            
             Zeni
             ,
             Cabot
             ,
             Willoughby
             ,
             Burrows
             ,
             Forbisher
             ,
             Pet
             ,
             Jackman
             ,
             Gilbert
             ,
             Davis
             ,
             Barents
             ,
             and
             Gerart
             de
             Veer
             ,
             Button
             ,
             Hudson
             ,
             Hall
             ,
             Baffin
             ,
             Munck
             ,
             Goodler's
             
               Wintering
               in
            
             Greenland
             .
             
               Observations
               on
               that
               Country
               ,
               from
            
             p.
             21.
             to
             24.
             
          
           
             Observations
             and
             Discoveries
             by
             Captain
             Fox
             ,
             Captain
             
               James
               ,
               Gillam
            
             ,
             and
             others
             ;
             of
             the
             North-East
             ,
             and
             North-West
             Passages
             ,
             p.
             26
             ,
             27.
             
          
           
             
               Of
               New
            
             Guinea
             ,
             Carpentaria
             ,
             Hollandia
             Nova
             ,
             Zelandia
             Nova
             ,
             p.
             28.
             
          
           
             What
             wanted
             in
             our
             English
             Navigations
             ,
             p.
             29.
             
          
        
      
       
         
         
           A
           TABLE
           of
           the
           Principal
           Matters
           contained
           in
           Sir
           John
           Narbrough's
           Voyage
           to
           the
           Streights
           of
           Magellan
           ;
           Captain
           Tasman's
           Voyage
           for
           a
           further
           Discovery
           of
           Terra
           Incognita
           Australis
           ;
           Captain
           Wood's
           for
           finding
           a
           North-East
           Passage
           to
           China
           and
           Japan
           ;
           and
           Captain
           Flawes
           Journal
           from
           Nova
           Zembla
           to
           England
           .
        
         
           
             ARmiger
             ,
             Sir
             John
             Narbrough's
             Lieutenant
             ,
             kindly
             entertained
             ,
             &c.
             by
             the
             Captain
             of
             
               Fort
               S.
               Jago
               ,
               p.
               98.
               
            
             Goes
             to
             
               Fort
               St.
               Peter
            
             ,
             and
             why
             ,
             p.
             99.
             
             Kept
             Prisoner
             there
             ,
             p.
             100.
             
             His
             Letter
             to
             Captain
             Narbrough
             ,
             p.
             101.
             
             Left
             behind
             ,
             111
             ▪
          
           
             Anchors
             ,
             
               three
               found
               beyond
            
             Cape
             Gregory
             ,
             &c.
             p.
             126
          
           
             Baldavia
             Harbour
             ,
             its
             
               Latitude
               ,
               &c.
               p.
               85.
            
             
             The
             Traffick
             thereof
             ,
             
               p.
               93.
            
             
             Three
             Rivers
             empty
             themselves
             into
             it
             ,
             p.
             106.
             
             A
             conjecture
             concerning
             it
             ,
             p.
             106
             ,
             107.
             
             The
             Tackle
             for
             Ships
             in
             this
             place
             ,
             what
             ,
             p.
             107.
             
             A
             description
             of
             the
             Harbour
             and
             Country
             adjacent
             ,
             p.
             108
             ,
             109
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             Batchellour
             Pink
             attends
             upon
             Sir
             
               John
               Narbrough
            
             ,
             her
             Burthen
             ,
             how
             Mann'd
             ,
             Victualled
             ,
             
               &c.
               p.
            
             2
             ,
             4.
             
             Instructions
             to
             the
             Master
             thereof
             ,
             and
             from
             whom
             ,
             p.
             9
             ,
             10
             ,
             11
             ,
             12.
             
             Loses
             sight
             of
             the
             Sweepstakes
             ,
             and
             is
             seen
             no
             more
             ,
             p.
             23
          
           
             Bezoar-stone
             ,
             
               whence
               taken
            
             ,
             p.
             32
             ,
             33
          
           
             Cape
             Blanco
             ,
             
               Description
               thereof
            
             ,
             p.
             21.
             
             It
             s
             Latitude
             ,
             p.
             41
          
           
             
               Cape
               Froward
            
             ,
             a
             description
             of
             it
             ,
             p.
             70.
             
             It
             s
             Latitude
             ,
             Longitude
             and
             Meridional
             Distance
             ,
             p.
             71
          
           
           
             
               Cape
               Holland
            
             described
             ,
             together
             with
             several
             other
             Capes
             ,
             Islands
             ,
             and
             Bays
             ,
             p.
             71
          
           
             
               Cape
               Quad
            
             described
             ,
             p.
             76.
             
             The
             distance
             between
             it
             and
             Cape
             Munday
             ,
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             
               Cape
               Munday
            
             ,
             its
             description
             ,
             
               p.
               76
               ,
               77
            
          
           
             
               Cape
               Desiad●
            
             described
             ;
             its
             Latitude
             ,
             Longitude
             ,
             and
             meridional
             ●●stance
             ,
             p.
             78
          
           
             
               Cape
               Pillar
            
             ,
             its
             Lat.
             Longit.
             and
             meridional
             distance
             ,
             p.
             78
          
           
             Cape
             Gallery
             
               described
               p.
            
             112
          
           
             Chile
             ,
             
               the
               chief
               Place
               of
            
             America
             
               for
               Gold
            
             ,
             p.
             92
          
           
             Cooe
             ,
             (
             Hugh
             )
             
               Trumpeter
               on
               board
               Sir
            
             John
             Narbrough
             ,
             
               taken
               Prisoner
               by
               the
            
             Spaniards
             at
             Baldavia
             ,
             
               was
               left
               behind
            
             ,
             p.
             111
          
           
             Direction
             Isles
             ,
             
               their
               number
               ,
               where
            
             ,
             —
             p.
             114
          
           
             Don
             Carlos
             
               set
               ashore
               in
            
             Noman's
             Island
             ,
             
               and
               why
            
             ,
             p.
             84.
             
             
               Never
               heard
               of
               more
            
             ,
             p.
             87
             ,
             
          
           
             
               Elizabeth
               Island
            
             described
             ,
             p.
             66
             ,
             57.
             
             The
             distance
             between
             it
             ,
             and
             
               S.
               Jerom's
            
             River
             ,
             p.
             74.
             
             The
             Bay
             or
             River
             of
             this
             Island
             described
             ,
             p.
             75.
             124
          
           
             Flawes
             (
             Captain
             William
             )
             His
             Journal
             of
             a
             Voyage
             from
             
               Nova
               Zembla
            
             to
             England
             in
             the
             year
             1676
             ,
             from
             p.
             171
             ,
             to
             p.
             185.
             
             His
             opinion
             of
             the
             said
             Voyage
             ,
             with
             a
             Relation
             of
             his
             miscarriage
             therein
             ,
             and
             some
             Observations
             thereupon
             ,
             
               p.
               185.
               &c.
            
             
          
           
             Fonchiale
             ,
             the
             chief
             Town
             in
             the
             Madera's
             ;
             its
             Latitude
             ,
             p.
             3
          
           
             
               Fortescue
               (
               John
            
             )
             Gent.
             Taken
             Prisoner
             by
             the
             Spaniards
             at
             Baldavia
             ,
             and
             left
             behind
             by
             Sir
             
               John
               Narbrough
               ,
               p.
            
             111
          
           
             Freshwater
             Bay.
             see
             Elizabeth
             Island
          
           
             
               Highway
               (
               Thomas
            
             )
             Linguist
             ,
             on
             board
             
               Sir
               John
               Narbrough
            
             ,
             taken
             Prisoner
             by
             the
             Spaniards
             in
             Baldavia
             ,
             there
             ,
             p.
             112
          
           
             S.
             James's
             Fort
             in
             the
             hands
             of
             the
             
               Spaniards
               ,
               p.
               86.
            
             
             The
             intercourse
             there
             between
             
               Sir
               John
            
             Narbrough's
             Lieutenant
             ,
             and
             the
             Captain
             of
             the
             Fort
             -
             p.
             87.
             
             Their
             entertainment
             ,
             p.
             88
             ,
             89
          
           
             Indians
             of
             the
             Country
             about
             Port
             
               S.
               Julian
            
             ,
             their
             Habit
             
               &c
               p
            
             49
             ,
             50
             ,
             51
             ,
             A
             further
             account
             of
             them
             ,
             p.
             53
          
           
             
             Indians
             of
             Elizabeth
             Island
             their
             Character
             ,
             p.
             63
             ,
             64
             ,
             65
             ,
             66
             ,
             70
          
           
             Indians
             of
             Chile
             described
             p.
             103
          
           
             Lizzard
             in
             Engl.
             
               Its
               Latitude
            
             p.
             2
          
           
             Madera
             ,
             
               a
               Description
               thereof
            
             p.
             2
             ,
             3
          
           
             Magellan
             (
             the
             Streights
             of
             )
             not
             passable
             for
             Ice
             at
             the
             latter
             end
             of
             
               April
               ,
               p.
            
             45.
             
             A
             Description
             of
             the
             Magellannick
             Streights
             ,
             
               p.
               61
               ,
               &c.
            
             
             The
             length
             thereof
             from
             Cape
             
               Virgin
               Mary
            
             to
             Cape
             
               Desseada
               ,
               p.
            
             78.
             
             The
             safest
             way
             to
             enter
             these
             Streights
             
               p.
               116
               ,
               117
               ,
               &c.
               
            
          
           
             Le
             Mair's
             Island
             described
             ,
             p.
             37.
             
             When
             so
             named
             ibid.
             
          
           
             St.
             Maries
             Isle
             its
             Latitude
             ,
             p.
             95.
             
             It
             s
             Pruduct
             and
             Air
             p.
             96
          
           
             Mayo
             Isle
             ,
             a
             Desription
             thereof
             p.
             4
             ,
             5
          
           
             Mocha
             Island
             ,
             its
             Description
             ,
             Latitude
             ,
             
               &c.
               p.
            
             95
          
           
             Mullets
             ,
             700
             caught
             at
             a
             time
             p.
             125
          
           
             Narbrough
             (
             Sir
             John
             )
             receives
             his
             Commission
             ,
             p.
             1.
             
             Goes
             on
             Board
             the
             
               Sweepstakes
               ,
               ibid.
            
             Arrives
             at
             Madera
             p.
             2.
             
             Steers
             for
             St.
             
               Jago
               ,
               p.
            
             4.
             
             Causes
             his
             Men
             to
             be
             let
             blood
             ,
             and
             why
             ,
             ibid.
             and
             p.
             14.
             
             Going
             a
             shore
             at
             Mayo
             he
             brings
             off
             some
             Salt.
             p.
             5.
             
             Buys
             Provisions
             of
             the
             Islanders
             ,
             ibid.
             Comes
             to
             Port
             Praya
             in
             St.
             Jago
             Isle
             ,
             and
             what
             happen'd
             ,
             
               p.
               6
               ,
               7.
            
             
             Is
             ordered
             to
             Sail
             to
             the
             Sireights
             of
             
               Magellan
               ,
               p.
            
             8.
             
             His
             Instructions
             to
             Mr.
             Fleming
             of
             the
             Batchellor
             Pink
             for
             the
             better
             finding
             each
             other
             after
             separation
             by
             Storm
             ,
             or
             otherwise
             ,
             p.
             12
             ,
             13.
             
             His
             Order
             be
             kept
             on
             Board
             ,
             and
             his
             Observations
             ,
             p.
             14.
             15.
             
             Description
             of
             the
             Country
             about
             Cape
             
               Blanco
               ,
               p.
               21.
            
             
             Loses
             sight
             of
             the
             Batchellor
             Pink
             ,
             p.
             23.
             
             His
             project
             to
             discover
             the
             People
             of
             the
             Country
             about
             Seals
             Bay
             ineffectual
             ,
             p
             ,
             29
             ,
             30.
             
             Kills
             400
             Seals
             p.
             30.
             
             Takes
             possession
             of
             Port
             Desier
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             Land
             in
             the
             Country
             thereabouts
             for
             King
             
               Charles
               II.
               p.
            
             40.
             
             Sails
             for
             Port
             St.
             
               Julian
               ,
               p.
               42.
            
             
             He
             Eats
             Foxes
             and
             Kites
             ,
             
               p.
               49.
            
             
             Twelve
             of
             his
             Men
             lame
             ,
             the
             manner
             thereof
             ,
             
               p.
               52.
            
             
             Returns
             to
             Port
             
               Desier
               ,
               p.
               56.
            
             
             Enters
             the
             Mouth
             of
             the
             Streights
             of
             Magellan
             ,
             p.
             60.
             
             Goes
             ashore
             on
             Elizabeth
             Island
             ,
             
               p.
               63.
            
             
             His
             conference
             with
             
             19
             Indians
             ,
             ibid.
             and
             64
             ,
             65
             ,
             66.
             
             His
             way
             of
             sailing
             ,
             p.
             85.
             
             Discourses
             with
             the
             Spaniards
             of
             St.
             
             James's
             Fort
             ,
             
               p.
               90
               &c.
            
             
             Sends
             Men
             ashore
             in
             St.
             Mary
             Isle
             ,
             and
             why
             ,
             p.
             96
             ,
             97.
             
             His
             discourse
             to
             two
             
               Indians
               ,
               p.
            
             102.
             
             His
             Letter
             to
             Lieutenant
             
               Armiger
               ,
               p.
            
             104.
             
             Returns
             from
             Baldavia
             ,
             and
             what
             way
             ,
             p.
             112
             ,
             113
             ,
             &c.
             
             His
             Journal
             continued
             ,
             and
             by
             whom
             ,
             p.
             121.
             
             Sets
             sail
             from
             Port
             Desier
             for
             England
             .
             Pass
             Cape
             Blanco
             Cape
             Virgin
             Mary
             ,
             St.
             
               Michaels
               ,
               p.
            
             127
             ,
             128.
             
             Puts
             into
             Angria
             in
             the
             
               Terceras
               ,
               p.
            
             128.
             
             Within
             sight
             of
             
               Scilly
               p.
            
             129
          
           
             
             Narbrough's
             Island
             ,
             its
             Products
             and
             Description
             ,
             p.
             81
             ,
             82
          
           
             
             Noman's
             Island
             ,
             its
             Latitude
             and
             Description
             p.
             83
          
           
             
               Nuestra
               Senora
               di
               Socoro
            
             ,
             an
             Island
             ,
             its
             Meridian
             and
             Longitude
             ,
             p.
             80.
             
             Described
             p.
             80
             ,
             81
          
           
             Ostriches
             ,
             about
             Seals
             Bay
             ,
             their
             shape
             and
             colour
             p
             ,
             29
             ,
             30
          
           
             Penguin
             Island
             described
             ,
             p.
             24
             ,
             25.
             
             It
             s
             Latitude
             ,
             p.
             41.
             
             A
             vast
             numbers
             of
             Penguins
             here
             ,
             p.
             56.
             
             A
             Penguin
             ,
             what
             p.
             58
             ,
             59
          
           
             Port
             Desier
             described
             ,
             p.
             25
             ,
             26.
             
             It
             s
             Latitude
             ,
             p.
             41.
             
          
           
             Sir
             
               John
               Narbrough
            
             returns
             thither
             p.
             127
          
           
             Port
             Praya
             ,
             a
             Description
             thereof
             p.
             7
             ,
             8
          
           
             Port
             St.
             Julian
             ,
             and
             the
             Country
             thereabout
             described
             ,
             p.
             42
             ,
             to
             p.
             56
             ,
             The
             distance
             between
             it
             and
             the
             Flat
             Island
             ,
             p.
             43.
             
             It
             s
             Longitude
             ,
             Latitude
             ,
             and
             Meridional
             distance
             ,
             p.
             44.
             
             Vast
             quantities
             of
             Salt
             here
             p.
             45
          
           
             Port
             Famen
             ,
             Its
             Desription
             and
             Latitude
             ,
             p.
             67
             ,
             68.
             
             An
             account
             of
             the
             Pruduct
             of
             the
             Country
             and
             River
             thereabout
             p.
             69
             ,
             121
          
           
             Seals
             ,
             a
             desription
             of
             them
             p.
             30
             ,
             31
          
           
             Seals
             ,
             Bay
             described
             ,
             and
             the
             Country
             thereabouts
             ,
             p.
             23
             ,
             24
             ,
             25
             ,
             26
             ,
             27
             ,
             28
             ,
             29
          
           
             Smelts
             of
             an
             extraordinary
             bigness
             p.
             123
          
           
             Spaniards
             at
             Fort
             St.
             James
             in
             Baldavia
             ,
             their
             Policy
             ,
             to
             surprize
             Sir
             
               John
               Narbrough
            
             ,
             together
             with
             the
             Ships
             Crew
             ,
             p.
             89.
             
             Are
             kind
             to
             Lieutenant
             Armiger
             ,
             &c.
             p.
             98
          
           
             
             Spiring's
             Bay
             ,
             a
             Description
             thereof
             p.
             24
          
           
           
             Sweepstakes
             ,
             her
             Burthen
             ,
             how
             Mann'd
             ,
             Victuall'd
             ,
             
               &c
               p.
            
             1.
             
             Her
             Cargo
             ,
             p.
             2.
             
             Crew
             reduced
             to
             eat
             Pease
             instead
             of
             Bread
             p.
             8●
          
           
             
               Tasman
               (
               Abel
               Jansen
            
             )
             Sails
             from
             Batavia
             with
             two
             Ships
             ,
             the
             Heemskirk
             Yacht
             ,
             and
             Seehane
             Fly-Boat
             ,
             towards
             the
             
               Terra
               incognita
               Australis
            
             ,
             in
             which
             Voyage
             be
             sets
             down
             many
             things
             worth
             notice
             ;
             but
             his
             Tract
             being
             but
             a
             short
             Journal
             of
             the
             same
             
               de
               die
               in
               diem
            
             ,
             I
             refer
             the
             Reader
             to
             it
             (
             without
             drawing
             any
             Contents
             thereof
             
               from
               p.
            
             131.
             to
             143
          
           
             Vessels
             
               (
               Spanish
            
             )
             several
             sorts
             of
             'em
             p.
             107
             ,
             108
          
           
             
             Wood's
             Bay
             ,
             why
             so
             call'd
             p.
             71
          
           
             Wood
             (
             Captain
             John
             )
             his
             delightful
             and
             profitable
             Relation
             of
             a
             Voyage
             for
             discovery
             of
             a
             North-East
             Passage
             to
             China
             and
             
               Japan
               ,
               from
               p.
            
             143
             ,
             
               to
               p.
            
             155.
             
             His
             Journal
             thereof
             
               from
               p.
            
             155
             ,
             
               to
               p.
            
             171.
             
          
        
      
       
         
           Contents
           of
           Frederick
           Martens
           Voyage
           into
           Spitzbergen
           and
           Greenland
           .
        
         
           
             OF
             the
             Voyage
             from
             the
             Elbe
             to
             
               Spitzbergen
               Pag.
            
             1
             Of
             their
             Voyage
             home
             again
             from
             Spitzbergen
             to
             the
             
               Elbe
               p
               ▪
            
             14
          
           
             Of
             the
             external
             Fate
             and
             appearance
             of
             
               Spitzbergen
               p.
            
             29
          
           
             Of
             the
             Sea
             ,
             and
             divers
             Storms
             and
             Tempests
             p.
             16
          
           
             Of
             vast
             Mountains
             and
             Fields
             of
             Ice
             ,
             and
             the
             great
             difficulty
             of
             sailing
             p.
             39
          
           
             Of
             the
             Air
             and
             wonderful
             changes
             of
             the
             Weather
             p.
             45
          
           
             Of
             the
             Plants
             of
             Spitzbergen
             .
             Of
             a
             Plant
             with
             Aloe-Leaves
             .
             Of
             small
             Housleek
             .
             Of
             Crow's-Foot
             .
             Of
             Scurvy-Grass
             .
             Of
             an
             Herb
             like
             Stone-crap
             .
             Of
             a
             Snakeweed
             .
             Of
             an
             Herb
             like
             unto
             Mouse-Ear
             .
             Of
             a
             Plant
             like
             unto
             Periwinkle
             .
             Of
             an
             Herb
             like
             a
             Strawberry
             .
             Of
             a
             Rock
             Plant
             
               from
               p.
            
             55.
             
               to
               p
            
             70
          
           
             Of
             the
             Animals
             but
             chie●ly
             the
             Birds
             about
             Spitzbergen
             .
             Of
             Birds
             with
             Toes
             or
             divided
             Feet
             .
             1.
             
             Of
             a
             Snite
             .
             2.
             
             Of
             the
             Snow
             Bird.
             3.
             
             Of
             the
             Ice
             Birds
             .
             Of
             the
             broad
             or
             webfooted
             Birds
             .
             Of
             the
             Rathsher
             .
             Of
             the
             Pigeon
             .
             Of
             
             the
             Lumb
             .
             Of
             the
             Mew
             called
             Kutge-gebef
             .
             Of
             the
             Burgemeister
             .
             Of
             the
             Rotgis
             .
             Of
             the
             Struntjager
             ,
             (
             or
             Dung-hunter
             .
             )
             Of
             the
             diving
             Parrot
             .
             Of
             the
             mountain
             Duck.
             Of
             the
             Kirmew
             .
             Of
             the
             Mallemuck
             .
             The
             Red
             Geese
             ,
             a
             Bird
             called
             John
             of
             Ghent
             ,
             like
             a
             Stork
             
               from
               p.
               72.
               to
               p.
            
             98
          
           
             Of
             four
             footed
             Beasts
             .
             Of
             the
             Hart
             and
             Deer
             .
             Of
             the
             Fox
             .
             Of
             the
             white
             Bear.
             Of
             the
             Sea-Dogs
             ,
             called
             Rubbs
             and
             Seales
             .
             Of
             the
             Sea-Horse
             ,
             or
             Morse
             
               from
               p.
            
             99
             to
             112
          
           
             Of
             Crustaneous
             Fish
             .
             Of
             the
             Sea
             Craw-fish
             without
             a
             Tail
             ,
             or
             Sea
             Spider
             .
             Of
             the
             Garnels
             or
             Prawns
             .
             Of
             the
             lesser
             Garnels
             or
             Shrimps
             .
             Of
             the
             Louse
             of
             the
             Whale
             .
             Of
             the
             Star-fish
             ,
             two
             sorts
             .
             Of
             the
             Macarel
             .
             Of
             the
             Dragon-fish
             .
             Of
             the
             Dolphin
             .
             Of
             the
             Butskopf
             ,
             or
             Places
             ●ead
             .
             Of
             the
             Saw-fish
             ,
             or
             Sword
             fish
             .
             Of
             the
             white
             Fish
             .
             Of
             the
             Unicorn
             .
             Of
             the
             Hay
             ,
             several
             sorts
             
               from
               p.
            
             113
             
               to
               p.
            
             129
          
           
             Of
             the
             Whales
             about
             Spitzbergen
             ,
             and
             how
             they
             differ
             from
             other
             Whales
             ,
             with
             an
             exact
             description
             of
             all
             the
             parts
             of
             a
             Whale
             ,
             and
             a
             what
             uses
             they
             are
             applied
             
               from
               p.
            
             130
             
               to
               p.
            
             144
          
           
             Of
             the
             sever
             ways
             of
             catching
             Whales
             
               from
               p.
            
             145
             
               to
               p.
            
             156
          
           
             How
             they
             mannage
             the
             dead
             Whales
             :
             several
             ways
             of
             Trying
             out
             of
             the
             Train-Oil
             from
             the
             Fat
             
               from
               p.
            
             197
             
               to
               p.
            
             164
          
           
             Of
             the
             Finn-fish
             being
             the
             length
             of
             a
             Whale
             ,
             but
             much
             less
             in
             bulk
             p.
             16●
          
           
             Of
             Rotz
             fishes
             and
             Sea-qualms
             .
             Of
             the
             Sea
             May-fly
             .
             Of
             the
             Snail
             Slime-fish
             .
             Of
             the
             Hat
             Slime-fish
             .
             Of
             the
             Rose
             like
             shaped
             Slime-fish
             .
             Of
             the
             Slime
             fish
             like
             a
             Cap.
             Of
             the
             Slime
             fish
             like
             a
             Fountain
             
               from
               p.
            
             165
             
               to
               p.
            
             175.
             
          
        
      
       
         
           Contents
           of
           the
           Supplement
           .
        
         
           
             A
             Description
             of
             Cherry
             and
             other
             Islands
             
               from
               p.
            
             179
             to
             p.
             184
          
           
             John
             mayens
             
               Island
               p.
            
             185
          
           
             Groenland
             or
             Engroenland
             p.
             187
          
           
             
               The
               Discovery
               of
            
             Freezland
             or
             Friseland
             p.
             206
          
        
         
      
       
         
         
           
             
               To
               the
               Hon.
               ble
               
                 Sam
                 :
                 Pepys
                 Esq
                 
                 r.
              
               This
               Mapp
               of
               the
               STREIGHTS
               of
               MAGELLAN
               
                 Drawn
                 by
                 S
                 r
                 Io.
                 n
                 Narbrough
              
               is
               humbly
               Dedicated
               by
               
                 Sam
                 ▪
                 Smith
                 and
                 Benj
                 ▪
                 Wallford
                 .
              
            
             map of the Straits of Magellan
             
             
             
             
             
          
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
         
           A
           JOURNAL
           KEPT
           BY
           Captain
           John
           Narbrough
           ,
           &c.
           
        
         
           MAY
           15.
           1669.
           
           This
           day
           being
           Saturday
           ,
           I
           received
           from
           the
           Honourable
           Mr.
           Wren
           ,
           Secretary
           to
           his
           Royal
           Highness
           the
           Duke
           of
           York
           ,
           my
           Commission
           to
           Command
           his
           Majesty's
           Ship
           the
           Sweepstakes
           ,
           the
           Ship
           being
           at
           Deptford
           ,
           in
           the
           River
           of
           Thames
           near
           London
           .
        
         
           Sunday
           September
           26.
           1669.
           
           Set
           out
           at
           his
           Majesty's
           proper
           Cost
           ,
           one
           of
           his
           own
           Ships
           named
           the
           Sweepstakes
           ,
           Burthen
           300
           Tuns
           ,
           with
           36
           great
           Ordnance
           ,
           and
           all
           other
           Munition
           proportionable
           ;
           manned
           with
           80
           Men
           and
           Boys
           ,
           victualled
           for
           fourteen
           Months
           ,
           at
           whole
           allowance
           of
           all
           Provisions
           both
           good
           and
           wholesom
           ,
           having
           Oat-meal
           for
           Fish
           ,
           and
           four
           Tuns
           and
           an
           half
           of
           Brandy
           in
           lieu
           of
           Beer
           ,
           stores
           of
           all
           sorts
           compleat
           for
           twelve
           months
           ,
           with
           provision
           of
           Craft
           to
           take
           Fish
           and
           Fowls
           ,
           a
           seyne
           Net
           ,
           and
           hooks
           ,
           and
           lines
           ,
           and
           fisgigs
           ,
           and
           harping
           Irons
           ,
           twelve
           Fowling-pieces
           ,
           
           with
           shot
           ,
           and
           pigs
           of
           Lead
           to
           make
           Shot
           ,
           if
           occasion
           ,
           &c.
           
           And
           the
           
             Batchelour
             Pink
          
           ,
           burthen
           70
           Tuns
           ,
           with
           four
           great
           Ordnance
           ,
           and
           all
           other
           Munition
           proportionable
           ;
           mann'd
           with
           nineteen
           Men
           ,
           one
           Boy
           ,
           victualled
           for
           twelve
           months
           ,
           at
           whole
           allowance
           of
           all
           Provision
           good
           and
           wholesom
           ,
           as
           the
           Sweepstakes
           had
           ,
           and
           stores
           proportionable
           for
           the
           time
           ,
           and
           Craft
           to
           take
           Fish
           and
           Fowl
           ,
           &c.
           
        
         
           Having
           a
           sort
           of
           Goods
           to
           the
           value
           of
           three
           hundred
           pounds
           ,
           as
           followeth
           ,
           Knives
           ,
           Sissers
           ,
           Glasses
           ,
           Beads
           ,
           Hatchets
           ,
           Bills
           ,
           Hoes
           ,
           Nails
           ,
           Needles
           ,
           Pins
           ,
           Pipes
           ,
           Bells
           ,
           Boxes
           ,
           &c.
           
           Dassels
           Linnen
           ,
           Cloth
           ,
           Osenbrigs
           ,
           Tobacco
           ,
           and
           Pipes
           ,
           &c.
           to
           trade
           with
           the
           Natives
           ,
           at
           his
           Majesty's
           Charge
           .
        
         
           Wednesday
           September
           29.
           
           Hazy
           weather
           ,
           the
           Wind
           to
           the
           North-west
           and
           by
           West
           ,
           a
           fresh
           gale
           :
           I
           stood
           to
           the
           South-west-ward
           as
           near
           as
           I
           could
           ;
           this
           day
           at
           twelve
           a
           Clock
           ,
           the
           Lizard
           bore
           North
           of
           me
           a
           little
           Easterly
           ,
           distance
           about
           12
           Leagues
           ,
           according
           to
           my
           account
           ;
           Latitude
           by
           account
           ,
           is
           49
           d.
           35
           m.
           This
           day
           I
           spoke
           with
           a
           French
           Banker
           :
           Lizard
           in
           England
           lies
           in
           the
           Lat.
           of
           50
           d.
           10
           m.
           and
           in
           Longitude
           East
           ,
           from
           the
           Meridian
           of
           the
           West
           part
           of
           St.
           Michael
           ,
           one
           of
           the
           Islands
           of
           the
           Azores
           18
           d.
           30
           m.
           From
           the
           Lizard
           I
           take
           my
           departure
           ,
           and
           keep
           my
           daily
           account
           of
           the
           difference
           of
           my
           Longitude
           from
           that
           Meridian
           .
        
         
           October
           the
           17.
           
           I
           made
           the
           Madera
           ;
           which
           Island
           is
           high
           Land
           ,
           and
           irregular
           in
           Hills
           ,
           with
           Wood
           on
           the
           top
           and
           down
           the
           sides
           ;
           Planted
           with
           Vines
           :
           there
           is
           some
           Sugar
           made
           in
           the
           Island
           ;
           the
           Inhabitants
           Portugueses
           .
           The
           City
           of
           Fonchiale
           
           is
           the
           Metropolis
           ,
           and
           is
           situated
           in
           a
           Bay
           on
           the
           South
           part
           of
           the
           Island
           ,
           close
           to
           the
           Sea
           side
           ,
           walled
           next
           the
           Sea
           ,
           and
           well
           fortified
           with
           Ordnance
           ;
           fresh
           water
           comes
           running
           into
           the
           Sea
           in
           the
           middle
           of
           the
           Bay
           ,
           in
           a
           fair
           Rivulet
           from
           under
           an
           Arch
           in
           the
           Wall
           ;
           the
           shoar-sides
           are
           great
           pebble
           stones
           in
           the
           Bay
           ,
           and
           Rocks
           in
           the
           other
           places
           ;
           the
           Road
           is
           foul
           ground
           ,
           to
           the
           East
           part
           of
           it
           :
           the
           Ships
           ride
           in
           shot
           of
           Ordnance
           of
           the
           City
           :
           this
           City
           is
           about
           an
           English
           mile
           in
           length
           ,
           and
           three
           quarters
           of
           a
           mile
           in
           breadth
           .
        
         
           The
           Desarts
           are
           barren
           rocky
           Isles
           of
           a
           good
           heighth
           ,
           and
           lie
           at
           the
           South-east
           point
           of
           Madera
           ,
           above
           a
           mile
           distant
           from
           the
           shore
           ;
           there
           is
           water
           enough
           between
           Madera
           and
           the
           Desarts
           in
           the
           midway
           ,
           and
           no
           danger
           ;
           the
           Desarts
           trent
           to
           the
           South-east
           .
           Fonchiale
           Bay
           in
           the
           Isle
           of
           Madera
           lies
           in
           the
           Latitude
           of
           32
           d.
           10
           m.
           North
           ,
           and
           in
           Longitude
           West
           from
           the
           Lizard
           of
           England
           10
           d.
           1
           m.
           and
           Meridian
           distance
           143
           Leagues
           .
        
         
           Sunday
           being
           the
           17th
           .
           fair
           Weather
           and
           little
           wind
           at
           North-west
           ,
           Course
           by
           my
           Compass
           South-west
           .
           I
           make
           my
           true
           Course
           from
           Fonchiale
           Bay
           ,
           till
           to
           day
           at
           noon
           South-south-west
           ,
           distance
           ,
           sailed
           34
           miles
           six
           tenths
           departure
           West
           13
           miles
           ;
           Diff.
           Lat.
           00
           d.
           32
           m.
           Lat.
           by
           account
           31
           d.
           ●8
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           from
           the
           Lizard
           West
           ,
           147
           leagues
           ,
           1
           mile
           ,
           Longitude
           from
           the
           Lizard
           West
           10
           d.
           17
           m.
           Difference
           of
           Longitude
           from
           Fonchiale
           West
           00
           d.
           16
           m.
           To
           day
           at
           noon
           I
           saw
           the
           Island
           of
           Madera
           ,
           bearing
           N
           b.
           E
           :
           the
           body
           of
           the
           Isle
           distant
           by
           estimation
           11
           leagues
           ;
           it
           makes
           in
           a
           bluff
           body
           at
           the
           West
           end
           ,
           and
           trents
           to
           the
           
           East
           :
           Course
           by
           the
           Compass
           this
           afternoon
           SW
           .
           little
           wind
           to
           night
           ;
           I
           shaped
           my
           nearest
           Course
           for
           the
           Island
           of
           St.
           Jago
           with
           all
           the
           sail
           I
           could
           make
           ,
           the
           
             Batchelour
             Pink
          
           in
           Company
           ;
           I
           gave
           order
           to
           my
           Master
           to
           make
           the
           best
           of
           his
           way
           to
           St.
           Jago
           Island
           ,
           but
           not
           to
           leave
           the
           Company
           of
           the
           Batchelour
           .
        
         
           Saturday
           October
           23.
           
           The
           wind
           at
           N.
           b.
           E.
           a
           gale
           :
           this
           day
           in
           the
           forenoon
           I
           crossed
           the
           Tropick
           of
           Cancer
           ,
           all
           my
           men
           in
           good
           health
           ,
           I
           praise
           the
           Almighty
           God
           for
           it
           :
           many
           of
           my
           men
           that
           had
           been
           with
           me
           in
           the
           Indies
           formerly
           ,
           were
           let
           blood
           ;
           for
           I
           take
           bleeding
           in
           these
           hot
           Climates
           to
           be
           a
           great
           preserver
           of
           health
           ,
           diverting
           Calentures
           ;
           I
           experienc'd
           it
           in
           two
           Voyages
           before
           to
           the
           Island
           of
           St.
           Helena
           ,
           and
           in
           one
           to
           the
           Coast
           of
           Guinea
           ,
           where
           several
           of
           my
           men
           under
           that
           distemper
           ,
           were
           preserved
           by
           bleeding
           ;
           in
           all
           these
           Voyages
           I
           was
           never
           sick
           one
           day
           ,
           nor
           in
           two
           years
           time
           in
           the
           Mediterranean
           Sea
           ,
           nor
           at
           the
           Canaries
           ;
           for
           when
           I
           came
           near
           the
           Equinoctial
           I
           always
           breathed
           a
           Vein
           .
        
         
           Thursday
           October
           28.
           the
           Wind
           at
           East-North-East
           a
           stiff
           gale
           ;
           this
           Morning
           I
           saw
           the
           Isle
           of
           Mayo
           bearing
           S.
           b.
           W.
           distant
           by
           estimation
           eight
           Leagues
           ;
           it
           makes
           a
           high
           Hill
           ,
           and
           Craggy
           to
           the
           East
           part
           ,
           and
           low
           land
           towards
           the
           shore-side
           ,
           to
           the
           North-west
           part
           of
           the
           Island
           ;
           it
           lies
           from
           
             B●navist
             S.
          
           b.
           W.
           distant
           near
           18
           leagues
           .
           This
           day
           at
           11
           a
           Clock
           I
           anchored
           in
           the
           Road
           in
           seven
           fathom
           water
           ,
           sandy
           Ground
           ,
           about
           a
           mile
           from
           the
           shore
           ;
           the
           Northernmost
           point
           of
           the
           Road
           bearing
           
             N.
             N.
             W.
          
           half
           a
           point
           to
           the
           West
           ,
           and
           the
           Southern
           
           point
           of
           the
           Road
           ,
           bearing
           South-east
           from
           me
           ;
           distant
           about
           a
           mile
           and
           an
           half
           :
           there
           are
           craggy
           Rocks
           to
           the
           South
           of
           the
           Road
           on
           the
           shore
           side
           ,
           but
           to
           the
           North
           a
           low
           sandy
           shore
           ;
           the
           Road
           is
           on
           the
           North-west
           and
           by
           West
           part
           of
           the
           Island
           in
           a
           small
           sandy
           Bay
           ;
           there
           's
           the
           Salt-pond
           a
           bow
           's
           shot
           from
           the
           Sea
           in
           the
           low
           flat
           Land
           ;
           fresh
           water
           is
           very
           scarce
           here
           :
           I
           went
           ashore
           presently
           after
           I
           had
           anchored
           ,
           and
           found
           a
           heap
           of
           Salt
           of
           about
           20
           Tuns
           ;
           I
           got
           aboard
           again
           immediately
           ,
           and
           sent
           the
           Long-boat
           ashore
           ,
           which
           brought
           off
           2
           Tuns
           and
           ½
           ,
           the
           Suff
           came
           in
           so
           much
           that
           no
           more
           could
           be
           got
           off
           ;
           we
           halled
           the
           Seyne
           here
           ,
           and
           caught
           abundance
           of
           good
           Mullets
           ,
           with
           some
           Cavalle
           and
           silver
           Fish
           ;
           one
           of
           the
           Islanders
           a
           Negro
           came
           aboard
           ,
           whom
           I
           sent
           ashore
           ,
           to
           tell
           the
           People
           that
           if
           they
           brought
           down
           some
           Cattle
           I
           would
           buy
           some
           of
           them
           ;
           I
           rode
           here
           all
           Night
           ;
           fair
           Weather
           ,
           the
           Wind
           Easterly
           .
           This
           side
           of
           the
           Island
           is
           dry
           land
           without
           wood
           ;
           here
           are
           many
           Goats
           ,
           and
           Guinea
           Hens
           .
        
         
           Friday
           October
           29.
           fair
           Weather
           ,
           the
           wind
           at
           NE.
           a
           fine
           gale
           :
           this
           Morning
           I
           sent
           my
           Boat
           ashore
           ,
           and
           bought
           of
           the
           Islanders
           some
           Goats
           at
           ½
           a
           piece
           of
           Eight
           per
           Head
           ,
           and
           8
           Cows
           excellent
           good
           meat
           at
           6
           pieces
           of
           Eight
           a
           Cow
           ,
           giving
           the
           skins
           again
           ;
           my
           men
           caught
           a
           great
           many
           Fish
           with
           the
           Seyne
           ,
           which
           this
           day
           we
           split
           ,
           and
           laid
           in
           pickle
           four
           Hours
           ,
           then
           dried
           them
           to
           keep
           ,
           which
           they
           will
           a
           long
           time
           in
           any
           Climate
           ,
           as
           I
           have
           experienced
           in
           other
           Voyages
           ,
           and
           are
           very
           good
           Victuals
           at
           Sea
           :
           I
           made
           what
           dispatch
           I
           
           could
           to
           be
           gone
           for
           St.
           Jago
           Island
           .
           This
           day
           in
           the
           forenoon
           ,
           a
           Ship
           passed
           by
           to
           the
           Westward
           on
           the
           South
           side
           of
           the
           Isle
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           afternoon
           we
           saw
           several
           Ships
           coming
           from
           the
           Northward
           ,
           which
           were
           the
           Portuguese
           Fleet
           bound
           for
           Brazil
           ;
           they
           halled
           into
           
             Port
             Praya
          
           in
           the
           Isle
           of
           St.
           Jago
           to
           water
           :
           this
           night
           I
           weighed
           ,
           and
           stood
           away
           at
           twelve
           a
           Clock
           South-south-west
           for
           
             Port
             Praya
          
           ,
           with
           the
           Pink
           in
           Company
           ;
           I
           touched
           at
           the
           Isle
           of
           May
           for
           Salt
           ,
           which
           I
           knew
           would
           be
           a
           great
           help
           to
           get
           Provisions
           in
           the
           Voyage
           .
        
         
           Saturday
           October
           30.
           fair
           wind
           at
           North-east
           and
           by
           North
           a
           fresh
           gale
           .
           This
           Morning
           I
           steered
           South-west
           for
           the
           South
           side
           of
           St.
           Jago
           ,
           where
           is
           the
           Road
           of
           
             Port
             Praya
          
           ,
           lying
           near
           South-west
           from
           the
           Road
           of
           the
           Isle
           of
           May
           ,
           and
           distant
           nine
           Leagues
           .
           This
           day
           at
           12
           a
           Clock
           I
           cast
           my
           best
           Bower-anchor
           in
           
             Port
             Praya
          
           Road
           ,
           in
           10
           fathom
           rough
           Ground
           ,
           the
           East
           Point
           bore
           East
           of
           me
           ,
           and
           the
           West
           Point
           about
           West-south-west
           ,
           about
           half
           a
           mile
           off
           ;
           I
           could
           not
           go
           into
           the
           best
           of
           the
           Road
           ,
           the
           Portuguese
           Fleet
           of
           about
           thirty
           six
           Sail
           riding
           in
           it
           ;
           the
           Great
           
             Padre
             Eternel
          
           Admiral
           ,
           bound
           for
           Brazil
           ,
           is
           a
           very
           great
           Ship
           and
           well
           built
           ,
           they
           say
           she
           is
           in
           Burthen
           1700
           Tuns
           ,
           she
           hath
           Ports
           for
           three
           Tier
           of
           Guns
           flush
           ,
           but
           now
           she
           had
           but
           eighty
           ,
           and
           poorly
           mann'd
           with
           Seamen
           ,
           and
           so
           were
           all
           the
           rest
           ,
           six
           Frigats
           might
           have
           taken
           most
           of
           the
           Fleet.
           At
           my
           coming
           in
           to
           Anchor
           ,
           the
           Admiral
           saluted
           me
           with
           seven
           Guns
           ,
           I
           thanked
           him
           with
           as
           many
           ;
           Captain
           
             Francis
             Wilksheir
          
           in
           the
           Jerusalem
           fired
           five
           ,
           I
           returned
           
           him
           three
           ;
           so
           did
           the
           Reer-Admiral
           ,
           and
           I
           return'd
           the
           Complement
           in
           the
           like
           number
           ,
           several
           of
           the
           Fleet
           fired
           three
           ,
           whom
           I
           answer'd
           in
           conclusion
           with
           three
           for
           all
           .
           I
           rode
           on
           the
           broad
           side
           of
           the
           Admiral
           ,
           and
           saluted
           the
           Fort
           with
           five
           Guns
           ,
           which
           return'd
           three
           ,
           then
           I
           sent
           my
           Lieutenant
           ashore
           to
           ask
           leave
           of
           the
           Governour
           to
           water
           ,
           which
           he
           granted
           forthwith
           ;
           my
           Coopers
           ,
           got
           the
           Cask
           ready
           ,
           and
           this
           Evening
           put
           one
           boat
           's
           lading
           aboard
           .
        
         
           Sunday
           Octobor
           31.
           fair
           Weather
           ,
           the
           wind
           at
           North-east
           a
           fine
           gale
           .
           This
           Morning
           
             Don
             Carolus
          
           went
           ashore
           to
           Pryam
           ;
           with
           much
           ado
           I
           got
           off
           a
           boats
           lading
           of
           Water
           ,
           for
           the
           Portuguese
           boats
           were
           filling
           too
           ,
           and
           a
           great
           many
           Soldiers
           at
           the
           watering
           place
           snatch'd
           some
           of
           our
           mens
           Hats
           off
           ,
           and
           run
           away
           ,
           wherefore
           I
           would
           not
           let
           my
           men
           go
           any
           more
           this
           day
           for
           fear
           of
           quarreling
           .
           This
           Bay
           of
           
             Port
             Praya
          
           ,
           as
           they
           call
           it
           ,
           is
           no
           Port
           ,
           but
           a
           fine
           round
           Bay
           ,
           having
           high
           steep
           Cliffs
           on
           the
           East
           side
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           bottom
           a
           steep
           Hill
           ,
           where
           the
           Castle
           is
           ,
           that
           hath
           but
           four
           Guns
           ,
           and
           is
           of
           no
           force
           ;
           there
           is
           a
           small
           Fort
           on
           the
           top
           of
           a
           Hill
           on
           the
           East
           side
           ,
           which
           hath
           three
           Guns
           .
           On
           the
           North-west
           part
           of
           the
           Bay
           the
           shore
           is
           gravelly
           and
           sandy
           ,
           and
           there
           's
           a
           Grove
           of
           Coco-nut
           trees
           :
           A
           fresh
           water
           Rivulet
           runs
           down
           into
           the
           Valley
           ,
           and
           thence
           through
           the
           Sand
           soaks
           into
           the
           Sea
           :
           this
           Water
           is
           in
           great
           quantity
           ,
           very
           good
           ,
           and
           keeps
           well
           at
           Sea
           :
           to
           the
           west
           part
           of
           this
           Bay
           lies
           a
           small
           Island
           close
           on
           the
           shore
           ,
           which
           has
           Grass
           on
           it
           that
           may
           be
           cut
           off
           for
           Cattle
           ,
           which
           I
           did
           ;
           this
           Road
           is
           no
           safeguard
           for
           Shipping
           ,
           for
           a
           Man
           
           of
           War
           may
           take
           any
           Ship
           out
           of
           the
           Bay
           ,
           without
           receiving
           any
           damage
           from
           the
           Forts
           ashore
           ,
           and
           with
           Fire-Ships
           a
           whole
           Fleet
           may
           be
           spoiled
           at
           pleasure
           ;
           for
           it
           's
           a
           fresh
           gale
           every
           day
           ,
           and
           there
           's
           but
           two
           points
           of
           Land
           by
           which
           a
           man
           may
           fetch
           into
           any
           part
           of
           the
           Bay
           ;
           also
           the
           Bay
           lies
           open
           to
           the
           Sea
           from
           the
           East
           ,
           Southerly
           to
           the
           
             W.
             S.
             W.
          
           I
           called
           for
           my
           Lieutenants
           and
           Master
           ,
           and
           acquainted
           them
           ,
           that
           I
           had
           Orders
           to
           sail
           from
           thence
           to
           the
           Coast
           of
           America
           to
           the
           Southward
           of
           the
           River
           of
           Plate
           ,
           to
           the
           streights
           of
           Magellan
           ,
           through
           which
           we
           were
           to
           pass
           into
           the
           South
           Seas
           ,
           and
           that
           we
           must
           shape
           our
           Course
           to
           make
           the
           shortest
           way
           of
           it
           ,
           and
           be
           careful
           to
           keep
           Easterly
           enough
           of
           it
           ,
           to
           weather
           the
           shoals
           of
           Brazil
           ,
           called
           the
           Abroholls
           ,
           lying
           in
           and
           about
           eighteen
           degrees
           of
           Southerly
           Latitude
           ,
           for
           the
           Wind
           blows
           for
           the
           most
           part
           thereabouts
           between
           the
           Latitude
           of
           ten
           South
           ,
           and
           the
           Latitude
           of
           twenty
           South
           ,
           at
           East
           by
           South
           ,
           and
           East
           South-east
           fresh
           gales
           ;
           whilst
           this
           pass'd
           ,
           in
           came
           the
           Master
           ,
           and
           told
           me
           all
           things
           were
           stowed
           ,
           and
           the
           Wind
           at
           E.
           b.
           N.
           fresh
           ;
           I
           concluded
           with
           him
           that
           our
           best
           Course
           at
           present
           would
           be
           South
           and
           by
           East
           ,
           and
           as
           we
           got
           Southerly
           and
           the
           Wind
           grew
           large
           ,
           we
           might
           alter
           our
           Course
           when
           we
           would
           :
           we
           steered
           a
           Point
           or
           two
           from
           the
           Wind
           ,
           that
           the
           Ship
           might
           have
           fresh
           way
           through
           the
           Sea.
           I
           ordered
           my
           Master
           to
           steer
           South
           and
           by
           East
           by
           the
           Compass
           ,
           and
           my
           Lieutenant
           to
           call
           all
           hands
           to
           Prayer
           ,
           read
           Service
           ,
           and
           beg'd
           of
           God
           Almighty
           a
           prosperous
           Voyage
           ,
           continuance
           in
           Health
           ,
           and
           love
           to
           one
           another
           ,
           
             and
             that
             we
             might
             prosper
             in
             this
             Vndertaking
             ,
          
           &c.
           
        
         
           
           
             
               
                 
                   Instructions
                   for
                   Mr.
                   Humphrey
                   Fleming
                   ,
                   Commander
                   of
                   his
                   Majesty's
                   hired
                   Pink
                   the
                   Batchelour
                   ;
                   By
                   vertue
                   of
                   an
                   Order
                   from
                   His
                   Royal
                   Highness
                   ,
                   dated
                   the
                   twenty
                   ninth
                   day
                   of
                   August
                   1669.
                   to
                   me
                   directed
                   .
                
                 
                   YOU
                   are
                   hereby
                   required
                   to
                   sail
                   with
                   his
                   Majesties
                   hired
                   Pink
                   the
                   Batchelour
                   ,
                   which
                   you
                   are
                   Commander
                   of
                   ,
                   and
                   to
                   keep
                   Company
                   with
                   his
                   Majesties
                   Ship
                   the
                   Sweepstakes
                   to
                   the
                   Coast
                   of
                   America
                   to
                   the
                   Southward
                   of
                   
                     Rio
                     de
                     la
                     Plata
                  
                   ,
                   and
                   along
                   the
                   Coast
                   of
                   America
                   to
                   the
                   Southward
                   ,
                   till
                   you
                   come
                   to
                   the
                   Strights
                   of
                   Magellan
                   ,
                   lying
                   in
                   about
                   53
                   Degrees
                   of
                   South
                   Latitude
                   ;
                   through
                   which
                   you
                   are
                   to
                   pass
                   into
                   the
                   South
                   Sea
                   ,
                   and
                   sail
                   along
                   the
                   West
                   Coast
                   of
                   America
                   Northerly
                   ,
                   till
                   you
                   come
                   as
                   high
                   as
                   Baldavia
                   ,
                   which
                   lies
                   in
                   about
                   40
                   Degrees
                   of
                   South-lat
                   ▪
                   there
                   you
                   shall
                   receive
                   further
                   Orders
                   from
                   me
                   ,
                   or
                   in
                   my
                   absence
                   ,
                   from
                   the
                   Commander
                   in
                   Chief
                   on
                   board
                   his
                   Majesties
                   Ship
                   the
                   Sweepstakes
                   ,
                   in
                   case
                   you
                   keep
                   Company
                   with
                   her
                   ,
                   whose
                   Company
                   you
                   are
                   not
                   to
                   depart
                   from
                   or
                   leave
                   ,
                   upon
                   any
                   occasion
                   whatsoever
                   ,
                   as
                   you
                   will
                   answer
                   the
                   contrary
                   at
                   your
                   peril
                   ,
                   unless
                   you
                   have
                   Order
                   from
                   me
                   so
                   to
                   do
                   ,
                   or
                   in
                   my
                   absence
                   from
                   the
                   Commander
                   in
                   Chief
                   on
                   board
                   her
                   ;
                   You
                   are
                   also
                   to
                   understand
                   ,
                   that
                   you
                   are
                   to
                   be
                   employed
                   by
                   me
                   as
                   I
                   shall
                   see
                   occasion
                   to
                   employ
                   you
                   ,
                   to
                   discover
                   Lands
                   ,
                   Bays
                   ,
                   Havens
                   ,
                   Rivers
                   or
                   Streights
                   ,
                   &c.
                   
                
                 
                 
                   The
                   Design
                   of
                   this
                   Voyage
                   on
                   which
                   you
                   are
                   employed
                   ,
                   being
                   to
                   make
                   a
                   Discovery
                   both
                   of
                   the
                   Seas
                   and
                   Coasts
                   of
                   that
                   part
                   of
                   the
                   World
                   ,
                   and
                   if
                   possible
                   to
                   lay
                   the
                   foundation
                   of
                   a
                   Trade
                   there
                   .
                   You
                   are
                   not
                   to
                   meddle
                   with
                   the
                   Coast
                   of
                   America
                   ,
                   nor
                   send
                   on
                   shore
                   ,
                   unless
                   in
                   case
                   of
                   great
                   necessity
                   ,
                   till
                   you
                   get
                   to
                   the
                   Southward
                   of
                   
                     Rio
                     de
                     la
                     Plata
                  
                   ;
                   and
                   you
                   are
                   not
                   to
                   do
                   any
                   injury
                   to
                   such
                   Spaniards
                   as
                   you
                   shall
                   meet
                   with
                   ,
                   nor
                   meddle
                   with
                   any
                   place
                   where
                   they
                   are
                   planted
                   :
                   You
                   are
                   to
                   take
                   Observations
                   with
                   as
                   much
                   Accuracy
                   as
                   you
                   can
                   ,
                   and
                   also
                   to
                   cause
                   your
                   Mate
                   and
                   Company
                   to
                   do
                   the
                   like
                   ,
                   to
                   observe
                   all
                   Headlands
                   ,
                   Islands
                   ,
                   Bays
                   ,
                   Havens
                   ,
                   Roads
                   ,
                   Mouths
                   of
                   Rivers
                   ,
                   Rocks
                   ,
                   Shoals
                   ,
                   Soundings
                   ,
                   Courses
                   of
                   Tides
                   ,
                   flowings
                   and
                   settings
                   of
                   Currents
                   ,
                   where
                   you
                   come
                   ,
                   both
                   in
                   the
                   North
                   and
                   South
                   Seas
                   ,
                   &c.
                   and
                   cause
                   Draughts
                   and
                   Designs
                   to
                   be
                   made
                   of
                   them
                   ;
                   and
                   also
                   you
                   are
                   to
                   take
                   notice
                   of
                   all
                   Trade-Winds
                   ,
                   &c.
                   you
                   meet
                   with
                   ,
                   and
                   of
                   the
                   Weather
                   ,
                   and
                   especially
                   to
                   observe
                   Harbours
                   in
                   the
                   Streights
                   of
                   Magellan
                   ;
                   You
                   are
                   in
                   all
                   places
                   where
                   you
                   land
                   to
                   observe
                   the
                   nature
                   of
                   the
                   Soil
                   ,
                   and
                   what
                   Fruits
                   ,
                   Woods
                   ,
                   Grains
                   ,
                   Fowls
                   ,
                   and
                   Beasts
                   it
                   produces
                   ,
                   and
                   what
                   Stones
                   and
                   Minerals
                   ,
                   and
                   what
                   Fish
                   the
                   Rivers
                   and
                   the
                   Sea
                   doth
                   abound
                   with
                   ;
                   You
                   are
                   to
                   do
                   your
                   utmost
                   to
                   procure
                   of
                   the
                   Minerals
                   to
                   carry
                   to
                   Enggland
                   ,
                   and
                   to
                   deliver
                   them
                   to
                   His
                   Royal
                   Highness's
                   Secretary
                   .
                   You
                   are
                   also
                   to
                   mark
                   the
                   temper
                   and
                   inclinations
                   of
                   the
                   Indian
                   Inhabitants
                   ,
                   and
                   where
                   you
                   can
                   gain
                   any
                   Correspondence
                   with
                   them
                   ,
                   you
                   are
                   to
                   make
                   them
                   sensible
                   of
                   the
                   great
                   
                   Power
                   and
                   Wealth
                   of
                   the
                   Prince
                   and
                   Nation
                   to
                   whom
                   you
                   belong
                   ,
                   and
                   that
                   you
                   are
                   sent
                   on
                   purpose
                   to
                   set
                   on
                   foot
                   a
                   Trade
                   ,
                   and
                   to
                   make
                   Friendship
                   with
                   them
                   ;
                   but
                   above
                   all
                   for
                   the
                   Honour
                   of
                   our
                   Prince
                   and
                   Nation
                   ,
                   you
                   are
                   to
                   take
                   care
                   ,
                   that
                   your
                   Men
                   do
                   not
                   by
                   any
                   rude
                   behaviour
                   or
                   injuries
                   to
                   them
                   ,
                   create
                   an
                   Aversion
                   in
                   them
                   to
                   the
                   English
                   Nation
                   ;
                   but
                   that
                   on
                   the
                   other
                   side
                   they
                   endeavour
                   to
                   gain
                   their
                   Love
                   by
                   kind
                   and
                   civil
                   Usage
                   toward
                   them
                   ,
                   and
                   whosoever
                   shall
                   act
                   otherwise
                   ,
                   you
                   are
                   to
                   correct
                   him
                   or
                   them
                   for
                   so
                   doing
                   ,
                   which
                   you
                   are
                   to
                   acquaint
                   your
                   Men
                   with
                   ,
                   that
                   they
                   be
                   not
                   ignorant
                   .
                   You
                   are
                   to
                   be
                   careful
                   of
                   your
                   Provisions
                   and
                   Liquor
                   ,
                   and
                   to
                   husband
                   it
                   to
                   the
                   best
                   advantage
                   ,
                   that
                   there
                   be
                   no
                   wastful
                   Expence
                   made
                   of
                   it
                   ,
                   nor
                   of
                   your
                   Ships
                   Furniture
                   ,
                   as
                   Sails
                   ,
                   Anchors
                   ,
                   Cables
                   ,
                   and
                   Rigging
                   ,
                   &c.
                   and
                   that
                   you
                   endeavour
                   at
                   all
                   places
                   where
                   you
                   come
                   to
                   get
                   Provisions
                   ,
                   Wood
                   and
                   fresh
                   Water
                   ,
                   so
                   as
                   you
                   do
                   not
                   endanger
                   your
                   Ship
                   and
                   Men
                   ,
                   which
                   you
                   are
                   to
                   be
                   very
                   careful
                   of
                   ,
                   and
                   in
                   no
                   cause
                   to
                   expose
                   any
                   one
                   of
                   your
                   Men
                   to
                   the
                   hazard
                   of
                   his
                   Life
                   ,
                   but
                   always
                   be
                   careful
                   that
                   they
                   be
                   well
                   guarded
                   ,
                   and
                   be
                   watchful
                   ,
                   for
                   there
                   have
                   been
                   many
                   cut
                   off
                   by
                   their
                   own
                   neglect
                   .
                   You
                   are
                   to
                   be
                   careful
                   to
                   keep
                   a
                   good
                   Command
                   aboard
                   over
                   your
                   Men
                   ,
                   and
                   in
                   case
                   any
                   mutinous
                   practice
                   happen
                   under
                   your
                   Command
                   ,
                   you
                   are
                   forthwith
                   to
                   make
                   it
                   known
                   to
                   me
                   .
                   You
                   are
                   to
                   be
                   careful
                   to
                   have
                   your
                   Ship
                   kept
                   sweet
                   and
                   clean
                   for
                   the
                   preservation
                   of
                   your
                   Men's
                   healths
                   :
                   And
                   God
                   prosper
                   us
                   .
                
                 
                   
                   
                     Given
                     under
                     my
                     Hand
                     on
                     board
                     his
                     Majesties
                     Ship
                     the
                     Sweepstakes
                     ,
                     riding
                     at
                     the
                     Island
                     of
                     Saint
                     Jago
                     ,
                     in
                     
                       Port
                       Praya
                    
                     Road
                     ,
                     
                       November
                       5.
                       1669.
                       
                    
                  
                   
                     John
                     Narbrough
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     
                       To
                       Captain
                    
                     Humphrey
                     Fleming
                     ,
                     
                       Commander
                       of
                       the
                    
                     Batchelour
                     Pink
                     ,
                     these
                     .
                  
                
              
            
          
        
         
           
             
               
                 
                   Instructions
                   for
                   the
                   better
                   finding
                   each
                   other
                   ,
                   after
                   separation
                   by
                   Chance
                   ,
                   foul
                   Weather
                   ,
                   or
                   otherwise
                   .
                
                 
                   YOU
                   are
                   hereby
                   required
                   to
                   Sail
                   with
                   his
                   Majesties
                   hired
                   Ship
                   the
                   Batchelour
                   under
                   your
                   Command
                   ,
                   and
                   to
                   keep
                   Company
                   with
                   his
                   Majesties
                   Ship
                   the
                   Sweepstakes
                   ,
                   along
                   the
                   coast
                   of
                   America
                   ,
                   to
                   the
                   southward
                   of
                   
                     Rio
                     de
                     la
                     plata
                  
                   ,
                   to
                   Port
                   st
                   .
                   Julian
                   ,
                   on
                   that
                   Coast
                   ,
                   which
                   lies
                   in
                   about
                   49
                   d.
                   20
                   m.
                   South
                   Latitude
                   ,
                   which
                   your
                   Draughts
                   mention
                   .
                   In
                   case
                   of
                   Separation
                   at
                   Sea
                   in
                   this
                   Voyage
                   from
                   each
                   other
                   ,
                   you
                   are
                   to
                   use
                   all
                   means
                   to
                   endeavour
                   to
                   meet
                   again
                   ,
                   that
                   is
                   to
                   say
                   ,
                   by
                   looking
                   well
                   abroad
                   at
                   Sea
                   ,
                   and
                   so
                   to
                   observe
                   the
                   Order
                   in
                   your
                   failing
                   Instructions
                   ,
                   to
                   know
                   each
                   other
                   at
                   sight
                   :
                   the
                   next
                   Post
                   of
                   Rendezvouz
                   will
                   be
                   at
                   
                     Port
                     St.
                     Julian
                  
                   ,
                   which
                   is
                   on
                   the
                   coast
                   of
                   America
                   ,
                   as
                   is
                   said
                   before
                   ;
                   you
                   are
                   to
                   make
                   all
                   the
                   hast
                   that
                   you
                   can
                   thither
                   ,
                   and
                   to
                   stay
                   for
                   the
                   Sweepstakes
                   there
                   two
                   whole
                   Months
                   ,
                   if
                   you
                   get
                   thither
                   before
                   her
                   ,
                   and
                   she
                   shall
                   do
                   the
                   like
                   for
                   
                   you
                   ;
                   In
                   your
                   way
                   thither
                   ,
                   after
                   you
                   have
                   passed
                   to
                   the
                   Southward
                   of
                   
                     Rio
                     de
                     la
                     Plata
                  
                   ,
                   't
                   will
                   be
                   best
                   for
                   you
                   to
                   Sail
                   along
                   the
                   coast
                   of
                   America
                   ,
                   to
                   see
                   if
                   you
                   can
                   fall
                   with
                   me
                   ,
                   and
                   to
                   make
                   Cape
                   Blanco
                   which
                   lies
                   in
                   about
                   17
                   d.
                   20
                   m.
                   South
                   Latitude
                   ,
                   and
                   so
                   to
                   
                     Port
                     St.
                     Julian
                  
                   ,
                   where
                   you
                   are
                   to
                   stay
                   ;
                   you
                   may
                   also
                   enquire
                   for
                   me
                   at
                   
                     Port
                     Desire
                  
                   ,
                   which
                   lies
                   in
                   about
                   48
                   d.
                   South-Lat
                   .
                   If
                   I
                   shall
                   come
                   to
                   any
                   place
                   and
                   be
                   gone
                   again
                   before
                   you
                   come
                   thither
                   ,
                   I
                   will
                   leave
                   a
                   piece
                   of
                   Board
                   nailed
                   to
                   a
                   Pole
                   or
                   a
                   Tree
                   ,
                   engraven
                   ,
                   mentioning
                   the
                   Ship
                   's
                   name
                   ,
                   and
                   the
                   day
                   of
                   my
                   departure
                   ,
                   and
                   the
                   next
                   Port
                   I
                   intend
                   to
                   go
                   to
                   ;
                   I
                   desire
                   you
                   would
                   do
                   the
                   same
                   ,
                   and
                   at
                   
                     Port
                     St.
                     Julian
                  
                   I
                   will
                   do
                   likewise
                   ,
                   and
                   also
                   leave
                   an
                   Order
                   for
                   you
                   tied
                   to
                   a
                   Pole
                   ,
                   being
                   put
                   in
                   a
                   glass
                   Bottle
                   ;
                   the
                   Pole
                   shall
                   be
                   placed
                   on
                   the
                   Island
                   which
                   lies
                   in
                   the
                   Harbour
                   at
                   the
                   West
                   end
                   thereof
                   ,
                   where
                   I
                   shall
                   build
                   a
                   Tent
                   ;
                   pray
                   be
                   careful
                   to
                   look
                   for
                   it
                   ,
                   and
                   I
                   shall
                   do
                   the
                   same
                   for
                   you
                   ;
                   it
                   may
                   be
                   I
                   may
                   have
                   an
                   opportunity
                   to
                   touch
                   on
                   the
                   Coasts
                   as
                   I
                   sail
                   along
                   ,
                   if
                   I
                   can
                   find
                   any
                   Trade
                   with
                   the
                   Natives
                   ;
                   you
                   may
                   be
                   sure
                   where
                   ever
                   I
                   come
                   to
                   find
                   those
                   Memorials
                   of
                   my
                   being
                   there
                   before
                   you
                   ;
                   so
                   God
                   prosper
                   our
                   Intentions
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Given
                     under
                     my
                     Hand
                     at
                     
                       Port
                       Praya
                    
                     ,
                     Road
                     on
                     Board
                     the
                     Sweepstakes
                     riding
                     there
                     at
                     the
                     Island
                     of
                     St.
                     Jago
                     ,
                     
                       Novemb.
                       5.
                       1669.
                       
                    
                  
                   
                     John
                     Narbrough
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     To
                     Captain
                     
                       Humphrey
                       Fleming
                    
                     ,
                     Commander
                     of
                     the
                     
                       Batchelour
                       Pink.
                    
                     
                  
                
              
            
          
        
         
         
           DEcember
           4.
           many
           flying
           Fish
           seen
           to
           day
           ,
           and
           Bonetto's
           ,
           Sharkfish
           ,
           and
           Albycores
           ,
           a
           Fish
           larger
           than
           a
           Bonetto
           ,
           but
           of
           that
           Mackrel
           shape
           ,
           and
           feaverish
           Diet
           ,
           they
           live
           upon
           the
           flying
           Fish
           like
           the
           Bonetto's
           ;
           to
           day
           we
           caught
           some
           of
           them
           with
           Hooks
           ,
           and
           one
           Shark
           ;
           our
           Men
           eat
           them
           both
           ,
           and
           account
           the
           Shark
           a
           good
           Fish
           .
        
         
           December
           7.
           
           To
           day
           the
           Cooper
           found
           two
           Buts
           of
           Beer
           had
           leaked
           out
           :
           this
           day
           all
           of
           us
           drank
           Water
           only
           ,
           for
           it
           was
           ever
           my
           order
           that
           the
           meanest
           Boy
           in
           the
           Ship
           shoud
           have
           the
           same
           allowance
           with
           my self
           ,
           so
           that
           in
           general
           we
           all
           drank
           of
           the
           same
           Cask
           ,
           and
           eat
           one
           fort
           of
           provision
           ,
           as
           long
           as
           they
           lasted
           :
           I
           never
           permitted
           any
           Officer
           to
           have
           a
           better
           piece
           of
           Meat
           than
           what
           fell
           to
           his
           lot
           ,
           but
           one
           blinded
           with
           a
           Cloth
           serv'd
           every
           Man
           as
           they
           were
           called
           to
           touch
           and
           take
           ,
           by
           which
           means
           we
           had
           never
           any
           Difference
           upon
           that
           score
           .
        
         
           Saturday
           December
           18.
           
           All
           the
           Ship
           's
           company
           God
           be
           praised
           in
           good
           health
           ,
           most
           of
           them
           were
           let
           blood
           after
           I
           has
           cross'd
           the
           Tropick
           of
           Cancer
           .
           and
           none
           troubled
           with
           the
           Calenture
           in
           this
           Voyage
           .
        
         
           Whilst
           I
           am
           in
           the
           hot
           Weather
           I
           allow
           a
           quart
           of
           Vinegar
           to
           6
           Men
           per
           Week
           ,
           and
           also
           to
           eat
           with
           their
           Fresh
           fish
           ,
           which
           I
           didvide
           equally
           among
           the
           whole
           Ship
           's
           Company
           ,
           be
           it
           little
           or
           much
           ,
           or
           caught
           by
           whomsoever
           .
        
         
           Friday
           December
           24.
           
           I
           find
           great
           Difference
           within
           this
           48
           hours
           between
           my
           dead
           Account
           ,
           
           as
           we
           call
           it
           ,
           which
           is
           kept
           by
           the
           Log
           ,
           and
           the
           Observation
           I
           made
           these
           2
           days
           when
           the
           Sun
           was
           on
           the
           Meridian
           ;
           for
           I
           find
           I
           have
           gone
           more
           Southerly
           by
           12
           Miles
           than
           the
           Log
           allows
           ;
           I
           can't
           perceive
           any
           variation
           ,
           and
           the
           Log
           is
           well
           kept
           ,
           and
           the
           half
           minute
           Glass
           good
           ;
           I
           judge
           the
           Current
           sets
           to
           the
           Southward
           ,
           now
           the
           Winds
           are
           at
           the
           East
           ,
           and
           the
           Moon
           near
           the
           full
           .
        
         
           December
           30.
           
           This
           Afternoon
           I
           took
           an
           Azimuth
           ,
           and
           find
           six
           degrees
           ten
           minutes
           variation
           Easterly
           ,
           my
           Observation
           being
           of
           a
           good
           one
           ;
           fair
           Weather
           to
           Night
           at
           9
           a
           Clock
           ,
           
             Nebeles
             major
          
           was
           very
           visible
           in
           the
           Heaven
           ,
           and
           seems
           to
           be
           a
           piece
           of
           the
           Milky-way
           broke
           from
           it
           ;
           the
           Southern
           Constellations
           appear
           which
           are
           near
           the
           Pole
           Antarctick
           ,
           the
           Camelion
           ,
           the
           Bird
           of
           Paradise
           ,
           the
           Tail
           of
           little
           Hydra
           ,
           and
           the
           Water-snake
           ,
           which
           are
           all
           small
           Stars
           of
           the
           5th
           and
           6th
           Magnitude
           ;
           no
           Pole-star
           nor
           any
           Star
           fit
           for
           Observation
           to
           be
           seen
           within
           15
           degrees
           of
           the
           Pole
           ,
           the
           
             Crosers
             Stars
          
           of
           the
           first
           and
           second
           Magnitude
           are
           good
           for
           Observation
           ,
           and
           are
           in
           this
           form
           when
           they
           are
           on
           Meridian
           above
           the
           Pole.
           
        
         
         
         
           Some
           Fowls
           flying
           to
           and
           fro
           ,
           a
           kind
           of
           Sea-gulls
           ,
           and
           Gannet
           a
           black
           Sea-Fowl
           as
           big
           as
           a
           Pigeon
           ,
           and
           some
           large
           ones
           of
           that
           kind
           ,
           three
           Tropick
           Birds
           flying
           over
           the
           Ship
           of
           a
           grey
           Colour
           ,
           with
           a
           long
           spired
           Tail
           as
           big
           as
           Pigeons
           .
        
         
           Some
           Bonetto's
           taken
           to
           day
           ;
           A
           great
           broad
           flat
           Fish
           like
           a
           Scate
           following
           the
           Ship
           ,
           called
           by
           the
           seamen
           
             a
             String-Ray
          
           ,
           having
           a
           long
           Tail
           and
           a
           sharp
           bow
           at
           the
           end
           of
           it
           ,
           when
           it
           pricks
           a
           Man
           it
           puts
           him
           to
           much
           pain
           ,
           they
           are
           called
           by
           some
           Clock-fishes
           ,
           the
           lesser
           sort
           are
           good
           to
           eat
           .
        
         
           January
           5.
           
           Variation
           of
           the
           Compass
           by
           an
           Amplitude
           in
           the
           Morning
           06
           d.
           46
           m.
           East
           ;
           this
           Afternoon
           I
           brought
           the
           Ship
           to
           ,
           and
           sounded
           one
           hundred
           and
           eighty
           four
           fathom
           right
           down
           ,
           and
           had
           no
           ground
           ;
           I
           being
           thwart
           of
           the
           Shoals
           of
           Brazil
           caused
           me
           to
           sound
           ,
           I
           thought
           the
           Sea
           look'd
           whiter
           than
           usual
           ,
           variation
           at
           Sun-set
           6
           d.
           46
           m.
           East
           ;
           little
           Wind
           this
           Afternoon
           ,
           at
           East
           by
           North
           ;
           I
           made
           all
           the
           Sail
           I
           could
           ,
           Stay-sails
           ,
           Steering-sail
           ,
           Boats-sails
           and
           Bonadventure
           misen
           ,
           all
           set
           to
           draw
           away
           Southerly
           ,
           some
           Fowls
           flying
           over
           the
           ship
           which
           we
           call
           
             Men
             of
             war
          
           ,
           they
           prey
           on
           flying
           Fish
           ,
           &c.
           
        
         
           January
           14.
           
           Few
           Fish
           seen
           ,
           now
           and
           then
           a
           small
           Bonetto
           taken
           ,
           small
           Sea-Fowls
           call'd
           
             Black
             Nodies
          
           flying
           to
           and
           fro
           ,
           and
           2
           Curlieus
           flying
           to
           the
           Eastward
           .
        
         
           January
           24.
           
           I
           judge
           a
           Current
           sets
           out
           of
           the
           
             River
             of
             Plate
          
           ,
           for
           I
           find
           nine
           miles
           more
           to
           the
           Southward
           than
           I
           expected
           ;
           I
           have
           been
           careful
           of
           my
           Course
           and
           Variation
           ,
           which
           is
           but
           18
           
             d
             ▪
          
           
           20
           m.
           East
           ,
           by
           an
           amplitude
           taken
           to
           Night
           ;
           I
           am
           open
           of
           the
           mouth
           of
           the
           River
           of
           plate
           ,
           sounded
           to
           Night
           ,
           but
           no
           ground
           at
           one
           hundred
           and
           forty
           five
           Fathom
           ;
           Wind
           at
           North
           and
           by
           East
           ,
           all
           Night
           close
           Weather
           ;
           I
           steered
           South-west
           and
           by
           South
           .
        
         
           Monday
           January
           31.
           
           Calm
           this
           Morning
           at
           8
           a
           Clock
           the
           Wind
           came
           to
           the
           North-west
           a
           fine
           gale
           ;
           at
           eleven
           a
           Clock
           the
           Wind
           went
           round
           the
           Compass
           ,
           and
           came
           to
           North
           ;
           with
           much
           thunder
           ,
           lightning
           ,
           and
           some
           rain
           ;
           very
           dark
           Clouds
           ,
           cold
           hasey
           Weather
           ;
           several
           spots
           of
           Sea-weeds
           driving
           in
           the
           Sea
           ,
           and
           a
           great
           many
           Sea-fowls
           of
           a
           brown
           colour
           swimming
           in
           it
           :
           smoath
           Water
           ;
           Course
           steered
           is
           South-west
           by
           my
           Compass
           ;
           this
           day
           one
           main
           shroud
           and
           one
           fore-shroud
           broke
           ,
           and
           to
           strope
           of
           the
           Main-jeer
           block
           ;
           Variation
           of
           Sun-rising
           by
           an
           Amplitude
           is
           19
           d.
           43
           m.
           East
           ;
           all
           my
           Men
           in
           good
           health
           ,
           God
           be
           praised
           .
        
         
           All
           the
           Albycores
           ,
           Bonettos
           ,
           and
           flying
           Fish
           have
           quite
           left
           the
           Ship
           ;
           no
           Fish
           to
           be
           seen
           but
           Whales
           .
        
         
           Tuesday
           February
           1.
           
           Cloudy
           foggy
           Weather
           this
           Morning
           ,
           and
           little
           Wind
           at
           South-east
           .
           I
           stood
           to
           the
           South-westward
           ,
           I
           saw
           abundance
           of
           Sea-fowl
           flying
           to
           and
           fro
           ;
           striking
           about
           the
           weeds
           for
           small
           Fish
           ,
           several
           beds
           of
           Sea-weeds
           driving
           by
           the
           Ship
           ;
           it
           fell
           calm
           this
           Afternoon
           ;
           many
           small
           Shrimps
           about
           the
           Ship
           ,
           and
           eight
           young
           Seal-fishes
           close
           to
           it
           ;
           they
           were
           as
           big
           as
           an
           ordinary
           Spaniel-dog
           ,
           of
           a
           black
           colour
           ,
           and
           went
           away
           to
           the
           Westward
           ;
           this
           Afternoon
           a
           fresh
           gale
           at
           South-south-east
           ;
           I
           steer'd
           
           away
           Southward
           and
           by
           West
           by
           my
           Compass
           ;
           the
           Air
           was
           cold
           here
           on
           a
           sudden
           ,
           as
           't
           is
           in
           England
           in
           September
           .
           These
           Seas
           are
           very
           much
           exposed
           to
           sudden
           Gusts
           and
           variable
           Winds
           ,
           for
           the
           Wind
           has
           run
           round
           the
           Compass
           twice
           or
           thrice
           a
           day
           these
           3
           day
           ,
           the
           Sea-water
           is
           changed
           whiter
           then
           the
           usual
           colour
           ,
           whence
           I
           conjecture
           ,
           I
           must
           be
           in
           Soundings
           ,
           also
           by
           my
           account
           of
           Longitude
           ,
           kept
           from
           the
           Lizard
           ,
           I
           am
           not
           1
           d.
           28
           m.
           off
           from
           land
           ,
           according
           to
           
           Mercator's
           Draught
           :
           This
           Evening
           I
           sounded
           ,
           but
           had
           no
           ground
           at
           130
           Fathom
           ;
           Wind
           at
           South
           a
           fine
           gale
           :
           I
           steer'd
           in
           West-south-west
           ;
           at
           ten
           a
           Clock
           to
           Night
           ,
           I
           observed
           the
           Water
           to
           riple
           as
           if
           it
           were
           over
           a
           shoal
           ,
           and
           had
           ground
           at
           seventy
           Fathom
           ;
           I
           caused
           the
           Head-sails
           to
           be
           braced
           to
           the
           Mast
           ,
           and
           sounded
           ;
           sine
           red
           Sand
           inclining
           to
           gray
           at
           70
           Fathom
           .
        
         
           February
           2.
           
           Meridian
           distance
           from
           the
           Lizard
           ,
           West
           839
           Leagues
           ,
           2
           miles
           〈◊〉
           ;
           Longitude
           at
           Noon
           from
           the
           Lizard
           West
           49
           deg
           .
           43
           m.
           little
           Wind
           this
           Afternoon
           ,
           and
           fair
           Weather
           ;
           we
           lay
           sometimes
           one
           way
           ,
           sometimes
           another
           ;
           Wind
           at
           South-west
           and
           by
           South
           a
           small
           gale
           .
           I
           hoisted
           out
           my
           Boat
           ,
           and
           sounded
           ,
           but
           no
           ground
           at
           140
           Fathoms
           ;
           I
           tried
           the
           Current
           with
           my
           Boat
           ,
           but
           found
           little
           or
           none
           worth
           notice
           :
           the
           Sea
           ripled
           in
           many
           places
           ;
           I
           sounded
           on
           them
           ,
           but
           no
           ground
           at
           108
           Fathom
           ;
           several
           Beds
           of
           Sea-weed
           driving
           to
           and
           fro
           in
           knots
           ;
           these
           Weeds
           are
           five
           or
           six
           Fathom
           long
           ,
           in
           strings
           ,
           with
           broad
           leaves
           on
           them
           of
           a
           brown
           colour
           ,
           at
           the
           root
           hangs
           a
           Clod
           or
           Rock
           of
           2
           or
           3
           pound
           weight
           ;
           several
           Sea-Fowls
           
           flying
           and
           swimming
           near
           the
           Ship
           ;
           being
           quite
           clam
           ,
           my
           Men
           kill'd
           some
           of
           them
           with
           their
           Birding-pieces
           ,
           for
           they
           were
           very
           tame
           ,
           not
           moving
           at
           the
           report
           of
           of
           a
           Gun
           ;
           they
           are
           very
           like
           to
           Sea-Gulls
           ,
           and
           good
           meet
           ;
           some
           Seals
           and
           Whales
           seen
           .
        
         
           February
           5.
           were
           seen
           several
           beds
           of
           Rock-weed
           ,
           and
           Sea-Fowls
           ,
           much
           like
           Gannets
           ;
           some
           black
           ,
           others
           white
           ,
           pied
           ,
           and
           grey
           ;
           small
           Seal-fishes
           like
           so
           many
           Dogs
           ,
           for
           their
           Heads
           resemble
           Bull-dogs
           ,
           which
           they
           'l
           keep
           above
           Water
           a
           long
           time
           ,
           and
           look
           at
           the
           Ship
           ;
           they
           are
           very
           nimble
           at
           diving
           and
           skipping
           out
           of
           the
           Water
           :
           This
           Afternoon
           at
           seven
           a
           Clock
           I
           was
           in
           the
           Latitude
           of
           41
           degrees
           South
           ,
           and
           Longitude
           ,
           West
           from
           the
           Lizard
           of
           England
           ,
           52
           deg
           .
           and
           50
           min.
           and
           in
           Meridian
           distance
           ▪
           from
           the
           Lizard
           895
           Leagues
           ;
           Meridian
           distance
           from
           
             Port
             Praya
          
           ,
           616
           Leagues
           ,
           Longitude
           from
           
             Port
             Praya
          
           ,
           West
           ,
           36
           d.
           34
           m.
           
        
         
           This
           Night
           I
           advised
           with
           
             Don
             Carolus
          
           where
           it
           would
           be
           best
           for
           us
           to
           hale
           in
           with
           the
           Land
           ,
           in
           what
           Latitude
           ,
           or
           at
           what
           Cape
           or
           Harbour
           on
           this
           Coast
           of
           America
           ,
           being
           now
           to
           the
           South-ward
           of
           the
           River
           of
           Plate
           ,
           and
           according
           to
           my
           Instructions
           ,
           before
           the
           Coast
           to
           be
           discover'd
           ,
           and
           a
           Trade
           set
           on
           foot
           with
           the
           Natives
           ;
           He
           told
           me
           I
           might
           do
           what
           I
           would
           ,
           for
           he
           did
           not
           understand
           the
           Coast
           ,
           nor
           where
           't
           was
           inhabited
           ;
           't
           was
           his
           whole
           Discourse
           in
           the
           Voyage
           ,
           that
           he
           had
           been
           here
           in
           a
           Galley
           ,
           and
           knew
           all
           the
           Coasts
           from
           the
           River
           of
           Plate
           to
           the
           Streights
           ,
           and
           thorow
           the
           Streights
           all
           along
           the
           West
           Coast
           
           to
           Baldavia
           and
           Lima
           ;
           being
           arrived
           here
           ,
           as
           far
           as
           I
           can
           perceive
           by
           him
           ,
           he
           knows
           nothing
           of
           the
           matter
           ,
           nor
           any
           thing
           appertaining
           to
           Navigation
           ;
           all
           I
           can
           fancy
           of
           him
           is
           ,
           that
           he
           may
           have
           liv'd
           with
           a
           West
           -
           Indian
           Governour
           ,
           whom
           he
           has
           heard
           talk
           of
           these
           Parts
           .
        
         
           February
           8.
           at
           7
           a
           Clock
           this
           Afternoon
           the
           Wind
           came
           to
           the
           West
           South-west
           ,
           a
           stiff
           gale
           .
           I
           stood
           to
           the
           Southward
           ;
           much
           Rock-weed
           pass'd
           by
           the
           Ship
           to
           day
           ,
           and
           several
           Sea-Fowls
           seen
           ;
           very
           cold
           for
           the
           Season
           ,
           being
           Summer
           ,
           which
           
             Don
             Carolus
          
           began
           to
           complain
           of
           ,
           and
           told
           me
           ,
           he
           did
           not
           think
           we
           should
           have
           come
           so
           far
           Southerly
           ;
           I
           shew'd
           him
           by
           my
           Plates
           how
           far
           we
           were
           to
           go
           through
           the
           Streights
           ,
           and
           along
           the
           West
           Coast
           ;
           he
           said
           ,
           the
           Spaniards
           went
           to
           Chile
           a
           nearer
           way
           ;
           I
           answer'd
           ,
           't
           was
           into
           the
           River
           of
           Plate
           and
           over
           Land
           ,
           which
           we
           could
           not
           do
           .
        
         
           My
           Company
           are
           all
           in
           good
           health
           ,
           but
           some
           of
           a
           puny
           Race
           grow
           weak
           in
           being
           so
           long
           on
           Shipboard
           ;
           I
           give
           them
           Vinegar
           once
           a
           Week
           ,
           which
           is
           very
           good
           to
           prevent
           the
           Scurvy
           in
           their
           Mouths
           ;
           also
           I
           order'd
           every
           Man
           to
           wash
           his
           Mouth
           ,
           Face
           and
           Hands
           before
           the
           receive
           his
           daily
           Allowance
           of
           Bread
           ,
           and
           appointed
           one
           Man
           to
           see
           it
           performed
           ;
           if
           any
           neglected
           it
           ,
           the
           Steward
           kept
           their
           Allowance
           for
           one
           day
           ;
           likewise
           every
           Man
           is
           commanded
           to
           keep
           himself
           clean
           ,
           and
           free
           from
           Lice
           ,
           upon
           forfeiture
           of
           his
           daily
           Allowance
           to
           the
           Party
           accusing
           him
           ;
           by
           these
           means
           the
           Ship
           is
           kept
           neat
           ,
           sweet
           and
           clean
           ,
           tho'
           the
           dirty
           foggy
           Weather
           is
           a
           great
           Enemy
           to
           this
           Discipline
           .
        
         
         
           February
           19.
           
           I
           sounded
           often
           to
           day
           ,
           and
           had
           fifty
           and
           fifty
           three
           Fathom
           ;
           dark
           black
           Sand
           wth
           some
           bright
           fine
           Sand
           in
           it
           ;
           Beds
           of
           Rock-weed
           ,
           Seals
           ,
           and
           Porpoises
           ,
           such
           as
           are
           in
           the
           European
           Seas
           ,
           seen
           to
           day
           ;
           three
           Whales
           ,
           many
           Fowls
           flying
           about
           ▪
           and
           some
           Penguins
           in
           the
           Sea
           ,
           swimming
           near
           the
           Ships
           ;
           at
           2
           a
           Clock
           in
           the
           Afternoon
           the
           Wind
           was
           at
           E.
           b.
           S.
           a
           stout
           gale
           and
           a
           great
           Sea
           ;
           I
           stood
           to
           the
           Southward
           ,
           close
           haled
           under
           my
           Courses
           ;
           the
           Pink
           half
           a
           Mile
           to
           Wind-ward
           of
           me
           udner
           her's
           ;
           she
           out-sails
           us
           now
           it
           blows
           ,
           and
           puts
           us
           past
           our
           Top-fails
           ,
           and
           steers
           along
           with
           us
           with
           only
           her
           Main-sail
           set
           ;
           the
           Sea
           runs
           lofty
           .
        
         
           Monday
           February
           21.
           
           At
           a
           quarter
           of
           an
           hour
           past
           eight
           this
           Morning
           I
           saw
           the
           Land
           bearing
           West
           of
           me
           ,
           and
           distant
           about
           4
           Leagues
           :
           I
           sounded
           ,
           and
           had
           21
           Fathom
           ;
           small
           Stones
           and
           Sand
           ;
           still
           I
           stood
           in
           West
           by
           my
           Compass
           .
           The
           Land
           makes
           but
           an
           ordinary
           heighth
           towards
           the
           Sea
           side
           ,
           but
           farther
           up
           ,
           round
           high
           Hills
           ,
           and
           looks
           reddish
           ;
           the
           Northermost
           Land
           I
           could
           see
           ,
           which
           was
           
             Cape
             Blanco
          
           ,
           bore
           North-north-west
           of
           me
           about
           two
           Leagues
           ,
           and
           the
           Southermost
           Land
           at
           the
           face
           of
           the
           Cape
           .
        
         
           The
           Land
           trented
           away
           to
           te
           Southward
           of
           me
           Southwesterly
           ,
           of
           an
           ordinary
           height
           by
           the
           Water
           side
           ,
           but
           up
           in
           the
           Land
           are
           Hills
           like
           Tables
           on
           the
           top
           ,
           a
           little
           higher
           than
           the
           rest
           ;
           the
           Land
           makes
           in
           Hills
           and
           Valleys
           all
           along
           ,
           like
           Downs
           of
           an
           ordinary
           heighth
           ;
           at
           nine
           a
           Clock
           this
           Morning
           I
           braced
           the
           Head-sails
           to
           the
           Mast
           ,
           and
           lay
           so
           half
           an
           hour
           till
           the
           Fog
           cleared
           up
           ,
           that
           I
           might
           make
           
           the
           Land
           plainly
           ,
           being
           within
           five
           miles
           of
           the
           shore
           side
           ,
           which
           made
           a
           kind
           of
           Bay
           ,
           breached
           on
           the
           shore
           ;
           I
           sounded
           ,
           and
           at
           17
           Fathom
           had
           rough
           ground
           ,
           with
           some
           small
           stones
           drawn
           up
           in
           the
           Tallow
           of
           the
           Lead
           ,
           which
           was
           dinted
           by
           Rocks
           ;
           between
           nine
           and
           ten
           a
           Clock
           there
           was
           a
           fine
           clear
           ,
           by
           which
           I
           saw
           the
           Land
           very
           plainly
           ;
           it
           look'd
           reddish
           like
           seared
           Grass
           ;
           no
           Woods
           to
           be
           seen
           on
           any
           of
           the
           Hills
           or
           Valleys
           ,
           but
           all
           as
           bare
           as
           the
           Grass-Downs
           in
           England
           ;
           I
           durst
           not
           send
           my
           Boat
           a-shore
           for
           fear
           of
           losing
           her
           in
           the
           Fog
           ,
           or
           being
           sunk
           at
           the
           shore
           ,
           whereon
           the
           Sea
           breaks
           very
           much
           :
           the
           Wind
           was
           at
           North
           and
           by
           East
           ;
           a
           fresh
           gale
           blew
           almost
           along
           the
           shore
           ,
           and
           being
           out
           but
           24
           hours
           before
           ,
           made
           the
           Sea
           run
           high
           ;
           the
           Land
           lies
           by
           the
           Sea-side
           South-south-west
           ,
           and
           North-north-east
           ,
           as
           far
           as
           I
           could
           see
           to
           the
           Southward
           ;
           no
           fire
           or
           smoak
           to
           be
           see
           upon
           the
           Land.
           
        
         
           Course
           made
           true
           after
           several
           Courses
           ,
           from
           yesterday
           Noon
           till
           to
           day
           at
           nine
           a
           Clock
           ,
           when
           I
           was
           3
           Leagues
           off
           the
           Land
           ;
           true
           Course
           is
           West
           6
           d.
           50
           m.
           Northerly
           distance
           ;
           sailed
           fifty
           miles
           seven
           tenths
           .
           Departure
           West
           ,
           50
           miles
           ;
           difference
           of
           Longitude
           West
           1
           d.
           15
           m.
           difference
           of
           Latitude
           North
           0d
           .
           6
           m.
           Latitude
           by
           account
           is
           47
           d.
           14
           m.
           South
           ;
           no
           Observation
           this
           three
           days
           being
           foggy
           Weather
           .
        
         
           Meridian
           distance
           from
           the
           Lizard
           West
           1014
           League
           ,
           1
           mile
           ,
           7
           tenths
           ,
           Longitude
           at
           9
           a
           Clock
           ,
           from
           the
           Lizard
           ,
           West
           ,
           61
           d.
           56
           m.
           6
           tenths
           ,
           Longitude
           from
           
             Port
             Praya
          
           West
           ,
           44
           deg
           .
           38
           m.
           5
           tenths
           .
           Meridian
           distance
           from
           
             Port
             Praya
          
           West
           ,
           
           735
           Leagues
           ,
           1
           mile
           ,
           5
           tenths
           .
           Variation
           of
           the
           Compass
           Easterly
           ,
           18
           Degrees
           .
        
         
           I
           concluded
           we
           had
           shot
           past
           
             Port
             Desier
          
           Harbour
           in
           the
           Fog
           ,
           for
           the
           Islands
           and
           Rocks
           which
           we
           saw
           ,
           were
           Penguin
           ,
           and
           other
           Isles
           lying
           about
           it
           ,
           which
           lies
           to
           the
           Southward
           of
           the
           Harbour
           of
           
             Port
             Desier
          
           .
           Many
           Seals
           ,
           Penguins
           ,
           pied
           Porpoises
           ,
           and
           several
           Sea
           Fowls
           ,
           &c.
           seen
           to
           day
           .
        
         
           Thursday
           Febr.
           24.
           
           Hasey
           Weather
           ;
           Wind
           at
           West-north-west
           ,
           a
           fresh
           gale
           .
           I
           sent
           Men
           up
           to
           the
           Top-mast-head
           to
           look
           abroad
           ;
           this
           Morning
           no
           sight
           of
           the
           Pink
           ;
           I
           judge
           she
           must
           be
           in
           
             Port
             Desier
          
           :
           I
           weighed
           about
           8
           a
           Clock
           this
           Morning
           ,
           and
           stood
           to
           the
           Northward
           with
           my
           Ship
           ;
           I
           went
           in
           my
           Pinnace
           along
           the
           shore
           to
           the
           Northward
           ,
           whilst
           the
           Ship
           sail'd
           in
           the
           Offing
           ,
           about
           two
           Leagues
           from
           the
           shore
           :
           the
           Shore-side
           is
           in
           Beaches
           and
           scatter'd
           Rocks
           ;
           in
           many
           places
           the
           Tide
           of
           Flood
           was
           with
           us
           :
           at
           the
           North-end
           of
           
             Seals
             Bay
          
           ,
           lies
           a
           small
           rocky
           Island
           copling
           up
           like
           a
           Haycock
           .
           It
           is
           cover'd
           with
           grey-colour'd
           Fowls
           Dung
           ;
           a
           very
           strong
           Tide
           runs
           here
           ,
           between
           the
           Island
           and
           the
           Main
           ,
           't
           is
           a
           little
           more
           than
           a
           Cables
           length
           from
           the
           Point
           of
           the
           Main
           ;
           there
           's
           a
           great
           many
           broken
           Rocks
           about
           it
           by
           the
           Sea-side
           ;
           here
           the
           main
           Land
           is
           low
           and
           sandy
           ,
           up
           the
           Country
           in
           large
           Downs
           and
           Hills
           ;
           without
           Wood
           or
           fresh
           Water
           any
           where
           :
           On
           this
           Island
           are
           abundance
           of
           Seals
           ,
           and
           Sea
           Fowls
           ;
           we
           gave
           it
           the
           name
           of
           Tomahauke
           Island
           ,
           from
           an
           Indian
           Club
           lost
           here
           ,
           called
           by
           the
           Caribbe-Indians
           at
           Surinam
           a
           Temahauke
           ,
           't
           is
           all
           a
           craggy
           Rock
           ,
           a
           little
           bigger
           than
           Seal-Island
           ,
           and
           
           is
           eight
           Leagues
           to
           the
           North-north-east
           :
           distant
           from
           it
           to
           the
           Northwest
           of
           this
           Island
           ,
           is
           a
           deep
           rounding
           Bay
           ,
           called
           in
           the
           Charts
           
             Spiring's
             Bay
          
           ,
           wherein
           lie
           three
           small
           Islands
           of
           an
           indifferent
           height
           :
           the
           Land
           ,
           in
           the
           Country
           over
           this
           Bay
           is
           large
           high
           Hills
           ,
           Rocks
           lie
           in
           the
           North
           part
           of
           the
           Bay
           ;
           I
           cross'd
           it
           in
           the
           Pinnace
           ,
           amd
           sounded
           as
           I
           went
           over
           ,
           and
           had
           21
           Fathom
           ,
           rough
           ground
           in
           the
           mid-way
           :
           't
           is
           seven
           Miles
           broad
           ,
           and
           near
           3
           Leagues
           deep
           ;
           it
           rounds
           with
           a
           turning
           up
           to
           the
           North-northwest
           ward
           ,
           behind
           a
           Point
           farther
           than
           I
           saw
           ;
           upon
           which
           rounding
           Point
           stand
           black
           Rocks
           ,
           which
           make
           like
           a
           ragged
           Building
           ,
           and
           a
           Tower
           in
           it
           :
           at
           my
           coming
           in
           with
           the
           Land
           ,
           I
           sail'd
           close
           under
           this
           shoar
           with
           my
           Boat
           ;
           the
           shore
           is
           steep
           ,
           black
           Rocks
           ,
           and
           low
           Bays
           ,
           with
           Pebble-stones
           and
           sandy
           Beaches
           ;
           green
           Grass
           on
           the
           Hills
           ,
           no
           Wood
           nor
           fresh
           Water
           to
           be
           seen
           ;
           at
           the
           North-east
           Point
           of
           this
           Spiring's-Bay
           ,
           the
           Land
           makes
           out
           full
           like
           a
           foreland
           ;
           a
           fair
           high
           Land
           in
           large
           plain
           Hills
           ,
           with
           sandy
           small
           Bays
           ;
           at
           the
           face
           of
           this
           Foreland
           lie
           six
           rocky
           Islands
           ;
           one
           is
           a
           Musket-shot
           off
           the
           Main
           ,
           the
           rest
           farther
           off
           ;
           the
           outwardmost
           is
           the
           biggest
           ,
           a
           Mile
           from
           the
           Point
           of
           the
           Main
           ,
           and
           is
           called
           Penguin-Island
           ;
           it
           is
           indifferent
           high
           at
           the
           ends
           and
           low
           in
           the
           middle
           ;
           't
           is
           near
           three
           quarters
           of
           a
           Mile
           long
           ,
           North-north-east
           and
           South-south-west
           ,
           and
           near
           half
           a
           Mile
           broad
           East
           and
           West
           ;
           it
           is
           all
           craggy
           Rocks
           ,
           except
           in
           the
           lowest
           part
           of
           the
           middle
           ,
           which
           is
           gravelly
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           Summer
           time
           had
           a
           little
           green
           Grass
           ;
           the
           great
           black
           Gannets
           lay
           their
           Eggs
           here
           ,
           and
           the
           Penguins
           ,
           
           all
           over
           the
           Island
           upon
           and
           under
           the
           Rocks
           in
           Holes
           ;
           Seals
           lie
           all
           about
           the
           sides
           ,
           on
           the
           tops
           of
           the
           highest
           Rocks
           and
           in
           the
           middle
           of
           it
           ;
           the
           number
           of
           Seals
           ,
           Penguins
           ,
           and
           Sea-Fowl
           upon
           these
           Islands
           ,
           is
           alsmost
           incredible
           to
           them
           that
           never
           saw
           them
           ;
           for
           the
           multitude
           of
           each
           Creature
           that
           's
           there
           daily
           ,
           is
           numberless
           the
           Six
           Islands
           are
           full
           of
           Seals
           ,
           but
           the
           Penguins
           frequent
           the
           biggest
           most
           ;
           I
           put
           a-shore
           at
           one
           of
           them
           ,
           and
           took
           into
           my
           Boat
           three
           hundred
           Penguins
           ,
           in
           less
           than
           half
           an
           hour
           ,
           and
           could
           have
           taken
           three
           thousand
           in
           the
           time
           ,
           if
           my
           Boat
           would
           have
           carried
           'em
           ,
           for
           't
           is
           but
           driving
           'em
           in
           flocks
           to
           the
           shore
           ,
           by
           the
           Boats
           side
           ,
           where
           two
           or
           three
           Men
           knock
           them
           on
           the
           head
           with
           short
           Truncheons
           ,
           and
           the
           rest
           heave
           them
           into
           the
           Boat
           ;
           the
           Seals
           will
           run
           over
           a
           Man
           ,
           if
           he
           does
           not
           avoid
           'em
           ;
           mean
           time
           the
           Ship
           was
           standing
           to
           the
           Northward
           ;
           about
           2
           Leagues
           off
           many
           broken
           Rocks
           and
           foul
           ground
           lie
           among
           these
           Islands
           ,
           and
           without
           the
           Point
           of
           the
           outermost
           it
           makes
           a
           great
           ripling
           ,
           which
           is
           the
           strength
           of
           the
           Tide
           ,
           reversed
           from
           the
           Islands
           aginst
           the
           other
           Tide
           ;
           to
           the
           Northward
           of
           these
           Islands
           is
           a
           Bay
           ,
           four
           Leagues
           long
           ,
           and
           a
           League
           and
           half
           deep
           ;
           in
           the
           Northwest
           thereof
           lies
           the
           Harbour
           of
           
             Port
             Desier
          
           ,
           which
           we
           could
           see
           from
           
             Penguin
             Island
             's
          
           bearing
           North-north-west
           from
           
             Penguin
             Island
          
           ,
           distant
           about
           3
           Leagues
           :
           about
           the
           middle
           of
           this
           Bay
           are
           steep
           white
           Cliffs
           ,
           near
           two
           miles
           long
           ;
           the
           upper
           part
           of
           the
           Cliff
           has
           black
           streaks
           down
           a
           fourth
           part
           ,
           caused
           by
           the
           Water
           draining
           down
           on
           it
           ;
           the
           Land
           is
           plain
           on
           the
           top
           of
           
           these
           Cliffs
           but
           further
           into
           the
           Country
           high
           rounding
           Hills
           and
           Downs
           ,
           and
           toward
           the
           Water-side
           low
           ;
           on
           the
           South
           part
           of
           the
           Bay
           are
           craggy
           Rocks
           on
           the
           Main
           like
           great
           Walls
           ;
           near
           the
           Sea
           there
           's
           a
           sandy
           Cove
           ,
           to
           hale
           a
           Boat
           up
           in
           foul
           Weather
           ;
           the
           Cove
           is
           just
           under
           these
           wall-like
           Rocks
           .
        
         
           Saturday
           Feb.
           26.
           
           Fair
           Weather
           ,
           the
           Wind
           at
           West
           ,
           a
           stiff
           gale
           .
           I
           kept
           a
           Light
           out
           all
           Night
           ,
           that
           the
           Pink
           might
           see
           if
           she
           came
           along
           ;
           the
           first
           part
           of
           the
           Night
           a
           great
           Fire
           was
           made
           on
           the
           shore
           for
           the
           same
           purpose
           :
           Cold
           weather
           :
           this
           Morning
           at
           7
           a
           Clock
           I
           manned
           both
           my
           Boats
           ,
           and
           into
           the
           Herbour
           ;
           the
           Ship
           rode
           moored
           at
           the
           Harbour-mouth
           ,
           within
           the
           Muscle-bank
           ,
           in
           six
           Fathom
           at
           low
           Water
           ;
           I
           sent
           my
           Men
           upon
           the
           Hills
           on
           the
           North
           shore
           to
           look
           abroad
           for
           the
           Pink
           ,
           and
           make
           a
           Fire
           in
           the
           dry
           Grass
           ,
           that
           she
           might
           see
           the
           smoak
           if
           she
           were
           thereabouts
           ,
           but
           they
           could
           not
           see
           her
           ;
           I
           sounded
           the
           Harbour
           in
           many
           places
           to
           day
           at
           low
           Water
           ,
           and
           found
           it
           a
           very
           good
           one
           for
           great
           Ships
           to
           ride
           in
           ,
           provided
           they
           have
           good
           Cables
           and
           Anchros
           ;
           I
           searched
           the
           shore
           ,
           but
           found
           no
           Wood
           ,
           and
           very
           little
           fresh
           Water
           ;
           on
           the
           hilly
           and
           large
           Downs
           ,
           very
           few
           Bushes
           ,
           but
           dry
           ;
           long
           Grass
           growing
           in
           tufts
           and
           knots
           ;
           the
           Soil
           is
           gravelly
           and
           dry
           ,
           in
           some
           Valleys
           well
           mixt
           with
           black
           mould
           ;
           no
           People
           ,
           fire
           or
           smoak
           but
           our
           own
           to
           be
           seen
           ;
           I
           saw
           several
           places
           where
           they
           had
           lain
           ,
           behind
           Bushes
           upon
           Grass
           ,
           which
           they
           had
           plucked
           up
           ,
           and
           that
           they
           had
           made
           small
           sires
           ,
           and
           roasted
           Lumpets
           and
           Muscles
           ;
           there
           
           lay
           Wooll
           ,
           Feathers
           ,
           bones
           of
           Beasts
           ,
           and
           shivers
           of
           Flints
           ;
           I
           went
           to
           a
           Flag
           which
           I
           left
           on
           a
           Hill
           yesterday
           with
           Beads
           at
           it
           ,
           but
           finding
           no
           body
           had
           been
           at
           it
           ,
           let
           it
           stand
           ;
           no
           Beasts
           seen
           any
           where
           ,
           except
           two
           Hares
           running
           over
           the
           Hills
           :
           this
           day
           we
           were
           taken
           up
           with
           viewing
           the
           Harbour
           ,
           so
           that
           we
           did
           not
           advance
           above
           a
           mile
           and
           a
           half
           into
           the
           Land
           :
           in
           the
           Valleys
           between
           the
           Rocks
           grows
           abundance
           of
           wild
           Pease
           ,
           which
           had
           green
           leaves
           and
           blewish
           blossoms
           ,
           both
           tasting
           like
           green
           Pease-leaves
           in
           England
           ,
           growing
           on
           vines
           and
           tangled
           together
           ;
           also
           very
           sweet
           smelling
           Herbs
           much
           like
           Tares
           ,
           very
           green
           ,
           and
           white
           and
           yellow
           Flowers
           ,
           likewise
           green
           Herbs
           much
           like
           Sage
           ,
           but
           grow
           in
           knots
           near
           the
           ground
           like
           Lettice
           ;
           these
           Herbs
           with
           the
           Pease-leaves
           ,
           made
           a
           good
           Sallad
           to
           refresh
           such
           as
           were
           inclining
           to
           the
           Scurvy
           ;
           for
           want
           of
           which
           fresh
           Trade
           several
           of
           my
           Men
           were
           falling
           into
           it
           .
           Here
           are
           abundance
           of
           very
           good
           Muscles
           ,
           and
           Limpets
           on
           theRocks
           ,
           and
           an
           Island
           frequented
           by
           many
           Seals
           ,
           and
           Fowls
           ;
           in
           the
           River
           were
           pied
           Divers
           as
           big
           as
           Ducks
           ,
           some
           of
           them
           grey
           and
           black
           shags
           ;
           Ducks
           and
           other
           Sea-Fowls
           breed
           on
           them
           amongst
           the
           Rocks
           and
           Bushes
           :
           to
           day
           I
           went
           upon
           one
           of
           these
           Islands
           ,
           and
           caught
           as
           many
           young
           black
           Shags
           in
           their
           Nests
           as
           loaded
           the
           Pinnace
           :
           when
           I
           have
           discovered
           better
           the
           particulars
           of
           the
           Fowls
           and
           other
           things
           seen
           here
           ,
           I
           will
           mention
           them
           hereafter
           :
           Night
           coming
           on
           ,
           and
           it
           beginning
           to
           blow
           hard
           ,
           I
           went
           aboard
           with
           Herbs
           ,
           Fowls
           ,
           and
           what
           else
           I
           had
           got
           to
           day
           ;
           and
           divided
           all
           things
           equally
           among
           the
           Company
           ,
           the
           
           Boys
           Dividend
           being
           as
           large
           as
           my
           own
           ,
           or
           any
           Man's
           ;
           it
           blew
           very
           hard
           this
           Evening
           ,
           and
           looked
           very
           black
           in
           the
           South-west
           ,
           an
           ordinary
           gale
           ;
           I
           kept
           a
           Light
           out
           all
           Night
           in
           the
           Poop
           for
           the
           Pink
           :
           this
           day
           all
           the
           Company
           eat
           of
           young
           Seals
           ,
           and
           Penguins
           ,
           and
           commended
           them
           for
           good
           Food
           ;
           I
           judged
           this
           a
           very
           fit
           Harbour
           to
           fit
           the
           Ship
           in
           ,
           for
           the
           main
           Mast
           must
           be
           unrig'd
           ,
           and
           a
           new
           gang
           of
           shrouds
           fitted
           ,
           and
           Ballast
           be
           had
           ;
           and
           it
           might
           be
           a
           means
           to
           fall
           in
           with
           the
           Pink
           ,
           for
           from
           the
           tops
           of
           the
           Hills
           we
           could
           see
           a
           great
           way
           into
           the
           Sea
           ,
           so
           that
           if
           she
           should
           come
           near
           the
           Coast
           ,
           we
           could
           not
           miss
           her
           .
        
         
           We
           found
           2
           Springs
           of
           fresh
           Water
           ,
           one
           in
           a
           Valley
           close
           by
           the
           Water-side
           ,
           in
           a
           gully
           above
           the
           Ship
           ,
           half
           a
           mile
           up
           the
           River
           ;
           the
           other
           up
           a
           Valley
           between
           the
           Rocks
           ,
           just
           a-brest
           where
           the
           Ship
           rode
           ,
           about
           half
           a
           mile
           from
           the
           River's
           side
           ,
           right
           from
           Coopers-Bay
           in
           the
           same
           Valley
           ;
           these
           Springs
           are
           but
           small
           ,
           and
           the
           Water
           's
           a
           little
           brackish
           or
           saltish
           ,
           for
           in
           the
           dry
           Valleys
           the
           Earth
           is
           naturally
           saltish
           ;
           the
           Ground
           and
           Rocks
           have
           a
           white
           Rhime
           of
           Salt-petre
           hanging
           on
           them
           ;
           I
           went
           into
           the
           Land
           2
           miles
           North-west
           ,
           and
           saw
           the
           Country
           hilly
           ,
           and
           dry
           Land
           without
           Wood
           or
           Water
           ;
           some
           craggy
           Rocks
           and
           Valleys
           low
           ,
           but
           dry
           and
           of
           a
           Salt-petre
           nature
           ;
           here
           and
           there
           some
           Bushes
           with
           prickly
           Branches
           ,
           and
           Leaves
           like
           White-Thorn
           Bushes
           in
           England
           ;
           the
           lesser
           Bushes
           have
           small
           dry
           Gauls
           growing
           o●
           them
           ,
           with
           a
           small
           dry
           Seed
           as
           hot
           in
           the
           Mouth
           as
           Pepper
           ;
           not
           a
           Tree
           to
           be
           seen
           :
           the
           Soil
           is
           gra●
           
           velly
           and
           sandy
           generally
           ,
           with
           tufts
           of
           dry
           feared
           Grass
           growing
           on
           it
           ;
           I
           digged
           in
           several
           places
           but
           saw
           nothing
           but
           gravelly
           Sand
           and
           Rocks
           ;
           no
           sort
           of
           Metals
           or
           Minerals
           ;
           I
           looked
           also
           among
           the
           broken
           Rocks
           for
           Metals
           ,
           but
           saw
           no
           sign
           of
           any
           ;
           from
           the
           tops
           of
           the
           Hills
           I
           could
           see
           a
           great
           way
           into
           the
           Land
           ,
           which
           is
           all
           Hills
           and
           Downs
           like
           Cornwall
           :
           toilsom
           travelling
           to
           those
           that
           were
           not
           used
           to
           it
           ;
           I
           could
           travel
           as
           far
           in
           an
           hour
           as
           many
           of
           my
           Men
           could
           in
           two
           ;
           to
           day
           we
           saw
           nine
           Beasts
           feeding
           on
           the
           Grass
           ,
           very
           like
           Deer
           ,
           but
           larger
           ,
           and
           had
           longer
           Necks
           ,
           but
           no
           Horns
           ;
           reddish
           coloured
           on
           the
           Back
           and
           aloft
           ,
           whitish
           under
           their
           Bellies
           and
           up
           their
           Flanks
           ;
           when
           we
           had
           got
           within
           a
           Furlong
           of
           them
           they
           fell
           a
           neighing
           like
           Horses
           ,
           one
           answered
           another
           ,
           and
           then
           all
           run
           away
           .
        
         
           Tuesday
           
             March
             1.
          
           
           Fair
           Weather
           this
           Morning
           ,
           Wind
           at
           North
           ,
           a
           fine
           gale
           and
           a
           cold
           Air.
           This
           Forenoon
           I
           filled
           the
           Casks
           out
           of
           the
           Spring
           ,
           and
           dug
           them
           deeper
           ;
           I
           set
           up
           a
           long
           Pole
           with
           a
           white
           Cloath
           upon
           it
           ,
           on
           a
           Hill
           near
           a
           mile
           into
           the
           Land
           ,
           where
           't
           was
           most
           likely
           to
           be
           seen
           by
           the
           Inhabitants
           ;
           with
           it
           I
           left
           Beads
           ,
           a
           Looking-glass
           ,
           a
           Knife
           ,
           a
           Hook
           and
           an
           Hatchet
           ,
           to
           invite
           the
           People
           of
           the
           Country
           to
           shew
           themselves
           ,
           for
           I
           was
           willing
           to
           see
           'em
           ,
           that
           I
           might
           discover
           what
           they
           had
           ;
           but
           through
           I
           went
           about
           the
           Hills
           this
           Afternoon
           ,
           I
           could
           see
           neither
           People
           ,
           Fire
           ,
           nor
           Smoak
           .
           I
           saw
           three
           Ostriches
           ,
           but
           could
           not
           get
           near
           enough
           to
           make
           a
           shot
           at
           them
           ;
           they
           were
           feeding
           on
           Grass
           ,
           and
           at
           first
           sight
           of
           me
           ran
           ●way
           ;
           I
           had
           a
           Greyhound
           with
           me
           ,
           which
           I
           turn'd
           
           loose
           upon
           'em
           ,
           who
           gave
           Chase
           to
           one
           of
           them
           ,
           and
           at
           last
           gave
           her
           a
           turn
           ,
           which
           she
           recovered
           ,
           took
           to
           the
           Hills
           ,
           and
           so
           escaped
           ;
           they
           are
           grey
           coloured
           ,
           and
           larger
           than
           a
           great
           Turky-cock
           in
           England
           ;
           they
           can't
           fly
           ,
           but
           have
           long
           Legs
           ,
           and
           trust
           to
           their
           running
           :
           I
           saw
           two
           handfuls
           of
           Wooll
           among
           the
           Grass
           ,
           where
           the
           Natives
           had
           made
           a
           Fire
           ;
           it
           was
           the
           Spanish
           red
           Wooll
           ,
           which
           they
           bring
           out
           of
           India
           ,
           and
           very
           fine
           ;
           I
           brought
           it
           away
           with
           me
           ,
           and
           set
           the
           Greyhound
           at
           3
           of
           the
           large
           Beasts
           like
           Deer
           ,
           but
           they
           were
           too
           swift
           for
           him
           :
           Night
           coming
           on
           I
           returned
           on
           Board
           ;
           at
           7
           a
           Clock
           this
           Night
           the
           Wind
           came
           to
           the
           North
           ,
           a
           fresh
           gale
           ,
           and
           hasey
           Weather
           ;
           no
           sight
           of
           the
           Pink
           to
           day
           :
           I
           could
           see
           a
           long
           way
           on
           the
           Sea
           :
           at
           10
           a
           Clock
           it
           rain'd
           ,
           and
           the
           Wind
           came
           to
           the
           South-East
           .
        
         
           Friday
           
             March
             4.
          
           
           Fair
           Weather
           this
           Morning
           ,
           the
           Wind
           at
           East
           ,
           a
           fine
           gale
           ,
           I
           went
           ashore
           and
           filled
           fresh
           Water
           ,
           the
           rest
           of
           the
           Seamen
           fitted
           rigging
           ;
           this
           day
           at
           12
           a
           Clock
           I
           went
           with
           both
           the
           Boats
           ,
           and
           forty
           Men
           to
           Seal-Island
           ,
           into
           the
           Harbour
           ,
           every
           Man
           with
           his
           Staff
           and
           Club
           ;
           we
           landed
           ,
           drove
           the
           Seals
           up
           together
           ,
           beset
           them
           round
           ,
           and
           in
           half
           an
           hours
           time
           killed
           four
           hundred
           young
           and
           old
           ;
           striking
           them
           on
           the
           head
           kills
           them
           presently
           ;
           as
           soon
           as
           they
           were
           knocked
           down
           we
           cut
           their
           throats
           ,
           that
           they
           might
           bleed
           well
           whilst
           they
           were
           hot
           ;
           then
           loading
           both
           the
           Boats
           with
           them
           ,
           I
           carried
           them
           to
           the
           Bay
           where
           the
           Tent
           was
           ,
           landed
           ,
           and
           laid
           them
           upon
           the
           Rocks
           ;
           to
           Night
           the
           Boat
           fetch'd
           them
           all
           off
           :
           the
           great
           Male
           Seals
           are
           as
           big
           as
           Calfs
           and
           resemble
           
           a
           Lion
           in
           their
           shaggy
           Necks
           ,
           Heads
           ,
           and
           Faces
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           in
           their
           Roar
           ;
           the
           Females
           are
           like
           Lionesses
           before
           ,
           only
           they
           are
           hairy
           all
           over
           like
           a
           Horse
           ,
           and
           smooth
           ,
           and
           the
           Male
           is
           smooth
           all
           over
           his
           hind-parts
           ;
           their
           shape
           is
           very
           deformed
           ,
           for
           their
           hind-part
           tapers
           till
           it
           come
           to
           a
           point
           ,
           where
           grow
           two
           Fins
           or
           Feet
           ,
           two
           more
           grow
           out
           of
           their
           Breast
           ,
           so
           that
           they
           can
           go
           on
           Land
           a
           great
           pace
           ,
           and
           climb
           Rocks
           ,
           and
           Hills
           of
           a
           good
           height
           ;
           they
           delight
           much
           to
           lie
           and
           sleep
           ashore
           ;
           some
           are
           very
           large
           ,
           upwards
           of
           eighteen
           Foot
           in
           length
           ,
           and
           thicker
           about
           than
           a
           But
           in
           the
           Bilge
           ,
           and
           excessive
           fat
           ;
           there
           are
           thousands
           fourteen
           foot
           long
           ,
           the
           common
           sort
           are
           about
           five
           foot
           and
           all
           very
           fat
           ;
           they
           'l
           gape
           at
           you
           when
           you
           come
           to
           them
           ,
           as
           if
           they
           would
           devour
           you
           ,
           and
           't
           is
           labour
           enough
           for
           two
           Men
           to
           kill
           one
           of
           the
           great
           ones
           with
           a
           Hand-spike
           ,
           which
           is
           the
           best
           Weapon
           for
           that
           purpose
           .
        
         
           Saturday
           March
           5.
           
           Fair
           Weather
           ,
           Wind
           at
           South-west
           ,
           a
           fine
           gale
           .
           This
           Morning
           we
           went
           ashore
           to
           flay
           some
           Seals
           ,
           and
           cut
           the
           Bodies
           in
           good
           handsom
           pieces
           ,
           and
           salted
           it
           up
           well
           in
           Bulk
           on
           Deal-boards
           ,
           ashore
           ,
           that
           the
           blood
           might
           drain
           from
           it
           ;
           the
           Meat
           looks
           as
           well
           and
           as
           white
           as
           Lamb
           ,
           and
           is
           very
           good
           Victuals
           now
           ,
           but
           when
           't
           is
           a
           little
           salt
           it
           will
           eat
           much
           better
           ;
           those
           we
           dress'd
           were
           all
           young
           Seals
           ,
           for
           they
           sucked
           their
           Dams
           ,
           who
           as
           soon
           as
           they
           come
           ashore
           bleat
           ,
           immediatly
           come
           her
           young
           ones
           ,
           and
           bleat
           about
           her
           like
           Lambs
           ,
           and
           suck
           her
           ;
           one
           old
           Female
           suckles
           four
           or
           five
           ,
           and
           beats
           away
           other
           young
           ones
           that
           come
           near
           ,
           whence
           I
           believe
           they
           have
           
           four
           or
           five
           at
           a
           time
           ;
           the
           young
           ones
           which
           we
           killed
           and
           eat
           were
           as
           big
           as
           a
           midling
           Dog
           ;
           we
           cut
           the
           fat
           off
           of
           the
           Great
           ones
           ,
           and
           made
           Oil
           of
           it
           for
           the
           Lamps
           ,
           and
           other
           uses
           in
           the
           Ship
           ;
           the
           Oil
           of
           the
           young
           ones
           we
           fried
           ,
           and
           eat
           with
           our
           Provisions
           ;
           it
           is
           very
           sweet
           and
           good
           to
           fry
           any
           Food
           with
           ;
           our
           Men
           will
           have
           it
           to
           be
           as
           good
           as
           Olive
           Oil
           ;
           most
           of
           my
           Men
           to
           day
           gathered
           of
           those
           green
           Pease-leaves
           and
           other
           Herbs
           for
           Sallads
           ,
           which
           some
           eat
           raw
           ,
           some
           boiled
           ;
           it
           is
           refreshing
           to
           their
           Bodies
           .
        
         
           Sunday
           March
           6.
           
           Blowing
           Weather
           ,
           Wind
           at
           West
           :
           This
           day
           ,
           after
           Prayers
           ,
           I
           went
           ashore
           on
           the
           South-side
           of
           the
           River
           ,
           and
           travelled
           eight
           miles
           into
           the
           Land
           ,
           South-west
           and
           by
           West
           ,
           having
           twelve
           armed
           Men
           with
           me
           ;
           my
           Lieutenant
           went
           up
           the
           River
           in
           the
           Boat
           nine
           or
           ten
           miles
           ,
           to
           see
           for
           People
           that
           way
           ;
           my
           other
           Lieutenant
           went
           on
           the
           North-side
           with
           ten
           armed
           Men
           to
           see
           for
           People
           ,
           and
           view
           the
           Land
           ;
           I
           found
           in
           my
           Travels
           one
           of
           those
           great
           Beasts
           like
           a
           Deer
           ,
           dead
           and
           whole
           ,
           the
           Vermin
           had
           not
           touched
           him
           ;
           all
           his
           Back
           had
           pretty
           long
           Wooll
           of
           the
           colour
           of
           dried
           Rose-leaves
           ,
           and
           down
           his
           sides
           ,
           his
           Belly
           white
           Wooll
           ;
           he
           was
           as
           big
           as
           a
           small
           Colt
           ,
           he
           had
           a
           long
           Neck
           ,
           a
           Head
           like
           a
           Sheep
           ,
           so
           was
           his
           Mouth
           and
           Ears
           ;
           his
           Legs
           very
           long
           ,
           and
           Cloven-footed
           like
           a
           Deer
           ,
           a
           short
           bushy
           Tail
           of
           a
           reddish
           colour
           ;
           no
           Horns
           nor
           ever
           had
           any
           ,
           it
           was
           a
           Male
           :
           I
           believe
           these
           Beasts
           are
           Peruvian
           Sheep
           ;
           (
           Guianacoes
           )
           I
           had
           his
           Paunch
           opened
           ,
           and
           searched
           for
           the
           Bezoar-stone
           in
           it
           ▪
           and
           in
           the
           Pipe
           to
           the
           Stomach
           ,
           I
           turned
           them
           inside
           
           outward
           ,
           but
           found
           none
           ;
           I
           had
           heard
           
             West-Indian
             Spaniards
          
           say
           ,
           that
           they
           have
           taken
           the
           Bezoar-stone
           of
           Guianacoes
           ,
           and
           therefore
           opened
           this
           ,
           which
           I
           take
           to
           be
           the
           same
           Beast
           :
           In
           travelling
           to
           day
           I
           saw
           several
           herds
           of
           them
           ,
           sometimes
           ten
           ,
           thirty
           ,
           or
           forty
           together
           ;
           I
           could
           not
           get
           near
           enough
           to
           shoot
           at
           them
           ;
           they
           neigh
           like
           young
           Horses
           ,
           and
           so
           wander
           away
           :
           I
           saw
           nine
           Ostriches
           ,
           but
           they
           would
           not
           suffer
           me
           to
           come
           within
           shot
           of
           them
           ;
           I
           let
           the
           Greyhound
           at
           them
           ,
           but
           they
           out-run
           him
           up
           the
           Hills
           :
           we
           saw
           a
           Fox
           ,
           a
           wild
           Dog
           ,
           and
           five
           or
           six
           Hares
           ,
           of
           which
           the
           Greyhound
           killed
           one
           ;
           they
           are
           shaped
           like
           English
           Hares
           ,
           and
           much
           larger
           ,
           and
           instead
           of
           a
           Tail
           have
           a
           little
           stub
           about
           an
           inch
           long
           ,
           without
           Hair
           on
           it
           ;
           they
           have
           holes
           in
           the
           ground
           like
           Coneys
           :
           no
           Woods
           to
           be
           seen
           ,
           only
           a
           few
           Bushes
           like
           White-Thorns
           .
           The
           Land
           is
           dry
           ,
           of
           a
           sandy
           gravelly
           Soil
           ,
           in
           large
           rounding
           Hills
           ,
           not
           very
           high
           ,
           but
           in
           Downs
           and
           Valleys
           ,
           bearing
           nothing
           but
           Grass
           ;
           here
           and
           there
           are
           gullies
           of
           fresh
           Water
           in
           the
           Valleys
           ,
           which
           is
           made
           in
           the
           Winter-time
           when
           the
           Snow
           dissolves
           :
           I
           saw
           several
           places
           of
           salt
           Water
           in
           the
           Land
           ,
           which
           is
           occasioned
           by
           the
           natural
           saltness
           of
           the
           Earth
           ;
           here
           are
           no
           Fruits
           nor
           Herbs
           :
           When
           I
           was
           at
           the
           farthest
           ,
           and
           on
           a
           Hill
           ,
           I
           could
           not
           see
           any
           sign
           of
           People
           ,
           or
           Woods
           ,
           but
           still
           Hills
           and
           Valleys
           as
           far
           as
           we
           could
           descry
           ;
           no
           Birds
           to
           be
           seen
           but
           Kites
           ,
           which
           are
           like
           those
           in
           Europe
           ,
           and
           small
           Birds
           like
           Sparrows
           ,
           and
           Linnets
           ;
           some
           Flies
           and
           Humble-bees
           here
           :
           we
           saw
           some
           small
           four-footed
           Animals
           running
           in
           the
           Grass
           ;
           speckled-Grey
           ,
           
           shaped
           like
           a
           small
           Creature
           in
           England
           called
           an
           Eft
           ,
           Newt
           or
           Lizard
           ;
           no
           Adder
           nor
           Snake
           ,
           nor
           any
           venomous
           Creature
           ;
           Cattle
           would
           live
           here
           very
           well
           ,
           such
           as
           Horses
           ,
           Cows
           ,
           Sheep
           ,
           Goats
           ,
           &c.
           
           Evening
           growing
           upon
           us
           ,
           I
           returned
           to
           the
           Ship
           ,
           and
           't
           was
           within
           Night
           when
           we
           got
           aboard
           our
           Boat
           ,
           and
           ten
           a
           Clock
           when
           we
           entered
           the
           Ship
           ;
           I
           found
           on
           Board
           my
           Lieutenant
           that
           went
           up
           the
           River
           ,
           but
           they
           which
           went
           on
           the
           North-side
           were
           not
           come
           back
           ;
           up
           the
           River
           they
           saw
           five
           small
           Islands
           ,
           which
           had
           Sea-fowls
           on
           them
           and
           Bushes
           for
           fewel
           ;
           the
           River
           grows
           broader
           upwards
           and
           has
           several
           Rocks
           in
           it
           ;
           on
           the
           shoar
           they
           saw
           Guianacoes
           ,
           Ostriches
           ,
           and
           Hares
           ;
           no
           People
           ,
           Fire
           or
           Smoak
           ;
           they
           saw
           where
           People
           had
           been
           ,
           and
           Fires
           made
           ,
           and
           Muscles
           and
           Lumpets
           roasted
           ;
           no
           fresh
           Water
           nor
           Wood
           ,
           nor
           any
           Metal
           or
           Mineral
           ;
           the
           Land
           hilly
           with
           Grass
           on
           it
           :
           At
           twelve
           a
           Clock
           to
           Night
           those
           that
           went
           on
           the
           North-side
           came
           aboard
           ;
           they
           had
           been
           about
           eight
           miles
           into
           the
           Land
           North-west
           ,
           and
           saw
           no
           People
           ,
           but
           found
           where
           People
           had
           been
           ,
           and
           made
           Fires
           in
           the
           Grass
           ,
           and
           Grass
           laid
           to
           fire
           the
           Bushes
           ;
           also
           where
           some
           had
           lain
           on
           open
           places
           ,
           and
           set
           little
           Bushes
           in
           Half-moons
           ,
           to
           shelter
           them
           from
           the
           Weather
           ;
           on
           the
           top
           of
           a
           Hill
           they
           made
           a
           fire
           with
           Grass
           to
           see
           if
           any
           would
           answer
           them
           ;
           they
           sat
           down
           by
           it
           all
           day
           ,
           but
           could
           see
           none
           made
           any
           where
           else
           :
           the
           Land
           is
           in
           rounding
           large
           Hills
           ,
           not
           very
           high
           ,
           but
           like
           Downs
           ,
           as
           the
           Coast
           of
           Yorkshire
           about
           Burlington
           ;
           no
           Woods
           nor
           Trees
           seen
           ,
           nor
           fresh
           Water
           ;
           here
           and
           there
           a
           Bush
           growing
           in
           a
           Valley
           ;
           indifferent
           
           good
           Grass
           ;
           the
           Soil
           gravelly
           and
           sandy
           ,
           and
           some
           ridges
           of
           Rocks
           ;
           they
           saw
           Guianacoes
           ,
           Ostriches
           ,
           Hares
           ,
           and
           Kites
           ;
           several
           little
           Creatures
           like
           Efts
           ;
           no
           kind
           of
           Fruit
           or
           Berry
           ,
           Mineral
           or
           Metal
           :
           I
           charged
           them
           as
           they
           travelled
           in
           any
           Gullies
           where
           Water
           had
           run
           to
           search
           for
           grains
           of
           Gold
           ,
           or
           other
           Metal
           ,
           &c.
           for
           Gold
           is
           found
           in
           grains
           in
           such
           Gullies
           ,
           and
           much
           Gold
           is
           found
           in
           the
           Land
           on
           the
           other
           side
           ,
           not
           two
           hundred
           Leagues
           distant
           from
           us
           ;
           much
           Salt-peter
           hangs
           on
           the
           Earth
           where
           Water
           has
           been
           ,
           in
           a
           kind
           of
           Flower
           ;
           the
           plashes
           of
           Water
           they
           met
           with
           were
           as
           salt
           as
           Brine
           ,
           which
           the
           Earth
           made
           .
           I
           saw
           Smelts
           here
           eighteen
           Inches
           long
           lying
           dead
           on
           the
           Shore
           ,
           but
           hitherto
           have
           not
           seen
           one
           Oyster
           ,
           or
           other
           shell-Fish
           ,
           Crawfish
           ,
           Lobster
           ,
           or
           Crab
           ,
           though
           't
           is
           possible
           the
           place
           may
           have
           'em
           all
           .
           Whilst
           we
           were
           standing
           by
           the
           Water-side
           ,
           a
           Seal
           chased
           on
           shore
           a
           Fish
           as
           large
           as
           a
           Mackrel
           and
           like
           a
           Mullet
           ;
           one
           of
           the
           Men
           took
           it
           up
           ,
           and
           dressed
           it
           ,
           when
           he
           came
           on
           Board
           ,
           't
           was
           excellent
           good
           ;
           here
           must
           be
           a
           great
           quantity
           of
           Fish
           to
           maintain
           all
           the
           Seals
           ,
           Penguins
           ,
           and
           other
           Fowls
           that
           live
           upon
           nothing
           else
           ,
           and
           yet
           are
           all
           extream
           fat
           ,
           and
           innumerable
           in
           multitude
           ;
           besides
           what
           Creatures
           we
           have
           not
           seen
           yet
           ;
           I
           have
           seen
           Seals
           in
           this
           Harbour
           swimming
           with
           their
           heads
           above
           Water
           ,
           with
           large
           Fish
           in
           their
           Mouths
           .
        
         
           Sunday
           March
           13.
           
           Indifferent
           Weather
           ,
           Wind
           at
           West
           ,
           a
           fresh
           gale
           ;
           The
           Air
           cold
           this
           Morning
           .
           I
           went
           up
           the
           River
           in
           my
           Boat
           with
           fourteen
           Men
           armed
           ;
           I
           past
           the
           Island
           ,
           where
           the
           brushy
           
           Bushes
           are
           ,
           and
           where
           we
           took
           the
           young
           Shags
           ;
           there
           the
           River
           grows
           broader
           ,
           near
           a
           mile
           from
           the
           North
           shore
           over
           to
           the
           South
           ,
           and
           continues
           that
           breadth
           four
           miles
           ,
           then
           it
           becomes
           narrower
           ,
           and
           turns
           away
           to
           the
           South-west
           ;
           at
           this
           turning
           is
           an
           Island
           of
           a
           mean
           height
           and
           Rocky
           ,
           bearing
           some
           small
           Bushes
           and
           Grass
           ;
           I
           went
           upon
           it
           ,
           and
           saw
           a
           Post
           of
           five
           foot
           long
           set
           up
           (
           it
           had
           been
           the
           timber
           of
           a
           Ship
           )
           with
           a
           piece
           of
           Board
           about
           a
           foot
           square
           nailed
           to
           it
           ,
           at
           the
           foot
           of
           it
           one
           of
           my
           Men
           took
           up
           a
           piece
           of
           Sheet-Lead
           ,
           and
           gave
           it
           to
           me
           ,
           it
           had
           this
           Inscription
           engraven
           on
           it
           ,
           
             MDCXV
             .
             
             EEN
             SCHIP
             ENDE
             EEN
             IACHT
             GENAEMT
             
             EENDRACHT
             
               EN
            
             HOORN
             
               GEARRIVEERT
            
             
             DEN
             VIII
             DECEMBER
             VERTROKEN
             MET
             EEN
             
             SCHIP
             DEENDRACHT
             DEN
             X
             :
             IANVARY
             :
             MDCXVI
             
             
               
                 C
                 :
                 IACQVES
                 LE
                 MAIRE
              
               
                 S.
                 WILLEM
                 
                   CORNS
                
                 SCHOVTS
              
               
                 ARES
                 CLASSEN
              
               
                 IAN
                 
                   CORNS
                
                 SCHOTS
              
               
                 CLAES
                 IANSSEN
                 BAN
              
            
          
           
           In
           a
           hole
           of
           the
           Post
           lay
           a
           latten
           or
           tin
           Box
           ,
           (
           which
           we
           found
           by
           a
           long
           Plug
           that
           stuck
           in
           the
           hole
           )
           with
           a
           sheet
           of
           written
           Paper
           enclosed
           in
           it
           ,
           but
           so
           eaten
           by
           the
           rust
           of
           the
           Box
           ,
           that
           't
           was
           not
           to
           be
           read
           ;
           I
           cut
           out
           with
           my
           Knife
           upon
           a
           Board
           the
           Ship
           's
           Name
           ,
           and
           the
           date
           of
           the
           Year
           and
           Month
           ,
           which
           I
           nailed
           to
           the
           Post
           ;
           and
           brought
           away
           the
           Lead
           with
           me
           ,
           aud
           named
           the
           place
           
             Le
             Mair's
             Island
          
           :
           we
           found
           on
           it
           several
           pieces
           of
           Boards
           ,
           of
           the
           Wreck
           of
           some
           Ship
           ,
           that
           had
           been
           burned
           ;
           they
           were
           drove
           up
           here
           by
           the
           Tide
           ;
           the
           People
           of
           the
           Country
           can't
           get
           upon
           this
           Island
           :
           From
           hence
           I
           went
           on
           the
           North
           side
           of
           the
           River
           two
           miles
           into
           the
           Land
           ;
           no
           Trees
           to
           be
           seen
           ,
           but
           many
           Ostriches
           and
           Guianacoes
           in
           many
           places
           ;
           the
           Soil
           is
           marly
           and
           good
           ,
           the
           Hills
           not
           very
           high
           ,
           but
           plain
           large
           Downs
           ,
           with
           Grass
           on
           them
           all
           over
           ;
           digging
           in
           two
           or
           three
           places
           I
           found
           sandy
           dry
           ground
           near
           a
           foot
           deep
           ,
           then
           Marle
           :
           In
           my
           opinion
           it
           might
           be
           made
           excellent
           Corn-ground
           ,
           being
           ready
           to
           Till
           ;
           't
           is
           very
           like
           the
           Land
           on
           New-market
           Heath
           ;
           no
           People
           to
           be
           seen
           ;
           I
           searched
           the
           Gullies
           and
           broken
           Rocks
           ,
           for
           grains
           of
           Gold
           or
           Minerals
           ,
           but
           found
           neither
           :
           I
           returned
           to
           the
           Boat
           again
           ,
           rowed
           farther
           under
           the
           shore
           ,
           landed
           ,
           and
           mounted
           asteep
           high
           Hill
           to
           view
           the
           Country
           ;
           on
           the
           top
           of
           this
           rocky
           Hill
           grow
           small
           Bushes
           :
           I
           could
           see
           the
           course
           of
           the
           River
           a
           long
           way
           further
           ,
           and
           the
           Land
           all
           Grass
           ;
           here
           and
           there
           a
           white
           spot
           of
           Marle
           on
           the
           side
           of
           a
           Hill
           ;
           no
           People
           to
           be
           seen
           nor
           Boats
           on
           the
           River
           ;
           I
           came
           down
           to
           the
           Boat
           :
           several
           Creeks
           run
           from
           hence
           a
           mile
           or
           two
           into
           
           the
           Land
           :
           I
           cross'd
           the
           River
           to
           the
           South-east
           shore
           ;
           we
           made
           the
           Boar
           fast
           in
           a
           Creek
           in
           a
           Valley
           ,
           and
           went
           all
           hands
           up
           the
           Land
           three
           miles
           ;
           we
           saw
           many
           Guianacoes
           ,
           and
           Ostriches
           ,
           but
           could
           not
           come
           within
           shot
           of
           them
           ;
           I
           saw
           the
           Footsteps
           of
           five
           Men
           that
           had
           been
           upon
           the
           Oar
           ;
           I
           measured
           my
           Foot
           with
           them
           ,
           which
           was
           larger
           and
           longer
           by
           half
           an
           Inch
           than
           any
           of
           them
           ;
           we
           could
           not
           see
           any
           People
           :
           it
           being
           near
           Night
           we
           plucked
           up
           Grass
           ,
           and
           laid
           it
           to
           the
           best
           advantage
           for
           shelter
           ;
           here
           we
           lay
           all
           Night
           ,
           keeping
           watch
           two
           by
           two
           ;
           cold
           Air
           to
           Night
           ,
           wind
           at
           West
           .
        
         
           Monday
           March
           14.
           
           Fair
           Weather
           but
           cold
           .
           This
           Morning
           by
           day-light
           we
           turn'd
           out
           ,
           and
           marcht
           into
           the
           Land
           four
           miles
           South-west
           and
           by
           South
           ;
           we
           could
           not
           find
           any
           fresh
           Water
           ;
           we
           made
           a
           Fire
           on
           the
           Grass
           ,
           but
           saw
           no
           sign
           of
           any
           People
           ;
           we
           saw
           Guianacoes
           ,
           Hares
           ,
           Foxes
           ,
           wild
           Dogs
           ,
           pretty
           large
           ,
           and
           a
           grey
           Cat
           like
           an
           English
           one
           ,
           running
           up
           the
           Hills
           :
           to
           day
           we
           caught
           an
           Armadillo
           ;
           the
           Dogs
           put
           her
           to
           ground
           ;
           they
           have
           holes
           like
           Coneys
           ;
           we
           soon
           dug
           her
           out
           ,
           't
           was
           as
           big
           as
           a
           great
           Hedg-hog
           ,
           and
           not
           much
           unlike
           one
           ;
           the
           Armadillo
           is
           cased
           over
           the
           Body
           with
           a
           shell
           ,
           shutting
           one
           under
           another
           like
           shells
           of
           Armour
           ;
           the
           Dogs
           couls
           not
           hurt
           her
           :
           we
           saw
           Rats
           in
           many
           places
           ,
           and
           a
           kind
           of
           Polecat
           ,
           with
           two
           white
           streaks
           on
           the
           Back
           ,
           all
           the
           rest
           black
           ;
           our
           Dogs
           killed
           two
           of
           them
           ;
           they
           stink
           much
           ,
           several
           Ostriches
           ,
           some
           Partridges
           and
           many
           Kites
           :
           the
           Land
           in
           fair
           Hills
           without
           Wood
           or
           fresh
           Water
           ;
           the
           Soil
           a
           sandy
           Gravel
           with
           Grass
           all
           over
           it
           ;
           no
           
           Mineral
           or
           Metal
           seen
           .
           This
           afternoon
           we
           returned
           to
           our
           Boat
           ,
           and
           went
           through
           a
           Creek
           two
           miles
           long
           ,
           which
           is
           dry
           at
           low
           Water
           ,
           and
           not
           more
           than
           thirty
           foot
           broad
           ;
           it
           makes
           a
           fair
           Island
           of
           a
           mean
           heighth
           ,
           plain
           on
           the
           top
           ,
           and
           Grass
           growing
           all
           over
           it
           ,
           but
           no
           Wood
           nor
           Water
           upon
           it
           ;
           the
           greatest
           part
           of
           it
           is
           a
           sandy
           marly
           Soil
           ;
           't
           is
           two
           miles
           long
           ,
           and
           half
           a
           mile
           broad
           ;
           the
           Greyhound
           killed
           two
           Hares
           on
           it
           presently
           ,
           and
           we
           saw
           above
           twenty
           ;
           I
           called
           it
           Hare-Island
           ;
           it
           is
           adjacent
           to
           the
           South-shore
           ;
           eight
           miles
           up
           the
           River
           from
           the
           narrow
           ,
           I
           went
           down
           the
           River
           and
           went
           aboard
           :
           this
           Evening
           cold
           Air
           ,
           Wind
           at
           West
           ,
           a
           stout
           Gale
           ;
           towards
           Morning
           it
           came
           to
           the
           North
           ;
           I
           cannot
           perceive
           the
           Indians
           have
           any
           Canoas
           or
           other
           Boats
           here
           .
        
         
           March
           24.
           
           Blowing
           Weather
           ,
           Wind
           at
           West
           .
           We
           fetch'd
           all
           our
           things
           off
           the
           shore
           ,
           and
           got
           the
           Ship
           ready
           to
           Sail
           ;
           I
           went
           a-shore
           on
           the
           South-side
           to
           the
           peeked
           Rock
           ,
           and
           found
           it
           a
           natural
           Rock
           ,
           standing
           on
           a
           small
           round
           Hill
           ,
           as
           if
           it
           had
           been
           built
           there
           by
           Man
           ;
           it
           hath
           a
           Cleft
           on
           the
           top
           it
           as
           big
           in
           circumference
           as
           a
           But
           :
           't
           is
           near
           forty
           foot
           high
           above
           the
           Hill
           it
           stands
           on
           ;
           about
           it
           lie
           little
           lumps
           of
           Rocks
           ;
           I
           saw
           nothing
           else
           worth
           notice
           ,
           so
           I
           return'd
           to
           the
           Ship
           ;
           the
           biggest
           stick
           growing
           in
           or
           near
           this
           Harbour
           ,
           or
           in
           the
           Countries
           as
           far
           as
           we
           went
           ,
           which
           was
           twenty
           Miles
           ,
           would
           not
           make
           a
           Helve
           for
           a
           Hatchet
           ,
           but
           there
           are
           Bushes
           which
           will
           serve
           for
           firing
           at
           Sea
           :
           before
           Night
           I
           had
           all
           things
           on
           Board
           ,
           and
           the
           Ship
           fitted
           with
           intent
           to
           sail
           next
           Morning
           ,
           and
           look'd
           along
           the
           Coasts
           for
           the
           Pink
           ,
           till
           I
           arrived
           
           at
           
             Port
             St.
             Julian's
             Harbour
          
           ;
           fresh
           Water
           is
           scarce
           in
           
             Port
             Desier
             Harbour
          
           in
           the
           Summer-time
           ;
           the
           places
           from
           whence
           I
           fetch'd
           Water
           ,
           are
           small
           Springs
           on
           the
           North-side
           ,
           out
           of
           which
           I
           filled
           near
           forty
           Tuns
           ;
           the
           first
           Spring
           is
           on
           the
           North-side
           ,
           as
           you
           enter
           the
           Harbour
           half
           a
           mile
           up
           a
           Valley
           ,
           in
           a
           gully
           of
           Rocks
           :
           it
           bears
           North-north-west
           from
           the
           lower
           Rock
           ;
           that
           we
           called
           
             Peckets
             Well
          
           ,
           is
           a
           mile
           up
           the
           River
           ,
           within
           a
           Bow-shot
           of
           the
           salt
           Water
           ,
           't
           is
           in
           a
           gully
           :
           the
           Land
           in
           these
           Valleys
           has
           very
           green
           and
           sweet
           Grass
           ,
           and
           abundance
           of
           wild
           Pease
           ;
           small
           Nut-galls
           growing
           on
           the
           Bushes
           ,
           but
           in
           no
           great
           quantity
           ,
           and
           but
           few
           Bushes
           ;
           Salt
           may
           be
           made
           here
           ,
           for
           on
           the
           Shore-side
           ,
           and
           on
           the
           Rocks
           I
           gathered
           several
           handfuls
           of
           good
           Salt.
           
        
         
           March
           25.
           
           Gentlemen
           ,
           You
           are
           by
           me
           desired
           to
           take
           notice
           ,
           that
           this
           Day
           I
           take
           possession
           of
           this
           Harbour
           and
           River
           of
           
             Port
             Desier
          
           ,
           and
           of
           all
           the
           Land
           in
           this
           Country
           on
           both
           Shores
           ,
           for
           the
           use
           of
           his
           Majesty
           
             King
             Charles
             the
             Second
             ,
             of
             Great
             Britain
             ,
          
           and
           his
           Heirs
           ;
           God
           save
           our
           King
           ,
           and
           fired
           three
           Ordnance
           .
        
         
           Saturday
           March
           26.
           
           Wind
           at
           West
           ,
           a
           stout
           Gale.
           I
           stood
           to
           the
           Northward
           ;
           this
           Morning
           at
           six
           a
           Clock
           when
           the
           Sun
           appeared
           above
           the
           East
           Horizon
           ,
           the
           Moon
           set
           in
           the
           West-horizon
           ,
           being
           eclipsed
           at
           London
           at
           Elevan
           a
           Clock
           ,
           ten
           minutes
           in
           the
           Forenoon
           ;
           but
           here
           at
           six
           a
           Clock
           thirty
           minutes
           past
           ,
           which
           gives
           four
           hours
           forty
           minutes
           difference
           of
           time
           ,
           between
           the
           Meridian
           of
           London
           and
           the
           Meridian
           of
           
             Cape
             Blanco
          
           ;
           which
           Cape
           lies
           in
           the
           Latitude
           of
           47
           d.
           20
           m.
           
           South
           ;
           on
           the
           South-east
           Coast
           of
           America
           ,
           where
           I
           saw
           this
           Eclipse
           70
           degrees
           in
           Longitude
           to
           the
           Westward
           of
           the
           Meridian
           of
           London
           ,
           by
           this
           Observation
           ;
           I
           could
           not
           see
           the
           whole
           Eclipse
           the
           Heavens
           being
           clouded
           ;
           I
           find
           
             Cape
             Blanco
          
           ,
           by
           my
           account
           of
           Sailing
           ,
           to
           lie
           in
           the
           Longitude
           of
           69
           d.
           16
           m.
           to
           the
           Westward
           of
           the
           Meridian
           of
           London
           ;
           If
           the
           Moon
           had
           not
           been
           clouded
           ,
           I
           might
           have
           been
           exact
           in
           the
           Longitude
           ,
           but
           I
           presume
           my
           Account
           is
           not
           much
           out
           .
        
         
           
             Cape
             Blanco
          
           lies
           in
           the
           Latitude
           of
           47
           d.
           20
           m.
           South
           ;
           and
           in
           Longitude
           from
           the
           Lizard
           ,
           West
           ,
           61
           d.
           56
           m.
           and
           in
           Meridian
           distance
           from
           the
           Lizard
           ,
           West
           ,
           1014
           Leagues
           ,
           1
           Mile
           .
           6
           /
           1●
           .
        
         
           
             Port
             Desier
          
           in
           America
           ,
           lies
           in
           the
           Latitude
           of
           47
           d.
           48
           m.
           South
           ,
           and
           in
           Longitude
           from
           the
           Lizard
           ,
           West
           ,
           61
           d.
           57
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           from
           the
           Lizard
           ,
           West
           ,
           1015.
           
           Leagues
           ,
           2
           Miles
           ,
           6
           /
           10
           ;
           .
        
         
           
             Penguin
             Island
          
           ,
           or
           the
           plentiful
           Isles
           ,
           Latitude
           47
           d.
           55
           m.
           South
           ,
           and
           in
           Longitude
           from
           the
           Lizard
           ,
           West
           ,
           61
           d.
           57
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           from
           the
           Lizard
           ,
           West
           ,
           1014.
           
           Leagues
           ,
           2
           Miles
        
         
           Variation
           of
           the
           Compass
           here
           is
           Easterly
           17
           d.
           30
           m.
           
        
         
           April
           1.
           
           The
           Sweepstakes
           off
           of
           
             Seal's
             Bay
          
           in
           the
           Latitude
           of
           48
           d.
           10
           m.
           South
           ,
           on
           the
           Coast
           of
           Patagonia
           .
        
         
           Saturday
           April
           2.
           
           Fair
           Weather
           this
           Morning
           ,
           Wind
           at
           North-north-west
           ,
           a
           fine
           gale
           .
           I
           filled
           at
           Day-light
           ,
           and
           steered
           away
           South-south-west
           ,
           and
           South
           and
           by
           West
           by
           my
           Compass
           ,
           as
           the
           Coast
           lies
           ;
           I
           sailed
           along
           in
           twenty
           Fathom-water
           :
           black
           Sand
           distant
           from
           the
           shore
           near
           three
           
           Leagues
           :
           this
           forenoon
           at
           nine
           a
           Clock
           ,
           I
           saw
           a
           small
           flat
           Island
           to
           the
           Westward
           of
           me
           ;
           about
           a
           League
           off
           the
           Land
           ;
           it
           lies
           in
           the
           Latitude
           of
           48
           d.
           40
           m.
           South
           ;
           the
           Land
           against
           it
           is
           high
           ,
           in
           large
           Hills
           ,
           and
           some
           round
           copling
           tops
           ;
           two
           Leagues
           more
           to
           the
           Southward
           ,
           the
           Land
           is
           low
           ,
           in
           a
           great
           Plain
           ,
           and
           a
           Beach
           by
           the
           Sea-side
           ,
           but
           the
           shore
           against
           this
           Island
           is
           rocky
           ;
           I
           was
           two
           Leagues
           East
           from
           the
           flat
           Island
           ,
           and
           had
           twenty
           three
           fathom
           black
           Sand
           ;
           I
           haled
           close
           in
           for
           the
           shore
           ,
           and
           sail'd
           within
           five
           Miles
           of
           it
           ;
           all
           along
           from
           this
           Island
           to
           
             Port
             St.
             Julian
          
           I
           sounded
           as
           I
           sail'd
           along
           ,
           and
           had
           18
           or
           20
           fathom
           fine
           black
           Sand
           ;
           the
           Land
           is
           low
           in
           a
           Valley
           ;
           the
           Sea-shore
           is
           a
           Beach
           ,
           here
           and
           there
           a
           Rock
           ;
           it
           is
           in
           a
           long
           Beach
           for
           four
           Leagues
           ;
           after
           you
           are
           to
           the
           Southward
           of
           the
           Flat-Island
           one
           League
           ,
           the
           shore
           lies
           South-fourth-west
           and
           North-north-east
           ;
           at
           the
           South-end
           of
           this
           Beach
           in-land
           are
           high
           round
           Hills
           ,
           but
           at
           the
           Sea-side
           is
           a
           steep
           white
           Cliff
           ,
           of
           an
           indifferent
           heighth
           with
           a
           black
           streak
           in
           it
           ;
           over
           the
           Cliff
           the
           Hill
           rounds
           up
           to
           the
           top
           ,
           having
           some
           small
           black
           Bushes
           growing
           on
           the
           side
           ;
           no
           Wood
           or
           Tree
           seen
           .
        
         
           In
           this
           Bay
           is
           
             Port
             St.
             Julian
          
           ;
           the
           Harbour's
           mouth
           is
           in
           the
           middle
           of
           the
           Bay
           ,
           but
           you
           cannot
           see
           it
           without
           ,
           for
           one
           Point
           shutting
           in
           the
           other
           ;
           you
           must
           send
           your
           Boat
           in
           to
           discover
           the
           Harbour
           at
           Low-water
           ,
           and
           the
           Bar
           without
           ,
           for
           't
           is
           a
           barred
           Harbour
           :
           the
           Land
           in
           the
           Country
           over
           
             Port
             St.
             Julian
          
           ,
           on
           the
           West-side
           ,
           is
           high
           copling
           round
           Hills
           ,
           like
           blunt
           Sugar-loaves
           on
           the
           top
           ;
           ●is
           the
           highest
           Land
           I
           saw
           in
           all
           the
           Country
           ,
           
           and
           there
           are
           no
           such
           Hills
           besides
           on
           the
           Coast
           ;
           the
           Land
           is
           plain
           to
           the
           South
           without
           any
           Hill
           ,
           as
           far
           as
           we
           could
           see
           at
           this
           time
           :
           this
           Afternoon
           it
           proved
           a
           Calm
           ;
           I
           anchored
           in
           the
           Bay
           before
           St.
           Julian
           ,
           in
           twelve
           fathom
           Water
           ,
           black
           oary
           Land
           ,
           the
           Harbour's
           mouth
           bearing
           West-south-west
           of
           me
           ,
           about
           two
           Leagues
           off
           :
           I
           sent
           in
           my
           Boat
           to
           discover
           the
           Harbour
           ,
           and
           see
           if
           the
           Pink
           was
           there
           ,
           which
           returned
           to
           Night
           at
           six
           a
           Clock
           ;
           my
           Lieutenant
           told
           me
           there
           was
           a
           safe
           Harbour
           ,
           and
           Water
           enough
           for
           a
           bigger
           Ship
           ,
           but
           no
           Pink
           ,
           nor
           any
           sign
           of
           her
           having
           been
           there
           ;
           now
           I
           despaired
           of
           ever
           seeing
           her
           more
           ,
           after
           my
           hopes
           were
           frustrated
           here
           ;
           nevertheless
           I
           doubted
           not
           the
           success
           of
           my
           Voyage
           ,
           though
           the
           Company
           thought
           't
           would
           be
           dangerous
           being
           a
           lone
           Ship
           ,
           a
           stormy
           Sea
           to
           sail
           in
           ,
           and
           unknown
           Coasts
           to
           search
           out
           ,
           and
           if
           we
           should
           happen
           to
           run
           aground
           any
           where
           ,
           could
           expect
           no
           relief
           ;
           these
           suspicions
           I
           soon
           put
           out
           of
           their
           Heads
           ,
           by
           telling
           them
           of
           the
           great
           Riches
           of
           the
           Land
           ,
           and
           that
           
             Captain
             Drake
          
           went
           round
           the
           World
           in
           one
           Ship
           ,
           when
           in
           those
           days
           there
           were
           but
           ordinary
           Navigators
           ;
           and
           was
           it
           for
           us
           to
           question
           our
           good
           fortune
           ,
           who
           beyond
           Comparison
           are
           better
           Seamen
           ,
           if
           we
           would
           put
           our selves
           in
           Action
           ;
           and
           for
           me
           ,
           I
           would
           expose
           no
           Man
           to
           more
           danger
           than
           my self
           in
           the
           Attempt
           .
           Calm
           to
           Night
           ;
           I
           rode
           fast
           ,
           a
           small
           Tide
           running
           where
           I
           rode
           ;
           the
           Water
           ebb'd
           near
           three
           fathom
           perpendicular
           :
           it
           is
           near
           nine
           Leagues
           from
           the
           
             Flat
             Island
          
           to
           
             Saint
             Julian
          
           ,
           South-south-west
           and
           North-north-east
           as
           the
           shore
           lies
           .
        
         
         
           The
           Mouth
           of
           
             Port
             Saint
             Julian
          
           ,
           in
           Latitude
           49
           d.
           10
           m.
           South
           ,
           and
           in
           Longitude
           from
           the
           Lizard
           63
           d.
           10
           m.
           and
           in
           Meridian
           distance
           from
           the
           Lizard
           .
           West
           1030
           Leagues
           ;
           by
           an
           Amplitude
           here
           ,
           the
           Compass
           has
           varied
           16
           d.
           10
           m.
           East
           .
        
         
           Wednesday
           ,
           April
           13.
           
           Fair
           Weather
           ,
           Wind
           at
           West
           ,
           a
           small
           gale
           .
           Frosty
           and
           cold
           Air
           ,
           no
           sign
           of
           the
           Pink
           :
           I
           went
           ashore
           and
           haled
           the
           Seyne
           on
           the
           East-side
           ;
           at
           the
           first
           of
           the
           Flood
           we
           caught
           five
           hundred
           Fishes
           ,
           as
           big
           as
           large
           Mullets
           ,
           and
           much
           like
           them
           ,
           grey
           ,
           and
           full
           of
           Scales
           :
           some
           as
           big
           as
           a
           Man's
           Leg
           ;
           we
           caught
           them
           all
           in
           four
           hours
           time
           ,
           returned
           aboard
           ,
           and
           divided
           them
           among
           the
           whole
           Ship
           's
           Company
           ;
           they
           eat
           admirably
           well
           ;
           many
           good
           Muscles
           lie
           on
           the
           Rocks
           ,
           and
           Oyster-shells
           on
           the
           Shore-side
           ,
           and
           growing
           in
           Veins
           on
           the
           Rocks
           ,
           but
           no
           Meat
           in
           them
           :
           Wind
           at
           West
           to
           Night
           ,
           a
           fresh
           gale
           .
        
         
           Monday
           April
           18.
           
           Wind
           at
           South-west
           ,
           a
           stiff
           gale
           .
           Cold
           Air
           and
           some
           Snow
           this
           Morning
           ;
           the
           Winter
           is
           come
           strong
           and
           stormy
           ,
           so
           that
           't
           will
           be
           impossible
           to
           hold
           the
           Coast
           into
           the
           Streights
           ;
           for
           the
           Wind
           blows
           altogether
           from
           the
           West
           or
           West-southerly
           ,
           and
           in
           such
           Gusts
           as
           will
           force
           a
           Ship
           off
           the
           Coast
           .
           This
           day
           I
           ordered
           my
           Purser
           to
           serve
           the
           Company
           Brandy-wine
           for
           their
           Allowance
           ,
           at
           a
           Quart
           per
           Week
           a
           Man
           :
           I
           got
           a
           Boats
           lading
           of
           the
           Wood
           of
           the
           Country
           aboard
           for
           firing
           ;
           to
           Night
           it
           blew
           hard
           at
           South-west
           ;
           all
           the
           Company
           eat
           salt
           Seal
           ,
           and
           Penguins
           for
           their
           Allowance
           :
           sweet
           and
           very
           good
           Meat
           ,
           and
           keeps
           well
           and
           long
           in
           Salt.
           
        
         
         
           Friday
           April
           22.
           
           Wind
           at
           South-west
           ,
           a
           stiff
           gale
           ,
           and
           cold
           Air.
           This
           Morning
           I
           went
           ashore
           on
           the
           North-west
           side
           with
           twenty
           Men
           to
           the
           Salt-pond
           ,
           which
           is
           rusted
           all
           over
           like
           a
           Pavement
           ,
           with
           very
           white
           and
           good
           Salt
           ,
           two
           Inches
           thick
           ,
           for
           two
           miles
           long
           :
           in
           February
           here
           's
           Salt
           enough
           to
           fill
           a
           thousand
           Ships
           ;
           we
           filled
           two
           Bags
           and
           laid
           up
           near
           two
           Tuns
           out
           of
           the
           Water
           ,
           for
           there
           was
           Water
           over
           the
           Salt
           ,
           which
           began
           to
           decay
           with
           the
           Rain
           and
           Weather
           beating
           on
           it
           :
           at
           Night
           I
           returned
           aboard
           ,
           we
           brought
           as
           much
           Salt
           with
           us
           as
           filled
           a
           Punchion
           ,
           very
           good
           white
           Stone-salt
           ,
           whiter
           than
           
           French-Salt
           ,
           and
           of
           a
           very
           pleasant
           smell
           ;
           I
           saw
           some
           Guianacoes
           ,
           and
           Ostriches
           :
           the
           Hills
           and
           Valleys
           dry
           Earth
           ,
           and
           Grass
           on
           them
           :
           on
           the
           higher
           Hills
           lies
           Snow
           ,
           no
           People
           ,
           but
           many
           places
           where
           they
           had
           made
           fires
           ,
           and
           lain
           under
           a
           Bush
           for
           shelter
           ;
           no
           Mineral
           or
           Metal
           ,
           Tree
           ,
           or
           Fruit.
           
        
         
           Wednesday
           ,
           April
           27.
           
           Close
           Weather
           ,
           and
           little
           Wind
           ;
           a
           cold
           Air
           ,
           it
           freezes
           hard
           ,
           the
           Ice
           bears
           a
           Man.
           
        
         
           Thursday
           April
           28.
           
           Wind
           at
           West
           and
           by
           South
           ,
           a
           fine
           gale
           ,
           cold
           frosty
           Weather
           .
           We
           unrig'd
           the
           Ship
           ,
           and
           made
           all
           snug
           ,
           intending
           to
           Winter
           in
           this
           Harbour
           ;
           the
           Ice
           will
           not
           suffer
           us
           to
           pass
           the
           Streights
           ;
           the
           Winds
           are
           so
           stormy
           ,
           and
           generally
           out
           of
           the
           Western
           quarter
           ;
           the
           Nights
           so
           long
           and
           cold
           ,
           that
           the
           passage
           is
           impossible
           this
           Winter
           .
           The
           Port
           I
           found
           safe
           to
           ride
           in
           ,
           and
           good
           refreshment
           to
           be
           had
           of
           Fowls
           :
           as
           Ducks
           ,
           Peekes
           ,
           and
           Divers
           ,
           &c.
           
           In
           the
           Spring
           I
           may
           be
           ready
           to
           sail
           to
           the
           Southward
           ,
           when
           we
           shall
           
           have
           the
           year
           before
           us
           ,
           and
           the
           Sun
           in
           the
           Southern
           Signs
           ,
           which
           will
           give
           long
           Days
           and
           short
           Nights
           ,
           and
           temperate
           Weather
           ;
           Wind
           at
           North-north-east
           this
           Evening
           ,
           and
           Rain
           :
           it
           blew
           a
           great
           storm
           to
           Night
           ,
           the
           Boat
           sunk
           at
           the
           Ship
           's
           stern
           ,
           and
           lost
           the
           Oars
           :
           less
           Wind
           towards
           Night
           ,
           and
           veared
           to
           the
           West
           .
        
         
           Friday
           May
           6.
           
           Wind
           at
           West-north-west
           ,
           a
           fine
           gale
           .
           I
           went
           a-shore
           on
           the
           North-west
           side
           with
           thirty
           Men
           ,
           and
           travelled
           seven
           or
           eight
           miles
           up
           the
           Hill
           ,
           saw
           no
           People
           :
           the
           Land
           is
           great
           Grass-Downs
           in
           most
           places
           ;
           and
           on
           the
           tops
           of
           the
           Hills
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           Ground
           are
           very
           large
           Oyster-shells
           they
           lie
           in
           Veins
           in
           the
           Earth
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           firm
           Rocks
           :
           and
           on
           the
           sides
           of
           Hills
           in
           the
           Country
           ;
           they
           are
           the
           biggest
           Oyster-shells
           that
           ever
           I
           saw
           ;
           some
           six
           ,
           some
           seven
           Inches
           broad
           ,
           yet
           not
           one
           Oyster
           to
           be
           found
           in
           the
           Harbour
           ;
           whence
           I
           conclude
           ,
           they
           were
           here
           when
           the
           Earth
           was
           formed
           ;
           no
           sign
           of
           Mine
           or
           Metal
           ,
           no
           Woods
           or
           Tree
           ;
           We
           found
           a
           good
           Spring
           of
           fresh
           Water
           up
           in
           the
           Hills
           ,
           it
           drains
           into
           salt
           Water-swashes
           :
           We
           saw
           several
           Salt-water
           Ponds
           six
           miles
           in
           the
           Land
           ,
           made
           by
           the
           saltness
           of
           the
           Earth
           ;
           we
           saw
           Ostriches
           ,
           Guianacoes
           ,
           and
           a
           Fox
           .
           I
           made
           a
           Fire
           on
           the
           top
           of
           the
           highest
           Hill
           ,
           but
           could
           see
           no
           answer
           ;
           I
           returned
           aboard
           with
           my
           Company
           very
           weary
           ;
           some
           of
           my
           Men
           fetched
           Salt
           to
           day
           :
           fair
           Weather
           to
           Night
           .
        
         
           Friday
           May
           13.
           
           Indifferent
           Weather
           ,
           Wind
           at
           West-south-west
           ,
           a
           fine
           gale
           .
           This
           day
           we
           fetched
           Salt
           :
           a
           Gentleman
           of
           my
           Company
           ,
           Mr.
           
             John
             Wood
          
           ,
           walking
           on
           the
           
             Island
             of
             Jusice
          
           ,
           found
           three
           
           small
           pieces
           of
           Gold
           Wire
           in
           two
           Muscle-shells
           :
           which
           Shells
           were
           made
           together
           by
           a
           green
           Gut-string
           :
           the
           Gold
           was
           to
           the
           value
           of
           two
           shillings
           English
           ,
           and
           had
           been
           hammered
           ,
           the
           wire
           as
           big
           as
           a
           great
           Pin.
           
        
         
           Monday
           June
           6.
           
           Cloudy
           cold
           Weather
           ,
           Wind
           at
           South-west
           ,
           a
           fresh
           gale
           .
           This
           day
           I
           went
           a-shore
           with
           sixteen
           Men
           ,
           and
           travelled
           ten
           miles
           West
           into
           the
           Land
           ;
           the
           Hills
           there
           are
           covered
           with
           Snow
           :
           't
           is
           very
           cold
           ,
           we
           could
           not
           go
           any
           further
           for
           Snow
           ;
           and
           the
           Air
           is
           so
           cold
           that
           we
           could
           not
           endure
           to
           lie
           on
           the
           ground
           ;
           on
           the
           Hill
           that
           I
           was
           on
           ,
           we
           could
           see
           nothing
           but
           Hill
           beyond
           Hill
           ;
           no
           Woods
           ,
           nor
           Trees
           ,
           nor
           Bushes
           ,
           all
           grass
           Downs
           :
           the
           Land
           is
           flat
           on
           the
           tops
           of
           the
           Hills
           ;
           fresh
           Water
           runs
           down
           in
           several
           places
           ,
           which
           is
           melted
           Snow
           ,
           and
           when
           the
           Water
           leaves
           running
           ,
           there
           's
           no
           Snow
           .
           I
           saw
           many
           Guianacoes
           ,
           and
           Ostriches
           ;
           no
           People
           or
           sign
           of
           any
           :
           close
           by
           the
           Water-side
           we
           saw
           many
           places
           ,
           where
           they
           had
           lain
           on
           open
           Hills
           in
           the
           Snow
           ,
           and
           some
           places
           where
           they
           had
           killed
           and
           eat
           Guianacoes
           and
           Ostriches
           ;
           they
           make
           but
           small
           Fires
           with
           little
           sticks
           ;
           I
           do
           not
           find
           they
           roast
           their
           flesh
           at
           them
           ,
           for
           we
           saw
           some
           raw
           Flesh
           hanging
           to
           the
           Bones
           ,
           which
           they
           had
           gnawed
           with
           their
           Teeth
           :
           their
           Fires
           are
           only
           to
           warm
           their
           Children's
           Fingers
           ,
           as
           we
           imagine
           :
           I
           gathered
           some
           handfuls
           of
           Guianacoes
           Wool
           that
           lay
           here
           ;
           I
           am
           persuaded
           these
           People
           must
           needs
           see
           us
           travelling
           to
           and
           fro
           every
           day
           ,
           but
           won't
           come
           near
           or
           be
           seen
           by
           us
           :
           they
           live
           like
           wild
           Beasts
           ,
           or
           rather
           worse
           ,
           for
           sometimes
           they
           must
           be
           in
           great
           want
           of
           Food
           ;
           
           here
           's
           neither
           Fruit
           ,
           Root
           ,
           or
           Herb
           for
           it
           :
           The
           Land
           is
           a
           dry
           gravelly
           Soil
           ,
           with
           Sand
           ,
           and
           in
           many
           places
           a
           Marle
           two
           foot
           below
           the
           Surface
           ;
           the
           Grass
           ,
           which
           is
           dry
           ,
           grows
           in
           knots
           ,
           not
           very
           long
           but
           thick
           ;
           in
           the
           Valleys
           the
           Earth
           is
           of
           a
           Petery
           or
           nitrous
           Nature
           ;
           Ostriches
           seen
           ;
           no
           sign
           of
           Metal
           or
           Mineral
           ;
           I
           and
           my
           Company
           have
           looked
           in
           most
           places
           where
           we
           travelled
           for
           it
           :
           to
           Night
           we
           got
           down
           but
           very
           weary
           .
        
         
           Tuesday
           June
           7.
           clse
           dark
           Weather
           ,
           Wind
           at
           North-east
           and
           by
           East
           ,
           a
           fair
           gale
           :
           a
           new
           Moon
           to
           day
           ,
           fine
           Weather
           to
           Night
           ,
           but
           cold
           ;
           the
           Stars
           near
           the
           
             Pole
             Antartick
          
           are
           very
           visible
           ;
           some
           of
           the
           small
           Stars
           in
           the
           Constellation
           of
           little
           Hydra
           are
           near
           the
           Pole
           ;
           Here
           are
           many
           good
           Stars
           near
           the
           Pole
           ,
           good
           for
           Observation
           ,
           of
           the
           first
           and
           second
           Magnitude
           :
           the
           Star
           at
           the
           South-end
           of
           Ariadne
           ,
           the
           Star
           at
           
             Hydra's
             Head
          
           ;
           the
           Star
           in
           the
           
             Peacock's
             eye
          
           ,
           and
           the
           Stars
           in
           
             Tucan's
             bill
          
           ,
           and
           the
           Stars
           in
           
             Tucan's
             thigh
             and
             back
          
           ;
           the
           stars
           in
           
             Grus's
             head
             and
             wing
             and
             body
          
           ;
           but
           the
           brightest
           Stars
           are
           the
           Stars
           in
           the
           former
           foot
           of
           Centaurus
           and
           the
           Crosiers
           ;
           the
           other
           Stars
           are
           of
           the
           third
           ,
           fourth
           and
           fifth
           Magnitude
           :
           The
           two
           Clouds
           are
           seen
           very
           plainly
           ,
           and
           a
           small
           black
           Cloud
           ,
           which
           the
           foot
           of
           the
           Cross
           is
           in
           ,
           is
           always
           very
           visible
           when
           the
           Crosiers
           are
           above
           the
           Horizon
           ,
           as
           they
           are
           alway
           here
           in
           these
           Latitudes
           .
           The
           Heavens
           in
           this
           South
           Hemisphere
           are
           as
           the
           Heavens
           in
           the
           North
           Hemisphere
           ;
           but
           no
           Stars
           within
           eighteen
           degrees
           of
           the
           Pole
           fit
           for
           Observation
           ;
           no
           Pole-star
           ,
           as
           the
           Star
           in
           the
           Tail
           of
           the
           little
           Bear
           is
           in
           the
           
           North
           :
           the
           Air
           cold
           to
           Night
           ,
           but
           very
           healthy
           for
           stirring
           Men
           ;
           I
           have
           not
           had
           my
           Finger
           ached
           as
           yet
           ;
           a
           Man
           hath
           an
           excellent
           stomach
           here
           ;
           I
           can
           eat
           Foxes
           and
           Kites
           as
           savourily
           as
           if
           it
           were
           Mutton
           ;
           every
           Fox
           and
           Kite
           as
           we
           kill
           ,
           we
           eat
           ,
           which
           is
           ever
           now
           and
           then
           one
           killed
           .
           Nothing
           comes
           amiss
           to
           our
           stomachs
           ,
           not
           one
           Man
           complains
           of
           cold
           in
           his
           Head
           or
           of
           Coughs
           .
           Young
           Men
           well
           grown
           and
           of
           good
           shape
           are
           most
           fit
           for
           this
           Country
           ,
           it
           being
           a
           dry
           and
           an
           hungry
           Air
           ,
           and
           Provisions
           to
           be
           got
           with
           pains
           .
           The
           Ostriches
           are
           nothing
           so
           big
           as
           the
           Ostriches
           in
           Barbary
           ,
           nor
           of
           the
           Colour
           nor
           Feather
           ;
           these
           are
           grey
           on
           the
           Back
           ,
           and
           shaggy
           Feathers
           of
           no
           use
           ,
           and
           the
           Feathers
           on
           their
           Bellies
           are
           whire
           ;
           they
           have
           long
           Legs
           and
           small
           Wings
           ;
           they
           cannot
           fly
           ;
           they
           have
           a
           long
           Neck
           ,
           and
           a
           small
           Head
           ,
           and
           beaked
           near
           like
           a
           Goose
           ;
           they
           are
           much
           like
           a
           great
           Turky-cock
           ,
           and
           good
           lean
           dry
           Meat
           and
           sweet
           :
           to
           Night
           I
           came
           aboard
           ;
           it
           blew
           fresh
           at
           west
           .
        
         
           Wednesday
           June
           22.
           
           Wind
           at
           West-north-west
           ,
           a
           stout
           gale
           .
           This
           day
           I
           went
           ashore
           on
           the
           East-side
           ,
           saw
           no
           People
           ;
           this
           day
           Mr.
           
             John
             Wood
          
           went
           ashore
           on
           the
           West
           side
           ,
           and
           three
           Men
           with
           him
           ;
           they
           were
           armed
           ;
           they
           travelled
           into
           the
           Land
           West
           and
           by
           North
           about
           four
           miles
           ;
           where
           they
           saw
           seven
           People
           of
           the
           Country
           on
           a
           Hill
           ,
           making
           a
           noise
           and
           wafting
           them
           to
           the
           Ship
           :
           Our
           Men
           went
           up
           the
           rise
           of
           the
           Hill
           to
           them
           ;
           three
           of
           the
           Indian
           Men
           came
           to
           Mr.
           Wood
           with
           their
           Bows
           and
           Arrows
           in
           their
           Hands
           ,
           and
           a
           loose
           skin
           about
           their
           Bodies
           ,
           and
           a
           Furr-skin
           
           about
           their
           Heads
           ,
           and
           pieces
           of
           skins
           about
           their
           Feet
           ,
           and
           all
           the
           other
           parts
           of
           their
           bodies
           naked
           ;
           they
           were
           painted
           red
           and
           white
           on
           their
           Faces
           ;
           they
           would
           not
           come
           so
           near
           as
           to
           let
           our
           Men
           touch
           them
           ,
           but
           slepped
           back
           as
           you
           moved
           forward
           ;
           they
           continuing
           their
           noise
           ,
           and
           wafting
           with
           their
           Hands
           towards
           the
           Ship
           ,
           and
           and
           kept
           talking
           ,
           but
           no
           Man
           could
           understand
           them
           :
           they
           repeated
           
             Ozse
             ,
             Ozse
          
           ,
           very
           often
           ;
           they
           have
           an
           harsh
           Speech
           and
           speak
           in
           the
           Throat
           ;
           they
           received
           any
           thing
           that
           you
           cast
           to
           them
           on
           the
           ground
           .
           Mr.
           Wood
           gave
           them
           a
           Knife
           ,
           and
           a
           Shas●●
           ,
           and
           a
           Neckcloath
           ,
           and
           a
           bottle
           of
           Brandy
           :
           they
           would
           not
           drink
           ;
           Mr.
           Wood
           could
           not
           perceive
           any
           Bracelets
           they
           had
           ,
           or
           any
           thing
           about
           them
           save
           their
           Skin
           :
           they
           are
           people
           of
           a
           middle
           stature
           ,
           and
           well-shaped
           ;
           tawny
           Olive-colour'd
           ,
           black
           Hair
           ,
           not
           very
           long
           :
           they
           seem
           to
           be
           of
           a
           rude
           behaviour
           ,
           for
           they
           returned
           nothing
           for
           what
           they
           received
           ,
           nor
           took
           no
           notice
           of
           any
           thing
           ;
           the
           rest
           of
           their
           Company
           stayed
           at
           the
           Hill
           :
           they
           can
           endure
           much
           cold
           ,
           for
           their
           Legs
           ,
           Buttocks
           ,
           and
           lower
           parts
           are
           naked
           .
           Mr.
           Wood
           was
           taller
           than
           any
           of
           them
           ,
           and
           he
           judged
           the
           eldest
           of
           the
           three
           to
           be
           upwards
           of
           forty
           years
           old
           ,
           the
           other
           thirty
           .
           They
           seemed
           to
           be
           very
           fearful
           ;
           they
           took
           their
           own
           time
           ,
           and
           went
           away
           into
           the
           Land.
           Mr.
           Wood
           returned
           aboard
           and
           acquainted
           me
           with
           what
           he
           had
           seen
           .
           This
           Night
           we
           saw
           a
           Fire
           in
           the
           Hills
           .
           It
           blew
           hard
           to
           Night
           at
           West
           .
           They
           have
           small
           Dogs
           with
           them
           ;
           they
           would
           not
           have
           come
           near
           our
           People
           ,
           if
           they
           had
           not
           fallen
           accidentally
           in
           the
           Hills
           and
           Valleys
           
           with
           them
           .
           I
           have
           thought
           that
           they
           have
           heard
           of
           the
           cruel
           dealings
           of
           the
           Spaniards
           ,
           and
           dare
           not
           trust
           us
           .
        
         
           Saturday
           July
           2.
           
           Wind
           at
           West
           ,
           a
           fine
           gale
           .
           I
           went
           a-shore
           on
           the
           East-side
           ;
           we
           killed
           a
           great
           Guianacoe
           with
           the
           Greyhound
           .
           I
           looked
           in
           his
           Paunch
           for
           the
           Bezoar-stone
           ,
           but
           found
           nothing
           .
           I
           travelled
           to
           and
           fro
           but
           saw
           no
           people
           :
           I
           saw
           where
           People
           had
           made
           earthen
           Pots
           ,
           and
           had
           glased
           them
           ,
           for
           there
           lay
           some
           of
           their
           stuff
           run
           together
           :
           at
           Night
           I
           went
           aboard
           .
        
         
           Sunday
           July
           3.
           
           Wind
           at
           South
           ,
           close
           Weather
           .
           The
           Guianacoe
           weighed
           ,
           cleaved
           in
           his
           Quarters
           ,
           two
           hundred
           and
           fifty
           pounds
           neat
           .
           He
           served
           all
           the
           Company
           for
           a
           days
           Flesh
           ,
           and
           is
           good
           Meat
           .
        
         
           Tuesday
           July
           12.
           
           Close
           Weather
           ,
           and
           little
           Wind
           at
           North
           and
           by
           West
           .
           I
           went
           up
           to
           the
           head
           of
           the
           Harbour
           ,
           but
           saw
           no
           People
           :
           There
           is
           in
           the
           Fullers-Earth
           Cliffs
           at
           the
           head
           of
           the
           Harbour
           ,
           a
           Vein
           made
           like
           rotten
           Ising-glass
           ;
           I
           took
           some
           out
           ,
           but
           cannot
           find
           it
           good
           for
           any
           thing
           :
           I
           digged
           in
           the
           Cliff
           ,
           but
           saw
           nothing
           to
           be
           taken
           notice
           of
           .
           I
           saw
           in
           two
           places
           pieces
           of
           floor
           Timbers
           of
           a
           Ship
           ;
           they
           have
           laid
           a
           long
           time
           rotting
           .
           We
           saw
           that
           the
           biggest
           of
           these
           Bushes
           here
           ,
           have
           been
           cut
           down
           by
           some
           Christian
           People
           .
           I
           saw
           wooden
           Plates
           ,
           and
           a
           piece
           of
           Cork
           ,
           and
           a
           piece
           of
           an
           old
           Oar
           :
           some
           Christian
           Ship
           had
           been
           here
           formerly
           .
           I
           lay
           ashore
           to
           Night
           .
        
         
           Sunday
           July
           31.
           
           Fair
           Weather
           ,
           Wind
           at
           South-west
           ,
           a
           stiff
           gale
           .
           The
           Weather
           as
           cold
           as
           it
           is
           
           in
           England
           in
           the
           height
           of
           Winter
           ,
           and
           the
           Air
           rather
           sharper
           and
           dryer
           ;
           I
           have
           now
           twelve
           Men
           lame
           with
           the
           cold
           ,
           and
           their
           Legs
           and
           Thighs
           are
           turned
           as
           black
           as
           a
           black
           Hat
           ,
           in
           spots
           ,
           the
           cold
           having
           chilled
           the
           Blood
           ;
           yet
           they
           use
           bathing
           and
           stuping
           those
           places
           ,
           and
           all
           that
           they
           can
           to
           prevent
           it
           ,
           but
           it
           rather
           encreaseth
           on
           them
           than
           otherwise
           :
           These
           are
           such
           people
           as
           I
           could
           not
           make
           stir
           by
           an
           meyans
           ;
           they
           that
           stir
           are
           as
           well
           as
           any
           Men
           in
           the
           World
           can
           be
           .
        
         
           Tuesday
           
             August
             2.
          
           
           Close
           Weather
           ,
           Wind
           at
           South-west
           ,
           a
           gale
           and
           cold
           Air.
           We
           fall
           on
           fitting
           of
           our
           Rigging
           and
           getting
           the
           Ship
           fit
           :
           Here
           are
           hundreds
           of
           Guianacoes
           in
           companies
           near
           the
           Water-side
           :
           my
           Greyhound
           is
           lame
           ,
           so
           that
           I
           cannot
           make
           her
           run
           ;
           also
           here
           are
           many
           Ostriches
           ,
           together
           with
           many
           green
           plovers
           at
           the
           Watercr-side
           ,
           and
           some
           Swans
           ,
           but
           not
           full
           so
           large
           as
           ours
           :
           They
           are
           white
           ,
           save
           a
           black
           Head
           ,
           and
           half
           the
           Neck
           and
           Legs
           black
           :
           Here
           are
           some
           white
           Geese
           ,
           as
           European
           geese
           ;
           the
           brant-Geese
           are
           some
           whith
           ,
           some
           black
           and
           grey
           ;
           The
           Mallards
           and
           Ducks
           are
           grey
           ;
           and
           the
           Teals
           are
           grey
           .
        
         
           Tuesday
           
             August
             16.
          
           
           Close
           Weather
           ,
           Wind
           at
           West
           and
           at
           North-west
           ,
           a
           fine
           gale
           .
           I
           sent
           the
           Boat
           for
           Water
           to
           a
           Swash
           on
           the
           East-side
           ;
           two
           of
           my
           Men
           saw
           two
           of
           the
           People
           of
           the
           Country
           on
           the
           East-side
           behind
           a
           Bush
           ;
           my
           Men
           went
           toward
           them
           ;
           they
           went
           away
           and
           left
           a
           bundle
           of
           Skins
           under
           the
           Bush
           ;
           my
           Men
           made
           signs
           to
           speak
           with
           them
           ,
           but
           they
           would
           not
           stay
           ;
           m●
           Men
           did
           not
           go
           after
           them
           but
           sat
           down
           ,
           the●
           would
           not
           stay
           ;
           they
           were
           but
           of
           a
           middle
           st●ture
           :
           
           my
           Men
           brought
           the
           Bundle
           aboard
           to
           shew
           it
           to
           me
           ,
           and
           two
           mungrel
           Dogs
           ,
           which
           were
           coupled
           together
           .
           I
           opened
           the
           Bundle
           and
           it
           was
           several
           bags
           of
           Skins
           ,
           with
           red
           Earth
           and
           white
           Earth
           ,
           and
           Soot
           or
           paint
           in
           a
           Bag
           :
           this
           is
           the
           Trade
           they
           paint
           themselves
           with
           ;
           they
           had
           Flint-stones
           and
           Arrow-heads
           in
           the
           Bundle
           ;
           I
           searched
           the
           Bundle
           all
           over
           to
           see
           grains
           of
           Gold
           ,
           but
           could
           not
           find
           any
           :
           There
           were
           Bracelets
           of
           Shells
           ,
           and
           bits
           of
           Sticks
           ,
           and
           braided
           Thongs
           ,
           and
           Arrows
           ,
           and
           Muscle-shells
           ,
           and
           Armadillo-shells
           ,
           and
           a
           small
           point
           of
           a
           Nail
           in
           a
           stick
           for
           a
           Bodkin
           :
           Their
           Skins
           were
           pieces
           of
           Seal-skins
           ,
           and
           pieces
           of
           Guianaco-skins
           ,
           sewed
           together
           with
           small
           Guts
           ;
           all
           very
           old
           and
           full
           of
           holes
           ,
           and
           smelt
           of
           grease
           ;
           There
           were
           pieces
           of
           Flints
           made
           fast
           with
           a
           green
           Gut
           ,
           in
           the
           split
           of
           a
           Stick
           ,
           which
           they
           hold
           fast
           to
           knock
           their
           Arrow-heads
           into
           shape
           :
           There
           were
           also
           pieces
           of
           Sticks
           to
           get
           Fire
           with
           .
           This
           was
           all
           that
           was
           in
           the
           Bundle
           ;
           it
           was
           made
           fast
           with
           Leather-thongs
           ,
           braided
           round
           like
           Whip-cord
           ,
           and
           the
           Dogs
           were
           coupled
           with
           such
           strings
           :
           The
           Muscle-shells
           are
           their
           Knives
           .
           I
           put
           all
           things
           up
           in
           the
           Bag
           ,
           and
           made
           it
           fast
           .
           Their
           Dogs
           are
           much
           of
           the
           Race
           of
           Spanish
           dogs
           ;
           a
           good
           large
           mungrel
           Cur
           ,
           but
           very
           tame
           ;
           any
           Man
           might
           handle
           them
           ;
           they
           were
           grey
           in
           colour
           ,
           and
           painted
           red
           in
           spots
           :
           they
           were
           very
           lean
           ;
           there
           were
           two
           grcat
           Staves
           of
           four
           foot
           long
           ,
           which
           was
           tough
           Cane
           in
           short
           joints
           :
           I
           carried
           them
           a-shore
           next
           day
           .
        
         
           Tuesday
           August
           30.
           
           Foggy
           close
           Weather
           this
           morning
           ,
           Wind
           at
           North.
           We
           travelled
           away
           
           West
           into
           the
           Land
           ten
           or
           twenty
           miles
           farther
           :
           The
           Land
           all
           dry
           ,
           with
           Grass
           ,
           and
           Bushes
           in
           some
           places
           like
           Thorns
           ;
           the
           Hills
           high
           ,
           and
           many
           ,
           and
           Snow
           on
           the
           tops
           ;
           no
           Woods
           ,
           nor
           Trees
           to
           be
           seen
           ;
           Fresh-water
           comes
           running
           out
           of
           the
           Hills
           in
           fine
           Rivulet
           ;
           no
           Fruit
           ;
           many
           sedgy
           Bushes
           grow
           on
           the
           Brink
           ,
           and
           brave
           green
           Grass
           ,
           and
           a
           green
           Herb
           of
           a
           pretty
           strong
           hot
           taste
           ;
           some
           Teal
           in
           the
           Water
           ,
           and
           Water-birds
           ;
           this
           is
           all
           I
           saw
           about
           the
           Rivulet
           .
           Many
           large
           Ponds
           in
           the
           Country
           ,
           but
           salt
           Water
           in
           those
           Ponds
           ;
           we
           saw
           Fowls
           like
           Herons
           ,
           but
           all
           red
           ;
           in
           the
           Valleys
           we
           saw
           hundreds
           of
           Guianacoes
           in
           a
           company
           ,
           and
           twenty
           Ostriches
           :
           some
           Heres
           and
           some
           Partridges
           ,
           greyer
           and
           bigger
           than
           ours
           ;
           some
           Snipes
           and
           small
           Birds
           ;
           several
           Penne-wrens
           :
           we
           saw
           several
           Kites
           ,
           and
           small
           Hawks
           ,
           and
           Owls
           ;
           we
           caught
           two
           Armadilloes
           ;
           I
           saw
           two
           Foxes
           and
           a
           wild
           Dog
           ,
           and
           many
           brant-Geese
           :
           the
           Land
           is
           in
           Hills
           and
           Valleys
           as
           far
           as
           we
           could
           see
           ,
           and
           bad
           travelling
           on
           foot
           ;
           the
           Soil
           is
           gravelly
           and
           dry
           sand
           ,
           of
           a
           Salt-petre
           nature
           ;
           the
           Grass
           in
           some
           places
           long
           and
           dry
           ,
           and
           in
           some
           places
           short
           and
           dry
           ;
           the
           Hills
           are
           rounding
           aloft
           like
           large
           Downs
           :
           We
           red
           Earth
           in
           some
           places
           ,
           such
           as
           the
           Indians
           use
           ;
           we
           saw
           the
           Footsteps
           of
           people
           in
           many
           places
           in
           the
           Clay
           ,
           and
           places
           where
           they
           had
           been
           ,
           and
           had
           killed
           Guianacoes
           ,
           and
           made
           a
           fire
           there
           ;
           I
           gathered
           Guianacoes-Wooll
           ,
           and
           Ostriches
           Feathers
           were
           scattered
           about
           the
           place
           ,
           and
           Bones
           :
           there
           lay
           the
           Skulls
           of
           three
           People
           ,
           no
           flesh
           on
           them
           ;
           they
           were
           very
           clean
           ,
           and
           no
           larger
           than
           the
           Skulls
           of
           European
           Men
           ;
           
           smooth
           and
           even
           Teeth
           ,
           close
           set
           ;
           one
           of
           those
           Skulls
           was
           broken
           .
           Whether
           these
           people
           be
           Man-eaters
           or
           not
           I
           cannot
           tell
           ;
           I
           judge
           they
           have
           Wars
           one
           with
           another
           ,
           by
           reason
           here
           are
           so
           few
           People
           in
           this
           great
           Land
           ,
           and
           food
           enough
           to
           live
           on
           ,
           and
           the
           Land
           all
           clear
           and
           good
           Pasturage
           for
           Cattle
           ,
           and
           no
           Mountains
           ;
           in
           all
           the
           Land
           there
           are
           Plains
           and
           grassy
           Meadows
           :
           here
           wants
           only
           Wood
           to
           build
           with
           ;
           it
           that
           were
           here
           ,
           it
           would
           be
           as
           good
           a
           Land
           as
           any
           part
           of
           America
           ,
           for
           the
           Counrry
           is
           very
           healthy
           .
           This
           Afternoon
           it
           rained
           ,
           and
           was
           very
           thick
           and
           foggy
           ,
           so
           as
           we
           could
           not
           tell
           which
           way
           to
           go
           ,
           although
           we
           had
           a
           Compass
           with
           us
           ;
           for
           there
           is
           no
           going
           into
           the
           Land
           without
           one
           ,
           because
           a
           Man
           will
           mistake
           his
           way
           ,
           the
           Country
           is
           so
           open
           in
           great
           Plains
           and
           Downs
           :
           We
           were
           very
           much
           wet
           and
           cold
           ;
           We
           got
           to
           Bushes
           ,
           and
           there
           made
           a
           Fire
           and
           dried
           our selves
           :
           we
           stayed
           here
           all
           Night
           ;
           we
           neither
           heard
           nor
           saw
           any
           thing
           to
           Night
           .
        
         
           Tuesday
           September
           1.
           1670.
           
           Close
           hasey
           Weather
           ,
           the
           Wind
           at
           North
           ,
           a
           small
           gale
           ,
           so
           as
           I
           could
           not
           Sail
           this
           day
           ;
           we
           tried
           for
           Fish
           ,
           but
           caught
           none
           ,
           the
           Water
           is
           so
           cold
           ,
           I
           was
           on
           the
           Land
           ,
           when
           I
           was
           at
           the
           farthest
           ,
           twenty
           five
           miles
           West-north-west
           from
           the
           Harbour-mouth
           ,
           and
           all
           things
           as
           I
           saw
           I
           have
           mentioned
           ,
           excepting
           some
           small
           Creatures
           like
           Efts
           ,
           which
           run
           in
           the
           Grass
           ;
           no
           manner
           of
           Snake
           or
           venomous
           Creature
           have
           I
           seen
           in
           this
           Country
           ;
           here
           are
           some
           Earth-worms
           ,
           and
           Caterpillers
           ,
           and
           other
           Buggs
           ,
           but
           few
           in
           number
           :
           no
           wild
           Beast
           of
           prey
           ,
           or
           
           any
           other
           thing
           to
           annoy
           the
           Inhabitants
           ,
           but
           Cold
           and
           Hunger
           :
           Here
           lies
           a
           large
           Country
           ,
           open
           to
           receive
           any
           Inhabitants
           from
           forein
           Parts
           ,
           and
           large
           enough
           to
           satisfie
           the
           Undertakers
           :
           The
           Land
           would
           produce
           European
           Grain
           ,
           if
           planted
           here
           ,
           and
           breed
           Cattle
           .
        
         
           September
           16.
           
           I
           considering
           my
           Men
           ,
           being
           very
           weak
           ,
           thought
           it
           most
           fit
           to
           go
           for
           
             Port
             Desier
          
           ,
           and
           there
           to
           refresh
           the
           Men
           ,
           for
           I
           knowing
           there
           I
           could
           have
           what
           Penguins
           and
           Seals
           I
           would
           have
           ,
           which
           are
           good
           Provisions
           ;
           also
           I
           do
           intend
           to
           salt
           up
           a
           quantity
           of
           each
           ,
           to
           carry
           to
           Sea
           with
           me
           ,
           to
           lengthen
           out
           my
           Provisions
           .
           This
           Forenoon
           I
           steered
           from
           St.
           Julian
           North-north-east
           ,
           and
           made
           what
           Sail
           I
           could
           to
           get
           to
           
             Pert
             Desier
          
           :
           This
           Night
           it
           was
           a
           small
           gale
           ,
           and
           veered
           to
           the
           West-south-west
           ;
           I
           judge
           it
           best
           to
           make
           my
           easie
           Sail
           in
           the
           Night
           ,
           for
           fear
           of
           running
           up
           with
           the
           Eady
           Stone-Rocks
           before
           day-light
           .
        
         
           Wednesday
           September
           21.
           
           Fair
           Weather
           to
           day
           ,
           the
           Wind
           veerable
           round
           the
           Compass
           .
           This
           Morning
           I
           had
           both
           the
           Boats
           leden
           with
           Seals
           ,
           and
           Penguins
           and
           Penguin-eggs
           ;
           ten
           Men
           may
           kill
           ten
           thousand
           Penguins
           in
           less
           than
           an
           hours
           time
           ;
           the
           Seals
           and
           Penguins
           are
           numberless
           :
           a
           Man
           cannot
           pass
           on
           the
           Island
           for
           them
           .
           This
           Evening
           I
           got
           on
           board
           and
           landed
           our
           lading
           ashore
           ;
           fair
           Weather
           to
           Night
           .
           The
           Eggs
           are
           very
           good
           Nourishment
           ,
           and
           the
           Fat
           serves
           for
           Oil
           to
           the
           Lamps
           .
        
         
           Thursday
           September
           22.
           
           Fair
           Weather
           ,
           Wind
           at
           West
           .
           This
           day
           I
           divided
           the
           Eggs
           amongst
           
           the
           Men
           :
           we
           skinned
           the
           Seals
           and
           the
           Penguins
           ,
           and
           salted
           the
           Flesh
           in
           bulk
           on
           the
           Rock
           ,
           and
           covered
           it
           to
           keep
           the
           Wind
           from
           it
           :
           good
           Weather
           and
           little
           Wind
           to
           Night
           .
        
         
           Friday
           September
           30.
           
           The
           Wind
           at
           North
           this
           Morning
           ;
           this
           forenoon
           it
           came
           to
           the
           South-east
           ,
           and
           blew
           hard
           ,
           and
           rained
           .
           This
           day
           I
           went
           up
           the
           River
           about
           ten
           miles
           ,
           and
           
             Don
             Carolus
          
           with
           me
           ,
           and
           ten
           Men
           to
           see
           for
           People
           :
           we
           lay
           out
           all
           Night
           on
           the
           South-side
           ,
           but
           saw
           no
           People
           ;
           this
           Night
           the
           people
           of
           the
           Country
           came
           to
           our
           little
           Well
           ,
           which
           is
           up
           in
           the
           Valley
           ,
           and
           stole
           an
           Iron
           Pot
           ,
           and
           three
           suits
           of
           Cloaths
           of
           the
           Mens
           ,
           that
           were
           laid
           there
           a
           drying
           ,
           with
           some
           other
           Linnen
           ;
           but
           did
           not
           meddle
           with
           the
           Beads
           ,
           which
           are
           hung
           up
           on
           a
           Pole
           on
           the
           Hills
           ,
           and
           they
           will
           not
           come
           near
           it
           nor
           meddle
           with
           it
           :
           The
           People
           of
           the
           Country
           have
           made
           in
           a
           Valley
           ,
           the
           form
           of
           the
           Ship
           in
           Earth
           and
           Bushes
           ,
           and
           stuck
           up
           pieces
           of
           sticks
           for
           Masts
           ,
           and
           redded
           the
           Bushes
           all
           over
           with
           red
           Earth
           ;
           the
           Model
           I
           imagine
           is
           to
           record
           our
           Ship
           ,
           for
           they
           cannot
           have
           any
           Records
           but
           by
           imitation
           :
           This
           Fancy
           we
           let
           alone
           untouched
           ,
           only
           I
           laid
           a
           string
           or
           two
           of
           Beads
           on
           it
           and
           came
           away
           :
           close
           Weather
           to
           Night
           .
           These
           People
           must
           certainly
           have
           received
           some
           injury
           in
           former
           times
           ,
           from
           some
           People
           that
           have
           been
           here
           in
           Shipping
           ,
           otherwise
           they
           would
           come
           in
           sight
           of
           us
           ;
           or
           else
           they
           have
           heard
           of
           the
           cruel
           dealings
           of
           the
           Spaniards
           toward
           the
           Indians
           ,
           where
           they
           lived
           near
           :
           I
           have
           used
           all
           endeavours
           possibly
           by
           fair
           means
           to
           have
           Conference
           with
           them
           ,
           but
           all
           is
           in
           vain
           .
        
         
         
           Tuesday
           October
           11.
           
           The
           Wind
           at
           West-south-west
           ,
           a
           stout
           gale
           ;
           very
           cold
           ,
           Hail
           and
           sleety
           Snow
           to
           day
           .
           Our
           Men
           are
           all
           in
           good
           health
           and
           are
           lusty
           and
           fat
           ,
           those
           wihch
           had
           the
           Scurvy
           are
           got
           very
           well
           with
           eating
           of
           fresh
           Meat
           ,
           and
           such
           green
           Herbs
           as
           they
           can
           get
           on
           the
           shore
           ,
           as
           green
           Pease-leaves
           and
           such
           trade
           ;
           they
           mince
           it
           ,
           fry
           it
           with
           Eggs
           and
           Seal-oil
           ;
           and
           it
           hath
           raised
           every
           Man
           in
           as
           good
           health
           as
           they
           were
           at
           our
           coming
           out
           of
           England
           :
           We
           fare
           very
           well
           ,
           and
           have
           great
           plenty
           of
           good
           Provisions
           :
           Here
           is
           Provision
           enough
           of
           Seals
           and
           Penguins
           ,
           if
           salt
           be
           plenty
           ,
           to
           lade
           Ships
           ;
           I
           can
           confidently
           say
           ,
           that
           on
           the
           
             Island
             of
             Penguins
          
           there
           are
           more
           Seals
           and
           Penguins
           at
           this
           present
           ,
           than
           three
           hundred
           Tuns
           of
           Cask
           can
           hold
           ,
           when
           dressed
           and
           salted
           ,
           besides
           what
           are
           going
           off
           and
           coming
           on
           ;
           if
           any
           Men
           should
           have
           occasion
           for
           provisions
           of
           Flesh
           ,
           If
           they
           have
           Salt
           ,
           here
           they
           may
           furnish
           themselves
           with
           what
           quantity
           shall
           seem
           fit
           for
           them
           ,
           and
           I
           can
           assure
           them
           it
           will
           last
           four
           Months
           sweet
           ,
           if
           not
           longer
           ,
           if
           care
           be
           taken
           in
           bleeding
           ,
           and
           dressing
           ,
           and
           salting
           ,
           as
           I
           have
           prescribed
           before
           ;
           the
           Salt
           may
           also
           be
           had
           at
           Saint
           
           Julian's
           Salt-pond
           in
           Summer-time
           ;
           also
           I
           believe
           that
           Salt
           may
           be
           made
           at
           
             Port
             Desier
          
           in
           the
           Summer-time
           ,
           for
           here
           is
           some
           dried
           Salt
           on
           the
           holes
           of
           the
           Rocks
           :
           Here
           are
           several
           Flats
           ,
           where
           Men
           may
           make
           Pits
           and
           let
           in
           Salt-water
           ,
           and
           so
           make
           Salt
           ,
           as
           I
           have
           seen
           in
           other
           places
           .
        
         
           The
           Penguin
           is
           a
           Fowl
           that
           lives
           by
           catching
           and
           eating
           of
           Fish
           ,
           which
           he
           dives
           for
           ,
           and
           is
           very
           nimble
           in
           the
           Water
           ;
           he
           is
           as
           big
           as
           a
           brant-goose
           ,
        
         
         
           and
           weighs
           near
           about
           eight
           pounds
           ;
           they
           have
           no
           Wings
           ,
           but
           flat
           stumps
           like
           Fins
           :
           their
           Coat
           is
           a
           downy
           stumped
           Feather
           ;
           they
           are
           blackish
           ,
           grey
           on
           the
           Backs
           and
           Heads
           ,
           and
           white
           about
           their
           Necks
           and
           down
           their
           Bellies
           :
           they
           are
           short
           legged
           like
           a
           Goose
           ,
           and
           stand
           upright
           like
           little
           Children
           in
           white
           Aprons
           ,
           in
           companies
           together
           ;
           they
           are
           full-necked
           ,
           and
           headed
           and
           beaked
           like
           a
           Crow
           ,
           only
           the
           point
           of
           their
           Bill
           turns
           down
           a
           little
           :
           they
           will
           bite
           hard
           ,
           but
           they
           are
           very
           tame
           ,
           and
           will
           drive
           in
           herds
           to
           your
           Boats-side
           like
           Sheep
           ,
           and
           there
           you
           may
           knock
           them
           on
           the
           head
           ,
           all
           one
           after
           another
           ,
           they
           will
           not
           make
           any
           great
           hast
           away
           ;
           Here
           are
           a
           great
           many
           Sea-Pies
           ,
           and
           Ducks
           ,
           and
           Ox-Birds
           ,
           and
           Sea-Mews
           ,
           and
           Gulls
           ,
           and
           white
           Sea-Pigeons
           ,
           and
           white-breasted
           Divers
           ,
           and
           Dobchicks
           .
        
         
           October
           13.
           
           I
           weighed
           ,
           and
           sailed
           out
           of
           
             Port
             Desier
          
           standing
           Southward
           .
           Octob.
           16.
           
           I
           was
           in
           Lat.
           49
           d.
           8
           m.
           South
           .
           Octob.
           19.
           
           I
           passed
           by
           the
           Cape
           ,
           called
           Beachy-Head
           by
           our
           Men
           ,
           and
           the
           Hill
           of
           St.
           Ives
           ,
           Lat
           50
           d.
           10
           m.
           The
           Compass
           has
           variation
           16
           d.
           37
           m.
           Easterly
           .
           The
           Land
           here
           makes
           in
           a
           Bay
           ,
           where
           the
           River
           of
           St.
           Cruce
           goes
           in
           .
        
         
           Octob.
           21.
           
           We
           passed
           by
           Cape
           Fair-weather
           in
           51
           d.
           30
           m.
           South-Lat
           .
           Here
           goes
           on
           the
           River
           of
           
             Gallegoes
             .
             Octob.
          
           22.
           
           We
           came
           to
           
             Cape
             Virgin-Mary
          
           ,
           at
           the
           entrance
           of
           the
           
             Streight
             of
             Magellan
          
           .
        
         
           
             Cape
             Virgin-Mary
          
           ,
           at
           the
           North-entrance
           ,
           lies
           in
           the
           Latitude
           of
           52
           d.
           26
           m.
           
        
         
           And
           in
           Longitude
           ,
           from
           the
           Lizard
           in
           England
           ,
           West
           ,
           65
           d.
           42
           m.
           
        
         
         
           Meridian
           distance
           form
           the
           Lizard
           in
           Leagues
           ,
           West
           1062.
           
           Leagues
           .
        
         
           Variation
           of
           the
           Compass
           here
           I
           find
           to
           be
           Easterly
           ,
           17
           Degrees
           .
        
         
           Here
           is
           Anchoring
           all
           about
           this
           Part
           of
           the
           Streights
           ,
           in
           the
           fair
           way
           from
           
             Cape
             Virgin-Mary
          
           ,
           till
           you
           come
           into
           the
           Narrow
           .
           I
           did
           not
           find
           much
           Tide
           any
           where
           hereabout
           ,
           but
           in
           the
           Narrow
           ,
           and
           there
           the
           Tide
           runs
           stronger
           than
           it
           does
           in
           the
           Hope
           a
           good
           matter
           ;
           the
           floud
           Tide
           sets
           into
           the
           Streights
           ,
           and
           the
           Ebb
           sets
           out
           ;
           it
           keepeth
           its
           course
           ,
           as
           on
           other
           Coasts
           :
           it
           is
           six
           hours
           Floud
           and
           two
           hours
           Ebb
           ;
           it
           riseth
           and
           falls
           near
           four
           Fathom
           perpendicular
           ;
           it
           is
           an
           high
           Water
           here
           ,
           on
           the
           change
           day
           of
           the
           Moon
           at
           eleven
           of
           the
           Clock
           ,
           as
           far
           as
           I
           could
           perceive
           .
           Many
           beds
           of
           Rock-weed
           are
           driving
           to
           and
           fro
           here
           .
           This
           day
           at
           two
           of
           the
           Clock
           I
           was
           a-breast
           of
           Point
           Possession
           ;
           I
           steered
           from
           thence
           West-north-west
           about
           two
           Leagues
           ,
           and
           then
           West
           and
           West-south-west
           :
           and
           South-west
           and
           by
           South
           ,
           rounding
           by
           the
           North-shore
           :
           As
           I
           shoaled
           my
           soundings
           I
           had
           22
           ,
           and
           18
           ,
           and
           16
           ,
           and
           12
           ,
           and
           9
           Fathoms
           ,
           sandy
           ,
           and
           sometimes
           gravelly
           Ground
           and
           pebble
           Stones
           ;
           I
           sailed
           ,
           rounding
           the
           shore
           being
           unacquainted
           ,
           and
           could
           not
           tell
           certainly
           where
           the
           Narrow
           lay
           ,
           for
           it
           was
           shut
           in
           one
           Land
           with
           the
           other
           ,
           so
           as
           I
           could
           not
           see
           the
           opening
           :
           I
           was
           open
           of
           the
           Narrow
           at
           five
           a
           Clock
           ,
           having
           a
           fine
           gale
           at
           North-north-east
           .
           I
           steered
           in
           South-west
           and
           by
           South
           into
           the
           chops
           of
           it
           ,
           but
           could
           not
           get
           past
           a
           League
           into
           it
           ;
           the
           Tide
           being
           bent
           out
           and
           run
           so
           strong
           as
           I
           could
           not
           stem
           it
           ▪
        
         
         
           I
           was
           in
           danger
           of
           running
           the
           Ship
           against
           steep
           Rocks
           ,
           which
           lie
           in
           the
           North-side
           ,
           the
           taking
           a
           shear
           with
           the
           Tide
           ,
           and
           the
           Wind
           was
           a
           fresh
           gale
           at
           North-north-east
           .
           There
           grew
           long
           Rock-weed
           on
           the
           Rocks
           ;
           I
           went
           and
           sounded
           over
           them
           ,
           and
           had
           five
           foot
           Water
           on
           them
           ,
           and
           fourteen
           Fathom
           by
           the
           side
           of
           them
           ,
           next
           the
           Channel
           :
           they
           come
           trenting
           from
           the
           point
           of
           the
           Narrow
           of
           the
           North-side
           ,
           a
           mile
           off
           .
           At
           six
           of
           the
           Clock
           the
           Wind
           came
           to
           the
           North
           ;
           at
           eight
           of
           the
           Clock
           it
           came
           to
           the
           North-west
           ;
           it
           fell
           very
           dark
           and
           rained
           much
           ;
           I
           was
           forced
           to
           fall
           back
           again
           out
           of
           the
           Narrow
           as
           well
           as
           I
           could
           ;
           the
           shore
           I
           could
           not
           see
           ,
           it
           was
           so
           dark
           ;
           it
           fell
           ,
           a
           flat
           Calm
           ,
           I
           finding
           twenty
           five
           Fathom
           Water
           ,
           pebble
           Stones
           and
           oary
           ;
           I
           anchored
           and
           rode
           all
           Night
           ;
           little
           Wind
           at
           South-west
           ,
           and
           dark
           .
        
         
           It
           is
           eight
           Leagues
           from
           the
           first
           Narrow
           to
           the
           second
           ,
           and
           something
           better
           ;
           the
           Course
           from
           one
           to
           the
           other
           is
           West
           and
           by
           South
           ,
           and
           East
           and
           by
           North.
           This
           Reach
           from
           the
           first
           Narrow
           to
           the
           second
           is
           seven
           Leagues
           broad
           ,
           from
           the
           North-shore
           to
           the
           South-shore
           ;
           it
           shews
           like
           a
           little
           Sea
           when
           one
           comes
           into
           it
           ,
           for
           we
           could
           not
           see
           to
           the
           second
           Narrow
           ,
           till
           I
           had
           sailed
           therein
           three
           Leagues
           or
           more
           .
           At
           the
           point
           of
           the
           second
           Narrow
           ,
           on
           the
           North-shore
           ;
           up
           to
           the
           North-east-ward
           a
           mile
           or
           two
           ,
           there
           is
           a
           Bay
           on
           the
           North-shore
           ,
           and
           a
           white
           Cliff
           of
           an
           ordinary
           height
           ,
           which
           is
           called
           
             Cape
             St.
             Gregory
          
           :
           In
           this
           Bay
           you
           may
           ride
           in
           eight
           Fathom
           Water
           ,
           fine
           clean
           sandy
           Ground
           ,
           and
           a
           good
           half
           mile
           off
           the
           shore
           ;
           This
           is
           a
           good
           Road
           ,
           if
           the
           
           Wind
           be
           between
           the
           North-east
           and
           the
           South-west
           to
           the
           Westward
           ;
           the
           Winds
           are
           given
           most
           to
           blow
           on
           the
           Western-quarter
           .
           As
           I
           sailed
           thorow
           the
           second
           Narrow
           ,
           I
           sounded
           in
           the
           fair
           way
           ,
           and
           had
           twenty
           eight
           ,
           and
           thirty
           Fathom
           small
           stones
           ;
           The
           North-shore
           on
           this
           Narrow
           makes
           in
           a
           Bay
           at
           the
           East-point
           ,
           and
           is
           white
           Cliffs
           all
           the
           way
           through
           :
           This
           Narrow
           lies
           throughout
           West-south-west
           ,
           and
           East-north-east
           ,
           and
           at
           the
           West-end
           of
           the
           Narrow
           the
           Land
           is
           steep
           up
           ,
           in
           white
           Cliffs
           ,
           and
           the
           South
           part
           rounds
           away
           in
           a
           rore-land
           :
           The
           South-shore
           rounds
           away
           South-east
           from
           this
           Fore-land
           ,
           and
           then
           it
           trents
           away
           to
           the
           Southward
           in
           low
           Land
           :
           The
           North-shore
           of
           this
           Narrow
           or
           Streight
           ,
           rounds
           up
           to
           the
           Northward
           in
           white
           Cliffs
           ,
           and
           falls
           into
           shores
           ;
           there
           goes
           in
           a
           Harbour
           which
           hath
           four
           Fathom
           in
           the
           Channel
           ,
           at
           High-water
           ;
           it
           is
           a
           flat
           round
           Harbour
           within
           ,
           and
           oary
           ;
           I
           called
           this
           Oaz-harbour
           :
           When
           you
           are
           at
           the
           West-part
           of
           this
           Narrow
           ,
           you
           will
           see
           three
           Islands
           come
           open
           ,
           which
           shew
           to
           be
           steep
           up
           Cliffs
           :
           they
           lie
           Triangle-wise
           one
           of
           another
           ;
           they
           are
           four
           Leagues
           distant
           from
           the
           Narrow
           ,
           West-south-west
           ;
           The
           smallest
           and
           Eastermost
           Isle
           is
           called
           
             St.
             Bartholomews
          
           ,
           the
           biggest
           and
           Wester-most
           is
           called
           Elizabeth
           ;
           the
           middle-most
           and
           souther-most
           is
           called
           
             S.
             George's
          
           ,
           and
           by
           some
           Penguins-Isle
           ,
           and
           indeed
           there
           are
           many
           Penguins
           on
           it
           .
           This
           Evening
           I
           got
           up
           to
           
           Elizabeth's
           ,
           and
           anchored
           in
           eight
           Fathoms
           and
           an
           half
           sine
           black
           Sand
           ,
           two
           miles
           off
           the
           Island
           .
           The
           East-point
           bears
           South
           and
           by
           East
           of
           me
           :
           fair
           Weather
           all
           Night
           ,
           the
           Wind
           at
           South
           and
           by
           West
           .
        
         
         
           This
           Morning
           I
           went
           ashore
           on
           Elizabeth-Island
           ,
           and
           at
           my
           landing
           nineteen
           of
           the
           Countrey-people
           came
           off
           the
           Hills
           to
           me
           :
           I
           had
           Conference
           with
           them
           ,
           and
           exchanged
           Knives
           and
           Beads
           for
           such
           things
           as
           they
           had
           :
           which
           were
           Bows
           and
           Arrows
           ,
           and
           their
           Skin-Coats
           ,
           which
           are
           made
           of
           young
           Guianacoes
           skins
           ;
           I
           gave
           them
           a
           Hatchet
           and
           Knives
           ,
           and
           Beads
           and
           Toys
           ,
           Trumps
           ,
           &c.
           they
           seem'd
           to
           be
           very
           well-pleased
           ;
           I
           shewed
           them
           Gold
           ,
           which
           they
           would
           have
           had
           ;
           I
           made
           them
           signs
           ,
           that
           if
           they
           had
           any
           ,
           I
           would
           give
           them
           Knives
           and
           Beads
           ,
           &c.
           for
           it
           ,
           or
           If
           any
           where
           in
           the
           Land
           :
           I
           laid
           Gold
           and
           bright
           Copper
           into
           the
           Ground
           ,
           and
           made
           as
           if
           I
           found
           it
           there
           ,
           and
           looked
           to
           and
           fro
           on
           the
           Earth
           as
           if
           I
           looked
           for
           such
           things
           ;
           they
           looked
           one
           on
           another
           and
           spake
           to
           each
           other
           some
           words
           ,
           but
           I
           could
           not
           perceive
           that
           they
           understood
           me
           ,
           or
           what
           I
           meant
           ;
           nor
           that
           they
           knew
           Gold
           ,
           or
           any
           other
           Metal
           :
           they
           would
           gladly
           have
           had
           every
           thing
           they
           saw
           ;
           they
           tried
           to
           break
           the
           Boats
           Iron-grapenel
           with
           stones
           ,
           and
           would
           have
           carried
           it
           away
           ;
           I
           let
           them
           alone
           ,
           and
           observed
           their
           actions
           and
           behaviour
           ,
           which
           was
           very
           brutish
           :
           they
           catched
           at
           every
           thing
           they
           could
           reach
           ,
           although
           I
           caused
           them
           to
           sit
           down
           ,
           and
           I
           put
           strings
           of
           Beads
           about
           their
           Necks
           ;
           still
           they
           desired
           more
           :
           My
           Lieu●enant
           Peckett
           danced
           with
           them
           hand
           in
           hand
           ,
           and
           several
           of
           my
           Men
           did
           dance
           with
           them
           ,
           and
           made
           all
           the
           shew
           of
           Friendship
           as
           was
           possible
           ;
           My
           Lieutenant
           changed
           his
           Coat
           for
           one
           of
           theirs
           ,
           sor
           they
           desired
           it
           because
           it
           was
           red
           ,
           which
           co●our
           they
           much
           esteem
           :
           I
           was
           in
           great
           hopes
           I
           
           might
           find
           Gold
           among
           them
           ;
           I
           gave
           them
           all
           the
           courteous
           respect
           I
           could
           :
           After
           two
           hours
           Conference
           with
           them
           ,
           I
           made
           signs
           I
           would
           go
           and
           get
           more
           things
           and
           come
           again
           to
           them
           ;
           They
           went
           ,
           and
           would
           have
           us
           to
           Land
           again
           under
           a
           Cliff
           ,
           which
           I
           judge
           was
           their
           Design
           ,
           to
           heave
           stones
           into
           the
           Boat
           to
           sink
           her
           ,
           for
           the
           place
           was
           very
           convenient
           for
           such
           a
           purpose
           :
           They
           set
           themselves
           down
           on
           the
           Grass
           ,
           and
           immediately
           set
           fire
           on
           the
           Grass
           on
           the
           side
           of
           the
           Bank
           :
           by
           what
           means
           they
           got
           Fire
           so
           suddenly
           I
           could
           not
           understand
           .
           I
           went
           and
           sounded
           the
           Channel
           between
           Elizabeth-Island
           ,
           and
           
             St.
             Bartholomew's-Island
          
           ,
           and
           found
           it
           a
           fair
           Channel
           to
           Sail
           through
           ,
           of
           a
           mile
           broad
           nearest
           and
           deep
           Water
           :
           in
           the
           middle
           thirty
           eight
           Fathom
           ,
           and
           nine
           and
           ten
           Fathom
           near
           the
           Shore-side
           ,
           gravelly
           Sand.
           
        
         
           These
           People
           are
           of
           a
           middle
           stature
           ,
           both
           Men
           and
           Women
           ,
           and
           well-limbed
           ,
           and
           roundish
           Faced
           ,
           and
           well
           shaped
           ,
           and
           low
           Fore-headed
           ;
           their
           Noses
           of
           a
           mean
           size
           ,
           their
           Eyes
           of
           the
           mean
           and
           black
           ;
           they
           are
           smooth
           and
           even
           toothed
           and
           close
           set
           and
           very
           white
           ;
           small
           Ears
           :
           their
           Hair
           is
           smooth
           flag
           Hair
           ,
           and
           very
           black
           and
           harsh
           on
           the
           fore-part
           ,
           even
           and
           round
           ;
           and
           the
           Locks
           of
           a
           mean
           length
           ,
           both
           Men
           and
           Women
           alike
           ;
           they
           are
           full
           Breasted
           ,
           they
           are
           tawny
           Olive-coloured
           ,
           and
           redded
           all
           over
           their
           Bodies
           with
           red
           Earth
           and
           Grease
           ;
           their
           Faces
           dawbed
           in
           spots
           down
           their
           Cheeks
           with
           white
           Clay
           ,
           and
           some
           black
           streaks
           with
           smut
           ,
           in
           no
           Method
           ;
           their
           Arms
           and
           Feet
           the
           like
           :
           they
           have
           small
           Heads
           and
           short
           
           Fingers
           :
           they
           are
           active
           in
           Body
           ,
           and
           nimble
           in
           going
           and
           running
           ;
           their
           Cloathing
           is
           pieces
           of
           Skins
           of
           Seals
           ,
           and
           Guianacoes
           ,
           and
           Otters
           skins
           sewed
           together
           ,
           and
           sewed
           soft
           ;
           their
           Garment
           is
           in
           form
           of
           a
           Carpet
           ,
           of
           about
           five
           feet
           square
           ,
           or
           according
           to
           the
           largeness
           of
           the
           Person
           ;
           this
           they
           wrap
           about
           their
           Bodies
           ,
           as
           a
           Scottish
           Man
           doth
           his
           Plading
           :
           they
           have
           a
           Cap
           of
           the
           Skins
           of
           Fowls
           ,
           with
           the
           Feathers
           on
           ;
           they
           have
           about
           their
           Feet
           pieces
           of
           Skins
           tied
           to
           keep
           their
           Feet
           from
           the
           Ground
           :
           they
           are
           very
           hardy
           People
           to
           endure
           cold
           ;
           for
           they
           seldom
           wear
           this
           loose
           Skin
           when
           they
           are
           stirring
           ,
           but
           are
           all
           naked
           of
           Body
           from
           Head
           to
           Feet
           ,
           and
           do
           not
           shrink
           for
           the
           Weather
           ;
           for
           it
           was
           very
           cold
           when
           I
           saw
           them
           ,
           and
           the
           Hills
           all
           cover'd
           with
           Snow
           :
           they
           have
           no
           Hair
           on
           their
           Bodies
           nor
           Faces
           ,
           nor
           any
           thing
           to
           cover
           their
           privy
           Parts
           ,
           excepting
           some
           of
           the
           Women
           ,
           which
           had
           a
           Skin
           before
           them
           ;
           otherwise
           the
           Men
           and
           Women
           are
           cloathed
           alike
           ;
           only
           the
           Men
           have
           Caps
           and
           the
           Women
           none
           :
           The
           Women
           wear
           Bracelets
           of
           Shells
           about
           their
           Necks
           ,
           the
           Men
           none
           ;
           the
           Men
           are
           somewhat
           larger
           than
           the
           Women
           in
           Stature
           ,
           and
           more
           fuller
           Fac'd
           ;
           the
           Men
           have
           a
           harsh
           Language
           ,
           and
           speak
           ratling
           in
           the
           Throat
           ,
           and
           gross
           ;
           the
           Women
           shiller
           and
           lower
           ;
           they
           pronounce
           the
           word
           Ursah
           ,
           but
           what
           it
           means
           I
           could
           not
           understand
           ▪
           nor
           one
           word
           they
           spake
           ;
           if
           they
           did
           not
           like
           any
           thing
           ,
           they
           would
           cry
           
             Ur
             ,
             Ur
          
           ,
           ratling
           in
           their
           Throats
           :
           their
           Food
           is
           what
           they
           can
           get
           ,
           either
           Fis
           :
           or
           Flesh
           :
           they
           are
           under
           no
           Government
           ,
           but
           every
           Man
           doth
           as
           he
           thinks
           fit
           ;
           for
           
           they
           had
           no
           respect
           to
           any
           one
           ,
           nor
           under
           any
           Obedience
           of
           any
           in
           this
           Company
           ;
           neither
           did
           they
           make
           any
           shew
           of
           Worshipping
           any
           thing
           ,
           either
           Sun
           or
           Moon
           ,
           but
           came
           directly
           to
           us
           at
           our
           first
           going
           on
           Land
           ,
           making
           a
           noise
           and
           every
           Man
           his
           Bow
           ready
           strung
           ,
           and
           two
           Arrows
           a
           Man
           in
           their
           Hands
           :
           their
           Bows
           are
           about
           an
           Ell
           long
           ,
           and
           their
           Arrows
           are
           near
           eighteen
           Inches
           long
           ,
           and
           neatly
           made
           of
           Wood
           ,
           and
           headed
           with
           Flint-stones
           ,
           neatly
           made
           broad-Arrow-fashion
           ,
           well
           fastned
           to
           the
           Arrow
           ;
           and
           the
           other
           end
           is
           feathered
           with
           two
           Feathers
           ,
           and
           tied
           on
           with
           the
           Gut
           of
           some
           Beast
           ,
           when
           it
           is
           green
           and
           moist
           ;
           the
           Bow-string
           is
           some
           twisted
           Gut.
           These
           People
           have
           very
           large
           mungrel
           Dogs
           ,
           much
           like
           the
           race
           of
           Spanish
           Dogs
           ,
           and
           are
           of
           several
           colours
           ;
           I
           did
           not
           see
           any
           other
           domestick
           Creature
           they
           have
           ,
           neither
           could
           I
           at
           this
           time
           see
           their
           Boats
           ;
           for
           they
           lay
           at
           the
           other
           end
           of
           the
           Island
           ,
           next
           the
           Main
           ;
           they
           waited
           on
           this
           Island
           for
           an
           opportunity
           of
           fair
           Weather
           ,
           to
           go
           to
           the
           other
           Islands
           for
           Penguins
           ,
           there
           being
           great
           numbers
           of
           those
           Birds
           on
           the
           southermost
           of
           the
           three
           Islands
           ,
           and
           many
           other
           white-breasted
           Divers
           .
        
         
           October
           30.
           
           To
           Night
           I
           anchored
           in
           a
           small
           Bay
           in
           eleven
           fathom
           Water
           ,
           gravelly
           Ground
           ,
           half
           a
           mile
           off
           the
           Shore
           ;
           no
           Tide
           runs
           here
           as
           to
           thwart
           up
           a
           Ship
           ;
           the
           Water
           riseth
           and
           falls
           perpendicular
           ten
           Feet
           .
           This
           Bay
           hath
           two
           Rivulets
           of
           fresh
           Water
           in
           it
           ,
           and
           good
           Timber-trees
           of
           eighteen
           Inches
           through
           ,
           and
           near
           forty
           Feet
           long
           :
           the
           Wood
           is
           much
           lik
           a
           Beech
           ;
           here
           are
           wild
           Currant-trees
           ,
           and
           many
           such
           like
           Bushes
           :
           
           the
           Woods
           are
           very
           thick
           and
           green
           ,
           and
           much
           old
           Wood
           lies
           on
           the
           Ground
           ,
           so
           as
           there
           is
           no
           travelling
           into
           the
           Woods
           .
           I
           was
           a-shore
           looking
           to
           and
           fro
           here
           three
           hours
           :
           I
           called
           this
           
             Fresh-water
             Bay
          
           ;
           this
           is
           near
           nine
           Leagues
           to
           the
           Southward
           of
           
             Sweepstakes
             Bay
          
           ;
           Sand-point
           is
           a
           mean
           low
           Point
           ,
           lies
           out
           more
           than
           the
           other
           Points
           of
           the
           Shore
           ,
           and
           few
           Trees
           grow
           on
           it
           .
        
         
           It
           is
           six
           Leagues
           from
           Fresh-water
           Bay
           ,
           to
           
             Port
             Famen
          
           South
           and
           North
           from
           the
           one
           to
           the
           point
           of
           the
           other
           :
           that
           nearest
           
             Port
             Famen
          
           cannot
           be
           seen
           ,
           as
           you
           come
           from
           the
           Northward
           ,
           till
           you
           come
           to
           bring
           the
           Point
           
             S.
             Anne
          
           up
           on
           the
           Northwest
           of
           you
           ,
           for
           the
           Bay
           lies
           up
           in
           a
           little
           hook
           North-west
           ,
           and
           the
           Land
           on
           the
           West-side
           of
           the
           Bay
           is
           low
           in
           a
           Point
           ,
           and
           sandy
           ,
           and
           some
           Grass
           grows
           on
           it
           ,
           and
           much
           drift-Wood
           lies
           on
           it
           like
           a
           Carpenters-yard
           :
           a
           little
           within
           Land
           from
           the
           Water-side
           grow
           brave
           green
           Woods
           ,
           and
           up
           in
           the
           Valleys
           ,
           large
           Timber-trees
           ,
           two
           foot
           throughout
           and
           some
           upwards
           of
           40
           Feet
           long
           :
           much
           like
           our
           Beech-timber
           in
           England
           ;
           the
           Leaves
           of
           the
           Trees
           are
           like
           green
           Birch-tree
           leaves
           ,
           curiously
           sweet
           ;
           the
           Wood
           shews
           in
           many
           places
           as
           if
           there
           were
           Plantations
           ;
           for
           there
           are
           several
           clear
           places
           in
           the
           Woods
           ,
           and
           Grass
           growing
           like
           fenc'd
           Fields
           in
           England
           ;
           the
           Woods
           being
           so
           even
           by
           the
           sides
           of
           it
           ,
           and
           on
           Point
           Saint
           Anne
           as
           you
           come
           sailing
           from
           the
           Northward
           ,
           you
           will
           see
           good
           Bushes
           and
           tall
           Trees
           grow
           on
           the
           very
           point
           of
           it
           :
           This
           Point
           is
           rocky
           on
           the
           Shore-side
           ,
           but
           no
           danger
           lies
           or
           it
           ;
           you
           may
           be
           bold
           on
           it
           to
           get
           into
           
             Port
             Famen
          
           Bay.
           
        
         
         
           Here
           is
           good
           Wooding
           ,
           and
           Watering
           ,
           and
           good
           catching
           of
           Fish
           with
           the
           Seyne
           or
           Net
           :
           I
           haled
           above
           five
           hundred
           large
           Fishes
           a-shore
           at
           one
           hale
           ,
           much
           like
           to
           a
           Mullet
           ,
           all
           scaly
           Fishes
           ,
           here
           are
           many
           large
           Smelts
           or
           twenty
           Inches
           long
           ,
           and
           many
           Anchovies
           ,
           and
           some
           small
           made
           Scates
           :
           Here
           is
           great
           plenty
           of
           Fish
           ,
           so
           much
           as
           we
           feed
           wholly
           on
           it
           ,
           and
           salt
           up
           much
           of
           the
           Mullets
           and
           Anchovies
           .
           Here
           grow
           many
           Trees
           of
           good
           large
           Timber
           ,
           forty
           Inches
           through
           :
           the
           Leaves
           are
           green
           and
           large
           ,
           much
           like
           Bay-tree
           Leaves
           in
           England
           ;
           the
           rind
           is
           grey
           on
           the
           out-side
           and
           pretty
           thick
           rined
           ;
           this
           Rind
           or
           Bark
           of
           these
           Trees
           ,
           if
           you
           chew
           it
           in
           your
           Mouth
           ,
           is
           hotter
           than
           Pepper
           and
           more
           quicker
           ;
           it
           is
           of
           a
           spicy
           smell
           when
           it
           is
           dry
           ;
           I
           cut
           of
           the
           Bark
           and
           made
           use
           of
           it
           in
           my
           Pease
           ,
           and
           other
           Provisions
           instead
           of
           Spice
           ,
           and
           found
           it
           very
           wholesom
           and
           good
           :
           wee
           steeped
           it
           in
           our
           Water
           ,
           and
           drank
           it
           ,
           and
           it
           gave
           the
           Water
           a
           pretty
           flavor
           .
           There
           grow
           of
           these
           Trees
           in
           the
           Woods
           ,
           in
           many
           places
           in
           the
           Streight
           on
           both
           Shores
           ,
           and
           on
           the
           Coasts
           on
           both
           sides
           of
           Patagonia
           ,
           before
           your
           enter
           them
           .
           This
           may
           be
           the
           Winter-bark
           of
           the
           Shops
           ,
           which
           has
           an
           Aromatick
           pepper-like
           or
           spicy
           tast
           .
        
         
           
             Port
             Famen
          
           lies
           in
           the
           Lat.
           of
           53
           d.
           35
           m.
           South
           ;
           and
           in
           Longitude
           West
           ,
           from
           the
           Lizard
           ,
           68
           d.
           9
           m.
           and
           Meridian
           distance
           1092.
           
           Leagues
           West
           ,
           as
           my
           Account
           is
           in
           my
           Sailing
           :
           this
           Voyage
           ,
           I
           give
           no
           credit
           to
           the
           plain
           Sailing
           :
           therefore
           this
           Meridian
           distance
           signifies
           very
           little
           as
           to
           Navigation
           .
        
         
           I
           travelled
           in
           many
           places
           ,
           but
           could
           not
           see
           any
           Fruit-trees
           ,
           or
           Oak
           ,
           or
           Ash
           ,
           or
           Hasel
           ,
           or
           
           any
           Timber
           like
           ours
           in
           England
           :
           Here
           are
           but
           two
           sorts
           or
           Timber
           in
           all
           these
           Woods
           ,
           and
           one
           is
           the
           Pepper-rind
           Tree
           ,
           which
           is
           indifferent
           Wood
           ,
           and
           the
           other
           is
           the
           Timber
           much
           like
           Beech
           :
           Here
           are
           the
           best
           and
           biggest
           Trees
           in
           all
           the
           Streights
           ;
           here
           are
           Trees
           of
           two
           foot
           and
           an
           half
           through
           ,
           and
           between
           thirty
           and
           forty
           feet
           long
           ;
           there
           may
           be
           great
           Planks
           cut
           out
           of
           them
           .
           I
           could
           not
           see
           any
           grains
           of
           Metal
           of
           Mineral
           in
           any
           place
           ,
           and
           I
           looked
           very
           carefully
           in
           Gullies
           ,
           and
           places
           where
           Water
           had
           guttered
           .
           Here
           are
           some
           Herbs
           to
           be
           plucked
           up
           ,
           as
           we
           boiled
           for
           Salleting
           ,
           and
           green
           Grass
           with
           it
           ,
           which
           relished
           pretty
           well
           .
           The
           Land
           in
           the
           Woods
           is
           dry
           ,
           and
           of
           a
           gravelly
           and
           sandy
           Soil
           ,
           and
           some
           places
           good
           brown
           Earth
           ;
           it
           is
           bad
           travelling
           in
           the
           Woods
           for
           old
           Trees
           and
           Under-woods
           :
           the
           Woods
           trent
           all
           up
           on
           the
           sides
           of
           the
           Hills
           ;
           the
           Land
           all
           about
           on
           the
           North-west
           and
           West
           of
           
             Port
             Famen
          
           ,
           trents
           up
           to
           very
           high
           Hills
           ,
           and
           the
           In-land
           is
           very
           high
           Hills
           ;
           for
           we
           can
           see
           the
           tops
           of
           them
           all
           barren
           and
           ragged
           ,
           peeping
           over
           those
           Mountains
           next
           to
           the
           Shore-side
           ;
           much
           Snow
           lies
           continually
           on
           them
           :
           the
           Land
           on
           the
           South-shore
           is
           very
           high
           and
           peaked
           .
        
         
           I
           saw
           many
           Ducks
           and
           brant-Geese
           on
           the
           Shore-sides
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           fresh
           Waters
           ,
           together
           with
           some
           Whales
           spouting
           in
           the
           main
           Channel
           .
        
         
           I
           do
           verily
           believe
           that
           in
           these
           Mountains
           ,
           there
           is
           some
           Metal
           either
           Gold
           or
           Copper
           ,
           for
           the
           Man
           that
           went
           aboard
           pointed
           up
           to
           the
           Mountains
           ,
           and
           spake
           to
           me
           when
           I
           shewed
           him
           my
           Ring
           .
           These
           People
           eat
           up
           the
           Provision
           
           which
           was
           carried
           to
           them
           ,
           and
           greased
           themselves
           all
           over
           with
           the
           Oil
           ,
           and
           greased
           their
           Skin-Coats
           with
           it
           :
           I
           made
           signs
           to
           them
           to
           go
           and
           get
           some
           Gold
           and
           bring
           it
           to
           me
           :
           some
           of
           them
           went
           away
           to
           their
           Boats
           ,
           the
           rest
           sat
           still
           on
           the
           Grass
           ,
           talking
           one
           to
           another
           ,
           and
           pointing
           to
           the
           Ship.
           Their
           Language
           is
           much
           in
           the
           Throat
           ,
           and
           not
           very
           fluent
           ,
           but
           uttered
           with
           good
           deliberation
           :
           I
           could
           not
           perceive
           but
           only
           the
           younger
           were
           obedient
           to
           the
           elder
           ,
           and
           the
           Women
           were
           in
           obedience
           to
           the
           Men
           ;
           for
           I
           took
           the
           Mens
           Coats
           and
           put
           about
           the
           Women
           ,
           but
           the
           Men
           would
           not
           suffer
           them
           to
           keep
           the
           Coats
           long
           ,
           and
           themselves
           to
           be
           naked
           ,
           but
           took
           the
           Coats
           from
           the
           Women
           ,
           and
           put
           them
           about
           themselves
           :
           I
           proffer'd
           them
           to
           exchange
           one
           of
           my
           Lads
           for
           one
           of
           theirs
           ,
           and
           they
           laughed
           ;
           but
           the
           Indian
           Lad
           would
           not
           go
           with
           me
           ,
           but
           hung
           back
           :
           I
           gave
           to
           the
           Men
           Knives
           and
           Fish-hooks
           ,
           and
           to
           the
           Lads
           Jews-trumps
           and
           Pipes
           ,
           and
           to
           the
           Women
           Looking-glasses
           and
           Beads
           .
           I
           did
           this
           to
           gain
           their
           loves
           ,
           and
           in
           hopes
           to
           have
           Trading
           with
           them
           for
           the
           future
           ;
           they
           refus'd
           Brandy
           .
        
         
           
             Cape
             Froward
          
           is
           the
           southermost
           Land
           of
           the
           great
           Continent
           of
           America
           ,
           and
           it
           is
           very
           high
           Land
           on
           the
           back-side
           of
           it
           ;
           the
           Face
           is
           steep
           up
           ,
           of
           a
           Cliff
           of
           Rocks
           ,
           and
           it
           is
           blackish
           grey
           ,
           of
           a
           good
           height
           ,
           and
           deep
           Water
           very
           near
           it
           .
           I
           sounded
           with
           my
           Boat
           close
           to
           it
           ,
           and
           had
           forty
           Fathom
           :
           A
           Man
           may
           lay
           a
           Ship
           close
           to
           the
           face
           of
           the
           Cape
           ,
           for
           there
           is
           Water
           enough
           :
           there
           is
           no
           Ground
           in
           the
           Channel
           at
           two
           hundred
           Fathoms
           ,
           
           and
           but
           little
           Tide
           ,
           or
           any
           ripling
           as
           I
           saw
           ,
           but
           a
           fair
           Channel
           to
           sail
           throughout
           ;
           of
           three
           Leagues
           broad
           from
           the
           North-shore
           to
           the
           South-shore
           .
           It
           is
           best
           for
           a
           Ship
           to
           keep
           nearer
           the
           North-shore
           than
           the
           South-shore
           ;
           for
           the
           Winds
           are
           more
           generally
           of
           the
           Western
           Quarter
           .
        
         
           
             Cape
             Froward
          
           ,
           in
           
             Magellan
             Streights
          
           ,
           lies
           in
           the
           Latitude
           of
           53
           d.
           52
           m.
           South
        
         
           And
           in
           Longitude
           West
           ,
           from
           the
           Lizard
           ,
           in
           England
           68
           d.
           40
           m.
           West
           .
        
         
           And
           in
           Meridian
           distance
           in
           Leagues
           1099.
           and
           two
           Miles
           West
           .
        
         
           The
           Compass
           hath
           sixteen
           degrees
           of
           Variation
           Easterly
           at
           
             Cape
             Froward
          
           .
           As
           to
           the
           Firlining
           Points
           I
           cannot
           say
           any
           thing
           ;
           I
           wanted
           a
           Needle
           .
        
         
           November
           4.
           1670.
           
           I
           was
           in
           
             Wood's
             Bay
          
           ,
           called
           so
           by
           my
           Mate's
           Name
           .
           November
           5.
           
           I
           was
           abrest
           of
           Cape-Holland
           ;
           near
           which
           lies
           
             Cape
             Coventry
          
           and
           
             Andrew's
             Bay
          
           ,
           also
           Cordes
           and
           
             Fostcues
             Bay
             ,
             Cape
          
           and
           
             Port
             Gallant
          
           :
           but
           for
           a
           more
           exact
           Situation
           of
           the
           several
           Promontories
           ,
           Bays
           ,
           Ports
           ,
           Rivulets
           ,
           Soundings
           ,
           &c.
           
           I
           refer
           the
           Reader
           to
           the
           large
           Draught
           of
           the
           
             Magellan
             Streights
          
           ,
           drawn
           by
           my
           own
           Hand
           on
           the
           place
           .
        
         
           A-brest
           of
           the
           Bay
           ,
           two
           Leagues
           off
           ,
           is
           the
           Island
           which
           I
           called
           Charles-Island
           and
           Monmouth-Island
           ;
           more
           to
           the
           West-ward
           is
           James-Island
           ,
           and
           Ruperts-Island
           ,
           and
           the
           Lord
           Arlingtons-Island
           ,
           and
           the
           Earl
           of
           
             Sandwich's-Island
             ,
          
           ,
           and
           Secretary
           
             Wren's
             Island
          
           :
           this
           Reach
           I
           called
           
             English
             Reach
          
           ;
           a
           League
           more
           to
           the
           West-ward
           of
           
             Fostcues
             Bay
          
           is
           Cape-Gallant
           .
        
         
         
           The
           Streight
           shews
           now
           as
           if
           there
           were
           no
           farther
           passage
           to
           the
           Westward
           ;
           for
           the
           South
           Land
           rounds
           up
           so
           much
           to
           the
           North-Westward
           ,
           that
           it
           shuts
           against
           the
           North-Land
           to
           a
           Man's
           sight
           .
           At
           this
           distance
           I
           saw
           two
           large
           openings
           into
           the
           South-Land
           ,
           one
           opposite
           to
           Charles-Island
           ,
           the
           other
           more
           to
           the
           Westward
           ,
           up
           of
           the
           round
           South
           Bite
           ;
           there
           I
           saw
           many
           Whales
           spouting
           ,
           that
           place
           I
           called
           Whales-Bay
           ;
           I
           saw
           several
           Brant-geese
           and
           Ducks
           here
           :
           I
           left
           in
           the
           Indians
           Houses
           Beads
           and
           Knives
           ,
           in
           hopes
           of
           further
           Commerce
           :
           I
           saw
           on
           the
           South-side
           ,
           a
           Fire
           made
           in
           the
           Grass
           by
           the
           Natives
           .
        
         
           From
           the
           pitch
           of
           Cape-Froward
           ,
           to
           the
           pitch
           of
           Cape-Holland
           ,
           the
           Streight
           lies
           in
           the
           Channel
           West
           and
           by
           North
           ,
           nearest
           ,
           and
           is
           distant
           full
           five
           Leagues
           ;
           and
           from
           the
           pitch
           of
           Cape-Holland
           ,
           to
           the
           pitch
           of
           Cape-Gallant
           ,
           the
           Streight
           lies
           in
           the
           Channel
           ,
           West
           and
           by
           North
           ,
           a
           little
           Northerly
           ,
           and
           is
           distant
           eight
           Leagues
           :
           From
           the
           pitch
           of
           Cape-Gallant
           ,
           to
           a
           low
           Point
           three
           Leagues
           to
           the
           Westward
           ,
           the
           Streight
           lies
           in
           the
           Channel
           Northwest
           and
           by
           West
           ,
           a
           little
           Northerly
           :
           This
           Reach
           is
           not
           more
           than
           two
           miles
           broad
           ,
           from
           the
           North-shore
           to
           the
           Islands
           ,
           which
           I
           called
           
             The
             Royal
             Isles
          
           :
           when
           I
           was
           a-brest
           of
           the
           Westermost
           Island
           ,
           which
           I
           called
           Rupert's-Island
           ,
           I
           being
           on
           the
           middle
           of
           the
           Channel
           with
           the
           Ship
           ,
           shot
           off
           one
           of
           my
           Sakers
           with
           a
           shot
           ,
           and
           the
           shot
           lodged
           close
           to
           the
           Islands
           side
           .
           This
           low
           Point
           ,
           a
           brest
           of
           Rupert's-Island
           ,
           on
           the
           North
           shore
           ,
           I
           called
           Point-Passage
           .
           This
           Evening
           at
           six
           of
           the
           Clock
           ,
           I
           was
           shot
           past
           Point-Passage
           ,
           half
           
           a
           mile
           to
           the
           Westward
           of
           it
           ;
           having
           a
           fine
           Easterly
           gale
           .
        
         
           Monday
           Noveomber
           7.
           
           Cloudy
           gusts
           ,
           foggy
           Weather
           ,
           the
           Wind
           at
           West
           ,
           and
           sometimes
           at
           North-west
           :
           I
           rode
           fast
           all
           day
           close
           aboard
           the
           shore
           .
           This
           Afternoon
           I
           went
           in
           my
           Boat
           over
           to
           the
           South-side
           ,
           opposite
           to
           Elizabeth's-Bay
           ,
           at
           the
           Point
           called
           Whale-point
           ,
           for
           the
           many
           Whales
           spouting
           thereby
           .
           I
           travelled
           up
           the
           Hills
           two
           miles
           ,
           but
           could
           not
           see
           any
           Gold
           or
           Metal
           ;
           the
           Land
           very
           irregular
           and
           Rocky
           ,
           with
           mossy
           kind
           of
           Grass
           growing
           on
           it
           ,
           and
           very
           boggy
           and
           rotten
           ;
           for
           I
           thrust
           down
           a
           Lance
           of
           sixteen
           feet
           long
           ,
           into
           the
           Ground
           with
           one
           hand
           very
           easily
           :
           Here
           grow
           many
           Juniper
           Trees
           ,
           some
           of
           a
           foot
           throughout
           ,
           the
           Wood
           not
           very
           sweet
           :
           Here
           I
           saw
           many
           brant-Geese
           and
           Ducks
           ,
           much
           Snow
           on
           the
           inland
           Mountains
           ,
           so
           as
           I
           could
           not
           travel
           any
           farther
           :
           I
           returned
           down
           to
           the
           Boat
           again
           ;
           I
           saw
           where
           the
           Natives
           had
           been
           by
           the
           evening
           of
           the
           Grass
           ,
           but
           I
           could
           not
           have
           a
           sight
           of
           any
           .
           Here
           are
           many
           good
           Muscles
           on
           the
           Rocks
           of
           five
           Inches
           long
           ,
           and
           good
           Fish
           in
           them
           ,
           and
           many
           seed
           Pearls
           in
           every
           Muscle
           :
           Here
           are
           also
           large
           Limpets
           and
           Sea-eggs
           among
           the
           Rocks
           .
        
         
           All
           the
           Ripling
           is
           not
           worth
           the
           taking
           notice
           of
           ,
           for
           it
           is
           but
           an
           hours
           time
           on
           both
           Tides
           Ebb
           and
           Floud
           ,
           when
           the
           Tide
           runs
           strong
           ;
           neither
           are
           the
           Tides
           any
           thing
           prejudicial
           to
           the
           Navigation
           of
           the
           Streight
           ,
           but
           rather
           advantagious
           to
           help
           to
           turn
           from
           Road
           to
           Road
           either
           way
           :
           For
           I
           have
           had
           a
           benefit
           of
           them
           in
           plying
           from
           place
           to
           place
           .
           The
           Weather
           indifferent
           this
           Afternoon
           ;
           
           I
           went
           a-shore
           after
           I
           had
           done
           Sounding
           but
           saw
           no
           People
           nor
           any
           Metal
           ;
           the
           Woods
           very
           thick
           ,
           and
           several
           Trees
           of
           the
           hot
           Bark
           ,
           the
           other
           Trees
           much
           like
           Beech-timber
           :
           some
           Ducks
           and
           brant-Geese
           seen
           on
           the
           Shore-side
           .
        
         
           The
           Streight
           in
           this
           Reach
           between
           
             Elizabeth's
             Bay
          
           and
           St.
           
             Jerom's
             River
          
           is
           about
           two
           Leagues
           ,
           broad
           and
           high
           Land
           on
           the
           South-side
           ;
           which
           hath
           several
           brave
           Coves
           on
           it
           like
           the
           Wet-dock
           at
           Deptford
           ,
           and
           safe
           to
           lay
           Ships
           in
           them
           from
           either
           much
           Wind
           or
           any
           Sea.
           This
           Bay
           I
           called
           Muscle-Bay
           ,
           for
           in
           it
           there
           are
           many
           and
           great
           plenty
           of
           good
           Muscles
           .
           The
           Shore-sides
           are
           rocky
           ,
           steep
           too
           in
           most
           places
           ;
           no
           Ground
           in
           the
           main
           Channel
           ;
           at
           an
           hundred
           Fathom
           ;
           also
           in
           the
           Bays
           on
           the
           South-side
           it
           is
           deep
           Water
           ,
           and
           small
           Islands
           lie
           in
           the
           Bays
           ,
           and
           close
           along
           the
           South-shore
           lie
           small
           Islands
           .
           Here
           are
           many
           Whales
           ,
           and
           I
           saw
           many
           Penguins
           ,
           and
           some
           Seals
           :
           The
           Shores
           are
           woody
           on
           both
           sides
           ,
           but
           ragged
           Timber
           and
           boggy
           Ground
           ;
           the
           tops
           of
           the
           Hills
           bare
           Rocks
           and
           irregular
           :
           several
           streams
           of
           Snow-water
           run
           down
           in
           the
           Cliffs
           of
           the
           Hills
           ,
           two
           Leagues
           to
           the
           Westward
           of
           Elizabeth's-Bay
           .
           On
           the
           North-shore
           the
           Land
           is
           low
           and
           woody
           near
           the
           Water-side
           ,
           and
           up
           of
           a
           Valley
           in
           this
           Low-land
           :
           In
           this
           Valley
           there
           runs
           a
           fresh
           Water-River
           ;
           I
           went
           it
           with
           my
           Boat
           :
           It
           is
           but
           shallow
           at
           low
           Water
           ,
           hardly
           Water
           enough
           for
           my
           Boat
           :
           Here
           I
           saw
           several
           Arbors
           of
           the
           Indians
           making
           ,
           but
           no
           People
           .
           This
           River
           is
           a
           very
           convenient
           place
           to
           lay
           Shallops
           ,
           or
           such
           like
           small
           Vessels
           in
           it
           ;
           they
           may
           go
           into
           
           it
           at
           high
           Water
           ,
           for
           the
           Tide
           riseth
           here
           eight
           or
           nine
           feet
           :
           this
           River
           I
           called
           by
           the
           name
           of
           
             Batchelor's
             River
          
           .
           Before
           the
           mouth
           of
           this
           River
           ,
           in
           the
           Streights
           ,
           there
           is
           good
           anchoring
           ,
           in
           nine
           ,
           or
           ten
           ,
           or
           twelve
           Fathom
           Water
           ,
           sandy
           Ground
           ;
           a
           fair
           birth
           off
           the
           Shore
           :
           the
           Tide
           runs
           but
           ordinary
           ,
           and
           the
           Floud-tide
           comes
           from
           the
           Westward
           ,
           and
           the
           Tide
           that
           comes
           out
           of
           St.
           
           Jerom's
           Channel
           ,
           makes
           a
           ripling
           with
           the
           Tide
           that
           comes
           along
           the
           stream
           of
           the
           Streight
           :
           I
           called
           this
           Road
           that
           is
           before
           
             Batchelor's-River
             ,
             York-Road
          
           :
           This
           is
           a
           good
           place
           to
           ride
           in
           with
           Westerly
           Winds
           ,
           for
           here
           cannot
           go
           any
           great
           Sea
           ;
           neither
           shall
           a
           Man
           be
           embayed
           ;
           that
           if
           a
           Cable
           give
           way
           ,
           he
           may
           have
           the
           Streight
           open
           to
           carry
           it
           away
           ;
           for
           the
           Westerly
           Winds
           are
           the
           greatest
           Winds
           that
           blow
           here
           by
           the
           Trees
           ,
           for
           they
           all
           stoop
           to
           these
           Winds
           ,
           and
           lean
           to
           the
           Easterward
           ,
           and
           the
           West-side
           of
           all
           the
           Trees
           that
           stand
           open
           ,
           are
           made
           flat
           with
           the
           Winds
           :
           the
           tops
           of
           the
           Mountains
           look
           to
           the
           Eastward
           ;
           the
           Easterly
           Winds
           seldom
           blow
           strong
           here
           as
           to
           what
           I
           have
           observed
           .
           By
           the
           Shore-side
           which
           lies
           open
           to
           the
           East
           ,
           the
           Grass
           grows
           down
           to
           the
           Water-side
           ,
           and
           they
           are
           the
           greener
           Shores
           ,
           and
           the
           Trees
           are
           streight
           and
           tall
           on
           the
           East-side
           of
           the
           Hills
           ,
           but
           on
           the
           West-shores
           ,
           the
           Grass
           and
           Trees
           are
           much
           weather-beaten
           ,
           worn
           away
           ,
           and
           crippled
           ,
           and
           the
           Shore-sides
           much
           tewed
           with
           the
           surge
           of
           the
           Waters
           .
        
         
           At
           
             Cape
             Quad
          
           ,
           the
           Lands
           shut
           one
           with
           the
           other
           ,
           as
           if
           there
           were
           no
           farther
           passage
           :
           but
           as
           you
           make
           nearer
           to
           it
           ,
           you
           will
           see
           the
           opening
           
           more
           and
           more
           ,
           as
           the
           Streight
           rounds
           there
           more
           to
           the
           Northward
           again
           .
           
             Cape
             Quad
          
           is
           on
           the
           North-shore
           ;
           and
           it
           is
           a
           steep
           up
           Cape
           ,
           of
           a
           rocky
           greyish
           Face
           ,
           of
           a
           good
           height
           before
           one
           comes
           at
           it
           :
           it
           shews
           like
           a
           great
           building
           of
           a
           Castle
           ;
           for
           it
           points
           off
           with
           a
           Race
           from
           the
           other
           Mountains
           ,
           so
           much
           into
           the
           Channel
           of
           the
           Streight
           ,
           that
           it
           makes
           shutting
           in
           against
           the
           South-land
           ,
           and
           maketh
           an
           Elbow
           in
           the
           Streight
           :
           the
           Streight
           is
           not
           past
           four
           miles
           broad
           here
           ,
           from
           shore
           to
           shore
           ;
           and
           the
           Land
           is
           steep
           too
           on
           both
           sides
           ,
           and
           rocky
           ;
           the
           Mountains
           high
           on
           both
           Shores
           ,
           and
           craggy
           barren
           Rocks
           :
           some
           Trees
           and
           Bushes
           growing
           here
           ,
           and
           much
           Snow
           on
           the
           Mountains
           on
           both
           sides
           .
           Opposite
           to
           
             Cape
             Quad
          
           on
           the
           South-side
           ,
           there
           is
           a
           fine
           large
           Bay
           ,
           which
           is
           called
           
             Rider's
             Bay
          
           :
           I
           did
           not
           go
           into
           it
           ;
           if
           there
           be
           Anchoring
           in
           it
           ,
           it
           is
           a
           fair
           Road
           for
           any
           Winds
           :
           the
           Water
           is
           very
           deep
           here
           in
           the
           Channel
           ,
           no
           Ground
           at
           one
           hundred
           Fathom
           :
           this
           part
           of
           the
           Streights
           ,
           from
           
             Point
             Passage
          
           to
           
             Cape
             Quad
          
           ,
           is
           the
           most
           crooked
           part
           of
           all
           the
           Streight
           ;
           therefore
           I
           called
           this
           Crooked-Reach
           .
           Here
           are
           two
           small
           Islands
           in
           the
           North-shore
           ,
           to
           the
           Eastward
           of
           
             Cape
             Quad.
          
           
        
         
           November
           14.
           
           This
           Morning
           I
           was
           a-brest
           of
           Cape-Munday
           ,
           so
           I
           called
           it
           ,
           it
           being
           a
           Cape
           on
           the
           South-side
           ,
           and
           is
           distant
           from
           
             Cape
             de
             Quad
          
           about
           thirteen
           Leagues
           :
           the
           Streight
           here
           is
           about
           four
           miles
           broad
           ,
           and
           the
           North-shore
           makes
           into
           the
           Land
           with
           great
           sounds
           and
           broken
           Islands
           ;
           the
           Land
           on
           both
           Shores
           is
           high
           rocky
           Hills
           ,
           and
           barren
           ,
           very
           little
           Wood
           or
           Grass
           growing
           on
           
           them
           :
           Here
           at
           
             Cape
             Munday
          
           ,
           the
           Streight
           grows
           broader
           and
           broader
           to
           the
           Westward
           ,
           but
           keeps
           all
           one
           Course
           ,
           North-west
           and
           by
           West
           to
           
             Cape
             Upright
          
           ;
           which
           is
           a
           steep
           upright
           Cliff
           on
           the
           South-side
           ,
           and
           it
           is
           distant
           from
           
             Cape
             Munday
          
           four
           Leagues
           .
           Here
           the
           Streight
           inclines
           to
           the
           Westward
           near
           half-a
           Point
           :
           the
           Streight
           lies
           from
           
             Cape
             Munday
          
           West-north-west
           ,
           half
           a
           Point
           Northerly
           right
           out
           into
           the
           South-Sea
           ,
           if
           you
           be
           in
           the
           middle
           of
           the
           Channel
           ,
           or
           nigh
           the
           North-shore
           ;
           I
           find
           little
           or
           no
           Tide
           to
           run
           here
           ,
           or
           Current
           :
           no
           Ground
           in
           the
           Channel
           at
           two
           hundred
           Fathom
           ,
           a
           Musket
           shot
           off
           the
           Shore
           on
           either
           side
           .
           Here
           run
           into
           the
           South-shore
           many
           Sounds
           and
           Coves
           ;
           I
           have
           sailed
           fair
           along
           by
           the
           South-shore
           all
           this
           day
           ;
           for
           the
           North-shore
           makes
           in
           broken
           Islands
           and
           Sounds
           :
           Here
           lie
           all
           along
           the
           South-shore
           several
           small
           Islands
           ,
           but
           no
           danger
           ,
           for
           they
           are
           all
           steep
           too
           :
           the
           Streight
           is
           a
           very
           fair
           Channel
           to
           sail
           throughout
           .
           This
           day
           at
           Noon
           ,
           I
           was
           a-breast
           of
           an
           Island
           ,
           which
           lies
           on
           the
           North-side
           of
           the
           Streight
           ,
           I
           called
           it
           Westminster-Island
           ;
           there
           lie
           a
           great
           many
           Islands
           between
           that
           and
           the
           North-shore
           ,
           and
           to
           the
           Eastward
           and
           Westward
           ,
           as
           also
           some
           broken
           Ground
           ,
           and
           Rocks
           lie
           about
           it
           :
           These
           Islands
           I
           called
           
             The
             Lawyers
          
           ,
           and
           this
           I
           sland
           which
           I
           called
           Westminster-Island
           ,
           is
           an
           high
           rocky
           Island
           shewing
           like
           Westminster-Hall
           ;
           the
           Streight
           is
           five
           Leagues
           broad
           ,
           between
           Westminster-Island
           and
           the
           South-shore
           ;
           but
           between
           that
           and
           the
           North-shore
           ,
           there
           are
           many
           rocky
           Islands
           and
           broken
           Ground
           .
        
         
         
           The
           Streight
           lies
           from
           
             Cape
             Munday
          
           to
           
             Cape
             Desseada
          
           West-north-west
           ,
           and
           East-south-east
           ,
           half
           a
           point
           Northerly
           ,
           and
           half
           a
           point
           Southerly
           nearest
           ,
           and
           they
           are
           distant
           from
           one
           another
           near
           fifteen
           Leagues
           :
           from
           
             Cape
             Quad
          
           to
           
             Cape
             Desseada
          
           ,
           it
           is
           about
           twenty
           eight
           Leagues
           ;
           and
           the
           Streight
           lies
           near
           North-west
           ,
           and
           by
           West
           from
           
             Cape
             Quad
          
           into
           the
           South-Sea
           ,
           and
           near
           in
           one
           Reach
           ,
           which
           I
           called
           Long-Reach
           :
           and
           some
           of
           my
           Company
           called
           it
           Long-Lane
           .
           This
           part
           may
           properly
           be
           called
           the
           Streights
           ;
           for
           it
           is
           high
           Land
           all
           the
           way
           on
           both
           Shores
           ,
           and
           barren
           Rocks
           ,
           with
           Snow
           on
           them
           ;
           and
           indeed
           from
           
             Cape
             Quad
          
           into
           the
           South-Sea
           ,
           I
           called
           this
           Land
           South-Desolation
           ,
           it
           being
           so
           desolate
           Land
           to
           behold
           .
        
         
           
             Cape
             Desseada
          
           lies
           in
           the
           Latitude
           of
           53
           d.
           10
           m.
           South
           .
        
         
           In
           Longitude
           West
           from
           the
           Lizard
           of
           England
           72
           d.
           56
           m.
           
        
         
           And
           in
           Meridian
           distance
           1149.
           
        
         
           The
           Compass
           hath
           14
           d.
           10
           m.
           Variation
           Easterly
           here
           .
        
         
           
             Cape
             Piller
          
           lies
           in
           the
           Latitude
           of
           53
           d.
           5
           m.
           
        
         
           In
           Longitude
           West
           from
           the
           Lizard
           of
           England
           72
           d.
           49
           m.
           
        
         
           And
           in
           Meridian
           distance
           1148.
           
           Leagues
           West
           .
        
         
           I
           make
           the
           whole
           length
           of
           the
           Streights
           of
           Magellan
           ,
           from
           
             Cape
             Virgin-Mary
          
           to
           
             Cape
             Desseada
          
           ,
           with
           every
           Reach
           and
           turning
           ,
           to
           be
           one
           hundred
           and
           sixteen
           Leagues
           :
           and
           so
           much
           I
           sailed
           from
           the
           one
           Sea
           to
           the
           other
           ,
           according
           to
           my
           estimation
           .
        
         
         
           The
           best
           Land-fall
           in
           my
           Opinion
           ,
           is
           to
           make
           the
           face
           of
           
             Cape
             Desseada
          
           for
           to
           come
           out
           of
           the
           South-Sea
           to
           go
           into
           the
           Streight
           of
           Magellan
           ;
           they
           lie
           in
           East
           and
           West
           at
           the
           first
           ,
           till
           you
           come
           a-brest
           of
           Cape-Pillar
           ;
           then
           the
           Course
           is
           South-east
           and
           by
           East
           nearest
           .
           Be
           careful
           to
           keep
           the
           South-shore
           in
           fair
           view
           ;
           for
           the
           North-shore
           is
           broken
           Islands
           and
           Sounds
           ,
           that
           a
           Man
           may
           mistake
           the
           right
           Channel
           or
           Streight
           ,
           and
           steer
           up
           into
           one
           of
           them
           ,
           as
           he
           comes
           out
           from
           the
           South-Sea
           ,
           if
           he
           lose
           sight
           of
           the
           South-shore
           .
        
         
           Here
           lie
           four
           small
           Islands
           at
           the
           North
           part
           of
           the
           mouth
           of
           the
           Streight
           ,
           in
           the
           South-Sea
           ;
           they
           lie
           pretty
           near
           together
           :
           the
           Eastermost
           stands
           singly
           by
           it self
           ,
           and
           is
           round
           copling
           up
           of
           a
           fair
           height
           like
           an
           Hay-cock
           ,
           or
           Sugar-loaf
           :
           the
           other
           three
           are
           flattish
           ;
           they
           lie
           from
           Cape-pillar
           North-north-west
           ,
           by
           the
           true
           Compass
           6
           Legues
           off
           ;
           they
           are
           distant
           from
           Cape-Victory
           ,
           near
           four
           Leagues
           South-west
           ;
           I
           called
           them
           
             The
             Islands
             of
             Direction
          
           ;
           they
           are
           good
           wishing
           to
           fall
           with
           the
           Mouth
           of
           the
           Streight
           .
        
         
           November
           26.
           
           The
           Land
           makes
           in
           Islands
           ,
           lying
           near
           the
           main
           Land
           ,
           is
           high
           and
           large
           Hills
           In-land
           ,
           which
           stretch
           North
           and
           South
           ,
           some
           Snow
           lying
           on
           the
           tops
           of
           the
           highest
           Hill.
           At
           eight
           of
           the
           Clock
           I
           made
           the
           Island
           of
           
             Nuestra
             Sennora
             del
             Socoro
          
           ;
           in
           the
           Spanish
           Tongue
           it
           is
           called
           
             The
             Island
             of
             our
             Lady
             of
             Sucore
          
           ;
           I
           steered
           with
           it
           North-east
           and
           by
           East
           ;
           it
           made
           rounding
           up
           at
           the
           Eastermost
           end
           ,
           and
           lower
           in
           the
           middle
           that
           at
           either
           end
           :
           it
           maketh
           with
           a
           ridge
           running
           from
           one
           end
           to
           the
           other
           ,
           and
           Trees
           growing
           
           on
           it
           :
           the
           Shore-side
           is
           rocky
           on
           the
           South-side
           of
           the
           Island
           ,
           and
           some
           broken
           Rocks
           lie
           near
           the
           Shore-side
           ,
           and
           on
           the
           South-east
           end
           of
           the
           Island
           there
           stand
           two
           peaked
           copling
           Rocks
           close
           to
           the
           Shore
           ,
           they
           are
           white
           on
           the
           top
           with
           Fowls
           dung
           .
           The
           Island
           is
           of
           a
           fine
           heighth
           ,
           and
           all
           woody
           on
           the
           North-side
           of
           it
           ;
           the
           Trees
           grow
           down
           to
           the
           Water-side
           ,
           and
           fresh
           Water
           runs
           down
           in
           five
           or
           six
           Gullies
           ;
           the
           Woods
           are
           all
           green
           ,
           and
           very
           thick
           spicy
           Trees
           ;
        
         
           Meridian
           distance
           at
           Noon
           from
           Cape-pillar
           ,
           East
           20
           d.
           ●
           m
           4
           ten
           .
        
         
           Longitude
           at
           Noon
           from
           Cape-pillar
           ,
           East
           1
           d
           19
           m.
           
        
         
           Longitude
           at
           Noon
           ,
           from
           the
           Lizard
           ,
           West
           71
           d.
           42
           m.
           
        
         
           Meridian
           distance
           at
           Noon
           ,
           from
           the
           Lizard
           ,
           West
           1128
           leag
           .
           2
           mil.
           9
           ten
           .
        
         
           The
           Island
           
             Nuestra
             Senore
             di
             Socoro
          
           ,
           lies
           in
           the
           Latitude
           of
           forty
           five
           degrees
           South
           ,
           and
           in
           Longitude
           East
           from
           Cape-pillar
           one
           degree
           nineteen
           minutes
           ;
           Meridian
           distance
           from
           Cape-pillar
           ,
           East
           20
           leag
           .
           0
           min.
           4
           ten
           .
        
         
           Meridian
           distance
           from
           the
           Lizard
           ,
           West
           1128
           deg
           .
           2
           min.
           42
           min.
           
        
         
           Longitude
           from
           the
           Meridian
           of
           the
           Lizard
           ,
           West
           71
           deg
           .
           9
           ten
           .
        
         
           The
           Compass
           hath
           eleven
           Degrees
           ,
           Variation
           Easterly
           here
           .
        
         
           I
           went
           a-shore
           with
           my
           Boats
           for
           fresh
           Water
           ,
           which
           I
           had
           them
           laden
           with
           presently
           ;
           for
           here
           is
           fresh
           Water
           enough
           ,
           and
           very
           good
           ;
           I
           searched
           the
           Shore
           what
           I
           could
           ,
           I
           saw
           on
           old
           Hutt
           or
           
           Arbour
           of
           the
           Indians
           making
           ,
           and
           several
           sticks
           that
           were
           cut
           ,
           but
           all
           old
           done
           .
           I
           could
           not
           see
           any
           sign
           of
           People
           on
           the
           Island
           now
           ;
           I
           believe
           the
           People
           come
           rambling
           to
           this
           Island
           from
           the
           Main
           in
           the
           best
           season
           of
           the
           Year
           to
           get
           young
           Fowls
           :
           for
           I
           do
           not
           see
           any
           thing
           else
           in
           the
           Island
           for
           the
           sustenance
           of
           Mans
           Life
           ;
           I
           could
           not
           see
           any
           kind
           of
           Mineral
           or
           Metal
           :
           the
           Soil
           is
           a
           sandy
           black
           Earth
           ,
           and
           some
           Banks
           of
           Rocks
           :
           the
           Island
           is
           irregular
           ,
           and
           grown
           all
           over
           with
           impenetrable
           thick
           Woods
           ,
           so
           as
           I
           could
           not
           see
           the
           inward
           part
           of
           it
           :
           the
           Woods
           are
           ordinary
           Timber
           ,
           none
           that
           I
           saw
           was
           fit
           to
           make
           Planks
           of
           ;
           the
           nature
           of
           the
           Wood
           is
           much
           like
           Beech
           and
           Birch
           ,
           and
           a
           sort
           of
           heavy
           Wood
           good
           for
           little
           but
           the
           fire
           ,
           it
           is
           white
           :
           no
           Fruit
           or
           Herbs
           ;
           very
           little
           Grass
           ,
           the
           Woods
           are
           so
           thick
           ;
           much
           kind
           of
           long
           sedgy
           Grass
           ;
           no
           wild
           Beast
           to
           be
           seen
           ;
           several
           small
           Birds
           in
           the
           Woods
           like
           Sparrows
           :
           there
           are
           several
           Fowls
           like
           Kites
           in
           the
           Woods
           ,
           several
           black
           and
           white
           brant-Geese
           and
           pied
           Shags
           ,
           and
           other
           such
           Sea-Fowls
           ,
           as
           Pinks
           and
           Sea-mews
           :
           what
           else
           the
           Island
           affords
           I
           cannot
           tell
           .
           I
           made
           a
           Fire
           on
           the
           Shore
           ,
           in
           hopes
           to
           have
           some
           answer
           of
           it
           on
           the
           Main
           ,
           but
           had
           not
           .
           At
           Noon
           I
           went
           aboard
           ,
           and
           sent
           my
           Boats
           a-shore
           again
           for
           more
           Wood
           and
           Water
           ,
           whilst
           the
           Weather
           permitted
           landing
           .
        
         
           November
           30.
           
           This
           Forenoon
           I
           was
           over
           on
           the
           main
           side
           ,
           the
           Ship
           lay
           off
           ,
           and
           in
           .
           I
           went
           ashore
           with
           my
           Boat
           on
           an
           Island
           which
           lieth
           adjacent
           to
           the
           Main
           :
           There
           runs
           a
           Channel
           between
           that
           and
           the
           Main
           ,
           and
           many
           Rocks
           lie
           
           in
           it
           ,
           and
           foul
           Ground
           ,
           so
           as
           I
           durst
           not
           venture
           the
           Ship
           in
           it
           .
           This
           Island
           shewed
           as
           if
           it
           had
           been
           the
           Main
           ,
           till
           I
           went
           to
           it
           with
           the
           Boat
           ;
           being
           about
           four
           Leagues
           long
           from
           the
           North-point
           to
           the
           South-point
           ,
           and
           in
           some
           places
           a
           League
           broad
           .
           The
           Island
           is
           of
           a
           mean
           height
           ,
           and
           in
           some
           places
           two
           Leagues
           broad
           ,
           and
           grown
           all
           over
           with
           Woods
           very
           thick
           :
           the
           Timber
           is
           such
           like
           as
           is
           on
           the
           Isle
           of
           Socoro
           :
           I
           could
           not
           see
           any
           kind
           of
           Mineral
           or
           Metal
           in
           it
           ;
           the
           Shore-side
           sandy
           in
           many
           places
           ,
           and
           rocky
           in
           others
           ;
           the
           Earth
           on
           this
           Island
           is
           of
           a
           sandy
           black
           soil
           ,
           but
           very
           wet
           with
           the
           continual
           Rains
           that
           are
           here
           .
           Not
           finding
           this
           noted
           in
           my
           Draughts
           ,
           I
           called
           it
           after
           my
           own
           Name
           Narbrough's-Island
           ;
           I
           took
           possesion
           of
           it
           for
           his
           Majesty
           and
           his
           Heirs
           :
           I
           could
           not
           see
           any
           People
           ,
           or
           any
           sign
           of
           them
           here
           .
        
         
           South-east
           from
           Narbrough's-Island
           on
           the
           Main
           distant
           about
           three
           Leagues
           ,
           there
           runs
           into
           the
           Land
           a
           River
           or
           Sound
           ,
           and
           some
           broken
           ground
           lies
           before
           it
           .
           The
           Shore-side
           is
           rocky
           ,
           and
           the
           Hills
           are
           high
           in
           the
           Land
           on
           both
           sides
           of
           it
           ;
           this
           opening
           lies
           in
           East
           and
           West
           ,
           I
           take
           it
           for
           that
           place
           which
           in
           the
           Draughts
           is
           called
           
             Saint
             Domingo
          
           .
           This
           place
           lies
           in
           the
           Latitude
           of
           forty
           four
           Degrees
           ,
           fifty
           Minutes
           South
           ;
           and
           more
           to
           the
           Southward
           thereof
           lie
           many
           round
           coplin
           high
           Islands
           grown
           over
           with
           Woods
           :
           all
           along
           the
           Coasts
           as
           far
           as
           I
           could
           see
           ,
           there
           lie
           Islands
           adjacent
           to
           the
           Main
           ,
           and
           they
           are
           of
           a
           great
           height
           .
        
         
         
           This
           Day
           all
           the
           Bread
           in
           the
           Ship
           is
           expended
           :
           all
           the
           Company
           of
           the
           Ship
           ,
           my self
           as
           well
           as
           any
           other
           ,
           eat
           Pease
           in
           lieu
           of
           Bread
           ;
           my
           Company
           are
           all
           indifferent
           well
           in
           health
           ,
           I
           thank
           God
           for
           it
           ,
           being
           seventy
           two
           in
           Company
           :
           no
           Fish
           to
           be
           taken
           with
           Hooks
           :
           many
           Porpusses
           seen
           ,
           and
           some
           Whales
           ;
           several
           Sea-Fowls
           seen
           swimming
           to
           day
           :
           much
           Wind
           to
           Night
           at
           North-west
           ;
           I
           ride
           fast
           ,
           but
           doubtful
           of
           my
           Cable
           .
        
         
           
             No-Man's
             Island
          
           lies
           in
           the
           Latitude
           of
           forty
           three
           Degrees
           ,
           forty
           seven
           Minutes
           South
           ,
           and
           in
           Longitude
           West
           from
           the
           Lizard
           in
           England
           seventy
           one
           Degrees
           ,
           thirty
           two
           Minutes
           .
           And
           in
           Meridian
           distance
           from
           the
           Lizard
           of
           England
           ,
           one
           thousand
           one
           hundred
           and
           twenty
           six
           Leagues
           and
           one
           Mile
           ;
           and
           in
           Meridian
           distance
           from
           Cape-pillar
           East
           ,
           twenty
           two
           Leagues
           ,
           two
           Miles
           ,
           and
           two
           tenths
           ;
           and
           in
           Longitude
           East
           from
           Cape-pillar
           ,
           one
           degree
           ,
           twenty
           nine
           minutes
           1
           /
           10.
           
           The
           variation
           of
           the
           Compass
           is
           ten
           Degrees
           Easterly
           here
           .
        
         
           This
           Island
           is
           that
           which
           the
           Draughts
           make
           to
           lie
           at
           the
           South-end
           of
           the
           Island
           of
           Castro
           ,
           at
           the
           Mouth
           of
           the
           going
           in
           of
           that
           Channel
           ,
           which
           is
           between
           Castro
           and
           the
           Main
           ;
           the
           Draughts
           are
           false
           in
           laying
           down
           of
           this
           Coast
           ;
           for
           they
           do
           not
           make
           any
           mention
           of
           the
           several
           Islands
           that
           lie
           on
           it
           ,
           but
           lay
           it
           down
           all
           along
           to
           be
           a
           streight
           Coast
           :
           the
           Latitude
           of
           most
           places
           are
           laid
           down
           very
           near
           as
           what
           I
           have
           found
           .
           Here
           are
           many
           Islands
           adjacent
           on
           the
           Coasts
           more
           Southerly
           ,
           in
           the
           Latitude
           of
           forty
           five
           and
           an
           half
           ,
           but
           none
           are
           laid
           down
           .
        
         
         
           December
           15.
           
           
             Don
             Carlos
          
           was
           put
           a-shore
           ,
           and
           carried
           with
           him
           a
           Sword
           ,
           and
           a
           Case
           of
           Pistols
           ,
           and
           his
           best
           Apparel
           ,
           and
           a
           Bag
           with
           his
           Beads
           and
           Knives
           ;
           together
           with
           Scissars
           ,
           Looking-glasses
           ,
           Combs
           ,
           Rings
           ,
           Pipes
           ,
           Jews-harps
           ,
           Bells
           and
           Tobacco
           ;
           all
           which
           things
           he
           had
           of
           me
           to
           give
           to
           the
           Natives
           .
           At
           seven
           of
           the
           Clock
           
             Signior
             Carlos
          
           was
           set
           a-shore
           ,
           on
           the
           South-side
           of
           the
           Harbour
           of
           Baldavia
           without
           the
           Mouth
           of
           it
           a
           Mile
           ,
           in
           a
           small
           sandy
           Bay
           ,
           about
           two
           miles
           within
           Point
           Gallere
           ,
           between
           the
           Point
           and
           the
           Mouth
           of
           the
           Harbour
           .
           When
           he
           was
           a-shore
           ,
           he
           took
           his
           leave
           of
           my
           Lieutenant
           ,
           and
           bad
           him
           go
           aboard
           and
           look
           out
           for
           his
           Fire
           in
           the
           Night
           .
           He
           went
           from
           the
           Boat
           along
           the
           Sea-side
           in
           the
           path
           toward
           the
           Harbour's
           Mouth
           :
           the
           Men
           in
           the
           Boat
           saw
           him
           go
           along
           for
           the
           distance
           of
           quarter
           of
           a
           Mile
           ,
           till
           he
           turned
           behind
           a
           point
           of
           Rocks
           out
           of
           sight
           .
           The
           Shore-side
           is
           low
           and
           sandy
           ,
           and
           some
           scattered
           Rocks
           lie
           in
           it
           :
           the
           Land
           riseth
           trenting
           to
           large
           Hills
           :
           the
           land
           is
           all
           woody
           and
           very
           thick
           ,
           that
           there
           is
           travelling
           but
           by
           the
           Water-side
           .
           My
           Lieutenant
           went
           ashore
           to
           the
           edg
           of
           the
           Woods
           ,
           and
           gathered
           several
           green
           Apples
           off
           the
           Trees
           :
           for
           there
           grow
           Apple-trees
           on
           the
           Shore-side
           ,
           much
           like
           our
           European
           Winter-Fruit
           ;
           the
           Apples
           are
           bigger
           than
           Walnuts
           with
           their
           shells
           on
           ;
           whether
           these
           Trees
           were
           planted
           by
           the
           Spaniards
           ,
           or
           grow
           naturally
           in
           the
           Country
           ,
           I
           cannot
           tell
           .
        
         
           I
           do
           not
           find
           any
           Current
           or
           Tide
           to
           set
           on
           this
           Coast
           ,
           that
           is
           any
           way
           prejudicial
           to
           Navigation
           ;
           neither
           do
           I
           find
           the
           Winds
           to
           blow
           Trade
           :
           
           but
           they
           are
           veerable
           ,
           and
           are
           given
           to
           blow
           hard
           on
           the
           Western
           Quarter
           ,
           and
           rain
           much
           .
        
         
           The
           Mouth
           of
           the
           Harbour
           of
           Baldevia
           on
           the
           Coast
           of
           Chile
           ,
           in
           the
           South-Sea
           ,
           lieth
           in
           the
           Latitude
           of
           39
           d.
           56
           m.
           South
           .
        
         
           And
           in
           Longitude
           ,
           West
           from
           the
           Lizard
           of
           England
           70
           d.
           19
           m.
           
        
         
           And
           in
           Longitude
           East
           ,
           from
           Cape-pillar
           2
           d.
           41
           m.
           
        
         
           And
           in
           Meridian
           ,
           distance
           from
           Cape-pillar
           ,
           East
           41
           leag
           .
           2
           mil.
           ●
           /
           10.
           
        
         
           the
           Account
           I
           make
           by
           my
           sailing
           from
           the
           Meridian
           of
           the
           Lizard
           ,
           according
           to
           my
           daily
           Account
           of
           my
           Ships
           way
           :
           I
           do
           not
           make
           any
           Account
           of
           plain
           Sailing
           to
           be
           fit
           for
           Seamen
           to
           observe
           ;
           but
           the
           best
           Navigation
           is
           by
           Mercator
           ,
           sailing
           according
           to
           the
           Circle
           of
           the
           Globe
           ,
           which
           I
           ever
           sailed
           by
           ,
           and
           keep
           my
           Account
           of
           Easting
           and
           Westing
           by
           Longitude
           ,
           which
           is
           the
           best
           and
           most
           certain
           Sailing
           ,
           to
           give
           the
           true
           description
           of
           the
           Globe
           .
           I
           have
           noted
           down
           the
           Meridian
           distance
           I
           made
           daily
           ,
           whereby
           sush
           Navigators
           and
           Seamen
           as
           know
           better
           ,
           may
           have
           that
           to
           give
           them
           the
           knowledge
           of
           the
           distances
           of
           Places
           ,
           according
           to
           their
           Understanding
           .
           Most
           of
           our
           Navigators
           in
           this
           Age
           sail
           by
           the
           Plain
           Chart
           ,
           and
           keep
           their
           Accounts
           of
           the
           Ships
           way
           accordingly
           ,
           although
           they
           sail
           near
           the
           Poles
           ;
           which
           is
           the
           greatest
           Errour
           that
           can
           be
           committed
           ;
           for
           they
           cannot
           tell
           how
           to
           find
           the
           way
           home
           again
           ,
           by
           reason
           of
           their
           mistake
           ;
           as
           I
           have
           some
           in
           the
           Ship
           with
           me
           now
           that
           are
           in
           the
           same
           Errour
           ,
           for
           want
           of
           Understanding
           the
           
           true
           difference
           of
           the
           Meridians
           ,
           according
           to
           their
           Miles
           of
           Longitude
           ,
           in
           the
           several
           Latitudes
           .
           I
           could
           with
           all
           Seamen
           would
           give
           over
           sailing
           by
           the
           false
           plain
           Card
           ,
           and
           sail
           by
           
           Mercator's
           Chart
           ,
           which
           is
           according
           to
           the
           truth
           of
           Navigation
           ;
           But
           it
           is
           an
           hard
           matter
           to
           convince
           any
           of
           the
           old
           Navigators
           ,
           from
           their
           Method
           of
           sailing
           by
           the
           Plain
           Chart
           ;
           shew
           most
           of
           them
           the
           Globe
           ,
           yet
           they
           will
           walk
           in
           their
           wonted
           Road.
           
        
         
           At
           eight
           of
           the
           Clock
           in
           the
           Forenoon
           my
           Boat
           put
           from
           me
           ,
           and
           rowed
           to
           the
           Shore
           with
           .
           in
           point
           Gallery
           ,
           to
           the
           place
           where
           
             Don
             Carlos
          
           was
           landed
           :
           I
           laid
           off
           and
           on
           with
           the
           Ship
           before
           the
           Port
           ;
           the
           Boat
           rowed
           all
           along
           the
           Shore
           by
           the
           place
           where
           
             Don
             Carlos
          
           was
           landed
           ,
           and
           along
           the
           Shore
           into
           the
           Harbour
           ;
           at
           the
           Points
           on
           the
           South-side
           of
           the
           Harbour
           stands
           a
           small
           Fort
           of
           seven
           Guns
           called
           S.
           
             James's
             Fort
          
           :
           My
           Boat
           came
           suddenly
           on
           it
           ,
           and
           before
           they
           perceived
           it
           to
           be
           a
           Fort
           ,
           they
           were
           within
           shot
           of
           it
           .
           The
           Spaniards
           stood
           on
           the
           Shore
           ;
           and
           wasted
           with
           a
           white
           Flag
           ,
           and
           called
           to
           them
           ;
           My
           Lieutenant
           rowed
           to
           them
           ,
           and
           asked
           of
           them
           what
           Country
           they
           were
           ?
           they
           answered
           ,
           of
           Spain
           :
           They
           asked
           my
           Lieutenant
           of
           what
           Country
           he
           was
           ?
           He
           answered
           ,
           of
           England
           ;
           they
           asked
           him
           to
           come
           a-shore
           ,
           whch
           he
           did
           ,
           in
           hopes
           to
           have
           seen
           
             Don
             Carlos
          
           there
           ,
           for
           that
           path
           that
           
             Don
             Carlos
          
           went
           in
           when
           he
           was
           landed
           ,
           led
           directly
           to
           this
           Fort
           by
           the
           Sea-side
           ,
           and
           it
           was
           not
           a
           Mile
           from
           the
           Fort
           to
           the
           place
           where
           he
           was
           landed
           ,
           so
           as
           he
           must
           go
           to
           this
           Fort
           ,
           and
           be
           upon
           it
           before
           he
           was
           aware
           of
           it
           ,
           unless
           he
           knew
           it
           before
           .
           The
           
           path
           went
           all
           along
           between
           the
           Woods
           and
           the
           Sea
           :
           In
           the
           Woods
           there
           is
           no
           travelling
           ,
           they
           are
           so
           thick
           ,
           and
           grow
           on
           the
           side
           of
           an
           Hill
           ;
           the
           Fort
           stands
           just
           by
           the
           Wood-side
           on
           a
           race
           of
           the
           Bank
           ,
           of
           five
           yards
           ascent
           from
           the
           Sea
           ,
           with
           a
           bank
           of
           Earth
           cast
           up
           before
           the
           Ordnance
           ,
           and
           flight
           Pallisadoes
           plac'd
           in
           an
           Half-moon
           ,
           four
           yards
           distant
           from
           the
           Guns
           to
           the
           Southward
           ,
           which
           Pallisadoes
           are
           to
           keep
           the
           Natives
           from
           running
           violently
           on
           the
           Ordnance
           :
           so
           these
           Spaniards
           guard
           themselves
           with
           long
           Lances
           against
           the
           Natives
           in
           the
           Fort.
           The
           Spaniards
           have
           Match-lock
           Musquetoons
           ,
           but
           they
           are
           very
           ordinary
           ones
           ,
           and
           they
           are
           as
           silly
           in
           using
           them
           .
        
         
           At
           my
           Lieutenants
           landing
           ,
           about
           twenty
           Spaniards
           and
           Indians
           came
           to
           the
           Water-side
           in
           Arms
           ,
           and
           received
           him
           and
           his
           Company
           a-shore
           ,
           and
           carried
           him
           some
           twenty
           yards
           from
           the
           Water-side
           up
           the
           race
           of
           the
           Bank
           ,
           under
           a
           great
           Tree
           ,
           where
           the
           Captain
           of
           the
           Fort
           ,
           and
           two
           other
           Spanish
           Gentlemen
           ,
           received
           him
           under
           the
           shade
           with
           great
           Courtesie
           ,
           after
           the
           Spaniards
           Ceremony
           ;
           they
           sat
           them
           on
           Chairs
           and
           Benches
           placed
           about
           a
           Table
           ,
           under
           the
           shade
           ;
           for
           the
           Sun
           shone
           very
           warm
           ,
           it
           being
           a
           very
           fair
           Day
           .
           The
           Spanish
           Captain
           called
           for
           Wine
           ,
           which
           was
           brought
           to
           him
           in
           a
           great
           Silver
           Bowl
           ;
           He
           drank
           to
           my
           Lieutenant
           ,
           and
           bid
           him
           welcome
           a-shore
           ,
           and
           caused
           five
           of
           his
           Ordnance
           to
           be
           fired
           ,
           being
           glad
           to
           see
           English
           Men
           in
           this
           place
           ,
           and
           told
           him
           that
           this
           was
           Baldavia
           ,
           speaking
           very
           kindly
           ,
           and
           how
           welcome
           they
           were
           to
           him
           :
           After
           every
           
           one
           had
           drank
           ,
           and
           my
           Lieutenant
           had
           thanked
           him
           for
           his
           Entertainment
           ,
           he
           desired
           my
           Gentlemen
           to
           sit
           down
           ,
           and
           he
           discoursed
           with
           them
           ,
           and
           asked
           from
           whence
           they
           came
           ,
           and
           what
           way
           they
           came
           into
           this
           Sea
           ,
           and
           what
           their
           Captains
           Name
           was
           ,
           and
           if
           there
           were
           Wars
           in
           England
           ?
           My
           Lieutenant
           answered
           him
           to
           his
           demands
           :
           My
           Lieutenant
           asked
           him
           ,
           if
           they
           were
           in
           peace
           with
           the
           Indians
           ?
           He
           answered
           ,
           that
           they
           were
           at
           Wars
           with
           them
           round
           about
           ,
           wafting
           his
           Hand
           round
           the
           Harbour
           ,
           and
           that
           they
           were
           valiant
           People
           and
           very
           barbarous
           ,
           and
           fought
           on
           Horseback
           ,
           and
           did
           them
           much
           spoil
           ;
           and
           that
           two
           days
           before
           ,
           the
           Indians
           came
           out
           of
           the
           Woods
           and
           killed
           a
           Captain
           ,
           as
           he
           stood
           at
           his
           Duty
           by
           the
           side
           of
           the
           Fort
           ,
           and
           cut
           off
           his
           Head
           and
           carried
           it
           away
           ,
           sticking
           on
           their
           Lance.
           He
           shewed
           my
           Lieutenant
           the
           place
           where
           the
           Indians
           came
           out
           of
           the
           Woods
           ,
           and
           the
           place
           where
           the
           Man
           was
           killed
           .
           They
           seem
           to
           be
           very
           fearful
           of
           the
           Indians
           ,
           for
           they
           will
           not
           stir
           any
           way
           ,
           but
           they
           will
           have
           their
           Piece
           or
           their
           Lance
           with
           them
           .
           It
           is
           a
           manifest
           sign
           they
           are
           much
           affraid
           of
           the
           Indians
           :
           also
           they
           have
           no
           more
           ground
           than
           the
           Fort
           ;
           neither
           do
           they
           clear
           any
           of
           the
           Woods
           on
           this
           side
           of
           the
           Harbour
           ,
           nor
           walk
           at
           a
           Musquet-shot
           distance
           from
           the
           Pallisadoes
           ,
           along
           the
           Woods-side
           .
           The
           Spaniards
           say
           that
           the
           Indians
           have
           much
           Gold
           ,
           and
           that
           their
           Armour
           for
           their
           Brest
           is
           fine
           beaten
           Gold
           ,
           &c.
           
        
         
           In
           the
           Afternoon
           a
           Dinner
           was
           brought
           out
           of
           the
           Fort
           to
           the
           Tent
           ,
           where
           they
           were
           ,
           and
           placed
           on
           the
           Table
           :
           The
           first
           Course
           was
           Soppas
           ,
           then
           
           Olleos
           ,
           then
           Pullets
           ,
           then
           fresh
           Fish
           ,
           all
           dressed
           with
           hot
           Sawce
           ,
           and
           very
           good
           Diet
           it
           was
           ;
           the
           last
           Course
           was
           Sweet-meats
           :
           every
           Course
           was
           served
           in
           Silver
           Dishes
           ,
           and
           all
           the
           Plates
           were
           Silver
           ,
           and
           the
           Pots
           and
           Stew-pots
           ,
           and
           all
           the
           Utensils
           belonging
           to
           the
           dressing
           of
           the
           Provisions
           were
           Silver
           ;
           the
           Bason
           wherein
           they
           brought
           Water
           to
           wash
           their
           Hands
           was
           in
           like
           manner
           made
           of
           Silver
           ,
           very
           large
           ,
           and
           the
           Hilts
           of
           the
           Soldiers
           Swords
           were
           Silver
           ,
           but
           the
           Hilts
           of
           the
           Officers
           Swords
           were
           Gold
           of
           good
           value
           :
           Moreover
           ,
           the
           Plate
           at
           the
           But-end
           of
           the
           Stock
           of
           their
           Musquetoons
           was
           of
           the
           same
           Metal
           ,
           and
           the
           Pipe
           that
           the
           Rod
           runs
           in
           was
           Silver
           ;
           as
           also
           the
           tip
           of
           the
           Gun-stick
           ,
           and
           their
           Tobacco-Boxes
           ,
           and
           Snuff-Boxes
           ,
           and
           the
           Staves
           which
           they
           walk
           with
           were
           headed
           and
           ferrelled
           with
           Silver
           ,
           and
           ferrelled
           on
           the
           joints
           with
           Silver
           .
           Indeed
           they
           are
           Masters
           of
           much
           Silver
           and
           Gold
           ,
           and
           it
           is
           but
           little
           esteemed
           among
           them
           .
           Their
           boasting
           was
           
             Plata
             no
             vallanada
             muchoro
             in
             terra
             .
          
        
         
           Four
           Spanish
           Gentlemen
           desired
           to
           go
           aboard
           with
           my
           Lieutenant
           ,
           and
           see
           the
           Ship
           ,
           and
           Pilot
           her
           into
           the
           Harbour
           ,
           if
           I
           would
           come
           in
           ,
           which
           they
           did
           not
           question
           but
           I
           would
           ,
           as
           I
           understood
           afterward
           by
           a
           Spaniard
           that
           came
           aboard
           to
           me
           ,
           who
           revealed
           to
           me
           their
           whole
           Design
           ,
           how
           they
           intended
           to
           surprise
           the
           Ship
           ,
           which
           I
           ever
           took
           care
           to
           prevent
           ,
           giving
           them
           no
           opportunity
           :
           For
           it
           hath
           been
           a
           general
           practice
           with
           the
           Spaniards
           in
           America
           ,
           to
           betray
           all
           forein
           Interest
           in
           these
           parts
           ;
           as
           I
           had
           read
           of
           their
           treacherous
           
           dealings
           with
           Captain
           Hawkins
           at
           Saint
           
             Juan
             de
             Vlloa
          
           .
        
         
           I
           had
           much
           Discourse
           with
           the
           Spanish
           Gentlemen
           this
           day
           concerning
           Baldavia
           ,
           and
           the
           Country
           of
           Chile
           :
           They
           tell
           me
           they
           have
           much
           Gold
           here
           at
           Baldavia
           ,
           and
           that
           the
           Natives
           do
           much
           hinder
           their
           getting
           of
           it
           ;
           for
           they
           are
           at
           cruel
           Wars
           with
           them
           ,
           and
           will
           not
           permit
           them
           to
           plant
           anything
           near
           here
           about
           ,
           nor
           at
           Baldavia
           ,
           but
           they
           come
           and
           destroy
           it
           with
           Fire
           .
           And
           that
           the
           Natives
           are
           very
           cruel
           and
           barbarous
           ;
           if
           they
           take
           any
           Spaniard
           they
           cut
           off
           his
           Head
           ,
           and
           carry
           it
           away
           on
           their
           Lances
           end
           .
           These
           Spaniards
           tell
           me
           that
           they
           live
           here
           ,
           as
           the
           Spaniards
           do
           at
           Mamora
           in
           Barbary
           ,
           having
           their
           Enemies
           round
           about
           them
           .
           These
           Spaniards
           say
           ,
           that
           the
           Indians
           are
           tall
           Men
           ,
           and
           of
           a
           Gigantick
           stature
           and
           extreamly
           Valiant
           ,
           and
           that
           they
           fight
           on
           Horseback
           ,
           eight
           and
           ten
           thousand
           Men
           in
           Arms
           ,
           and
           well
           disciplin'd
           .
           The
           Indians
           have
           much
           Gold
           ;
           and
           their
           Weapons
           are
           long
           Lances
           ,
           and
           Bows
           ,
           and
           Arrows
           ,
           and
           Swords
           and
           some
           Musquets
           ,
           which
           they
           have
           taken
           from
           the
           Spaniards
           ,
           and
           know
           how
           to
           use
           them
           in
           Service
           ;
           taking
           also
           Ammunition
           ,
           &c.
           
           The
           Indians
           are
           very
           populous
           in
           the
           Land
           about
           Baldavia
           ,
           and
           at
           Orsono
           ,
           and
           on
           the
           Island
           of
           Castro
           ,
           and
           at
           Chile
           ,
           and
           that
           they
           have
           much
           Gold
           on
           these
           parts
           about
           Orsono
           ,
           and
           Chilue
           ,
           and
           that
           they
           trade
           with
           the
           Spaniards
           ,
           and
           give
           them
           Gold.
           
        
         
           This
           Captain
           said
           ,
           that
           they
           have
           six
           great
           Ships
           going
           yearly
           from
           Lima
           to
           the
           Philippine
           Islands
           ,
           to
           the
           Port
           of
           Mannelos
           ,
           and
           that
           they
           
           have
           a
           great
           Trade
           with
           the
           Chineses
           ;
           and
           that
           these
           Ships
           sail
           from
           the
           Calleo
           ,
           that
           is
           the
           Port
           of
           Lima
           in
           the
           Month
           of
           January
           ,
           and
           their
           passage
           is
           but
           little
           more
           than
           two
           Months
           ,
           from
           Lima
           to
           the
           Port
           of
           Mannelos
           ,
           and
           they
           sail
           it
           within
           the
           Tropicks
           ,
           and
           have
           much
           Easterly
           Winds
           ;
           and
           they
           return
           back
           by
           the
           Northwards
           ,
           to
           gain
           the
           Westerly
           Winds
           ,
           which
           brings
           them
           to
           California
           ,
           and
           to
           the
           Port
           of
           Aquapulco
           ,
           which
           lieth
           on
           the
           West-Coast
           of
           
             Nova
             Espana
          
           ,
           and
           from
           thence
           they
           come
           to
           Panama
           ,
           and
           then
           to
           the
           Port
           of
           Lima.
           They
           bring
           rich
           Lading
           ,
           much
           Silks
           and
           other
           rich
           Commodities
           ,
           and
           Spices
           and
           Callicoes
           .
           The
           Mannellos
           have
           a
           great
           Trade
           with
           the
           Japoneses
           and
           Chineses
           ,
           which
           is
           very
           beneficial
           to
           them
           .
           The
           Captain
           demanded
           of
           me
           whither
           I
           was
           bound
           ?
           I
           answered
           him
           ,
           I
           was
           bound
           for
           China
           ,
           and
           that
           I
           had
           rich
           Lading
           for
           that
           Country
           ;
           and
           that
           I
           only
           touched
           in
           at
           this
           place
           ,
           knowing
           here
           were
           Settlements
           of
           the
           King
           of
           Spains
           Subjects
           ,
           hoping
           here
           to
           have
           Wood
           and
           fresh
           Water
           ,
           and
           refreshing
           for
           my
           Men
           ,
           whereby
           I
           might
           the
           better
           proceed
           on
           my
           Voyage
           .
           He
           said
           ,
           I
           should
           have
           what
           the
           Country
           would
           afford
           ,
           and
           that
           the
           Captain
           of
           the
           Fort
           had
           sent
           for
           Provisions
           for
           me
           ,
           and
           that
           I
           might
           have
           Water
           on
           the
           Shore-sides
           pointing
           his
           Hand
           to
           the
           place
           which
           was
           near
           by
           ;
           the
           Captain
           said
           ,
           it
           was
           
             Aqua
             del
             oro
          
           (
           which
           is
           
             Water
             of
             Gold
          
           in
           English
           .
           )
           This
           saying
           caused
           me
           to
           laugh
           ;
           then
           he
           said
           ,
           it
           came
           running
           from
           the
           Hills
           where
           they
           find
           Gold
           ,
           and
           that
           there
           was
           Gold
           in
           that
           Rivulet
           .
           I
           asked
           him
           how
           they
           get
           the
           Gold
           ?
           He
           said
           ,
           they
           wash
           
           the
           Earth
           which
           is
           in
           the
           Mountains
           ,
           and
           find
           the
           Gold
           in
           the
           Bowl
           or
           Tray
           when
           the
           Earth
           is
           washed
           out
           .
           And
           they
           buy
           much
           Gold
           of
           the
           Indians
           ,
           which
           they
           gather
           in
           the
           Gullies
           of
           the
           Hills
           ,
           which
           is
           washed
           in
           there
           by
           the
           Rains
           ,
           and
           snow
           dissolv'd
           ,
           which
           descend
           from
           the
           high
           Mountains
           ,
           which
           they
           say
           are
           very
           high
           and
           barren
           Rocks
           ,
           thirty
           Leagues
           In-land
           from
           the
           Sea-shore
           .
           The
           Land
           between
           those
           barren
           Hills
           and
           the
           Sea-shore
           ,
           is
           mighty
           good
           Land
           ,
           and
           the
           Country
           very
           fruitful
           ,
           abounding
           in
           many
           Plains
           ,
           and
           much
           Cattle
           that
           the
           Indians
           have
           ,
           as
           Horses
           and
           Cows
           ,
           and
           Goats
           and
           Sheep
           ,
           which
           they
           have
           taken
           from
           the
           Spaniards
           ,
           since
           they
           came
           into
           this
           Country
           .
           The
           Spaniards
           call
           the
           high
           rocky
           Mountains
           the
           Andes
           ,
           and
           say
           that
           those
           Andes
           run
           all
           along
           the
           Land
           from
           Magellan
           Streights
           in
           a
           row
           to
           S.
           Martha
           ,
           which
           is
           in
           
             Terra
             firma
          
           ,
           not
           far
           from
           Cartagean
           .
        
         
           The
           most
           Gold
           in
           all
           the
           Land
           of
           America
           is
           in
           Chile
           ,
           as
           what
           is
           known
           at
           this
           time
           .
           But
           I
           find
           the
           Spaniards
           have
           but
           little
           knowledge
           of
           the
           Land
           all
           along
           to
           the
           Southward
           ,
           from
           Baldavia
           to
           the
           Streights
           Mouth
           ,
           as
           far
           as
           I
           can
           understand
           by
           them
           ,
           excepting
           at
           the
           Island
           of
           Castro
           :
           There
           they
           have
           a
           Settlement
           ,
           and
           on
           the
           Main
           against
           Castro
           at
           a
           place
           called
           Orsono
           :
           At
           these
           two
           places
           they
           have
           good
           store
           of
           Gold
           ,
           and
           there
           are
           many
           Indians
           :
           but
           farther
           Southerly
           than
           Castro
           ,
           they
           know
           nothing
           of
           the
           Country
           ,
           or
           of
           the
           Sea-Coast
           .
           Castro
           lieth
           in
           the
           Latitude
           of
           43
           d.
           30
           m.
           the
           South
           end
           of
           the
           Island
           ,
           and
           the
           North
           end
           lies
           in
           the
           Latitude
           of
           41
           d.
           
           40
           m.
           It
           is
           a
           fine
           Island
           ,
           and
           near
           the
           Main
           ,
           there
           grows
           good
           Wheat
           on
           it
           .
           The
           Spaniards
           are
           but
           few
           in
           number
           there
           ,
           but
           there
           are
           many
           Indians
           ,
           and
           those
           too
           valiant
           and
           of
           a
           large
           stature
           ;
           but
           not
           Giants
           as
           I
           understand
           :
           These
           Indians
           have
           Wars
           with
           the
           Spaniards
           ,
           and
           will
           not
           suffer
           them
           to
           search
           the
           Country
           for
           Wealth
           .
        
         
           A
           Ship
           brought
           from
           Lima
           Provisions
           for
           the
           City
           of
           Baldavia
           and
           the
           Forts
           ,
           and
           Cloaths
           ,
           and
           Ammunition
           ,
           and
           Wines
           ,
           and
           Tobacco
           ,
           and
           Sugar
           ;
           and
           she
           lades
           away
           from
           Baldavia
           Gold
           and
           Bezoar
           Stone
           ,
           and
           red
           Wool
           ,
           &c.
           and
           Indian
           Slaves
           that
           the
           Spaniards
           take
           here
           in
           these
           parts
           ;
           they
           carry
           them
           to
           Peru
           ,
           and
           make
           perpetual
           Slaves
           of
           them
           there
           ;
           and
           the
           Indians
           of
           Peru
           they
           bring
           hither
           ,
           and
           make
           Soldiers
           of
           them
           against
           the
           Chile-Indians
           ,
           of
           which
           Soldiers
           there
           are
           many
           hereabout
           ,
           whom
           my
           Men
           saw
           when
           they
           were
           at
           the
           Fort.
           There
           were
           about
           thirty
           Indians
           and
           Musteses
           Soldiers
           there
           ,
           and
           some
           sixteen
           white
           Men
           who
           were
           Officers
           .
           Moreover
           ,
           the
           Spaniards
           make
           use
           of
           the
           Peru-Indians
           to
           Trade
           with
           the
           Chile-Indians
           for
           Gold
           ,
           although
           they
           are
           at
           Wars
           .
           For
           they
           of
           Chile
           without
           doubt
           are
           desirous
           of
           Trade
           ,
           whereby
           they
           may
           furnish
           themselves
           with
           Knives
           ,
           and
           Scissers
           ,
           and
           Combs
           ,
           &c.
           which
           are
           wanting
           among
           them
           ;
           as
           also
           with
           Arms
           that
           many
           times
           by
           stealth
           are
           sold
           to
           them
           ,
           although
           they
           be
           prohibited
           ;
           Traders
           will
           be
           dealing
           ;
           so
           as
           they
           can
           get
           benefit
           ,
           they
           do
           not
           consider
           the
           future
           danger
           by
           its
           means
           ,
           provided
           it
           miss
           them
           at
           the
           present
           .
        
         
         
           I
           asked
           them
           how
           far
           it
           was
           to
           Baldavia
           ?
           they
           answered
           me
           ,
           three
           Leagues
           ,
           and
           that
           the
           Boats
           could
           go
           up
           to
           it
           ,
           and
           that
           it
           was
           situated
           by
           the
           side
           of
           the
           River
           and
           the
           Plains
           ,
           and
           that
           there
           were
           five
           great
           Ordnances
           in
           a
           Fort
           to
           command
           the
           City
           ,
           and
           that
           there
           were
           one
           thousand
           Inhabitants
           in
           the
           City
           of
           all
           sorts
           of
           Men
           ,
           Women
           and
           Children
           .
           I
           asked
           him
           ,
           if
           there
           were
           any
           passage
           by
           Land
           from
           Baldavia
           to
           the
           other
           parts
           of
           Chile
           ?
           they
           said
           there
           was
           ,
           and
           they
           sent
           every
           Week
           ,
           but
           they
           went
           with
           good
           Guards
           to
           go
           secure
           from
           the
           Indians
           .
           Then
           I
           asked
           them
           if
           they
           built
           Shipping
           here
           ?
           they
           said
           no
           ,
           but
           at
           Velperrazeo
           they
           did
           build
           great
           Ships
           .
           I
           asked
           them
           who
           lived
           in
           the
           Island
           of
           Mocha
           ?
           they
           said
           Indians
           ,
           many
           Men
           and
           Women
           ,
           and
           that
           they
           were
           
             Poco
             amigo
             '
          
           s
           to
           them
           ;
           in
           English
           ,
           they
           were
           but
           small
           Friends
           to
           the
           Spaniards
           .
           There
           are
           many
           Sheep
           ,
           Goats
           ,
           Hogs
           and
           Hens
           ,
           which
           the
           Indians
           will
           sell
           for
           Hatchets
           ,
           Knives
           and
           Beads
           .
           As
           to
           the
           Island
           of
           St.
           Mary
           ,
           the
           Spaniards
           are
           Masters
           of
           it
           ,
           and
           have
           a
           Fort
           on
           it
           with
           five
           Guns
           ,
           but
           few
           Spaniards
           live
           there
           :
           it
           is
           plentiful
           of
           Provisions
           ,
           as
           Hogs
           ,
           and
           Sheep
           ,
           and
           Corn
           ,
           and
           Potatoes
           :
           and
           they
           said
           there
           is
           some
           Gold
           ,
           that
           the
           Indians
           have
           on
           the
           Island
           of
           Mocha
           ,
           but
           they
           will
           not
           part
           from
           it
           .
           The
           Spaniards
           did
           not
           care
           for
           answering
           me
           to
           such
           things
           as
           I
           would
           gladly
           have
           heard
           of
           these
           parts
           ;
           for
           I
           laid
           the
           Draught
           of
           all
           that
           Coast
           on
           the
           Table
           before
           them
           ,
           and
           asked
           them
           who
           lived
           at
           this
           Port
           ,
           and
           who
           lived
           at
           that
           :
           at
           some
           places
           they
           would
           say
           ,
           the
           Spaniards
           lived
           there
           ,
           and
           at
           some
           the
           Indians
           .
           but
           
           they
           did
           not
           care
           to
           answer
           my
           desires
           ,
           but
           frame
           other
           Discourses
           to
           wave
           mine
           .
           I
           find
           that
           they
           are
           but
           little
           acquainted
           on
           the
           Coasts
           to
           the
           Southward
           of
           Baldavia
           ;
           they
           say
           they
           have
           Spaniards
           living
           on
           the
           Island
           of
           Castro
           ,
           and
           that
           much
           Corn
           grows
           there
           ,
           more
           especially
           European
           Wheat
           ;
           and
           that
           on
           the
           Main
           there
           are
           Spaniards
           living
           at
           a
           place
           called
           Orsono
           ,
           which
           is
           against
           Castro
           ,
           and
           that
           there
           they
           have
           Gold
           ,
           and
           there
           are
           many
           Indians
           I
           asked
           him
           if
           Shipping
           could
           go
           in
           between
           Castro
           and
           the
           Main
           ?
           they
           could
           not
           tell
           me
           ,
           or
           would
           not
           ;
           but
           they
           said
           some
           Ships
           went
           thither
           ,
           which
           come
           from
           Lima
           with
           Furniture
           for
           the
           People
           .
        
         
           The
           Anchoring
           at
           the
           Island
           of
           Mocha
           is
           on
           the
           North-north-east
           part
           of
           it
           ,
           in
           a
           sandy
           Bay
           in
           eight
           Fathom
           Water
           near
           the
           Shore
           ;
           a
           North-east
           Wind
           is
           the
           worst
           Wind
           for
           the
           Road
           :
           on
           the
           South-side
           of
           Mocha
           there
           lies
           a
           ledg
           of
           Rocks
           ,
           and
           some
           broken
           Rocks
           on
           that
           part
           of
           the
           Island
           ,
           scattered
           from
           the
           Shore
           .
        
         
           The
           Anchoring
           at
           the
           Island
           of
           St.
           Mary
           is
           on
           the
           North-side
           in
           a
           fine
           sandy
           Bay
           ,
           in
           eight
           or
           nine
           Fathom
           Water
           ,
           a
           fine
           Birth
           from
           the
           Shore
           ;
           the
           North-north-west
           Wind
           is
           the
           worst
           Wind
           for
           that
           Road.
           There
           is
           Wood
           and
           fresh
           Water
           on
           both
           the
           Islands
           ,
           as
           the
           Spaniards
           report
           .
           The
           Tides
           are
           but
           mean
           on
           the
           Coast
           ,
           and
           the
           Flood
           comes
           from
           the
           Southward
           ,
           and
           rise
           about
           eight
           or
           nine
           feet
           Water
           .
        
         
           The
           Island
           of
           Mocha
           lies
           in
           the
           Lat.
           of
           38
           d.
           30
           m.
           South
           .
        
         
           The
           Island
           of
           St.
           Mary
           lies
           in
           the
           Lat.
           of
           37
           d.
           14
           m.
           South
           ,
           
           They
           have
           Apples
           ,
           and
           Plums
           ,
           and
           Pears
           and
           Olives
           ,
           Apricocks
           ,
           Peaches
           ,
           Quinces
           ,
           Oranges
           ,
           Lemmons
           ,
           and
           many
           other
           Fruits
           :
           There
           are
           also
           Musk-Melons
           ,
           and
           water-Melons
           ,
           &c.
           
           These
           Spaniards
           report
           it
           to
           be
           the
           finest
           Country
           in
           the
           whole
           World
           ,
           and
           that
           the
           people
           live
           with
           the
           greatest
           Luxury
           of
           any
           on
           the
           Earth
           ;
           they
           enjoy
           their
           Health
           with
           so
           much
           delight
           ,
           and
           have
           so
           much
           Wealth
           and
           Felicity
           ,
           that
           they
           compare
           the
           Land
           to
           Paradise
           ,
           abounding
           above
           other
           Countries
           with
           all
           Delights
           for
           Mankind
           .
        
         
           I
           saw
           a
           good
           Testimony
           of
           the
           healthiness
           of
           the
           Country
           ;
           for
           these
           four
           Men
           who
           are
           on
           Board
           ,
           are
           as
           well-complexioned
           Men
           as
           ever
           I
           saw
           in
           my
           days
           ;
           and
           the
           People
           a-shore
           ,
           both
           Men
           and
           Women
           of
           the
           Spaniards
           are
           well-complexioned
           People
           ,
           of
           a
           ruddy
           colour
           ,
           and
           seem
           to
           be
           mighty
           healthy
           .
           Some
           of
           the
           Men
           are
           very
           corpulent
           ,
           and
           look
           as
           if
           they
           came
           from
           a
           very
           plentiful
           Country
           ,
           where
           there
           is
           great
           store
           of
           Provisions
           ,
           and
           abundance
           of
           Gold
           and
           Silver
           .
        
         
           December
           17.
           1670.
           
           There
           went
           a-shore
           in
           the
           Boat
           eighteen
           of
           my
           best
           Men
           I
           had
           in
           the
           Ship
           ,
           and
           Men
           of
           good
           Observation
           to
           inspe●
           into
           matters
           of
           this
           Concern
           ,
           which
           I
           had
           acquainted
           them
           with
           ;
           as
           touching
           the
           manner
           of
           the
           Harbour
           ,
           and
           the
           Fortifications
           the
           Spaniards
           have
           ,
           and
           the
           disposition
           of
           the
           People
           ;
           and
           that
           it
           was
           my
           whole
           desire
           to
           have
           Conference
           with
           the
           Natives
           of
           the
           Country
           that
           are
           at
           Wars
           with
           the
           Spaniards
           ,
           if
           by
           any
           mens
           possible
           it
           may
           be
           obtained
           ;
           for
           it
           is
           my
           whole
           desire
        
         
         
           to
           lay
           the
           Foundation
           of
           a
           Trade
           there
           for
           the
           English
           Nation
           for
           the
           future
           ;
           for
           I
           see
           plainly
           this
           Country
           is
           lost
           for
           want
           of
           the
           true
           knowledg
           of
           it
        
         
           My
           Men
           in
           the
           Boat
           observed
           the
           Harbour
           and
           the
           Fortifications
           ,
           and
           took
           good
           notice
           of
           the
           people
           .
           The
           Spaniards
           bought
           several
           things
           of
           my
           Boats
           Crew
           :
           and
           paid
           for
           what
           things
           they
           bought
           in
           good
           Pillar
           pieces
           of
           Eight
           ;
           they
           would
           not
           part
           from
           any
           Gold
           ,
           although
           my
           Men
           were
           desirous
           to
           have
           some
           rather
           than
           Silver
           for
           their
           Goods
           :
           neither
           would
           they
           part
           from
           any
           Bread
           in
           payment
           ,
           pretending
           that
           they
           should
           have
           Bread
           to
           morrow
           from
           Baldavia
           .
           The
           things
           which
           they
           bought
           of
           my
           Men
           at
           this
           time
           ,
           were
           two
           Fowling-pieces
           ,
           which
           cost
           in
           England
           about
           twenty
           shillings
           a
           piece
           ,
           and
           the
           Spaniards
           gave
           sixteen
           pieces
           of
           Eight
           apiece
           for
           them
           ;
           and
           Cases
           of
           Knives
           of
           three
           shillings
           the
           piece
           in
           England
           ,
           the
           Spaniards
           gave
           five
           pieces
           of
           Eight
           for
           them
           :
           and
           for
           single
           ten-penny
           Wires
           ,
           they
           gave
           a
           piece
           of
           Eight
           a
           piece
           for
           them
           ;
           and
           for
           ordinary
           Leather-gloves
           ,
           of
           ten
           pence
           the
           pair
           ,
           they
           gave
           a
           piece
           of
           Eight
           a
           pair
           ;
           for
           Broad-Cloath-Coats
           of
           the
           Seamens
           ,
           which
           cost
           sixteen
           shillings
           in
           England
           ,
           they
           gave
           nine
           pieces
           of
           Eight
           for
           a
           Coat
           :
           They
           were
           very
           desirous
           to
           buy
           Cloaks
           ,
           and
           pieces
           of
           Bays-cloath
           .
           The
           Men
           were
           very
           gallant
           in
           Apparel
           in
           their
           Plush-coats
           ,
           and
           under-Garments
           of
           Silk
           and
           Silver
           wrought
           together
           ,
           and
           good
           Linnen
           ,
           and
           good
           Flanders
           Laces
           ,
           and
           broad
           about
           the
           Crown
           of
           of
           their
           Hats
           ,
           in
           fashion
           of
           an
           Hat-band
           ,
           and
           a
           great
           Silk-scarf
           with
           Gold
           Lace
           on
           the
           ends
           of
           
           it
           ,
           that
           was
           cross
           over
           their
           Shoulders
           :
           a
           short
           Cravat
           of
           Linnen
           about
           their
           Necks
           ,
           and
           a
           Cane
           in
           their
           Hand
           headed
           with
           Silver
           ;
           their
           Choes
           ,
           and
           Stockings
           ,
           and
           Breeches
           after
           the
           Spanish
           fashion
           .
           They
           were
           very
           kind
           to
           my
           Lieutenant
           and
           Men
           ,
           and
           treated
           them
           very
           courteously
           .
           They
           were
           not
           permitted
           to
           go
           into
           the
           Fort
           ,
           but
           were
           entertained
           in
           a
           Tent
           by
           the
           Fort.
           Four
           of
           the
           Spaniards
           Wives
           would
           needs
           go
           into
           the
           English
           Boat
           ,
           and
           sit
           down
           on
           the
           Benches
           ,
           to
           say
           that
           they
           had
           been
           in
           a
           Boat
           which
           came
           from
           Europe
           .
           These
           were
           very
           proper
           white
           Women
           born
           in
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           Peru
           of
           Spanish
           Parents
           :
           they
           never
           had
           been
           in
           Europe
           .
           The
           Spaniards
           have
           some
           Indian
           Women
           to
           their
           Wives
           :
           the
           Women
           were
           all
           well
           Apparelled
           in
           Silks
           afrer
           the
           Spanish
           fashion
           ,
           and
           about
           their
           Necks
           great
           Gold
           Chains
           ,
           and
           Pendants
           at
           their
           Ears
           of
           Saphir
           Stones
           ,
           &c.
           
        
         
           The
           Captain
           of
           St.
           
             Jago's
             Fort
          
           presented
           my
           Lieutenant
           with
           a
           Silver
           Tobacco-box
           ,
           and
           a
           Silver-headed
           Cane
           ,
           and
           a
           Plume
           of
           Ostriches
           Feathers
           ,
           which
           he
           wore
           on
           his
           Hat
           at
           the
           same
           time
           :
           the
           Feather
           of
           the
           Plume
           is
           but
           small
           ,
           nothing
           so
           good
           as
           the
           
           Barbary-Feather
           :
           this
           Plume
           was
           of
           red
           ,
           and
           white
           ,
           and
           blew
           Feathers
           died
           in
           the
           Country
           .
           I
           saw
           another
           Plume
           which
           a
           Spanish
           Gentleman
           gave
           to
           Mr.
           Wood
           ,
           which
           was
           black
           and
           large
           ,
           and
           a
           very
           fair
           one
           ,
           made
           of
           the
           Ostriches
           Feather
           of
           the
           Country
           .
           There
           are
           many
           Ostriches
           in
           the
           plain
           Lands
           ,
           and
           Guianacots
           ,
           which
           are
           the
           Beasts
           that
           bear
           the
           red
           woou
           whereof
           Hats
           are
           made
           in
           England
           .
           There
           is
           much
           
           of
           this
           Wooll
           in
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           Peru
           and
           Chile
           .
        
         
           My
           People
           could
           not
           by
           any
           means
           come
           to
           Converse
           with
           the
           Natives
           who
           are
           at
           Wars
           with
           the
           Spaniards
           ,
           and
           have
           the
           Gold
           ,
           without
           violating
           the
           
           Spaniard's
           Power
           :
           for
           on
           the
           Shore
           within
           the
           Harbour
           ,
           the
           Indians
           made
           a
           Fire
           by
           the
           Woods
           side
           ,
           and
           hung
           out
           a
           white
           Flag
           on
           a
           long
           Pole
           ,
           and
           kept
           wafting
           of
           it
           a
           long
           time
           .
           My
           Lieutenant
           would
           have
           gone
           in
           his
           Boat
           to
           them
           ,
           but
           the
           Spaniards
           would
           not
           permit
           him
           ,
           and
           said
           that
           they
           were
           their
           own
           People
           who
           lived
           there
           .
        
         
           My
           Seamen
           which
           came
           aboard
           in
           my
           Boat
           ,
           came
           to
           me
           ,
           and
           told
           me
           ,
           that
           the
           Lieutenant
           had
           been
           at
           Fort
           St.
           Jago
           ,
           and
           had
           deliver'd
           my
           Message
           there
           to
           the
           Captain
           ,
           but
           he
           had
           no
           Order
           for
           my
           fetching
           of
           Water
           ,
           and
           that
           he
           wished
           my
           Lieutenant
           to
           go
           to
           Fort
           St.
           Peter
           ;
           which
           he
           did
           ,
           and
           a
           Frier
           and
           two
           Spaniards
           went
           over
           with
           him
           in
           the
           Boat
           ,
           the
           Flag
           of
           Truce
           flying
           in
           the
           Boat
           ,
           and
           the
           Trumpeter
           sounding
           ,
           according
           to
           my
           Order
           ,
           all
           the
           time
           till
           they
           landed
           at
           the
           Fort.
           At
           their
           Landing
           ,
           the
           Lieutenant
           was
           received
           very
           courteously
           by
           several
           Spanish
           Gentlemen
           ,
           and
           desired
           to
           walk
           up
           to
           the
           Governour
           ;
           which
           my
           Lieeutenant
           did
           to
           a
           Tent
           where
           the
           Governour
           was
           ;
           the
           Governour
           received
           the
           Lieutenant
           very
           kindly
           ,
           and
           desired
           him
           to
           sit
           down
           .
           My
           Lieutenant
           presented
           my
           respects
           to
           the
           Governour
           ,
           and
           delivered
           to
           him
           the
           Cheese
           and
           Butter
           ,
           togerher
           with
           the
           Spice
           ,
           Glasses
           and
           Tobacco-pipes
           ,
           which
           I
           sent
           to
           him
           ,
           and
           acquainted
           him
           ,
           that
           I
           sent
           him
           to
           desire
           to
           know
           if
           he
           would
           be
           pleased
           to
           permit
           my
           Boat
           to
           Water
           
           to
           day
           ,
           for
           my
           Boats
           lay
           ready
           ,
           and
           had
           the
           Cask
           in
           them
           ,
           and
           I
           waited
           his
           Answer
           .
           The
           Governour
           caused
           my
           Lieutenant
           and
           Mr.
           Fortescue
           to
           sit
           down
           ,
           and
           drank
           to
           them
           in
           a
           Silver
           Bowl
           with
           Chile
           Wine
           ?
           He
           gave
           no
           Answer
           to
           the
           Lieutenant
           at
           present
           ,
           but
           sent
           an
           Officer
           and
           Soldiers
           and
           seized
           on
           my
           Boat
           ;
           My
           Lieutenant
           desired
           to
           know
           what
           the
           meaning
           was
           that
           possession
           was
           taken
           of
           the
           Boat
           ?
           The
           Governour
           answered
           ,
           he
           had
           Order
           from
           
             Don
             Pedro
             de
             Montaies
          
           ,
           Captain
           General
           of
           Chile
           ,
           to
           keep
           them
           till
           the
           Ship
           was
           brought
           into
           the
           Harbour
           under
           the
           command
           of
           the
           Castle
           ,
           and
           he
           was
           sorry
           he
           had
           no
           more
           Officers
           of
           the
           Ships
           in
           possestsion
           .
        
         
           
           
             
               
                 
                   Vera
                   Copia
                   .
                
                 
                   A
                   LETTER
                   from
                   Lieutenant
                   Armiger
                   to
                   Captain
                   Narbrough
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Sir
                     ,
                  
                
                 
                   MY self
                   and
                   Mr.
                   Fortescue
                   are
                   kept
                   here
                   as
                   Prisoners
                   ,
                   but
                   for
                   what
                   cause
                   I
                   cannot
                   tell
                   ;
                   but
                   they
                   still
                   pretend
                   much
                   Friendship
                   ,
                   and
                   say
                   ,
                   that
                   if
                   you
                   will
                   bring
                   the
                   Ship
                   into
                   the
                   Harbour
                   ,
                   you
                   shall
                   have
                   all
                   the
                   Accommodation
                   that
                   may
                   be
                   ,
                   Sir
                   ,
                   I
                   need
                   not
                   advise
                   you
                   further
                   ,
                
                 
                   
                     I
                     am
                     ,
                     
                       
                         Thomas
                         Armiger
                         .
                      
                       
                         John
                         Fortescue
                         .
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       December
                       18.
                       1670.
                       
                    
                  
                
              
            
          
        
         
           I
           examined
           my
           Seamen
           which
           came
           in
           my
           Boat
           from
           the
           Lieutenant
           ,
           and
           they
           related
           to
           me
           the
           whole
           matter
           ,
           and
           they
           believed
           that
           the
           Spaniards
           had
           a
           design
           to
           betray
           the
           Ship
           ,
           but
           they
           could
           not
           agree
           among
           themselves
           :
           I
           talked
           with
           the
           two
           Indians
           that
           came
           aboard
           ,
           they
           could
           speak
           the
           Spanish
           Tongue
           indifferently
           well
           ;
           they
           told
           me
           that
           I
           was
           a
           Friend
           to
           the
           Indians
           of
           the
           Mountains
           ,
           and
           that
           I
           was
           not
           a
           Spaniard
           :
           they
           
           would
           needs
           know
           of
           me
           where
           my
           Country
           is
           ,
           and
           if
           I
           would
           come
           again
           ;
           I
           made
           them
           answer
           ,
           that
           my
           Country
           is
           a
           little
           way
           off
           ,
           on
           the
           other
           side
           of
           the
           Sea
           ,
           and
           that
           I
           would
           come
           again
           ,
           and
           bring
           Knives
           ,
           Hatchets
           ,
           Beads
           ,
           Glasses
           ,
           &c.
           and
           live
           in
           the
           Country
           with
           them
           ,
           and
           that
           they
           should
           see
           my
           Country
           ;
           and
           that
           my
           King
           would
           give
           them
           many
           things
           ,
           and
           they
           should
           live
           with
           us
           ;
           and
           that
           my
           King
           is
           the
           greatest
           King
           in
           the
           World
           ,
           and
           Commands
           all
           other
           Kings
           ,
           and
           that
           our
           Names
           are
           English
           ;
           the
           Indians
           laughed
           and
           seemed
           to
           be
           very
           glad
           :
           I
           bad
           them
           acquaint
           the
           Indians
           of
           the
           Mountains
           ,
           or
           In-lands
           ,
           that
           I
           came
           to
           speak
           with
           them
           ,
           and
           that
           I
           was
           their
           Friend
           ,
           and
           would
           give
           them
           many
           Hatchets
           ,
           and
           Knives
           ,
           and
           Swords
           ,
           &c.
           if
           they
           would
           come
           to
           me
           ,
           and
           that
           I
           came
           purposely
           to
           speak
           with
           them
           ;
           and
           that
           my
           Master
           the
           
             Great
             King
          
           of
           England
           ,
           hath
           sent
           them
           many
           things
           ,
           and
           would
           willingly
           see
           them
           .
        
         
           After
           these
           People
           had
           heard
           all
           that
           I
           said
           to
           them
           ,
           they
           sat
           for
           a
           time
           mute
           ,
           and
           considering
           of
           the
           Kindnesses
           they
           received
           from
           me
           and
           my
           Company
           ,
           and
           that
           they
           must
           go
           a-shore
           again
           under
           the
           Command
           of
           the
           cruel
           Spaniards
           ,
           they
           weeped
           extreamly
           ,
           and
           uttered
           these
           words
           ,
           
             Numbra
             Spanalos
             muccho
             Deablo
          
           ,
           &c.
           
           In
           English
           it
           is
           ,
           The
           Spanish
           
             men
             are
             much
             Devils
          
           ,
           &c.
           
           I
           verily
           believe
           that
           these
           poor
           innocent
           Creatures
           speak
           truth
           ,
           for
           they
           are
           great
           Devils
           in
           abusing
           these
           poor
           Souls
           so
           unmercifully
           as
           they
           do
           .
           In
           sight
           of
           my
           Men
           the
           Spaniards
           with
           a
           great
           Staff
           would
           strike
           an
           Indian
           on
           the
           Head
           as
           he
           talked
           with
           
           him
           ,
           and
           beat
           him
           all
           along
           ,
           for
           no
           cause
           at
           all
           ;
           but
           this
           they
           do
           to
           shew
           their
           Greatness
           and
           Imperiousness
           .
           The
           best
           Name
           the
           Spaniards
           can
           afford
           to
           call
           an
           Indian
           by
           ,
           is
           Dog
           ,
           and
           Devil
           ,
           and
           such
           like
           Names
           .
        
         
           These
           Indians
           say
           ,
           that
           there
           is
           much
           Gold
           in
           the
           Land
           ,
           and
           that
           the
           Spaniards
           have
           much
           Oro
           ;
           I
           gave
           to
           each
           of
           these
           Indians
           a
           Knife
           ,
           and
           a
           small
           Looking-glass
           ,
           and
           some
           Beads
           :
           they
           were
           very
           thankful
           ,
           and
           I
           put
           them
           in
           mind
           again
           to
           speak
           to
           the
           Indians
           of
           the
           In-land
           ,
           that
           I
           would
           give
           them
           Knives
           and
           Glasses
           if
           they
           would
           come
           to
           me
           .
           I
           was
           in
           great
           hopes
           all
           this
           time
           ,
           that
           I
           should
           have
           the
           opportunity
           to
           speak
           with
           my
           Golden
           Friends
           ,
           by
           the
           means
           of
           these
           People
           ;
           for
           they
           seemed
           to
           be
           glad
           of
           the
           Message
           ,
           or
           of
           the
           things
           which
           I
           gave
           them
           to
           do
           it
           .
        
         
           These
           People
           are
           of
           a
           middle
           stature
           ,
           strongly
           set
           and
           well-fleshed
           ;
           they
           are
           tawny
           coloured
           ,
           and
           have
           long
           black
           flaggy
           Hair
           ;
           their
           Features
           tolerable
           ,
           of
           a
           somewhat
           melancholy
           Countenance
           ;
           they
           are
           very
           active
           in
           Body
           ,
           and
           hardy
           in
           enduring
           of
           Weather
           or
           Diet
           :
           They
           wear
           small
           Caps
           on
           their
           Heads
           like
           to
           Mounteers
           ,
           and
           their
           Garment
           is
           a
           long
           Mantle
           ;
           but
           most
           of
           their
           Garments
           are
           a
           square
           piece
           of
           Wollen
           Cloth
           like
           a
           Carpet
           ,
           of
           their
           own
           weaving
           of
           the
           Wool
           of
           Guianacoes
           :
           they
           cut
           an
           hole
           in
           the
           middle
           of
           this
           Carpet
           through
           which
           they
           put
           their
           Head
           ,
           and
           it
           hangs
           upon
           their
           Shoulders
           ,
           and
           covers
           their
           whole
           Bodies
           like
           a
           Cloak
           ,
           when
           it
           is
           buttoned
           down
           before
           .
           Some
           have
           these
           Cloaks
           so
           long
           as
           it
           reacheth
           down
           to
           their
           
           middle
           Leg
           ,
           and
           some
           to
           the
           Knee
           ;
           some
           wear
           half-Stockings
           on
           their
           Legs
           ,
           but
           no
           Shoes
           nor
           Shirts
           :
           some
           have
           Breeches
           after
           the
           Spanish
           Fashion
           ,
           but
           close
           to
           their
           Thighs
           and
           Knees
           .
        
         
           
             
               
                 
                   A
                   NOTE
                   which
                   I
                   sent
                   to
                   Lieutenant
                   Armiger
                   ,
                   enclosed
                   in
                   a
                   Letter
                   .
                
                 
                   LIeutenant
                   ,
                   take
                   what
                   notice
                   you
                   can
                   of
                   the
                   Fortificatin
                   of
                   the
                   Fort
                   ,
                   and
                   what
                   strength
                   they
                   have
                   of
                   People
                   in
                   it
                   ,
                   and
                   whether
                   they
                   are
                   able
                   to
                   withstand
                   a
                   Ship
                   ;
                   and
                   what
                   quantity
                   of
                   Provisions
                   they
                   have
                   in
                   it
                   ;
                   and
                   whether
                   
                     Don
                     Carlos
                  
                   be
                   there
                   ;
                   send
                   me
                   an
                   Account
                   thereof
                   by
                   
                     John
                     Wilkins
                  
                   ;
                   I
                   will
                   use
                   all
                   endeavours
                   to
                   have
                   you
                   off
                   ,
                   when
                   I
                   understand
                   the
                   strength
                   of
                   the
                   place
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     I
                     remain
                     your
                     loving
                     Friend
                     ,
                     John
                     Narbrough
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Burn
                     all
                     the
                     Letters
                     you
                     receive
                     from
                     me
                     ,
                     and
                     in
                     case
                     of
                     Examination
                     —
                  
                
              
            
          
        
         
         
           December
           18.
           1670.
           
           This
           Evening
           I
           took
           the
           Suns
           Amplitude
           with
           my
           Compass
           ,
           and
           I
           had
           a
           good
           Observation
           .
           I
           find
           the
           variation
           of
           the
           Compass
           to
           be
           eight
           Degrees
           ten
           Minutes
           Easterly
           .
        
         
           I
           do
           much
           reason
           with
           my self
           as
           to
           the
           Variation
           ,
           that
           it
           differs
           so
           much
           in
           the
           same
           Latitude
           ,
           between
           the
           East
           and
           West-side
           of
           the
           Land
           of
           America
           ;
           for
           on
           the
           East-side
           as
           I
           sailed
           in
           the
           Latitude
           of
           forty
           Degrees
           ,
           I
           found
           the
           Compass
           to
           have
           twenty
           Degrees
           variation
           Easterly
           ,
           by
           several
           good
           Observations
           ,
           which
           I
           took
           with
           the
           same
           Instrument
           as
           I
           now
           do
           use
           ,
           which
           is
           a
           large
           Azimuth
           Compass
           ;
           and
           here
           I
           find
           but
           eight
           Degrees
           and
           ten
           Minutes
           variation
           ;
           and
           it
           is
           but
           eight
           Degrees
           of
           Longitude
           more
           Westerly
           in
           the
           same
           Parallel
           ,
           differing
           between
           these
           Observations
           ,
           and
           the
           difference
           of
           Variation
           .
        
         
           I
           find
           the
           Land
           to
           be
           but
           one
           hundred
           and
           twenty
           five
           Leagues
           broad
           ,
           from
           the
           East-side
           to
           the
           West-side
           ,
           in
           the
           Latitude
           of
           forty
           Degrees
           South
           of
           the
           Equinoctial
           ;
           certainly
           the
           attractive
           quality
           of
           the
           Magnet
           ,
           must
           be
           very
           powerful
           in
           the
           Eastern
           part
           of
           the
           Land
           ,
           more
           than
           in
           the
           Western
           ,
           which
           causeth
           the
           difference
           :
           yet
           I
           admire
           ,
           being
           on
           both
           sides
           of
           the
           Land
           ,
           the
           Compass
           should
           always
           have
           the
           same
           variation
           Easterly
           .
           I
           was
           of
           the
           Opinion
           that
           the
           variation
           would
           have
           been
           Westerly
           on
           the
           West-side
           ,
           it
           being
           Easterly
           on
           the
           East-side
           :
           but
           I
           find
           the
           contrary
           by
           experience
           ;
           therefore
           I
           believe
           that
           the
           attractive
           quality
           is
           not
           much
           in
           this
           part
           of
           America
           ,
           but
           in
           some
           other
           part
           more
           
           to
           the
           Eastward
           than
           I
           was
           ;
           for
           if
           the
           attractive
           quality
           had
           been
           in
           this
           Land
           ,
           and
           I
           sailing
           on
           both
           sides
           of
           it
           ,
           the
           variation
           must
           have
           been
           Easterly
           on
           the
           one
           side
           ,
           and
           Westerly
           on
           the
           other
           .
           This
           Discourse
           I
           leave
           to
           a
           better
           Understanding
           ;
           for
           I
           am
           not
           as
           yet
           satisfied
           what
           occasioneth
           the
           variation
           and
           the
           great
           difference
           of
           it
           ,
           although
           I
           have
           been
           on
           several
           Voyages
           ,
           and
           have
           made
           great
           benefit
           of
           the
           Understanding
           of
           the
           variation
           of
           the
           Compass
           ,
           in
           directing
           of
           the
           true
           Course
           ,
           &c.
           
        
         
           In
           the
           Port
           of
           Baldavia
           there
           are
           three
           fair
           Rivers
           ,
           which
           come
           out
           of
           the
           Country
           ,
           and
           empty
           themselves
           into
           the
           Port
           with
           a
           brisk
           stream
           of
           fresh
           Water
           ,
           which
           causeth
           the
           stream
           always
           to
           set
           out
           of
           the
           Harbour
           ,
           and
           the
           Waters
           to
           be
           fresh
           just
           within
           the
           Harbours-mouth
           :
           one
           River
           runs
           up
           into
           the
           South-east
           part
           of
           the
           Harbour
           into
           the
           Country
           ;
           another
           River
           runs
           into
           the
           Country
           to
           the
           Eastward
           ,
           on
           the
           back-side
           of
           St.
           
           Peter's
           Fort
           :
           the
           third
           River
           runs
           into
           the
           Country
           ,
           about
           the
           North-point
           of
           the
           Harbours-mouth
           ,
           between
           the
           point
           and
           the
           North-end
           of
           St.
           
           Peter's
           Island
           :
           it
           runs
           up
           in
           the
           North-Eastward
           ,
           and
           nine
           or
           ten
           Mills
           stand
           upon
           the
           River
           from
           the
           Harbours-mouth
           .
           The
           City
           of
           Baldavia
           is
           situated
           on
           the
           Bank
           of
           the
           River
           ,
           as
           the
           Spaniards
           tell
           me
           .
        
         
           I
           judge
           this
           City
           of
           Baldavia
           is
           but
           a
           small
           place
           ,
           and
           kept
           only
           as
           a
           Garrison
           ,
           and
           a
           place
           for
           Trade
           with
           the
           Indians
           for
           Gold
           ,
           Bezoar-stones
           ,
           Guianacoes-Wooll
           ,
           &c.
           
           The
           Spaniards
           that
           were
           aboard
           ,
           and
           the
           Indians
           said
           ,
           that
           there
           
           were
           but
           five
           great
           Guns
           in
           it
           ,
           and
           three
           hundred
           Men.
           I
           know
           that
           they
           speak
           of
           the
           most
           of
           every
           thing
           in
           the
           matters
           as
           concerning
           their
           strength
           and
           number
           of
           Men.
           
        
         
           I
           believe
           that
           these
           Rivers
           may
           run
           into
           the
           Country
           a
           long
           way
           ,
           and
           the
           Spaniards
           to
           have
           but
           little
           knowledge
           in
           the
           inward
           parts
           of
           this
           Country
           :
           for
           the
           Indians
           will
           not
           suffer
           the
           Spaniards
           to
           search
           into
           the
           In-lands
           .
           I
           believe
           also
           that
           these
           Rivers
           are
           not
           Navigable
           for
           Shipping
           ;
           for
           the
           Bark
           which
           was
           there
           would
           certainly
           have
           gone
           up
           the
           River
           to
           the
           city
           of
           Baldavia
           ,
           and
           delivered
           her
           Goods
           there
           ,
           and
           not
           troubled
           themselves
           to
           carry
           the
           goods
           up
           in
           Boats
           ,
           and
           small
           flat-bottomed
           Barges
           ,
           which
           they
           have
           there
           for
           the
           purpose
           :
           The
           Barges
           are
           built
           much
           like
           our
           West-Country
           Barges
           ,
           and
           smaller
           by
           much
           .
           These
           Boats
           or
           Barges
           will
           carry
           about
           ten
           or
           twelve
           Tuns
           :
           they
           steer
           with
           a
           Rudder
           ,
           and
           have
           one
           Mast
           and
           Sail
           ,
           as
           our
           Barges
           have
           ;
           the
           Sail
           is
           made
           of
           Cotton-cloth
           ,
           and
           the
           Ropes
           are
           made
           of
           the
           rind
           of
           
             Mangrove
             Trees
          
           ;
           and
           instead
           of
           Anchors
           ,
           they
           have
           wooden
           Crab-claws
           or
           Kellocks
           .
           Anchors
           of
           Iron
           and
           Grapnels
           are
           scarce
           in
           these
           Countries
           :
           Ropes
           and
           Cables
           of
           Hemp
           are
           also
           scarce
           there
           ,
           and
           good
           Fir-masts
           much
           wanted
           in
           all
           these
           Countries
           for
           their
           Ships
           .
           The
           Masts
           for
           their
           Ships
           are
           made
           of
           white
           Cedar
           ,
           and
           such
           like
           Wood
           ;
           they
           are
           very
           heavy
           and
           short-grained
           ,
           and
           will
           break
           short
           .
           There
           are
           not
           any
           Fir-trees
           growing
           in
           all
           the
           Land
           :
           Good
           Workmen
           for
           the
           building
           of
           Ships
           are
           also
           much
           wanted
           here
           ,
           and
           Seamen
           .
        
         
         
           The
           smaller
           Boats
           which
           they
           have
           here
           are
           Canoas
           ,
           being
           cut
           out
           of
           the
           Body
           of
           a
           large
           Tree
           ,
           and
           shaped
           somewhat
           like
           a
           Shallop
           at
           the
           ends
           :
           some
           are
           thirty
           feet
           long
           ,
           and
           built
           one
           strake
           of
           Board
           upon
           them
           ,
           to
           raise
           them
           higher
           on
           their
           sides
           ;
           they
           will
           carry
           near
           twenty
           Men
           a
           piece
           :
           some
           are
           rowed
           with
           Oars
           ,
           and
           some
           are
           less
           ,
           and
           rowed
           with
           Paddles
           :
           those
           which
           are
           walt
           ,
           have
           a
           great
           Beam
           lashed
           fast
           along
           each
           side
           without
           Board
           ,
           which
           keeps
           them
           from
           over-setting
           .
           These
           Boats
           are
           very
           ill
           built
           ,
           for
           I
           saw
           not
           any
           one
           of
           them
           fit
           to
           row
           in
           any
           Sea-gate
           ,
           or
           for
           any
           Service
           ,
           or
           to
           carry
           any
           Person
           of
           Quality
           in
           .
           The
           Indians
           are
           the
           Spaniards
           Slaves
           to
           row
           them
           to
           and
           fro
           ,
           and
           to
           do
           all
           manner
           of
           labour
           ;
           for
           the
           Spaniards
           will
           not
           lay
           their
           Hands
           to
           any
           thing
           in
           that
           nature
           ,
           accounting
           it
           beneath
           them
           to
           foul
           their
           Fingers
           with
           Work
           ;
           for
           they
           scorn
           to
           be
           Servants
           one
           to
           another
           ,
           let
           the
           one
           be
           never
           so
           Potent
           ,
           and
           the
           other
           not
           worth
           the
           Rags
           which
           he
           weareth
           :
           yet
           he
           scorns
           to
           be
           a
           Servant
           to
           him
           ,
           and
           live
           in
           America
           .
        
         
           The
           Land
           about
           the
           Harbour
           of
           Baldavia
           is
           of
           a
           good
           height
           ,
           and
           in
           Land
           it
           riseth
           in
           large
           Hills
           :
           it
           is
           low
           by
           the
           Water-side
           ,
           and
           the
           Shore
           is
           sandy
           in
           some
           Bays
           ,
           and
           broken
           shatty
           bits
           of
           glittering
           Rocks
           lilke
           Gold
           ,
           lie
           shatter'd
           along
           by
           the
           Shore-side
           .
           All
           the
           whole
           Country
           is
           overgrown
           with
           green
           Woods
           ,
           as
           what
           I
           could
           see
           of
           it
           ,
           and
           by
           the
           Rivers
           sides
           :
           there
           is
           no
           travelling
           in
           the
           Woods
           ,
           they
           are
           so
           thick
           with
           Under-brush
           ,
           old
           rotten
           Trees
           ,
           and
           Leaves
           ,
           and
           such
           Trash
           .
        
         
         
           The
           Harbour
           is
           near
           a
           Mile
           and
           an
           half
           broad
           ,
           and
           the
           Guns
           cannot
           command
           from
           one
           side
           to
           the
           other
           :
           St.
           
           Peter's
           Fort
           is
           near
           two
           Miles
           from
           the
           Harbours
           mouth
           ;
           any
           Ship
           may
           come
           in
           and
           beat
           them
           from
           their
           Guns
           ,
           in
           St.
           Jago
           Fort
           ,
           and
           in
           St.
           
           Andrew's
           Sconce
           ,
           which
           are
           on
           the
           Southwest
           side
           of
           the
           Harbour
           .
           After
           you
           are
           in
           ,
           Saint
           
           Peter's
           Fort
           can
           do
           very
           little
           or
           no
           hurt
           at
           all
           to
           your
           Ship
           ,
           excepting
           it
           be
           accidental
           dropping
           shot
           .
           The
           Spaniards
           have
           no
           Plantation
           on
           this
           South-west
           side
           ,
           they
           only
           keep
           the
           Forts
           for
           possession
           ,
           that
           no
           forein
           Ship
           may
           come
           and
           have
           the
           Port
           free
           to
           ride
           in
           ,
           and
           Trade
           with
           the
           Natives
           .
           The
           Harbour
           is
           like
           a
           Sound
           ,
           after
           one
           is
           within
           the
           Mouth
           of
           it
           toward
           the
           South
           part
           .
        
         
           Here
           grow
           many
           good
           Canes
           on
           the
           Shore-side
           ,
           such
           as
           are
           brought
           from
           the
           East-Indies
           ,
           which
           are
           called
           Bamboas
           ;
           these
           are
           very
           stiff
           Sticks
           ,
           firm
           and
           heavy
           ;
           they
           grow
           among
           the
           Trees
           on
           the
           sides
           of
           the
           Woods
           like
           Vines
           ,
           and
           wind
           about
           the
           Trees
           :
           some
           are
           above
           twenty
           feet
           long
           ,
           and
           taper
           from
           the
           root
           to
           the
           top
           ,
           like
           an
           Angling-Rod
           .
        
         
           All
           Commodities
           which
           come
           from
           Europe
           are
           very
           dear
           here
           ,
           and
           scarce
           ,
           for
           they
           have
           none
           brought
           to
           them
           ,
           but
           by
           the
           way
           of
           Panama
           ,
           and
           by
           the
           River
           of
           Plata
           ,
           which
           pass
           through
           several
           Merchants
           hands
           before
           they
           come
           into
           these
           parts
           ,
           and
           the
           transporting
           of
           them
           from
           place
           to
           place
           ,
           is
           very
           chargeable
           .
           Many
           also
           are
           but
           of
           little
           esteem
           ,
           here
           being
           such
           plenty
           of
           them
           :
           French
           Hollands
           ,
           Silks
           ,
           Flanders
           -
           Laces
           ,
           Silk-stockings
           ,
           
           Ribbaning
           ,
           French
           Linnen
           ,
           Looking-glasses
           ,
           and
           such
           like
           Commodities
           were
           much
           enquired
           for
           here
           ,
           and
           would
           have
           sold
           at
           great
           Rates
           .
        
         
           Gun-powder
           for
           Fowling-pieces
           ,
           is
           worth
           a
           piece
           of
           Eight
           per
           pound
           :
           and
           Bird-shot
           is
           worth
           two
           Ryals
           of
           Plate
           a
           pound
           ,
           and
           a
           Ryal
           and
           an
           half
           a
           pound
           .
           All
           Commodities
           of
           European
           Workmanship
           are
           of
           great
           worth
           here
           ,
           as
           I
           understand
           ;
           and
           believe
           that
           more
           Northerly
           on
           the
           Coast
           of
           Chile
           about
           
             Vale
             Parazo
          
           ,
           and
           Coquinto
           ,
           and
           Areca
           ,
           where
           there
           are
           more
           Inhabitants
           ,
           Commodities
           would
           bear
           a
           much
           greater
           price
           than
           what
           I
           mention
           ,
           and
           there
           would
           vent
           greater
           quantities
           :
           for
           Silver
           is
           more
           plentiful
           by
           much
           in
           these
           parts
           than
           at
           Baldavia
           ,
           they
           being
           nearer
           the
           Mines
           of
           the
           Potosea
           ;
           for
           the
           Silver
           of
           Potosea
           comes
           down
           to
           the
           Port
           of
           Areca
           ,
           and
           from
           thence
           it
           is
           carried
           to
           Lima
           by
           Sea.
           
        
         
           I
           am
           of
           Opinion
           that
           the
           most
           advantageous
           Trade
           in
           the
           World
           ,
           might
           be
           made
           in
           these
           parts
           ,
           if
           it
           were
           but
           follow'd
           ,
           and
           that
           leave
           were
           granted
           by
           the
           King
           of
           Spain
           for
           the
           English
           to
           Trade
           freely
           in
           all
           their
           Ports
           and
           Coasts
           :
           for
           the
           People
           which
           inhabit
           there
           are
           very
           desirous
           of
           a
           Trade
           :
           but
           the
           Governours
           durst
           not
           permit
           it
           without
           Orders
           ,
           unless
           such
           Ships
           of
           force
           were
           to
           go
           thither
           and
           Trade
           per
           force
           ,
           and
           not
           take
           notice
           of
           the
           Governours
           ;
           which
           might
           be
           easily
           performed
           by
           four
           Ships
           of
           twenty
           and
           thirty
           pieces
           of
           Ordnance
           a
           Ship
           ;
           and
           I
           believe
           that
           the
           Natives
           in
           the
           Southern
           parts
           of
           Chile
           ,
           about
           
           Castro
           ,
           and
           Orsono
           ,
           and
           at
           Baldavia
           ,
           would
           be
           brought
           to
           a
           rich
           Trade
           of
           Gold
           ,
           when
           once
           they
           grew
           to
           be
           acquainted
           with
           those
           that
           should
           be
           employed
           on
           the
           design
           ,
           and
           they
           did
           but
           use
           them
           civilly
           at
           the
           first
           ,
           and
           gain
           their
           loves
           ;
           which
           may
           be
           easily
           done
           by
           giving
           them
           Knives
           ,
           Scissars
           ,
           Glasses
           ,
           Beads
           ,
           Combs
           ,
           Hatchets
           ,
           and
           the
           like
           Commodities
           ,
           and
           treat
           them
           kindly
           .
           For
           what
           I
           understand
           by
           the
           Indians
           ,
           who
           were
           aboard
           of
           me
           ,
           they
           are
           Masters
           of
           the
           Golden
           part
           of
           the
           Country
           .
        
         
           My
           intent
           being
           ,
           if
           Weather
           permit
           me
           ,
           to
           sail
           all
           along
           the
           Coast
           from
           Baldavia
           to
           the
           Southward
           ,
           till
           I
           come
           to
           the
           Streights-Mouth
           at
           
             Cape
             Desiade
          
           .
           I
           came
           in
           great
           hopes
           to
           meet
           with
           the
           Indians
           in
           some
           part
           of
           the
           Coasts
           ,
           and
           to
           Trade
           with
           them
           for
           Gold
           ,
           and
           to
           find
           good
           Harbours
           .
           I
           resolve
           also
           to
           see
           in
           at
           the
           Islands
           of
           Castro
           and
           Orsono
           ,
           and
           try
           what
           I
           can
           find
           among
           those
           Spaniards
           who
           are
           settled
           there
           ,
           and
           whether
           they
           live
           accordingly
           as
           the
           Spaniard
           informed
           me
           here
           .
        
         
           
             The
             Names
             of
             the
             four
             Men
             of
             my
             Company
             ,
             whom
             the
             Spaniards
             detained
             at
             Baldavia
             ,
             and
             whom
             I
             left
             there
             .
          
           
             
               Thomas
               Armiger
            
             Lieutenant
             ,
             aged
             forty
             Years
             ,
             and
             born
             in
             Norfolk
             .
          
           
             
               John
               Fortescue
            
             Gentleman
             ,
             aged
             twenty
             seven
             Years
             ,
             and
             born
             in
             Kent
             .
          
           
             
               Hugh
               Cooe
            
             Trumpeter
             ,
             aged
             twenty
             eight
             Years
             ,
             and
             born
             in
             Wappen
             .
          
           
             
             
               Thomas
               Highway
            
             Linguist
             ,
             aged
             thirty
             five
             Years
             ,
             and
             born
             in
             Barbary
             of
             Moorish
             Parents
             :
             He
             turned
             Christian
             and
             lived
             in
             London
             .
             This
             
               Thomas
               Highway
            
             is
             a
             Tawny-Moor
             ;
             he
             speaks
             the
             Spanish
             Tongue
             very
             clear
             ,
             for
             he
             had
             lived
             formerly
             at
             Cadiz
             with
             an
             English
             Merchant
             .
          
        
         
           All
           these
           four
           were
           very
           healthy
           sound
           Men
           ,
           and
           of
           good
           Presence
           and
           Spirit
           ;
           which
           gives
           me
           great
           hopes
           that
           they
           will
           live
           to
           give
           an
           Account
           of
           that
           Country
           ,
           and
           of
           their
           Travels
           .
        
         
           Cape-Gallery
           ,
           which
           is
           the
           outermost
           Point
           on
           the
           South-side
           of
           the
           Harbour
           of
           Baldavia
           ,
           lieth
           in
           the
           Latitude
           of
           thirty
           nine
           Degrees
           ,
           fifty
           seven
           Minutes
           ,
           South
           of
           Equinoctial
           ;
           as
           also
           in
           Longitude
           to
           the
           Westward
           of
           the
           Meridian
           of
           the
           Lizard
           of
           England
           ,
           seventy
           Degrees
           ,
           twenty
           Minutes
           ,
           according
           to
           my
           Account
           ;
           and
           in
           Meridian
           distance
           ,
           one
           thousand
           one
           hundred
           and
           eight
           Leagues
           West
           ;
           and
           in
           Longitude
           East
           from
           the
           West-mouth
           of
           Magellan
           Streights
           and
           Cape-Pillar
           ,
           two
           Degrees
           and
           forty
           Minutes
           ;
           and
           in
           Meridian
           distance
           42
           Leagues
           nearest
           ,
           according
           to
           my
           reckoning
           .
        
         
           Thursday
           December
           22.
           
           This
           Morning
           it
           prov'd
           very
           fair
           Weather
           ;
           at
           Day-light
           the
           Wind
           was
           at
           South-west
           ,
           a
           fresh
           gale
           ;
           the
           Sea
           indifferent
           smooth
           :
           I
           plied
           to
           the
           Windward
           along
           the
           Coasts
           ,
           and
           was
           about
           three
           Leagues
           off
           the
           Shore
           ,
           somewhat
           to
           the
           Southward
           of
           Cape-Gallery
           ,
           out
           of
           sight
           of
           the
           People
           of
           Baldavia
           ;
           for
           the
           Cape
           was
           shut
           in
           with
           the
           Land
           to
           the
           Northward
           of
           the
           Harbour
           .
           At
           twelve
           of
           the
           Clock
           I
           
           had
           a
           good
           Observation
           of
           the
           Sun
           with
           my
           Quadrant
           ;
           and
           I
           found
           my self
           in
           the
           Latitude
           of
           40
           degrees
           3
           minutes
           South
           :
           I
           was
           then
           three
           Leagues
           off
           the
           Shore
           ,
           and
           could
           not
           get
           ground
           at
           eighty
           Fathom
           .
           I
           was
           to
           the
           Southward
           of
           Baldivia
           Harbour
           .
        
         
           December
           31.
           
           This
           afternoon
           it
           blew
           hard
           at
           
             N.
             W.
          
           and
           rained
           ;
           I
           steered
           South-west
           and
           by
           South
           ,
           by
           my
           Compass
           ,
           this
           Afternoon
           and
           to
           Night
           .
           Here
           are
           several
           sorts
           of
           Porpus
           .
           Fishes
           in
           these
           Seas
           ,
           unlike
           ours
           in
           Europe
           :
           some
           pied
           white
           and
           black
           ,
           and
           some
           grey
           and
           large
           ones
           .
           Rainy
           Weather
           to
           Night
           ,
           and
           no
           Observation
           to
           be
           made
           of
           the
           Shore
           .
        
         
           
             January
             ,
             Anno.
             Dom.
          
           1670-71
           .
        
         
           Sunday
           January
           1.
           
           Raw
           ,
           cold
           ,
           cloudy
           Weather
           ;
           Rain
           and
           some
           Hail
           ,
           the
           Wind
           at
           
             N.
             W.
          
           a
           stout
           gale
           ,
           and
           a
           great
           Sea
           :
           I
           was
           much
           afraid
           that
           I
           should
           lose
           my
           Main-mast
           ,
           it
           fetched
           such
           way
           ,
           and
           broke
           the
           spikes
           that
           fastned
           the
           Fetches
           with
           working
           .
           I
           steered
           
             S.
             S.
             W.
          
           to
           ease
           the
           Ship
           from
           rolling
           what
           I
           could
           .
           After
           several
           Courses
           made
           from
           Saturday
           Noon
           till
           to
           day
           Noon
           ,
           I
           make
           the
           true
           Course
           to
           be
           South
           39
           d.
           00
           m.
           Westerly
           ,
           and
           distance
           ,
           sailed
           105
           Miles
           ,
           and
           departure
           West
           66
           Miles
           ,
           and
           difference
           of
           Longitude
           101
           d.
           37
           m.
           4
           tenths
           :
           difference
           of
           Latitude
           1
           d.
           22
           m.
           3
           tenths
           :
           Latitude
           by
           Account
           47
           d.
           47
           m.
           South
           .
        
         
           Wednesday
           January
           4.
           
           Indifferent
           fair
           Weather
           ,
           the
           Wind
           at
           North-west
           ,
           and
           sometimes
           at
           
             W.
             N.
             W.
          
           a
           fine
           gale
           :
           I
           kept
           on
           my
           Course
           South
           .
           Some
           Porpus
           Fishes
           seen
           to
           day
           ,
           and
           some
           Whales
           
           and
           Sea-Fowl
           :
           many
           little
           Peterels
           .
           This
           Morning
           I
           took
           the
           Suns
           Amplitude
           ,
           and
           I
           find
           the
           Compass
           to
           have
           10
           Degrees
           28
           Minutes
           variation
           Easterly
           ;
           My
           Course
           made
           true
           from
           Tuesday
           Noon
           till
           to
           day
           Noon
           ,
           is
           South
           ;
           distance
           sailed
           84
           Miles
           ,
           and
           the
           difference
           of
           Latitude
           is
           1
           d.
           24
           m.
           8
           tent
           .
           Lat.
           by
           good
           Observation
           of
           the
           Sun
           on
           the
           Meridian
           51
           d.
           31
           m.
           South
           :
           Meridian
           distance
           from
           Point-Gallery
           ,
           West
           70
           leag
           .
           1
           mil.
           5
           ten
           .
           Longitude
           at
           Noon
           from
           Point-Gallery
           ,
           West
           4
           d.
           48
           m.
           4
           ten
           .
           Longitude
           at
           Noon
           from
           the
           Lizard
           ,
           West
           75
           d.
           8
           m.
           4
           ten
           .
           Meridian
           distance
           from
           the
           Lizard
           ,
           West
           1178
           Leagues
           ,
           1
           Mile
           ,
           5
           Tenths
           .
        
         
           Friday
           January
           6.
           
           Hasey
           ,
           foggy
           Weather
           this
           Morning
           ,
           the
           Wind
           at
           
             W.
             S.
             W.
          
           a
           stout
           gale
           :
           I
           steered
           in
           for
           to
           make
           the
           four
           Islands
           ,
           which
           I
           called
           the
           
             Isles
             of
             Direction
          
           ,
           or
           to
           make
           
             Cape
             Desiade
          
           :
           My
           Course
           was
           
             E.
             N.
             E.
          
           by
           my
           Compass
           ,
           the
           Nights
           being
           but
           short
           ,
           and
           light
           ;
           for
           the
           Moon
           was
           at
           the
           full
           ,
           so
           that
           I
           could
           see
           at
           some
           time
           clear
           a
           League
           before
           us
           .
        
         
           At
           four
           of
           the
           Clock
           this
           Morning
           ,
           it
           being
           fair
           day-light
           ,
           I
           caused
           the
           Lead
           to
           be
           cast
           forth
           ,
           but
           could
           not
           get
           ground
           at
           eighty
           Fathom
           :
           I
           reckon
           my self
           about
           ten
           Leagues
           from
           
             Cape
             Desiade
          
           ,
           and
           on
           the
           Latitude
           of
           52
           d.
           53
           m.
           South
           .
           A
           little
           past
           four
           of
           the
           Clock
           ,
           it
           cleared
           up
           on
           the
           East
           Horizon
           :
           we
           looked
           well
           abroad
           ,
           and
           saw
           the
           four
           Isles
           ,
           called
           
             The
             Directions
          
           ,
           which
           lie
           at
           the
           Mouth
           of
           the
           Streights
           
             N.
             N.
             W.
          
           from
           
             Cape
             Desiade
          
           ,
           distance
           from
           thence
           abought
           eight
           Leagues
           .
           These
           Islands
           made
           in
           four
           Hommaccoes
           like
           Hay-cocks
           ,
           when
           I
           saw
           them
           :
           they
           bear
           
           
             N.
             E.
          
           of
           me
           ,
           distant
           about
           four
           Leagues
           :
           they
           lie
           in
           the
           Latitude
           of
           52
           d.
           42
           m.
           and
           at
           five
           of
           the
           Clock
           the
           Islands
           bore
           North
           of
           me
           ,
           distant
           three
           Leagues
           off
           ;
           I
           sounded
           ,
           but
           could
           not
           get
           ground
           at
           70
           Fathoms
           ;
           I
           saw
           
             Cape
             Desiade
          
           ;
           it
           cleared
           up
           ,
           for
           the
           Fog
           was
           much
           on
           the
           Hills
           ;
           the
           Cape
           was
           
             E.
             S.
             E.
          
           of
           me
           ,
           distant
           near
           eight
           Leagues
           :
           the
           tops
           of
           the
           ragged
           Hills
           ,
           or
           rocky
           Spires
           were
           clouded
           with
           the
           flying
           Fog
           ,
           so
           as
           I
           could
           not
           see
           the
           Cape
           sooner
           ;
           for
           in
           clear
           Weather
           ,
           the
           Land
           at
           Cape-pillar
           and
           
             Cape
             Desiade
          
           may
           be
           seen
           fifteen
           or
           sixteen
           Leagues
           ,
           it
           is
           so
           high
           and
           ragged
           .
        
         
           I
           steered
           by
           Cape-pillar
           East
           and
           by
           South
           ,
           the
           Wind
           at
           West-south-west
           ,
           a
           fresh
           gale
           ;
           a
           great
           humming
           Sea
           ran
           here
           ,
           which
           came
           out
           of
           the
           South-west
           ;
           I
           saw
           the
           Sea
           break
           upon
           broken
           ground
           ,
           which
           lieth
           at
           least
           four
           Leagues
           from
           the
           point
           of
           
             Cape
             Desiade
          
           West
           into
           the
           Sea
           ,
           and
           many
           Rocks
           that
           were
           sunk
           ,
           and
           prints
           of
           Rocks
           above
           Water
           ,
           which
           the
           Sea
           breaketh
           terribly
           :
           these
           lie
           off
           
             Cape
             Desiade
          
           about
           two
           Leagues
           ,
           and
           a
           League
           ,
           and
           some
           not
           half
           a
           Mile
           off
           ,
           very
           dangerous
           .
        
         
           As
           I
           came
           nearer
           the
           Streights-mouth
           ,
           I
           raised
           the
           Land
           on
           the
           North-side
           by
           
             Cape
             Victory
          
           ,
           and
           the
           broken
           Islands
           within
           the
           Streights
           ,
           which
           I
           called
           
             Westminster
             Isle
          
           ;
           and
           the
           
             Lodgers
             Isle
          
           :
           they
           make
           ragged
           in
           Hillocks
           at
           the
           first
           sight
           .
           At
           nine
           of
           the
           Clock
           Cape-pillar
           bore
           South
           of
           me
           ,
           being
           distant
           about
           a
           Mile
           and
           an
           half
           from
           me
           .
        
         
         
           No
           Tide
           or
           Current
           as
           I
           could
           perceive
           ,
           set
           either
           in
           or
           out
           of
           the
           Streights
           ,
           so
           as
           to
           prejudice
           Navigation
           .
        
         
           The
           difference
           of
           Longitude
           ,
           East
           is
           1
           d.
           39
           m.
           4
           tenths
           :
           the
           Latitude
           by
           my
           Account
           now
           ▪
           is
           but
           52
           d.
           51
           m.
           South
           :
           but
           formerly
           my
           Account
           of
           the
           Latitude
           of
           this
           place
           ,
           was
           South
           52
           d.
           58
           m.
           
        
         
           Meridian
           distance
           at
           9
           of
           the
           Clock
           ,
           from
           Point
           Gallery
           ,
           West
           35
           leag
           .
           00
           mil.
           2
           /
           10.
           
        
         
           Longitude
           at
           9
           of
           the
           Clock
           ,
           from
           Point
           Gallery
           ,
           West
           2
           deg
           .
           43
           min.
           ●
           .
        
         
           Longitude
           at
           9
           of
           the
           Clock
           ,
           from
           the
           Lizard
           ,
           West
           73
           d.
           3
           m.
           ●
           .
        
         
           Meridian
           distance
           at
           9
           of
           the
           Clock
           ,
           from
           the
           Lizard
           ,
           West
           1153
           leag
           .
           00
           mil.
           2
           /
           10.
           
        
         
           I
           find
           but
           very
           little
           Tide
           or
           Current
           in
           this
           Sea
           of
           
             Mare
             del
             Zur
          
           ;
           for
           I
           am
           but
           3
           Minutes
           of
           Longitude
           out
           of
           my
           Account
           ,
           in
           sailing
           between
           Cape-gallery
           and
           Cape-pillar
           ,
           forwards
           and
           backwards
           .
        
         
           At
           any
           time
           if
           you
           have
           a
           desire
           to
           enter
           the
           Streights
           of
           Magellan
           at
           the
           West-mouth
           ,
           it
           will
           be
           safest
           in
           my
           Opinion
           ,
           to
           bear
           in
           for
           the
           Land
           ,
           in
           the
           Latitude
           of
           52
           Degrees
           ,
           and
           50
           Minutes
           .
           South
           ,
           and
           then
           you
           will
           see
           the
           four
           Isles
           of
           Direction
           ,
           which
           lie
           before
           the
           Mouth
           of
           the
           Streights
           ,
           somewhat
           toward
           the
           North-side
           ;
           they
           lie
           North-north-west
           from
           Cape-pillar
           ,
           near
           eight
           Leagues
           distant
           .
           These
           Islands
           may
           be
           known
           ,
           for
           there
           are
           but
           four
           of
           them
           ,
           and
           they
           be
           but
           of
           an
           indifferent
           height
           ,
           and
           but
           small
           ,
           and
           bare
           irregular
           Rocks
           ,
           and
           they
           be
           near
           together
           :
           the
           Eastermost
           Isle
           is
           near
           a
           Mile
           distant
           from
           the
           other
           
           three
           ,
           and
           it
           is
           peeked
           up
           like
           a
           Sugar-loaf
           :
           the
           Sea
           breaks
           much
           on
           these
           Isles
           with
           Westerly
           Winds
           ,
           
             &c.
             
             Cape-pillar
          
           is
           the
           steep
           Point
           of
           Rocks
           on
           the
           South-side
           of
           the
           Streights-mouth
           ,
           at
           the
           entring
           into
           the
           Streights
           :
           
             Cape
             Desiade
          
           is
           the
           Westerly
           Point
           ,
           for
           it
           falleth
           off
           from
           Cape-pillar
           near
           South-west
           ,
           and
           they
           are
           distant
           about
           two
           Leagues
           one
           from
           another
           ,
           which
           is
           the
           Face
           of
           the
           Lands
           between
           these
           two
           Capes
           :
           for
           at
           the
           Point
           of
           
             Cape
             Desiade
          
           ,
           the
           Land
           on
           the
           South-side
           of
           the
           Cape
           trents
           off
           to
           the
           South-south-eastward
           ,
           all
           high
           ragged
           rocky
           Mountains
           :
           what
           I
           saw
           of
           it
           ,
           at
           the
           pitch
           of
           
             Cape
             Desiade
          
           ,
           there
           lie
           many
           shatter'd
           Rocks
           which
           are
           above
           Water
           ,
           and
           shew
           like
           the
           Ruins
           of
           old
           Houses
           :
           and
           there
           are
           ledges
           of
           Rocks
           that
           are
           sunk
           ,
           which
           lie
           near
           four
           Leagues
           off
           of
           the
           Cape
           ,
           West
           ;
           the
           Sea
           breaks
           much
           on
           them
           ,
           and
           they
           are
           dangerous
           :
           they
           lie
           in
           the
           Latitude
           of
           53
           d.
           10
           m.
           South
           ,
           by
           my
           reckoning
           ;
           I
           called
           these
           Rocks
           
             The
             Judges
          
           ;
           they
           are
           near
           ten
           Leagues
           distant
           South
           and
           by
           West
           from
           the
           
             Isles
             of
             Direction
          
           ,
           so
           broad
           is
           the
           first
           opening
           of
           the
           Streights
           ;
           for
           when
           you
           can
           but
           once
           see
           the
           Land
           ,
           to
           make
           it
           ,
           there
           is
           no
           danger
           ;
           but
           a
           Stranger
           that
           should
           pass
           out
           of
           the
           South-sea
           ,
           and
           had
           not
           passed
           the
           Streights
           before
           ,
           will
           find
           it
           very
           difficult
           to
           pass
           the
           Streights
           from
           the
           West
           to
           the
           East
           ;
           for
           at
           the
           first
           entring
           into
           it
           out
           of
           the
           South-sea
           ,
           as
           we
           call
           it
           ,
           there
           are
           many
           Openings
           and
           Sounds
           on
           the
           North-side
           ,
           which
           seem
           fairer
           for
           a
           passage
           than
           the
           Streight
           it self
           doth
           :
           therefore
           it
           is
           best
           to
           keep
           the
           South-side
           ,
           far
           aboard
           all
           along
           from
           Cape-pillar
           ,
           
           which
           is
           the
           point
           at
           the
           Entrance
           :
           the
           Course
           will
           be
           East
           and
           by
           South
           for
           a
           Mile
           or
           two
           ,
           and
           then
           East-south-east
           ,
           and
           South-east
           and
           by
           East
           :
           so
           the
           Channel
           lieth
           to
           
             Cape
             Quade
          
           .
        
         
           The
           North-side
           of
           the
           Streights
           from
           
             Cape
             Victory
          
           ,
           all
           along
           to
           the
           Eastward
           to
           
             Cape
             Froward
          
           ,
           is
           all
           a
           ragged
           ,
           rocky
           ,
           mountainous
           ,
           desolate
           Country
           ;
           many
           high
           rocky
           Islands
           ,
           and
           small
           Rocks
           ,
           and
           sucking
           Rocks
           lie
           on
           the
           North-side
           of
           the
           Streights
           ,
           at
           coming
           out
           of
           
             Mare
             del
             Zur
          
           ,
           fifteen
           Leagues
           in
           distance
           into
           the
           Streights
           to
           the
           Eastward
           .
           There
           also
           run
           great
           Sounds
           and
           Waters
           into
           the
           North-Land
           ,
           which
           shew
           like
           a
           passage
           more
           than
           the
           Streights
           doth
           .
           There
           is
           no
           safety
           for
           a
           Ship
           to
           keep
           the
           North-shore
           aboard
           in
           this
           part
           ;
           for
           here
           lie
           so
           many
           Islands
           and
           Rocks
           ,
           so
           that
           if
           the
           Weather
           prove
           foggy
           and
           thick
           ,
           a
           Man
           may
           mistake
           the
           right
           Channel
           ,
           and
           steer
           in
           among
           the
           broken
           Islands
           and
           Rocks
           ,
           so
           far
           as
           to
           endanger
           his
           Ship
           ,
           if
           the
           Wind
           be
           Westerly
           ,
           and
           it
           is
           for
           the
           most
           part
           of
           the
           Winter
           there
           ,
           very
           thick
           and
           foggy
           .
        
         
           Here
           are
           many
           Sounds
           and
           Coves
           on
           the
           North-side
           ,
           between
           Cape-Victory
           and
           
             Cape
             Quad
          
           :
           but
           how
           far
           they
           run
           into
           the
           Land
           ,
           I
           know
           not
           .
           I
           wanted
           a
           Sloop
           ,
           or
           some
           other
           small
           Vessel
           ,
           to
           discover
           those
           Sounds
           :
           and
           many
           other
           places
           in
           the
           Streights
           ,
           which
           I
           would
           gladly
           have
           seen
           .
        
         
           January
           6.
           
           In
           Tuesday-bay
           and
           Island-bay
           ,
           there
           grow
           thick
           shrubby
           Bushes
           on
           the
           lower
           Land
           ,
           which
           have
           many
           Berries
           like
           Hurts
           growing
           on
           them
           :
           these
           Bushes
           grow
           in
           a
           mossy
           loose
           Earth
           ,
           which
           lieth
           four
           or
           five
           Feet
           thick
           on
           the
           Rock
           ;
           
           these
           Bushes
           will
           serve
           for
           Fuel
           :
           there
           grows
           also
           long
           sedgy
           Grass
           very
           thick
           ;
           many
           Geese
           and
           Ducks
           do
           make
           their
           Nests
           and
           breed
           in
           it
           ,
           and
           other
           Sea-Fowl
           :
           here
           are
           Ducks
           ,
           white
           and
           pied
           brant-Geese
           ,
           grey
           Gulls
           ,
           Sea-Mews
           ,
           Sea-Divers
           and
           Penguins
           on
           the
           Water
           ;
           I
           could
           not
           see
           any
           People
           now
           ,
           but
           some
           have
           been
           there
           ;
           for
           I
           saw
           where
           they
           had
           made
           Fires
           ,
           and
           an
           Arbour
           .
           Here
           are
           Muscles
           and
           Limpets
           on
           the
           Rocks
           ,
           but
           as
           for
           other
           Fishes
           I
           saw
           none
           .
           I
           rowed
           two
           Miles
           up
           the
           Sound
           ,
           and
           could
           have
           gone
           farther
           ,
           but
           it
           rained
           so
           much
           ,
           and
           blew
           so
           hard
           ,
           as
           I
           durst
           not
           be
           absent
           from
           the
           Ship
           ;
           the
           Water
           is
           mighty
           deep
           in
           the
           Sound
           .
           At
           night
           I
           got
           aboard
           ,
           my
           Seamen
           were
           joyful
           to
           see
           me
           ,
           for
           they
           were
           afraid
           that
           the
           Ship
           would
           have
           broke
           loose
           in
           the
           time
           of
           my
           absence
           .
           Much
           Rain
           to
           Night
           ,
           and
           Fogs
           ,
           the
           Wind
           at
           West-south-west
           ,
           a
           short
           gale
           at
           Night
           ;
           I
           rode
           fast
           on
           the
           smooth
           Water
           ,
           having
           the
           Point
           on
           the
           North-west
           of
           me
           :
           Here
           is
           a
           great
           deal
           of
           fresh
           Water
           comes
           running
           in
           streams
           down
           the
           sides
           of
           the
           bare
           rocky
           Mountains
           into
           the
           salt
           Water
           ;
           many
           Whales
           spouting
           to
           and
           fro
           in
           these
           Bays
           and
           Sounds
           ,
           and
           some
           Seals
           on
           the
           Rocks
           :
           this
           part
           is
           very
           desolate
           ,
           and
           a
           mere
           Chaos
           ,
           &c.
           
        
         
           At
           eight
           of
           the
           Clock
           this
           Evening
           ,
           I
           anchored
           before
           the
           place
           called
           
             Batchelors
             River
          
           ,
           in
           nine
           Fathom
           Water
           ,
           clear
           sandy
           Ground
           ,
           two
           Cables
           length
           from
           the
           shore
           .
           Here
           is
           very
           good
           clear
           sandy-ground
           before
           the
           River
           ,
           and
           good
           Anchoring
           in
           six
           ,
           or
           seven
           ,
           or
           eight
           ,
           or
           nine
           ,
           or
           ten
           ,
           or
           eleven
           Fathom
           :
           a
           fine
           barth
           of
           shore
           ,
           and
           good
           Riding
           
           with
           Westerly
           Winds
           ,
           and
           Northerly
           :
           the
           worst
           Wind
           is
           a
           South-Wind
           ,
           for
           it
           blows
           right
           on
           in
           this
           Reach
           ;
           but
           there
           cannot
           go
           much
           Sea
           here
           ;
           for
           the
           Streight
           in
           this
           Reach
           is
           but
           two
           Leagues
           broad
           .
           This
           Batchelors
           River
           is
           near
           five
           Leagues
           to
           the
           Eastward
           of
           
             Cape
             Quade
          
           ,
           and
           two
           Leagues
           to
           the
           Eastward
           of
           St.
           Jerom's
           Channel
           :
           on
           the
           North-side
           of
           it
           ,
           the
           Tide
           runs
           of
           an
           indifferent
           strength
           in
           this
           place
           ,
           both
           Ebb
           and
           Flood
           ;
           it
           sets
           in
           and
           out
           of
           St.
           Jerom's
           Channel
           ,
           rising
           and
           falling
           about
           eight
           or
           nine
           Feet
           perpendicular
           :
           here
           is
           not
           above
           ten
           Foot
           Water
           at
           a
           High-water
           ,
           at
           the
           going
           in
           of
           
           Batchelor's
           River
           .
           This
           River
           is
           a
           good
           Harbour
           for
           Barks
           and
           Sloops
           ,
           or
           the
           like
           .
           This
           River
           lieth
           in
           a
           Valley
           ,
           and
           a
           fine
           Grove
           of
           green
           Trees
           grows
           on
           the
           West
           Point
           :
           At
           the
           entrance
           here
           is
           very
           good
           fresh
           Water
           ,
           and
           a
           good
           place
           to
           Wood
           at
           .
           The
           Indian
           People
           or
           Natives
           frequent
           this
           place
           often
           ;
           for
           here
           are
           many
           Arbours
           ,
           which
           are
           their
           Houses
           :
           Calm
           Weather
           to
           Night
           ,
           and
           Foggy
           ;
           I
           rode
           fast
           ,
           the
           Ship
           being
           moored
           .
        
         
           Sunday
           January
           8.
           
           Calm
           Weather
           ,
           and
           a
           fine
           warm
           Sun-shine
           ;
           This
           Morning
           at
           Day-light
           ,
           I
           went
           in
           my
           Boat
           with
           twenty
           Men
           into
           
           Batchelor's
           River
           ,
           and
           rowed
           four
           Miles
           up
           the
           Creek
           ,
           or
           River
           ,
           which
           was
           as
           far
           as
           the
           Boat
           could
           go
           ;
           the
           Water
           being
           high
           :
           the
           River
           ends
           in
           a
           small
           Creek
           ,
           coming
           out
           of
           a
           Lake
           of
           fresh
           Water
           ,
           in
           a
           Valley
           amongst
           the
           Hills
           :
           we
           made
           the
           Boat
           fast
           ,
           and
           marched
           all
           into
           the
           Land
           five
           or
           six
           Miles
           ,
           being
           stop'd
           from
           going
           further
           ,
           by
           Hills
           rising
           very
           steep
           ,
           and
           Mountains
           ,
           and
           impenetrable
           
           Woods
           :
           we
           made
           several
           Fires
           ,
           but
           could
           not
           see
           any
           sign
           of
           them
           so
           far
           in
           the
           Land.
           No
           Beast
           or
           other
           Creature
           to
           be
           seen
           ;
           many
           small
           streams
           of
           fresh
           Water
           come
           running
           from
           the
           snowy
           Mountains
           ,
           with
           great
           Falls
           from
           the
           steep
           Rocks
           :
           we
           looked
           in
           many
           places
           of
           the
           Earth
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           streams
           of
           Water
           for
           Gold
           ,
           &c.
           but
           found
           none
           ,
           nor
           any
           other
           Metal
           of
           Mineral
           :
           Here
           grow
           on
           the
           Bushes
           many
           small
           red
           Berries
           ,
           much
           like
           Hurts
           ,
           very
           good
           to
           eat
           ;
           the
           Grass-Land
           is
           very
           loose
           and
           Boggy
           :
           the
           Rocks
           are
           a
           kind
           of
           white
           Marble
           ;
           the
           Trees
           like
           those
           at
           
             Port
             Famen
          
           ;
           here
           are
           small
           Pepper-trees
           .
           To
           Night
           I
           got
           on
           Board
           ;
           Calm
           Weather
           :
           I
           rode
           fast
           with
           the
           Ship.
           
        
         
           Here
           ends
           
             Sir
             John
          
           Narbrough's
           Manuscript
           Journal
           ,
           which
           we
           shall
           continue
           home
           to
           England
           ,
           from
           the
           
             MS
             Diary
          
           ,
           taken
           by
           Sir
           John's
           ingenious
           
             Lieutenant
             ,
             Nathaniel
             Pecket
          
           .
        
         
           Wednesday
           January
           11.
           
           Fair
           Weather
           ,
           Wind
           variable
           ,
           from
           South-east
           to
           South-west
           .
           This
           Morning
           we
           made
           the
           best
           of
           our
           way
           to
           get
           into
           
             Port
             Famen
          
           Here
           we
           had
           Fishes
           from
           the
           Shore
           to
           Fish
           our
           Main-mast
           :
           At
           twelve
           a
           Clock
           we
           Anchored
           in
           nine
           Fathom
           Waaer
           .
           This
           place
           afforded
           what
           we
           wanted
           ,
           as
           very
           good
           large
           Trees
           for
           Fishes
           :
           good
           Water
           ,
           good
           wild
           Fowl
           ,
           good
           fish
           ,
           like
           Mullets
           ,
           and
           large
           Smelts
           .
           here
           we
           fitted
           our
           Ships
           Masts
           ,
           and
           Rigging
           as
           well
           as
           we
           could
           ;
           Careen'd
           her
           ,
           and
           filled
           our
           Casks
           with
           good
           fresh
           Water
           ,
           and
           took
           as
           much
           Wood
           aboard
           ,
           as
           we
           thought
           fit
           .
        
         
         
           January
           16.
           
           Fair
           Weather
           ,
           and
           little
           Wind
           ,
           Westerly
           .
           This
           Morning
           the
           Lieutenant
           was
           ordered
           to
           go
           up
           with
           the
           Boat
           in
           Segars
           River
           ,
           as
           high
           as
           he
           could
           with
           convenience
           ,
           and
           to
           see
           for
           Indians
           :
           He
           went
           up
           about
           nine
           Miles
           ,
           but
           could
           nor
           get
           higher
           with
           the
           Boat
           ,
           by
           reason
           of
           the
           Trunk-timber
           ,
           and
           shoaliness
           in
           the
           Water
           .
           So
           I
           landed
           ,
           and
           went
           up
           two
           Miles
           by
           Land
           to
           see
           for
           Indians
           :
           but
           I
           could
           not
           see
           any
           ,
           not
           any
           thing
           worth
           the
           Observation
           .
           How
           far
           the
           River
           runs
           up
           ,
           I
           know
           not
           ,
           for
           I
           saw
           not
           the
           end
           of
           it
           :
           so
           I
           returned
           a-board
           again
           .
        
         
           January
           29.
           
           Fair
           Weather
           ,
           and
           little
           Wind
           at
           South-west
           .
           This
           Morning
           the
           Captain
           went
           over
           with
           the
           Pinnace
           to
           the
           South-shore
           to
           see
           for
           Indians
           ,
           and
           if
           there
           were
           and
           Harbour
           for
           Shipping
           ,
           short
           of
           
             Port
             Famen
          
           .
           This
           day
           came
           an
           Indian
           to
           the
           Point
           of
           
             Port
             Famen
          
           ,
           and
           made
           a
           Fire
           ;
           and
           I
           went
           a-shore
           to
           see
           what
           he
           had
           :
           but
           he
           had
           neither
           Bow
           ,
           nor
           Arrow
           ,
           nor
           any
           thing
           else
           to
           the
           value
           of
           the
           Farthing
           :
           I
           would
           have
           had
           him
           come
           a-board
           with
           me
           ,
           but
           he
           would
           not
           ;
           as
           far
           as
           I
           understood
           by
           the
           Signs
           he
           made
           to
           me
           ,
           he
           had
           been
           a
           slave
           to
           some
           other
           Indians
           ,
           and
           had
           run
           away
           from
           them
           ,
           and
           was
           travelling
           home
           .
        
         
           Tuesday
           January
           31.
           
           Fair
           Weather
           ,
           Wind
           variable
           .
           This
           Evening
           the
           Captain
           came
           a-board
           again
           ,
           having
           been
           over
           on
           the
           South-shore
           ,
           to
           see
           for
           an
           Harbour
           ,
           but
           could
           find
           none
           ,
           nor
           see
           any
           Indians
           .
        
         
           Saturday
           February
           4.
           
           Fair
           Weather
           ,
           Wind
           at
           West
           by
           North.
           This
           Morning
           ,
           at
           four
           a
           Clock
           
           we
           set
           Sail
           for
           
             Port
             Famen
          
           ,
           and
           at
           eleven
           a
           Clock
           we
           were
           short
           of
           
             Fresh-water
             Bay
          
           ;
           and
           at
           six
           a
           Clock
           in
           the
           Evening
           ,
           we
           Anchored
           in
           twelve
           Fathom
           Water
           ,
           in
           a
           fine
           sandy
           Bay
           ,
           about
           four
           Leagues
           to
           the
           Northward
           of
           Freshwater
           Bay.
           
        
         
           February
           5.
           
           Fair
           Weather
           ,
           but
           very
           much
           Wind
           ,
           at
           South-west
           ,
           and
           West-south-west
           .
           This
           Morning
           the
           Captain
           sent
           me
           to
           Freshwater
           Bay
           to
           see
           for
           Indians
           ,
           but
           I
           saw
           none
           there
           ,
           so
           I
           returned
           again
           aboard
           .
        
         
           February
           7.
           
           Fair
           Weather
           ,
           Wind
           Northerly
           .
           This
           Morning
           the
           Captain
           ordered
           me
           to
           take
           the
           Pinnace
           ,
           and
           to
           go
           along
           the
           North-shore
           ,
           and
           between
           
           Elizabeth's
           Island
           and
           the
           Shore
           ,
           to
           see
           for
           Indians
           .
           In
           the
           Afternoon
           ,
           it
           blew
           hard
           Northerly
           ,
           that
           we
           could
           not
           row
           a
           head
           ;
           so
           I
           put
           back
           into
           a
           sandy
           Bay
           ,
           and
           went
           a-shore
           ,
           and
           stayed
           there
           all
           Night
           ;
           and
           in
           this
           Bay
           we
           haled
           the
           same
           ,
           and
           got
           a
           great
           many
           good
           and
           large
           Smelts
           ;
           Smelts
           of
           twenty
           Inches
           long
           ,
           and
           eight
           Inches
           about
           .
        
         
           Wednesday
           February
           8.
           
           Fair
           Weather
           ,
           Wind
           West-south-west
           .
           This
           Morning
           at
           four
           a
           Clock
           ,
           I
           run
           down
           the
           Streights
           with
           the
           Pinnace
           ,
           keeping
           the
           Norht-shore
           a-board
           ,
           and
           run
           berwixt
           it
           and
           Elizabeth's
           Island
           ,
           but
           saw
           no
           Indians
           :
           yet
           saw
           several
           places
           ,
           where
           they
           had
           been
           very
           lately
           ,
           and
           where
           they
           had
           built
           their
           Canowes
           .
           From
           
             Cape
             Desiade
          
           to
           Elizabeths
           Island
           ,
           there
           is
           Wood
           and
           fresh
           Water
           plenty
           ;
           but
           from
           Elizabeths
           Island
           ,
           to
           
             Cape
             Virgin-Mary
          
           ,
           Wood
           and
           fresh
           Water
           is
           very
           scarce
           to
           come
           by
           .
           This
           Afternoon
           at
           three
           a
           Clock
           ,
           I
           got
           a-board
           again
           ,
           and
           at
           four
           
           a
           Clock
           ,
           we
           came
           to
           an
           Anchor
           in
           eight
           Fathom
           Water
           ,
           black
           Sand
           ;
           we
           rid
           within
           a
           Mile
           of
           the
           North-shore
           :
           St.
           Georges
           ,
           and
           St.
           
           Bartholomew's
           Island
           were
           both
           shut
           in
           one
           ,
           and
           they
           bore
           South-south-east
           of
           me
           ;
           and
           Elizabeths
           Island
           bore
           South
           and
           by
           East
           ;
           And
           here
           we
           rid
           with
           the
           Ship
           all
           Night
           .
        
         
           February
           9.
           
           Fair
           Weather
           ,
           Wind
           Westerly
           .
           This
           Morning
           the
           Captain
           sent
           me
           to
           see
           for
           Indians
           ,
           but
           I
           could
           see
           none
           ;
           yet
           I
           fell
           with
           a
           good
           Harbour
           for
           small
           Vessels
           ,
           on
           the
           North-side
           ,
           and
           at
           the
           South-end
           of
           a
           great
           deep
           Bay
           ,
           thwart
           of
           Elizabeths
           Island
           ;
           the
           entrance
           of
           this
           Harbour
           is
           not
           a
           Bow-shot
           from
           side
           to
           side
           :
           I
           sounded
           it
           ,
           and
           there
           was
           twelve
           foot
           Water
           at
           a
           low
           Water
           ;
           but
           within
           there
           was
           three
           Fathom
           Water
           ,
           at
           low
           Water
           :
           from
           the
           entrance
           of
           this
           Harbour
           to
           the
           upper
           end
           of
           it
           .
           is
           about
           seven
           Miles
           ;
           Here
           is
           in
           this
           Harbour
           great
           stone
           of
           Geese
           and
           Ducks
           ;
           and
           a-shore
           there
           is
           great
           store
           of
           Heath-berries
           ,
           and
           Hicts
           ,
           and
           small
           Black-berries
           ,
           good
           and
           well-tasted
           ;
           but
           I
           saw
           no
           Indians
           ,
           so
           I
           returned
           a-board
           again
           ;
           the
           Captain
           went
           into
           another
           Harbour
           ,
           a
           Mile
           to
           the
           Southward
           of
           the
           second
           Narrow
           on
           the
           North-shore
           ,
           and
           sounded
           ,
           and
           had
           four
           Fathom
           Water
           in
           it
           ;
           it
           is
           very
           broad
           within
           ,
           and
           there
           is
           great
           store
           of
           Sea-Crabs
           .
        
         
           Saturday
           February
           11.
           
           Fair
           Weather
           ,
           Wind
           variable
           .
           This
           day
           the
           Captain
           ordered
           me
           to
           go
           with
           the
           Pinnace
           ,
           and
           discover
           the
           North-shore
           ,
           and
           if
           I
           could
           with
           convenience
           discover
           some
           part
           of
           the
           South
           ;
           and
           to
           go
           to
           the
           first
           Narrow
           ,
           
           and
           there
           to
           stay
           for
           the
           Ship
           ;
           so
           I
           went
           through
           the
           second
           ,
           and
           landed
           on
           the
           South-side
           ,
           in
           a
           fine
           sandy
           Bay
           ,
           or
           Cove
           ,
           expecting
           to
           fall
           with
           Indians
           ,
           for
           I
           saw
           a
           many
           Fires
           up
           in
           the
           Land
           ;
           I
           went
           up
           about
           five
           or
           six
           Miles
           ,
           but
           could
           see
           no
           Indians
           .
           Then
           the
           Night
           coming
           on
           ,
           I
           returned
           again
           to
           the
           Boat
           ,
           and
           there
           we
           pitched
           a
           Tent
           to
           lie
           in
           ,
           and
           lay
           all
           Night
           ;
           and
           at
           High-water
           we
           set
           the
           same
           thwart
           a
           Pond
           of
           Water
           ,
           and
           there
           it
           stood
           until
           Low-water
           ;
           then
           we
           halled
           the
           Pond
           all
           over
           ,
           and
           haled
           a-shore
           about
           700
           good
           and
           large
           Fish
           like
           Mullets
           .
           This
           Land
           is
           very
           dry
           ,
           barren
           Land
           ,
           and
           nothing
           to
           be
           seen
           in
           it
           worth
           the
           Observation
           .
        
         
           February
           12.
           
           Fair
           Weather
           ,
           Wind
           Northerly
           .
           This
           Morning
           I
           went
           over
           to
           the
           North-shore
           ,
           and
           there
           I
           fell
           with
           a
           fine
           sandy
           Bay
           ;
           I
           sounded
           it
           ,
           and
           had
           6
           ,
           7
           ,
           8
           ,
           9
           and
           10
           Fathom
           Water
           above
           half
           a
           Mile
           from
           the
           Shore
           .
           This
           Bay
           is
           between
           the
           second
           Narrow
           ,
           and
           
             Cape
             Gregory
          
           ;
           close
           under
           
             Cape
             Gregory
          
           ;
           this
           Cape
           is
           about
           five
           or
           six
           Miles
           to
           the
           Eastwards
           of
           the
           second
           Narrow
           :
           here
           I
           landed
           ,
           the
           Winds
           being
           Northerly
           ,
           a
           fresh
           gale
           ,
           and
           haled
           the
           Boat
           up
           dry
           ;
           and
           went
           up
           into
           the
           Country
           to
           see
           for
           Indians
           ;
           but
           saw
           none
           ,
           and
           I
           returned
           to
           the
           Boat
           again
           ,
           where
           we
           pitched
           our
           Tent
           ,
           and
           lay
           all
           Night
           .
        
         
           February
           13.
           
           Fair
           Weather
           ,
           and
           a
           fresh
           gale
           of
           Wind
           Westerly
           .
           This
           Morning
           I
           run
           all
           along
           the
           North-shore
           from
           
             Cape
             Gregory
          
           ,
           to
           the
           first
           Narrow
           :
           and
           I
           was
           no
           sooner
           entred
           into
           the
           first
           Narrow
           ,
           but
           I
           saw
           three
           Anchors
           ,
           which
           lay
           up
           above
           
             High-water
             Mark
          
           ,
           in
           a
           small
           sandy
           Cove
           :
           
           there
           I
           landed
           ,
           and
           haled
           up
           the
           Boat
           ;
           and
           searched
           about
           to
           see
           if
           we
           could
           fall
           with
           any
           Guns
           ,
           or
           other
           Trade
           .
           One
           of
           the
           Men
           found
           an
           Iron
           Commander
           for
           some
           Ships
           Poop
           :
           one
           of
           those
           Anchors
           were
           twelve
           Foot
           long
           in
           the
           Shank
           ,
           and
           the
           other
           two
           were
           eleven
           Foot
           a
           piece
           ,
           and
           they
           were
           all
           spanish
           Anchors
           .
           The
           Land
           here
           is
           barren
           ,
           dry
           Land
           ,
           and
           affords
           neither
           Wood
           ,
           nor
           fresh
           Water
           ;
           and
           for
           the
           space
           of
           five
           ,
           or
           six
           Miles
           about
           ,
           the
           land
           is
           full
           of
           Rats
           ;
           they
           have
           Holes
           in
           the
           Ground
           like
           Coney-burroughs
           :
           their
           Food
           I
           suppose
           to
           be
           Limpet
           ,
           for
           there
           is
           great
           store
           of
           Limpet-shoals
           lying
           close
           to
           their
           Holes
           :
           I
           saw
           no
           Indians
           here
           ,
           nor
           any
           thing
           worth
           Observing
           .
           Night
           coming
           on
           ,
           we
           here
           pitched
           our
           Tent
           ,
           and
           lay
           all
           Night
           ;
           here
           are
           very
           good
           sandy
           Bays
           on
           the
           North-side
           ,
           all
           the
           way
           betwixt
           the
           first
           and
           second
           Narrow
           :
           for
           I
           sounded
           all
           along
           as
           I
           came
           down
           in
           the
           Boat
           ,
           and
           had
           ten
           and
           twelve
           Fathom
           Water
           ,
           a
           good
           Burth
           off
           .
        
         
           Tuesday
           
             February
             14.
          
           
           Close
           ,
           hasey
           Weather
           ,
           with
           some
           Rain
           ,
           and
           very
           much
           Wind
           Westerly
           .
           This
           Morning
           I
           saw
           the
           Ship
           coming
           down
           the
           Streights
           ;
           and
           after
           she
           was
           through
           the
           Narrow
           ,
           they
           brought
           her
           to
           ,
           and
           I
           got
           a-board
           ;
           and
           we
           made
           all
           the
           Sail
           we
           could
           ,
           and
           by
           Night
           we
           got
           clear
           of
           the
           Streights
           into
           the
           North-sea
           ;
           and
           at
           three
           a
           Clock
           
             Cape
             Virgin-Mary
          
           bore
           North-west
           ½
           a
           Point
           Northerly
           ,
           distance
           4
           Leagues
           .
        
         
           Thursday
           February
           23.
           
           Fair
           Weather
           the
           Wind
           variable
           ,
           from
           the
           North-north-west
           ,
           to
           the
           West-north-west
           .
           This
           Evening
           at
           nine
           a
           Clock
           ,
           we
           came
           to
           an
           Anchor
           in
           22
           Fathom
           Water
           ,
           sandy
           
           Ground
           on
           the
           South-part
           of
           America
           ,
           in
           the
           Lat.
           of
           47
           d.
           16
           m.
           South
           ;
           and
           then
           Cape-Blanco
           bore
           North-north-west
           of
           me
           ,
           distant
           about
           six
           Leagues
           .
        
         
           February
           24.
           
           Fair
           Weather
           ,
           and
           little
           Wind
           ,
           Northerly
           .
           This
           Morning
           we
           weighed
           ,
           to
           go
           to
           
             Port
             Desire-Bay
          
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           Evening
           at
           six
           a
           Clock
           we
           Anchored
           in
           the
           Bay
           ,
           in
           fourteen
           Fathom
           Water
           .
        
         
           February
           ,
           25.
           
           Fair
           Weather
           ,
           and
           a
           Fresh
           gale
           of
           Wind
           Easterly
           .
           This
           day
           the
           Long
           boat
           went
           into
           Port-Desire
           for
           fresh-Water
           ,
           but
           could
           not
           fill
           above
           five
           or
           six
           Puncheons
           ;
           for
           there
           was
           no
           more
           to
           be
           had
           there
           ,
           and
           all
           they
           brought
           aboard
           was
           brackish
           :
           Fair
           Weather
           ,
           Wind
           variable
           .
        
         
           Sunday
           February
           26.
           
           Fair
           Weather
           ,
           and
           a
           fresh
           Wind
           at
           South-south-west
           .
           Thiw
           Morning
           we
           set
           Sail
           from
           Port-Desire
           ,
           to
           go
           for
           England
           ;
           and
           at
           twelve
           a
           Clock
           ,
           I
           was
           in
           the
           Latitude
           of
           47
           deg
           .
           10
           m.
           South
           .
           And
           then
           Cape-Blanco
           bore
           Northwest
           of
           me
           ,
           but
           not
           by
           the
           Compass
           ;
           for
           here
           is
           a
           Point
           and
           half
           variation
           Easterly
           :
           and
           at
           four
           a
           Clock
           Cape-Blanco
           bore
           West-north-west
           of
           me
           ,
           by
           the
           Compass
           ,
           distance
           nine
           Miles
           ,
           and
           then
           we
           had
           twenty
           Fathom
           Water
           :
           but
           when
           it
           bears
           West-north-west
           from
           you
           ,
           and
           you
           are
           8
           Miles
           off
           ,
           you
           will
           have
           but
           ten
           Fathom
           Water
           .
           Here
           is
           very
           good
           Sounding
           al
           the
           Coast
           along
           ,
           from
           this
           Cape
           ot
           
             Cape
             Virgin-Mary
          
           ,
           which
           lies
           in
           52
           d.
           15
           m.
           South
           .
           Within
           five
           Leagues
           off
           the
           Main
           ,
           you
           will
           have
           25
           and
           30
           Fathom
           Water
           ;
           and
           10
           Leagues
           off
           ,
           you
           will
           have
           50
           ,
           and
           55
           Fathom
           Water
           ,
           it
           is
           black
           oasie
           Sand.
           
        
         
         
           Wednesday
           May
           17.
           
           The
           Weather
           fair
           .
           This
           Evening
           at
           six
           a
           Clock
           ,
           we
           saw
           the
           Island
           of
           Saint
           Mary
           ,
           one
           of
           the
           Isles
           of
           Azores
           ,
           it
           bore
           East-north-east
           of
           me
           ,
           distant
           about
           sixteen
           Leagues
           by
           Estimation
           :
           fair
           Weather
           ,
           Wind
           at
           South-east
           .
        
         
           May
           19.
           
           Fair
           Weather
           ,
           Wind
           Easterly
           .
           This
           Morning
           at
           seven
           a
           Clock
           ,
           the
           Town
           of
           Puntelegada
           ,
           upon
           the
           Island
           of
           St.
           Michaels
           ,
           one
           of
           the
           Isles
           of
           Azores
           ,
           bore
           North
           of
           me
           ,
           distant
           about
           two
           Miles
           ;
           and
           my
           Longitude
           difference
           from
           Cape-Blanco
           to
           this
           Town
           is
           My
           Meridian
           distance
           from
           Cape-Blanco
           to
           this
           Town
           is
           Leagues
           ,
           Miles
           ,
           Tenths
           ,
           Easting
           this
           Town
           ,
           lying
           so
           far
           to
           the
           Eastward
           of
           the
           Cape
           .
           This
           day
           the
           Captain
           sent
           me
           a-shore
           to
           Puntelegada
           ,
           to
           enquire
           News
           from
           England
           ,
           whether
           we
           had
           War
           ,
           or
           Peace
           with
           any
           other
           Nation
           ,
           or
           not
           ;
           and
           I
           was
           informed
           by
           Mr.
           
             Richard
             Nucheuson
          
           ,
           that
           we
           had
           War
           with
           none
           ,
           but
           the
           
           Argea-Men
           .
           So
           I
           returned
           a-board
           again
           ,
           and
           we
           made
           all
           the
           Sail
           we
           could
           for
           England
           .
        
         
           Tuesday
           May
           23.
           
           Fair
           Weather
           ,
           and
           much
           Wind
           at
           North-east
           ;
           our
           Provisions
           being
           almost
           done
           ,
           and
           but
           little
           Water
           in
           the
           Ship
           ;
           we
           bore
           up
           to
           go
           for
           Angria
           at
           the
           Tercesas
        
         
           May
           24.
           
           Close
           ,
           hasey
           Weather
           ,
           and
           a
           fresh
           gale
           of
           Wind
           at
           North-east
           and
           by
           North.
           This
           Forenoon
           we
           Anchored
           in
           
           Angria-Rode
           ,
           in
           sixteen
           Fathom
           Water
           .
        
         
           Friday
           May
           26.
           
           Fair
           Weather
           ,
           and
           little
           Wind
           at
           North-east
           .
           This
           Forenoon
           we
           set
           Sail
           out
           of
           Angria-Rode
           ,
           to
           go
           for
           England
        
         
         
           Saturday
           June
           10.
           1671.
           
           It
           was
           hasey
           ,
           dirty
           Weather
           ,
           Wind
           at
           S.
           W.
           This
           moring
           I
           saw
           Scilly
           ,
           at
           seven
           a
           Clock
           ;
           it
           bore
           N.
           E.
           by
           N.
           of
           me
           ,
           distant
           about
           5
           Leagues
           ;
           and
           at
           six
           a
           Clock
           in
           the
           Afternoon
           the
           Lizzard
           bore
           North
           of
           me
           ,
           distant
           about
           3
           Leagues
           .
           Now
           ,
           I
           make
           my
           difference
           of
           Longitude
           ,
           from
           Cape
           Blanco
           to
           the
           Lizzard
           in
           England
           ,
           to
           be
           60
           d.
           45
           m.
           2
           /
           10.
           and
           my
           Meridian
           distance
           is
           840
           Leagues
           ;
           I
           am
           so
           far
           to
           the
           Eastwards
           of
           the
           Cape
           .
        
      
       
         
         
         
           A
           Relation
           of
           a
           Voyage
           made
           towards
           the
           South
           Terra
           Incognita
           ;
           extracted
           from
           the
           Journal
           of
           Captain
           Abel
           Jansen
           Tasman
           ,
           by
           which
           not
           only
           a
           new
           Passage
           by
           Sea
           to
           the
           Southward
           of
           Nova
           Hollandia
           ,
           Vandemens
           Land
           ,
           &c.
           is
           discovered
           ,
           and
           a
           vast
           space
           of
           Land
           and
           Sea
           incompassed
           and
           sailed
           round
           ,
           but
           many
           considerable
           and
           instructive
           Observations
           concerning
           the
           variation
           of
           the
           Magnetical
           Needle
           in
           parts
           of
           the
           Worlds
           almost
           Antipodes
           to
           us
           :
           and
           several
           other
           curious
           remarks
           concerning
           those
           Places
           and
           People
           are
           set
           forth
           .
           Not
           long
           since
           Published
           in
           the
           Low
           Dutch
           by
           Dirk
           Rembrantse
           ,
           and
           now
           in
           English
           from
           Dr.
           Hook's
           Collections
           .
        
         
           IN
           the
           year
           1642.
           
           Aug.
           14.
           
           He
           set
           Sail
           with
           two
           Ships
           from
           Batavia
           ,
           to
           wit
           ,
           the
           Yacht
           Heemskirk
           and
           the
           Fly-boat
           Seehane
           ;
           and
           the
           5.
           of
           September
           came
           to
           an
           Anchor
           at
           the
           Island
           Mauritius
           20
           d.
           South
           Latitude
           ,
           and
           83
           d.
           48
           m.
           Long.
           They
           found
           this
           Island
           50
           Dutch
           Miles
           more
           Easterly
           than
           by
           their
           reckoning
           ,
           which
           make
           3
           d.
           33
           m.
           of
           Longitude
           .
           The
           
           8.
           of
           October
           they
           departed
           from
           thence
           ,
           and
           went
           nearly
           South
           ,
           till
           the
           40
           ,
           or
           41
           d.
           having
           North-west
           var.
           23
           ,
           24
           ,
           and
           25
           d.
           to
           the
           22.
           of
           October
           .
           From
           that
           time
           they
           bore
           away
           East
           ,
           somewhat
           Southwardly
           ,
           till
           the
           29.
           when
           they
           were
           in
           South
           Latitude
           45
           d.
           47
           m.
           Longit.
           89
           d.
           44
           m.
           variation
           North-west
           26
           d.
           45
           m.
           The
           6.
           of
           November
           they
           were
           in
           South
           Latitude
           49
           d.
           4
           m.
           Long.
           114
           d.
           56
           m.
           N.
           W.
           var.
           26
           d.
           with
           much
           dirty
           ,
           misty
           ,
           windy
           ,
           and
           gusty
           Weather
           ,
           and
           with
           hollow
           Waves
           out
           of
           the
           S.
           W.
           and
           S.
           so
           that
           we
           could
           not
           conceive
           there
           could
           be
           any
           Land
           very
           near
           upon
           these
           Points
           .
           November
           15.
           
           Latitude
           S.
           44
           d.
           3
           m.
           Longitude
           140
           d.
           32
           m.
           N.
           W.
           var.
           18
           d.
           30
           m.
           which
           decreased
           apace
           ,
           so
           that
           on
           the
           21.
           being
           in
           158
           d.
           Longitude
           ,
           the
           variation
           was
           no
           more
           than
           4
           d.
           The
           22.
           being
           the
           next
           day
           ,
           their
           Compass
           would
           not
           stand
           still
           as
           it
           ought
           ,
           therefore
           they
           guessed
           there
           was
           here
           some
           Mines
           of
           Load-stone
           ,
           for
           that
           their
           Compass
           stood
           not
           still
           upon
           any
           of
           the
           eight
           Points
           .
           The
           24.
           of
           November
           in
           South
           Latitude
           42
           d.
           25
           m.
           and
           their
           middle
           Longitude
           of
           163
           d.
           50
           m.
           they
           saw
           Land
           E.
           by
           N.
           distant
           from
           them
           10.
           
           Miles
           ,
           which
           they
           named
           
             Anthony
             van
             Diemens
             Land.
          
           Here
           the
           Compass
           stood
           right
           at
           this
           Land
           in
           the
           Longitude
           of
           163
           d.
           50
           m.
           They
           had
           much
           stormy
           bad
           weather
           ,
           so
           they
           went
           away
           S.
           by
           E.
           along
           the
           Coast
           to
           44
           d.
           of
           South
           Latitude
           ,
           where
           the
           Land
           runs
           away
           E.
           and
           after
           N.
           E.
           and
           northerly
           ;
           here
           in
           the
           Longitude
           167
           d.
           55
           m.
           and
           Latitude
           43
           d.
           10
           m.
           they
           came
           to
           Anchor
           in
           a
           Bay
           ,
           which
           on
           the
           1.
           of
           
           December
           they
           named
           
             Frederick
             Hendricks
             Bay
          
           :
           They
           heard
           as
           they
           thought
           the
           noise
           of
           Men
           ,
           but
           saw
           none
           ;
           they
           saw
           also
           two
           Trees
           about
           two
           or
           two
           and
           a
           half
           Fathom
           thick
           ,
           and
           60
           ,
           or
           65
           Foot
           high
           below
           the
           Branches
           ;
           the
           Bark
           of
           these
           Trees
           was
           cut
           with
           Flint
           ,
           peeled
           off
           in
           form
           of
           Steps
           ,
           to
           help
           the
           Inhabitants
           to
           climb
           them
           ,
           and
           take
           the
           Birds
           Nests
           thereon
           :
           these
           Steps
           were
           about
           5.
           
           Food
           asunder
           ,
           so
           that
           we
           must
           either
           conclude
           these
           People
           very
           great
           ,
           or
           else
           that
           they
           have
           some
           unknown
           trick
           to
           make
           use
           of
           the
           said
           Steps
           for
           climbing
           these
           Trees
           .
           In
           the
           one
           Tree
           the
           Steps
           seemed
           so
           fresh
           and
           green
           as
           if
           it
           had
           not
           been
           four
           days
           since
           they
           were
           cut
           :
           the
           noise
           of
           men
           ,
           and
           the
           play
           which
           they
           heard
           was
           much
           like
           that
           of
           a
           Jews
           -
           Trump
           ,
           or
           little
           Gom
           ,
           which
           was
           not
           far
           off
           ,
           but
           they
           saw
           no
           body
           .
           They
           saw
           the
           footing
           of
           wild
           Beasts
           having
           Claws
           like
           a
           Tyger
           ,
           and
           of
           other
           Beasts
           :
           They
           found
           also
           Gum
           of
           the
           Trees
           ,
           and
           Gum-Lac
           of
           the
           Ground
           .
           The
           Ebb
           and
           Flood
           was
           here
           about
           three
           Foot.
           The
           Trees
           stood
           not
           thick
           ,
           nor
           incumbred
           with
           thick
           bushes
           or
           underwood
           :
           they
           saw
           likewise
           in
           several
           places
           the
           smoak
           of
           fire
           .
           Here
           they
           did
           nothing
           but
           only
           set
           up
           a
           Stake
           with
           the
           Companies
           mark
           ,
           and
           a
           Princes
           Flag
           thereon
           ;
           there
           was
           here
           3
           d.
           N.
           E.
           variation
           .
           December
           5.
           S.
           Lat.
           41
           d.
           34
           m.
           Long.
           169
           d.
           they
           went
           away
           E.
           from
           
             Anthony
             van
             Diemens
             Land
          
           with
           purpose
           to
           run
           away
           E.
           to
           the
           Long.
           of
           195
           d.
           to
           find
           the
           Islands
           of
           
             Solomon
             .
             December
          
           9.
           with
           S.
           Lat
           42
           d.
           37
           m.
           Long
           176
           d.
           29
           m.
           N.
           E.
           variation
           5
           
             d.
             Decemb.
          
           12.
           they
           had
           hollow
           Waves
           
           out
           of
           the
           S.
           W.
           therefore
           from
           that
           Quarter
           no
           Land
           is
           to
           be
           expected
           .
        
         
           December
           13.
           
           Latitude
           S.
           42
           d.
           10
           m.
           Longitude
           188
           d.
           28
           m.
           N.
           E.
           variation
           7
           d.
           30
           m.
           they
           had
           Land
           in
           sight
           which
           was
           very
           high
           and
           hilly
           ,
           and
           which
           in
           the
           Charts
           is
           now
           called
           
             New
             Zealand
          
           ;
           they
           went
           N.
           Eastwards
           along
           the
           Land
           as
           the
           Chart
           shewed
           it
           ,
           till
           they
           Anchored
           in
           a
           Bay
           ,
           in
           South
           Latitude
           40
           d.
           50
           m.
           Longitude
           191
           d.
           41
           m.
           N.
           E.
           variation
           9
           d.
           and
           that
           on
           the
           18.
           of
           December
           1642.
           
           These
           Inhabitants
           were
           rough
           of
           voice
           ,
           thick
           and
           gross
           made
           ,
           they
           came
           not
           within
           a
           Stones
           cast
           on
           Board
           of
           us
           ,
           and
           blew
           several
           times
           on
           an
           Instrument
           which
           made
           a
           noise
           like
           a
           Moorish
           Trumpet
           ,
           in
           answer
           thereto
           we
           blew
           ours
           .
           Their
           colour
           was
           between
           Brown
           and
           Yellow
           ;
           they
           had
           black
           Hair
           ,
           bound
           fast
           and
           tight
           upon
           the
           crown
           of
           their
           Head
           ,
           in
           the
           same
           manner
           as
           the
           Japanners
           have
           theirs
           behind
           their
           Head
           ,
           and
           near
           as
           long
           and
           thick
           of
           Hair
           ,
           upon
           which
           stood
           a
           great
           thick
           white
           Feather
           :
           their
           Clothes
           were
           of
           Mats
           ,
           others
           of
           Cotton
           ,
           but
           their
           upper
           parts
           were
           naked
           .
        
         
           December
           19.
           these
           Antipodes
           began
           to
           be
           somewhat
           bolder
           ,
           and
           more
           free
           ,
           so
           that
           they
           indeavoured
           to
           begin
           a
           Truck
           or
           Merchandize
           with
           the
           Yacht
           ,
           and
           began
           to
           come
           on
           Board
           ;
           the
           Commander
           seeing
           this
           began
           to
           fear
           ,
           lest
           they
           might
           be
           fallen
           upon
           ,
           and
           sent
           his
           Boat
           or
           Prow
           with
           seven
           Men
           to
           advertise
           them
           that
           they
           should
           not
           trust
           these
           People
           too
           much
           :
           they
           went
           off
           from
           the
           Ship
           ,
           and
           not
           having
           any
           Arms
           with
           them
           ,
           were
           set
           upon
           by
           these
           Inhabitants
           ,
           and
           three
           or
           
           four
           of
           them
           were
           killed
           ,
           and
           the
           rest
           saved
           themselves
           by
           swimming
           :
           this
           they
           indeavoured
           to
           revenge
           ,
           but
           the
           water
           going
           high
           they
           were
           hindred
           ;
           this
           Bay
           was
           by
           them
           for
           this
           reason
           named
           
             Murderers
             Bay
          
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           marked
           in
           the
           Charts
           .
           From
           this
           Bay
           they
           went
           on
           E.
           and
           found
           the
           Land
           all
           round
           about
           them
           :
           It
           seems
           a
           very
           good
           Land
           ,
           fruitful
           ,
           and
           well
           scituated
           ,
           but
           by
           reason
           of
           the
           bad
           Weather
           and
           West
           Wind
           they
           had
           a
           great
           deal
           of
           trouble
           to
           get
           out
           .
           The
           24.
           of
           December
           because
           the
           Wind
           would
           not
           well
           suffer
           them
           to
           go
           to
           the
           Northward
           ,
           they
           not
           knowing
           if
           they
           should
           find
           any
           Passage
           to
           the
           North
           ,
           and
           the
           Flood
           coming
           out
           of
           the
           S.
           E.
           they
           concluded
           to
           go
           back
           again
           into
           the
           Bay
           ,
           and
           there
           seek
           a
           Passage
           ;
           but
           the
           26.
           the
           Wind
           better
           serving
           ,
           they
           went
           away
           Northerly
           somewhat
           to
           the
           West
           .
           January
           4.
           1643.
           in
           South
           Latitude
           34
           d.
           35
           m.
           Longitude
           191
           d.
           9
           m.
           N.
           E.
           variation
           8
           d.
           40
           m.
           they
           came
           to
           the
           N.
           W.
           cape
           of
           this
           Land
           ,
           and
           had
           hollow
           Waves
           out
           of
           the
           N.
           E.
           and
           therefore
           doubted
           not
           there
           must
           be
           a
           great
           Sea
           in
           the
           N.
           E.
           whereupon
           they
           were
           glad
           ,
           as
           having
           now
           gotten
           a
           Passage
           .
           Here
           lay
           an
           Island
           which
           they
           named
           
             three
             Kings
             Island
          
           ,
           to
           which
           they
           went
           to
           refresh
           themselves
           ,
           and
           being
           come
           near
           they
           saw
           upon
           the
           Hill
           thirty
           or
           thirty
           five
           Men
           ,
           being
           of
           tall
           Stature
           (
           as
           well
           as
           might
           be
           discerned
           from
           far
           )
           with
           Sticks
           or
           Clubs
           ,
           who
           called
           to
           them
           with
           harsh
           or
           loud
           voices
           ,
           but
           they
           could
           not
           understand
           them
           ;
           and
           those
           Men
           when
           they
           walked
           made
           very
           wide
           paces
           or
           steps
           .
           In
           turning
           about
           this
           Island
           there
           
           appeared
           very
           few
           Men
           ,
           and
           they
           saw
           little
           or
           no
           Cultivated
           Land
           ,
           but
           only
           found
           a
           fresh
           River
           ,
           where
           our
           People
           intended
           to
           get
           fresh
           water
           ,
           but
           by
           some
           unlucky
           accident
           were
           prevented
           ;
           whereupon
           it
           was
           resolved
           to
           go
           with
           an
           Eastern
           Course
           to
           the
           Longitude
           of
           220
           d.
           and
           then
           Northward
           to
           the
           South
           Latitude
           of
           17
           d.
           and
           from
           thence
           Westward
           to
           the
           
             Cocos
             and
             Horns
             Islands
          
           ,
           first
           discovered
           by
           
             William
             Scouten
          
           ;
           and
           then
           if
           not
           sooner
           to
           recruit
           ,
           for
           they
           had
           indeed
           been
           upon
           
             Anthony
             van
             Diemens
             Land
          
           ,
           but
           had
           met
           with
           nothing
           ,
           and
           upon
           
             New
             Zealand
          
           they
           had
           not
           so
           much
           as
           once
           been
           a-shore
           .
        
         
           Jan.
           8.
           in
           S.
           Latitude
           30
           d.
           25
           m.
           Longitude
           192
           d.
           20
           m.
           N.
           E.
           variation
           9
           d.
           they
           had
           great
           Waves
           out
           of
           the
           S.
           E.
           so
           that
           upon
           that
           Point
           no
           Land
           can
           be
           hoped
           .
           January
           12.
           
           South
           Latitude
           30
           d.
           5
           m.
           Longitude
           195
           d.
           27
           m.
           N.
           E.
           variation
           9½
           d.
           they
           had
           hollow
           Waves
           out
           of
           the
           S.
           E.
           and
           S.
           W.
           January
           16.
           in
           S.
           Latitude
           26.
           d.
           29
           m.
           Longitude
           199
           d.
           32
           m.
           N.
           E.
           variation
           8
           d.
           
        
         
           The
           19.
           in
           S.
           Latitude
           22
           d.
           35
           m.
           Longitude
           204
           d.
           15
           m.
           N.
           E.
           variation
           7½
           d.
           they
           saw
           an
           Island
           about
           two
           or
           three
           Miles
           round
           ,
           high
           ,
           steep
           and
           barren
           in
           appearance
           ;
           they
           would
           willingly
           have
           come
           nearer
           to
           it
           ,
           but
           could
           not
           ,
           because
           of
           the
           S.
           E.
           and
           S.
           S.
           E.
           Wind
           ;
           they
           gave
           it
           the
           name
           of
           
             Piilstreets
             Islands
          
           ,
           because
           of
           the
           multitude
           of
           those
           Fowls
           :
           the
           next
           day
           they
           saw
           again
           two
           Islands
           .
           The
           21.
           of
           January
           in
           S.
           Latitude
           21
           d.
           20
           m.
           Longitude
           205
           d.
           29
           m.
           N.
           E.
           variation
           7¼
           d.
           they
           came
           to
           the
           Northermost
           
           Island
           ,
           which
           was
           the
           biggest
           and
           not
           high
           ;
           they
           gave
           it
           the
           name
           of
           Amsterdam
           ,
           and
           the
           other
           Middleburgh
           .
           On
           this
           Amsterdam
           they
           got
           many
           Hogs
           ,
           Hens
           ,
           and
           all
           sorts
           of
           Fruits
           ;
           the
           Inhabitants
           were
           friendly
           ,
           had
           no
           Weapons
           ,
           and
           appeared
           to
           know
           no
           evil
           ,
           excepting
           that
           they
           take
           the
           liberty
           to
           Steal
           :
           there
           the
           Current
           is
           not
           great
           ,
           the
           Ebb
           runs
           near
           N.
           E.
           and
           the
           Flood
           S.
           W.
           a
           S.
           W.
           Moon
           makes
           high
           Water
           ,
           and
           it
           flows
           seven
           or
           eight
           Foot
           at
           least
           ;
           the
           Wind
           is
           continually
           S.
           E.
           and
           S.
           S.
           E.
           wherewith
           the
           Yacht
           Hemskirk
           was
           a
           drift
           ,
           but
           saved
           her self
           off
           the
           Island
           ,
           yet
           took
           in
           no
           Water
           ,
           which
           here
           was
           not
           easie
           to
           come
           by
           .
           January
           25.
           in
           South
           Latitude
           20
           d.
           15
           m.
           Longitude
           206
           d.
           19
           m.
           N.
           E.
           variation
           6⅓
           d.
           after
           having
           seen
           several
           little
           Islands
           they
           came
           to
           the
           Island
           Rotterdam
           ,
           as
           you
           see
           it
           in
           the
           Chart.
           The
           People
           were
           friendly
           and
           without
           Arms
           as
           the
           former
           ,
           but
           likewise
           very
           thievish
           :
           here
           they
           got
           fresh
           Water
           and
           other
           refreshment
           ;
           they
           went
           through
           this
           Island
           ,
           and
           found
           the
           Cocos
           or
           Clappus
           Trees
           in
           great
           plenty
           ,
           planted
           orderly
           one
           by
           another
           ,
           and
           Gardens
           whose
           Beds
           were
           made
           square
           and
           very
           handsome
           ,
           and
           set
           with
           all
           sorts
           of
           Fruit
           Trees
           ,
           which
           in
           almost
           all
           places
           were
           planted
           in
           a
           right
           Line
           ,
           so
           that
           it
           was
           a
           pleasure
           to
           behold
           them
           ,
           on
           all
           sides
           giving
           a
           fragrant
           and
           delightful
           smell
           .
           From
           this
           Island
           Rotterdam
           they
           departed
           ,
           and
           saw
           some
           other
           Islands
           which
           you
           see
           in
           the
           Chart
           ,
           and
           now
           designed
           according
           to
           their
           former
           resolution
           to
           go
           away
           North
           till
           the
           17.
           degree
           of
           South
           Latitude
           ,
           and
           then
           West
           ;
           not
           to
           pass
           by
           
           the
           Traitors
           and
           
             Hornese
             Island
          
           ;
           they
           had
           the
           Wind
           at
           S.
           E.
           and
           E.
           S.
           E.
           
        
         
           February
           6.
           in
           South
           Latitude
           17
           d.
           19
           m.
           Longitude
           201
           d.
           35
           m.
           they
           were
           intricated
           among
           about
           eighteen
           or
           twenty
           Islands
           ,
           which
           were
           all
           incompassed
           with
           Sands
           ,
           Shoals
           ,
           Banks
           and
           Rocks
           ,
           which
           Islands
           are
           marked
           in
           the
           Charts
           by
           the
           name
           of
           
             Prince
             Williams
             Islands
          
           and
           
             Hemskirks
             Shoals
          
           .
        
         
           February
           8.
           
           In
           S.
           Latitude
           15
           d.
           29
           m.
           Longitude
           199
           d.
           31
           m.
           they
           had
           a
           great
           deal
           of
           Rain
           ,
           and
           hard
           Wind
           out
           of
           the
           N.
           E.
           and
           N.
           N.
           E.
           with
           hasey
           and
           dark
           Weather
           ,
           and
           fearing
           left
           they
           might
           be
           more
           Westwardly
           than
           by
           their
           Reckoning
           ,
           that
           they
           might
           not
           fall
           to
           the
           Southwards
           of
           
             Nova
             Guinea
          
           ,
           or
           on
           unknown
           Coasts
           ;
           also
           by
           reason
           of
           the
           windy
           dark
           Weather
           they
           concluded
           to
           go
           on
           N.
           or
           N.
           N.
           W.
           to
           4
           ,
           5
           ,
           or
           6
           d.
           of
           South
           Latitude
           ,
           and
           then
           away
           West
           to
           
             Nova
             Guinea
          
           ,
           and
           so
           to
           be
           in
           less
           danger
           .
        
         
           February
           14.
           in
           South
           Latitude
           16
           d.
           30
           m.
           Longitude
           193
           d.
           35
           m.
           till
           this
           time
           they
           had
           every
           day
           Rain
           with
           Storms
           ,
           but
           now
           't
           was
           more
           Calm
           :
           they
           halled
           the
           Ship
           Seahaen
           and
           found
           their
           Reckonings
           to
           agree
           .
        
         
           February
           20.
           in
           S.
           Lat.
           13
           d.
           45
           m.
           Long
           193
           d.
           35
           m.
           they
           had
           still
           thick
           ,
           dark
           ,
           misty
           and
           rainy
           Weather
           ,
           the
           Sea
           coming
           out
           of
           all
           Quarters
           ,
           and
           the
           Wind
           variable
           .
           February
           26.
           
           Lat.
           S.
           9
           d.
           48
           m.
           Long
           193
           d.
           43
           m.
           the
           Wind
           was
           constantly
           N.
           W.
           they
           had
           not
           had
           one
           dry
           day
           in
           twenty
           one
           .
           March
           2.
           
           Lat.
           S.
           9
           d.
           11
           m.
           Long.
           192
           d.
           46
           m.
           N.
           E.
           variation
           10
           d.
           the
           Weather
           and
           Wind
           variable
           .
           
           March
           8.
           
           Latitude
           South
           7
           d.
           46
           m.
           Longitude
           190
           d.
           47
           m.
           Weather
           and
           Wind
           as
           before
           .
           March
           14.
           
           South-Latitude
           10
           d.
           12
           m.
           Longitude
           186
           d.
           14
           m.
           N.
           E.
           variation
           8
           d.
           45
           m.
           Before
           this
           ,
           for
           twelve
           days
           time
           ,
           they
           could
           get
           no
           Observation
           ,
           because
           every
           day
           it
           was
           thick
           ,
           dark
           ,
           and
           dirty
           Weather
           with
           much
           Rain
           .
           March
           20.
           
           South
           Latitude
           5
           d.
           15
           m.
           Longitude
           181
           d.
           16
           m.
           N.
           E.
           variation
           9
           d.
           the
           Weather
           grew
           better
           .
           March
           22.
           
           South
           Latitude
           5
           d.
           2
           m.
           Longitude
           178
           d.
           32
           m.
           good
           Weather
           with
           Easterly
           Trade
           Wind
           ;
           they
           got
           sight
           of
           Land
           four
           Miles
           West
           from
           them
           :
           it
           was
           a
           number
           of
           small
           Islands
           ,
           about
           twenty
           in
           all
           ,
           named
           in
           the
           Charts
           
             Onthong
             Java
          
           ,
           which
           lye
           about
           ninety
           Miles
           from
           the
           Coast
           of
           
             Nova
             Guinea
             .
             March
          
           25.
           
           South
           Latitude
           4
           d.
           35
           m.
           Longitude
           175
           d.
           10
           m.
           variation
           9
           d.
           30
           m.
           they
           were
           up
           with
           the
           Islands
           of
           Mark
           ,
           all
           found
           by
           
             William
             Scouten
          
           and
           
             John
             le
             Mair
          
           ,
           being
           fourteen
           or
           fifteen
           in
           number
           :
           The
           Natives
           are
           Savage
           ,
           and
           have
           their
           black
           Hair
           tyed
           up
           like
           the
           Rogues
           of
           
             Murderers
             Bay
          
           in
           
             Nova
             Zea●andia
             .
             March
          
           29.
           they
           passed
           by
           
             Green
             Island
          
           :
           the
           30.
           by
           St.
           
             Johns
             Island
             .
             April
          
           1.
           in
           South
           Latitude
           4
           d.
           30
           m.
           Longitude
           171
           d.
           2
           m.
           variation
           8
           d.
           45
           m.
           they
           reached
           the
           Coast
           of
           
             New
             Guinea
          
           at
           a
           Cape
           called
           by
           the
           
             Spaniards
             Cabo
             Saint
             Maria
          
           ,
           and
           went
           along
           the
           Coast
           which
           lies
           about
           N.
           W.
           to
           
             Anthony
             〈◊〉
             Island
             ,
             Gardeners
             Island
          
           and
           
             Fishers
             Island
          
           ,
           to
           the
           Promontory
           called
           
             Struis
             Hook
          
           ,
           where
           the
           Land
           falls
           away
           S.
           and
           S.
           Eastwardly
           which
           they
           followed
           ,
           and
           went
           Southerly
           until
           they
           should
           
           discover
           the
           Land
           ,
           or
           else
           find
           a
           Passage
           to
           the
           South
           .
           April
           12.
           
           S.
           Latitude
           3
           d.
           45
           m.
           Longitude
           167
           d.
           00
           m.
           N.
           E.
           variation
           10
           d.
           here
           they
           had
           a
           sudden
           Earth-quake
           ,
           that
           all
           they
           that
           were
           fast
           asleep
           came
           up
           out
           of
           their
           Cabbins
           very
           much
           affrighted
           ,
           imagining
           that
           the
           Ship
           had
           struck
           upon
           a
           Rock
           ,
           but
           casting
           the
           Lead
           ,
           found
           no
           ground
           ;
           they
           had
           afterwards
           several
           shakes
           of
           the
           Earth-quake
           ,
           but
           never
           so
           violent
           as
           the
           first
           :
           they
           were
           then
           within
           the
           
             Struis
             Hook
          
           ,
           standing
           into
           the
           
             Bight
             Bay
             of
             Good
             Hope
             .
             April
          
           14.
           
           South
           Latitude
           5
           d.
           27
           m.
           Longitude
           166
           d.
           57
           m.
           N.
           E.
           variation
           9
           d.
           15
           m.
           Here
           they
           saw
           the
           Land
           from
           the
           E.
           N.
           E.
           into
           the
           S.
           and
           so
           on
           to
           the
           S.
           S.
           W.
           they
           intended
           to
           find
           a
           Passage
           between
           both
           ,
           but
           found
           this
           to
           be
           all
           one
           Land
           even
           into
           the
           West
           ,
           wherefore
           they
           turned
           their
           Course
           Westward
           along
           the
           Coast
           ,
           and
           had
           much
           Calms
           .
           April
           20.
           in
           S.
           Latitude
           5
           d.
           4
           m.
           Longitude
           164
           d.
           27
           m.
           N.
           E.
           variation
           8
           d.
           30
           m.
           by
           night
           they
           came
           by
           the
           
             Burning
             Island
          
           ,
           and
           saw
           a
           great
           Fire
           come
           out
           of
           the
           top
           of
           the
           Hill
           ;
           of
           which
           a●●o
           
             William
             Scouten
          
           writes
           :
           they
           went
           between
           this
           Island
           and
           the
           Main
           ,
           and
           saw
           many
           Fires
           close
           by
           the
           Water
           ,
           as
           towards
           the
           middle
           of
           the
           high
           Hill
           ;
           whence
           they
           argued
           this
           to
           be
           a
           populous
           and
           well
           inhabited
           Island
           :
           they
           had
           along
           this
           Coast
           of
           
             Nova
             Guinea
          
           much
           Calms
           ,
           and
           saw
           frequently
           drift
           Wood
           ,
           as
           small
           Trees
           ,
           Bamboes
           and
           other
           filth
           ,
           from
           the
           Land
           that
           came
           out
           from
           the
           Rivers
           ,
           which
           made
           them
           conclude
           that
           there
           are
           many
           Rivers
           ,
           and
           that
           it
           must
           be
           a
           good
           Land.
           
           The
           next
           day
           they
           past
           the
           
             Burning
             Mountain
          
           ,
           and
           went
           along
           the
           Shore
           W.
           N.
           W.
           April
           27.
           in
           South
           Latitude
           2
           d.
           10
           m.
           Longitude
           156
           d.
           47
           m.
           they
           thought
           they
           were
           at
           the
           
             Island
             Moa
          
           ,
           but
           it
           was
           Jama
           a
           little
           more
           Easterly
           than
           Moa
           ;
           here
           they
           got
           many
           Coco-Nuts
           and
           other
           things
           :
           The
           People
           were
           wholly
           black
           ,
           and
           what
           they
           heard
           our
           People
           speak
           they
           could
           very
           perfectly
           repeat
           ,
           which
           is
           a
           certain
           sign
           that
           their
           Language
           is
           very
           copious
           in
           Words
           ,
           and
           difficult
           to
           be
           pronounced
           ,
           because
           they
           use
           much
           the
           Letter
           R.
           and
           sometimes
           two
           or
           three
           times
           in
           a
           Word
           .
           The
           next
           day
           they
           came
           before
           Moa
           ,
           where
           likewise
           they
           got
           much
           refreshment
           ;
           here
           by
           reason
           of
           contrary
           Winds
           they
           stayed
           till
           the
           6.
           of
           May
           ,
           so
           that
           they
           Trucked
           for
           near
           6000
           Coco-Nuts
           ,
           and
           100
           Bundles
           of
           Pysanghs
           ;
           about
           the
           beginning
           of
           their
           Traffick
           on
           the
           Island
           Moa
           ,
           whether
           maliciously
           or
           otherwise
           ,
           one
           of
           our
           Company
           was
           hurt
           with
           an
           Arrow
           shot
           by
           one
           of
           the
           Inhabitants
           :
           whilst
           this
           past
           they
           were
           getting
           their
           Ships
           nearer
           to
           the
           Land
           ,
           wherewith
           this
           People
           were
           so
           frighted
           ,
           that
           of
           their
           own
           accord
           they
           brought
           aboard
           him
           that
           had
           shot
           the
           Arrow
           ,
           for
           us
           to
           do
           with
           him
           what
           we
           pleased
           ,
           and
           from
           that
           time
           they
           were
           better
           to
           be
           spoken
           withal
           ,
           whether
           it
           were
           in
           their
           Traffick
           or
           otherwise
           ,
           so
           that
           our
           People
           took
           pieces
           of
           Iron
           Hoops
           and
           fitted
           them
           into
           Hafts
           ,
           and
           made
           them
           somewhat
           bright
           and
           sharp
           ,
           and
           so
           put
           them
           off
           for
           Knives
           .
           It
           is
           probable
           they
           still
           remember
           what
           befel
           them
           with
           
             William
             Scouten
          
           27.
           years
           before
           :
           '
           T
           was
           in
           the
           
           year
           1616.
           
           July
           16.
           for
           they
           having
           dealt
           very
           traiterously
           and
           perversly
           with
           him
           ;
           
             Jacob
             le
             Mair
          
           went
           with
           the
           Ship
           close
           to
           the
           Land
           between
           the
           Islands
           ,
           and
           shot
           with
           his
           great
           Guns
           along
           the
           Strand
           ,
           and
           into
           the
           Woods
           ,
           so
           that
           the
           Bullets
           flew
           through
           the
           Trees
           with
           a
           great
           noise
           ,
           whereupon
           these
           Negroes
           fled
           ,
           and
           durst
           not
           once
           peep
           out
           ;
           but
           at
           length
           they
           grew
           very
           tractable
           .
           May
           12.
           in
           S.
           Lat.
           0
           d.
           54
           m.
           and
           Long.
           153
           d.
           17
           m.
           N.
           E.
           variation
           6
           d.
           30
           m.
           they
           sailed
           along
           the
           N.
           side
           of
           
             William
             Scoutens
             Island
          
           ;
           it
           seems
           that
           the
           People
           are
           nimble
           ,
           and
           that
           the
           Island
           is
           well
           inhabited
           ,
           it
           is
           about
           1●
           or
           19
           Miles
           long
           .
           May
           18.
           S.
           Lat.
           0
           d.
           26
           m.
           Long.
           147
           d.
           55
           m.
           N.
           E.
           variation
           5
           d.
           30
           m.
           they
           had
           past
           the
           
             Cape
             of
             good
             Hope
          
           and
           come
           to
           the
           West
           end
           of
           
             New
             Guinea
          
           ,
           a
           broken
           Point
           of
           Land.
           They
           had
           much
           variable
           Calm
           and
           contrary
           Winds
           with
           rain
           :
           From
           hence
           they
           went
           Southward
           for
           Seram
           ,
           and
           came
           on
           the
           North
           side
           thereof
           .
           On
           the
           27.
           of
           May
           they
           went
           on
           through
           the
           Streights
           to
           the
           North
           of
           Boure
           or
           Bouton
           ,
           and
           so
           for
           Batavia
           where
           they
           arrived
           June
           15.
           in
           South
           Latitude
           6
           d.
           12
           m.
           and
           Longitude
           127
           d.
           18
           m.
           the
           Voyage
           was
           finished
           in
           ten
           Months
           .
        
         
         
         
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
             A
             MAP
             of
             y
             e
             NORTH
             EAST
             AND
             NORTH
             WEST
             
               Parts
               of
               the
            
             POLE.
             
          
           map of the North Pole
           
        
      
       
         
         
           Relation
           of
           a
           Voyage
           for
           the
           Discovery
           of
           a
           Passage
           by
           the
           North-East
           ,
           to
           Japan
           and
           China
           ;
           Performed
           in
           his
           Majesties
           Ship
           the
           Speedwel
           ,
           and
           Pr●sperous
           Pink
           ,
           Anno
           Domini
           1676.
           
           Where
           is
           shewed
           the
           Reasons
           and
           Grounds
           of
           the
           probability
           of
           a
           Passage
           before
           the
           Attempt
           ,
           with
           some
           good
           Observation
           made
           in
           the
           said
           Voyage
           ,
           by
           Captain
           John
           Wood.
           
        
         
           TO
           Write
           a
           full
           Relation
           of
           all
           those
           Navigators
           that
           have
           attempted
           to
           find
           a
           Passage
           by
           the
           N.
           E.
           to
           China
           and
           Japan
           will
           be
           ●eedless
           ,
           since
           their
           Naratives
           have
           passed
           most
           ●●ands
           ,
           they
           being
           Recorded
           in
           Hackluit
           and
           Purcha●'s
           ;
           but
           my
           〈◊〉
           ,
           is
           to
           shew
           wherein
           those
           failed
           that
           have
           〈◊〉
           undertaken
           it
           ,
           and
           then
           to
           shew
           the
           〈◊〉
           Reasons
           that
           induced
           〈◊〉
           ,
           undertak
           〈◊〉
           said
           Voyage
           ,
           with
           the
           event
           thereof
           .
        
         
           The
           first
           that
           ever
           Attempted
           the
           said
           Voyage
           〈◊〉
           Sir
           
             Hugh
             Willoughby
          
           in
           the
           year
           1553.
           with
           〈◊〉
           Sail
           of
           Ships
           ,
           and
           he
           sail
           ed
           to
           the
           North
           Cape
           of
           Finmarke
           ,
           and
           then
           into
           the
           Lat.
           of
           72.
           〈◊〉
           he
           saies
           he
           saw
           Land
           ;
           but
           to
           this
           day
           it
           ●annot
           be
           found
           again
           ,
           and
           I
           am
           of
           Opinion
           ●●at
           it
           was
           some
           Fog
           Bank
           that
           he
           saw
           ;
           for
           in
           
           my
           return
           Home
           ,
           I
           run
           over
           the
           same
           place
           where
           our
           Chard-Make●s
           lay
           down
           that
           Land
           :
           but
           certain
           it
           was
           that
           by
           foul
           Weather
           he
           was
           forced
           into
           a
           Harbor
           in
           Laplan●●
           ,
           called
           Arzena
           ,
           where
           by
           th●
           continuance
           of
           bad
           Weather
           he
           could
           never
           return
           out
           ,
           but
           was
           there
           frozen
           to
           Death
           with
           al●
           his
           Ships
           Company
           :
           so
           tha●
           of
           this
           Voyage
           there
           was
           no
           Light
           given
           to
           find
           a
           Passage
           that
           way
           .
        
         
           The
           second
           that
           Attempted
           was
           one
           Captai●
           
             Stephen
             Burrough
          
           ,
           afterward
           Comptroller
           of
           th●
           Navy
           to
           Queen
           Elizabeth
           .
           In
           the
           Year
           155●
           he
           set
           forward
           and
           passed
           the
           North
           Cape
           ,
           an●
           sailing
           farther
           Easterly
           ,
           discovered
           the
           Waygate
           that
           is
           the
           Streight
           tha●
           runneth
           between
           th●
           South
           part
           of
           
             Nova
             Z●mbla
          
           ,
           and
           the
           Sammo●●
           Country
           ,
           where
           he
           entred
           ,
           and
           believing
           th●●
           Sinus
           ,
           or
           by
           the
           Eastward
           of
           the
           Streights
           ,
           to
           〈◊〉
           a
           free
           and
           open
           Sea
           ,
           he
           returned
           with
           hope
           〈◊〉
           Passage
           that
           way
           to
           China
           and
           Japan
           .
        
         
           The
           third
           that
           Attempted
           was
           Captain
           
             Arth●●
             Pett
          
           ,
           and
           Captain
           
             Charles
             Jackman
          
           ,
           in
           the
           Ye●●
           1580.
           being
           sent
           out
           by
           Queen
           Elizabeth
           to
           follo●
           the
           Track
           〈◊〉
           Burroughs
           ;
           so
           setting
           forwards
           th●●
           came
           to
           the
           W●ygates
           ,
           and
           passed
           the
           Streigh
           and
           came
           into
           the
           Sea
           to
           the
           Eastward
           ,
           where
           the●
           met
           with
           such
           a
           vast
           quantity
           of
           Ice
           and
           〈◊〉
           Weather
           ,
           that
           they
           with
           great
           Hazard
           ,
           Peril
           ,
           〈◊〉
           Labour
           were
           forc'd
           to
           return
           ,
           but
           by
           foul
           We●ther
           lost
           one
           〈◊〉
           other
           ,
           and
           Pett
           was
           never
           〈◊〉
           of
           since
           ;
           so
           the
           Passage
           through
           the
           Waygate
           was
           in
           England
           laid
           by
           ,
           as
           thought
           not
           possi●●●e
           that
           way
           ,
           and
           then
           the
           Hollanders
           undertook
           ▪
        
         
         
           The
           fourth
           that
           Attemped
           it
           was
           
             William
             Barrans
          
           ,
           a
           well
           Experienced
           Navigator
           and
           Artist
           ,
           sent
           out
           of
           Holland
           by
           Prince
           Morrice
           in
           the
           Year
           1606.
           
           He
           sailed
           into
           the
           Waygates
           ,
           but
           being
           entred
           ,
           he
           found
           the
           same
           Incumbrance
           with
           Ice
           that
           Pett
           and
           Jackman
           had
           done
           before
           ;
           so
           tasting
           of
           the
           Water
           ,
           and
           finding
           of
           it
           fresh
           ,
           which
           neither
           
             Burrough
             ,
             Pett
          
           ,
           nor
           Jackman
           had
           observed
           ;
           he
           returned
           without
           any
           hope
           or
           probability
           of
           a
           Passage
           that
           way
           :
           but
           this
           not
           discouraging
           him
           ,
           he
           resolved
           a
           second
           Adventure
           to
           the
           Northward
           of
           
             Nova
             Zembla
          
           ,
           to
           see
           what
           might
           be
           Performed
           that
           way
           .
        
         
           So
           in
           the
           Year
           1607.
           he
           set
           forward
           ,
           and
           arrived
           on
           the
           Coast
           of
           
             Nova
             Zembla
          
           in
           the
           Lat.
           of
           73.
           where
           he
           met
           with
           Ice
           ;
           and
           so
           coasted
           the
           Shore
           till
           he
           came
           to
           the
           Lat.
           of
           76.
           where
           he
           could
           get
           no
           farther
           ,
           and
           by
           the
           Ice
           was
           there
           driven
           on
           Shore
           ,
           and
           his
           Ship
           broke
           in
           peices
           by
           it
           ,
           and
           he
           confined
           to
           Winter
           there
           ,
           where
           they
           all
           indured
           the
           greatest
           extremity
           of
           Cold
           that
           ever
           Mortals
           did
           :
           the
           Winter
           being
           past
           they
           with
           difficulty
           ,
           in
           two
           Boats
           ,
           got
           to
           Cola
           in
           Lapland
           ,
           but
           before
           their
           arrival
           there
           
             William
             Barrans
          
           dyed
           ,
           to
           the
           great
           grief
           of
           all
           his
           Company
           .
        
         
           The
           next
           that
           Attempted
           it
           ,
           was
           that
           famous
           Discoverer
           of
           our
           own
           Nation
           Mr.
           
             Henry
             Hudson
          
           ,
           in
           the
           Year
           1610.
           but
           he
           being
           disheartned
           by
           the
           Voyage
           of
           Barrans
           ,
           attempted
           but
           little
           .
        
         
           So
           the
           thought
           of
           a
           Passage
           by
           the
           North-East
           was
           wholly
           laid
           aside
           ,
           till
           of
           late
           within
           this
           Year
           or
           two
           some
           Novile
           Accidents
           happening
           ;
           
           the
           Opinion
           of
           the
           North-East
           was
           received
           in
           some
           ,
           and
           something
           relating
           thereunto
           was
           printed
           in
           the
           Transactions
           of
           the
           
             Royal
             Society
          
           .
        
         
           Now
           will
           I
           come
           to
           the
           Reasons
           of
           that
           induced
           me
           to
           believe
           there
           was
           a
           probability
           of
           a
           Passage
           ,
           and
           then
           the
           cause
           of
           my
           undertaking
           of
           the
           said
           Voyage
           .
        
         
           My
           first
           Reason
           was
           grounded
           on
           the
           Opinion
           of
           
             William
             Barrans
          
           before
           spoke
           of
           ;
           which
           was
           ,
           that
           
             Nova
             Zembla
          
           and
           Greenland
           being
           200
           Leagues
           distance
           between
           one
           and
           the
           other
           ,
           that
           if
           he
           had
           Steered
           away
           North-East
           from
           the
           North
           Cape
           ,
           which
           would
           have
           brought
           him
           in
           the
           mid-way
           betwixt
           the
           two
           Lands
           ,
           that
           then
           he
           might
           have
           probably
           found
           an
           open
           Sea
           ,
           free
           from
           Ice
           ,
           and
           so
           Consequently
           a
           Passage
           ;
           and
           in
           that
           Opinion
           he
           remained
           to
           his
           dying
           day
           ;
           for
           he
           did
           verily
           believe
           that
           the
           Ice
           was
           not
           to
           be
           met
           off
           of
           either
           Shore
           more
           than
           20
           Leagues
           ,
           and
           the
           rest
           to
           be
           free
           and
           open
           ,
           and
           that
           his
           being
           too
           near
           the
           Shore
           of
           
             Nova
             Zembla
          
           was
           the
           cause
           of
           his
           meeting
           so
           much
           Ice
           ,
           which
           was
           the
           overthrow
           of
           his
           Voyage
           ,
           and
           if
           he
           had
           lived
           ,
           he
           had
           purposely
           intended
           another
           Voyage
           ,
           and
           to
           have
           sailed
           the
           mid-way
           .
        
         
           The
           second
           Reason
           that
           made
           me
           believe
           a
           Passage
           ,
           was
           a
           Letter
           sent
           out
           of
           Holland
           ;
           which
           is
           Published
           in
           the
           Transactions
           of
           the
           
             Royal
             Society
          
           ,
           which
           affirmeth
           ,
           the
           Grand
           Zar
           of
           Moscovia
           had
           caused
           a
           particular
           Survey
           of
           the
           Land
           of
           
             Nova
             Z●mbla
             ▪
          
           and
           that
           they
           had
           found
           it
           to
           be
           no
           Island
           ,
           but
           to
           joyn
           to
           the
           main
           Land
           of
           
             Tarta●ia
             ▪
          
           and
           that
           to
           the
           Northward
           of
           it
           was
           a
           free
           and
           open
           Sea.
           
        
         
         
           The
           third
           was
           a
           Journal
           ,
           Printed
           in
           Holland
           ,
           of
           a
           Voyage
           from
           Batavia
           to
           Japan
           ,
           wherein
           the
           Ship
           was
           cast
           away
           upon
           Corea
           ,
           a
           Peninsula
           of
           China
           ,
           where
           by
           the
           Natives
           they
           were
           made
           Slaves
           ,
           The
           Relator
           having
           been
           there
           16
           years
           ,
           at
           last
           escaped
           to
           Japan
           ,
           and
           writ
           this
           Journal
           ,
           wherein
           amongst
           other
           Observations
           he
           Relates
           this
           ;
           that
           in
           a
           Bay
           on
           the
           Coast
           of
           Corea
           ,
           there
           doth
           at
           several
           times
           drive
           in
           dead
           Whales
           with
           English
           and
           Dutch
           Harping
           Irons
           in
           them
           ,
           which
           if
           true
           had
           been
           a
           great
           Argument
           of
           a
           Passage
           .
        
         
           The
           fourth
           was
           a
           Relation
           of
           Mr.
           
             Joseph
             Moxons
          
           ,
           who
           being
           in
           Holland
           above
           20
           years
           since
           ,
           heard
           a
           Dutchman
           relate
           (
           as
           he
           did
           believe
           the
           real
           Matter
           of
           Fact
           )
           that
           he
           had
           been
           under
           the
           Pole
           it self
           ;
           and
           that
           it
           was
           as
           warm
           there
           as
           it
           was
           at
           Amsterdam
           in
           Summer
           time
           .
        
         
           The
           fifth
           was
           a
           Relation
           of
           one
           Captain
           Goulden
           ,
           who
           had
           made
           above
           thirty
           Voyages
           to
           Greenland
           ,
           and
           this
           he
           did
           relate
           to
           his
           Majesty
           ;
           that
           being
           at
           Greenland
           some
           twenty
           Years
           ago
           ,
           he
           was
           in
           Company
           with
           two
           Hollanders
           to
           the
           Eastward
           of
           Edges
           Island
           ,
           and
           that
           the
           Whales
           not
           appearing
           on
           the
           Shore
           ,
           the
           two
           Hollanders
           were
           resolved
           to
           go
           farther
           Northerly
           ,
           and
           to
           Fish
           amongst
           the
           Ice
           ;
           so
           they
           departed
           from
           him
           and
           went
           to
           the
           Northward
           ,
           and
           in
           a
           Fortnights
           time
           returned
           to
           him
           again
           ,
           and
           gave
           it
           out
           ,
           that
           they
           had
           sailed
           unto
           the
           Lat.
           of
           89.
           that
           was
           within
           one
           Degree
           of
           the
           Pole
           ,
           and
           that
           they
           did
           meet
           with
           no
           Ice
           ,
           but
           a
           free
           and
           open
           Sea
           ,
           and
           that
           there
           run
           a
           very
           hollow
           grown
           Sea
           
           
           
           
           
           like
           that
           of
           the
           Bay
           of
           Bisca
           .
           Mr.
           Goulden
           being
           not
           satisfied
           with
           the
           bare
           Relation
           ,
           they
           produced
           him
           four
           Journals
           out
           of
           the
           two
           Ships
           ,
           which
           testified
           the
           same
           ,
           and
           that
           they
           all
           agreed
           within
           four
           minutes
           one
           of
           the
           other
           .
        
         
           The
           sixth
           Inducement
           that
           made
           me
           believe
           there
           was
           a
           Passage
           ,
           was
           a
           Relation
           from
           the
           same
           Captain
           Goulden
           ,
           which
           was
           ,
           that
           all
           the
           drift
           Wood
           that
           they
           found
           at
           Greenland
           ,
           was
           eaten
           with
           a
           Sea-Worm
           to
           the
           very
           Heart
           ,
           which
           if
           so
           ,
           it
           must
           of
           necessity
           come
           out
           of
           a
           Hot
           Climate
           ;
           for
           Experience
           sheweth
           ,
           that
           the
           Worm
           biteth
           in
           no
           Cold
           Country
           ,
           therefore
           it
           could
           not
           be
           supposed
           that
           it
           came
           from
           any
           other
           Country
           than
           
             Jedzo
             ,
             Japan
          
           ,
           or
           some
           Land
           thereabout
           .
        
         
           The
           seventh
           Argument
           was
           another
           Narration
           Printed
           in
           the
           Transactions
           ,
           of
           two
           Ships
           of
           late
           that
           had
           attempted
           the
           Passage
           ,
           sailed
           300
           Leagues
           to
           the
           Eastward
           of
           
             Nova
             Zembla
          
           ,
           and
           had
           after
           prosecuted
           the
           Voyage
           ,
           had
           there
           not
           a
           difference
           arose
           betwixt
           the
           Undertakers
           and
           the
           East-India-Company
           ,
           against
           whose
           Interest
           it
           was
           to
           suffer
           it
           to
           be
           found
           out
           ;
           so
           they
           being
           a
           Body
           ,
           and
           more
           powerful
           than
           the
           other
           ,
           suppressed
           it
           .
        
         
           These
           seven
           were
           the
           main
           Arguments
           ,
           though
           I
           had
           many
           more
           ,
           that
           Converted
           me
           into
           the
           Opinion
           of
           there
           being
           a
           possibility
           of
           a
           Passage
           to
           the
           Northward
           of
           
             Nova
             Zembla
          
           ,
           to
           China
           and
           Japan
           ;
           these
           being
           as
           I
           supposed
           ,
           or
           as
           any
           Man
           would
           have
           done
           ,
           if
           he
           had
           well
           considered
           them
           ,
           to
           be
           Matter
           of
           Fact
           ,
           and
           no
           Fables
           .
        
         
         
           Besides
           these
           Arguments
           ,
           I
           had
           some
           grounded
           upon
           Reason
           and
           Nature
           ,
           which
           seemed
           to
           be
           assistant
           in
           the
           Design
           of
           the
           Attempt
           ,
           supposing
           the
           aforesaid
           Arguments
           to
           be
           true
           ,
           and
           there
           being
           no
           Land
           nor
           Ice
           in
           the
           way
           as
           and
           Obstacle
           to
           hinder
           it
           .
        
         
           The
           first
           was
           ,
           That
           being
           near
           the
           North-Pole
           in
           the
           Summer
           time
           ,
           it
           might
           be
           as
           warm
           as
           under
           the
           Artick
           or
           Antartick
           Circle
           ,
           or
           warmer
           than
           with
           us
           in
           the
           Winter
           time
           ;
           for
           under
           the
           Pole
           it self
           ,
           in
           June
           the
           Sun
           being
           23
           degrees
           high
           ,
           and
           having
           no
           Depression
           towards
           the
           Horizon
           ,
           but
           always
           swimming
           about
           at
           the
           same
           hight
           ,
           might
           illuminate
           that
           part
           of
           the
           Hemisphere
           with
           more
           heat
           than
           it
           doth
           ours
           in
           Winter
           ,
           when
           he
           is
           no
           more
           then
           15
           degrees
           high
           ,
           when
           he
           is
           at
           the
           highest
           ,
           that
           is
           on
           the
           Meridian
           ,
           and
           not
           more
           than
           eight
           Hours
           above
           the
           Horizon
           ;
           or
           that
           it
           might
           be
           as
           hot
           as
           any
           place
           near
           either
           Polar
           Circle
           ,
           because
           there
           the
           Sun
           hath
           a
           Declination
           toward
           the
           Horizon
           ,
           and
           so
           the
           Atmosphere
           hath
           almost
           as
           much
           time
           to
           cool
           ,
           as
           it
           hath
           to
           heat
           ,
           which
           under
           the
           Pole
           should
           have
           no
           intermission
           .
           And
           one
           Argument
           to
           favour
           this
           Opinion
           ,
           was
           the
           Relation
           of
           most
           Greenland
           Traders
           ,
           who
           affirm
           ,
           that
           the
           farther
           North
           they
           go
           on
           the
           Coast
           of
           that
           Land
           ,
           that
           they
           meet
           with
           more
           green
           Herbs
           and
           Grass
           ,
           than
           they
           do
           to
           the
           Southward
           ,
           and
           consequently
           more
           Deer
           .
        
         
           The
           second
           was
           (
           that
           which
           I
           most
           feared
           )
           which
           was
           foggy
           Weather
           ,
           which
           I
           did
           imagin
           ,
           if
           it
           should
           happen
           ,
           it
           could
           not
           at
           the
           same
           
           time
           blow
           hard
           ;
           because
           it
           is
           usual
           in
           all
           other
           Climates
           ,
           when
           Wind
           happeneth
           ,
           to
           disperse
           the
           Fog
           ;
           so
           that
           if
           it
           should
           so
           happen
           ,
           one
           might
           lie
           by
           ,
           or
           make
           little
           way
           till
           Wind
           came
           that
           one
           might
           see
           before
           them
           .
        
         
           The
           third
           was
           the
           Solution
           of
           a
           Doubt
           that
           most
           men
           had
           fancied
           ,
           which
           was
           ,
           that
           if
           one
           came
           near
           the
           Pole
           ,
           the
           Septenteral
           Declination
           of
           the
           Needle
           of
           the
           Compass
           should
           be
           quite
           taken
           away
           ,
           which
           would
           of
           necessity
           follow
           if
           the
           Pole
           of
           the
           World
           ,
           and
           the
           Pole
           of
           the
           Magnet
           were
           all
           one
           ;
           which
           I
           am
           certain
           is
           not
           ,
           but
           is
           placed
           so
           far
           off
           ,
           that
           one
           might
           go
           under
           the
           Pole
           of
           the
           World
           ,
           if
           Land
           or
           Ice
           did
           not
           hinder
           ,
           with
           this
           supposition
           ,
           that
           one
           must
           know
           where
           the
           Pole
           Magnetical
           is
           ,
           to
           allow
           the
           Variation
           that
           will
           there
           happen
           .
        
         
           Having
           considered
           all
           these
           Arguments
           and
           Reasons
           ,
           with
           many
           more
           I
           met
           with
           ,
           which
           will
           be
           too
           tedious
           to
           Relate
           ;
           and
           the
           possibility
           of
           a
           Passage
           being
           now
           imprinted
           in
           my
           Mind
           and
           Inclination
           ,
           I
           do
           intend
           to
           shew
           the
           Reasons
           in
           short
           ,
           that
           induced
           me
           to
           undertake
           the
           said
           Voyage
           .
        
         
           The
           first
           was
           ,
           That
           the
           King
           ,
           whom
           God
           Preserve
           ,
           should
           Rcap
           the
           Honour
           and
           Glory
           thereof
           ,
           and
           his
           Subjects
           the
           Profit
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           There
           being
           no
           Actions
           within
           the
           Hemisphere
           of
           His
           Majesties
           Dominions
           wherein
           any
           vacancy
           was
           ,
           but
           all
           being
           supplyed
           ,
           I
           chose
           ,
           rather
           than
           to
           be
           Idle
           ,
           to
           apply
           my self
           to
           His
           Majesty
           for
           the
           Prosecution
           of
           the
           Design
           ;
           and
           being
           advised
           to
           it
           by
           a
           great
           many
           of
           the
           best
           
           Merchants
           of
           the
           City
           of
           London
           ;
           where
           ,
           after
           divers
           consultations
           with
           them
           ,
           and
           the
           Reasons
           and
           Arguments
           before-mentioned
           being
           debated
           ,
           it
           was
           by
           many
           thought
           Practicable
           ,
           and
           by
           more
           thought
           Profitable
           to
           the
           Nation
           :
           the
           particulars
           to
           relate
           would
           swell
           into
           a
           considerable
           Volume
           .
        
         
           The
           third
           Reason
           was
           peculiar
           to
           my self
           ,
           though
           when
           known
           ,
           to
           the
           Use
           and
           Benefit
           of
           all
           Mankind
           ;
           which
           was
           ,
           that
           having
           for
           some
           years
           past
           framed
           an
           Hypothesis
           of
           the
           motion
           of
           the
           two
           Magnetical
           Poles
           ,
           for
           two
           such
           there
           be
           ;
           and
           by
           the
           Observations
           of
           all
           ,
           or
           most
           that
           writ
           of
           that
           Subject
           ,
           with
           my
           own
           Observation
           ,
           and
           costly
           Experiment
           upon
           a
           great
           many
           Places
           of
           the
           Superficies
           of
           the
           Terrestrial
           Globe
           ;
           I
           having
           found
           out
           their
           Motion
           very
           near
           ,
           and
           thereby
           the
           Inclination
           of
           the
           Magnetical
           Needle
           under
           the
           Horizon
           ,
           in
           all
           Latitudes
           ,
           and
           all
           Longitudes
           ;
           and
           Variation
           of
           the
           Compass
           may
           be
           found
           in
           any
           place
           in
           this
           World
           ,
           without
           assistance
           of
           any
           other
           Luminary
           .
           But
           not
           being
           so
           fully
           satisfied
           as
           I
           might
           be
           ,
           if
           I
           could
           come
           so
           near
           the
           Pole
           as
           was
           supposed
           ,
           it
           prompted
           my
           Inclination
           ,
           as
           far
           as
           any
           other
           Argument
           whatever
           ,
           to
           Attempt
           this
           Voyage
           .
        
         
           So
           having
           all
           these
           Reasons
           that
           there
           was
           a
           Passage
           ,
           and
           Reasons
           for
           me
           to
           unertake
           it
           ;
           I
           advanced
           .
           The
           first
           step
           to
           it
           was
           ,
           I
           drew
           a
           Polar
           Draught
           ,
           whereing
           I
           traced
           all
           those
           Navigators
           that
           had
           Attempted
           the
           North-East
           ,
           which
           I
           presented
           to
           His
           Majesty
           ,
           and
           Royal
           Highness
           ,
           and
           applyed
           my self
           to
           them
           with
           the
           Reasons
           
           aforesaid
           :
           which
           after
           their
           Royal
           Consideration
           ,
           and
           Consult
           with
           many
           Merchants
           ,
           and
           Seamen
           ,
           that
           had
           used
           to
           Sail
           Northward
           ;
           and
           if
           thought
           by
           all
           feasable
           ,
           His
           Majesty
           was
           Graciously
           pleased
           to
           grant
           me
           the
           Speedwell
           Frigot
           ,
           to
           be
           Manned
           and
           Victualled
           at
           his
           Royal
           Charge
           ,
           with
           all
           other
           Appurtenances
           thereunto
           belonging
           .
        
         
           But
           because
           in
           all
           Attempts
           of
           this
           Nature
           it
           was
           not
           Convenient
           to
           venture
           one
           Ship
           alone
           ,
           for
           the
           many
           Accidents
           that
           are
           incident
           to
           a
           single
           Ship
           in
           an
           Enterprize
           of
           this
           Nature
           ;
        
         
           Therefore
           
             
               His
               Royal
               Highness
               the
               Duke
               of
               York
               .
            
             
               The
               Honourable
               John
               Lord
               Barklet
               .
            
             
               Sir
               
                 Joseph
                 Williamson
              
               .
            
             
               Sir
               
                 John
                 Bankes
              
               .
            
             
               Mr.
               
                 Samuel
                 Peepps
              
               .
            
             
               Captain
               Herbert
               .
            
             
               Mr.
               Dupey
               .
            
             
               Mr.
               Hoopgood
               .
            
          
        
         
           These
           Eight
           Honourable
           Persons
           ,
           at
           their
           own
           proper
           Charge
           ,
           bought
           a
           Pink
           ,
           called
           the
           Prosperous
           ,
           of
           the
           Burthen
           of
           a
           Hundred
           and
           twenty
           Tuns
           ,
           fitted
           her
           to
           Sea
           ,
           Men
           ,
           Amunition
           ,
           Provision
           ,
           and
           Merchandize
           ,
           which
           was
           such
           as
           was
           Reasonably
           purposed
           to
           Vend
           on
           the
           Coast
           of
           Tartaria
           ,
           or
           at
           Japan
           ,
           if
           a
           Passage
           had
           been
           found
           .
        
         
           Now
           the
           Ships
           being
           fitting
           out
           ,
           the
           Speedwell
           at
           Deptford
           in
           the
           King's
           Yard
           ,
           where
           the
           Builder
           ,
           
           Mr.
           
             John
             Sish
          
           ,
           took
           no
           ordinary
           Care
           in
           Strengthning
           her
           ,
           and
           in
           her
           Shething
           ,
           which
           was
           as
           well
           performed
           as
           in
           any
           Ship
           that
           ever
           sailed
           on
           the
           Sea.
           Thus
           being
           fitted
           ,
           I
           was
           to
           satisfie
           most
           People
           the
           Advantage
           to
           our
           Nation
           that
           would
           accrue
           ,
           if
           there
           was
           a
           Passage
           .
        
         
           The
           first
           Advantage
           that
           I
           purposed
           ,
           was
           ,
           that
           on
           the
           Coast
           of
           Tartaria
           ,
           it
           being
           a
           cold
           Climate
           ,
           we
           might
           Vend
           our
           English
           Cloth
           ,
           which
           now
           is
           grown
           a
           Drug
           ;
           and
           certain
           it
           is
           that
           they
           wear
           Cloth
           which
           is
           sent
           them
           from
           Russia
           and
           Moscovia
           ,
           which
           before
           it
           arrive
           at
           their
           Hands
           must
           needs
           be
           very
           Dear
           in
           the
           Price
           ;
           so
           if
           one
           could
           come
           on
           their
           Coast
           ,
           one
           might
           Vend
           a
           great
           deal
           more
           ,
           and
           abundance
           Cheaper
           .
        
         
           The
           second
           Advantage
           ,
           as
           would
           have
           been
           ,
           that
           in
           six
           Weeks
           one
           might
           have
           sailed
           to
           Japan
           ,
           which
           in
           the
           other
           Way
           is
           nine
           Months
           ;
           and
           the
           Passage
           that
           way
           being
           as
           hazardous
           and
           perillous
           as
           this
           would
           have
           been
           ,
           if
           there
           had
           been
           any
           Passage
           by
           the
           North-East
           ;
           for
           by
           the
           South
           way
           ,
           all
           the
           way
           betwixt
           Bantam
           and
           Japan
           are
           an
           innumerable
           Company
           of
           Sands
           ,
           Sholes
           ,
           and
           Islands
           ,
           where
           many
           Ships
           are
           yearly
           lost
           ,
           and
           all
           that
           way
           one
           must
           turn
           up
           to
           Windward
           ,
           and
           be
           in
           perpetual
           fear
           of
           the
           Hollanders
           ,
           whom
           if
           we
           meet
           ,
           they
           do
           their
           utmost
           indeavours
           to
           Destroy
           us
           .
        
         
           Then
           if
           there
           had
           been
           a
           North-East
           Passage
           ,
           and
           that
           one
           might
           Sail
           in
           such
           a
           short
           time
           to
           Japan
           ,
           the
           King
           might
           send
           out
           Men
           of
           War
           to
           Japan
           ,
           and
           force
           them
           to
           Trade
           ;
           which
           the
           other
           way
           is
           not
           to
           be
           done
           ,
           because
           they
           cannot
           carry
           
           Provision
           for
           so
           long
           time
           ;
           besides
           the
           certain
           Diseases
           that
           are
           incident
           to
           Ships
           ,
           that
           have
           many
           Men
           in
           hot
           Weather
           ,
           renders
           it
           unpracticable
           :
           these
           and
           many
           other
           Reasons
           I
           used
           ,
           which
           would
           be
           too
           tedious
           to
           Relate
           ,
           they
           being
           as
           yet
           fresh
           in
           the
           memory
           of
           most
           I
           told
           them
           to
           .
        
         
           Now
           after
           all
           these
           Arguments
           and
           Reasons
           ,
           the
           time
           of
           the
           Year
           growing
           on
           for
           us
           to
           be
           gone
           ,
           we
           made
           our
           Ships
           ready
           for
           the
           Sea
           ,
           being
           as
           well
           fitted
           for
           a
           Discovery
           as
           ever
           any
           Ships
           were
           ;
           having
           on
           Board
           each
           Ship
           sixteen
           Months
           Provision
           of
           all
           sorts
           ,
           with
           Sixty
           eight
           Men
           and
           Boys
           in
           the
           Speedwell
           ,
           and
           eighteen
           Men
           in
           the
           Prosperous
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           Journal
           ,
           In
           His
           Majesties
           Ship
           the
           Speedwell
           ,
           Captain
           John
           Wood
           Commander
           ,
           Bound
           for
           the
           Discovery
           of
           a
           Passage
           to
           the
           East-Indies
           ,
           by
           the
           North-East
           :
           Sailing
           about
           Nova
           Zembla
           ,
           and
           Tartary
           ,
           and
           so
           to
           Japan
           .
           1676.
           
        
         
           
             SUnday
             ,
             May
          
           28.
           the
           Wind
           at
           S.
           W.
           sailed
           from
           the
           Buoy
           of
           the
           Noar
           in
           Company
           of
           the
           Prosperous
           ,
           Captain
           Flawes
           Commander
           ,
           being
           bound
           upon
           the
           Discovery
           with
           us
           .
        
         
           At
           Eight
           at
           Night
           the
           Naz●
           Land
           boar
           West
           ;
           North
           about
           six
           Leagues
           ,
           we
           steered
           away
           North-east
           ,
           and
           North-north-east
           .
        
         
           
             Monday
             ,
             May
          
           29.
           
           The
           Wind
           at
           South-west
           ,
           and
           West-south-west
           ,
           a
           fresh
           Gale
           with
           Showers
           of
           Rain
           .
           Course
           per
           Compass
           between
           the
           North-east
           and
           the
           North
           ;
           distance
           sailed
           by
           the
           Log
           73
           Miles
           ,
           true
           Course
           Protracted
           since
           last
           Night
           Eight
           a
           Clock
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           is
           North
           28
           d.
           East
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           68
           Miles
           ▪
           and
           departure
           East
           from
           the
           Naze
           Land
           36
           Miles
           ;
           Lat.
           by
           Judgment
           ,
           as
           in
           the
           Margent
           .
           Thick
           cloudy
           Weather
           .
        
         
           
             Tuesday
             ,
             May
          
           30.
           
           From
           yesterday
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           the
           Wind
           variable
           from
           South-west
           
           to
           the
           South-east
           ,
           thick
           cloudy
           Weather
           ,
           and
           a
           fresh
           Gale.
           Course
           per
           Compass
           North-north-west
           and
           North-west
           by
           North
           ;
           distance
           sailed
           by
           the
           Log
           95
           Miles
           ,
           true
           Course
           is
           North
           28
           d.
           West
           ,
           distance
           of
           Lat.
           83
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           West
           45
           Miles
           ,
           Lat.
           per
           Judgment
           ;
           Meridian
           distance
           West
           nine
           Miles
           .
        
         
           
             Wednesday
             ,
             May
          
           31.
           
           From
           yesterday
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           the
           Winds
           variable
           with
           Calms
           and
           Rains.
           Courses
           per
           Traverse
           ;
           true
           Course
           Protracted
           ,
           with
           all
           impediments
           allowed
           ,
           is
           North
           43
           d.
           West
           60
           Miles
           ,
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           42.
           
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           West
           40
           Miles
           ,
           Lat.
           per
           Judgment
           54
           d.
           13
           m.
           Lat.
           by
           a
           good
           Observation
           at
           Noon
           55
           d.
           30
           m.
           at
           which
           time
           the
           Land
           between
           New-Castle
           and
           Berwick
           bore
           West
           about
           8
           or
           9
           Leagues
           :
           Meridian
           distance
           Current
           from
           the
           bearing
           of
           the
           Land
           ,
           and
           the
           Lat.
           is
           88
           Miles
           ,
           50
           Fathom
           Water
           :
           saw
           two
           Ships
           standing
           to
           the
           Southward
           ,
           but
           would
           not
           show
           their
           Colours
           .
        
         
           
             Thursday
             ,
             June
          
           1.
           
           From
           yesterday
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           a
           fresh
           Gale
           from
           the
           West
           by
           South
           to
           the
           South-west
           .
           Course
           per
           Compass
           between
           the
           North
           ,
           and
           the
           North-west
           ;
           distance
           sailed
           by
           the
           Log
           76
           Miles
           ,
           true
           Course
           Protracted
           is
           North
           16
           d.
           West
           Lat.
           by
           a
           good
           Observation
           56
           d.
           41
           m.
           departure
           West
           21
           Miles
           .
        
         
           At
           nine
           in
           the
           Morning
           we
           gave
           Chase
           to
           a
           Scotch
           Fisherman
           ,
           and
           at
           Noon
           came
           up
           with
           her
           ,
           and
           bought
           some
           Fish
           of
           him
           ;
           at
           Noon
           a
           hard
           Gale
           steered
           away
           North
           ,
           being
           about
           seven
           or
           eight
           Leagues
           from
           the
           Land
           ,
           between
           Montross
           and
           Edenburgh
           :
           we
           steered
           along
           ,
           
           the
           Course
           North
           by
           East
           till
           eight
           a
           Clock
           .
        
         
           
             Friday
             ,
             June
          
           2.
           
           From
           yesterday
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           the
           Winds
           variable
           with
           fair
           Weather
           .
           Course
           per
           Compass
           North
           ;
           distance
           sailed
           by
           the
           Log
           117
           Miles
           ,
           but
           by
           a
           good
           Observation
           120
           Miles
           ,
           Lat.
           58
           d.
           41
           m.
           Winds
           from
           the
           West-south-west
           to
           the
           South-west
           .
        
         
           At
           two
           a
           Clock
           a
           great
           gust
           of
           Wind
           at
           North-west
           with
           Rain
           ;
           we
           hand
           our
           Top-sails
           ,
           and
           at
           three
           it
           blew
           a
           Storm
           of
           Wind
           ;
           we
           lay
           a
           Try
           under
           a
           Main-sail
           till
           ten
           a
           Clock
           ,
           then
           sent
           our
           Fore-sail
           .
        
         
           
             Saturday
             ,
             June
          
           3.
           
           From
           yesterday
           Noon
           to
           this
           day
           Noon
           ,
           true
           Course
           Protracted
           Leeward
           way
           ,
           and
           all
           impediments
           allowed
           is
           North
           ▪
           East
           42
           Miles
           ,
           Lat.
           by
           a
           good
           Observation
           is
           59
           d.
           23
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           from
           the
           Naze
           Land
           is
           100
           Miles
           :
           at
           Noon
           saw
           a
           small
           Island
           ,
           called
           Foril
           lying
           to
           the
           South
           of
           Shetland
           ,
           bearing
           West-north-west
           about
           four
           Leagues
           :
           in
           the
           Afternoon
           little
           Wind.
           
        
         
           Note
           that
           we
           found
           the
           Ship
           more
           to
           the
           Westward
           than
           expected
           being
           caused
           by
           a
           variation
           of
           6
           or
           7
           d.
           East
           .
        
         
           
             Sunday
             ,
             June
          
           4.
           
           This
           Forenoon
           little
           Wind
           ,
           with
           Calms
           till
           about
           12
           at
           Noon
           ,
           at
           which
           time
           sprung
           up
           a
           Gale
           West-north-west
           blowing
           very
           hard
           ;
           we
           ply
           to
           windward
           ,
           and
           turned
           into
           
           Brace-Sound
           ,
           and
           anchored
           in
           nine
           Fathom
           Water
           ,
           right
           against
           the
           Town
           called
           Lerwick
           ;
           here
           is
           the
           remains
           of
           a
           Fort
           that
           was
           built
           in
           the
           time
           of
           War
           with
           Holland
           ,
           but
           upon
           the
           Peace
           with
           the
           Hollanders
           it
           was
           demolished
           ,
           for
           fear
           any
           other
           
           Nation
           might
           come
           and
           take
           it
           ,
           and
           so
           keep
           it
           .
        
         
           
             Saturday
             ,
             June
          
           10.
           
           Rid
           still
           till
           Saturday
           seven
           a
           Clock
           ,
           at
           which
           time
           Weighed
           ,
           the
           Wind
           at
           South-west
           ;
           we
           took
           in
           a
           Pilot
           ,
           and
           sailed
           out
           through
           the
           North
           end
           of
           Brace
           Sound
           ,
           having
           three
           Fathom
           Water
           over
           the
           shallowest
           place
           .
        
         
           
             Sunday
             ,
             June
          
           11.
           
           At
           four
           in
           the
           Morning
           Scau
           bore
           West
           by
           North
           about
           six
           Leagues
           ;
           a
           fresh
           Gale
           at
           South-west
           ,
           hasey
           Weather
           .
        
         
           From
           four
           in
           the
           Morning
           till
           twelve
           at
           Night
           Course
           North-north-east
           ,
           distance
           sailed
           by
           the
           Log
           35
           Miles
           :
           true
           Course
           allowed
           from
           the
           bearing
           of
           the
           Land
           is
           North-east
           41
           Miles
           ,
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           30
           Miles
           ,
           Lat.
           by
           Judgment
           61
           d.
           26
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           from
           Shetland
           30
           Miles
           East
           .
        
         
           From
           yesterday
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           a
           strong
           Gale
           at
           South-west
           ,
           West-south-west
           ,
           West
           and
           West-north-west
           .
           Course
           per
           Compass
           North-north-east
           ,
           distance
           sailed
           by
           the
           Log
           147
           Miles
           ,
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           135
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           East
           56
           Miles
           ,
           Lat.
           by
           Judgment
           63
           d.
           42
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           East
           86
           Miles
           ;
           thick
           cloudy
           Weather
           ,
           at
           Noon
           little
           Wind.
           
        
         
           
             Tuesday
             ,
             June
          
           13.
           
           From
           yesterday
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           little
           Wind
           ,
           and
           variable
           ,
           with
           Calms
           from
           the
           North-west
           to
           North-north-east
           ;
           we
           ply
           to
           windward
           .
           True
           Course
           Protracted
           ,
           all
           impediments
           allowed
           ,
           is
           North-north-east
           23
           Miles
           ,
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           21
           Miles
           North
           ,
           departure
           East
           8
           Miles
           ,
           Lat.
           by
           Judgment
           64
           d.
           03
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           94
           Miles
           ,
           Lat.
           by
           a
           good
           Observation
           64
           d.
           03
           m.
           
        
         
         
           
             Wednesday
             ,
             June
          
           14.
           
           From
           the
           13.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           the
           Winds
           variable
           ,
           with
           fresh
           Gales
           ,
           Rains
           ,
           and
           little
           Winds
           .
           Course
           per
           Traverse
           ,
           between
           the
           North-east
           and
           the
           North
           ,
           distance
           sailed
           by
           the
           Log
           92
           Miles
           ,
           true
           Course
           Protracted
           ,
           all
           impediments
           allowed
           ,
           is
           North
           18
           d.
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           81
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           East
           30
           Miles
           ,
           Meridian
           distance
           124
           Miles
           .
        
         
           
             Thursday
             ,
             June
          
           15.
           
           From
           the
           14.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           the
           Winds
           variable
           ,
           with
           Calms
           from
           the
           West
           to
           the
           South-west
           .
           Course
           per
           Compass
           North-north-east
           ;
           distance
           sailed
           by
           the
           Log
           67
           Miles
           ,
           true
           Course
           Protracted
           ,
           with
           allowance
           ,
           is
           North
           22
           ½
           d.
           East
           ,
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           62
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           East
           26
           Miles
           ,
           Lat.
           per
           Judgment
           66
           d.
           26
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           150
           Miles
           East
           .
           At
           Noon
           broke
           our
           Main
           Topsail-Yard
           ,
           being
           rotten
           in
           the
           Slings
           ;
           thick
           hasey
           Weather
           .
        
         
           
             Friday
             ,
             June
          
           16.
           
           From
           the
           15.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           a
           fresh
           Gale
           at
           West-north-west
           ,
           and
           West-south-west
           ,
           with
           Rains
           and
           thick
           Weather
           .
           Course
           per
           Compass
           North-north-east
           ,
           and
           North-east
           by
           North
           ;
           distance
           sailed
           per
           Log
           126
           Miles
           ,
           true
           Course
           Protracted
           ,
           is
           North
           30
           d.
           East
           ,
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           108
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           East
           63
           Miles
           ,
           Lat
           per
           Judgment
           68
           d.
           14
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           223
           Miles
           .
        
         
           
             Saturday
             ,
             June
          
           17.
           
           From
           the
           16.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           a
           fresh
           Gale
           at
           West-north-west
           and
           West
           ,
           with
           Rain
           and
           cloudy
           Weather
           .
           Course
           per
           Compass
           North-east
           ,
           distance
           sailed
           by
           the
           Log
           127
           Miles
           ,
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           90
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           East
           90
           Miles
           ,
           Lat
           per
           Judgment
           69
           d.
           
           48
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           303
           Miles
           ,
           but
           by
           a
           good
           Observation
           at
           Noon
           Lat.
           69
           d.
           53
           m.
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           between
           the
           Dead
           Reckoning
           and
           Observation
           is
           9
           Miles
           ,
           which
           imputed
           to
           a
           westerly
           variation
           ,
           which
           is
           found
           by
           an
           Azimuth
           7
           d.
           Meridian
           distance
           Corrected
           is
           300
           Miles
           ;
           fair
           Weather
           .
        
         
           
             Sunday
             ,
             June
          
           18.
           
           From
           the
           17.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           day
           Noon
           ,
           the
           Wind
           from
           West-north-west
           ,
           to
           the
           West-south-west
           ,
           fair
           Weather
           .
           Course
           per
           Compass
           North-east
           by
           East
           ;
           distance
           sailed
           by
           the
           Log
           83
           Miles
           ,
           true
           Course
           Protracted
           ,
           and
           variation
           allowed
           ,
           is
           East
           33
           d.
           North
           ,
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           47
           Miles
           ,
           by
           Observation
           ,
           departure
           66
           Miles
           ,
           Lat.
           by
           a
           good
           Observation
           70
           d.
           30
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           367
           Miles
           East
           .
           Yesterday
           and
           this
           Day
           we
           saw
           many
           Whales
           .
        
         
           
             Monday
             ,
             June
          
           19.
           
           From
           the
           18.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           a
           fresh
           Gale
           at
           West
           by
           South
           ;
           thick
           hasey
           Weather
           with
           Rains
           ;
           at
           seven
           a
           Clock
           in
           the
           Forenoon
           saw
           many
           Sea
           Fowles
           ,
           more
           than
           at
           any
           time
           yet
           ,
           with
           many
           Jubartesses
           :
           at
           ten
           a
           Clock
           saw
           the
           Land
           ,
           being
           the
           Islands
           that
           lie
           about
           20
           Leagues
           to
           the
           Westward
           of
           the
           North
           Cape
           ;
           true
           Course
           allowed
           for
           variation
           ,
           is
           North-north-east
           ;
           distance
           sailed
           by
           the
           Log
           135
           Miles
           ,
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           50
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           East
           30
           Miles
           ,
           Lat.
           per
           Judgment
           71
           d.
           20
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           497
           Miles
           .
           At
           Noon
           the
           Island
           Sanden
           bore
           South
           by
           East
           ;
           about
           8
           or
           9
           Leagues
           off
           this
           Island
           is
           a
           high
           craggy
           Land
           ,
           with
           some
           Snow
           on
           the
           Land.
           
        
         
         
           
             Tuesday
             ,
             June
          
           20.
           
           From
           the
           19.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           day
           Noon
           ,
           Course
           per
           Compass
           between
           the
           East-north-east
           and
           the
           North-east
           ;
           distance
           sailed
           by
           the
           Log
           128
           Miles
           ,
           true
           Coursed
           allowed
           for
           the
           variation
           ,
           is
           North
           43
           d.
           East
           ,
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           91
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           88
           Miles
           East
           ,
           Lat.
           per
           Judgment
           72
           d.
           51
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           585
           Miles
           .
           From
           yesterday
           Noon
           to
           this
           day
           Noon
           ,
           the
           first
           12
           Hours
           a
           fresh
           Gale
           at
           South-west
           ,
           but
           the
           last
           12
           Hours
           much
           Wind
           ,
           with
           small
           Rains
           and
           great
           Fogs
           :
           saw
           many
           Sea
           Fowles
           .
        
         
           
             Wednesday
             ,
             June
          
           21.
           
           From
           the
           20.
           to
           the
           21.
           
           Noon
           ,
           a
           stiff
           Gale
           with
           Gusts
           ,
           and
           small
           Rains.
           Course
           per
           Compass
           North-east
           ,
           distance
           sailed
           by
           Log
           35
           Miles
           ,
           true
           Course
           allowed
           by
           variation
           ,
           is
           North
           40
           d.
           East
           ,
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           103
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           East
           86
           Miles
           ,
           Lat.
           per
           Judgment
           74
           d.
           34
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           671
           Miles
           :
           thick
           cloudy
           Weather
           ,
           saw
           many
           Sea
           Fowles
           .
        
         
           
             Thursday
             ,
             June
          
           22.
           
           From
           the
           21.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           22.
           
           Noon
           ,
           Course
           per
           Compass
           North-east
           ,
           distance
           sailed
           per
           Log
           116
           Miles
           ,
           true
           Course
           allowed
           by
           variation
           ,
           and
           Leeward
           way
           ,
           is
           North
           43
           d.
           East
           ,
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           85
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           East
           79
           Miles
           ,
           Lat.
           per
           Judgment
           75
           d.
           59
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           750
           Miles
           East
           :
           the
           Wind
           at
           North-west
           a
           fresh
           Gale
           ,
           Weather
           variable
           ,
           sometime
           cloudy
           ,
           and
           sometimes
           fair
           ,
           but
           very
           cold
           .
        
         
           At
           Noon
           we
           saw
           Ice
           right
           a
           Head
           about
           a
           League
           off
           ,
           we
           sailed
           close
           to
           it
           ,
           and
           found
           it
           to
           lie
           away
           East-south-east
           ,
           and
           West-north-west
           ,
           we
           bore
           away
           East-south-east
           along
           the
           Ice
           :
           in
           the
           Afternoon
           we
           had
           some
           small
           Snow
           ,
           and
           very
           cold
           Weather
           .
        
         
         
           
             Friday
             ,
             June
          
           23.
           
           From
           yesterday
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           we
           steered
           along
           the
           Ice
           ,
           finding
           it
           to
           have
           many
           openings
           ,
           which
           we
           sailed
           into
           ,
           but
           found
           them
           to
           be
           Bays
           ,
           our
           true
           Course
           sailed
           along
           the
           Ice
           ,
           the
           variation
           allowed
           ,
           was
           East
           14
           d.
           South
           77
           m.
           Lat.
           per
           Judgment
           75
           d.
           41
           m.
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           19
           m.
           departure
           74
           Miles
           ,
           Meridian
           distance
           824
           Miles
           ,
           Wind
           N.
           N.
           W.
           
        
         
           At
           Noon
           we
           sounded
           and
           had
           158
           Fathom
           soft
           green
           Oar
           ,
           and
           found
           the
           Current
           to
           set
           South-south-east
           ;
           we
           have
           found
           very
           smooth
           to
           Leeward
           of
           this
           Ice
           ,
           and
           in
           some
           places
           found
           pieces
           of
           the
           Ice
           driving
           off
           a
           Mile
           ,
           sometimes
           more
           or
           less
           from
           the
           main
           body
           of
           the
           Ice
           ;
           finding
           it
           to
           be
           in
           several
           strange
           shapes
           ,
           resembling
           Trees
           ,
           Beasts
           ,
           Fishes
           ,
           Fowles
           ,
           &c.
           
           The
           main
           Body
           of
           the
           Ice
           being
           low
           ,
           but
           very
           Craggy
           ,
           being
           many
           pieces
           lying
           close
           together
           ,
           and
           some
           a
           top
           of
           each
           other
           ,
           and
           in
           some
           places
           we
           saw
           high
           hillocks
           of
           blue
           colour
           ,
           but
           all
           the
           rest
           of
           the
           Ice
           very
           white
           ,
           as
           though
           it
           were
           Snow
           .
           In
           some
           places
           we
           saw
           drift
           Wood
           amongst
           the
           Ice
           ,
           we
           took
           up
           some
           of
           the
           Ice
           and
           melted
           it
           ,
           and
           the
           Water
           very
           fresh
           and
           good
           :
           this
           Day
           we
           found
           very
           cold
           and
           freezing
           .
        
         
           
             Saturday
             ;
             June
          
           24.
           
           From
           the
           23.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           little
           Wind
           at
           North
           by
           West
           ,
           we
           steered
           close
           along
           the
           Ice
           ,
           sailing
           into
           every
           opening
           ,
           but
           could
           not
           find
           any
           Passage
           through
           ,
           neither
           could
           we
           see
           over
           the
           Ice
           in
           any
           place
           from
           our
           Topmast-Head
           ;
           true
           Course
           Protracted
           ,
           as
           we
           sailed
           along
           the
           Ice
           ,
           is
           East
           34
           d.
           South
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           24
           Miles
           South
           ,
           departure
           East
           
           34
           Miles
           ,
           Lat.
           per
           Judgment
           75
           d.
           18
           m.
           but
           by
           a
           good
           Observation
           at
           Noon
           the
           Lat.
           74
           d.
           50
           m.
           the
           difference
           between
           the
           Dead
           Lat.
           and
           the
           observed
           Lat.
           is
           28
           Miles
           ,
           which
           difference
           hath
           been
           caused
           by
           the
           Current
           setting
           South-south-east
           .
        
         
           At
           Noon
           we
           sounded
           and
           had
           128
           Fathom
           Water
           ,
           and
           the
           Current
           as
           yesterday
           South-south-east
           :
           this
           last
           24
           Hours
           fair
           Weather
           ,
           with
           little
           Winds
           ,
           having
           some
           small
           Fogs
           ,
           but
           lasted
           not
           above
           half
           an
           Hour
           at
           a
           time
           .
           Meridian
           distance
           858
           Miles
           .
        
         
           
             Sunday
             ,
             June
          
           25.
           
           From
           the
           24.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           little
           Wind
           ,
           with
           Calms
           ,
           and
           the
           most
           part
           foggy
           ,
           so
           that
           we
           durst
           not
           venture
           in
           the
           Ice
           ,
           but
           lay
           by
           ,
           and
           stood
           off
           ;
           true
           Course
           Protracted
           is
           East
           30
           d.
           South
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           13
           Miles
           ,
           South
           departure
           East
           19
           Miles
           ,
           Lat.
           per
           Judgment
           74
           d.
           37
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           877
           Miles
           ,
           East
           Wind
           variable
           from
           the
           North-west
           to
           the
           West-south-west
           .
        
         
           At
           One
           in
           the
           Afternoon
           the
           Fog
           broke
           up
           ,
           hard
           freezing
           Weather
           ,
           our
           Rigging
           and
           Sails
           frozen
           ,
           for
           as
           fast
           as
           the
           Fog
           fell
           it
           freezed
           .
        
         
           
             Monday
             ,
             June
          
           26.
           
           From
           the
           25.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           little
           Wind
           from
           the
           North-west
           to
           North
           ;
           Course
           per
           Compass
           between
           the
           West-south-west
           ,
           and
           the
           North-east
           ;
           distance
           sailed
           by
           the
           Log
           63
           Miles
           ,
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           7
           Miles
           North
           ,
           departure
           East
           58
           Miles
           ;
           true
           Course
           Protracted
           is
           East
           7
           d.
           North
           Lat.
           per
           Judgment
           is
           74
           d.
           40
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           935
           Miles
           .
        
         
           At
           Noon
           we
           stood
           is
           close
           with
           the
           Ice
           ,
           and
           saw
           something
           to
           move
           ,
           we
           judging
           it
           might
           be
           
           Sea-Horses
           ,
           or
           Morses
           ,
           lying
           on
           the
           Ice
           ,
           we
           sent
           our
           Boat
           to
           see
           ,
           and
           they
           found
           two
           Sea-Horses
           upon
           the
           Ice
           :
           they
           fired
           several
           shot
           at
           them
           ,
           but
           could
           not
           kill
           them
           :
           notwithstanding
           that
           they
           were
           much
           wounded
           they
           got
           into
           the
           Water
           ,
           and
           so
           went
           under
           the
           Ice
           .
           We
           have
           found
           the
           Ice
           to
           lie
           away
           East
           ,
           these
           24
           Hours
           the
           Wind
           at
           North
           ,
           and
           very
           cold
           ,
           and
           at
           12
           at
           Night
           70
           Fathom
           green
           Oar
           :
           at
           9
           in
           the
           Evening
           saw
           Land
           ,
           the
           North
           part
           of
           it
           bearing
           East
           ,
           and
           the
           South
           part
           South-east
           ,
           being
           high
           and
           covered
           with
           Snow
           ,
           about
           15
           Leagues
           off
           .
           Sounded
           and
           had
           125
           Fathom
           .
        
         
           
             Tuesday
             ,
             June
          
           27.
           
           From
           Monday
           the
           26.
           to
           Tuesday
           27.
           little
           Wind
           from
           the
           North-west
           to
           the
           North
           by
           East
           ,
           with
           Calms
           :
           we
           kept
           close
           with
           the
           Ice
           ,
           and
           found
           it
           joyn
           to
           the
           Land
           of
           
             Nova
             Zembla
          
           ;
           true
           Course
           Protracted
           is
           East
           by
           North
           30
           Miles
           ,
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           16
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           East
           29
           Miles
           ,
           Lat.
           per
           Judgment
           74
           d.
           46
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           964
           Miles
           ,
           at
           Noon
           83
           Fathom
           Water
           ,
           about
           6
           Leagues
           from
           the
           Shore
           ,
           we
           rowed
           in
           towards
           the
           Shore
           ,
           and
           found
           the
           Ice
           to
           lic
           about
           5
           Leagues
           from
           the
           Shore
           ,
           we
           went
           out
           of
           our
           Boat
           on
           the
           Ice
           ,
           and
           killed
           a
           young
           Sea-Horse
           ,
           or
           Mors
           ,
           and
           saw
           many
           more
           ,
           but
           could
           not
           kill
           them
           with
           Muskets
           ,
           notwithstanding
           we
           fired
           7
           Muskets
           into
           one
           of
           them
           ,
           neither
           could
           we
           come
           to
           lame
           them
           ;
           for
           they
           get
           into
           the
           Sea
           before
           you
           can
           come
           to
           them
           ;
           they
           keeping
           Watch
           ,
           and
           are
           very
           shy
           ,
           always
           lying
           on
           the
           brink
           of
           the
           Ice
           ,
           ready
           to
           take
           the
           Sea.
           We
           Sounded
           and
           had
           80
           Fathom
           Water
           green
           
           Oar
           ,
           at
           which
           time
           we
           saw
           the
           Ground
           plain
           ,
           being
           very
           smooth
           Water
           .
           Meridian
           distance
           from
           the
           Ship
           to
           the
           Land
           15
           Miles
           ,
           which
           maketh
           Meridian
           distance
           from
           the
           Land
           to
           this
           place
           980
           Miles
           .
        
         
           
             Wednesday
             ,
             June
          
           28.
           
           From
           the
           27.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           very
           little
           Wind
           ,
           but
           the
           most
           part
           Calm
           from
           the
           North
           to
           the
           West
           ;
           true
           Course
           Protracted
           West-north-west
           10
           Miles
           ,
           Lat.
           per
           Judgment
           74
           d.
           46
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           970
           Miles
           .
           In
           the
           Afternoon
           stood
           in
           close
           with
           the
           Ice
           ,
           and
           found
           it
           to
           joyn
           to
           the
           main
           Land
           ;
           at
           Night
           stood
           off
           from
           the
           Ice
           .
        
         
           
             Thursday
             ,
             June
          
           29.
           
           From
           the
           28
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           little
           Wind
           ,
           with
           Rains
           :
           we
           stood
           away
           from
           the
           Ice
           to
           Sea
           ;
           true
           Course
           allowed
           is
           South
           27
           d.
           West
           20
           Miles
           ,
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           16
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           8
           Miles
           ,
           Lat.
           per
           Judgment
           74
           d.
           40
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           964
           Miles
           .
           At
           Noon
           the
           Wind
           at
           West
           and
           West
           and
           by
           South
           ,
           a
           sine
           Gale
           ,
           but
           very
           foggy
           Weather
           ;
           we
           stand
           away
           South
           to
           get
           from
           the
           Ice
           ,
           we
           being
           in-bayed
           in
           it
           .
           At
           11
           at
           Night
           the
           Prosperous
           Pink
           fired
           a
           Gun
           ,
           and
           bore
           down
           upon
           us
           ,
           crying
           out
           Ice
           on
           the
           Weather-Bow
           ,
           with
           that
           we
           clap'd
           the
           Helm
           hard
           a
           Weather
           ,
           Veered
           out
           the
           Main-Sheet
           to
           Ware
           the
           Ship
           ;
           but
           before
           the
           Ship
           could
           Ware
           ,
           and
           bring
           to
           upon
           the
           other
           Tack
           ,
           She
           struck
           on
           a
           ledge
           of
           Rocks
           which
           lay
           sunk
           .
        
         
           From
           12
           at
           Noon
           to
           11
           at
           Night
           thick
           foggy
           Weather
           ,
           the
           Wind
           from
           the
           North-west
           to
           the
           West
           by
           South
           .
           Course
           per
           Compass
           between
           the
           South-west
           ,
           and
           the
           South
           by
           West
           ,
           close
           Haul'd
           ;
           
           but
           at
           Night
           the
           Prosperous
           Pink
           saw
           the
           Sea
           break
           on
           the
           Weather-Bow
           ,
           bearing
           down
           upon
           us
           cryed
           out
           it
           was
           the
           Ice
           ;
           with
           that
           we
           presently
           bore
           up
           round
           to
           bring
           to
           upon
           the
           other
           Tack
           ,
           but
           our
           Ship
           not
           wearing
           round
           ,
           run
           on
           a
           ledge
           of
           Rocks
           ,
           there
           stuck
           fast
           ,
           but
           Captain
           Flawes
           Ship
           got
           clear
           ,
           wearing
           more
           rounder
           :
           we
           fired
           several
           Guns
           to
           give
           Captain
           Flawes
           notice
           of
           our
           distress
           ,
           we
           used
           all
           means
           possible
           to
           get
           her
           off
           ,
           by
           carrying
           out
           a
           Hasser
           and
           Anchor
           ,
           and
           staving
           of
           Water
           and
           Beer
           ,
           and
           throwing
           Provision
           over
           Board
           ,
           but
           could
           not
           get
           the
           Ship
           off
           ,
           for
           the
           Water
           did
           Ebb
           ,
           and
           the
           Ship
           Sued
           above
           3
           Foot
           ;
           but
           when
           the
           Flood
           came
           it
           brought
           a
           great
           Sea
           with
           it
           ,
           and
           the
           Ship
           beat
           very
           hard
           :
           we
           used
           all
           means
           to
           heave
           her
           off
           ,
           but
           could
           not
           ,
           and
           the
           Ship
           making
           Water
           more
           than
           we
           could
           Pump
           ;
           with
           that
           we
           cut
           our
           Masts
           by
           the
           Board
           ,
           and
           sent
           our
           Yaul
           unto
           the
           Shore
           to
           discover
           some
           place
           to
           Land
           ,
           at
           whose
           return
           aboard
           brought
           word
           that
           there
           was
           landing
           ,
           with
           that
           we
           got
           up
           Bread
           out
           of
           the
           Bread
           Room
           ,
           and
           brought
           it
           up
           into
           the
           great
           Cabbin
           :
           and
           the
           Carpenter
           made
           ready
           to
           save
           some
           Tools
           ,
           and
           necessaries
           to
           Rebuild
           our
           Long-Boat
           to
           save
           our
           lives
           ,
           if
           so
           necessitated
           ,
           that
           Captain
           Flawes
           should
           not
           return
           to
           us
           .
           So
           about
           12
           at
           Noon
           we
           got
           all
           our
           Men
           ashore
           ,
           except
           two
           which
           were
           drowned
           in
           the
           Pinnace
           ,
           by
           a
           Sea
           which
           broke
           into
           her
           ,
           just
           as
           she
           put
           off
           from
           the
           Ship
           side
           :
           having
           Bread
           ,
           Powder
           ,
           and
           Provisions
           in
           her
           ,
           and
           all
           lost
           with
           the
           Pinnace
           .
           Also
           ,
           to
           our
           great
           grief
           ,
           having
           nothing
           but
           the
           Long-Boat
           ,
           
           to
           trust
           in
           ,
           to
           save
           our
           lives
           ,
           which
           could
           not
           carry
           above
           30
           Men
           of
           70.
           
           We
           used
           all
           means
           to
           save
           Bread
           ,
           but
           the
           Ship
           filling
           up
           to
           the
           upper
           Deck
           ,
           we
           were
           forced
           to
           leave
           her
           ,
           having
           saved
           but
           two
           Bags
           of
           Bread
           ,
           with
           some
           pieces
           of
           Pork
           ,
           and
           a
           little
           Cheese
           :
           this
           being
           all
           on
           Shore
           ,
           we
           carried
           our
           Provisions
           ,
           and
           other
           Necessaries
           ,
           upon
           a
           Hill
           ,
           where
           came
           to
           visit
           us
           one
           of
           the
           Natives
           ,
           which
           was
           a
           Prodigious
           great
           white
           Bear
           ,
           which
           one
           of
           our
           Men
           shot
           at
           ,
           and
           as
           we
           supposed
           hit
           her
           ,
           which
           made
           her
           run
           away
           :
           with
           that
           we
           made
           all
           hast
           to
           build
           us
           a
           Tent
           to
           keep
           us
           from
           the
           cold
           ,
           and
           to
           keep
           our
           Provisions
           dry
           ,
           having
           saved
           Canvas
           for
           the
           purpose
           ,
           which
           we
           laid
           over
           Oars
           and
           Spars
           ,
           and
           threw
           up
           a
           Trench
           of
           Earth
           round
           us
           ,
           to
           preserve
           us
           from
           Wild
           Beasts
           ;
           but
           all
           this
           time
           indured
           much
           cold
           ,
           most
           of
           our
           Men
           being
           wet
           ,
           and
           having
           no
           firing
           ;
           therefore
           all
           our
           Hopes
           and
           Prayers
           were
           that
           God
           would
           send
           us
           the
           Ship
           ashore
           .
        
         
           
             Friday
             ,
             June
          
           30.
           
           A
           fresh
           Gale
           ,
           and
           very
           foggy
           ,
           with
           a
           great
           Sea
           ;
           our
           Ship
           began
           to
           split
           ,
           and
           much
           Wreck
           came
           ashore
           ;
           so
           that
           we
           got
           Oars
           ,
           Spars
           and
           Deals
           ,
           to
           build
           us
           Tents
           ,
           and
           firing
           ,
           of
           which
           we
           saved
           as
           much
           as
           we
           could
           ;
           but
           the
           Weather
           proved
           very
           foggy
           to
           our
           great
           grief
           ,
           being
           we
           could
           not
           expect
           Captain
           Flawes
           as
           long
           as
           the
           Fog
           continued
           .
           The
           Wind
           at
           West-north-west
           .
        
         
           
             Saturday
             ,
             July
          
           1.
           
           The
           Wind
           at
           North-west
           a
           fresh
           Gale
           ,
           the
           Ship
           brake
           in
           pieces
           ,
           so
           that
           we
           had
           much
           Wreck
           came
           ashore
           ,
           and
           Provisions
           ,
           which
           we
           indeavoured
           to
           save
           with
           much
           pains
           
           and
           trouble
           ,
           the
           Sea
           breaking
           much
           on
           the
           Shore
           ,
           and
           the
           Weather
           very
           cold
           and
           foggy
           .
           We
           saved
           two
           Casks
           of
           Flower
           ,
           some
           Brandy
           ,
           and
           a
           Butt
           of
           Beer
           ,
           and
           a
           Cask
           of
           Oil
           :
           the
           Flower
           did
           us
           great
           kindness
           to
           save
           our
           Bread
           ,
           for
           we
           made
           of
           the
           Flower
           Pan-Cakes
           ,
           and
           Pudding
           ,
           and
           baked
           Cakes
           on
           Stones
           ,
           to
           our
           great
           refreshment
           .
        
         
           
             Sunday
             ,
             July
          
           2.
           
           The
           Wind
           at
           West
           ,
           and
           very
           foggy
           ;
           we
           saved
           more
           Flower
           ,
           Butter
           ,
           and
           a
           few
           pieces
           of
           Beef
           and
           Pork
           ,
           the
           Cask
           being
           Staved
           .
           The
           Gunneras
           he
           was
           saving
           of
           Provision
           ,
           there
           came
           a
           great
           White
           Bear
           to
           him
           ,
           which
           he
           shot
           at
           ,
           and
           fell'd
           her
           down
           ,
           but
           she
           rose
           again
           and
           at
           him
           ;
           with
           that
           there
           came
           more
           Men
           and
           fired
           at
           her
           :
           she
           was
           a
           very
           great
           one
           ,
           and
           very
           Fat
           ,
           and
           the
           Flesh
           very
           good
           ,
           and
           look'd
           delicate
           ,
           and
           Eat
           well
           .
        
         
           
             Saturday
             ,
             July
          
           8.
           
           The
           Wind
           at
           West-north-west
           ;
           a
           very
           great
           Fog
           ,
           and
           all
           our
           Men
           in
           great
           despair
           of
           our
           seeing
           Captain
           Flawes
           :
           we
           beginning
           to
           consider
           our
           most
           miserable
           Condition
           ,
           and
           contriving
           how
           to
           save
           our
           Lives
           ;
           the
           Long-boat
           not
           being
           able
           to
           carry
           above
           30
           Men
           ,
           and
           a
           Deck
           built
           on
           her
           ,
           and
           her
           Wast
           raised
           ;
           with
           that
           we
           concluded
           to
           lengthen
           her
           12
           Foot
           ,
           and
           to
           carry
           all
           our
           Men
           ;
           but
           upon
           consideration
           of
           wanting
           Materials
           ,
           and
           the
           Carpenters
           bad
           assistance
           ,
           the
           Men
           would
           not
           agree
           to
           have
           her
           cut
           a
           sunder
           ,
           for
           fear
           she
           could
           not
           be
           lengthened
           ;
           but
           were
           willing
           to
           Travel
           by
           Land
           towards
           the
           Waygates
           ,
           in
           hopes
           to
           find
           some
           Russia
           Lodges
           .
           With
           that
           we
           began
           to
           raise
           her
           Wast
           ,
           and
           build
           a
           Deck
           ,
           the
           Weather
           continuing
           very
           foggy
           till
           
           Saturday
           Morning
           ,
           at
           which
           time
           we
           espyed
           Captain
           Flawes
           to
           our
           great
           joy
           ;
           with
           that
           we
           made
           presently
           a
           great
           Fire
           ,
           and
           sent
           our
           Yaul
           to
           meet
           him
           ,
           who
           immediately
           saw
           our
           Fire
           and
           steered
           into
           us
           ,
           and
           sent
           his
           Boat
           to
           help
           to
           bring
           off
           our
           Men
           ;
           with
           that
           we
           broke
           up
           our
           new
           Work
           ,
           which
           was
           done
           to
           our
           Long-Boat
           ,
           and
           Lanched
           her
           ;
           and
           about
           Noon
           got
           all
           on
           Board
           Captain
           Flawes
           ,
           in
           good
           Health
           .
        
      
       
         
         
         
           Journal
           on
           Board
           the
           Prosperous
           ,
           Captain
           William
           Flawes
           Commander
           ,
           From
           Nova
           Zembla
           to
           England
           .
           1676.
           
        
         
           
             SUnday
             ,
             July
          
           9.
           
           From
           the
           8.
           12
           at
           Night
           to
           this
           9.
           12
           at
           Noon
           ,
           the
           Winds
           variable
           ,
           with
           Fogs
           and
           small
           Rain
           ;
           we
           stand
           off
           to
           the
           Westward
           :
           true
           Course
           Protracted
           ,
           with
           allowance
           for
           variation
           ,
           is
           West
           8
           d.
           South
           ,
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           8
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           67
           Miles
           ,
           Lat.
           per
           Judgment
           73
           d.
           42
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           ,
           from
           Point
           Staten
           ,
           being
           the
           Westermost
           Land
           off
           of
           
             Nova
             Zembla
          
           ,
           and
           the
           last
           Land
           we
           saw
           ,
           67
           Miles
           :
           very
           cold
           Weather
           .
        
         
           
             Monday
             ,
             July
          
           10.
           
           From
           the
           9.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           the
           Winds
           variable
           from
           the
           South-west
           by
           West
           ,
           to
           the
           West
           ,
           and
           so
           to
           the
           North
           ,
           and
           North-north-east
           ,
           with
           small
           Rain
           ,
           great
           Fogs
           ,
           and
           very
           cold
           Weather
           ;
           true
           Course
           Protracted
           is
           West
           35
           Miles
           ,
           variation
           allowed
           12
           d.
           West
           ;
           Meridian
           distance
           102
           Miles
           :
           a
           great
           Sea
           from
           the
           Westward
           .
        
         
           
             Tuesday
             ,
             July
          
           11.
           
           From
           the
           10.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           the
           Winds
           variable
           from
           the
           North-north-east
           to
           the
           North-west
           .
           Course
           per
           Compass
           West
           by
           South
           ;
           distance
           sailed
           by
           the
           Log
           102
           
           Miles
           ;
           true
           Course
           ,
           allowed
           for
           variation
           ,
           is
           West
           68¼
           South
           ,
           distance
           of
           Lat.
           34
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           96
           Miles
           ,
           Lat.
           per
           Judgment
           73
           d.
           06
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           198
           Miles
           :
           thick
           cloudy
           Weather
           ,
           and
           very
           Cold.
           
        
         
           
             Wednesday
             ,
             July
          
           12.
           
           From
           the
           11.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           little
           Wind
           and
           variable
           ,
           with
           Calms
           ,
           small
           Rains
           ,
           and
           Fogs
           :
           distance
           sailed
           by
           the
           Log
           27
           Miles
           ,
           between
           the
           West
           by
           North
           ,
           and
           the
           West
           by
           South
           ;
           true
           Course
           allowed
           ,
           with
           all
           impediments
           is
           West
           :
           at
           Noon
           Lat.
           by
           Observation
           73
           d.
           34
           m.
           which
           is
           34
           Miles
           more
           northerly
           than
           expected
           ;
           the
           variation
           ,
           I
           suppose
           ,
           came
           from
           the
           Lat.
           we
           departed
           from
           on
           
             Nova
             Zembla
          
           ;
           Meridian
           Distance
           Corrected
           is
           222
           Miles
           West
           :
           at
           Noon
           calm
           and
           fair
           Weather
           .
        
         
           
             Thursday
             ,
             July
          
           13.
           
           From
           the
           12.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           the
           Wind
           variable
           from
           the
           West
           to
           the
           South-south-west
           a
           fresh
           Gale
           ;
           we
           ply
           to
           the
           Westward
           close
           Haul'd
           .
           Course
           per
           Compass
           between
           the
           South-south-west
           ,
           and
           the
           West-north-west
           ;
           true
           Course
           Protracted
           ,
           all
           impediments
           allowed
           ,
           is
           West
           by
           North
           ½
           North
           69
           Miles
           ,
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           17
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           59
           Miles
           ;
           Lat
           ,
           by
           Judgment
           73
           d.
           51
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           279
           Miles
           :
           Cold
           cloudy
           Weather
           ,
           with
           small
           Rains.
           
        
         
           
             Friday
             ,
             July
          
           14.
           
           From
           the
           13.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           the
           Winds
           variable
           from
           the
           South-south-west
           to
           the
           West-north-west
           a
           fresh
           Gale
           ,
           and
           sometimes
           little
           Wind
           :
           we
           ply
           to
           the
           Westward
           ,
           sometimes
           on
           one
           Tack
           ,
           and
           sometimes
           
           on
           the
           other
           ;
           true
           Course
           Protracted
           ,
           all
           impediments
           allowed
           ,
           is
           West-south-west
           ½
           South
           ;
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           9.
           
           Miles
           South
           ,
           departure
           West
           20
           Miles
           .
           Lat.
           per
           Judgment
           73
           d.
           35
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           299
           Miles
           .
        
         
           
             Saturday
             ,
             July
          
           15.
           
           From
           the
           14.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           the
           Winds
           fresh
           ,
           with
           gusts
           from
           the
           North-west
           to
           the
           West
           :
           we
           ply
           to
           the
           Westward
           ,
           sometimes
           to
           the
           Southward
           ;
           distance
           sailed
           by
           the
           Log
           70
           Miles
           ,
           true
           Course
           Protracted
           is
           South-west
           33
           d.
           45
           m.
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           52
           Miles
           ,
           Departure
           West
           34
           Miles
           ,
           Lat.
           per
           Judgment
           72
           d.
           43
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           333
           Miles
           :
           cold
           and
           cloudy
           .
        
         
           
             Sunday
             ,
             July
          
           16.
           
           From
           the
           15.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           the
           Wind
           at
           West-south-west
           ,
           and
           West
           by
           South
           ,
           a
           fresh
           Gale
           ;
           but
           from
           8
           at
           Night
           ,
           till
           8
           in
           the
           Morning
           much
           Wind
           ,
           we
           lay
           a
           try
           under
           a
           Main-sail
           :
           true
           Course
           Protracted
           Leeward-way
           ,
           and
           variation
           allowed
           ,
           is
           North
           by
           West
           ¼
           West
           31
           Miles
           ;
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           30
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           West
           7
           Miles
           ,
           Lat.
           per
           Judgment
           73
           d.
           13
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           340
           Miles
           :
           Rain
           with
           very
           thick
           Weather
           .
        
         
           
             Monday
             ,
             July
          
           17.
           
           From
           the
           16.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           little
           Wind
           from
           the
           West
           by
           North
           to
           the
           West
           ,
           with
           Rains
           ,
           Fogs
           ,
           and
           Calms
           :
           we
           ply
           to
           the
           Westward
           close
           upon
           a
           Wind
           ;
           true
           Course
           Protracted
           ,
           all
           impediments
           allowed
           ,
           is
           West
           by
           South
           ●
           West
           ;
           distance
           of
           Lat.
           3
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           23
           miles
           ,
           Lat
           ,
           per
           Judgment
           73
           d.
           10
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           360
           Miles
           :
           at
           11
           in
           the
           Forenoon
           the
           Wind
           came
           up
           at
           South-south-east
           ,
           and
           foggy
           .
        
         
         
           
             Tuesday
             ,
             July
          
           18.
           
           From
           the
           17.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           the
           Winds
           from
           the
           South
           to
           the
           West-south-west
           :
           we
           ply
           to
           the
           Westward
           close
           haul'd
           ,
           between
           the
           West
           and
           North-west
           ;
           distance
           sailed
           by
           the
           Log
           87
           Miles
           ;
           true
           Course
           Protracted
           is
           West
           by
           North
           ¼
           North
           80
           Miles
           ,
           distance
           of
           Lat.
           18
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           77
           Miles
           ,
           Lat.
           per
           Judgment
           73
           d.
           28
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           437
           Miles
           :
           thick
           foggy
           Weather
           .
        
         
           
             Wednesday
             ,
             July
          
           19.
           
           From
           the
           18.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           the
           Wind
           at
           South-west
           ,
           and
           South-south-west
           ,
           with
           very
           thick
           Fogs
           .
           Course
           per
           Compass
           West-north-west
           and
           West
           ,
           close
           Haul'd
           ;
           distance
           sailed
           by
           the
           Log
           74
           Miles
           ,
           true
           Course
           ,
           variation
           and
           Leeward-way
           allowed
           ,
           is
           West-north-west
           ½
           North
           70
           Miles
           ,
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           32
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           60
           Miles
           ,
           Lat.
           per
           Judgment
           74
           d.
           Meridian
           distance
           497
           Miles
           :
           at
           Night
           much
           Wind
           ,
           we
           hand
           our
           Top-sails
           .
        
         
           
             Thursday
             ,
             July
          
           20.
           
           From
           the
           19.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           for
           the
           most
           part
           much
           Winds
           at
           West-south-west
           ,
           and
           South-west
           ,
           with
           great
           Fogs
           :
           we
           ply
           close
           upon
           a
           Wind
           North-west
           by
           West
           ,
           and
           West-north-west
           ;
           distance
           sailed
           by
           the
           Log
           65
           Miles
           ;
           true
           Course
           ,
           variation
           and
           Lee-way
           allowed
           ,
           is
           North-north-west
           ¼
           West
           ,
           distance
           of
           Lat.
           55
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           33
           Miles
           ,
           Lat.
           per
           Judgment
           74
           d.
           55
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           530
           Miles
           .
        
         
           
             Friday
             ,
             July
          
           21.
           
           From
           the
           20.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           the
           Wind
           from
           the
           South-west
           to
           the
           West
           .
           Course
           per
           Compass
           South
           by
           West
           upon
           one
           Tack
           ,
           and
           West-north-west
           on
           the
           other
           ,
           
           close
           Haul'd
           ;
           distance
           sailed
           by
           the
           Log
           61
           Miles
           ;
           true
           Course
           Protracted
           ,
           all
           impediments
           allowed
           ,
           is
           South
           by
           West
           ¾
           West
           48
           Miles
           ,
           distance
           of
           Lat.
           45
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           16
           Miles
           ,
           Lat.
           per
           Judgment
           74
           d.
           12
           m.
           very
           thick
           ,
           foggy
           and
           cold
           ,
           till
           about
           Noon
           it
           cleared
           up
           .
        
         
           
             Saturday
             ,
             July
          
           22.
           
           From
           the
           21.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           4
           in
           the
           Morning
           ,
           the
           Wind
           at
           South-west
           by
           West
           ,
           and
           South-west
           ,
           with
           thick
           Fogs
           .
           Course
           West
           by
           North
           ,
           and
           North-north-west
           46
           Miles
           ,
           at
           which
           time
           it
           was
           very
           foggy
           Weather
           :
           we
           saw
           many
           Willocks
           ,
           and
           other
           Sea
           Fowles
           more
           than
           usual
           ,
           which
           made
           us
           think
           that
           we
           were
           near
           the
           Land
           of
           
           Cherry-Island
           :
           we
           cast
           the
           Lead
           ,
           and
           had
           60
           Fathom
           ,
           a
           rough
           Sand
           ,
           with
           that
           we
           Tack'd
           and
           stood
           off
           South-south-east
           ,
           and
           South-east
           by
           East
           9
           Miles
           ,
           till
           Noon
           ,
           at
           which
           time
           we
           Sounded
           ,
           and
           had
           78
           Fathom
           ;
           Lat.
           at
           4
           in
           the
           Morning
           by
           Judgment
           74
           d.
           26
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           589
           Miles
           ,
           at
           which
           time
           I
           was
           ,
           by
           my
           Reckoning
           ,
           13
           Leagues
           West
           from
           Cherry
           Island
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           Meridian
           distance
           I
           made
           from
           the
           Cape
           to
           
             Nova
             Zembla
          
           ,
           and
           from
           
             Nova
             Zembla
          
           back
           here
           ;
           Lat.
           at
           Noon
           ,
           by
           Judgment
           ,
           74
           d.
           20
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           582
           Miles
           .
        
         
           
             Sunday
             ,
             July
          
           23.
           
           From
           the
           22.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           the
           Winds
           variable
           ,
           with
           great
           Fogs
           ,
           from
           the
           South-south-east
           to
           the
           West-north-west
           .
           Course
           per
           Compass
           between
           the
           South-west
           and
           the
           West
           ;
           distance
           sailed
           by
           the
           Log
           91
           Miles
           ;
           true
           Course
           Protracted
           is
           South-west
           by
           South
           87
           Miles
           ,
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           76
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           43
           Miles
           ,
           Lat.
           per
           Judgment
           73
           d.
           08
           m.
           Meridian
           
           distance
           625
           Miles
           :
           At
           Noon
           no
           ground
           with
           160
           Fathom
           Lines
           .
        
         
           
             Monday
             ,
             July
          
           24.
           
           From
           the
           23.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           little
           Winds
           ,
           and
           variable
           ,
           with
           Calms
           ;
           true
           Course
           allowed
           is
           South-south-west
           ¾
           West
           22
           Miles
           ,
           distance
           of
           Lat.
           18
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           11
           Miles
           ,
           Lat
           per
           Judgment
           72
           d.
           50
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           636
           Miles
           .
        
         
           
             Tuesday
             ,
             July
          
           25.
           
           From
           the
           24.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           the
           Wind
           variable
           ,
           with
           fresh
           Gales
           from
           North
           by
           West
           to
           the
           East
           ,
           with
           Fogs
           .
           Course
           between
           the
           West-south-west
           and
           South-west
           ;
           distance
           sailed
           by
           the
           Log
           88
           Miles
           ,
           true
           Course
           allowed
           for
           9
           d.
           variation
           is
           South-west
           ½
           Westerly
           ,
           distance
           of
           Lat.
           54
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           69
           Miles
           ,
           Lat.
           per
           Judgment
           71
           d.
           56
           m.
           Meridian
           distance
           705
           Miles
           .
        
         
           
             Wednesday
             ,
             July
          
           26.
           
           From
           the
           25.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           day
           Noon
           ,
           the
           Wind
           variable
           from
           the
           East
           by
           North
           to
           the
           South
           ,
           with
           thick
           Fogs
           .
           Distance
           sailed
           by
           the
           Log
           73
           Miles
           ;
           Course
           per
           Compass
           between
           the
           South-west
           by
           West
           and
           West-north-west
           :
           true
           Course
           Protracted
           is
           West
           ;
           ½
           South
           ,
           distance
           of
           Lat.
           7
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           67
           Miles
           .
        
         
           
             Thursday
             ,
             July
          
           27.
           
           From
           the
           26.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           the
           Winds
           from
           the
           South
           to
           the
           South-west
           ,
           with
           great
           Fogs
           .
           Distance
           sailed
           by
           the
           Log
           68
           Miles
           ,
           true
           Course
           allowed
           West
           ½
           South
           ,
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           7
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           62
           Miles
           West
           .
        
         
           
             Friday
             ,
             July
          
           28.
           
           From
           the
           27.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           the
           Wind
           from
           the
           South-south-west
           
           to
           the
           South-east
           .
           Course
           per
           Compass
           between
           the
           West
           by
           North
           ,
           and
           the
           South-west
           ,
           close
           upon
           a
           Wind
           ;
           distance
           sailed
           by
           the
           Log
           85
           Miles
           ;
           true
           Course
           Protracted
           is
           South-west
           by
           West
           ¼
           80
           Miles
           ,
           distance
           of
           Latitude
           46
           Miles
           South
           ,
           departure
           64
           Miles
           West
           :
           thick
           Fogs
           with
           small
           Rain
           .
        
         
           
             Saturday
             ,
             July
          
           29.
           
           From
           the
           28.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           much
           Wind
           from
           the
           South
           to
           the
           South-west
           :
           we
           tryed
           under
           a
           Main-sail
           three
           Watches
           ;
           true
           Course
           allowed
           is
           West
           15
           Miles
           .
        
         
           
             Sunday
             ,
             July
          
           30.
           
           From
           the
           29.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           the
           Wind
           variable
           from
           South-east
           to
           the
           South
           ,
           and
           so
           to
           the
           North-west
           ,
           with
           sudden
           gusts
           ,
           with
           much
           Rain
           ,
           then
           little
           Wind
           :
           at
           8
           this
           Morning
           much
           Wind
           at
           North-west
           ;
           true
           Course
           Protracted
           ,
           all
           impediments
           allowed
           ,
           is
           South-south-west
           66
           Miles
           ;
           distance
           of
           Lat.
           60
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           25
           Miles
           .
        
         
           
             Monday
             ,
             July
          
           31.
           
           From
           the
           30.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           much
           Wind
           at
           North-west
           ,
           with
           Rain
           .
           Course
           per
           Compass
           South-west
           by
           South
           ,
           and
           South-west
           ;
           distance
           sailed
           by
           the
           Log
           104
           Miles
           ;
           true
           Course
           allowed
           for
           Leeward-way
           and
           variation
           South
           by
           West
           ½
           West
           ;
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           103
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           11
           Miles
           ;
           Lat.
           per
           Dead
           Reckoning
           68
           d.
           13
           m.
           but
           by
           Observation
           68
           d.
           00●●m
           .
           departure
           accordingly
           Corrected
           15
           Miles
           ;
           Meridian
           distance
           953
           Miles
           .
        
         
           
             Tuesday
             ,
             August
          
           1.
           
           From
           the
           31.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           the
           Wind
           variable
           from
           the
           North-west
           to
           the
           South-west
           by
           West
           :
           distance
           sailed
           
           by
           the
           Log
           80
           Miles
           ;
           we
           ply
           to
           Windward
           :
           true
           Course
           Protracted
           ,
           variation
           and
           Leeward-way
           allowed
           ,
           distance
           West-south-west
           ,
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           72
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           51
           Miles
           :
           thick
           cloudy
           Weather
           ,
           with
           some
           small
           Rains
           and
           Fogs
           .
        
         
           
             Wednesday
             ,
             August
          
           2.
           
           From
           the
           1.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           from
           the
           South
           by
           West
           to
           the
           South-west
           ,
           thick
           Fogs
           .
           Course
           per
           Compass
           between
           the
           West
           by
           South
           ,
           and
           the
           West-north-west
           ;
           distance
           sailed
           by
           the
           Log
           51
           Miles
           ,
           true
           Course
           allowed
           is
           West
           by
           North
           ,
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           12
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           49
           Miles
           ;
           Lat.
           per
           Judgment
           67
           d.
           50
           m.
           but
           by
           a
           good
           Observation
           Lat.
           67
           d.
           55
           m.
           at
           Noon
           clear
           Weather
           .
        
         
           
             Thursday
             ,
             August
          
           3.
           
           From
           the
           2.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           the
           Wind
           from
           the
           West
           to
           the
           South-south-west
           ,
           with
           Fogs
           and
           Rains.
           Course
           per
           Traverse
           ;
           we
           ply
           to
           Windward
           ;
           true
           Course
           Protracted
           ,
           is
           South-south-west
           ;
           distance
           of
           Lat.
           21
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           10
           Miles
           ;
           at
           Night
           much
           Wind
           at
           South
           ,
           we
           lay
           under
           a
           Main-sail
           .
        
         
           
             Friday
             ,
             August
          
           4.
           
           From
           8
           at
           Night
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           a
           Storm
           of
           Wind
           at
           South
           ,
           and
           S.
           S.
           W.
           True
           Course
           Drist
           ,
           and
           all
           impediments
           allowed
           ,
           is
           North-west
           by
           North
           ¼
           West
           ;
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           18
           Miles
           ,
           depareture
           16
           Miles
           :
           at
           Noon
           less
           Wind
           ,
           we
           set
           our
           Fore-sail
           .
        
         
           
             Saturday
             ,
             August
          
           5.
           
           From
           the
           4.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           the
           Wind
           from
           the
           West
           by
           South
           to
           the
           North-west
           ,
           a
           very
           cold
           Strom
           :
           true
           Course
           allowed
           is
           South
           by
           East
           ,
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           75
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           15
           Miles
           :
           in
           the
           Afternoon
           little
           Wind.
           
        
         
         
           
             Sunday
             ,
             August
          
           6.
           
           From
           the
           5.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           fresh
           Gales
           ,
           and
           little
           Wind
           from
           the
           West-north-west
           to
           the
           West-south-west
           .
           True
           Course
           allowed
           South
           ¼
           East
           ,
           distance
           of
           Lat.
           67
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           8
           Miles
           .
        
         
           
             Monday
             ,
             August
          
           7.
           
           From
           the
           6.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           the
           Wind
           at
           South
           and
           South-west
           ,
           sometimes
           much
           Wind
           ,
           and
           then
           Calm
           again
           .
           True
           Course
           allowed
           per
           Judgment
           is
           West-north-west
           ¼
           North
           53
           Miles
           ;
           difference
           of
           Lat.
           22
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           West
           47
           Miles
           ;
           at
           Noon
           the
           Wind
           came
           about
           to
           the
           West-north-west
           ,
           much
           Wind
           ,
           and
           at
           8
           it
           blew
           a
           Strom
           at
           Northwest
           .
        
         
           
             Tuesday
             ,
             August
          
           8.
           
           From
           yesterday
           8
           at
           Night
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           a
           Strom
           of
           Wind
           at
           North-west
           we
           run
           away
           with
           our
           Fore-sail
           Reeft
           .
           Course
           per
           Compass
           South-south-west
           ;
           distance
           sailed
           by
           the
           Log
           116
           Miles
           ,
           true
           Course
           allowed
           is
           South
           ,
           distance
           of
           Lat.
           107.
           
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           West
           5
           Miles
           .
        
         
           
             Wednesday
             ,
             August
          
           9.
           
           At
           3
           in
           the
           Morning
           a
           fresh
           Gale
           ,
           saw
           many
           Willocks
           ,
           and
           other
           Sea-Fowls
           ,
           and
           at
           5
           we
           saw
           the
           Land
           East-south-east
           from
           us
           ;
           being
           high
           Land
           ,
           and
           making
           like
           Islands
           ,
           being
           the
           Isles
           of
           Fero.
           At
           Noon
           Lat.
           by
           a
           good
           Observation
           61
           d.
           45
           m.
           at
           which
           time
           the
           Westermost
           Island
           bore
           East
           about
           8
           Leagues
           off
           .
        
         
           Distance
           sailed
           from
           yesterday
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           120
           Miles
           ;
           true
           Course
           allowed
           South
           by
           West
           ¼
           Westerly
           ,
           distance
           of
           Lat.
           116
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           26
           Miles
           ;
           Lat.
           per
           Judgment
           
           62
           d.
           04
           m.
           distance
           between
           the
           Dead
           Lat.
           and
           the
           observed
           Lat.
           20
           Miles
           ;
           so
           that
           the
           Ship
           is
           20
           Miles
           more
           Southerly
           ,
           and
           consequently
           more
           Westerly
           ;
           Meridian
           distance
           1129
           Miles
           ,
           but
           by
           Correction
           1136
           Miles
           :
           we
           saw
           a
           small
           Vessel
           ,
           and
           gave
           chase
           to
           her
           ,
           but
           she
           made
           from
           us
           .
        
         
           
             Thursday
             ,
             August
          
           10.
           
           From
           the
           9.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           a
           fresh
           Gale
           at
           North-west
           .
           Course
           between
           the
           South
           and
           East-south-east
           to
           get
           clear
           of
           the
           Islands
           in
           the
           Night
           ;
           distance
           sailed
           by
           the
           Log
           102
           Miles
           ;
           true
           Course
           Protracted
           is
           South-east
           by
           East
           ¼
           South
           ,
           distance
           of
           Lat.
           58
           Miles
           ,
           departure
           76
           Miles
           :
           spoke
           with
           the
           Ship
           we
           saw
           yesterday
           ,
           being
           a
           Lyn
           -
           Man
           come
           from
           the
           Island
           :
        
         
           
             Friday
             ,
             August
          
           11.
           
           From
           the
           10.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           the
           Wind
           at
           North-north-west
           .
           Course
           per
           Compass
           South-east
           by
           east
           ;
           distance
           sailed
           by
           the
           Log
           83
           Miles
           :
           at
           Noon
           the
           Island
           Foule
           bore
           North-east
           by
           East
           about
           3
           Leagues
           off
           :
           the
           Wind
           came
           about
           at
           South
           .
        
         
           
             Saturday
             ,
             August
          
           12.
           
           From
           the
           11.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           the
           Wind
           variable
           ,
           with
           great
           gusts
           ,
           and
           Rain
           :
           at
           Noon
           the
           Ockney
           Islands
           bore
           West
           about
           4
           Leagues
           ;
           the
           Ockney
           Isles
           are
           low
           ,
           such
           as
           we
           saw
           at
           the
           same
           time
           we
           saw
           Fair
           Isle
           ,
           being
           high
           Land
           ,
           and
           about
           6
           Leagues
           off
           :
           we
           found
           the
           Tide
           of
           Flood
           to
           set
           in
           very
           strong
           between
           the
           Ockney
           and
           Fair
           Isles
           ,
        
         
           At
           8
           at
           Night
           came
           a
           sudden
           strong
           gust
           ,
           and
           put
           us
           under
           a
           Main-sail
           Reeft
           ,
           at
           which
           time
           Catnose
           bore
           by
           Judgment
           about
           8
           Leagues
           off
           ,
           
           West
           by
           South
           ;
           we
           tryed
           away
           South-east
           ,
           the
           Wind
           at
           West-south-west
           ,
           a
           great
           Storm
           .
        
         
           
             Sunday
             ,
             August
          
           13.
           
           From
           last
           Night
           8
           a
           Clock
           to
           this
           Day
           4
           in
           the
           Afternoon
           ,
           a
           great
           Storm
           of
           Wind
           from
           the
           West
           by
           South
           to
           the
           West-north-west
           ;
           we
           tryed
           away
           under
           a
           Main-sail
           Reest
           ,
           making
           her
           way
           good
           by
           Judgment
           South-east
           37
           Miles
           .
           Lat.
           per
           Judgment
           58
           d.
           16
           m.
           departure
           from
           Catnose
           47
           Miles
           East
           ;
           saw
           many
           Pitterals
           about
           the
           Ship
           :
           at
           Night
           less
           Wind.
           
        
         
           
             Monday
             ,
             August
          
           14.
           
           From
           the
           13.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           a
           fresh
           Gale.
           Course
           per
           Compass
           South
           ;
           Lat.
           per
           a
           good
           Observation
           56
           d.
           38
           m.
           fair
           Weather
           .
        
         
           
             Tuesday
             ,
             August
          
           15.
           
           From
           the
           14.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ,
           little
           Wind
           from
           the
           West-north-west
           .
           Course
           per
           Compass
           South
           ;
           distance
           sailed
           by
           the
           Log
           53
           Miles
           ;
           fair
           Weather
           :
           at
           Noon
           the
           Wind
           came
           at
           South
           ;
           we
           stood
           in
           for
           the
           Land
           ,
           spake
           with
           two
           fishing
           Busses
           under
           English
           Colours
           ,
           but
           they
           were
           Dutch
           ;
           at
           6
           at
           Night
           we
           got
           in
           with
           the
           Land
           ,
           about
           2
           Leagues
           to
           the
           Northward
           of
           Tinmouth
           Castle
           ;
           we
           tack'd
           and
           stood
           off
           ,
           the
           Wind
           at
           South
           .
        
         
           
             Wednesday
             ,
             August
          
           16.
           
           The
           Wind
           from
           the
           South
           to
           the
           South-south-east
           .
           At
           Noon
           Tinmouth
           Castle
           South-west
           about
           2
           Leagues
           off
           ;
           we
           ply
           to
           the
           Southward
           .
        
         
           
             Thursday
             ,
             August
          
           17.
           
           From
           the
           16.
           
           Noon
           to
           this
           Day
           Noon
           ▪
           the
           Wind
           at
           West-south-west
           .
           At
           Noon
           much
           Wind
           ,
           we
           Reeft
           our
           Courses
           ,
           and
           stand
           along
           the
           Shore
           to
           the
           Southward
           ;
           at
           2
           a
           Clock
           Flambrough
           Head
           West
           about
           2
           Miles
           .
        
         
         
           
             Friday
             ,
             August
          
           18.
           
           The
           Wind
           at
           West-south-west
           .
           At
           Noon
           we
           anchored
           a
           League
           to
           the
           Northward
           of
           Cromer
           ,
           the
           Tide
           being
           spent
           .
        
         
           
             Saturday
             ,
             August
          
           19.
           
           At
           6
           in
           the
           Morning
           Weighed
           with
           the
           Tide
           ,
           and
           turned
           up
           Yarmouth
           Roads
           ,
           anchored
           right
           against
           the
           Town
           ;
           at
           8
           at
           Night
           Weighed
           and
           turned
           up
           above
           the
           Pier
           and
           anchored
           ,
           the
           Tide
           being
           spent
           ;
           the
           Wind
           at
           South-west
           .
        
         
           
             Sunday
             ,
             August
          
           20.
           
           At
           8
           in
           the
           Morning
           Weighed
           with
           the
           Tide
           of
           Flood
           ,
           and
           turned
           to
           Windward
           ;
           at
           4
           in
           the
           Afternoon
           anchored
           with
           the
           Tide
           of
           Ebb
           in
           Southwole
           -
           Bay
           in
           8
           Fathom
           Water
           ,
           the
           Church
           bearing
           North-north-west
           ;
           Winds
           from
           the
           South-south-west
           to
           the
           South-south-east
           ,
           a
           fresh
           Gale.
           
        
         
           
             Monday
             ,
             August
          
           21.
           
           At
           8
           at
           Night
           Weighed
           with
           the
           Tide
           of
           Flood
           ,
           and
           turned
           up
           into
           Albrough
           Road
           ,
           and
           anchored
           there
           :
           at
           4
           the
           next
           Morning
           Lieutenant
           Whitlock
           went
           ashore
           at
           Albrough
           to
           take
           Horse
           for
           London
           .
        
         
           At
           9
           in
           the
           Morning
           Weighed
           with
           the
           Tide
           of
           Flood
           ,
           the
           Wind
           at
           West-south-west
           ,
           a
           fresh
           Gale
           ,
           and
           turned
           up
           into
           the
           Sleeway
           ,
           and
           anchored
           there
           ,
           about
           5
           in
           the
           Evening
           in
           9
           Fathom
           Water
           ,
           the
           Naze
           Land
           bearing
           West
           by
           North.
           
        
         
           
             Tuesday
             ,
             August
          
           22.
           
           At
           10
           a
           Clock
           Weighed
           ,
           the
           Wind
           at
           West-south
           west
           ,
           and
           turned
           to
           Windward
           with
           the
           Flood
           .
        
         
           At
           5
           in
           the
           Morning
           anchored
           upon
           the
           Tide
           of
           Fbb
           ,
           two
           Miles
           below
           the
           Middle
           ground
           .
        
         
         
           At
           Noon
           Weighed
           with
           the
           Flood
           ,
           and
           turned
           to
           Windward
           ,
           the
           Wind
           at
           West
           by
           South
           ,
           at
           6
           anchored
           below
           the
           Shore
           .
        
         
           
             Wednesday
             ,
             August
          
           23.
           
           The
           Wind
           at
           West-north-west
           ;
           at
           4
           in
           the
           Morning
           Weighed
           Anchor
           ,
           and
           turned
           up
           a
           Mile
           above
           the
           Buoy
           of
           the
           Noar
           ,
           and
           anchored
           upon
           the
           Ebb
           about
           8
           a
           Clock
           .
        
         
           At
           one
           a
           Clock
           Weighed
           Anchor
           ,
           the
           Wind
           at
           West-north-west
           ,
           we
           turned
           up
           the
           River
           .
        
      
       
         
         
         
           Now
           ,
           after
           the
           JOURNAL
           ,
           I
           do
           intend
           to
           shew
           my
           Conceptions
           of
           the
           said
           Voyage
           ,
           and
           a
           true
           Relation
           of
           our
           Miscarriage
           ;
           with
           some
           Observations
           made
           in
           the
           said
           Voyage
           .
        
         
           THE
           first
           was
           the
           following
           the
           Opinion
           of
           
             William
             Barrans
          
           ,
           that
           was
           to
           steer
           directly
           North-east
           from
           the
           North
           Cape
           ,
           and
           to
           fall
           in
           the
           mid-way
           betwixt
           Greenland
           and
           
             Nova
             Zembla
          
           :
           so
           having
           made
           the
           Land
           to
           the
           Westward
           of
           the
           North
           Cape
           ,
           the
           19.
           
           Day
           of
           June
           ,
           I
           steered
           away
           North-east
           by
           Compass
           ,
           which
           was
           not
           so
           much
           by
           the
           true
           Course
           ,
           because
           of
           the
           variation
           that
           is
           there
           Westerly
           ;
           and
           the
           22.
           
           Day
           at
           Noon
           we
           saw
           the
           main
           Body
           of
           Ice
           ,
           being
           in
           the
           Lat.
           of
           76
           d.
           and
           about
           60
           Leagues
           to
           the
           Eastward
           of
           Greenland
           .
           At
           the
           first
           seeing
           of
           Ice
           ,
           I
           did
           imagin
           it
           had
           been
           the
           Ice
           that
           joyned
           to
           Greenland
           ;
           and
           that
           if
           I
           went
           more
           Easterly
           there
           might
           be
           a
           free
           Sea
           ;
           so
           I
           ran
           close
           by
           the
           Ice
           ,
           it
           lying
           away
           .
           East-south-east
           ;
           and
           West-north-west
           ,
           and
           every
           League
           ,
           or
           less
           ,
           that
           we
           
           ran
           ,
           we
           met
           with
           a
           Cape
           of
           Ice
           ;
           so
           when
           we
           were
           about
           that
           ,
           we
           could
           see
           no
           Ice
           to
           the
           Northward
           ;
           so
           standing
           in
           North-east
           ,
           sometimes
           two
           Glasses
           ,
           that
           is
           one
           hour
           ,
           we
           could
           see
           more
           Ice
           a
           Head
           ,
           and
           then
           we
           were
           forced
           to
           go
           out
           the
           same
           way
           we
           came
           in
           ,
           and
           thus
           I
           continued
           Coasting
           the
           Ice
           ,
           sometimes
           with
           great
           hopes
           of
           a
           clear
           Sea
           ,
           and
           then
           again
           disheartened
           by
           seeing
           more
           Ice
           ;
           till
           at
           last
           I
           had
           no
           hopes
           at
           all
           ,
           which
           was
           when
           I
           saw
           the
           Land
           of
           
             Nova
             Zembla
          
           ,
           and
           the
           Ice
           joyn
           to
           it
           .
           So
           here
           the
           Opinion
           of
           
             William
             Barrans
          
           was
           Confuted
           ,
           and
           all
           the
           rest
           of
           the
           Dutch
           Relations
           ,
           which
           certainly
           are
           all
           forged
           abusive
           Pamphlets
           ;
           as
           also
           the
           Relations
           of
           our
           own
           Countrymen
           .
           But
           certainly
           ,
           if
           Men
           did
           really
           consider
           the
           many
           individual
           dangers
           and
           mischiefs
           that
           comes
           upon
           the
           broaching
           of
           such
           untruths
           ,
           they
           would
           never
           do
           it
           ;
           for
           I
           do
           now
           verily
           believe
           that
           if
           there
           be
           no
           Land
           to
           the
           Northward
           of
           the
           Lat.
           of
           80
           d.
           that
           the
           Sea
           that
           is
           there
           is
           all
           frozen
           ,
           and
           always
           continueth
           so
           ;
           for
           I
           that
           could
           get
           no
           farther
           than
           76
           d.
           found
           it
           so
           frozen
           without
           intermission
           ;
           and
           some
           of
           the
           Ice
           that
           we
           saw
           ,
           that
           was
           on
           the
           main
           Body
           of
           it
           ,
           had
           been
           conveyed
           10
           Degrees
           more
           Southward
           ,
           would
           have
           taken
           some
           Centuries
           of
           Years
           to
           Thaw
           it
           :
           for
           the
           loose
           Ice
           that
           lay
           about
           the
           Edges
           of
           the
           main
           Body
           ,
           was
           not
           more
           than
           a
           Foot
           thick
           in
           some
           pieces
           above
           the
           Superficies
           of
           the
           Water
           ,
           and
           the
           rest
           of
           the
           Cake
           that
           was
           sunk
           ,
           was
           more
           than
           18
           Foot
           below
           .
           So
           I
           conclude
           that
           those
           vast
           Mountains
           that
           were
           on
           the
           main
           Body
           were
           
           all
           on
           Shore
           ,
           as
           of
           necessity
           they
           must
           ,
           if
           they
           hold
           the
           same
           proportion
           ;
           and
           considering
           the
           shallowness
           of
           the
           Water
           ,
           which
           I
           found
           all
           along
           the
           Ice
           ,
           which
           in
           the
           mid-way
           between
           the
           two
           Lands
           ,
           I
           found
           to
           be
           no
           more
           than
           70
           Fathom
           ,
           was
           doubtless
           a
           sign
           that
           to
           the
           Northward
           is
           Land
           ,
           and
           that
           the
           main
           Body
           of
           Ice
           that
           lyeth
           crusted
           about
           the
           Shore
           ,
           may
           be
           20
           Leagues
           or
           more
           ,
           and
           that
           
             Nova
             Zembla
          
           and
           Greenland
           are
           the
           same
           Continent
           ;
           for
           if
           there
           had
           been
           any
           Passage
           ,
           there
           would
           have
           been
           some
           Current
           ,
           which
           I
           could
           never
           ,
           or
           very
           hardly
           find
           to
           be
           any
           ,
           and
           the
           little
           that
           was
           run
           East-south-east
           along
           the
           Ice
           ,
           which
           is
           nothing
           else
           but
           a
           small
           Tide
           which
           riseth
           some
           8
           Foot.
           Thus
           the
           Ice
           having
           been
           an
           obstacle
           in
           our
           way
           ,
           as
           also
           the
           cause
           of
           my
           coming
           so
           far
           to
           the
           Eastward
           ,
           which
           before
           I
           never
           intended
           .
        
         
           I
           will
           come
           to
           the
           misfortune
           that
           happened
           to
           us
           in
           the
           loss
           of
           our
           Ship
           :
           which
           was
           thus
           ,
           being
           amongst
           the
           Ice
           the
           29.
           
           Day
           of
           June
           in
           the
           Morning
           ,
           we
           had
           like
           to
           have
           been
           inclosed
           in
           it
           :
           it
           proving
           likewise
           foggy
           Weather
           ,
           I
           stood
           out
           to
           the
           Southward
           ,
           thinking
           to
           lye
           there
           till
           fairer
           Weather
           ,
           or
           to
           spend
           some
           time
           to
           the
           Southward
           ,
           and
           then
           come
           up
           to
           the
           Ice
           again
           ,
           to
           see
           if
           there
           might
           be
           any
           alteration
           in
           it
           as
           to
           its
           removal
           either
           East
           ,
           West
           ,
           North
           ,
           or
           south
           ;
           but
           all
           this
           Day
           it
           proved
           foggy
           dirty
           Weahter
           ,
           the
           Wind
           being
           at
           West
           :
           so
           we
           lay
           South-south-west
           with
           the
           Stem
           ,
           and
           by
           our
           Judgment
           and
           Reckoning
           ,
           the
           Westermost
           Land
           of
           
             Nova
             Zembla
          
           bore
           from
           us
           East-south-east
           ,
           that
           was
           4
           Points
           
           under
           our
           Lee
           Bow.
           But
           such
           was
           our
           misfortune
           that
           it
           proved
           not
           so
           ,
           for
           about
           10
           of
           the
           Clock
           Captain
           Flawes
           ,
           being
           upon
           our
           Weather
           Quarter
           ,
           fired
           a
           Gun
           and
           bore
           to
           me
           ,
           and
           called
           out
           that
           there
           was
           Ice
           a
           Head
           ;
           then
           I
           looking
           out
           a
           Head
           ,
           saw
           something
           white
           just
           under
           the
           Bow
           ,
           which
           presently
           I
           perceived
           to
           be
           a
           breath
           ,
           and
           no
           Ice
           ;
           now
           if
           I
           had
           staied
           with
           the
           Ship
           ,
           Captain
           Flawes
           being
           to
           Windward
           ,
           I
           should
           have
           been
           on
           Board
           of
           him
           ,
           and
           then
           certainly
           we
           had
           been
           both
           lost
           ,
           so
           I
           was
           forced
           to
           bear
           up
           with
           hope
           that
           I
           might
           get
           clear
           of
           it
           ;
           but
           the
           Ship
           being
           a
           great
           while
           wearing
           struck
           on
           the
           Rock
           ,
           her
           Head
           lying
           to
           Seaward
           ,
           which
           if
           it
           had
           not
           ,
           but
           that
           the
           Broadside
           had
           been
           to
           the
           Sea
           we
           had
           all
           perished
           without
           Gods
           great
           mercy
           :
           Captain
           Flawes
           in
           the
           mean
           time
           (
           being
           a
           shorter
           Ship
           )
           wore
           round
           ,
           and
           came
           close
           under
           our
           Stern
           ,
           and
           with
           great
           Providence
           escaped
           ,
           and
           stood
           off
           to
           Sea
           :
           here
           we
           lay
           beating
           on
           the
           Rock
           in
           most
           cruel
           manner
           for
           the
           space
           of
           3
           or
           4
           hours
           ,
           using
           all
           possible
           means
           to
           save
           her
           ,
           but
           all
           in
           vain
           ,
           for
           it
           blew
           so
           hard
           that
           it
           was
           impossible
           to
           carry
           out
           an
           Anchor
           capable
           to
           do
           us
           any
           service
           ,
           though
           we
           had
           an
           opportunity
           to
           carry
           a
           small
           Anchor
           ,
           and
           warp
           to
           hall
           ▪
           another
           out
           by
           ,
           which
           signified
           but
           little
           :
           the
           Ship
           all
           this
           while
           lay
           ,
           and
           at
           the
           end
           of
           4
           or
           5
           hours
           we
           saw
           Land
           close
           under
           our
           Stern
           ,
           to
           the
           great
           amazement
           of
           us
           all
           ,
           which
           before
           we
           could
           not
           see
           for
           the
           foggy
           Weather
           ;
           so
           I
           commanded
           the
           Men
           to
           get
           out
           our
           Boats
           before
           our
           Mast
           came
           by
           the
           Board
           ,
           which
           was
           done
           .
           I
           sent
           the
           Boatswain
           toward
           
           the
           Shore
           in
           the
           Pinnace
           ,
           to
           see
           if
           there
           was
           any
           possibility
           of
           landing
           ,
           which
           I
           much
           feared
           ,
           because
           the
           Sea
           ran
           so
           high
           .
           In
           half
           an
           hour
           he
           returned
           with
           this
           answer
           ,
           that
           it
           was
           impossible
           to
           save
           a
           Man
           ,
           the
           Sea
           ran
           so
           high
           ,
           and
           the
           Snow
           being
           in
           high
           Clifts
           on
           Shore
           was
           unaccessible
           ,
           which
           was
           but
           bad
           tidings
           :
           so
           then
           it
           was
           high
           time
           to
           think
           on
           the
           safety
           of
           our
           Souls
           ,
           and
           we
           went
           all
           together
           to
           Prayers
           ,
           to
           beseech
           God
           to
           have
           Mercy
           on
           us
           ,
           for
           now
           nothing
           but
           individual
           ruin
           appeared
           before
           our
           Eyes
           :
           after
           Prayers
           being
           done
           it
           proved
           a
           little
           clearer
           Weather
           ;
           and
           I
           looking
           over
           the
           Stern
           saw
           a
           small
           Beach
           directly
           with
           the
           Stern
           of
           the
           Ship
           ,
           where
           I
           thought
           might
           be
           some
           possibility
           of
           landing
           ;
           so
           I
           sent
           the
           Pinnace
           again
           with
           some
           Men
           to
           be
           landed
           ,
           but
           they
           durst
           not
           venture
           on
           Shore
           ;
           so
           I
           sent
           the
           Long-Boat
           with
           some
           20
           Men
           to
           Land
           ,
           who
           attempted
           it
           ,
           and
           got
           safe
           on
           Shore
           ;
           so
           they
           in
           the
           Pinnace
           seeing
           that
           ,
           followed
           them
           and
           their
           Men
           likewise
           ,
           and
           both
           returned
           on
           Board
           again
           :
           now
           the
           Men
           on
           the
           Shore
           sent
           to
           me
           desire
           some
           Fire-Arms
           and
           Ammunition
           ,
           for
           there
           was
           many
           Bears
           on
           Shore
           ;
           so
           I
           caused
           to
           be
           put
           into
           the
           Pinnace
           two
           Barrels
           of
           Powder
           that
           we
           had
           saved
           dry
           ,
           before
           the
           Ship
           was
           belged
           ,
           and
           some
           small
           Arms
           ,
           and
           some
           Provision
           ,
           with
           my
           own
           Papers
           ,
           and
           Mony
           ;
           but
           as
           she
           put
           off
           from
           the
           Ship
           side
           ,
           a
           Sea
           overset
           her
           ,
           so
           that
           all
           was
           lost
           with
           the
           life
           of
           one
           Man
           ,
           by
           name
           
             John
             Bosman
          
           ,
           being
           Coopers
           Mate
           ,
           and
           several
           others
           taken
           up
           for
           dead
           ;
           the
           Long-Boat
           being
           then
           on
           Shore
           to
           Land
           more
           
           Men
           ,
           and
           they
           hearing
           us
           call
           from
           aboard
           ,
           (
           when
           as
           then
           we
           could
           not
           see
           the
           Shore
           )
           they
           came
           on
           Board
           and
           saved
           the
           Men
           ,
           but
           the
           Pinnace
           was
           all
           broke
           to
           pieces
           ,
           which
           was
           no
           small
           grief
           to
           us
           ;
           so
           the
           Long-Boat
           being
           on
           Board
           ,
           and
           the
           Sea
           running
           prodigious
           high
           ,
           the
           Boatswain
           and
           some
           others
           would
           compel
           me
           and
           the
           Lieutenant
           to
           leave
           the
           Ship
           ,
           saying
           that
           it
           was
           impossible
           for
           the
           Boat
           to
           live
           any
           longer
           in
           that
           Sea
           ,
           and
           that
           they
           had
           rather
           be
           drowned
           than
           I
           ;
           but
           desiring
           me
           when
           I
           came
           on
           Shore
           (
           if
           it
           were
           possible
           )
           to
           send
           the
           Boat
           again
           for
           them
           :
           so
           I
           being
           half
           way
           on
           Shore
           the
           Ship
           over-set
           ;
           so
           I
           made
           all
           the
           hast
           possible
           to
           Land
           them
           Men
           I
           had
           in
           the
           Boat
           ,
           and
           having
           landed
           them
           I
           went
           off
           to
           the
           Ship
           again
           to
           save
           those
           poor
           Men
           that
           had
           been
           so
           kind
           to
           me
           before
           :
           so
           with
           great
           hazard
           I
           got
           with
           the
           Boat
           to
           the
           Quarter
           of
           the
           Ship
           ,
           and
           they
           came
           down
           the
           Ladder
           into
           the
           Boat
           ,
           only
           one
           Man
           who
           was
           left
           for
           dead
           ,
           which
           was
           one
           that
           had
           been
           cast
           away
           in
           the
           Pinnace
           ,
           whose
           name
           was
           
             Alexander
             Frazor
          
           ,
           a
           very
           pretty
           Saylor
           .
           So
           I
           returned
           to
           the
           Shore
           and
           got
           safe
           to
           Land
           ,
           though
           very
           wet
           and
           cold
           ;
           so
           we
           hauled
           up
           the
           Boat
           on
           Shore
           ,
           and
           went
           up
           the
           Land
           about
           a
           flightshoot
           ,
           where
           our
           Men
           were
           making
           a
           Fire
           ,
           and
           a
           Tent
           with
           Canvas
           and
           Oars
           ,
           which
           we
           had
           saved
           for
           that
           Purpose
           ;
           so
           we
           lay
           all
           that
           Night
           very
           cold
           ,
           wet
           ,
           and
           weary
           .
           The
           next
           Morning
           the
           Man
           that
           we
           left
           on
           Board
           recovered
           ,
           and
           got
           unto
           the
           Mizen-Top
           ;
           for
           that
           Mast
           we
           left
           standing
           when
           we
           came
           away
           ,
           the
           other
           we
           had
           cut
           all
           down
           .
        
         
         
           The
           Ship
           laboured
           and
           beat
           violently
           ,
           but
           it
           blew
           so
           hard
           ,
           and
           the
           Sea
           ran
           so
           high
           that
           it
           was
           impossible
           to
           save
           him
           ;
           so
           the
           Weather
           continuing
           blowing
           ,
           with
           extreme
           Fogs
           ,
           and
           with
           Frost
           and
           Snow
           ,
           and
           all
           the
           ill
           compacted
           Weather
           that
           could
           be
           imagined
           together
           .
           We
           built
           more
           Tents
           to
           preserve
           our selves
           ,
           and
           the
           Ship
           breaking
           in
           pieces
           came
           all
           ashore
           to
           the
           same
           place
           where
           we
           landed
           ,
           which
           served
           for
           shelter
           and
           Firing
           ;
           besides
           there
           came
           to
           us
           some
           Hogsheads
           of
           Flower
           ,
           and
           Brandy
           good
           store
           ,
           which
           was
           no
           little
           Comfort
           in
           our
           great
           Extremity
           .
           Here
           we
           lay
           betwixt
           hope
           and
           despair
           ,
           hoping
           for
           fair
           Weather
           that
           Captian
           Flawes
           might
           find
           us
           ,
           which
           was
           impossible
           that
           ever
           he
           should
           do
           if
           it
           continued
           foggy
           ;
           and
           some
           despairing
           of
           his
           being
           safe
           ,
           but
           that
           he
           might
           be
           Lost
           as
           well
           as
           we
           .
           But
           supposing
           we
           never
           was
           to
           see
           him
           again
           ,
           I
           was
           resolved
           to
           try
           the
           utmost
           to
           save
           as
           many
           as
           I
           could
           in
           the
           Long-Boat
           ;
           in
           order
           thereunto
           we
           raised
           her
           two
           Foot
           ,
           and
           laid
           a
           Deck
           upon
           her
           to
           keep
           the
           Sea
           out
           as
           much
           as
           was
           possible
           and
           with
           this
           Boat
           and
           30
           Men.
           (
           for
           she
           could
           carry
           no
           more
           )
           I
           intended
           to
           Row
           and
           Sail
           to
           Russia
           but
           the
           Men
           not
           being
           satisfied
           who
           should
           be
           the
           Men
           ,
           began
           to
           be
           very
           unruly
           in
           their
           mind
           and
           behaviour
           ;
           every
           one
           having
           as
           much
           reason
           to
           save
           himself
           as
           another
           ,
           some
           holding
           Consultation
           to
           stave
           the
           Boat
           ,
           and
           all
           to
           run
           the
           like
           Fortune
           .
           But
           here
           Brandy
           was
           our
           best
           Friend
           ,
           for
           it
           kept
           them
           alwaies
           Fox'd
           ,
           so
           that
           in
           all
           their
           Designs
           I
           could
           prevent
           them
           ;
           some
           were
           of
           the
           mind
           to
           go
           by
           
           Land
           ,
           but
           that
           I
           knew
           was
           impossible
           to
           any
           Man
           ;
           neither
           had
           we
           Provisions
           ,
           nor
           Ammunition
           to
           defend
           us
           from
           the
           Wild
           Beasts
           ;
           and
           if
           it
           had
           been
           passable
           ,
           that
           is
           any
           going
           on
           the
           ground
           for
           Bogs
           ,
           that
           they
           would
           have
           met
           with
           Rivers
           that
           they
           knew
           not
           whether
           to
           go
           :
           so
           there
           being
           no
           probability
           of
           going
           by
           Land
           ,
           nor
           for
           any
           to
           attempt
           going
           in
           the
           Boat
           ,
           without
           forty
           Men
           having
           been
           first
           destroyed
           .
           I
           will
           leave
           it
           to
           the
           consideratiion
           of
           any
           ,
           whither
           we
           were
           not
           in
           a
           very
           miserable
           condition
           without
           Divine
           Providence
           :
           to
           Write
           my
           thought
           I
           had
           at
           that
           time
           ,
           to
           save
           as
           many
           Men
           as
           I
           could
           ,
           it
           is
           not
           pertinent
           at
           all
           to
           the
           Discourse
           ,
           since
           it
           cannot
           but
           be
           imagined
           to
           be
           Tragical
           .
           The
           Weather
           continued
           still
           very
           bad
           with
           Fogs
           ,
           Snow
           ,
           Rain
           ,
           and
           Frost
           ,
           till
           the
           9.
           
           Day
           of
           our
           being
           on
           Shore
           ,
           which
           was
           the
           8.
           
           Day
           of
           July
           ,
           when
           in
           the
           Morning
           it
           cleared
           up
           ,
           and
           to
           our
           great
           joy
           ,
           one
           of
           the
           Sailors
           cried
           out
           a
           Sail
           ,
           which
           proved
           Captain
           Flawes
           ,
           as
           reasonable
           may
           be
           imagined
           ;
           so
           we
           set
           fire
           to
           our
           Town
           that
           he
           might
           see
           where
           we
           was
           ,
           which
           he
           presently
           saw
           ,
           so
           come
           to
           us
           ,
           and
           sent
           his
           Boat
           to
           us
           (
           but
           before
           I
           went
           off
           )
           I
           Writ
           a
           brief
           Relation
           of
           the
           intention
           of
           the
           Voyage
           ,
           with
           the
           Accidents
           that
           had
           befallen
           us
           ,
           and
           put
           it
           in
           a
           Glass-Bottle
           ,
           and
           left
           it
           in
           the
           Fortification
           I
           had
           there
           built
           .
           So
           by
           twelve
           a
           Clock
           we
           all
           got
           safe
           on
           Board
           ,
           but
           left
           all
           on
           Shore
           that
           we
           had
           saved
           from
           the
           Ship
           ;
           for
           we
           much
           feared
           it
           should
           prove
           foggy
           again
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           Now
           I
           intend
           to
           give
           a
           brief
           description
           of
           the
           Land
           ,
           and
           the
           Observations
           I
           made
           there
           .
        
         
           
             NOva
             Zembla
          
           ,
           is
           so
           called
           by
           the
           Russians
           ,
           which
           signifieth
           
             New
             Land
          
           in
           their
           Language
           ;
           to
           prove
           it
           is
           either
           an
           Island
           ,
           or
           whither
           it
           joyneth
           to
           the
           Continent
           of
           Tartaria
           ,
           would
           be
           a
           very
           hard
           Task
           ,
           nor
           is
           it
           certainly
           known
           to
           any
           ;
           for
           by
           Circumstances
           I
           think
           it
           impossible
           to
           prove
           ,
           and
           by
           Experience
           the
           search
           thereof
           is
           so
           impossible
           that
           it
           will
           hardly
           be
           tryed
           .
        
         
           But
           let
           it
           be
           either
           ,
           I
           think
           the
           matter
           is
           not
           much
           ,
           since
           it
           is
           the
           most
           miserable
           Country
           that
           lyeth
           on
           the
           Foundation
           of
           the
           Earth
           ;
           a
           Country
           most
           part
           of
           it
           covered
           perpetually
           with
           Snow
           ,
           and
           that
           that
           is
           bare
           is
           not
           to
           be
           walked
           on
           ,
           being
           like
           Bogs
           ,
           upon
           whose
           Superficies
           grows
           a
           kind
           of
           Moss
           ;
           which
           beareth
           a
           small
           blue
           and
           yellow
           Flower
           ,
           and
           this
           is
           all
           the
           Product
           of
           the
           Earth
           of
           this
           Country
           .
           Under
           the
           superficies
           of
           this
           Earth
           ,
           about
           two
           Foot
           deep
           ,
           after
           we
           had
           dug
           so
           low
           ,
           we
           came
           to
           a
           firm
           Body
           of
           Ice
           ;
           which
           ,
           as
           I
           think
           ,
           was
           never
           heard
           of
           before
           :
           so
           these
           Men
           that
           did
           imagin
           ,
           if
           they
           were
           forced
           to
           Winter
           to
           the
           Northward
           ,
           would
           dig
           Caves
           in
           the
           Earth
           to
           preserve
           themselves
           from
           cold
           ,
           would
           find
           
           here
           but
           very
           bad
           Lodging
           .
           The
           Snow
           lieth
           here
           contrary
           to
           what
           it
           doth
           in
           any
           other
           Country
           ;
           for
           in
           all
           other
           Climates
           the
           Snow
           melteth
           soonest
           away
           near
           the
           Sea
           side
           ,
           but
           here
           the
           Sea
           beateth
           against
           the
           snowy
           Clifts
           ,
           which
           in
           some
           places
           are
           as
           high
           as
           either
           of
           the
           Forelands
           in
           Kent
           :
           the
           Sea
           has
           washed
           underneath
           the
           Snow
           a
           prodigious
           way
           ,
           and
           the
           Snow
           over
           hanging
           ,
           most
           fearful
           to
           behold
           ,
           and
           up
           from
           the
           Water
           side
           ,
           upon
           the
           first
           Ridge
           of
           Hills
           ,
           the
           Snow
           was
           melted
           till
           you
           come
           to
           the
           next
           Ridge
           ,
           which
           are
           Mountains
           ,
           and
           they
           all
           the
           way
           up
           are
           covered
           with
           Snow
           ,
           which
           I
           believe
           hath
           lain
           there
           evere
           since
           the
           Creation
           ;
           but
           after
           we
           had
           ascended
           this
           ,
           which
           in
           some
           places
           was
           almost
           Perpendicular
           ,
           we
           came
           to
           the
           top
           of
           all
           the
           Mountains
           ,
           as
           we
           supposed
           ,
           for
           we
           could
           not
           see
           far
           ;
           for
           we
           could
           hardly
           see
           one
           the
           other
           the
           Fog
           was
           so
           thick
           ,
           and
           remained
           so
           all
           the
           time
           we
           were
           in
           the
           Country
           ;
           but
           on
           the
           top
           of
           these
           Hills
           we
           found
           it
           bare
           from
           Snow
           ,
           and
           indifferent
           good
           walking
           .
           The
           best
           that
           I
           found
           in
           the
           Country
           were
           only
           Bears
           :
           I
           continued
           on
           the
           top
           of
           those
           Hills
           fome
           two
           hours
           ,
           and
           went
           as
           far
           as
           was
           convenient
           ,
           that
           we
           might
           find
           the
           way
           back
           again
           .
           Here
           I
           found
           the
           Track
           of
           many
           large
           Deer
           ,
           also
           we
           found
           an
           Horn
           of
           Beam
           of
           Deer
           ;
           besides
           Deer
           ,
           there
           be
           abundance
           of
           large
           White
           Bears
           ,
           and
           some
           Foxes
           ,
           and
           a
           little
           Creature
           much
           like
           a
           Coney
           ,
           but
           not
           so
           big
           as
           a
           Rat
           ;
           and
           some
           few
           little
           Birds
           like
           Larks
           ,
           and
           these
           be
           all
           the
           Beasts
           or
           Fowls
           we
           found
           in
           the
           Country
           .
           Every
           quarter
           of
           a
           
           Mile
           there
           runneth
           down
           from
           the
           Hills
           into
           the
           Sea
           a
           small
           Rivulet
           of
           very
           good
           Water
           ,
           which
           is
           melted
           from
           Snow
           .
           Upon
           the
           Hills
           we
           found
           abundance
           of
           Slate-stone
           ,
           which
           made
           it
           good
           walking
           ;
           but
           at
           the
           Sea
           side
           ,
           where
           the
           Rivulet
           came
           down
           ,
           we
           found
           very
           good
           Black
           Marble
           ,
           with
           White
           Veins
           in
           it
           .
        
         
           The
           Point
           where
           we
           lost
           our
           Ship
           I
           called
           Point
           Speedill
           :
           the
           high
           Hills
           I
           called
           King
           
           Charles's
           Snow
           Hills
           ;
           and
           the
           next
           Point
           to
           the
           Southward
           ,
           which
           is
           the
           Westermost
           Point
           of
           
             Nova
             Zembla
          
           ,
           I
           named
           James
           Foreland
           ,
           and
           the
           Point
           to
           the
           Northward
           ,
           York
           Point
           .
           Point
           Speedill
           lieth
           in
           the
           Lat.
           of
           74
           d.
           30
           m.
           North
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           Longitude
           East
           from
           the
           City
           of
           London
           63
           d.
           00
           m.
           The
           variation
           of
           the
           Compass
           is
           13
           d.
           West
           ,
           and
           it
           is
           full
           Sea
           at
           South-west
           Moon
           .
           The
           Tide
           riseth
           8
           Foot
           ,
           and
           setteth
           directly
           upon
           the
           Shore
           ,
           which
           is
           a
           certain
           sign
           that
           there
           is
           no
           Passage
           to
           the
           Northward
           .
           The
           Sea
           Water
           ,
           about
           the
           Ice
           and
           Land
           ,
           is
           very
           salt
           ,
           and
           much
           salter
           than
           any
           I
           ever
           tasted
           ,
           and
           a
           great
           deal
           heavier
           ,
           and
           I
           may
           certainly
           say
           the
           clearest
           in
           the
           World
           ,
           for
           I
           could
           see
           the
           ground
           very
           plain
           in
           80
           Fathom
           Water
           ,
           which
           is
           480
           Foot
           ,
           there
           being
           few
           Steeples
           so
           high
           as
           that
           was
           deep
           ,
           and
           I
           could
           see
           the
           Shells
           at
           the
           bottom
           very
           plain
           .
        
         
           If
           the
           Voyage
           had
           succeeded
           ,
           I
           should
           ,
           God
           willing
           ,
           have
           given
           a
           more
           full
           and
           nice
           account
           of
           all
           the
           Experiments
           I
           had
           ,
           and
           should
           have
           made
           ,
           especially
           those
           of
           the
           Magnet
           ,
           which
           I
           forbare
           here
           to
           mention
           ,
           because
           I
           intended
           to
           
           Publish
           them
           in
           a
           Treatise
           by
           themselves
           :
           so
           having
           with
           the
           Ship
           lost
           all
           my
           Papers
           ,
           and
           with
           them
           all
           I
           had
           in
           the
           World
           beside
           ;
           I
           most
           humbly
           beg
           Pardon
           that
           I
           have
           given
           no
           more
           Ample
           a
           Relation
           .
        
         
           A
           Collection
           of
           Curious
           Travels
           and
           Voyages
           in
           two
           Tomes
           .
           The
           first
           containing
           Dr.
           Leonhart
           Rauwolff's
           Itinerary
           into
           the
           Eastern
           Countries
           ,
           as
           
             Syria
             ,
             Palestine
          
           ,
           or
           the
           
             Holy
             Land
             ,
             Armenia
             ,
             Mesopotamia
             ,
             Assyria
             ,
             Chaldea
             ,
          
           &c.
           
           Translated
           from
           the
           
             High
             Dutch
          
           by
           
             Nich.
             Staphorst
          
           .
           The
           second
           in
           taking
           many
           parts
           of
           
             Greece
             ,
             Asia
             Minor
             ,
             Eqypt
             ,
             Arabia
             Felix
             ,
          
           and
           
             Petraea
             ,
             Ethiopia
          
           ,
           The
           
             Red
             Sea
          
           ,
           &c.
           From
           the
           Observations
           of
           Monsieur
           Belon
           ,
           Mr.
           Vernon
           ,
           Dr.
           Spon
           ,
           Dr.
           Smith
           ,
           Dr.
           Huntingdon
           ,
           Mr.
           
             Greaves
             ,
             Alpinus
             ,
             Veslingius
          
           ,
           Thevenot's
           Collections
           ,
           and
           others
           .
           To
           which
           are
           added
           three
           Catalogues
           of
           such
           Trees
           ,
           Shrubs
           ,
           and
           Herbs
           as
           grow
           in
           the
           Levant
           .
           By
           
             John
             Ray
          
           ,
           Fellow
           of
           the
           Royal
           Society
           .
           London
           .
           Octavo
           1693.
           
           Printed
           for
           
             S.
             Smith
          
           and
           
             B.
             Walford
          
           ,
           at
           the
           Prince's
           Arms
           in
           S.
           Pauls
           Church-Yard
           .
        
         
           
             The
             Voyage
             to
             Spitzbergen
          
        
         
      
       
         
         
           
             
               A
               TABLE
               OF
               The
               Wind
               and
               Weather
               in
               the
               Voyage
               to
               SPITZBERGEN
               .
            
             
               
                 Day
                 of
                 Mon.
                 
              
               
                 Wind.
                 
              
               
                 Weather
                 .
              
               
                 Latitude
                 .
              
               
                 D.
                 of
                 M.
                 
              
               
                 Wind.
                 
              
               
                 Weather
              
            
             
               
                 April
                 15
              
               
                 N.
                 E.
                 
              
               
                  
              
               
                  
              
               
                 15
              
               
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 Foggs
                 ,
                 with
                 wind
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 1671.
                 16
              
               
                 E.
                 
              
               
                 Gloomy
                 ,
                 With
                 sunshine
              
               
                 56°
              
               
                 16
              
               
                 The
                 same
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 17
              
               
                 E.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 same
              
               
                 57°
              
               
                 17
              
               
                 S.
                 
              
               
                 Winds
                 and
                 rains
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 18
              
               
                 E.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 same
              
               
                 58°
                 49′
              
               
                 18
              
               
                  
              
               
                 Foggy
                 and
                 very
                 cold
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 19
              
               
                 S.
                 W.
                 &
                 by
                 W.
                 
              
               
                  
              
               
                 59°
              
               
                 19
              
               
                  
              
               
                 Storm
                 and
                 rain
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 20
              
               
                 S.
                 W.
                 &
                 by
                 S.
                 
              
               
                 Stormy
                 ,
                 with
                 rain
              
               
                 61°
              
               
                 20
              
               
                  
              
               
                 Warm
                 sunshine
                 and
                 calm
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 21
              
               
                 S.
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 same
              
               
                 62°
                 12′
              
               
                 21
              
               
                 E.
                 
              
               
                 Foggs
                 and
                 wind
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 22
              
               
                 S.
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 Windy
                 ,
                 cold
                 ,
                 and
                 rain
              
               
                 65°
              
               
                 22
              
               
                  
              
               
                 Very
                 fair
                 and
                 warm
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 23
              
               
                 S.
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 Cloudy
              
               
                 66.
                 14
                 '
              
               
                 23
              
               
                  
              
               
                 Wind
                 ,
                 foggs
                 ,
                 and
                 cold
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 24
              
               
                 S.
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 Storm
                 and
                 cloudy
              
               
                  
              
               
                 24
              
               
                  
              
               
                 Frost
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 25
              
               
                 S.
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 High
                 winds
                 at
                 night
                 ,
                 rainy
                 ,
                 with
                 hail
                 and
                 snow
                 ,
                 the
                 wind
                 eastward
              
               
                 68°
                 49′
              
               
                 25
              
               
                 S.
                 E.
                 
              
               
                 Sunshine
                 all
                 day
                 and
                 night
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                  
              
               
                  
              
               
                  
              
               
                  
              
               
                 26
              
               
                  
              
               
                 The
                 same
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                  
              
               
                  
              
               
                  
              
               
                  
              
               
                 28
              
               
                  
              
               
                 Stormy
                 all
                 day
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 26
              
               
                 E.
                 
              
               
                 Stormy
              
               
                 71°
                 3′
              
               
                 29
              
               
                  
              
               
                 Fair
                 weather
                 and
                 calm
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 27
              
               
                 N.
                 E.
                 &
                 by
                 E.
                 
              
               
                 Very
                 cold
                 ,
                 with
                 hail
                 and
                 snow
                 ,
              
               
                  
              
               
                 July
                 2
              
               
                  
              
               
                 Sunshine
                 and
                 pretty
                 warm
              
            
             
               
                 28
              
               
                 N.
                 E.
                 
              
               
                 and
                 stormy
                 Windy
              
               
                  
              
               
                 3
              
               
                  
              
               
                 Gloomy
                 ,
                 and
                 not
                 cold
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 29
              
               
                 N.
                 E.
                 &
                 byN.
                 
              
               
                 Foggy
                 all
                 day
              
               
                  
              
               
                 4
              
               
                  
              
               
                 Sunshine
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 30
              
               
                 N.
                 
              
               
                 Foggs
                 ,
                 with
                 rain
                 and
                 snow
              
               
                  
              
               
                 5
              
               
                  
              
               
                 The
                 same
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 May
                 1
              
               
                 N.
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 Very
                 cold
                 &
                 windy
                 ,
                 with
                 snow
              
               
                  
              
               
                 6
              
               
                  
              
               
                 The
                 same
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                  
              
               
                  
              
               
                 and
                 sunshine
                 by
                 turns
              
               
                  
              
               
                 7
              
               
                 Windy
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 2
              
               
                 N.
                 W.
                 &
                 by
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 Cold
                 winds
              
               
                  
              
               
                 8
              
               
                 N.
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 Snow
                 and
                 rain
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 3
              
               
                 N.
                 W.
                 &
                 by
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 Cold
                 snow
                 and
                 misty
              
               
                  
              
               
                 9
              
               
                 N.
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 Windy
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 4
              
               
                 N.
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 Snow
                 ,
                 hail
                 ,
                 and
                 gloomy
              
               
                  
              
               
                 10
              
               
                  
              
               
                 Warm
                 sunshine
                 ,
                 and
                 calm
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 5
              
               
                 N.
                 W.
                 &
                 by
                 N.
                 
              
               
                 Moderately
                 cold
                 ,
                 and
                 sunshine
              
               
                  
              
               
                 11
              
               
                 S.
                 
              
               
                 Stormy
                 ,
                 with
                 snow
                 and
                 rain
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 6
              
               
                 N.
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 Snow
                 ,
                 storms
                 ,
                 hail
                 and
                 frost
              
               
                  
              
               
                 12
              
               
                  
              
               
                 Gloomy
                 sunshine
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 7
              
               
                  
              
               
                 Moderate
                 Frost
              
               
                  
              
               
                 13
              
               
                 N.
                 E.
                 &
                 by
                 E.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 same
              
               
                  
              
            
             
             
               
                 8
              
               
                 S.
                 W.
                 &
                 by
                 S.
                 
              
               
                 Cloudy
                 and
                 cold
              
               
                  
              
               
                 14
              
               
                 N.
                 E.
                 &
                 by
                 E.
                 
              
               
                 Foggs
                 all
                 day
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 9
              
               
                 S.
                 W.
                 &
                 by
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 same
              
               
                  
              
               
                 15
              
               
                 N.
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 Foggs
                 ,
                 with
                 cold
                 wind
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 10
              
               
                 N.
                 W.
                 &
                 by
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 Cold
                 and
                 high
                 winds
              
               
                  
              
               
                 16
              
               
                  
              
               
                 Wind
                 and
                 snow
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 11
              
               
                 N.
                 W.
                 &
                 by
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 Stormy
              
               
                 70°
                 3′
              
               
                 17
              
               
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 Gloomy
                 sunshine
                 and
                 cold
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 12
              
               
                 N.
                 
              
               
                 Stormy
                 and
                 very
                 cold
              
               
                  
              
               
                 18
              
               
                  
              
               
                 Fair
                 weather
                 and
                 calm
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 13
              
               
                 N.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 same
              
               
                  
              
               
                 19
              
               
                  
              
               
                 The
                 same
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 14
              
               
                 N.
                 E.
                 
              
               
                 Fair
                 and
                 sunshine
              
               
                 75°
                 22′
              
               
                 20
              
               
                 S.
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 Storm
                 and
                 snow
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 15
              
               
                 N.
                 E.
                 
              
               
                  
              
               
                 75°
                 33′
              
               
                 21
              
               
                  
              
               
                 Rain
                 all
                 day
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 16
              
               
                 N.
                 
              
               
                 Sunshine
                 ,
                 cold
                 and
                 windy
              
               
                  
              
               
                 22
              
               
                  
              
               
                 Fogg
                 all
                 day
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 17
              
               
                 N.
                 E.
                 &
                 by
                 N.
                 
              
               
                 Hard
                 frost
              
               
                  
              
               
                 23
              
               
                  
              
               
                 Warm
                 and
                 sunshine
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 18
              
               
                 N.
                 E.
                 &
                 by
                 N.
                 
              
               
                 Calm
                 weather
              
               
                 75°
                 35′
              
               
                 24
              
               
                  
              
               
                 The
                 same
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 19
              
               
                 N.
                 
              
               
                 Gloomy
                 ,
                 sunshine
                 ,
                 and
                 calm
              
               
                  
              
               
                 25
              
               
                 S.
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 Cloudy
                 and
                 cold
                 ,
                 and
                 night-fogs
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 20
              
               
                 N.
                 
              
               
                 Calm
                 very
                 cold
              
               
                  
              
               
                 26
              
               
                  
              
               
                 The
                 same
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 22
              
               
                 S.
                 
              
               
                  
              
               
                  
              
               
                 27
              
               
                 S.
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 Gloomy
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 23
              
               
                  
              
               
                 Sunshine
              
               
                 77°
                 24′
              
               
                 29
              
               
                 N.
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 Very
                 cold
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 24
              
               
                 S.
                 
              
               
                 Storms
                 ,
                 rain
                 ,
                 and
                 snow
              
               
                  
              
               
                 30
              
               
                 N.
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 Fogs
                 ,
                 and
                 windy
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 25
              
               
                 N.
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 Windy
                 and
                 cold
              
               
                  
              
               
                 Aug.
                 1
              
               
                 N.
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 Storms
                 ,
                 fogs
                 and
                 rain
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 26
              
               
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 Snow
                 and
                 sunshine
                 by
                 turns
              
               
                  
              
               
                 2
              
               
                 E.
                 
              
               
                 Fogs
                 and
                 frost
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 27
              
               
                 S.
                 
              
               
                 Calm
              
               
                  
              
               
                 3
              
               
                 N.
                 E.
                 
              
               
                 Gloomy
                 ,
                 sunshine
                 ,
                 and
                 cold
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 28
              
               
                  
              
               
                 Clear
                 and
                 windy
              
               
                  
              
               
                 4
              
               
                 S.
                 E.
                 &
                 by
                 E.
                 
              
               
                 Very
                 Foggy
                 ,
                 and
                 calm
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 29
              
               
                 S.
                 
              
               
                 Hard
                 frost
                 and
                 cloudy
              
               
                  
              
               
                 5
              
               
                 S.
                 E.
                 &
                 by
                 S.
                 
              
               
                 Cloudy
                 and
                 calm
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 30
              
               
                 S.
                 E.
                 
              
               
                 Fair
                 and
                 calm
              
               
                  
              
               
                 6
              
               
                 S.
                 E.
                 &
                 by
                 S.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 same
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 June
                 1
              
               
                 N.
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 Sunshine
              
               
                  
              
               
                 7
              
               
                  
              
               
                 High
                 wind
                 &
                 stormy
                 ,
                 with
                 rain
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 2
              
               
                 N.
                 E.
                 &
                 by
                 N.
                 
              
               
                 Hard
                 frost
                 and
                 clear
              
               
                  
              
               
                 8
              
               
                 S.
                 E.
                 
              
               
                 Windy
                 and
                 gloomy
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 3
              
               
                 N.
                 E.
                 
              
               
                 Snow
                 and
                 Stormy
              
               
                  
              
               
                 9
              
               
                 S.
                 E.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 same
              
               
                 66°
                 47′
              
            
             
               
                 4
              
               
                 N.
                 
              
               
                 Snow
                 and
                 rain
                 ,
                 and
                 changeable
              
               
                  
              
               
                 10
              
               
                 S.
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 Dark
                 ,
                 cloudy
                 ,
                 and
                 windy
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 5
              
               
                 N.
                 
              
               
                 Stormy
                 with
                 sunshine
              
               
                  
              
               
                 11
              
               
                  
              
               
                 The
                 same
                 ,
                 but
                 less
                 wind
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 6
              
               
                 N.
                 
              
               
                 Foggy
              
               
                  
              
               
                 12
              
               
                 S.
                 W.
                 N.
                 
              
               
                 Rain
                 ,
                 after
                 noon
                 fair
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 7
              
               
                  
              
               
                 Fair
                 and
                 sunshine
              
               
                  
              
               
                 13
              
               
                 N.
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 Stormy
                 ,
                 with
                 rain
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 8
              
               
                  
              
               
                 Foggs
                 and
                 snow
              
               
                  
              
               
                 14
              
               
                 N.
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 Fair
                 sunshine
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 9
              
               
                 N.
                 E.
                 
              
               
                 Cloudy
              
               
                  
              
               
                 15
              
               
                 N.
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 Winds
                 ,
                 clouds
                 ,
                 and
                 sunshine
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 10
              
               
                 N.
                 
              
               
                 Winds
                 and
                 snow
              
               
                  
              
               
                 16
              
               
                 N.
                 W.
                 &
                 by
                 N.
                 
              
               
                 Windy
                 and
                 gloomy
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 11
              
               
                 N.
                 
              
               
                 SUnshine
                 and
                 windy
              
               
                  
              
               
                 17
              
               
                 N.
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 Fair
                 weather
                 and
                 warm
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 12
              
               
                  
              
               
                 Cold
                 and
                 stormy
              
               
                  
              
               
                 18
              
               
                  
              
               
                 The
                 same
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 13
              
               
                  
              
               
                 Windy
                 and
                 foggy
              
               
                 77°
              
               
                 19
              
               
                  
              
               
                 The
                 same
              
               
                  
              
            
             
               
                 14
              
               
                 W.
                 
              
               
                 Cold
                 wins
              
               
                  
              
               
                 20
              
               
                  
              
               
                 The
                 same
              
               
                  
              
            
          
        
      
       
         
         
           
        
      
       
         
         
           THE
           FIRST
           PART
           OF
           THE
           VOYAGE
           INTO
           Spitzbergen
           and
           Greenland
           :
           CONTAINING
           The
           Passages
           of
           the
           whole
           voyage
           ,
           together
           with
           some
           Account
           of
           the
           Weather
           ,
           from
           the
           15th
           of
           April
           to
           the
           
             21th
             of
             August
             ,
             An.
             1671.
             
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             I.
             
          
           
             Of
             the
             Voyage
             from
             the
             Elbe
             to
             Spitzbergen
             .
          
           
             WE
             set
             Sail
             the
             15th
             of
             April
             ,
             1671.
             about
             noon
             from
             the
             Elbe
             .
             The
             Wind
             was
             North-east
             .
             At
             night
             ,
             when
             ●e
             came
             by
             the
             Hilge-land
             ,
             it
             bore
             to
             North-west
             .
             The
             name
             of
             the
             Ship
             was
             
               Jones
               in
               the
               ●hale
               ,
               Peter
               Peterson
            
             of
             Friseland
             Master
             .
          
           
           
             The
             27th
             we
             had
             storms
             ,
             hail
             and
             snow
             ,
             with
             very
             cold
             weather
             ,
             the
             wind
             North-east
             and
             by
             east
             ,
             we
             were
             in
             71
             degrees
             ,
             and
             came
             to
             the
             Ice
             ,
             and
             turned
             back
             again
             .
             The
             Island
             of
             
               John
               Maien
            
             bore
             from
             us
             South-west
             and
             by
             west
             ,
             as
             near
             as
             we
             could
             guess
             within
             ten
             Miles
             .
             We
             might
             have
             seen
             the
             Island
             plain
             enough
             ,
             but
             the
             Air
             was
             haizy
             and
             full
             of
             fogs
             and
             snow
             ,
             so
             that
             we
             could
             not
             see
             far
             .
             About
             noon
             it
             blew
             a
             storm
             ,
             whereupon
             we
             took
             down
             our
             Top-sails
             ,
             and
             furling
             our
             Main-sail
             ,
             drove
             with
             the
             Missen-sail
             towards
             South-east
             .
          
           
             The
             29th
             it
             was
             foggy
             all
             day
             ,
             the
             wind
             North
             east
             and
             by
             north
             ,
             we
             came
             to
             the
             Ice
             ,
             and
             sailed
             from
             it
             again
             ,
             as
             you
             may
             see
             in
             the
             Plate
             A.
             
          
           
             The
             3cth
             ,
             the
             first
             Sunday
             after
             Easter
             ,
             was
             foggy
             ,
             with
             rain
             and
             snow
             ,
             the
             wind
             at
             North
             ,
             at
             night
             we
             came
             to
             the
             Ice
             ,
             but
             sailed
             from
             it
             again
             ;
             the
             Sea
             was
             tempestuous
             ,
             and
             tossed
             our
             Ship
             very
             much
             .
          
           
             The
             3d
             of
             May
             was
             cold
             ,
             snowy
             ,
             with
             hail
             ,
             and
             misty
             Sun-shine
             ,
             the
             wind
             North-west
             and
             by
             west
             ,
             the
             Sun
             set
             no
             more
             ,
             we
             saw
             it
             as
             well
             by
             night
             as
             by
             day
             .
          
           
             The
             fourth
             we
             had
             snow
             ,
             hail
             ,
             and
             gloomy
             Sun-shine
             ,
             with
             cold
             weather
             ,
             but
             not
             excessive
             ,
             the
             wind
             at
             North-west
             ,
             the
             weather
             every
             day
             unconstant
             .
             Here
             we
             saw
             abundance
             of
             Seales
             ,
             they
             jump'd
             out
             of
             the
             water
             before
             the
             Ship
             ,
             and
             which
             was
             strange
             ,
             they
             would
             stand
             half
             out
             of
             the
             water
             ,
             and
             as
             it
             were
             dance
             together
             .
          
           
             The
             5th-in
             the
             forenoon
             it
             was
             moderately
             cold
             ,
             and
             Sun-shine
             ,
             but
             toward
             noon
             darkish
             and
             cloudy
             ,
             with
             snow
             and
             great
             frost
             ,
             the
             
             wind
             North-west
             and
             by
             North.
             We
             saw
             daily
             many
             Ships
             ,
             failing
             about
             the
             Ice
             ,
             I
             observed
             that
             as
             they
             passed
             by
             one
             another
             ,
             they
             haled
             one
             another
             ,
             crying
             Holla
             ,
             and
             asked
             each
             other
             how
             many
             fish
             they
             had
             caught
             ,
             but
             they
             would
             not
             stick
             sometimes
             to
             tell
             more
             then
             they
             had
             .
             When
             it
             was
             windy
             ,
             that
             they
             could
             not
             hear
             one
             another
             ,
             they
             waved
             their
             Hats
             ,
             to
             signifie
             the
             number
             caught
             .
             But
             when
             they
             have
             their
             full
             Fraight
             of
             Whales
             ,
             they
             put
             up
             their
             great
             Flag
             as
             a
             sign
             thereof
             ;
             then
             if
             any
             hath
             a
             Message
             to
             be
             sent
             ,
             he
             delivers
             it
             to
             them
             ,
             as
             you
             may
             see
             in
             the
             Plate
             A
             by
             A.
             
          
           
             The
             7th
             we
             had
             moderate
             frost
             ,
             clouds
             and
             snow
             with
             rain
             .
             In
             the
             evening
             we
             sailed
             to
             the
             Ice
             ,
             the
             wind
             was
             quite
             contrary
             to
             us
             ,
             and
             the
             Ice
             too
             small
             ,
             wherefore
             we
             sailed
             from
             it
             .
             In
             the
             afternoon
             we
             saw
             Spitzbergen
             ,
             the
             South
             point
             of
             the
             North-foreland
             ,
             we
             supposed
             it
             the
             true
             Harbour
             .
             The
             Land
             appeared
             like
             a
             dark
             Cloud
             ,
             full
             of
             white
             streeks
             ,
             we
             turned
             to
             the
             West
             again
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Compass
             ,
             which
             is
             al
             's
             to
             be
             understood
             of
             the
             Ice
             and
             Harbour
             .
          
           
             The
             9th
             was
             the
             same
             weather
             ,
             and
             cold
             as
             before
             ,
             the
             Wind
             South-west
             and
             by
             west
             .
             In
             the
             afternoon
             a
             Fin-fish
             swam
             by
             our
             Ship
             ,
             which
             we
             took
             at
             first
             to
             be
             a
             Whale
             ,
             before
             we
             saw
             the
             high
             fins
             of
             his
             tail
             ,
             and
             came
             near
             to
             it
             .
             We
             had
             let
             down
             our
             Sloop
             from
             the
             Ship
             ,
             but
             that
             labour
             was
             lost
             ,
             for
             he
             was
             not
             worth
             taking
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             25th
             of
             April
             to
             this
             day
             ,
             we
             had
             not
             taken
             the
             Sun's
             altitude
             ,
             we
             were
             then
             in
             70
             degrees
             and
             3
             minutes
             ,
             and
             sailed
             towards
             the
             North
             and
             the
             Ice
             .
             It
             may
             seem
             strange
             ,
             that
             we
             so
             often
             sailed
             to
             the
             Ice
             and
             from
             it
             
             again
             ,
             but
             I
             shall
             give
             you
             a
             reason
             for
             that
             hereafter
             .
          
           
             The12th
             it
             was
             stormy
             and
             excessive
             cold
             ,
             the
             wind
             North
             ▪
             and
             we
             had
             the
             greatest
             frosts
             in
             this
             Month
             of
             May.
             
          
           
             On
             the
             14th
             the
             wind
             was
             North-west
             ,
             fine
             weather
             ,
             with
             Sun-shine
             ,
             we
             were
             within
             75
             degrees
             and
             22
             minutes
             .
             We
             told
             twenty
             Ships
             about
             us
             ,
             the
             Sea
             was
             very
             even
             ,
             and
             we
             hardly
             felt
             any
             wind
             ,
             yet
             it
             was
             very
             cold
             .
          
           
             In
             this
             place
             the
             Sea
             becomes
             smooth
             presently
             again
             after
             a
             storm
             ,
             chiefly
             when
             the
             wind
             blows
             from
             the
             Ice
             ;
             but
             when
             it
             blows
             off
             the
             Sea
             ,
             it
             always
             makes
             a
             great
             Sea.
             
          
           
             The
             same
             day
             we
             saw
             a
             Whale
             not
             far
             off
             from
             our
             Ship
             ,
             we
             put
             out
             four
             Boats
             from
             on
             board
             after
             him
             ,
             but
             this
             labour
             was
             also
             in
             vain
             ,
             for
             he
             run
             under
             water
             ,
             and
             saw
             him
             no
             more
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             19th
             we
             had
             a
             dull
             Sun-shine
             ,
             the
             wind
             was
             North
             ,
             and
             it
             was
             so
             calm
             that
             we
             could
             hardly
             feel
             it
             ;
             we
             rowed
             in
             the
             Ship-boat
             to
             the
             Ice
             ,
             and
             killed
             two
             Sea-hounds
             or
             Seales
             ;
             there
             were
             so
             many
             of
             them
             on
             the
             Ice
             that
             they
             could
             not
             be
             numbred
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             20th
             it
             was
             exceeding
             cold
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             very
             Sea
             was
             all
             frozen
             over
             ;
             yet
             it
             was
             so
             calm
             and
             still
             ,
             that
             we
             could
             hardly
             perceive
             the
             wind
             ,
             which
             was
             North
             ;
             there
             were
             nine
             Ships
             in
             our
             Company
             which
             sailed
             about
             the
             Ice
             ;
             we
             found
             still
             the
             longer
             we
             sailed
             the
             bigger
             the
             Ice
             .
          
           
           
             On
             the
             30th
             it
             was
             fair
             weather
             in
             the
             morning
             ,
             snowy
             about
             noon
             ,
             the
             wind
             was
             Southwest
             and
             very
             calm
             .
             We
             rowed
             in
             the
             great
             Sloop
             ,
             before
             the
             Ship
             ,
             farther
             into
             the
             Ice
             .
             In
             the
             morning
             we
             heard
             a
             Whale
             blow
             ,
             when
             the
             Sun
             was
             in
             the
             East
             ,
             and
             brought
             the
             Whale
             to
             the
             Ship
             ,
             when
             the
             Sun
             was
             at
             South-west
             and
             by
             east
             ;
             the
             same
             day
             we
             cut
             the
             Fat
             from
             it
             ,
             and
             filled
             with
             it
             70
             Barrels
             (
             which
             they
             call
             Kardels
             .
             )
             By
             this
             fish
             we
             found
             abundance
             of
             Birds
             ,
             most
             of
             them
             were
             Mallemucks
             ,
             (
             that
             is
             to
             say
             foolish
             Gnats
             )
             which
             were
             so
             greedy
             of
             their
             food
             ,
             that
             we
             kill'd
             them
             with
             sticks
             .
             This
             fish
             was
             found
             out
             by
             the
             Birds
             ,
             for
             we
             saw
             every
             where
             by
             them
             in
             the
             Sea
             where
             the
             Whale
             had
             been
             ,
             for
             he
             was
             wounded
             by
             an
             Harping
             Iron
             that
             stuck
             still
             in
             his
             flesh
             ,
             and
             he
             had
             also
             spent
             himself
             with
             hard
             swimming
             ;
             he
             blowed
             also
             very
             hollow
             ,
             he
             stank
             alive
             ,
             and
             the
             birds
             fed
             upon
             him
             .
             This
             Whale
             fermented
             when
             it
             was
             dead
             ,
             and
             the
             steam
             that
             came
             from
             it
             inflamed
             our
             eyes
             ,
             and
             made
             them
             sore
             .
             See
             Tab.
             A
             at
             a.
             
          
           
             This
             same
             night
             
               Cornelius
               Seaman
            
             lost
             his
             Ship
             by
             the
             squeezing
             and
             crushing
             together
             of
             the
             Ice
             ,
             for
             in
             this
             place
             are
             very
             great
             Sheets
             or
             Islands
             of
             Ice
             ,
             and
             the
             Seamen
             call
             it
             West-Ice
             ,
             because
             it
             lieth
             towards
             the
             West
             ,
             as
             you
             may
             see
             in
             the
             Plate
             B
             marked
             with
             b.
             
          
           
             On
             the
             2d
             of
             June
             we
             had
             a
             severe
             frost
             in
             the
             forenoon
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             night
             we
             saw
             the
             Moon
             very
             pale
             ,
             as
             it
             used
             to
             look
             in
             the
             day
             time
             in
             our
             Country
             ,
             with
             clear
             Sun-shine
             ,
             
             whereupon
             followed
             mist
             and
             snow
             ,
             the
             wind
             North-east
             and
             by
             north
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             morning
             ,
             June
             the
             4th
             ,
             we
             were
             a
             hunting
             again
             after
             a
             Whale
             ,
             and
             we
             came
             so
             near
             unto
             one
             ,
             that
             the
             Harponier
             was
             just
             a
             going
             to
             fling
             his
             Harpoon
             into
             her
             ,
             but
             she
             sunk
             down
             behind
             ,
             and
             held
             her
             head
             out
             of
             the
             water
             ,
             and
             so
             sunk
             down
             like
             a
             stone
             (
             as
             is
             to
             be
             seen
             by
             d
             on
             the
             cut
             A
             )
             and
             we
             saw
             her
             no
             more
             ;
             it
             was
             very
             like
             that
             the
             great
             Ice-field
             was
             full
             of
             holes
             in
             the
             middle
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             Whale
             could
             fetch
             breath
             underneath
             the
             Ice
             .
             A
             great
             many
             more
             Ships
             lay
             about
             this
             sheet
             of
             Ice
             ,
             one
             hunted
             the
             Whales
             to
             the
             other
             ,
             and
             so
             they
             were
             frighted
             ,
             and
             became
             very
             shy
             .
             So
             one
             gets
             as
             many
             fishes
             as
             the
             other
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             they
             all
             get
             one
             .
             We
             were
             there
             several
             times
             a
             hunting
             that
             very
             day
             ,
             and
             yet
             we
             got
             never
             a
             one
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             8th
             it
             was
             foggy
             ,
             and
             snowed
             all
             day
             ;
             we
             saw
             that
             day
             very
             many
             (
             Sea-dogs
             or
             )
             Seales
             on
             the
             Ice
             about
             the
             Sea-side
             ,
             so
             we
             set
             out
             a
             Boat
             and
             killed
             15
             of
             them
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             12th
             it
             was
             cold
             and
             stormy
             all
             day
             ,
             at
             night
             Sun-shine
             ;
             he
             that
             takes
             not
             exact
             notice
             ,
             knows
             no
             difference
             whether
             it
             by
             day
             or
             night
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             13th
             in
             the
             afternoon
             it
             was
             windy
             and
             foggy
             ,
             we
             were
             in
             77
             degrees
             ;
             we
             sailed
             along
             by
             the
             Ice
             somewhat
             easterly
             towards
             Spitzbergen
             ,
             as
             is
             to
             be
             seen
             in
             the
             Cut
             A
             at
             e.
             That
             night
             we
             saw
             more
             then
             20
             Whales
             that
             run
             one
             after
             another
             towards
             the
             Ice
             ;
             out
             of
             them
             we
             got
             our
             second
             fish
             ,
             which
             was
             a
             male
             one
             ;
             and
             this
             fish
             ,
             when
             they
             wounded
             him
             with
             Lances
             ,
             bled
             very
             much
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             Sea
             was
             tinged
             by
             it
             where
             he
             swam
             :
             we
             brought
             
             him
             to
             the
             Ship
             when
             the
             Sun
             was
             in
             the
             North
             :
             for
             the
             Sun
             is
             the
             Clock
             to
             the
             Seamen
             in
             Spitzbergen
             ,
             for
             else
             they
             would
             live
             without
             order
             ,
             and
             mistake
             in
             the
             usual
             seven
             weekly
             days
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             14th
             it
             was
             cold
             and
             windy
             ,
             the
             night
             foggy
             ,
             the
             wind
             blew
             West
             ,
             that
             day
             we
             came
             to
             
               Hans
               Lichtenberg
            
             .
          
           
             We
             arrived
             at
             
               Spitzbergen
               ,
               June
            
             the
             14th
             .
             First
             we
             came
             to
             the
             Foreland
             thereof
             ,
             then
             to
             the
             seven
             Ice-hills
             or
             Mountains
             ,
             then
             we
             passed
             the
             Harbour
             or
             Bay
             of
             the
             
               Hamburgers
               ,
               Magdalens
               ,
               English
            
             men
             and
             Danes
             ,
             and
             sailed
             into
             the
             South-bay
             :
             we
             were
             followed
             by
             7
             Ships
             ,
             3
             Hamburgers
             and
             4
             Hollanders
             ,
             as
             is
             to
             be
             seen
             by
             a
             in
             the
             Plate
             C.
             For
             here
             it
             is
             just
             the
             same
             ,
             as
             when
             they
             will
             sail
             into
             the
             Ice
             ,
             if
             more
             then
             one
             is
             there
             ,
             for
             no
             body
             cares
             to
             be
             the
             first
             ,
             because
             they
             do
             not
             know
             in
             what
             condition
             the
             Harbour
             or
             the
             Ice
             is
             within
             .
             In
             our
             Voyage
             thither
             we
             saw
             no
             Ice
             at
             all
             ,
             until
             we
             came
             to
             Spitzbergen
             ,
             for
             the
             wind
             had
             blown
             it
             all
             away
             ;
             in
             the
             night
             we
             did
             cut
             off
             the
             fat
             of
             the
             fish
             ,
             and
             filled
             with
             it
             65
             Kardels
             or
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             That
             night
             we
             sailed
             with
             three
             Boats
             into
             the
             English
             Harbour
             or
             Bay
             ,
             and
             saw
             a
             Whale
             ,
             and
             flung
             into
             him
             three
             Harpoons
             ,
             and
             threw
             our
             Lances
             into
             him
             ;
             the
             Whale
             run
             underneath
             the
             small
             Ice
             ,
             and
             remained
             a
             great
             while
             under
             water
             before
             he
             came
             up
             again
             ,
             and
             then
             ran
             but
             a
             very
             little
             way
             before
             he
             came
             up
             again
             ;
             and
             this
             he
             repeated
             very
             often
             ,
             so
             that
             we
             were
             forced
             to
             wait
             on
             him
             above
             half
             an
             hour
             ,
             before
             he
             came
             from
             underneath
             the
             Ice
             .
             The
             Harpoons
             broke
             out
             at
             length
             ,
             and
             we
             lost
             him
             .
             On
             the
             Ice
             we
             saw
             two
             great
             Sea-horses
             
             or
             Morses
             ,
             that
             were
             got
             upon
             the
             sheet
             of
             Ice
             ,
             through
             a
             hole
             that
             was
             in
             it
             ,
             and
             were
             asleep
             ;
             we
             cut
             off
             their
             return
             by
             covering
             the
             hole
             with
             a
             piece
             of
             Ice
             ;
             then
             we
             awaken'd
             them
             with
             our
             Lances
             ,
             and
             they
             began
             to
             defend
             themselves
             for
             a
             while
             before
             they
             were
             killed
             .
             We
             saw
             also
             many
             White-fish
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             22th
             we
             had
             very
             fair
             weather
             ,
             and
             pretty
             warm
             ;
             we
             were
             by
             
               Rehenfelt
               (
               Deersfeild
            
             )
             where
             the
             Ice
             stood
             firm
             :
             we
             saw
             six
             Whales
             ,
             and
             got
             one
             of
             them
             that
             was
             a
             male
             ,
             and
             our
             third
             fish
             ;
             he
             was
             kill'd
             at
             night
             when
             the
             Sun
             stood
             westward
             :
             this
             fish
             was
             kill'd
             by
             one
             man
             ,
             who
             flung
             the
             Harpoon
             into
             him
             ;
             and
             kill'd
             him
             also
             ,
             while
             the
             other
             Boats
             were
             busie
             in
             pursuing
             or
             hunting
             after
             another
             Whale
             .
             This
             fish
             run
             to
             the
             Ice
             ,
             and
             before
             he
             died
             ,
             beat
             about
             him
             with
             his
             tail
             ;
             the
             Ice
             setled
             about
             him
             so
             that
             the
             other
             Boats
             could
             not
             come
             to
             this
             Boat
             to
             assist
             him
             ,
             till
             the
             Ice
             separated
             again
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             row
             ,
             when
             they
             tied
             one
             Boat
             behind
             the
             other
             ,
             and
             so
             towed
             the
             Whale
             to
             the
             great
             Ship
             ,
             where
             they
             cut
             him
             up
             into
             the
             Vessels
             ,
             and
             filled
             with
             him
             45
             Barrels
             .
             This
             night
             the
             Sun
             shined
             very
             brightly
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             29th
             we
             had
             fair
             weather
             ,
             Sun-shine
             and
             calm
             .
             On
             the
             same
             day
             we
             sailed
             before
             the
             wide
             Harbour
             or
             Bay
             ;
             where
             we
             found
             a
             great
             quantity
             of
             the
             fat
             of
             a
             Whale
             ,
             three
             Vessels
             full
             ,
             together
             with
             the
             Image
             of
             St.
             Nicholas
             ,
             which
             stood
             behind
             a
             Ship
             that
             was
             lost
             ,
             driving
             in
             the
             Sea.
             There
             was
             also
             here
             and
             there
             still
             much
             Ice
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             1st
             of
             July
             about
             noon
             ,
             two
             Whale
             came
             near
             to
             our
             Ship
             ;
             we
             saw
             that
             they
             had
             a
             mind
             to
             couple
             together
             ;
             we
             set
             our
             Boat
             
             for
             them
             ,
             and
             the
             Harpoonier
             hit
             the
             female
             ,
             which
             when
             the
             other
             found
             ,
             he
             did
             not
             stay
             at
             all
             ,
             but
             made
             away
             .
             The
             female
             run
             all
             along
             above
             the
             water
             straight
             forward
             ,
             beating
             about
             with
             her
             tail
             and
             fins
             ,
             so
             that
             we
             durst
             not
             come
             near
             to
             lance
             her
             ;
             yet
             one
             of
             our
             Harpooniers
             was
             so
             fool
             hardy
             to
             venture
             too
             near
             to
             the
             fish
             ,
             which
             saluted
             him
             with
             a
             stroak
             of
             her
             tail
             over
             his
             back
             so
             vehemently
             ,
             that
             he
             had
             much
             ado
             to
             recover
             his
             breath
             again
             .
             Those
             in
             the
             other
             Boat
             ,
             to
             shew
             their
             valour
             also
             ,
             hasten'd
             to
             the
             fish
             ,
             which
             overturned
             their
             Boat
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             Harpoonier
             was
             forced
             to
             dive
             for
             it
             ,
             and
             hide
             his
             head
             underneath
             the
             water
             ;
             the
             rest
             did
             the
             same
             ;
             they
             thought
             it
             very
             long
             before
             they
             came
             out
             ,
             for
             it
             was
             cold
             ,
             so
             that
             they
             came
             quaking
             to
             the
             Ship
             again
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             same
             morning
             a
             Whale
             appear'd
             near
             our
             Ship
             before
             the
             wide
             Harbour
             ,
             we
             put
             out
             four
             Boats
             from
             our
             Ship
             after
             him
             ,
             but
             two
             Holland
             Ships
             were
             about
             half
             a
             League
             from
             us
             ,
             one
             of
             them
             sent
             out
             a
             Boat
             towards
             us
             ;
             we
             used
             great
             diligence
             and
             care
             to
             take
             him
             ,
             but
             the
             fish
             came
             up
             just
             before
             the
             
             Dutchman's
             Boat
             ,
             and
             was
             struck
             by
             him
             with
             a
             Harpoon
             .
             Thus
             he
             took
             the
             bread
             out
             of
             our
             mouths
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             2d
             of
             July
             we
             had
             Sun-shine
             all
             day
             and
             night
             long
             ,
             and
             it
             was
             pretty
             warm
             withal
             ;
             about
             midnight
             we
             went
             a
             hunting
             ,
             and
             caught
             the
             fifth
             fish
             ,
             who
             was
             a
             male
             ;
             we
             cut
             the
             fat
             off
             ,
             and
             flung
             it
             into
             the
             Forecastle
             .
             This
             is
             done
             when
             they
             are
             very
             busie
             in
             Whale
             catching
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             not
             lose
             time
             ,
             then
             they
             cut
             great
             pieces
             off
             of
             the
             Whale
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             have
             done
             the
             sooner
             ,
             for
             it
             doth
             not
             harm
             the
             fat
             if
             it
             should
             lie
             so
             for
             several
             days
             ;
             nay
             ,
             some
             reckon
             it
             to
             be
             the
             better
             
             for
             it
             ,
             but
             that
             cannot
             be
             ,
             for
             the
             fat
             runs
             away
             from
             it
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             4th
             we
             had
             Sun-shine
             all
             day
             and
             night
             .
             We
             still
             were
             Whale
             -
             hunting
             ,
             and
             that
             night
             we
             got
             the
             sixth
             fish
             ,
             a
             male
             also
             ,
             he
             held
             49
             Kardels
             of
             fat
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             3d
             and
             4th
             day
             of
             July
             we
             saw
             more
             Whales
             than
             we
             did
             in
             all
             our
             Voyage
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             5th
             of
             July
             in
             the
             forenoon
             it
             was
             bright
             Sun-shine
             ,
             and
             pretty
             warm
             ,
             in
             the
             afternoon
             it
             was
             foggy
             ,
             at
             night
             Sun-shine
             again
             ,
             which
             lasted
             all
             the
             night
             .
             We
             hunted
             all
             that
             day
             long
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             morning
             we
             struck
             a
             Whale
             before
             the
             Weigatt
             ;
             this
             fish
             run
             round
             about
             under
             the
             water
             ,
             and
             so
             fastned
             the
             Line
             whereon
             our
             Harpoon
             was
             about
             a
             Rock
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             Harpoon
             lost
             its
             hold
             ,
             and
             that
             fish
             got
             away
             .
             This
             Whale
             did
             blow
             the
             water
             so
             fiercely
             ,
             that
             one
             might
             hear
             it
             at
             a
             Leagues
             distance
             .
          
           
             The
             same
             day
             about
             noon
             ,
             the
             wind
             south
             ,
             and
             Sun-shine
             ,
             we
             got
             the
             seventh
             fish
             ,
             which
             was
             a
             female
             ,
             and
             had
             45
             Kardels
             of
             fat
             ;
             this
             we
             cut
             also
             into
             the
             Hold
             ,
             and
             so
             we
             sailed
             from
             Weigatt
             ,
             a
             little
             toward
             the
             west
             before
             the
             Muscle-Harbour
             ,
             where
             we
             dropped
             our
             Anchor
             ;
             we
             were
             employed
             with
             cutting
             the
             great
             pieces
             of
             fat
             into
             lesser
             pieces
             ,
             to
             fill
             our
             Kardels
             with
             them
             :
             in
             the
             mean
             while
             the
             wind
             turned
             to
             North-west
             and
             west
             ,
             and
             the
             single
             Anchor
             was
             dragg'd
             by
             the
             Ship
             ,
             so
             we
             dropped
             another
             ,
             and
             would
             have
             weigh'd
             up
             the
             former
             ,
             but
             our
             Cable
             broke
             ,
             the
             Anchor
             being
             fastned
             to
             a
             Rock
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             6th
             we
             had
             the
             same
             weather
             ,
             and
             warm
             Sun-shine
             all
             night
             .
             Hard
             by
             us
             rode
             a
             Hollander
             ,
             and
             the
             Ships
             crew
             busie
             in
             cutting
             
             the
             fat
             of
             a
             Whale
             ,
             when
             the
             fish
             burst
             with
             so
             great
             a
             bounce
             ,
             as
             if
             a
             Canon
             had
             been
             discharged
             ,
             and
             bespattered
             the
             Workmen
             all
             over
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             8th
             the
             wind
             turned
             North-west
             ,
             with
             snow
             and
             rain
             .
             We
             were
             forced
             to
             leave
             one
             of
             our
             Anchors
             ,
             and
             thank'd
             God
             for
             getting
             off
             from
             Land
             ,
             for
             the
             Ice
             came
             on
             fiercely
             upon
             us
             ;
             at
             night
             the
             wind
             was
             laid
             ,
             and
             it
             was
             colder
             ,
             although
             the
             Sun
             shined
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             9th
             we
             got
             another
             male
             Whale
             ,
             being
             the
             eighth
             ,
             which
             was
             yellow
             underneath
             the
             head
             ;
             we
             filled
             with
             him
             54
             Kardels
             with
             fat
             ;
             the
             Sun
             shined
             all
             night
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             12th
             we
             had
             gloomy
             Sun-shine
             all
             day
             .
             At
             night
             we
             sailed
             with
             three
             Boats
             into
             the
             Ice
             before
             the
             Weigatt
             ,
             and
             got
             three
             white
             Bears
             ,
             an
             old
             one
             with
             two
             young
             ones
             ,
             they
             swam
             in
             the
             water
             like
             fish
             .
             On
             the
             Ice
             lay
             abundance
             of
             Sea-horses
             ,
             and
             the
             further
             we
             came
             into
             the
             Ice
             there
             were
             the
             more
             of
             them
             ,
             we
             rowed
             up
             to
             them
             ,
             and
             when
             we
             came
             near
             to
             them
             we
             killed
             ten
             of
             them
             ,
             the
             rest
             came
             all
             about
             our
             Boat
             ,
             and
             beat
             holes
             through
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             Boat
             ,
             so
             that
             we
             took
             in
             abundance
             of
             water
             ,
             we
             were
             forced
             at
             length
             to
             row
             away
             from
             them
             because
             of
             their
             great
             number
             ,
             for
             they
             gathered
             themselves
             more
             and
             more
             together
             ;
             they
             pursued
             us
             as
             long
             as
             we
             could
             see
             them
             ,
             very
             furiously
             .
             Afterwards
             we
             met
             with
             another
             very
             great
             one
             who
             lay
             in
             the
             water
             fast
             asleep
             ,
             but
             when
             he
             felt
             our
             Harpoon
             within
             him
             he
             was
             very
             much
             frightned
             ,
             and
             ran
             away
             before
             the
             Boat
             again
             ,
             where
             he
             was
             soon
             eased
             of
             his
             fright
             by
             our
             Lances
             .
             We
             saw
             but
             very
             few
             Whales
             more
             ,
             and
             those
             we
             did
             see
             were
             quite
             wild
             ,
             that
             we
             could
             not
             
             come
             near
             them
             .
             That
             night
             it
             was
             so
             dark
             and
             foggy
             ,
             that
             we
             could
             hardly
             see
             the
             Ships
             length
             ;
             we
             might
             have
             got
             Sea-horses
             enough
             ,
             but
             we
             were
             afraid
             of
             loosing
             our
             Ships
             ,
             for
             we
             had
             examples
             enough
             of
             them
             that
             had
             lost
             their
             Ships
             ,
             and
             could
             not
             come
             to
             them
             again
             ,
             but
             have
             been
             forced
             to
             return
             home
             in
             other
             Ships
             .
             When
             after
             this
             manner
             any
             have
             lost
             their
             Ships
             ,
             and
             cannot
             be
             seen
             ▪
             they
             discharge
             a
             Cannon
             from
             the
             Ship
             ,
             or
             sound
             the
             Trumpets
             ,
             or
             Haut-boys
             ,
             according
             as
             they
             are
             provided
             in
             their
             Ships
             ,
             that
             the
             men
             that
             are
             lost
             may
             find
             their
             Ship
             again
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             13th
             we
             had
             cloudy
             Sun-shine
             ,
             the
             wind
             towards
             night
             turned
             to
             North-east
             and
             by
             east
             .
             The
             Ice
             came
             a
             floating
             down
             apace
             ,
             we
             sailed
             from
             the
             South-east
             Land
             to
             the
             west
             ,
             and
             we
             could
             but
             just
             get
             through
             by
             the
             North
             side
             from
             the
             Bear-Harbour
             or
             Bay.
             We
             sailed
             on
             to
             the
             Rehenfelt
             (
             or
             Deer-field
             )
             where
             the
             Ice
             was
             already
             fixed
             to
             the
             Land
             ,
             so
             that
             we
             could
             but
             just
             get
             through
             ;
             we
             sailed
             further
             to
             the
             
               Vogelsanck
               (
               Birds-song
            
             )
             as
             you
             may
             see
             by
             b
             in
             the
             Plate
             D.
             Then
             we
             turned
             toward
             the
             East
             with
             a
             North-east
             wind
             ,
             in
             company
             with
             twelve
             Ships
             more
             ,
             to
             see
             whether
             there
             were
             any
             more
             Whales
             left
             ,
             with
             George
             and
             
               Cornelius
               Mangelsen
            
             ,
             and
             
               Michael
               Appel
            
             ,
             who
             sailed
             in
             four
             fathoms
             water
             ,
             and
             touched
             upon
             the
             wreck
             of
             a
             Ship
             that
             was
             lost
             there
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             14th
             in
             the
             morning
             we
             sailed
             still
             amongst
             the
             Ice
             ,
             the
             wind
             being
             North-east
             and
             by
             east
             ;
             we
             had
             a
             fogg
             all
             that
             day
             ,
             with
             Sun-shine
             ,
             with
             a
             Rainbow
             of
             two
             colours
             ,
             white
             and
             pale
             yellow
             ,
             and
             it
             was
             very
             cold
             ,
             and
             we
             saw
             the
             Sun
             a
             great
             deal
             lower
             .
          
           
           
             On
             the
             15th
             it
             was
             windy
             ,
             cold
             ,
             and
             foggy
             the
             whole
             day
             ;
             the
             wind
             turned
             North-west
             ,
             and
             the
             Ice
             came
             on
             in
             abundance
             ,
             so
             that
             we
             could
             hardly
             sail
             ,
             for
             it
             was
             every
             where
             full
             of
             small
             sheets
             of
             Ice
             .
             At
             this
             time
             there
             were
             many
             ships
             beset
             with
             Ice
             ,
             in
             the
             Deer
             or
             Muscle-Bay
             .
             We
             sailed
             all
             along
             near
             the
             shoar
             ,
             and
             at
             night
             we
             entred
             the
             South-Harbour
             (
             marked
             with
             c
             in
             the
             Cut
             D
             )
             where
             28
             Ships
             lay
             at
             Anchor
             ,
             8
             whereof
             were
             Hamburgers
             ,
             the
             rest
             Dutchmen
             .
             From
             that
             time
             ,
             when
             we
             sailed
             out
             of
             the
             South-haven
             ,
             we
             kept
             always
             within
             sight
             of
             the
             Land
             ,
             and
             saw
             it
             always
             ,
             except
             it
             was
             foggy
             ;
             and
             so
             long
             the
             Skippers
             stay
             by
             the
             Ice
             ,
             to
             see
             whether
             there
             is
             any
             more
             Whales
             to
             be
             had
             .
             That
             night
             we
             fetched
             water
             from
             the
             Land
             ,
             near
             the
             Cookery
             of
             Harlingen
             ,
             out
             of
             a
             hole
             ,
             marked
             by
             b
             in
             the
             Plate
             C.
             
          
           
             On
             the
             16th
             in
             the
             morning
             we
             saw
             the
             Moon
             ,
             and
             afterwards
             it
             was
             windy
             ,
             with
             abundance
             of
             snow
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             18th
             we
             had
             fair
             weather
             ,
             with
             Sun-shine
             ,
             and
             we
             were
             also
             becalmed
             that
             we
             could
             not
             sail
             ,
             wherefore
             we
             towed
             with
             a
             Boat
             into
             the
             Danish
             Harbour
             ,
             to
             gather
             some
             Herbs
             from
             the
             Rocks
             .
             In
             the
             South-Haven
             rode
             30
             Ships
             at
             Anchor
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             19th
             we
             had
             warm
             Sun-shine
             and
             fair
             weather
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             night
             stormy
             and
             rain
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             20th
             storms
             ,
             rain
             ,
             and
             a
             great
             deal
             of
             snow
             ,
             the
             wind
             South-west
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             21th
             rain
             all
             day
             long
             .
             
             
             
             
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             II.
             
          
           
             Of
             our
             home
             Voyage
             from
             Spitzbergen
             to
             the
             Elbe
          
           
             ON
             the
             22th
             day
             of
             July
             in
             the
             morning
             ,
             when
             the
             Sun
             was
             North-east
             ,
             we
             waied
             our
             Anchors
             ,
             and
             sailed
             out
             of
             the
             South-Haven
             :
             we
             had
             a
             fogg
             all
             day
             long
             ,
             and
             Sun-shine
             at
             night
             ;
             in
             the
             night
             we
             saw
             abundance
             of
             Fin-fishes
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             24th
             it
             was
             so
             warm
             with
             Sun-shine
             ,
             that
             the
             Tarr
             wherewith
             the
             Ship
             was
             daubed
             over
             melted
             ;
             we
             drove
             ,
             it
             being
             calm
             ,
             before
             the
             Haven
             or
             Bay
             of
             Magdalen
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             25th
             it
             was
             cloudy
             ,
             and
             Sun-shine
             ,
             but
             cold
             withal
             ;
             at
             night
             we
             came
             to
             the
             Forelands
             ;
             the
             night
             was
             foggy
             ,
             the
             wind
             South-west
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             26th
             we
             had
             the
             very
             same
             weather
             all
             day
             ,
             the
             Sun
             was
             very
             low
             in
             the
             night
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             28th
             we
             turned
             from
             the
             side
             of
             the
             North-Foreland
             towards
             the
             west
             ,
             when
             the
             Sun
             was
             South-east
             ;
             and
             we
             did
             sail
             South-west
             and
             by
             west
             towards
             the
             Sea
             ;
             then
             we
             changed
             our
             Course
             southwards
             ,
             and
             stood
             South-east
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             29th
             ,
             30th
             ,
             and
             31th
             we
             sailed
             South-east
             and
             by
             south
             all
             along
             by
             the
             Land
             ,
             the
             south
             side
             of
             the
             Foreland
             was
             8
             Leagues
             from
             us
             ,
             bearing
             North-east
             ,
             then
             we
             sailed
             South-west
             and
             by
             south
             ,
             it
             was
             very
             cold
             with
             
             a
             North-west
             wind
             .
             We
             saw
             daily
             abundance
             of
             Fin-fishes
             ,
             but
             no
             more
             Whales
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             9th
             of
             August
             it
             was
             windy
             all
             day
             ,
             with
             a
             gloomy
             Sun-shine
             in
             the
             forenoon
             ;
             it
             cleared
             up
             towards
             noon
             ;
             the
             wind
             was
             South-east
             ,
             when
             we
             took
             the
             Meridian
             heighth
             of
             the
             Sun
             ,
             and
             were
             at
             66
             degrees
             47
             minutes
             ;
             we
             sailed
             South-westward
             all
             along
             the
             Northern
             shoar
             of
             the
             Country
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             13th
             ,
             being
             Sunday
             in
             the
             morning
             ,
             the
             wind
             was
             North-west
             ,
             stormy
             ,
             with
             rain
             and
             west
             winds
             .
             In
             the
             night
             we
             had
             very
             clear
             Moon
             and
             Star-light
             .
             In
             the
             morning
             we
             saw
             the
             northern
             part
             of
             Hitland
             ,
             we
             sailed
             southward
             ;
             after
             the
             rain
             we
             saw
             Fair-Isle
             ,
             and
             sailed
             in
             betwixt
             Hitland
             and
             Fair-Isle
             ,
             first
             South-west
             ,
             and
             afterwards
             South-west
             and
             by
             south
             ,
             and
             then
             southward
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             20th
             it
             was
             fair
             weather
             ,
             warm
             Sun-shine
             ,
             and
             somewhat
             windy
             .
             When
             the
             day
             began
             to
             appear
             we
             saw
             Hilgeland
             ,
             South-eastward
             of
             us
             ,
             when
             we
             sailed
             South-east
             ;
             there
             we
             took
             in
             a
             Pilot
             ,
             on
             purpose
             chosen
             by
             the
             Magistrates
             of
             Hamburg
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             29th
             it
             was
             fair
             weather
             ,
             and
             warm
             Sun-shine
             all
             day
             ;
             we
             sailed
             before
             the
             Elbe
             ,
             and
             lay
             at
             Anchor
             by
             the
             first
             Buoy
             (
             called
             the
             Red-Buoy
             )
             in
             the
             afternoon
             we
             weighed
             our
             Anchor
             ,
             and
             sailed
             to
             Kucks-Haven
             ;
             in
             the
             night
             we
             had
             thunder
             ,
             and
             lightning
             ,
             and
             rain
             .
          
           
             The
             End
             of
             the
             first
             Part.
             
          
        
      
       
         
         
           THE
           SECOND
           PART
           OF
           THE
           VOYAGE
           TO
           SPITSBERGEN
           :
           CONTAINING
           The
           Description
           of
           Spitzbergen
           .
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             I.
             
          
           
             Of
             the
             External
             Face
             and
             Appearance
             of
             Spitsbergen
             .
          
           
           
             It
             seemeth
             ,
             because
             the
             Ice
             stands
             firm
             ,
             and
             floats
             not
             ,
             as
             that
             in
             the
             Sea
             doth
             ,
             that
             there
             should
             be
             land
             not
             far
             behind
             it
             .
          
           
             As
             the
             highest
             Countries
             are
             surrounded
             with
             Mountains
             ,
             as
             a
             Fortification
             is
             with
             Walls
             and
             Works
             ,
             so
             are
             these
             Countries
             naturally
             surrounded
             with
             high
             Hills
             .
          
           
             The
             inward
             Condition
             of
             this
             Country
             we
             do
             not
             know
             ,
             but
             it
             seemeth
             ,
             since
             we
             see
             one
             Hill
             behind
             another
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             so
             throughout
             the
             whole
             Country
             .
          
           
             At
             the
             Muscle-Haven
             ,
             or
             Muscle-Bay
             ,
             we
             find
             plainer
             and
             leveller
             Ground
             ;
             and
             the
             farther
             we
             sail
             toward
             the
             East
             ,
             the
             Ground
             groweth
             the
             lower
             ,
             yet
             it
             is
             all
             stony
             ,
             and
             with
             prospects
             of
             smaller
             Hills
             ;
             it
             doth
             not
             look
             at
             all
             as
             if
             it
             could
             be
             inhabited
             by
             Men.
             
          
           
             I
             believe
             also
             that
             the
             Land
             there
             must
             of
             necessity
             be
             lower
             and
             lower
             ;
             for
             else
             we
             should
             see
             it
             higher
             above
             the
             other
             ,
             as
             we
             do
             the
             other
             Mountains
             .
          
           
             Concerning
             the
             Beasts
             that
             live
             on
             this
             Land
             ,
             I
             believe
             they
             come
             over
             the
             Ice
             in
             the
             Spring
             ,
             when
             the
             Ice
             stands
             firm
             ,
             into
             these
             Countries
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             same
             way
             they
             go
             away
             from
             thence
             again
             ,
             when
             the
             long
             nights
             begin
             .
          
           
             Concerning
             the
             Birds
             ,
             we
             have
             partly
             a
             good
             account
             of
             them
             ,
             their
             places
             and
             food
             is
             known
             ,
             as
             I
             shall
             mention
             when
             I
             come
             to
             write
             of
             them
             .
          
           
             When
             on
             the
             18th
             of
             June
             ,
             on
             a
             Sunday
             in
             the
             forenoon
             ,
             we
             first
             came
             to
             the
             Foreland
             of
             Spitzbergen
             ;
             the
             foot
             of
             these
             Mountains
             looked
             like
             fire
             ,
             and
             the
             tops
             of
             them
             were
             coverwith
             foggs
             ;
             the
             snow
             was
             marbel'd
             ,
             and
             look'd
             
             as
             if
             it
             were
             boughs
             of
             branches
             of
             Trees
             ,
             and
             gave
             as
             bright
             and
             glorious
             a
             shining
             of
             gloss
             to
             the
             Air
             or
             Skies
             ,
             as
             if
             the
             Sun
             had
             shin'd
             .
          
           
             When
             the
             Mountains
             look
             thus
             fiery
             ,
             a
             hard
             storm
             generally
             ensues
             .
          
           
             These
             Countries
             are
             in
             the
             Winter
             encompassed
             with
             Ice
             from
             divers
             places
             ,
             according
             as
             the
             winds
             blow
             ;
             as
             if
             it
             be
             East
             from
             
               Nova
               Zembla
            
             ,
             if
             North-west
             form
             Greenland
             ,
             and
             the
             Island
             of
             
               John
               Mayen
            
             :
             it
             also
             happeneth
             sometimes
             that
             the
             Land
             is
             begirt
             with
             Ice
             in
             the
             Summer
             ,
             as
             they
             have
             often
             seen
             ,
             that
             go
             thither
             every
             year
             .
          
           
             But
             when
             the
             Ice
             comes
             floating
             on
             too
             hard
             ,
             or
             in
             too
             great
             a
             quantity
             ,
             then
             the
             Ships
             make
             to
             the
             Harbours
             ,
             Havens
             ,
             Bays
             or
             Rivers
             ,
             as
             they
             call
             them
             ,
             that
             run
             up
             into
             the
             Country
             ;
             the
             wind
             useth
             to
             receive
             us
             something
             unkindly
             ,
             when
             we
             sail
             into
             them
             ,
             roaring
             over
             the
             dry
             Hills
             with
             small
             Whirl-winds
             .
             The
             water
             in
             these
             Rivers
             is
             salt
             .
          
           
             We
             meet
             here
             with
             no
             fresh
             Streams
             or
             Rivolets
             ;
             nor
             did
             I
             ever
             see
             a
             Spring
             there
             .
          
           
             Of
             some
             Rivers
             we
             know
             their
             beginning
             ,
             of
             others
             it
             cannot
             found
             out
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             danger
             of
             the
             Ice
             ,
             which
             they
             are
             never
             free
             from
             ;
             some
             because
             of
             the
             hidden
             Rocks
             underneath
             the
             water
             ,
             which
             are
             discovered
             by
             the
             vehement
             breaking
             of
             the
             Sea
             ,
             or
             by
             great
             quantity
             of
             white
             foam
             .
          
           
             The
             Names
             of
             the
             Havens
             you
             find
             all
             in
             order
             one
             after
             another
             in
             the
             Map
             of
             Spitzbergen
             ,
             as
             far
             as
             we
             have
             been
             .
          
           
             These
             Havens
             they
             reckon
             to
             be
             the
             safest
             ,
             viz.
             the
             Safe-Harbour
             ,
             and
             the
             South
             and
             North-Bay
             ,
             which
             are
             the
             most
             known
             of
             any
             in
             Spitzbergen
             .
          
           
           
             The
             other
             Havens
             ,
             of
             what
             names
             soever
             ,
             we
             commonly
             sail
             by
             ,
             because
             they
             lye
             open
             to
             the
             Sea.
             
          
           
             Others
             we
             pass
             by
             because
             of
             the
             constant
             Ice
             that
             is
             in
             them
             ,
             and
             the
             hidden
             Rocks
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             South
             or
             North-Haven
             or
             Bay
             ,
             ride
             commonly
             the
             most
             Ships
             ;
             I
             told
             several
             times
             ten
             ,
             twenty
             ,
             nay
             thirty
             Ships
             ,
             that
             lay
             at
             Anchor
             ,
             as
             your
             may
             see
             in
             the
             Plates
             C
             and
             D
             ,
             marked
             with
             c
             and
             d.
             
          
           
             Concerning
             the
             Birds
             ,
             we
             see
             abundance
             more
             of
             them
             by
             and
             on
             the
             Land
             ,
             then
             among
             the
             Ice
             ,
             chiefly
             when
             they
             hatch
             their
             Eggs
             ;
             we
             do
             not
             find
             they
             make
             their
             Nest
             up
             with
             far-fetcht
             things
             ,
             neither
             do
             they
             gather
             any
             thing
             for
             them
             from
             
               Norway
               ,
               Schetland
            
             ,
             or
             the
             like
             .
          
           
             The
             Seeds
             of
             several
             Herbs
             might
             grow
             in
             Spitzbergen
             ,
             but
             the
             Herbs
             nature
             hath
             bestowed
             on
             those
             Countries
             are
             such
             as
             are
             fit
             for
             the
             Diseases
             and
             Distempers
             that
             are
             common
             there
             .
          
           
             We
             saw
             abundance
             of
             Sea-horses
             by
             Spitzbergen
             ,
             on
             the
             low
             Land
             ,
             and
             upon
             the
             Ice
             ;
             but
             we
             saw
             but
             very
             few
             Seales
             on
             the
             Ice
             thereabout
             .
          
           
             The
             Country
             (
             as
             is
             aforesaid
             )
             is
             stony
             ,
             and
             quite
             throughout
             it
             are
             high
             Mountains
             and
             Rocks
             .
          
           
             Below
             ,
             at
             the
             feet
             of
             the
             Mountains
             ,
             stand
             the
             Hills
             of
             Ice
             very
             high
             ,
             and
             reach
             to
             the
             tops
             of
             the
             Mountains
             ;
             the
             Cliffs
             are
             filled
             up
             with
             Snow
             ;
             wherefore
             these
             Snow-Mountains
             show
             very
             strange
             to
             those
             that
             never
             saw
             them
             before
             ,
             they
             appear
             like
             dry
             Trees
             with
             Branches
             and
             Twigs
             ,
             and
             when
             the
             Snow
             falleth
             upon
             them
             they
             get
             Leaves
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             which
             
             soon
             after
             melt
             ,
             and
             others
             come
             in
             the
             room
             of
             them
             .
          
           
             There
             are
             seven
             large
             Ice-Mountains
             in
             a
             Line
             in
             these
             Countries
             ,
             that
             lye
             between
             the
             high
             Rocks
             ,
             which
             look
             of
             a
             glorious
             blew
             colour
             ,
             as
             also
             is
             the
             Ice
             ,
             with
             a
             great
             many
             cracks
             and
             Holes
             in
             them
             ;
             they
             are
             hollowed
             out
             ,
             melted
             away
             ,
             and
             cut
             in
             Groves
             by
             the
             rain
             and
             snow-water
             that
             runs
             down
             ;
             they
             are
             increased
             greatly
             by
             the
             Snow
             ,
             as
             the
             other
             Ice
             that
             swimmeth
             in
             the
             Sea
             is
             also
             :
             they
             are
             augmented
             likewise
             by
             the
             melted
             Snow
             from
             the
             Rocks
             ,
             and
             from
             the
             Rain
             that
             falls
             on
             them
             .
          
           
             These
             seven
             Mountains
             of
             Ice
             are
             esteemed
             to
             be
             the
             highest
             in
             the
             Country
             ;
             indeed
             they
             shewed
             very
             high
             as
             we
             sailed
             by
             them
             ,
             underneath
             :
             the
             Snow
             look'd
             dark
             from
             the
             shades
             of
             the
             Skies
             ,
             which
             shewed
             very
             neat
             and
             curious
             ,
             with
             the
             blew
             cracks
             where
             the
             Ice
             was
             broken
             off
             .
          
           
             About
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Mountains
             some
             foggy
             Clouds
             hovered
             over
             ;
             above
             these
             the
             Snow
             was
             very
             bright
             .
          
           
             The
             true
             Rocks
             look't
             fiery
             ,
             and
             the
             Sun
             shin'd
             pale
             upon
             them
             ,
             the
             Snow
             giving
             the
             Air
             a
             bright
             reflection
             .
             They
             were
             covered
             with
             Clouds
             ,
             so
             that
             you
             could
             scarce
             see
             the
             tops
             of
             them
             .
          
           
             Some
             of
             these
             Rocks
             are
             but
             one
             stone
             from
             the
             bottom
             to
             the
             top
             ,
             appearing
             like
             an
             old
             decayed
             Wall
             ;
             they
             smell
             very
             sweet
             ,
             as
             the
             green
             Fields
             do
             in
             our
             Country
             in
             the
             Spring
             when
             it
             rains
             .
             See
             
               c
               c
            
             in
             the
             Plate
             C.
             
          
           
             The
             stones
             for
             the
             most
             part
             are
             vein'd
             differently
             ,
             like
             Marble
             ,
             with
             red
             ,
             white
             ,
             and
             yellow
             :
             at
             the
             alteration
             of
             the
             weather
             the
             stones
             sweat
             ,
             and
             by
             that
             means
             the
             Snow
             is
             
             stained
             or
             coloured
             ;
             and
             also
             if
             it
             raineth
             much
             ,
             the
             water
             runs
             down
             by
             the
             Rocks
             ,
             and
             from
             thence
             the
             Snow
             is
             tinged
             red
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             foot
             of
             the
             Mountains
             ,
             where
             no
             mounts
             of
             Ice
             stand
             ,
             lye
             great
             loose
             Rocks
             ,
             as
             they
             chance
             to
             be
             fall'n
             one
             upon
             the
             other
             ,
             with
             Caves
             and
             Holes
             ,
             so
             that
             it
             is
             very
             ticklish
             walking
             upon
             them
             ;
             both
             great
             and
             small
             Stones
             or
             Rocks
             are
             mixt
             together
             :
             these
             stones
             are
             of
             a
             grey
             colour
             ,
             or
             grey
             with
             black
             veins
             ,
             they
             glister
             like
             Silver-oar
             .
             Most
             of
             the
             Rocks
             that
             are
             at
             the
             bottom
             of
             the
             Mounts
             are
             like
             the
             Pebles
             we
             pave
             our
             Streets
             withal
             .
             On
             these
             Rocks
             grow
             all
             sorts
             of
             Herbs
             ,
             Graves
             ,
             and
             Moss
             very
             plentifully
             ;
             they
             grow
             up
             in
             the
             two
             Months
             of
             June
             and
             July
             ,
             from
             the
             seed
             to
             bear
             seed
             again
             .
             Look
             f
             in
             the
             Plate
             C.
             
          
           
             The
             Herbs
             grow
             thickest
             where
             that
             water
             runs
             of
             falls
             down
             from
             the
             Hills
             ,
             (
             and
             also
             where
             they
             are
             defended
             from
             the
             North
             and
             East
             winds
             )
             from
             whence
             always
             some
             Dust
             or
             Moss
             is
             carried
             down
             with
             it
             ,
             which
             after
             a
             long
             time
             becomes
             Earth
             (
             yet
             it
             is
             rather
             dung
             than
             a
             true
             earth
             )
             and
             the
             Birds
             do
             contribute
             by
             their
             dung
             towards
             it
             .
          
           
             These
             Mountains
             seem
             as
             if
             they
             were
             Earth
             at
             top
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             height
             ,
             but
             when
             you
             are
             at
             the
             top
             of
             them
             ,
             they
             are
             Rock
             as
             well
             at
             the
             top
             as
             the
             bottom
             ,
             which
             we
             also
             see
             ,
             when
             great
             pieces
             of
             them
             fall
             down
             .
             If
             stones
             are
             flung
             down
             from
             these
             Mountains
             ,
             it
             sounds
             as
             if
             it
             thundred
             with
             an
             Echo
             and
             Rattling
             in
             the
             Valleys
             ,
             as
             if
             very
             great
             pieces
             were
             thrown
             off
             from
             the
             top
             of
             them
             .
          
           
             The
             Mountains
             also
             are
             full
             of
             cracks
             wherein
             the
             Birds
             make
             their
             Nests
             ;
             they
             all
             fly
             down
             from
             the
             Mountains
             to
             seek
             their
             food
             in
             the
             
             water
             ;
             some
             eat
             the
             Carrion
             of
             Fishes
             ,
             others
             eat
             small
             Fishes
             and
             Shrimps
             ,
             as
             I
             shall
             say
             ,
             when
             I
             treat
             of
             the
             Birds
             .
          
           
             There
             are
             also
             White-Bears
             ,
             Deer
             and
             Foxes
             in
             these
             Countries
             .
             The
             Bear
             liveth
             upon
             dead
             Whales
             or
             dead
             Men
             ;
             the
             Fox
             feeds
             upon
             Birds
             and
             their
             Eggs
             ;
             and
             the
             Deer
             eat
             the
             Herbs
             .
          
           
             One
             may
             conjecture
             at
             the
             height
             of
             these
             Mountains
             by
             this
             ,
             when
             ths
             Skies
             are
             not
             very
             clear
             ,
             the
             Mountains
             stand
             ,
             to
             about
             the
             middle
             ,
             in
             the
             Clouds
             ;
             some
             of
             them
             look
             as
             if
             they
             were
             a
             coming
             down
             every
             moment
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             Plate
             D
             at
             f.
             
          
           
             The
             reason
             why
             the
             lowermost
             Hills
             do
             not
             seem
             so
             high
             ,
             is
             because
             so
             very
             great
             ones
             stand
             near
             them
             .
             A
             Ship
             with
             its
             Masts
             and
             Rigging
             ,
             in
             no
             more
             to
             be
             compared
             with
             these
             Mountains
             ,
             than
             a
             small
             House
             with
             a
             high
             Steeple
             .
             The
             Miles
             seem
             also
             to
             be
             very
             short
             ,
             but
             when
             you
             go
             to
             walk
             them
             upon
             the
             Land
             ,
             you
             find
             it
             quite
             another
             thing
             ,
             and
             you
             will
             soon
             be
             tired
             ;
             and
             also
             because
             of
             the
             roughness
             and
             sharpness
             of
             the
             Rocks
             ,
             and
             for
             want
             of
             a
             path
             ,
             you
             will
             soon
             get
             warm
             be
             it
             never
             so
             cold
             :
             a
             new
             pair
             of
             Shoes
             will
             not
             last
             one
             long
             here
             .
          
           
           
             In
             the
             Country
             we
             travel
             thus
             ;
             We
             take
             along
             with
             us
             two
             or
             more
             Guns
             and
             Lances
             ,
             to
             resist
             the
             Highway-men
             the
             Bears
             ,
             but
             one
             is
             soon
             tired
             ,
             as
             I
             said
             before
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             stones
             and
             the
             loose
             Ice
             ,
             whereon
             it
             is
             very
             troublesome
             to
             walk
             .
          
           
             As
             many
             as
             I
             have
             seen
             of
             these
             Mountains
             are
             situated
             thus
             ;
             The
             highest
             are
             from
             the
             Foreland
             to
             the
             Muscle-Haven
             (
             or
             
               Muscle
               Bay
            
             :
             )
             after
             the
             Foreland
             follow
             the
             seven
             Ice
             Mounts
             ,
             which
             are
             very
             high
             Mountains
             ;
             and
             they
             are
             called
             so
             from
             the
             Ice-Hills
             that
             fill
             up
             the
             Valleys
             ,
             of
             lye
             between
             the
             Rocks
             .
             These
             mountainous
             Rocks
             are
             not
             so
             sharp
             or
             pointed
             at
             the
             top
             as
             the
             two
             foremost
             Rocks
             at
             the
             Haven
             of
             Magdalen
             are
             .
             Then
             cometh
             the
             Haven
             of
             the
             
               Hamburgers
               ,
               Magdalen
            
             ,
             the
             English
             and
             Danish
             Harbour
             ,
             and
             at
             last
             the
             South-Haven
             .
             At
             the
             Magdalen-Haven
             the
             Rocks
             lye
             in
             a
             round
             of
             semi-circle
             ,
             at
             each
             side
             by
             one
             another
             ,
             stand
             two
             high
             Mountains
             that
             are
             hollow
             within
             ,
             as
             if
             they
             were
             dug
             out
             :
             after
             the
             fashion
             of
             a
             Breast-work
             ,
             with
             points
             and
             cracks
             at
             the
             top
             ,
             like
             Battlements
             ;
             at
             the
             bottom
             within
             the
             Hill
             ,
             stands
             a
             Snow-hill
             that
             doth
             reach
             to
             the
             very
             top
             of
             the
             Mountain
             ,
             like
             a
             Tree
             with
             branches
             and
             twigs
             ;
             the
             other
             Rocks
             look
             rudely
             .
          
           
             In
             this
             South●Haven
             the
             Ships
             ride
             at
             Anchor
             between
             high
             Mountains
             ;
             on
             the
             left
             as
             we
             sail
             into
             it
             ,
             is
             a
             Hill
             called
             the
             Beehive
             in
             the
             Cut
             C
             and
             D
             ,
             marked
             with
             g
             ;
             called
             so
             from
             its
             resemblance
             of
             a
             Beehive
             :
             close
             to
             it
             lieth
             a
             large
             and
             high
             Mount
             ,
             called
             the
             
               Devils
               Huck
            
             ,
             
             commonly
             covered
             with
             a
             fogg
             ,
             and
             if
             the
             wind
             bloweth
             over
             it
             ,
             it
             darkneth
             the
             Haven
             ,
             and
             seemeth
             as
             if
             it
             smoaked
             ,
             filling
             the
             Haven
             therewith
             ;
             on
             the
             top
             thereof
             are
             three
             small
             white
             Hills
             covered
             with
             Snow
             ,
             in
             the
             Cut
             C
             and
             D
             ,
             marked
             with
             h
             ;
             two
             of
             them
             stand
             near
             to
             one
             another
             .
             In
             the
             middle
             of
             this
             Harbour
             is
             an
             Island
             in
             the
             Cut
             C
             marked
             with
             i
             ,
             which
             is
             called
             the
             
               Dead-man's
               Island
            
             ,
             because
             they
             bury
             the
             dead
             men
             there
             after
             this
             manner
             ;
             They
             are
             put
             into
             a
             Coffin
             ,
             and
             covered
             with
             a
             heap
             of
             large
             stones
             ,
             and
             notwithstanding
             all
             this
             ,
             they
             are
             sometimes
             eaten
             by
             the
             white
             Bears
             .
          
           
             I
             have
             seen
             no
             other
             sort
             of
             Ground
             but
             great
             stones
             at
             Spitzbergen
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             frost
             cannot
             penetrate
             far
             into
             such
             Ground
             .
             I
             admired
             that
             the
             Snow
             was
             at
             that
             time
             all
             melted
             away
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Cliffs
             between
             the
             great
             Rocks
             was
             no
             more
             Snow
             to
             be
             seen
             ,
             although
             the
             holes
             were
             very
             deep
             .
             I
             fancy
             that
             abundance
             of
             rain
             had
             fallen
             in
             the
             Spring
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             weather
             had
             been
             tolerable
             ,
             or
             else
             we
             must
             have
             seen
             more
             Snow
             there
             .
          
           
             There
             are
             also
             more
             small
             Islands
             here
             and
             there
             in
             this
             Harbour
             ,
             that
             have
             no
             particular
             names
             ,
             but
             are
             called
             
               Birds
               Islands
            
             ,
             because
             we
             gather
             thereupon
             the
             Eggs
             of
             Mountain
             Ducks
             and
             Kirm●ums
             .
          
           
             Then
             you
             come
             to
             Schmeremburg
             ,
             so
             named
             from
             Schmer
             ,
             which
             signifieth
             grease
             ;
             there
             are
             still
             Houses
             standing
             ,
             formerly
             built
             by
             the
             Dutch
             ,
             where
             they
             used
             to
             boil
             their
             Train-Oil
             .
             Some
             Dutchmen
             once
             attempted
             to
             stay
             there
             all
             the
             Winter
             ,
             but
             they
             all
             perisht
             :
             in
             the
             Cut
             C
             it
             is
             marked
             with
             k.
             
          
           
           
             It
             is
             observable
             that
             a
             dead
             Carkase
             doth
             not
             easily
             rot
             or
             consume
             ;
             for
             it
             has
             been
             found
             ,
             that
             a
             man
             buried
             ten
             years
             before
             ,
             still
             remained
             in
             his
             perfect
             shape
             and
             dress
             ;
             and
             they
             could
             see
             by
             the
             Cross
             that
             was
             stuck
             upon
             his
             Grave
             ,
             how
             long
             he
             had
             been
             buried
             .
          
           
             These
             Houses
             are
             now
             from
             year
             to
             year
             destroyed
             and
             burnt
             .
          
           
             This
             year
             were
             yet
             standing
             several
             Houses
             ,
             like
             a
             little
             Village
             ,
             some
             where
             of
             were
             then
             burnt
             .
          
           
             Over-against
             Schmerenburg
             were
             also
             several
             Houses
             standing
             ,
             and
             a
             Kettle
             or
             Boyler
             ;
             they
             call
             that
             place
             the
             
               Cookery
               of
               Harlem
            
             .
             This
             year
             four
             Houses
             remained
             ,
             whereof
             two
             were
             Ware-houses
             ,
             in
             the
             others
             they
             dwelt
             .
             They
             are
             built
             after
             this
             fashion
             ,
             not
             very
             large
             ;
             there
             is
             a
             Stove
             before
             with
             a
             Ceiling
             at
             top
             ,
             and
             behind
             a
             Chamber
             taking
             in
             the
             whole
             breadth
             of
             the
             House
             :
             the
             Ware-houses
             are
             something
             larger
             ;
             therein
             were
             still
             several
             Barrels
             or
             Kardels
             that
             were
             quite
             decayed
             ,
             the
             Ice
             standing
             in
             the
             same
             shape
             the
             Vessels
             had
             been
             of
             .
             An
             Anvile
             ,
             Smith's
             Tongs
             ,
             and
             other
             Tools
             belonging
             to
             the
             Cookery
             ,
             were
             frozen
             up
             in
             the
             Ice
             .
             The
             kettle
             was
             still
             standing
             as
             it
             was
             set
             ,
             and
             the
             wooden
             Troughs
             stood
             by
             it
             .
             From
             thence
             you
             may
             go
             to
             the
             
               English
               Haven
            
             ;
             on
             the
             other
             side
             is
             the
             place
             where
             the
             dead
             are
             buried
             ;
             this
             is
             something
             even
             ,
             like
             earth
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             levelled
             on
             purpose
             .
             Behind
             these
             Houses
             are
             high
             Mountains
             ;
             if
             one
             climbeth
             upon
             these
             ,
             as
             we
             do
             on
             others
             ,
             and
             doth
             not
             mark
             every
             step
             with
             Chalk
             ,
             one
             doth
             not
             know
             how
             to
             get
             down
             again
             .
             When
             you
             go
             up
             ,
             you
             think
             it
             to
             be
             very
             easie
             to
             be
             done
             ;
             but
             when
             you
             are
             to
             descend
             ,
             it
             is
             very
             difficult
             
             and
             dangerous
             ,
             so
             that
             many
             have
             fallen
             and
             lost
             their
             lives
             .
          
           
             The
             River
             there
             is
             called
             the
             
               South
               Harbour
            
             ,
             or
             Bay
             ;
             and
             if
             the
             Ships
             suffer
             any
             damage
             at
             Sea
             ,
             they
             refit
             there
             .
          
           
             At
             the
             entry
             into
             the
             
               South
               Harbour
            
             ,
             in
             the
             Valley
             between
             the
             Mountains
             ,
             is
             collected
             great
             quantities
             of
             fresh
             Water
             from
             the
             Snow
             and
             Rain
             ,
             upon
             the
             shoar
             stand
             abundance
             of
             Kardels
             or
             Barrels
             ;
             we
             used
             this
             Water
             for
             our
             Victuals
             ,
             and
             other
             occasions
             :
             it
             is
             also
             found
             in
             the
             Clifts
             of
             the
             Icy-hills
             on
             shoar
             ;
             but
             true
             Springs
             out
             of
             the
             Ground
             I
             never
             saw
             in
             Spitzbergen
             .
          
           
             The
             shoar
             there
             is
             not
             very
             high
             ,
             but
             the
             water
             is
             deep
             ,
             there
             was
             no
             Ice
             at
             all
             to
             be
             seen
             in
             it
             ,
             from
             whence
             I
             conclude
             that
             it
             had
             not
             been
             a
             severe
             Winter
             ;
             for
             it
             is
             impossible
             that
             the
             Ice
             could
             have
             been
             melted
             in
             so
             short
             a
             time
             ,
             not
             only
             here
             ,
             but
             also
             in
             the
             
               English
               Haven
            
             or
             Bay
             ,
             where
             the
             Ice
             stood
             firm
             still
             ,
             and
             hardly
             lay
             above
             half
             a
             Fathom
             under
             water
             .
          
           
             The
             Ice
             doth
             melt
             much
             sooner
             in
             Salt-water
             than
             in
             fresh
             River-water
             ,
             but
             yet
             it
             is
             impossible
             that
             so
             thick
             Ice
             could
             have
             melted
             in
             so
             short
             a
             time
             .
             We
             saw
             also
             that
             the
             Snow
             melted
             on
             the
             tops
             of
             the
             high
             Rocks
             ,
             and
             the
             water
             ran
             down
             ,
             although
             it
             was
             there
             much
             colder
             then
             below
             ;
             yet
             above
             and
             below
             it
             melted
             alike
             :
             differently
             from
             what
             I
             observed
             since
             in
             Spain
             in
             the
             Month
             of
             December
             1672.
             the
             wind
             being
             North-west
             ,
             when
             the
             Rain
             fell
             below
             about
             a
             quarter
             of
             a
             League
             ,
             yet
             above
             it
             the
             Mountains
             were
             all
             covered
             with
             Snow
             ,
             all
             in
             the
             streight
             Line
             ,
             one
             not
             higher
             than
             the
             other
             ,
             as
             if
             they
             had
             been
             levell'd
             .
          
           
           
             In
             the
             
               Northern
               Haven
            
             or
             Bay
             ,
             lyeth
             a
             very
             large
             Mountain
             ,
             flat
             at
             top
             ;
             this
             Island
             is
             called
             the
             
               Birds
               Song
            
             ,
             from
             the
             great
             number
             of
             them
             that
             build
             and
             hatch
             there
             ;
             for
             when
             they
             fly
             up
             ,
             they
             make
             so
             great
             a
             noise
             ,
             that
             one
             can
             hardly
             hear
             his
             own
             words
             :
             This
             is
             marked
             with
             b
             in
             the
             Cut
             D.
             
          
           
             Beside
             these
             there
             are
             more
             Islands
             named
             in
             the
             Map
             ,
             as
             the
             
               Clifted
               Rock
            
             ,
             and
             such
             other
             .
          
           
             The
             Rehenfeld
             is
             a
             low
             Land
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             called
             so
             from
             the
             Deer
             commonly
             seen
             there
             .
          
           
             I
             was
             informed
             that
             it
             is
             all
             Slats
             ,
             that
             stand
             up
             edgewise
             ,
             so
             that
             it
             is
             very
             troublesome
             to
             go
             on
             ,
             it
             is
             all
             over-grown
             with
             Moss
             .
             There
             is
             a
             Hill
             upon
             it
             that
             looketh
             like
             fire
             .
          
           
             Behind
             the
             Rehenfeld
             are
             high
             Mountains
             again
             ,
             they
             are
             not
             pointed
             at
             top
             ,
             they
             lye
             as
             it
             were
             in
             a
             Line
             ;
             by
             the
             Rehenfeld
             runs
             up
             a
             River
             into
             the
             Country
             ,
             and
             is
             called
             the
             Halfmoon-Bay
             ,
             from
             its
             shape
             .
             On
             the
             other
             side
             of
             the
             River
             is
             a
             Mountain
             ,
             flat
             at
             the
             top
             ,
             and
             full
             of
             cracks
             all
             filled
             up
             with
             Snow
             .
             Then
             cometh
             the
             
               Liefde-Bay
               (
               Bay
            
             of
             Love
             )
             where
             two
             Hills
             stand
             together
             very
             like
             unto
             Spitzbergen
             at
             
               Magdalens
               Bay
            
             ,
             and
             those
             two
             Harbours
             are
             very
             much
             like
             one
             another
             .
          
           
             Then
             we
             come
             to
             lower
             Ground
             behind
             the
             
               Muscle
               Harbour
            
             ,
             where
             the
             Grass
             was
             so
             high
             ,
             that
             it
             covered
             our
             ankles
             ,
             as
             far
             as
             we
             went.
             
          
           
             Next
             is
             the
             Weihgatt
             ,
             or
             the
             
               Straights
               of
               Hindelopen
            
             .
             The
             Weihgatt
             is
             called
             so
             from
             the
             Winds
             ,
             (
             for
             weihen
             signifieth
             blowing
             )
             because
             a
             very
             strong
             South-wind
             bloweth
             out
             of
             it
             .
             On
             the
             Bear-Haven
             ,
             upon
             the
             Land
             ,
             are
             all
             red
             stones
             .
          
           
             Behind
             the
             
               Weihg
               att
            
             followeth
             the
             
               South-west
               Land
            
             ,
             which
             is
             also
             low
             ;
             it
             seemeth
             as
             if
             it
             was
             adorned
             with
             small
             Hills
             :
             then
             follow
             the
             seven
             Islands
             which
             we
             could
             see
             .
          
           
           
             We
             saw
             no
             Ships
             go
             any
             farther
             ,
             neither
             could
             I
             understand
             that
             ever
             any
             Ships
             did
             go
             farther
             ,
             nor
             can
             they
             go
             so
             far
             every
             year
             towards
             the
             East
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             danger
             of
             the
             Ice
             that
             swimmeth
             ,
             and
             is
             brought
             from
             thence
             by
             the
             wind
             and
             stream
             .
          
           
             In
             May
             and
             June
             is
             the
             best
             fishing
             in
             the
             Ice
             between
             the
             Island
             of
             
               John
               Mayen
            
             and
             Spitzbergen
             .
             In
             July
             and
             August
             the
             Whales
             run
             Eastward
             by
             Spitzbergen
             ,
             we
             saw
             at
             the
             latter
             end
             many
             Whales
             that
             run
             to
             the
             Weigatt
             .
             It
             is
             unknown
             whether
             the
             Haven
             of
             this
             Weigatt
             goeth
             through
             the
             Country
             ,
             or
             no.
             But
             this
             is
             not
             that
             Weigatt
             whereof
             so
             many
             things
             are
             written
             .
          
           
             More
             I
             do
             not
             knwo
             of
             this
             Country
             .
             Rocks
             and
             Snow
             and
             Ice-hills
             we
             find
             in
             abundance
             there
             ,
             and
             the
             Creatures
             that
             live
             upon
             them
             ,
             I
             shall
             describe
             hereafter
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             II.
             
          
           
             Of
             the
             SEA.
             
          
           
             THE
             Waves
             begin
             to
             raise
             themselves
             at
             first
             from
             a
             small
             breeze
             of
             wind
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             increase
             and
             continuance
             of
             the
             breeze
             they
             grow
             longer
             ,
             higher
             and
             bigger
             .
          
           
             The
             Sea
             is
             not
             immediately
             made
             rough
             in
             the
             beginning
             of
             high
             winds
             ,
             but
             the
             Waves
             swell
             by
             degrees
             and
             slowly
             ,
             until
             they
             come
             to
             be
             as
             bigg
             as
             Mountains
             ;
             then
             they
             expand
             and
             break
             themselves
             ,
             and
             fall
             over
             with
             dashing
             and
             foaming
             ,
             as
             you
             may
             see
             by
             k
             in
             the
             Cut
             D
          
           
             Then
             the
             following
             Wave
             from
             behind
             raisith
             it
             again
             ,
             with
             much
             curled
             and
             foaming
             Scum
             ,
             neatly
             spotted
             with
             the
             white
             Foam
             ,
             looking
             like
             Marble
             .
             This
             breaking
             and
             foaming
             of
             the
             Waves
             is
             successively
             repeated
             .
          
           
             So
             the
             swelling
             Waves
             continually
             follow
             one
             another
             ,
             moving
             before
             the
             wind
             with
             a
             quick
             motion
             ,
             but
             when
             these
             Waves
             are
             short
             ,
             they
             dash
             over
             the
             Ship
             ,
             and
             break
             much
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             Ship
             is
             hardly
             able
             to
             live
             .
          
           
             In
             stormy
             weather
             little
             Waves
             curle
             on
             the
             top
             of
             the
             great
             ones
             ,
             and
             lesser
             again
             upon
             them
             .
          
           
           
             The
             Ships
             do
             not
             feel
             these
             smaller
             Waves
             but
             only
             the
             great
             ones
             ,
             that
             are
             called
             Sea-Mountains
             ,
             which
             heave
             and
             mount
             the
             Ship
             with
             them
             ,
             but
             nevertheless
             she
             always
             keeps
             her
             strait
             way
             through
             these
             unpathed
             Waves
             ,
             which
             is
             wonderful
             to
             behold
             .
          
           
             In
             a
             hard
             storm
             the
             froth
             of
             the
             Sea
             drives
             like
             dust
             ,
             and
             looketh
             as
             when
             the
             wind
             driveth
             the
             Snow
             along
             upon
             the
             Ice
             ,
             or
             as
             the
             Dust
             of
             the
             Earth
             does
             in
             dry
             weather
             ,
             and
             you
             see
             the
             Sea
             every
             where
             to
             look
             like
             curled
             Ice
             ,
             that
             when
             it
             is
             a
             freezing
             is
             hindred
             from
             it
             by
             the
             wind
             ,
             all
             covered
             with
             a
             white
             foam
             ,
             and
             one
             Wave
             blows
             over
             the
             precedent
             ,
             with
             a
             great
             roaring
             and
             noise
             ,
             as
             if
             a
             Water-mill
             were
             a
             going
             ;
             and
             this
             same
             noise
             the
             Ships
             make
             likewise
             when
             they
             cut
             through
             the
             Sea.
             
          
           
             It
             is
             also
             to
             be
             observed
             ,
             that
             the
             Waves
             dash
             against
             one
             another
             when
             the
             wind
             changeth
             ,
             and
             cross
             over
             through
             one
             another
             ,
             with
             great
             dashing
             over
             the
             Ships
             ,
             before
             they
             move
             all
             one
             and
             the
             same
             way
             .
          
           
             I
             did
             not
             observe
             here
             the
             Seawater
             so
             clear
             ,
             nor
             found
             it
             so
             salt
             as
             near
             the
             Ice
             ;
             it
             may
             be
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             shallow
             ground
             or
             bottom
             ,
             and
             the
             many
             fresh
             Rivers
             that
             run
             into
             it
             ;
             or
             because
             the
             Frost
             cleareth
             the
             water
             more
             .
          
           
             Concerning
             the
             manner
             of
             their
             Sailing
             ;
             they
             sail
             and
             change
             their
             Ways
             and
             Sails
             according
             as
             they
             think
             fit
             .
             If
             there
             be
             a
             fresh
             Gale
             ,
             they
             make
             use
             of
             all
             their
             Sails
             ;
             if
             a
             storm
             ,
             with
             the
             two
             lowermost
             Sails
             ,
             whereof
             they
             call
             the
             first
             the
             Fock
             or
             Fore-sail
             ,
             the
             middlemost
             Schumfer
             or
             Main-sail
             ,
             and
             the
             third
             the
             Basan
             or
             Mizen-sail
             .
          
           
           
             In
             hard
             storms
             they
             furl
             the
             fore
             Sail
             ,
             and
             sail
             only
             with
             the
             Main-Sail
             and
             the
             Mizen-sail
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             greatest
             storm
             of
             all
             ,
             with
             these
             Sails
             reefed
             or
             half
             tied
             in
             ,
             as
             they
             call
             it
             ,
             or
             with
             the
             Mizen-sail
             half
             furled
             up
             ;
             this
             they
             do
             because
             the
             Ship
             goeth
             the
             stedier
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             wind
             ,
             for
             else
             it
             would
             rowle
             too
             much
             up
             and
             down
             in
             the
             Sea
             ,
             and
             the
             water
             would
             dash
             in
             too
             much
             on
             the
             sides
             thereof
             .
          
           
             One
             man
             stands
             always
             at
             the
             Helm
             to
             steer
             the
             Ship
             ,
             but
             in
             hard
             weather
             ten
             men
             can
             hardly
             hold
             the
             Helm
             ,
             wherefore
             they
             fasten
             it
             with
             a
             Tackle
             ,
             and
             so
             let
             it
             go
             too
             and
             fro
             ,
             as
             the
             Compass
             directs
             them
             .
          
           
             In
             and
             after
             a
             storm
             we
             have
             oftentimes
             strangers
             come
             to
             visit
             us
             in
             our
             Ships
             ,
             
               viz.
               Blackbirds
               ,
               Starlings
            
             ,
             and
             all
             sorts
             of
             small
             Birds
             ,
             that
             have
             lost
             their
             way
             in
             a
             storm
             from
             the
             and
             ,
             and
             fly
             to
             the
             Ships
             to
             save
             themselves
             ,
             and
             prolong
             their
             lives
             ,
             when
             others
             fly
             about
             till
             they
             are
             spent
             ,
             and
             then
             fall
             into
             the
             Sea
             ,
             and
             are
             drowned
             .
          
           
             The
             Lumbs
             ,
             and
             other
             Water-fowl
             ,
             come
             not
             near
             us
             ;
             which
             I
             mention
             on
             purpose
             to
             confute
             the
             erroneons
             Opinion
             of
             some
             ,
             that
             believe
             that
             the
             before-mentioned
             Birds
             come
             to
             the
             Ships
             as
             Messengers
             ,
             to
             bring
             the
             ill
             news
             of
             bad
             weather
             .
          
           
             Yet
             notwithstanding
             ,
             these
             following
             signs
             or
             marks
             commonly
             fore-tell
             a
             storm
             or
             hard
             weather
             ,
             when
             great
             fish
             come
             near
             to
             the
             Ships
             in
             great
             numbers
             ,
             when
             they
             play
             ,
             dance
             ,
             rowl
             about
             ,
             and
             leap
             out
             of
             the
             water
             ,
             which
             is
             not
             always
             playing
             in
             them
             ,
             but
             rather
             their
             Bodies
             are
             afflicted
             with
             some
             pain
             or
             other
             .
             We
             saw
             several
             Whales
             in
             the
             Sea
             ,
             that
             threw
             
             themselves
             about
             as
             if
             they
             were
             sick
             ,
             or
             a
             dying
             .
          
           
             When
             the
             Sea
             is
             tempestuous
             ,
             it
             is
             not
             to
             be
             thought
             that
             it
             doth
             proceed
             from
             the
             Sea
             only
             ,
             but
             a
             hard
             and
             tempestuous
             storm
             and
             wind
             followeth
             upon
             it
             ,
             that
             sendeth
             the
             Waves
             like
             Messengers
             before
             it
             ,
             until
             it
             arriveth
             it self
             with
             a
             tempest
             ;
             but
             this
             is
             not
             to
             be
             understood
             of
             the
             North-sea
             ,
             but
             only
             of
             the
             Sea
             betwixt
             Hitland
             and
             Spitzbergen
             .
          
           
             When
             the
             Air
             is
             so
             disposed
             ,
             as
             the
             Stars
             do
             not
             only
             look
             bigger
             ,
             but
             as
             if
             they
             were
             more
             in
             number
             also
             ,
             it
             is
             a
             great
             Prognostication
             ,
             and
             often
             proveth
             true
             also
             ;
             It
             is
             a
             sign
             that
             the
             Air
             is
             full
             of
             Mist
             ,
             which
             causeth
             upon
             changing
             of
             the
             Frost
             ,
             great
             foggs
             ,
             and
             a
             high
             wind
             follows
             soon
             after
             .
          
           
             At
             night
             ,
             when
             the
             Sea
             dasheth
             very
             much
             ,
             it
             shines
             like
             fire
             ,
             the
             Sea-men
             call
             it
             burning
             :
             This
             shining
             is
             a
             very
             bright
             glance
             ,
             like
             unto
             the
             lustre
             of
             a
             Diamond
             .
          
           
             But
             when
             the
             Sea
             shines
             vehemently
             in
             a
             dark
             night
             ,
             and
             burns
             ;
             a
             South
             or
             West-wind
             followeth
             after
             it
             .
          
           
             At
             the
             stern
             of
             the
             Ship
             ,
             where
             the
             water
             is
             cut
             through
             ,
             you
             see
             at
             night
             deep
             under
             water
             ,
             bubbles
             rise
             and
             break
             ,
             then
             this
             shining
             or
             lustre
             is
             not
             there
             .
          
           
             Hitherto
             we
             have
             discoursed
             of
             the
             North-sea
             ,
             but
             next
             of
             the
             Waves
             between
             Hitland
             and
             Spitzbergen
             ;
             near
             Hitland
             the
             stream
             runneth
             very
             swift
             toward
             the
             North
             ,
             and
             it
             grows
             daily
             colder
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             to
             be
             observed
             ,
             that
             here
             the
             Waves
             of
             the
             Sea
             run
             longer
             ,
             almost
             as
             they
             do
             before
             the
             narrow
             Channel
             between
             England
             and
             France
             in
             the
             
               Spanish
               Sea
            
             ,
             (
             and
             what
             hath
             been
             
             observed
             heretofore
             of
             the
             rowling
             and
             tossing
             of
             the
             Sea
             belongeth
             properly
             to
             this
             )
             with
             a
             continual
             tossing
             of
             the
             Ships
             ,
             which
             maketh
             the
             men
             Sea-sick
             .
          
           
             The
             vomiting
             and
             sickness
             is
             attributed
             to
             the
             Sea-water
             ;
             but
             it
             really
             proceedeth
             from
             the
             great
             and
             continual
             motion
             of
             the
             Body
             ,
             when
             oftentimes
             we
             are
             forced
             to
             creep
             on
             all
             four
             .
          
           
             Neither
             Meat
             nor
             Drink
             tasts
             well
             ,
             the
             head
             akes
             and
             is
             giddy
             ,
             and
             they
             are
             always
             reaching
             to
             vomit
             .
             Costiveness
             of
             the
             Body
             doth
             generally
             accompany
             this
             Distemper
             ,
             and
             the
             Urine
             is
             highly
             tinged
             .
             I
             reckon
             it
             no
             more
             then
             if
             one
             is
             not
             used
             to
             ride
             in
             Coaches
             or
             Waggons
             ;
             only
             that
             it
             is
             always
             accompanied
             with
             a
             bad
             stomach
             and
             restlesness
             .
          
           
             The
             best
             Remedies
             for
             this
             Distemper
             ,
             I
             believe
             ,
             are
             Aromaticks
             chewed
             in
             ones
             mouth
             ,
             as
             Cinamon
             ,
             Cloves
             ,
             Galengal
             ,
             Ginger
             ,
             Nutmegs
             ,
             and
             the
             like
             .
             Many
             think
             to
             drive
             this
             Distemper
             away
             with
             fasting
             ,
             but
             they
             will
             find
             themselves
             mistaken
             .
             Some
             drink
             Sea-water
             ,
             and
             believe
             that
             will
             make
             them
             vomit
             ,
             which
             notwithstanding
             is
             not
             occasioned
             by
             the
             Sea-water
             ,
             but
             by
             the
             loathsomness
             thereof
             .
          
           
             To
             take
             away
             the
             ill
             taste
             out
             of
             ones
             mouth
             ,
             in
             my
             opinion
             ,
             the
             best
             means
             is
             to
             eat
             and
             drink
             plentifully
             ,
             it
             easeth
             quickly
             ;
             neither
             ought
             one
             to
             sleep
             too
             much
             ,
             but
             keep
             in
             the
             Air
             ,
             and
             look
             into
             the
             Wind
             ,
             and
             to
             walk
             up
             and
             down
             in
             the
             Ship
             ,
             is
             also
             very
             proper
             .
          
           
             But
             now
             let
             us
             return
             to
             the
             Waves
             again
             ,
             they
             rise
             ,
             although
             it
             be
             not
             windy
             ,
             as
             high
             as
             Mountains
             ,
             very
             smooth
             ,
             and
             run
             away
             as
             
             far
             as
             one
             can
             discern
             them
             ,
             which
             is
             to
             be
             understood
             when
             the
             Sea
             is
             turbulent
             ,
             whereupon
             quickly
             a
             hard
             Gale
             of
             wind
             followeth
             .
             In
             a
             storm
             the
             Waves
             run
             after
             the
             same
             manner
             ,
             as
             is
             just
             now
             said
             ,
             but
             with
             many
             curling
             and
             foaming
             whirls
             ,
             as
             is
             described
             in
             the
             storm
             of
             the
             North-sea
             .
             These
             Waves
             run
             a
             great
             way
             ,
             so
             that
             you
             may
             see
             between
             them
             at
             a
             great
             distance
             .
          
           
             If
             any
             Ships
             be
             in
             your
             Company
             ,
             oftentimes
             you
             cannot
             see
             them
             .
          
           
             There
             Waves
             are
             a
             great
             deal
             larger
             then
             in
             the
             North-sea
             ,
             and
             have
             also
             greater
             power
             when
             they
             fall
             over
             ,
             but
             do
             not
             dash
             so
             easily
             over
             the
             Ships
             as
             they
             do
             in
             the
             North-sea
             .
             The
             Waves
             in
             the
             North-sea
             are
             presently
             lay'd
             after
             a
             storm
             ,
             but
             the
             commotion
             of
             these
             lasteth
             often
             to
             the
             third
             day
             ;
             if
             it
             be
             never
             so
             calm
             ,
             the
             Ships
             are
             moved
             very
             violently
             ,
             that
             you
             cannot
             walk
             ,
             sit
             ,
             or
             lie
             ;
             it
             is
             best
             to
             keep
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Ship
             ,
             for
             before
             and
             behind
             the
             Sea
             beats
             hard
             against
             them
             .
             The
             Sails
             are
             driven
             against
             the
             Masts
             ,
             and
             have
             no
             steadiness
             from
             the
             wind
             .
             If
             in
             a
             brisk
             Gale
             of
             a
             full
             wind
             the
             Sails
             are
             all
             full
             and
             round
             ,
             the
             Ship
             sails
             best
             upon
             the
             Sea.
             
          
           
             There
             is
             as
             great
             difference
             in
             Ships
             ,
             as
             to
             sailing
             ,
             as
             there
             is
             in
             Horses
             ,
             concerning
             easiness
             and
             swiftness
             ;
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Ships
             is
             therefore
             different
             ;
             the
             stilness
             and
             quietness
             ,
             when
             nothing
             is
             tumbled
             up
             and
             down
             in
             the
             Ship
             ,
             furthereth
             also
             sailing
             very
             much
             .
          
           
             The
             Ships
             swim
             something
             higher
             in
             the
             Sea
             then
             they
             do
             in
             Fresh-water
             ;
             for
             there
             is
             almost
             a
             foot
             difference
             in
             a
             ship
             with
             the
             same
             loading
             .
             'T
             is
             generally
             agreed
             upon
             ,
             that
             one
             
             may
             see
             a
             Ship
             in
             a
             calm
             Sea
             three
             ,
             or
             three
             and
             a
             half
             German
             Miles
             off
             ,
             and
             beyond
             that
             distance
             the
             Sea
             loseth
             it self
             in
             the
             Air
             ,
             and
             the
             Air
             in
             the
             Sea.
             If
             a
             Ship
             saileth
             on
             the
             main
             Sea
             at
             one
             and
             half
             German
             Miles
             distance
             ,
             you
             have
             lost
             the
             sight
             of
             half
             the
             Ship
             ;
             ●t
             two
             Miles
             you
             see
             only
             the
             uppermost
             Mast
             ,
             at
             three
             Miles
             distance
             you
             see
             only
             the
             Flagg
             ,
             and
             when
             it
             goeth
             farther
             ,
             you
             have
             quite
             lost
             it
             .
          
           
             Land
             and
             Mountains
             may
             be
             seen
             at
             a
             great
             distance
             at
             Sea
             ;
             we
             saw
             Spitzbergen
             at
             twelve
             Miles
             distance
             off
             at
             Sea
             ;
             the
             Country
             looked
             like
             a
             black
             Cloud
             full
             of
             white
             stroaks
             ,
             as
             is
             in
             the
             Cut
             D
             marked
             with
             
               a
               ,
               b
               ,
               c
               ,
               g
               ,
               h
               ,
               i.
            
             Near
             the
             Ice
             of
             this
             Sea
             it
             is
             coldest
             where
             the
             Waves
             are
             quiet
             ;
             and
             the
             Sea-water
             is
             so
             clear
             ,
             that
             at
             twelve
             and
             more
             Fathoms
             deep
             you
             may
             see
             the
             bottom
             .
             There
             is
             no
             ground
             to
             be
             found
             near
             the
             Ice
             to
             drop
             an
             Anchor
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             also
             to
             be
             observed
             ,
             that
             according
             to
             the
             colour
             of
             the
             Skies
             ,
             the
             colour
             of
             the
             Sea
             is
             changed
             .
             If
             the
             Skies
             be
             clear
             ,
             the
             sea
             looks
             as
             blew
             as
             a
             Saphir
             ;
             if
             it
             is
             covered
             somewhat
             with
             Clouds
             ,
             the
             Sea
             is
             as
             green
             as
             an
             Emerald
             ;
             if
             there
             be
             a
             foggy
             Sun-shine
             ,
             it
             looketh
             yellow
             ;
             if
             it
             be
             quite
             dark
             ,
             like
             unto
             the
             colour
             of
             Indico
             ;
             in
             stormy
             and
             cloudy
             weather
             ,
             like
             black
             Sope
             ,
             or
             exactly
             like
             unto
             the
             colour
             of
             black
             Lead
             .
          
           
             If
             the
             wind
             be
             quite
             calm
             ,
             one
             may
             hear
             beating
             or
             knocking
             at
             a
             great
             distance
             on
             the
             the
             Sea
             ,
             by
             which
             we
             also
             observe
             the
             Whale
             hears
             ,
             as
             shall
             be
             mentioned
             in
             its
             proper
             place
             .
          
           
           
             Among
             the
             Ice
             the
             stream
             runs
             Southwards
             ,
             which
             we
             observed
             by
             our
             driving
             back
             a
             great
             way
             .
             At
             the
             Muscle-Haven
             the
             stream
             ran
             Northwards
             .
             Those
             that
             sail
             yearly
             to
             those
             places
             ,
             cannot
             give
             any
             certain
             information
             concerning
             ebbing
             and
             flowing
             ;
             only
             they
             have
             observed
             the
             water
             to
             be
             higher
             about
             the
             Land
             ,
             when
             the
             winds
             have
             been
             higher
             then
             at
             other
             times
             .
             And
             this
             I
             have
             also
             observed
             ,
             that
             if
             there
             was
             an
             orderly
             or
             continual
             ebbing
             and
             flowing
             ,
             the
             Eggs
             of
             the
             Birds
             would
             be
             drowned
             upon
             the
             Islands
             .
          
           
             Certain
             information
             ,
             concerning
             ebbing
             and
             flowing
             ,
             is
             not
             easily
             to
             be
             had
             ,
             I
             know
             no
             more
             of
             it
             then
             what
             I
             have
             written
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             III.
             
          
           
             Of
             the
             ICE
             .
          
           
             IN
             the
             Months
             of
             April
             and
             May
             the
             west
             Ice
             breaks
             ,
             because
             it
             lyeth
             Westward
             ,
             which
             drives
             dispersed
             in
             the
             Sea
             ,
             by
             the
             Island
             of
             
               John
               Mayen
            
             ,
             and
             reacheth
             to
             Spitzbergen
             ,
             where
             at
             that
             time
             it
             was
             firm
             still
             ,
             as
             you
             may
             see
             in
             the
             Plate
             A
             marked
             with
             e.
             
          
           
             The
             difference
             between
             the
             Ice
             of
             Spitzbergen
             ,
             and
             that
             of
             our
             Country
             ,
             is
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             not
             smooth
             there
             ,
             so
             as
             to
             slide
             upon
             it
             .
          
           
             Neither
             is
             it
             so
             clear
             nor
             transparent
             ,
             nor
             so
             sharp
             and
             cutting
             ,
             but
             a
             great
             deal
             harder
             ,
             and
             is
             not
             easily
             broke
             or
             split
             ;
             but
             it
             looketh
             likest
             unto
             the
             Ground-Ice
             of
             the
             Rivers
             in
             our
             Country
             ,
             or
             like
             unto
             Loaf-sugar
             .
          
           
             Where
             the
             Ice
             is
             fixed
             upon
             the
             Sea
             ,
             you
             see
             a
             snow-white
             brightess
             in
             the
             Skies
             ,
             as
             if
             ●he
             Sun
             shined
             ,
             for
             the
             Snow
             is
             reflected
             by
             ●he
             Air
             ,
             just
             as
             a
             Fire
             by
             Night
             is
             ;
             but
             at
             a
             ●istance
             you
             see
             the
             Air
             blew
             or
             blackish
             :
             ●here
             there
             is
             many
             small
             Ice-fields
             ;
             that
             are
             〈◊〉
             the
             Meadows
             for
             the
             Seales
             ,
             you
             see
             no
             lustre
             〈◊〉
             brightness
             of
             the
             Skies
             .
          
           
             The
             Sea
             dasheth
             against
             these
             Ice-fields
             ,
             ●hich
             occasioneth
             several
             fine
             Figure
             ;
             not
             〈◊〉
             they
             are
             naturally
             framed
             so
             ,
             but
             just
             as
             〈◊〉
             flowers
             on
             our
             Glass-windows
             ,
             get
             all
             〈◊〉
             of
             figures
             ;
             for
             these
             are
             framed
             by
             the
             ●shing
             of
             the
             Sea
             ,
             like
             unto
             Mountains
             ,
             Steeples
             ,
             
             Tables
             ,
             Chappels
             ,
             and
             all
             sort
             of
             Beasts
             .
          
           
             These
             Ice-fields
             are
             a
             great
             deal
             deeper
             under
             water
             ,
             then
             they
             are
             high
             above
             it
             ,
             and
             are
             of
             a
             paler
             colour
             under
             water
             then
             above
             ;
             the
             top
             of
             them
             might
             be
             called
             the
             Kernel
             and
             Marrow
             of
             the
             Ice
             ,
             because
             the
             colour
             is
             much
             deeper
             then
             that
             of
             the
             other
             .
          
           
             The
             highest
             colour
             is
             delicate
             blew
             ,
             of
             the
             same
             colour
             with
             the
             blewest
             Vitriol
             ,
             somewhat
             more
             transparent
             ,
             yet
             not
             so
             clear
             as
             that
             in
             our
             Country
             ,
             which
             you
             may
             see
             through
             ,
             let
             it
             be
             never
             so
             thick
             ;
             it
             is
             as
             hard
             as
             a
             stone
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             not
             easily
             split
             or
             cleav'd
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             spumgy
             ,
             like
             unto
             a
             Punice
             stone
             .
             Among
             this
             Ice
             the
             Ships
             sail
             up
             and
             down
             ,
             until
             they
             come
             to
             bigger
             Ice
             fields
             ,
             for
             the
             small
             ones
             incumber
             the
             Sea
             ,
             that
             the
             Ships
             sail
             often
             against
             them
             and
             perish
             ;
             for
             when
             the
             winds
             arise
             the
             Waves
             drive
             against
             the
             Ice-fields
             ,
             as
             if
             it
             was
             against
             Rocks
             ,
             and
             beat
             the
             Ships
             to
             pieces
             .
          
           
             When
             we
             are
             passed
             by
             these
             small
             Ice-fields
             that
             swim
             at
             a
             great
             distance
             from
             one
             another
             ,
             then
             we
             sail
             in
             between
             them
             ,
             and
             draw
             a
             small
             Ice-field
             behind
             the
             stern
             of
             our
             Ship
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             be
             the
             sooner
             stopt
             ,
             and
             kept
             from
             swift
             sailing
             ,
             without
             letting
             the
             Sails
             strike
             ,
             for
             else
             it
             might
             easily
             run
             against
             an
             Ice-field
             .
             Every
             Ships
             Master
             is
             left
             to
             his
             free-will
             ,
             whether
             he
             will
             sail
             into
             the
             Ice
             ,
             because
             in
             the
             Spring
             the
             Whales
             are
             in
             great
             numbers
             seen
             there
             in
             the
             West-Ice
             ,
             as
             they
             call
             it
             .
          
           
             The
             Masters
             do
             not
             willingly
             sail
             in
             amongst
             the
             Ice
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             dark
             ,
             or
             foggy
             ,
             or
             stormy
             ,
             which
             must
             be
             expected
             in
             the
             Spring
             ,
             and
             the
             small
             sheets
             of
             Ice
             swim
             up
             and
             down
             
             in
             the
             Sea
             ,
             which
             the
             Skippers
             must
             avoid
             ,
             lest
             they
             lose
             their
             Ships
             .
          
           
             It
             may
             seem
             something
             strange
             ,
             that
             they
             sail
             so
             often
             to
             the
             Ice
             and
             back
             again
             but
             there
             is
             the
             same
             reason
             for
             it
             as
             is
             in
             hunting
             after
             Deer
             ,
             if
             we
             do
             not
             find
             Whales
             in
             one
             place
             ,
             we
             must
             seek
             them
             in
             others
             ;
             for
             the
             fortune
             in
             ketching
             of
             Whales
             is
             like
             the
             Chances
             of
             Gaming
             ,
             and
             there
             is
             no
             great
             understanding
             required
             to
             find
             them
             :
             some
             see
             and
             catch
             more
             then
             they
             desire
             ,
             and
             others
             but
             at
             half
             a
             mile
             distant
             from
             them
             ,
             see
             not
             one
             ,
             which
             is
             very
             common
             .
          
           
             When
             they
             go
             in
             amongst
             the
             Ice
             ,
             the
             men
             stand
             ready
             with
             great
             Ice-hooks
             to
             keep
             them
             off
             ,
             that
             the
             Ship
             may
             not
             run
             against
             them
             .
          
           
             The
             farther
             you
             sail
             into
             ,
             and
             amongst
             the
             Ice
             ,
             the
             greater
             Ice-fields
             you
             shall
             foe
             ,
             so
             that
             you
             cannot
             look
             over
             them
             ;
             for
             about
             the
             West
             ,
             as
             they
             call
             it
             ,
             are
             larger
             Ice-fields
             to
             be
             seen
             then
             about
             Spitzbergen
             ,
             quite
             white
             at
             the
             top
             ,
             covered
             with
             Snow
             ,
             so
             that
             there
             is
             but
             ill
             walking
             upon
             them
             ,
             because
             you
             fall
             deep
             into
             the
             Snow
             .
             (
             See
             A
             marked
             with
             l
             ,
             and
             B
             marked
             c.
             )
          
           
             The
             prints
             of
             the
             Bears
             footing
             we
             saw
             on
             the
             shoar
             of
             the
             Ice-fields
             ,
             for
             they
             seek
             their
             Prey
             in
             the
             water
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             dead
             Carkases
             of
             the
             Whales
             ,
             the
             Foxes
             generally
             accompany
             them
             ,
             for
             their
             choicer
             food
             of
             Birds
             is
             here
             scarcer
             then
             at
             Spitzbergen
             ,
             for
             they
             flock
             not
             together
             ,
             but
             fly
             singly
             .
          
           
             When
             they
             sail
             some
             Miles
             into
             the
             Ice
             ,
             where
             there
             is
             pretty
             large
             Ice-fields
             ,
             they
             joyn
             their
             Ships
             to
             them
             with
             great
             Ice-hooks
             ,
             fastned
             to
             strong
             Cables
             ,
             where
             they
             lie
             at
             Anchor
             ,
             
             several
             Ships
             about
             the
             same
             Ice-field
             ,
             but
             they
             rather
             chose
             to
             be
             alone
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             an
             hindrance
             to
             one
             another
             in
             
             Whale-catching
             ,
             and
             the
             hunting
             of
             them
             from
             one
             to
             another
             maketh
             them
             shie
             .
          
           
             Amongst
             the
             Ice
             we
             find
             no
             great
             Waves
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             pretty
             smooth
             ,
             even
             when
             it
             is
             somewhat
             stormy
             .
             All
             the
             danger
             is
             from
             one
             Ice-field
             being
             bigger
             then
             the
             other
             ,
             and
             the
             little
             ones
             swiming
             faster
             then
             the
             great
             ones
             ,
             which
             often
             causeth
             a
             stoppage
             ,
             so
             that
             they
             crowd
             upon
             one
             another
             ,
             not
             without
             great
             danger
             of
             the
             Ships
             ,
             which
             are
             often
             catcht
             between
             ,
             and
             broken
             by
             them
             .
             See
             the
             Plate
             B
             at
             a.
             
          
           
             The
             Seamen
             hinder
             the
             pressing
             on
             of
             the
             Ice
             as
             much
             as
             in
             them
             lieth
             ,
             with
             great
             Ice-hooks
             ;
             but
             what
             small
             help
             this
             affordeth
             them
             daily
             experience
             testifies
             sufficienty
             .
             In
             fair
             weather
             the
             mischief
             is
             as
             soon
             done
             as
             in
             tempestuous
             ,
             because
             the
             Ice
             drives
             in
             the
             Sea
             either
             with
             the
             stream
             or
             wind
             ,
             as
             either
             of
             them
             is
             the
             more
             prevalent
             ,
             crashing
             and
             grinding
             against
             each
             other
             whence
             the
             danger
             arises
             to
             the
             Ships
             ,
             for
             after
             such
             a
             manner
             many
             Ships
             perish
             .
             See
             Plate
             B.
             
          
           
             They
             say
             that
             a
             dead
             Whale
             tied
             to
             the
             Ship
             ,
             is
             the
             best
             defence
             against
             the
             Ice
             .
             Others
             hang
             the
             Tails
             and
             Fins
             about
             their
             Ship
             ,
             which
             way
             is
             not
             to
             be
             rejected
             ,
             for
             it
             is
             of
             great
             use
             to
             them
             to
             prevent
             the
             danger
             of
             the
             squeezing
             of
             the
             Ice
             ;
             they
             have
             examples
             ,
             that
             in
             such
             squeezing
             of
             the
             Ice
             a
             dead
             Whale
             hath
             preserved
             them
             .
          
           
           
             The
             Ice
             rises
             out
             of
             the
             Sea
             as
             high
             as
             a
             Mountain
             ;
             the
             striking
             of
             them
             together
             makes
             so
             great
             a
             noise
             ,
             that
             one
             can
             hardly
             hear
             his
             own
             words
             ;
             and
             from
             this
             joyning
             together
             of
             the
             Ice
             ,
             the
             great
             Ice-hills
             are
             made
             ,
             that
             drive
             up
             and
             down
             in
             the
             Sea.
             
          
           
             Other
             great
             Ice
             fields
             are
             not
             so
             high
             as
             the
             Ice
             hills
             ,
             yet
             notwithstanding
             they
             are
             hardly
             ever
             quite
             plain
             ,
             and
             without
             a
             Hill
             ;
             you
             see
             the
             Ice
             under
             water
             as
             deep
             as
             you
             can
             see
             .
             It
             is
             all
             of
             a
             blew
             colour
             ,
             but
             the
             deeper
             you
             look
             the
             purer
             blew
             you
             see
             ;
             which
             beautiful
             colour
             changes
             with
             the
             Air
             ,
             for
             if
             it
             be
             rainy
             weather
             ,
             this
             colour
             groweth
             paler
             .
             I
             also
             have
             often
             seen
             the
             Ice
             underneath
             the
             water
             very
             green
             ,
             the
             occasion
             whereof
             was
             the
             troubled
             Air
             ,
             whence
             the
             Sea
             assumeth
             this
             colour
             .
          
           
             I
             wonder
             that
             upon
             the
             largest
             Ice-fields
             no
             high
             Mountains
             are
             seen
             ,
             as
             are
             seen
             where
             the
             Ice
             grinds
             and
             dashes
             one
             against
             the
             other
             .
          
           
             I
             am
             of
             opinion
             ,
             that
             the
             Ice
             melts
             towards
             the
             bottoms
             ,
             for
             one
             may
             see
             it
             spungy
             ;
             for
             else
             ,
             if
             one
             would
             compute
             from
             the
             beginning
             ,
             it
             must
             have
             reached
             the
             very
             ground
             ,
             even
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             depth
             of
             the
             sea
             .
          
           
             I
             have
             seen
             in
             Spitzbergen
             white
             Ice
             that
             was
             frozen
             quite
             curled
             ,
             it
             look'd
             just
             like
             Sugar-candy
             ,
             was
             very
             hard
             and
             thick
             ,
             and
             swam
             even
             with
             the
             Seas
             surface
             .
             The
             Ships
             are
             not
             always
             in
             this
             danger
             of
             sqeezing
             ,
             for
             often
             times
             there
             is
             little
             or
             no
             Ice
             to
             be
             seen
             there
             ,
             although
             you
             are
             a
             great
             way
             in
             the
             place
             where
             it
             usually
             is
             ;
             but
             as
             soon
             as
             a
             wind
             arises
             ,
             you
             would
             admire
             from
             whence
             
             so
             great
             a
             quantity
             of
             Ice
             should
             come
             in
             less
             then
             an
             hours
             time
             .
          
           
             At
             the
             greatest
             Ice-fields
             of
             all
             ,
             Ships
             do
             not
             always
             ride
             the
             safest
             ;
             since
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             bigness
             ,
             and
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Sea
             ,
             these
             Ice-fields
             break
             ,
             not
             without
             danger
             .
          
           
             When
             such
             Ice-fields
             break
             they
             part
             asunder
             ,
             which
             causeth
             a
             Whirl-pool
             in
             the
             Sea
             ,
             where
             all
             the
             out-parts
             press
             to
             the
             Centre
             ,
             and
             by
             that
             means
             the
             pieces
             of
             the
             Ice-fields
             raise
             themselves
             up
             ,
             and
             dash
             and
             grind
             against
             each
             other
             .
          
           
             When
             we
             came
             to
             71
             degrees
             in
             the
             Month
             of
             April
             we
             saw
             the
             first
             Ice
             ,
             and
             so
             we
             failed
             up
             and
             down
             by
             the
             Ice
             ,
             until
             that
             Month
             was
             spent
             ,
             for
             so
             early
             in
             the
             year
             no
             body
             dares
             venture
             himself
             into
             or
             amongst
             the
             Ice
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             stormy
             winds
             ▪
             and
             some
             times
             the
             Ice
             is
             still
             fixed
             ,
             and
             stands
             firm
             ,
             and
             therefore
             there
             is
             but
             a
             few
             Whales
             seen
             ,
             for
             underneath
             the
             Ice
             they
             cannot
             breathe
             .
          
           
             Into
             the
             Ice
             we
             sailed
             at
             77
             degrees
             and
             24
             minutes
             ,
             and
             drove
             with
             that
             sheet
             of
             Ice
             towards
             the
             South
             .
             In
             this
             Month
             ,
             and
             also
             in
             the
             following
             Month
             of
             May
             ,
             are
             the
             most
             Whales
             seen
             here
             ,
             which
             run
             towards
             the
             East
             ,
             and
             we
             follow
             them
             all
             along
             by
             the
             Ice
             to
             Spitzbergen
             .
          
           
             Near
             to
             the
             Land
             smaller
             Ice-fields
             are
             seen
             ,
             because
             the
             Ice
             cannot
             give
             way
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Land
             ,
             which
             causeth
             greater
             grinding
             and
             breaking
             ,
             and
             upon
             that
             account
             smaller
             Ice
             than
             is
             in
             the
             open
             Sea.
             Yet
             for
             all
             this
             ,
             some
             greater
             Ice-Mountains
             are
             seen
             there
             ,
             that
             stand
             firm
             on
             the
             shoar
             ,
             and
             never
             melt
             at
             bottom
             ,
             but
             increase
             every
             year
             higher
             and
             
             higher
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Snow
             that
             falls
             on
             them
             ,
             and
             then
             Rains
             that
             freezes
             ,
             and
             then
             Snow
             again
             alternately
             ;
             and
             after
             this
             manner
             the
             Icy-hills
             increase
             yearly
             ,
             and
             are
             never
             melted
             by
             the
             heat
             of
             the
             Sun
             at
             the
             top
             .
             These
             Ice-Mounts
             change
             their
             first
             colour
             in
             time
             by
             the
             Air
             ,
             by
             Rain
             and
             by
             the
             Clouds
             ;
             and
             the
             fairest
             blew
             that
             can
             be
             ,
             is
             seen
             in
             the
             cracks
             of
             these
             Ice-hills
             .
             From
             these
             same
             Ice-hills
             ,
             oftentimes
             break
             off
             great
             pieces
             ,
             that
             swin
             in
             the
             Sea
             ,
             and
             is
             more
             compact
             than
             the
             other
             Ice
             by
             far
             .
             I
             once
             saw
             one
             of
             these
             pieces
             that
             was
             curiously
             workt
             and
             carved
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             by
             the
             Sea
             ,
             like
             a
             Church
             with
             arched
             Windows
             and
             Pillars
             ,
             the
             Doors
             and
             Windows
             hung
             full
             of
             Icikles
             ,
             on
             the
             inside
             thereof
             I
             saw
             the
             delicatest
             blew
             that
             can
             be
             imagined
             ;
             it
             was
             bigger
             than
             our
             Ship
             ,
             and
             somewhat
             higher
             than
             our
             stern
             ,
             but
             how
             deep
             it
             was
             under
             water
             ,
             I
             cannot
             exactly
             tell
             .
             Near
             unto
             the
             Muscle-Haven
             ,
             a
             great
             Ice-hill
             came
             driving
             towards
             our
             Ship
             ,
             that
             was
             as
             high
             as
             our
             Poop
             ,
             and
             went
             so
             deep
             under
             water
             ,
             that
             it
             took
             up
             our
             Anchor
             ,
             which
             lay
             fifteen
             Fathoms
             deep
             .
             I
             have
             also
             seen
             several
             others
             ,
             and
             of
             other
             figures
             ,
             viz.
             round
             and
             foursquare
             Tables
             ,
             with
             round
             and
             blew
             Pillars
             underneath
             ,
             as
             in
             Plate
             B
             marked
             with
             f
             :
             the
             Table
             was
             very
             smooth
             and
             plain
             at
             the
             top
             ,
             and
             white
             with
             the
             Snow
             ;
             at
             the
             sides
             hung
             down
             a
             great
             many
             Icikles
             close
             to
             one
             another
             ,
             like
             a
             fringed
             Table-cloth
             ;
             I
             believe
             that
             near
             forty
             men
             might
             have
             sat
             about
             it
             .
             I
             have
             seen
             of
             these
             Tables
             with
             one
             foot
             ,
             and
             with
             two
             or
             three
             Pillars
             ,
             and
             abundance
             of
             Seales
             swam
             about
             it
             .
             The
             Dishes
             that
             furnisht
             this
             Table
             ,
             were
             a
             piece
             of
             Ice
             like
             an
             Horses
             
             head
             ,
             and
             a
             Swan
             ,
             I
             doubt
             they
             were
             but
             salt
             .
             You
             must
             observe
             that
             this
             Ice
             becometh
             very
             spungy
             by
             the
             dashing
             of
             the
             Sea
             ,
             and
             from
             thence
             grows
             salt
             ,
             like
             Sea-water
             ,
             and
             thence
             also
             changeth
             its
             colour
             ,
             viz.
             from
             the
             Sea
             and
             Rain-water
             mixt
             with
             it
             ;
             for
             you
             shall
             commonly
             see
             the
             Water
             look
             blew
             or
             yellow
             ,
             if
             you
             walk
             under
             water
             ,
             with
             your
             eyes
             open
             ,
             and
             look
             upwards
             .
          
           
             The
             other
             Ice
             ,
             as
             far
             as
             it
             is
             above
             water
             ,
             is
             of
             a
             taste
             like
             other
             Ice
             ,
             but
             that
             below
             the
             Sea
             salt
             like
             the
             Sea-water
             .
          
           
             When
             we
             arrived
             at
             Spitzbergen
             ,
             the
             Ice
             at
             Rehenfelt
             was
             as
             yet
             fixed
             ,
             but
             a
             few
             days
             afterwards
             it
             was
             driven
             away
             by
             the
             winds
             .
          
           
             The
             Ice
             begirts
             these
             Countries
             on
             all
             sides
             :
             as
             the
             Wind
             sets
             either
             from
             the
             Island
             of
             
               John
               Mayen
               ,
               Old
               Greenland
            
             ,
             and
             
               Nova
               Zembla
            
             .
             We
             found
             at
             this
             time
             ,
             that
             the
             Ice
             reached
             from
             the
             other
             side
             of
             Spitzbergen
             ,
             and
             the
             Ships
             sailed
             between
             the
             Ice
             and
             the
             Land
             ,
             as
             if
             it
             were
             in
             a
             River
             .
          
           
             As
             soon
             as
             this
             Ice
             is
             drove
             thither
             by
             the
             winds
             ,
             the
             Ships
             must
             give
             way
             ,
             or
             go
             into
             the
             Harbour
             ,
             until
             the
             Winds
             have
             blown
             or
             driven
             the
             Ice
             away
             ,
             or
             else
             they
             are
             lost
             ;
             but
             if
             there
             be
             other
             Ships
             that
             escape
             ,
             the
             men
             are
             saved
             .
          
           
             On
             this
             Ice
             I
             did
             not
             see
             many
             Sea-hounds
             ,
             but
             a
             great
             many
             Sea-horses
             ,
             and
             many
             Birds
             and
             Fowl.
             
          
           
             We
             failed
             still
             on
             till
             we
             saw
             the
             
               Seven
               Islands
            
             ,
             but
             could
             go
             no
             farther
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             IV.
             
          
           
             Of
             the
             AIR
             .
          
           
             THE
             Frost
             is
             unconstant
             in
             our
             Country
             but
             it
             is
             not
             so
             in
             Spitzbergen
             .
             In
             the
             Month
             of
             April
             ,
             at
             71
             degrees
             ,
             it
             was
             so
             cold
             that
             we
             could
             hardly
             keep
             warmth
             within
             us
             .
             They
             say
             that
             in
             this
             Month
             ,
             as
             also
             in
             May
             ,
             the
             hardest
             Frosts
             happen
             every
             year
             .
          
           
             All
             the
             Rigging
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             its
             being
             wet
             ,
             is
             covered
             over
             with
             Ice
             ,
             and
             stiff
             .
          
           
             They
             do
             not
             send
             their
             Ships
             so
             soon
             as
             they
             did
             a
             few
             years
             ago
             ,
             and
             yet
             they
             come
             time
             enough
             there
             ,
             for
             if
             they
             arrive
             too
             early
             ,
             there
             is
             nothing
             for
             them
             to
             do
             ,
             because
             the
             Ice
             is
             not
             yet
             dissipated
             ,
             and
             therefore
             but
             few
             Whales
             to
             be
             seen
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             two
             first
             Summer
             Months
             of
             Spitzbergen
             ,
             their
             Teeth
             chatter
             in
             their
             Heads
             commonly
             ,
             and
             the
             Appetite
             is
             greater
             than
             in
             any
             other
             Countreys
             .
          
           
             The
             Sun
             sets
             no
             more
             after
             the
             third
             day
             of
             May
             ,
             and
             we
             were
             about
             71
             degrees
             ,
             when
             we
             could
             see
             as
             well
             by
             night
             as
             by
             day
             .
             I
             cannot
             say
             much
             of
             constancy
             of
             the
             weather
             in
             these
             two
             first
             Months
             ,
             for
             it
             changed
             daily
             .
             They
             say
             also
             ,
             if
             the
             Moon
             appears
             cloudy
             and
             misty
             ,
             with
             a
             streaky
             Sky
             ,
             that
             then
             there
             commonly
             follows
             a
             storm
             .
             Whether
             the
             Moon
             doth
             prognosticate
             such
             storms
             ,
             I
             cannot
             tell
             ,
             because
             we
             have
             observed
             ,
             that
             
             after
             we
             have
             seen
             the
             Moon
             ,
             in
             a
             clear
             Sky
             ,
             the
             Air
             has
             grown
             foggy
             ,
             which
             happeneth
             often
             ,
             chiefly
             if
             the
             wind
             changes
             .
             When
             the
             Hills
             show
             fiery
             ,
             it
             is
             from
             Foggs
             ,
             which
             after
             spread
             themselves
             every
             where
             ,
             and
             the
             Cold
             encreaseth
             :
             These
             Foggs
             look
             blew
             ,
             like
             Indico
             ,
             and
             black
             afar
             off
             ,
             which
             upon
             changing
             of
             the
             Weather
             are
             driven
             along
             by
             the
             wind
             ,
             so
             that
             in
             less
             than
             half
             an
             hour
             the
             Sea
             is
             so
             covered
             with
             a
             thick
             Fogg
             ,
             that
             you
             can
             hardly
             see
             from
             one
             end
             of
             the
             Ship
             to
             the
             other
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             14th
             of
             May
             the
             Air
             was
             bright
             and
             clear
             ,
             and
             yet
             very
             cold
             ;
             we
             could
             see
             the
             Whales
             farther
             off
             in
             the
             Sea
             ,
             then
             usually
             at
             this
             time
             :
             We
             could
             not
             distinguish
             the
             Air
             from
             the
             Sea
             ,
             for
             it
             shewed
             as
             if
             the
             Ships
             danced
             in
             the
             Air
             like
             naked
             Trees
             or
             P●●es
             .
          
           
             After
             the
             same
             manner
             Spitzbergen
             looks
             at
             a
             distance
             like
             a
             Cloud
             ;
             the
             Mountains
             are
             so
             reflected
             by
             the
             Sea
             ,
             that
             he
             that
             knows
             not
             the
             Country
             very
             well
             ,
             cannot
             easily
             discern
             if
             from
             the
             Air
             ;
             and
             so
             other
             Countries
             very
             often
             appear
             .
             The
             other
             three
             Months
             ,
             
               June
               ,
               July
            
             ,
             and
             August
             ,
             were
             very
             calm
             .
          
           
             Concerning
             the
             Cold
             ,
             it
             is
             much
             according
             to
             the
             quality
             of
             the
             Winds
             ;
             so
             North
             and
             East
             winds
             cause
             very
             intense
             Frosts
             ;
             so
             that
             one
             can
             hardly
             keep
             alive
             ,
             especially
             if
             the
             wind
             blows
             hard
             .
          
           
             West
             and
             South
             winds
             ,
             when
             somewhat
             constant
             ,
             cause
             much
             Snow
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             Rain
             also
             ,
             and
             moderate
             cold
             .
          
           
             The
             other
             winds
             of
             the
             32
             according
             to
             the
             Compass
             ,
             whatever
             names
             they
             have
             ,
             are
             changed
             by
             the
             Clouds
             ,
             so
             that
             sometimes
             
             when
             the
             wind
             was
             Southwest
             and
             by
             South
             in
             one
             place
             ,
             at
             a
             few
             Miles
             distance
             ,
             there
             blows
             quite
             another
             wind
             .
          
           
             What
             heat
             the
             Sun
             oftentimes
             affords
             we
             saw
             by
             our
             Eyes
             watering
             ,
             and
             the
             tears
             that
             ran
             continually
             down
             our
             Cheeks
             .
             Yet
             this
             severe
             Cold
             is
             not
             always
             ,
             as
             is
             already
             mentioned
             ,
             for
             if
             it
             were
             ,
             how
             could
             any
             Herbs
             grow
             there
             .
          
           
             Neither
             is
             there
             every
             year
             a
             constancy
             of
             winds
             or
             weather
             ruled
             by
             the
             Moon
             ,
             but
             an
             alteration
             ,
             as
             is
             in
             other
             places
             ,
             sometimes
             a
             milder
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             a
             severer
             Winter
             .
          
           
             Skilful
             Ship
             masters
             and
             Harpooners
             ,
             commend
             those
             years
             for
             Whale
             catching
             ,
             that
             have
             not
             many
             foggy
             and
             cloudy
             days
             .
          
           
             Whether
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             New
             and
             Full
             Moons
             ,
             the
             Spring-tydes
             happen
             ,
             cannot
             be
             known
             .
          
           
             Such
             clear
             Skies
             as
             we
             have
             sometimes
             in
             a
             Summers
             day
             ,
             with
             pleasant
             curled
             Clouds
             ,
             I
             have
             not
             seen
             at
             Spitzbergen
             ;
             but
             on
             the
             contrary
             ,
             several
             dark
             and
             foggy
             ones
             .
             Rising
             Thunder-clouds
             I
             have
             not
             seen
             ,
             nor
             ever
             heard
             of
             any
             body
             that
             had
             seen
             them
             .
          
           
             Above
             the
             Ice
             the
             Air
             appears
             white
             ,
             from
             whence
             we
             know
             where
             the
             firm
             or
             fixed
             Ice
             lies
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             before
             observed
             in
             the
             Chapter
             of
             the
             Ice
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             two
             last
             Summer
             Months
             ,
             chiefly
             in
             July
             ,
             before
             the
             Weigatt
             ,
             the
             Sun
             shin'd
             so
             warm
             ,
             that
             the
             Tarr
             of
             the
             Ship
             between
             the
             Seames
             ,
             where
             the
             wind
             could
             not
             come
             at
             it
             ,
             melted
             .
          
           
           
             There
             is
             hardly
             any
             difference
             of
             Cold
             between
             Night
             and
             day
             ,
             yet
             at
             Night
             when
             the
             Sun
             shineth
             ,
             it
             seemeth
             to
             one
             that
             rightly
             considereth
             it
             ,
             as
             if
             it
             was
             only
             clear
             Moon-light
             ,
             so
             that
             you
             may
             look
             upon
             the
             Sun
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             you
             can
             upon
             the
             Moon
             ;
             so
             that
             thereby
             one
             may
             distinguish
             Night
             and
             Day
             from
             each
             other
             .
             Increase
             of
             Cold
             ,
             and
             changing
             of
             the
             Compass
             ,
             we
             did
             not
             observe
             as
             far
             as
             we
             went.
             
          
           
             It
             is
             also
             to
             be
             observed
             ,
             that
             the
             Frost
             doth
             not
             let
             a
             dead
             Body
             be
             consumed
             easily
             in
             the
             Ground
             ,
             as
             is
             already
             observed
             ,
             in
             the
             Chapter
             of
             the
             Description
             of
             Spitzbergen
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             day
             of
             August
             ,
             in
             our
             Voyage
             homeward
             ,
             we
             observed
             the
             Sun
             first
             to
             set
             .
          
           
             Concerning
             the
             Meteors
             generated
             in
             the
             Air
             ,
             I
             observed
             that
             the
             Rime
             fell
             down
             in
             the
             shape
             of
             small
             Needles
             of
             Snow
             into
             the
             Sea
             ,
             and
             covered
             it
             as
             if
             it
             was
             sprinkled
             all
             over
             with
             Dust
             :
             these
             small
             Needles
             increased
             more
             and
             more
             ,
             and
             lay
             as
             they
             fell
             cross
             one
             over
             the
             other
             ,
             and
             looked
             very
             like
             a
             Cobweb
             ;
             they
             are
             formed
             by
             the
             cold
             of
             the
             Air
             ,
             and
             increased
             to
             that
             degree
             ,
             that
             the
             Sea
             seemed
             covered
             by
             them
             ,
             as
             with
             a
             Skin
             ,
             or
             a
             tender
             Ice
             ,
             which
             had
             the
             taste
             of
             Fresh-water
             ;
             as
             also
             the
             Sea-water
             that
             is
             taken
             up
             into
             the
             high
             Air
             is
             changed
             ,
             and
             falleth
             down
             again
             in
             sweet
             or
             fresh
             Rain
             .
          
           
             This
             hapneth
             in
             clear
             Sun-shine
             and
             intense
             cold
             weather
             ,
             and
             it
             falleth
             down
             as
             the
             Dew
             doth
             with
             us
             at
             Night
             invisibly
             ,
             in
             dull
             weather
             ;
             when
             the
             Sun
             doth
             not
             shine
             ,
             you
             cannot
             see
             this
             ;
             but
             you
             see
             it
             plainly
             ,
             if
             you
             look
             when
             the
             Sun
             shines
             towards
             a
             shady
             place
             ;
             
             for
             then
             it
             sparkles
             as
             bright
             as
             Diamonds
             ;
             shews
             like
             the
             Atoms
             in
             Sun-shine
             ,
             all
             day
             long
             it
             falleth
             in
             so
             small
             Particles
             ,
             that
             nothing
             sticks
             or
             hangs
             on
             your
             Cloaths
             of
             it
             to
             make
             them
             wet
             .
          
           
             At
             Noon
             when
             the
             Sun
             shines
             very
             warm
             ,
             these
             small
             Needles
             melt
             in
             the
             Air
             ,
             and
             fall
             down
             insensibly
             like
             Dew
             .
          
           
             Sometimes
             we
             see
             in
             our
             Country
             ,
             something
             a
             little
             like
             these
             small
             Needles
             ,
             which
             is
             what
             we
             call
             Rime
             ,
             and
             falleth
             from
             the
             Trees
             in
             Atoms
             like
             Dust
             .
             This
             is
             small
             Snow
             ,
             and
             may
             be
             seen
             as
             well
             in
             the
             Shade
             as
             in
             the
             Sun.
             These
             Needles
             ar
             not
             the
             Exhalation
             or
             Vapour
             that
             uses
             in
             cold
             Weather
             ,
             to
             stick
             to
             the
             Hair
             of
             Men
             and
             Beasts
             .
             I
             must
             not
             forget
             ,
             that
             we
             see
             in
             these
             falling
             Needles
             a
             Bow
             like
             a
             Rain-bow
             of
             two
             colours
             ,
             white
             and
             a
             pale
             yellow
             ,
             like
             the
             Sun
             ,
             reflected
             by
             the
             dark
             Shadows
             of
             the
             Clouds
             .
          
           
             After
             this
             I
             proceed
             to
             the
             Description
             of
             an
             other
             Bow
             ,
             which
             I
             call
             a
             Sea-bow
             .
             This
             is
             seen
             when
             the
             Sun
             shines
             clear
             and
             bright
             ,
             not
             in
             the
             great
             Waves
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             Atmosphere
             of
             the
             Sea-water
             ,
             which
             the
             Wind
             blows
             up
             ,
             and
             which
             looks
             like
             a
             Fog
             Commonly
             we
             see
             this
             before
             the
             Ship
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             also
             behind
             to
             the
             Lee-ward
             (
             so
             they
             call
             that
             side
             of
             the
             Ship
             towards
             the
             Sea
             )
             over-against
             the
             Sun
             ,
             where
             the
             Shadow
             of
             the
             Sail
             falleth
             .
             It
             is
             not
             the
             Shadow
             of
             the
             Sail
             ,
             but
             a
             Bow
             sheweth
             it self
             in
             the
             Shadow
             of
             the
             Sail.
             We
             see
             this
             pleasant
             reflexion
             ,
             in
             the
             small
             drops
             of
             the
             Salt-water
             of
             several
             colours
             ,
             like
             the
             Rain-bows
             in
             the
             Skies
             ,
             that
             are
             seen
             over-against
             the
             dark
             Clouds
             .
          
           
           
             This
             brings
             to
             my
             Mind
             another
             Phanomenon
             ,
             viz.
             that
             in
             the
             Clouds
             near
             the
             Sum
             ,
             a
             very
             bright
             Light
             is
             seen
             ,
             like
             a
             Parelion
             or
             Mock-sun
             .
             These
             Lights
             are
             called
             Weather-galls
             by
             the
             Sea-men
             .
          
           
             This
             bright
             Light
             we
             find
             in
             the
             lower-most
             Air
             ,
             in
             the
             dark
             shady
             Clouds
             ,
             that
             are
             not
             unlike
             to
             a
             Cloud
             of
             Rain
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             full
             of
             drops
             ,
             wherein
             the
             Sun
             is
             represented
             ,
             as
             things
             are
             in
             a
             Looking-glass
             .
          
           
             This
             clearness
             of
             the
             Sun
             causeth
             a
             Heat
             ,
             which
             drives
             from
             it
             a
             Rain-bow
             ,
             figured
             by
             the
             Sun
             ,
             which
             Bow
             are
             the
             Drops
             that
             by
             the
             Heat
             of
             the
             Sun
             are
             changed
             into
             a
             Vapour
             or
             Fog
             ,
             and
             this
             Vapour
             shews
             like
             smoak
             in
             the
             Air
             ,
             when
             the
             Cold
             remits
             ,
             wherein
             these
             Colours
             are
             no
             more
             seen
             .
          
           
             But
             in
             these
             raised
             Drops
             as
             aforesaid
             ,
             the
             Sun
             represents
             it self
             ,
             and
             causeth
             these
             Colours
             ,
             which
             are
             truly
             distinct
             ,
             and
             represent
             Blew
             ,
             Yellow
             and
             Red
             ;
             which
             are
             the
             three
             primary
             Colours
             of
             the
             Bow.
             
          
           
             Concerning
             the
             bigness
             thereof
             ,
             I
             did
             considered
             and
             minded
             the
             Bow
             that
             I
             saw
             in
             Spitzbergen
             ,
             and
             found
             that
             it
             moved
             about
             with
             the
             Sun
             by
             Day
             and
             by
             Night
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             appeared
             much
             bigger
             in
             the
             Morning
             ,
             Evening
             ,
             and
             at
             Night
             ,
             than
             in
             the
             Day-time
             .
          
           
             I
             will
             not
             mention
             the
             Whirlwinds
             which
             are
             unknown
             in
             these
             cold
             Countries
             ;
             that
             used
             to
             take
             up
             the
             Water
             into
             the
             Air
             :
             But
             yet
             I
             will
             not
             omit
             the
             small
             Whirlwinds
             ,
             that
             proceed
             from
             the
             high
             Mountains
             ,
             from
             whence
             the
             Wind
             recoils
             ,
             and
             so
             turneth
             round
             about
             .
          
           
           
           
             We
             see
             farther
             in
             Spitzbergen
             ,
             that
             the
             Sea
             as
             well
             as
             the
             other
             Waters
             ,
             sends
             forth
             a
             Vapour
             ,
             when
             the
             Clold
             encreases
             ,
             which
             Vapour
             is
             turned
             into
             Rain
             in
             the
             Air
             ,
             or
             into
             Snow
             ,
             and
             it
             smelleth
             like
             a
             Fog
             or
             steaming
             Water
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             likewise
             an
             Observation
             there
             ,
             that
             when
             we
             see
             great
             Vapours
             or
             Fogs
             in
             the
             Air
             ,
             and
             that
             such
             a
             Vapour
             riseth
             almost
             every
             moment
             in
             a
             clear
             Sun-shiny
             Day
             ,
             without
             Wind
             or
             other
             Causes
             ,
             the
             cold
             Weather
             is
             about
             to
             remit
             :
             But
             when
             the
             Air
             is
             overburdened
             by
             these
             Vapours
             ,
             the
             Couds
             are
             dissipated
             ,
             and
             they
             last
             a
             great
             while
             with
             constant
             Wind.
             Such
             Vapours
             as
             we
             see
             in
             the
             Air
             ,
             stick
             to
             our
             Cloaths
             and
             Hair
             like
             Sweat.
             
          
           
             Out
             of
             these
             small
             vaporous
             Drops
             the
             Snow
             is
             first
             generated
             :
             First
             of
             all
             you
             see
             a
             small
             Drop
             ,
             as
             big
             as
             a
             single
             Sand
             in
             the
             Plate
             E
             marked
             with
             A.
             This
             is
             augmented
             or
             encreased
             by
             the
             Fog
             ,
             until
             it
             cometh
             to
             be
             like
             unto
             a
             Shield
             or
             Plate
             with
             six
             corners
             as
             clear
             and
             transparent
             as
             Glass
             ,
             to
             these
             six
             corners
             sticks
             the
             Fog
             like
             Drops
             ,
             as
             B.
             then
             it
             freezes
             and
             splits
             asunder
             ,
             so
             that
             you
             see
             the
             Figure
             of
             a
             Star
             ,
             as
             C.
             which
             yet
             is
             still
             frozen
             together
             ;
             until
             in
             time
             it
             is
             quite
             parted
             or
             divided
             asunder
             one
             from
             the
             other
             ,
             and
             then
             you
             see
             a
             Star
             with
             six
             Points
             ,
             as
             D.
             which
             Points
             are
             not
             yet
             quite
             frozen
             ,
             because
             there
             are
             still
             hanging
             some
             wet
             drops
             between
             the
             Points
             ;
             until
             at
             length
             it
             assumes
             the
             perfect
             Form
             of
             a
             Star
             ,
             with
             Points
             serrated
             at
             the
             sides
             ,
             like
             Ferne
             ,
             on
             the
             Points
             whereof
             still
             hand
             some
             Drops
             ,
             as
             you
             see
             at
             E
             ,
             which
             are
             lost
             ,
             and
             so
             it
             is
             turned
             into
             an
             exact
             and
             perfect
             
             Star
             :
             And
             this
             is
             the
             Formation
             of
             the
             snowy
             Star
             ,
             which
             is
             seen
             in
             the
             severest
             Frost
             so
             long
             until
             at
             last
             it
             loseth
             all
             its
             Points
             .
             See
             F.
             as
             to
             the
             many
             sorts
             of
             Snow
             that
             fall
             in
             Spitzbergen
             ,
             and
             in
             what
             Weather
             I
             have
             made
             these
             following
             Observations
             and
             Distinctions
             ,
             Number
             1.
             in
             the
             Plate
             of
             E.
             sheweth
             the
             Snow
             that
             falleth
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             tolerable
             cold
             and
             rainy
             withal
             ,
             then
             it
             falls
             like
             unto
             small
             Roses
             ,
             Needles
             and
             small
             Corns
             .
             When
             the
             cold
             Weather
             doth
             remit
             the
             Snow
             falleth
             like
             Stars
             ,
             with
             many
             points
             like
             the
             Leaves
             of
             Ferne.
             Plate
             E.
             Numb
             .
             2.
             
             If
             it
             be
             only
             a
             Fog
             at
             last
             ,
             and
             it
             snoweth
             much
             ,
             it
             looketh
             as
             you
             see
             Numb
             .
             3.
             
             If
             it
             is
             very
             cold
             and
             windy
             like
             Numb
             .
             4.
             
             When
             it
             is
             very
             cold
             and
             not
             windy
             withal
             ,
             the
             Snow
             falleth
             like
             unto
             Stars
             in
             a
             cluster
             ,
             because
             the
             Wind
             cannot
             blow
             them
             asunder
             ,
             like
             Numb
             .
             5.
             
             When
             the
             Wind
             was
             North-West
             ,
             or
             the
             Skies
             were
             thick
             of
             Clouds
             ,
             and
             it
             was
             stormy
             withal
             ,
             there
             fell
             Hail
             that
             was
             round
             and
             oblong
             all
             over
             full
             of
             Prickles
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             same
             bigness
             as
             you
             see
             it
             as
             Number
             6.
             
          
           
             There
             is
             many
             more
             sorts
             of
             starry
             Snow
             to
             be
             seen
             ,
             with
             more
             Points
             ,
             and
             some
             like
             unto
             a
             Heart
             ,
             but
             they
             are
             all
             generated
             after
             the
             same
             manner
             ,
             by
             the
             Eastern
             and
             Northern
             Winds
             .
             The
             needly
             Snow
             is
             generated
             by
             Westerly
             and
             Southerly
             Winds
             :
             If
             the
             Snow
             is
             not
             dispersed
             by
             the
             Wind
             ,
             it
             falleth
             down
             in
             cl
             ;
             usters
          
           
             But
             when
             the
             Wind
             driveth
             it
             ,
             Stars
             ,
             or
             Needles
             only
             fall
             ,
             every
             piece
             by
             it self
             ,
             like
             the
             Atoms
             in
             the
             Sun.
             
          
           
           
             Thus
             much
             have
             I
             observed
             hitherto
             of
             the
             Snow
             ,
             and
             find
             that
             also
             when
             it
             is
             cold
             and
             a
             North
             Wind
             blows
             ,
             all
             sorts
             of
             Snow
             ,
             both
             starry
             and
             of
             other
             shapes
             ,
             fall
             as
             well
             in
             these
             Countries
             as
             in
             Spitzbergen
             .
          
           
             The
             End
             of
             the
             Second
             Part.
             
          
        
      
       
         
         
           THE
           THIRD
           PART
           OF
           THE
           VOYAGE
           TO
           SPITZBERGEN
           .
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             I.
             
          
           
             Of
             the
             Plants
             of
             Spitzbergen
             .
          
           
             GEnerally
             the
             Figures
             of
             the
             Plants
             I
             here
             present
             you
             with
             were
             all
             drawn
             by
             the
             Life
             upon
             the
             place
             when
             they
             were
             fresh
             ,
             and
             of
             their
             natural
             size
             ,
             except
             the
             Rock-plant
             with
             but
             one
             Leaf
             ,
             and
             the
             Plant
             like
             Horse-Tail
             ,
             that
             stands
             by
             it
             ,
             which
             because
             of
             their
             largeness
             could
             not
             be
             well
             drawn
             so
             big
             at
             
             the
             Life
             .
             All
             the
             Herbs
             and
             the
             Mosses
             grow
             upon
             the
             Grit
             and
             Sand
             of
             the
             Stones
             ,
             where
             the
             Water
             falleth
             down
             ,
             and
             on
             that
             side
             of
             the
             Hill
             which
             the
             East
             and
             North
             Winds
             cannot
             easily
             come
             at
             .
             The
             Plants
             owe
             much
             of
             their
             growth
             to
             the
             Dung
             of
             the
             Birds
             .
          
           
             There
             were
             a
             great
             many
             small
             Herbs
             ,
             which
             for
             want
             of
             time
             I
             could
             not
             delineate
             ,
             but
             I
             purpose
             to
             do
             it
             hereafter
             ,
             if
             God
             b●esseth
             me
             with
             Life
             and
             Health
             ,
             when
             I
             make
             my
             second
             Voyage
             thither
             .
          
           
             I
             omitted
             the
             white
             Poppy
             ,
             whereof
             we
             stuck
             the
             Flowers
             in
             our
             Hats
             ;
             the
             whole
             Plant
             was
             but
             about
             a
             Span
             long
             .
          
           
             Besides
             I
             have
             not
             mentioned
             the
             
               Red
               Sorrel
            
             ,
             I
             mean
             that
             which
             was
             shewed
             to
             me
             at
             Bremen
             by
             the
             Dutch
             Gardener
             ,
             which
             was
             of
             the
             same
             size
             ,
             but
             the
             Leaves
             of
             that
             of
             Spitzbergen
             are
             Red.
             
          
           
             I
             desire
             the
             courteous
             Reader
             to
             accept
             at
             present
             of
             these
             for
             a
             Sample
             ,
             to
             shew
             him
             that
             on
             these
             rough
             ,
             barren
             and
             cold
             Mountains
             ,
             there
             yet
             grow
             some
             Plants
             ,
             for
             the
             Nourishment
             both
             of
             Man
             and
             Beast
             .
             The
             Herbs
             grow
             of
             their
             perfection
             in
             a
             short
             time
             ,
             for
             in
             June
             ,
             when
             we
             first
             arrived
             at
             Spitzbergen
             ,
             we
             saw
             but
             very
             little
             Green
             ,
             and
             yet
             in
             July
             most
             of
             them
             were
             in
             flower
             ,
             and
             some
             of
             them
             had
             their
             Seeds
             already
             ripe
             ,
             whence
             me
             may
             observe
             the
             length
             of
             their
             Summer
             .
          
           
             I
             proceed
             to
             the
             Description
             of
             those
             Plants
             ,
             which
             I
             had
             time
             to
             delineate
             ,
             and
             begin
             with
             those
             ,
             that
             put
             forth
             their
             Leaves
             only
             at
             ,
             and
             about
             their
             Roots
             ,
             and
             have
             but
             few
             or
             no
             Leaves
             on
             their
             Stalks
             .
          
           
           
             Then
             shall
             follow
             those
             that
             have
             single
             Leaves
             on
             their
             Stalks
             ;
             then
             those
             that
             have
             pairs
             of
             Leaves
             or
             opposite
             ones
             ,
             afterward
             those
             with
             three
             Leaves
             ,
             and
             then
             conclude
             with
             the
             imperfect
             Plants
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             II.
             
          
           
             Of
             a
             Plant
             with
             Aloe-Leaves
             .
          
           
             IT
             is
             a
             very
             pretty
             Herb
             ,
             and
             puts
             forth
             thick
             ,
             prickly
             and
             sad
             green
             Leaves
             like
             those
             of
             Aloes
             ,
             a
             brown
             naked
             Stalk
             ,
             about
             half
             the
             length
             of
             your
             Finger
             ,
             whereon
             hang
             round
             Heads
             of
             Flesh-coloured
             Flowers
             in
             Bunches
             ,
             which
             are
             hardly
             to
             be
             discerned
             by
             the
             naked
             Eye
             ,
             one
             Flower
             close
             above
             another
             ,
             and
             near
             to
             one
             another
             Tab.
             G.
             marked
             with
             a.
             
          
           
             Sometimes
             two
             Stalks
             shook
             out
             of
             one
             Plant
             ,
             one
             bigger
             that
             the
             other
             .
             Yet
             each
             Stalk
             has
             two
             of
             these
             Bunches
             of
             Flowers
             .
          
           
             I
             could
             not
             delineate
             its
             Seed
             for
             want
             of
             time
             .
             The
             Root
             consists
             of
             many
             small
             Fibers
             .
          
           
             We
             gathered
             it
             in
             great
             plenty
             on
             the
             17
             th
             .
             of
             July
             ,
             behind
             the
             Cookery
             of
             Harlem
             ,
             in
             the
             running
             Water
             .
          
           
             I
             know
             not
             well
             ,
             to
             what
             kind
             this
             may
             be
             referred
             .
             
               Caspar
               Bauhim
            
             maketh
             mention
             of
             an
             Herb
             in
             his
             Prodromus
             of
             his
             Amphitheater
             of
             Plants
             in
             the
             5
             th
             .
             Book
             and
             15
             th
             .
             Chapter
             ,
             which
             he
             calls
             
               Limonium
               Maritimum
            
             ,
             which
             he
             describeth
             
             with
             small
             ,
             roundish
             and
             thick
             Leaves
             ,
             like
             House-leek
             ,
             between
             which
             spread
             forth
             small
             Stalks
             with
             pale
             red
             Flowers
             ;
             but
             the
             Root
             doth
             not
             agree
             with
             our
             Plant
             ,
             for
             his
             is
             long
             ,
             red
             and
             parted
             at
             top
             ,
             whereas
             this
             Root
             consists
             in
             many
             small
             Fibers
             ,
             and
             is
             not
             red
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             III.
             
          
           
             Of
             small
             House-leek
             .
          
           
             THE
             Leaves
             of
             this
             are
             indented
             and
             very
             like
             those
             of
             our
             Dasies
             ,
             for
             which
             I
             should
             have
             taken
             it
             also
             ,
             had
             not
             it
             been
             for
             the
             Flower
             ,
             only
             the
             Leaves
             are
             thicker
             and
             more
             juicy
             ,
             like
             those
             of
             House-leek
             ,
             or
             ,
             as
             we
             call
             it
             ,
             those
             of
             the
             lesser
             House-leek
             :
             The
             Leaves
             grow
             round
             about
             the
             Root
             ,
             betwixt
             them
             is
             a
             small
             Stalk
             of
             the
             length
             of
             your
             little
             Finger
             ,
             which
             is
             round
             and
             hairy
             ,
             and
             generally
             without
             Leaves
             ,
             save
             only
             where
             it
             divides
             into
             another
             Stalk
             ,
             at
             which
             place
             is
             a
             small
             Leaf
             .
          
           
             The
             Flowers
             grow
             in
             scaley
             Heads
             (
             like
             unto
             the
             Flowers
             of
             Stohceas
             )
             are
             of
             a
             brown
             colour
             ,
             and
             have
             five
             pointed
             Leaves
             ,
             as
             I
             think
             with
             five
             small
             Chives
             within
             ,
             like
             unto
             the
             Flowers
             of
             Wall-pepper
             or
             Stone-crop
             .
             I
             found
             only
             the
             Flowers
             ,
             for
             the
             Seed
             was
             not
             yet
             ripe
             .
             The
             Root
             is
             somewhat
             thick
             and
             strait
             ,
             with
             many
             strong
             and
             thick
             Fibers
             from
             the
             sides
             of
             it
             ;
             it
             may
             be
             referred
             to
             the
             House-leeks
             ,
             
             and
             called
             small
             indented
             or
             crenated
             House-leek
             ,
             with
             scaly
             Heads
             .
          
           
             This
             Plant
             I
             found
             in
             the
             Danish
             Harbour
             or
             Bay
             on
             the
             18
             th
             .
             of
             July
             ,
             it
             is
             figured
             in
             Tab.
             F.
             at
             a.
             
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             IV.
             
          
           
             Of
             Crows-foot
             .
          
           
             SOme
             of
             these
             Plants
             are
             figured
             in
             the
             Tab.
             G
             at
             c
             and
             e
             ,
             and
             the
             Tab.
             H
             at
             c
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Tab.
             I
             at
             d.
             
          
           
             These
             four
             following
             Plants
             are
             all
             Crows-feet
             ,
             only
             distinguished
             by
             their
             Leaves
             .
          
           
           
           
           
             The
             Roots
             are
             differing
             ,
             that
             of
             the
             first
             hath
             many
             small
             Fibers
             ,
             and
             the
             fourth
             hath
             a
             thicker
             and
             longer
             ,
             with
             tender
             and
             small
             Fibers
             .
             The
             first
             burns
             the
             Tongue
             like
             Persicaria
             or
             Flea-bean
             ,
             but
             somewhat
             less
             than
             in
             our
             Countries
             .
             The
             Leaves
             of
             the
             fourth
             do
             not
             burn
             so
             .
          
           
             I
             found
             them
             both
             in
             the
             Danish
             Haven
             ,
             the
             first
             in
             great
             quantities
             ;
             they
             flower
             in
             July
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             hath
             somewhat
             differing
             Leaves
             from
             the
             two
             former
             ,
             for
             although
             the
             lowermost
             Leaves
             agree
             with
             them
             of
             the
             first
             ,
             yet
             they
             are
             less
             ,
             and
             those
             that
             grow
             higher
             ,
             and
             come
             up
             after
             the
             lowermost
             ,
             are
             in
             two
             places
             deeper
             cut
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             first
             part
             of
             the
             Leaf
             that
             stands
             out
             before
             ,
             is
             not
             very
             unlike
             a
             Tongue
             ,
             but
             the
             two
             sides
             are
             but
             a
             little
             indented
             in
             Table
             G
             it
             is
             marked
             with
             e.
             
          
           
             There
             is
             also
             a
             difference
             in
             the
             Leaves
             of
             this
             Plant
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             in
             the
             two
             before
             mentioned
             ,
             for
             the
             Leaves
             that
             are
             nearest
             to
             the
             Flowers
             are
             small
             and
             deeply
             cut
             ,
             and
             that
             with
             two
             incisions
             ,
             and
             it
             burns
             the
             Tongue
             .
             The
             Flower
             is
             small
             ,
             and
             hath
             six
             and
             sometimes
             seven
             Leaves
             .
             The
             Seed-vessel
             is
             like
             unto
             the
             former
             ,
             only
             it
             is
             less
             .
             The
             Root
             is
             like
             that
             of
             the
             first
             ,
             only
             it
             hath
             more
             Fibers
             ;
             there
             is
             also
             a
             kind
             of
             thick
             sheath
             that
             surroundeth
             the
             Stalk
             ,
             as
             is
             also
             to
             be
             seen
             in
             the
             fourth
             .
             I
             found
             this
             Plant
             near
             the
             first
             ,
             in
             the
             Danish
             Haven
             the
             16
             th
             .
             of
             July
             .
             The
             third
             is
             yet
             smaller
             ,
             but
             fuller
             of
             Leaves
             ,
             only
             
             they
             are
             less
             ,
             and
             not
             so
             deep
             cut
             ,
             although
             they
             have
             also
             four
             Incisions
             like
             the
             second
             ,
             in
             this
             I
             did
             not
             find
             that
             difference
             in
             the
             Leaves
             ,
             between
             the
             lowermost
             and
             those
             that
             are
             nearer
             the
             Flower
             ,
             it
             is
             in
             the
             Tab.
             H
             marked
             with
             c.
             The
             Flower
             is
             of
             five
             white
             Leaves
             ,
             its
             Seed-vessel
             I
             could
             not
             yet
             see
             .
             Its
             Roots
             are
             small
             Fibers
             ,
             I
             found
             it
             in
             the
             
               South
               Haven
            
             on
             the
             Sixteenth
             of
             July
             ;
             it
             burns
             the
             Tongue
             ,
             the
             Leaves
             are
             thick
             and
             juicy
             .
          
           
             I
             found
             in
             the
             same
             place
             another
             small
             Plant
             ,
             exactly
             like
             to
             these
             ,
             only
             the
             Flowers
             thereof
             were
             of
             a
             purple
             Colour
             ,
             and
             the
             Leaves
             not
             so
             juicy
             ;
             wherefore
             I
             did
             not
             draw
             it
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             V.
             
          
           
             Of
             Scurvy-grass
             .
          
           
             THis
             Scurvy-grass
             sends
             forth
             a
             great
             many
             Leaves
             from
             one
             Root
             ,
             that
             spread
             themselves
             round
             about
             it
             upon
             the
             Ground
             .
             The
             Stalk
             grows
             out
             of
             the
             middle
             of
             these
             Leaves
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             great
             deal
             lower
             than
             in
             our
             Country
             ,
             with
             a
             few
             Leaves
             underneath
             the
             Sprouts
             .
             The
             Flowers
             are
             of
             four
             white
             Leaves
             ,
             they
             grow
             many
             on
             the
             same
             Stalk
             one
             above
             the
             other
             ,
             when
             one
             Flower
             fades
             ,
             another
             cometh
             in
             its
             room
             when
             the
             Flower
             is
             past
             ;
             the
             Seed
             appears
             in
             a
             longish
             Box
             ,
             as
             you
             may
             see
             in
             
             the
             Figure
             ;
             when
             on
             the
             contrary
             in
             ours
             the
             Seed
             is
             found
             in
             a
             round
             one
             .
             The
             Root
             is
             white
             ,
             somewhat
             thick
             and
             streight
             ,
             with
             some
             small
             Fibers
             below
             .
          
           
             A
             great
             quantity
             of
             this
             Plant
             is
             found
             on
             the
             Rocks
             ,
             where
             they
             are
             not
             much
             exposed
             to
             the
             East
             and
             North
             Winds
             ;
             I
             found
             it
             most
             in
             the
             
               South
               ,
               English
            
             ,
             and
             
               Danish
               Havens
            
             ,
             the
             Earth
             was
             quite
             covered
             with
             it
             in
             the
             Danish
             .
          
           
             It
             was
             the
             first
             Herb
             I
             found
             in
             Spitzbergen
             ,
             when
             we
             Landed
             the
             first
             time
             ,
             it
             was
             so
             small
             that
             I
             could
             hardly
             discern
             it
             to
             be
             Scurvy-grass
             ,
             but
             afterwards
             we
             found
             it
             in
             its
             full
             perfection
             ,
             and
             it
             seeded
             in
             the
             Month
             of
             July
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             observable
             ,
             that
             the
             Leaves
             of
             this
             Herb
             have
             but
             little
             sharpness
             at
             Spitzbergen
             ,
             and
             therefore
             it
             is
             much
             weaker
             than
             the
             Scurvy-grass
             of
             our
             Countries
             ,
             so
             that
             we
             eat
             it
             instead
             of
             Salads
             in
             Spitzbergen
             ,
             which
             we
             could
             not
             do
             our
             Scurvy-grass
             .
          
           
             My
             Figure
             is
             like
             that
             cut
             ,
             given
             in
             the
             Third
             Book
             ,
             and
             the
             35
             th
             .
             Chapter
             of
             the
             
               German
               Herbal
            
             of
             Matthiolus
             .
             See
             Tab.
             H
             at
             a.
             
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             VI.
             
          
           
             Of
             an
             Herb
             like
             Stone-crap
             .
          
           
             THis
             Plant
             is
             doubtless
             a
             kind
             of
             a
             Stone-crop
             ,
             but
             the
             Leaves
             are
             rough
             or
             hairy
             ,
             not
             so
             thick
             ,
             nor
             so
             juicy
             as
             ours
             are
             ,
             neither
             doth
             it
             burn
             or
             bite
             ,
             like
             unto
             ours
             .
          
           
             Before
             the
             Flower
             fully
             appears
             ,
             it
             looks
             like
             unto
             that
             of
             Esula
             ;
             but
             when
             it
             is
             quite
             blown
             and
             opened
             ,
             it
             is
             of
             a
             purple
             Colour
             ,
             and
             hath
             sometimes
             five
             ,
             sometimes
             six
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             I
             have
             seen
             nine
             Leaves
             ,
             the
             Stamina
             of
             the
             Flower
             I
             did
             not
             tell
             ,
             neither
             did
             I
             ever
             see
             the
             Seeds
             thereof
             .
             The
             Root
             thereof
             is
             very
             small
             ,
             and
             one
             Plant
             grows
             close
             to
             the
             other
             .
             We
             found
             this
             Herb
             on
             the
             low
             Lands
             of
             the
             English
             Haven
             .
             Afterwards
             we
             found
             abundance
             of
             it
             amongst
             the
             Mosses
             on
             the
             26
             th
             .
             of
             June
             .
             In
             the
             Tab.
             F.
             it
             is
             marked
             with
             c
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Tab.
             I.
             with
             a.
             
          
           
        
         
           
           
           
             CHAP.
             VII
             .
          
           
             Of
             a
             Snake-weed
             .
          
           
             THis
             is
             small
             Snake-weed
             ,
             and
             is
             found
             very
             rarely
             in
             Spitzbergen
             ;
             the
             undermost
             Leaves
             of
             this
             Plant
             are
             the
             biggest
             ,
             but
             they
             are
             not
             above
             the
             bredth
             of
             ones
             Nail
             ,
             they
             grow
             singly
             on
             the
             Stalk
             ,
             yet
             not
             above
             three
             of
             them
             ,
             except
             the
             lowermost
             :
             the
             nearer
             the
             Flower
             ,
             the
             smaller
             they
             are
             ;
             they
             have
             within
             ,
             not
             far
             from
             the
             edge
             many
             small
             knobs
             or
             spots
             answering
             to
             the
             points
             of
             the
             Leaves
             ,
             wherein
             the
             Veins
             or
             Nerves
             are
             terminated
             ,
             besides
             the
             Leaves
             are
             not
             quite
             plain
             ,
             but
             somewhat
             rumpled
             at
             the
             brims
             .
             Out
             of
             the
             Root
             sprouts
             forth
             sometimes
             single
             and
             sometimes
             double
             Stalks
             ,
             as
             you
             may
             see
             in
             the
             Cut
             ,
             and
             this
             by-stalk
             is
             always
             somewhat
             lower
             than
             the
             chief
             Stalk
             .
          
           
             The
             Flower
             grows
             in
             a
             close
             Spike
             ,
             with
             many
             small
             Flesh-coloured
             Flowers
             ,
             it
             was
             so
             smal
             ,
             that
             I
             forgot
             to
             tell
             the
             Leaves
             thereof
             :
             The
             Seeds
             were
             not
             then
             come
             to
             maturity
             .
          
           
             The
             Root
             sheweth
             of
             what
             kind
             the
             Plant
             is
             ,
             and
             wherefore
             it
             may
             be
             called
             Bistorta
             or
             Snake-weed
             ,
             for
             it
             lieth
             twisted
             in
             the
             Ground
             ,
             it
             is
             about
             the
             thickness
             of
             your
             little
             Finger
             where
             thickest
             ,
             hath
             small
             Fibers
             ,
             is
             brown
             without
             ,
             and
             Flesh-coloured
             within
             ,
             and
             of
             an
             astringent
             Taste
             .
          
           
           
             I
             found
             this
             Herb
             in
             the
             
               Danish
               Harbour
            
             ,
             on
             the
             18
             th
             .
             of
             July
             .
             My
             Figure
             agrees
             most
             with
             that
             which
             Camerarius
             hath
             given
             in
             the
             Fourth
             Book
             and
             Third
             Chapter
             of
             Matthiolus
             ,
             it
             s
             marked
             with
             a
             in
             the
             Tab.
             I.
             
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             VIII
             .
          
           
             Of
             an
             Herb
             like
             unto
             Mouse-ear
             .
          
           
             THis
             Herb
             bringeth
             forth
             smooth
             edged
             Leaves
             by
             pares
             ,
             they
             are
             rough
             and
             like
             Mouse-ear
             .
          
           
             The
             Stalks
             are
             smooth
             at
             their
             first
             putting
             out
             ,
             but
             afterwards
             they
             grow
             rough
             ,
             where
             the
             uppermost
             Leaves
             grow
             ,
             they
             are
             roundish
             at
             the
             bottom
             .
          
           
             At
             the
             end
             of
             the
             Stalk
             groweth
             a
             white
             Flower
             ,
             out
             of
             its
             Perianthium
             ,
             the
             number
             of
             its
             Leaves
             I
             did
             not
             tell
             ,
             nor
             had
             I
             time
             enough
             to
             observe
             the
             Seed
             .
             The
             Root
             is
             round
             and
             slender
             ,
             with
             small
             and
             tender
             Fibers
             .
          
           
             It
             seemeth
             ,
             this
             Plant
             should
             belong
             unto
             the
             hairy
             or
             rough
             Alsine
             ,
             and
             perhaps
             it
             may
             be
             the
             third
             or
             fourth
             kind
             of
             the
             hairy
             Alsine
             ,
             of
             Dodoneus
             in
             the
             Fifth
             Book
             the
             Tenth
             Chapter
             of
             his
             first
             
               Latin
               Herbal
            
             ,
             if
             the
             Leaves
             of
             his
             were
             not
             cut
             ,
             as
             these
             are
             not
             .
             I
             gathered
             this
             Plant
             in
             the
             
               South
               Haven
            
             ,
             on
             the
             17
             th
             .
             of
             July
             .
             See
             d
             in
             Tab.
             G.
             
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             IX
             .
          
           
             Of
             a
             Plant
             like
             unto
             Periwinkle
             .
          
           
             THis
             Plant
             runneth
             upon
             the
             Ground
             ,
             and
             bringeth
             forth
             roundish
             Leaves
             by
             pairs
             on
             creeping
             Stalks
             .
          
           
             The
             Leaves
             as
             I
             think
             are
             like
             those
             of
             Periwinkle
             ,
             but
             they
             are
             somewhat
             rounder
             ,
             and
             the
             largest
             of
             them
             are
             bent
             in
             before
             .
             The
             Stalk
             is
             somewhat
             knotty
             and
             woody
             .
          
           
             The
             Flower
             appeareth
             at
             first
             ,
             wrapt
             up
             like
             a
             Leaf
             ,
             but
             after
             it
             is
             grown
             out
             a
             little
             more
             ,
             one
             may
             see
             it
             to
             be
             a
             Flower
             ,
             it
             grows
             out
             between
             the
             Leaves
             on
             the
             same
             Stalks
             .
          
           
             The
             colour
             and
             shape
             of
             these
             Flowers
             ,
             I
             could
             not
             at
             that
             time
             observe
             ,
             because
             they
             were
             not
             yet
             blown
             ,
             much
             less
             could
             I
             gather
             the
             Seed
             .
          
           
             The
             Root
             is
             long
             ,
             slender
             ,
             round
             ,
             woody
             and
             knotty
             ,
             it
             hath
             small
             branched
             Fibers
             at
             the
             bottom
             :
             I
             found
             it
             in
             the
             
               South
               Bay
            
             ,
             behind
             the
             Cookery
             of
             Harlem
             on
             the
             19
             th
             .
             of
             June
             ,
             and
             17
             th
             .
             of
             July
             .
          
           
             Since
             I
             neither
             saw
             the
             Flower
             nor
             Seeds
             ,
             and
             in
             probability
             ,
             it
             would
             have
             put
             forth
             more
             Leaves
             ;
             I
             cannot
             determine
             ,
             whether
             it
             be
             the
             
               Pyrola
               minima
            
             ,
             whereof
             Clasius
             giveth
             us
             a
             Cutt
             and
             Description
             in
             the
             Fifth
             Book
             of
             his
             rare
             Plants
             ,
             in
             the
             20.
             
             Chapter
             ;
             or
             whether
             is
             may
             be
             
               Pseudochamae
               buxus
            
             of
             the
             
               Hortus
               Eichstetensis
            
             ,
             
             which
             is
             given
             by
             Clusius
             ,
             in
             the
             72
             th
             .
             Chapter
             of
             the
             before-mentioned
             Book
             ,
             by
             the
             Name
             of
             
               Anonymos
               Coluteae
               flore
            
             ,
             and
             accurately
             described
             ,
             and
             Camerarius
             in
             his
             Hortus
             ,
             giveth
             it
             us
             under
             the
             Name
             of
             
               Anonymos
               Pervincae
               folio
            
             .
             In
             the
             Tab.
             G.
             it
             is
             marked
             with
             b.
             
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             X.
             
          
           
             Of
             an
             Herb
             like
             a
             Strawberry
             .
          
           
             THis
             agreeth
             in
             its
             Leaves
             with
             the
             Strawberry
             ,
             for
             it
             hath
             three
             cut
             Leaves
             on
             the
             end
             of
             the
             Stalks
             ,
             and
             its
             Flower
             ,
             hath
             commonly
             fives
             Leaves
             (
             seldom
             but
             four
             )
             and
             is
             like
             a
             Strawberry
             Flower
             the
             Stalks
             are
             round
             and
             rough
             ,
             and
             so
             are
             the
             Leaves
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             Stalks
             you
             see
             two
             Leaves
             one
             against
             the
             other
             of
             a
             differing
             figure
             and
             bigness
             ,
             for
             one
             looketh
             like
             a
             Hand
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             like
             a
             Finger
             ,
             the
             size
             also
             is
             different
             ,
             for
             some
             have
             but
             three
             Fingers
             ,
             and
             others
             have
             more
             .
          
           
             The
             Flower
             is
             yellow
             ,
             the
             Leaves
             of
             the
             Flowers
             ar
             roundish
             ,
             how
             many
             ,
             I
             observed
             not
             :
             The
             Root
             is
             woody
             ,
             somewhat
             thick
             with
             small
             Fibres
             ,
             a
             little
             scaley
             at
             the
             top
             ,
             it
             tastes
             dry
             and
             astringent
             like
             Tormentill
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             Herbals
             I
             could
             find
             none
             liker
             it
             ,
             than
             that
             which
             Lobelius
             calleth
             
               Fragaria
               Sylvestris
               minime
               Vesca
               sive
               sterilis
               ,
            
             and
             in
             the
             universal
             Iferdumish
             Herbal
             ,
             in
             the
             70
             th
             .
             Chapter
             of
             the
             17
             th
             .
             Book
             ,
             by
             the
             Name
             of
             
               Fragaria
               non
               fragisera
               vel
               non
               vesca
               ,
            
             yet
             it
             differs
             in
             the
             Flower
             and
             Leaf
             ;
             for
             the
             Leaves
             in
             my
             Plant
             are
             cut
             deeper
             ,
             and
             the
             Flower
             of
             his
             is
             white
             .
             In
             Tab.
             H.
             it
             is
             marked
             with
             b.
             
          
        
      
       
         
         
           THE
           FOURTH
           PART
           OF
           THE
           VOYAGE
           TO
           SPITZBERGEN
           ,
           OF
           THE
           ANIMALS
           OF
           Spitzbergen
           .
        
         
           
             The
             PREFACE
             of
             the
             Animals
             ,
             but
             chiefly
             of
             the
             Birds
             in
             general
             .
          
           
             THE
             Animals
             of
             Spitzbergen
             here
             described
             ,
             are
             either
             those
             with
             two
             or
             with
             four
             Legs
             .
          
           
             About
             Spitzbergen
             also
             are
             some
             Creatures
             that
             live
             only
             in
             the
             Water
             ,
             and
             have
             no
             Legs
             (
             except
             one
             would
             take
             their
             Fins
             ,
             that
             are
             about
             their
             
             Breast
             for
             Legs
             ,
             because
             as
             hereafter
             shall
             be
             shewn
             ,
             their
             Fins
             are
             jointed
             like
             Legs
             underneath
             the
             Skin
             .
             )
             Some
             live
             in
             the
             Water
             ,
             and
             also
             upon
             the
             Ice
             and
             Land
             ,
             and
             have
             either
             two
             or
             four
             Legs
             .
          
           
             We
             will
             begin
             with
             them
             that
             have
             two
             Legs
             ,
             or
             with
             the
             Birds
             whereof
             the
             most
             live
             upon
             the
             Water
             ,
             and
             but
             few
             of
             them
             upon
             the
             Ice
             or
             Land.
             
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             I
             ▪
          
           
             Of
             Birds
             with
             Toes
             or
             divided
             Feet
             .
          
           
             
               OF
               Land-birds
               I
               observed
               but
               one
               sort
               :
               Viz
               :
               I.
               Of
               a
               Snite
               .
            
             
               This
               Snite
               which
               is
               also
               called
               the
               Strand-runner
               (
               because
               it
               keepeth
               about
               the
               Strand
               )
               is
               no
               bigger
               than
               a
               Lark
               .
            
             
               It
               s
               Bill
               is
               narrow
               ,
               thin
               ,
               and
               corner'd
               withall
               .
               Our
               Snites
               Bills
               are
               at
               the
               farther
               end
               broader
               and
               roundish
               ,
               and
               cut
               in
               with
               cross
               notches
               like
               a
               Rasp
               to
               rasp
               Wood
               withal
               ;
               so
               that
               the
               whole
               upper
               Jaw
               and
               Bill
               looketh
               exactly
               like
               a
               Rasp
               with
               its
               handle
               .
               Our
               Snites
               are
               also
               bigger
               than
               those
               of
               Spitzbergen
               ,
               otherwise
               they
               are
               very
               like
               one
               another
               in
               Shape
               and
               Colour
               ;
               this
               Bill
               both
               above
               and
               below
               is
               four
               square
               ,
               of
               a
               brownish
               colour
               ,
               and
               about
               two
               Inches
               long
               .
               The
               Head
               is
               roundish
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               same
               thickness
               with
               the
               Neck
               .
            
             
             
             
               The
               Root
               hath
               a
               great
               many
               Branches
               that
               are
               divided
               again
               ,
               and
               stick
               very
               close
               unto
               the
               Rock
               underneath
               the
               Water
               .
               The
               whole
               Plant
               groweth
               under
               Water
               several
               Fathoms
               :
               When
               we
               wayed
               our
               Anchor
               ,
               we
               pulled
               it
               up
               in
               great
               quantity
               from
               the
               Ground
               .
            
             
               Together
               with
               this
               Herbs
               we
               pulled
               up
               the
               hairy
               Plant
               that
               stands
               by
               it
               ,
               about
               six
               Foot
               long
               ,
               and
               it
               is
               very
               like
               an
               Horses
               Tail
               ,
               only
               that
               here
               and
               there
               it
               hath
               some
               small
               knobs
               like
               nitty
               Hair
               ,
               or
               such
               as
               are
               split
               at
               the
               ends
               ;
               the
               whole
               Plant
               was
               browner
               of
               colour
               than
               the
               former
               ,
               and
               its
               Roots
               was
               fixed
               unto
               the
               former
               .
            
             
               In
               these
               Plants
               were
               some
               redish
               Worms
               wrapt
               or
               folded
               up
               like
               Caterpillers
               ,
               with
               many
               Legs
               .
               They
               are
               figured
               Tab.
               P.
               at
               i.
               
            
             
               The
               Herb
               was
               like
               Dodder
               ,
               wherefore
               it
               may
               be
               call'd
               Water
               or
               Rock
               Silk
               .
               Amongst
               all
               the
               Icons
               that
               I
               have
               seen
               in
               printed
               Herbals
               ,
               I
               find
               it
               comes
               nearest
               to
               that
               hairy
               Plant
               ,
               which
               
                 Antony
                 Donat
              
               ,
               in
               his
               Book
               of
               Plants
               ,
               growing
               about
               Venice
               ,
               calleth
               in
               his
               second
               Book
               ,
               
                 Muscus
                 argenteus
                 Marinus
                 ,
                 similis
                 Plumae
                 ,
              
               only
               this
               is
               not
               as
               white
               as
               Silver
               ,
               but
               rather
               yellow
               or
               brownish
               .
            
             
               Of
               these
               two
               Herbs
               we
               found
               great
               plenty
               in
               the
               
                 South
                 Haven
              
               on
               the
               20
               th
               .
               and
               21
               th
               .
               of
               July
               .
            
             
               There
               is
               another
               Sea
               Plant
               ,
               which
               I
               called
               Sea-grass
               ,
               whereof
               there
               is
               plenty
               in
               the
               
                 English
                 Haven
              
               underneath
               the
               Water
               above
               eight
               Foot
               long
               .
               The
               Leaves
               were
               about
               two
               or
               three
               Fingers
               broad
               ,
               of
               a
               yellow
               Colour
               like
               Glew
               ,
               and
               transparent
               ,
               ending
               in
               a
               blunt
               point
               ,
               at
               the
               top
               smooth
               edged
               ,
               without
               nicks
               or
               
               prickles
               ,
               every
               where
               plain
               and
               even
               ,
               the
               Leaves
               grew
               from
               the
               Root
               round
               about
               it
               ,
               as
               it
               were
               out
               of
               one
               hole
               in
               the
               Tab
               I.
               it
               is
               marked
               with
               
                 b.
                 C.
              
               
            
             
               The
               End
               of
               the
               Third
               Part.
               
            
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XI
             .
          
           
             Of
             the
             Rock
             Plant.
             
          
           
             THis
             plant
             belongeth
             to
             those
             called
             Wier
             by
             the
             Dutchmen
             ,
             and
             Fucus
             in
             Latin.
             
          
           
             It
             has
             a
             broad
             flat
             Stalk
             like
             a
             Leaf
             ,
             and
             yet
             there
             sprout
             out
             of
             it
             many
             equally
             broad
             Leavs
             like
             it
             ,
             as
             Twigs
             out
             of
             a
             Tree
             ,
             at
             the
             the
             top
             of
             the
             Stalks
             there
             are
             little
             narrow
             longish
             Leaves
             ,
             some
             have
             five
             ,
             others
             seven
             of
             these
             ,
             of
             a
             yellow
             Colour
             ,
             as
             the
             Herb
             is
             also
             and
             they
             are
             transparent
             like
             Glew
             ,
             I
             know
             not
             whether
             one
             may
             take
             thim
             for
             its
             Flowers
             .
             Close
             to
             these
             there
             grow
             other
             oblong
             Leaves
             ,
             that
             are
             hollow
             ,
             and
             as
             it
             was
             blown
             up
             ,
             and
             fill'd
             with
             Wind
             ,
             and
             many
             lesser
             Bladders
             round
             about
             close
             to
             one
             another
             :
             The
             Leaves
             that
             are
             blown
             up
             have
             nothing
             in
             them
             but
             Wind
             ;
             for
             when
             I
             pressed
             them
             together
             ,
             they
             gave
             a
             little
             bounce
             ,
             whether
             these
             small
             Bladders
             have
             Seeds
             in
             them
             or
             no
             ,
             I
             could
             not
             observe
             .
          
           
             The
             Seamen
             informed
             me
             ,
             That
             from
             the
             Seeds
             of
             that
             Plant
             ,
             the
             small
             Sea
             Snails
             are
             produced
             ,
             but
             I
             am
             not
             satisfied
             ,
             whether
             they
             proceed
             from
             these
             Bladders
             ,
             or
             from
             Eggs
             as
             our
             Snails
             do
             .
          
           
             It
             may
             be
             after
             the
             same
             manner
             ,
             as
             we
             find
             on
             many
             Leaves
             in
             our
             Country
             ,
             Bladders
             filled
             up
             with
             the
             Seeds
             of
             Worms
             or
             Caterpillers
             ,
             ●et
             I
             dare
             not
             assert
             it
             ,
             because
             I
             had
             no
             opportunity
             ,
             to
             search
             narrowly
             into
             the
             Matter
             ;
             ●he
             Root
             groweth
             out
             of
             the
             Rocks
             ,
             wherefore
             
             I
             call
             it
             a
             Rock
             Plant
             ,
             it
             hath
             some
             Fibers
             ,
             and
             is
             sometimes
             round
             ;
             I
             found
             this
             Herb
             in
             great
             plenty
             ,
             first
             in
             the
             
               South
               Bay
            
             ,
             near
             the
             Cookery
             of
             Harlem
             ,
             where
             we
             take
             up
             the
             Water
             ;
             then
             in
             the
             
               Mussel
               Haven
            
             at
             Spitzbergen
             ;
             then
             at
             Cales
             in
             Spain
             .
          
           
             When
             this
             Herb
             is
             dried
             ,
             it
             looketh
             brown
             and
             blackish
             ,
             it
             gives
             and
             groweth
             wet
             again
             when
             a
             South
             or
             West
             Wind
             blows
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             Salt
             that
             penetrates
             it
             ;
             but
             when
             the
             Wind
             is
             East
             or
             North
             it
             is
             stiff
             and
             dry
             .
          
           
             Among
             all
             the
             Figures
             that
             I
             have
             seen
             ,
             I
             find
             none
             liker
             than
             that
             given
             in
             the
             39
             th
             ,
             Book
             ,
             and
             the
             50
             th
             .
             Chapter
             of
             the
             
               Iferdunish
               Herbal
            
             ,
             by
             the
             Name
             of
             the
             
               Alge
               Marina
               Platyceros
               porosa
            
             ,
             only
             that
             this
             is
             porous
             or
             spongy
             and
             white
             .
             In
             the
             Tab.
             F.
             it
             is
             marked
             with
             b.
             
          
           
             The
             Leaves
             of
             the
             great
             Rock
             Herb
             ,
             are
             very
             like
             unto
             a
             Man's
             Tongue
             ,
             it
             is
             on
             each
             or
             both
             sides
             curled
             ,
             but
             plain
             before
             and
             not
             curled
             ,
             through
             the
             middle
             of
             it
             run
             two
             black
             Stroaks
             or
             Nerves
             to
             the
             Stalk
             ,
             and
             on
             the
             outside
             of
             them
             appear
             many
             black
             spots
             ,
             within
             the
             black
             stroaks
             ,
             on
             each
             side
             ,
             to
             the
             middlemost
             plain
             stroaks
             ;
             the
             Herb
             is
             adorned
             with
             small
             curles
             ,
             in
             the
             middle
             it
             is
             quite
             smooth
             to
             the
             Stalk
             ,
             on
             the
             end
             of
             the
             Leaf
             ,
             next
             the
             Stalk
             ,
             are
             two
             white
             stroaks
             almost
             to
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Leaf
             ,
             bending
             round
             outwards
             ,
             if
             they
             were
             quite
             closed
             ,
             they
             would
             make
             an
             Oval
             .
          
           
             The
             Leaf
             is
             above
             six
             Foot
             long
             ,
             and
             yellow
             ,
             and
             the
             Stalk
             yet
             longer
             ;
             the
             Stalk
             is
             round
             and
             smooth
             ,
             of
             a
             yellow
             colour
             like
             unboiled
             Glew
             ,
             near
             the
             Root
             it
             is
             thicker
             than
             at
             the
             Leaf
             ,
             and
             it
             smells
             of
             Mussels
             .
          
           
           
             tants
             there
             call
             Edder
             )
             and
             costeth
             when
             it
             is
             cleansed
             from
             the
             Moss
             a
             Crown
             a
             Pound
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             been
             informed
             ;
             But
             the
             Feathers
             of
             the
             Mountain-ducks
             of
             Spitzbergen
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Down
             ,
             the
             Seamen
             put
             into
             their
             Pillows
             ,
             and
             Straw-sacks
             ,
             which
             if
             they
             should
             be
             cleansed
             would
             be
             more
             worth
             .
          
           
             The
             Kirmew
             layeth
             their
             Eggs
             upon
             Moss
             ,
             and
             so
             do
             the
             Rotges
             .
             The
             Nests
             of
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Birds
             were
             too
             high
             for
             us
             ,
             so
             that
             we
             could
             hardly
             ,
             and
             not
             without
             great
             difficulty
             reach
             them
             .
             If
             it
             be
             never
             so
             dark
             by
             reason
             of
             a
             Mist
             ,
             yet
             every
             Bird
             knoweth
             how
             to
             find
             their
             own
             Nest
             again
             ,
             and
             flyeth
             directly
             to
             it
             .
          
           
             Concerning
             the
             Names
             of
             the
             Birds
             I
             have
             made
             use
             of
             those
             ,
             that
             the
             Seamen
             have
             given
             them
             formerly
             ,
             according
             to
             their
             own
             Fancy
             ,
             that
             he
             that
             heareth
             them
             called
             by
             these
             Names
             ,
             may
             also
             know
             how
             to
             find
             them
             by
             them
             in
             this
             Book
             .
          
           
             Some
             of
             these
             Birds
             ,
             as
             
               Lumbs
               ,
               Strundjagers
               ,
               Mallemucks
               ,
               Kirmews
               ,
            
             and
             the
             Mews
             called
             Kutyegehfen
             ,
             I
             have
             also
             seen
             about
             
               England
               ,
               Scotland
            
             and
             Ireland
             ;
             and
             also
             in
             the
             Spanish
             Seas
             ,
             nay
             even
             upon
             the
             Elve
             by
             Hamburg
             ,
             I
             have
             heard
             the
             Kirmew
             and
             Kutyegehf
             cry
             ,
             but
             there
             is
             a
             difference
             ,
             as
             well
             between
             the
             Beasts
             as
             Men
             of
             other
             Countries
             .
          
           
             
               1.
               
               Of
               the
               Rathsher
            
             
               First
               of
               the
               Rathsher
               (
               or
               Alderman
               in
               English
               )
               for
               this
               is
               the
               first
               of
               the
               thin
               billed
               Birds
               that
               have
               three
               Claws
               ,
               and
               is
               called
               so
               by
               the
               Seamen
               ,
               because
               he
               is
               very
               stately
               and
               handsome
               
               Bird
               ,
               but
               less
               than
               that
               which
               they
               call
               Burgermeister
               (
               or
               Major
               in
               English
               .
               )
            
             
               This
               Bird
               hath
               a
               sharp
               ,
               narrow
               and
               thin
               Bill
               ,
               and
               hath
               only
               three
               Claws
               or
               Toes
               ,
               that
               are
               joined
               together
               by
               a
               black
               Skin
               ,
               but
               he
               hath
               no
               Claw
               behind
               .
               His
               Legs
               are
               not
               very
               long
               ,
               and
               black
               ,
               as
               the
               Eyes
               are
               also
               .
            
             
               This
               Bird
               is
               whiter
               than
               the
               Snow
               ,
               for
               when
               you
               see
               him
               upon
               the
               Ice
               ,
               you
               may
               distinguish
               him
               from
               the
               Snow
               ;
               he
               shews
               very
               beautiful
               ,
               with
               his
               white
               Body
               ,
               his
               black
               Bill
               and
               Eyes
               ,
               black
               Legs
               and
               Feet
               ,
               and
               besides
               he
               is
               very
               well
               shaped
               .
            
             
               His
               Tail
               is
               pretty
               long
               and
               broad
               ,
               like
               a
               Lady's
               Fan.
               
            
             
               His
               Cry
               is
               somewhat
               lower
               than
               the
               little
               Kirmews
               ,
               as
               if
               he
               did
               say
               Kar
               ,
               when
               she
               cries
               Kir
               ,
               he
               spreads
               his
               Wings
               and
               Tail
               out
               when
               he
               flies
               ,
               as
               the
               Strundjager
               or
               Crow
               doth
               .
               He
               doth
               not
               willingly
               swim
               in
               the
               Water
               as
               the
               other
               Birds
               do
               ,
               nor
               doth
               he
               much
               care
               for
               wetting
               his
               Feet
               ,
               but
               he
               stays
               rather
               where
               it
               is
               dry
               ,
               yet
               he
               loves
               Fish
               mightily
               ;
               and
               so
               the
               Proverb
               that
               we
               commonly
               say
               of
               the
               Cats
               is
               true
               of
               him
               ;
               
                 The
                 Cat
                 loves
                 to
                 eat
                 Fish
                 ,
                 but
                 does
                 not
                 love
                 to
                 wet
                 her
                 Feet
                 .
              
            
             
               I
               have
               seen
               him
               upon
               the
               Ice
               feed
               on
               the
               Dung
               of
               a
               Sea-horse
               ,
               upon
               whose
               Body
               he
               will
               rest
               while
               he
               is
               alive
               ,
               as
               Crows
               will
               do
               in
               our
               Countries
               .
               He
               flieth
               commonly
               alone
               by
               himself
               ,
               but
               where
               there
               is
               a
               Prey
               they
               flock
               in
               great
               numbers
               .
            
             
               I
               did
               delineate
               them
               in
               the
               shallow
               Corner
               (
               called
               shallow
               Point
               )
               in
               Spitzbergen
               ,
               on
               the
               10
               th
               .
               of
               July
               ,
               when
               we
               shot
               him
               ,
               he
               was
               not
               wild
               at
               all
               ,
               so
               that
               I
               could
               have
               knock'd
               him
               down
               with
               the
               Gun.
               See
               Tab.
               L.
               at
               a.
               
            
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             II.
             
          
           
             Of
             the
             Broad
             or
             Web-footed
             Birds
             .
          
           
             THere
             are
             several
             sorts
             of
             these
             about
             Spitzbergen
             .
             Some
             of
             them
             have
             thin
             pointed
             Bills
             ,
             others
             have
             thick
             and
             broad
             ones
             .
          
           
             Some
             of
             the
             thick
             billed
             one
             have
             them
             divided
             or
             parted
             as
             the
             Malle-mucken
             (
             mad
             Gnats
             in
             English
             )
             others
             have
             undivided
             ones
             ,
             as
             the
             Parret
             so
             called
             .
          
           
             There
             is
             also
             a
             considerable
             difference
             in
             the
             Heels
             of
             these
             Birds
             ,
             for
             some
             of
             them
             have
             Heels
             ,
             as
             the
             
               Mountain-duck
               ,
               Kirmeu
            
             and
             Malle-mucks
             :
             Others
             have
             them
             not
             at
             all
             ,
             as
             the
             
               Burgermeister
               ,
               Rathsher
               ,
               Strundjager
               ,
               Kutyegehf
               ,
               Parret
               ,
               Lumbe
               ,
               Pigeon
               ,
            
             and
             the
             
               Red
               Goose
            
             ;
             no
             Water
             sticks
             to
             their
             Feathers
             no
             more
             than
             on
             the
             Swans
             and
             other
             Water
             Fowl
             ,
             for
             it
             runs
             off
             from
             them
             ,
             as
             if
             they
             were
             oiled
             all
             over
             .
          
           
             Some
             are
             Birds
             of
             Prey
             ,
             others
             not
             .
             There
             is
             also
             a
             difference
             in
             their
             flying
             .
          
           
             Some
             flie
             like
             unto
             a
             Partridge
             ,
             as
             that
             called
             the
             Pigeon
             ,
             others
             like
             Swallows
             ,
             as
             the
             Lumbs
             and
             
               Red
               Geese
            
             ,
             others
             like
             the
             Mews
             ,
             as
             the
             
               Mallemucke
               ,
               Rathsher
            
             and
             Strundjager
             ,
             others
             like
             the
             Stork
             ,
             as
             the
             Burgermeister
             .
          
           
             The
             Birds
             of
             Prey
             are
             ,
             the
             
               Burgermeister
               ,
               Rathsher
               ,
               Strundjager
               ,
               Kutyegehf
            
             and
             Mallemucke
             .
             There
             is
             also
             a
             great
             difference
             in
             their
             Flesh
             ;
             the
             Birds
             of
             Prey
             are
             not
             so
             good
             to
             eat
             as
             the
             others
             ,
             except
             you
             hang
             them
             up
             by
             their
             Legs
             for
             some
             days
             ,
             that
             the
             Train
             Oil
             may
             run
             out
             of
             them
             ,
             and
             the
             Air
             blow
             through
             them
             ,
             
             and
             then
             you
             do
             not
             taste
             the
             Train
             Oil
             so
             strong
             ,
             for
             else
             it
             would
             make
             you
             vomit
             .
          
           
             The
             Pigeons
             ,
             Parrets
             ,
             Red
             Geese
             and
             Ducks
             ,
             are
             the
             most
             fleshy
             ,
             the
             old
             Lumbs
             have
             a
             very
             tough
             and
             dry
             Flesh
             ,
             not
             to
             disparage
             the
             Rotges
             ,
             Kirmews
             and
             young
             Lumbs
             when
             boiled
             ,
             and
             the
             Fat
             taken
             away
             from
             them
             ,
             and
             afterwards
             fryed
             in
             Butter
             ;
             for
             then
             one
             may
             make
             a
             shift
             to
             eat
             them
             ;
             but
             if
             you
             should
             eat
             their
             Fat
             ,
             it
             would
             vomit
             and
             disorder
             the
             Stomach
             very
             much
             .
             Thse
             Birds
             except
             the
             
               Strundjager
               ,
               Kirmew
            
             and
             Mountain-duck
             ,
             all
             make
             their
             Nests
             upon
             the
             high
             Rocks
             ,
             where
             they
             are
             secured
             from
             the
             Foxes
             and
             Bears
             ;
             but
             some
             of
             them
             make
             their
             Nests
             higher
             than
             others
             .
          
           
             They
             fit
             in
             so
             great-numbers
             or
             flocks
             upon
             the
             Rocks
             ,
             chiefly
             at
             the
             time
             when
             they
             hatch
             their
             Young
             ones
             ,
             which
             is
             about
             the
             latter
             end
             of
             June
             ,
             and
             beginning
             of
             July
             ,
             that
             if
             they
             flie
             up
             when
             the
             Sun
             shineth
             ,
             they
             shade
             the
             Ground
             like
             a
             Cloud
             ,
             and
             make
             so
             great
             a
             noise
             ,
             that
             one
             Man
             can
             hardly
             hear
             the
             other
             .
          
           
             The
             Kirmews
             and
             Mountain-ducks
             ,
             and
             also
             the
             Strundjagers
             .
             make
             their
             Nests
             on
             low
             Grouands
             ,
             (
             that
             one
             would
             think
             that
             the
             high
             Water
             must
             needs
             run
             over
             them
             )
             on
             the
             small
             Islnds
             ,
             where
             they
             are
             secure
             from
             the
             Foxes
             ,
             but
             not
             from
             the
             white
             Bears
             ,
             for
             they
             swim
             in
             the
             Water
             from
             one
             Islands
             to
             the
             other
             .
             We
             took
             up
             great
             store
             of
             their
             Eggs.
             
          
           
             The
             Nests
             of
             these
             Birds
             are
             not
             all
             made
             after
             the
             same
             manner
             .
             For
             the
             Mountains-duck
             makes
             its
             Nest
             of
             the
             Feathers
             of
             its
             own
             Belly
             ,
             mixing
             them
             with
             Moss
             .
          
           
             The
             Feathers
             of
             these
             Nests
             are
             not
             the
             Edder
             Down
             ,
             brought
             us
             from
             Island
             ,
             for
             that
             cometh
             from
             great
             Birds
             (
             that
             the
             Inhabitants
             )
          
           
           
             of
             a
             Lark
             ;
             but
             when
             the
             sun
             shines
             upon
             it
             ,
             it
             shews
             blewish
             ,
             very
             like
             those
             two
             Colours
             observed
             on
             our
             Ducks
             Necks
             when
             the
             Sun
             shines
             upon
             them
             .
             They
             feed
             upon
             the
             little
             gray
             Worms
             and
             Shrimps
             .
          
           
             We
             shot
             some
             of
             them
             in
             the
             South
             Harbour
             ,
             near
             the
             Cookery
             of
             Harlem
             they
             had
             not
             the
             taste
             of
             Fish
             at
             all
             .
             See
             Tab.
             K
             at
             a.
             
          
           
             
               II.
               Of
               the
               Snow-bird
               .
            
             
               The
               Snow-bird
               is
               no
               bigger
               than
               a
               sparrow
               ,
               and
               like
               a
               Linnet
               in
               his
               Shape
               ,
               Bill
               and
               Colour
               .
            
             
               The
               Bill
               is
               short
               and
               pointed
               ,
               its
               Head
               of
               the
               same
               thickness
               with
               its
               Neck
               .
               The
               Legs
               are
               also
               like
               the
               Linnets
               ,
               their
               Feet
               are
               divided
               into
               three
               fore
               Claws
               ,
               with
               longish
               crooked
               Nails
               ,
               the
               hinder
               Claw
               is
               somewhat
               shorter
               ,
               but
               hath
               a
               long
               bended
               Spur
               ,
               or
               Nail
               .
               The
               Legs
               are
               grayish
               ,
               and
               not
               very
               long
               .
            
             
               From
               their
               Head
               over
               all
               their
               Belly
               to
               the
               Tail
               they
               are
               white
               like
               Snow
               ,
               but
               all
               over
               their
               Backs
               and
               Wings
               they
               are
               gray
               .
               Some
               of
               them
               are
               gray
               all
               over
               ,
               but
               these
               are
               little
               Ones
               .
            
             
               I
               can
               tell
               nothing
               of
               its
               singing
               ,
               only
               that
               it
               whisseleth
               a
               little
               ,
               as
               Birds
               use
               to
               do
               when
               they
               are
               hungry
               .
            
             
               When
               we
               sailed
               near
               the
               Ice
               ,
               they
               came
               in
               great
               flocks
               to
               us
               in
               our
               Ship
               ,
               near
               the
               Island
               of
               
                 John
                 Mayen
              
               ,
               and
               were
               so
               tame
               ,
               that
               you
               could
               take
               them
               up
               with
               your
               Hands
               .
            
             
               They
               run
               upon
               the
               Ice
               where
               I
               only
               saw
               them
               ,
               and
               not
               upon
               the
               Land
               ,
               which
               is
               the
               reason
               that
               they
               are
               called
               Snow-birds
               .
            
             
             
               They
               kept
               with
               our
               Ship
               till
               we
               catch'd
               the
               first
               Whale
               ,
               and
               after
               that
               the
               other
               Birds
               frightned
               them
               away
               .
            
             
               We
               fed
               them
               with
               Oatmeal
               ,
               but
               when
               their
               Bellies
               were
               full
               ,
               they
               would
               not
               suffer
               themselves
               to
               be
               taken
               up
               .
               We
               put
               some
               of
               them
               in
               a
               Cage
               ,
               and
               hung
               them
               up
               in
               the
               Cabin
               ,
               but
               they
               did
               not
               live
               long
               .
            
             
               We
               eat
               some
               of
               them
               ,
               and
               they
               were
               not
               of
               an
               unpleasant
               taste
               ,
               but
               very
               lean
               .
               If
               I
               may
               give
               my
               Opinion
               ,
               why
               the
               Birds
               flie
               to
               the
               Ships
               ,
               I
               believe
               that
               they
               are
               stray'd
               from
               the
               Island
               ,
               and
               that
               so
               the
               Hunger
               compels
               them
               to
               the
               Ships
               for
               Food
               .
               Tab.
               K.
               at
               b.
               
            
          
           
             
               III.
               Of
               the
               Ice-birds
               .
            
             
               I
               saw
               also
               in
               the
               
                 English
                 Haven
              
               ,
               a
               very
               beautiful
               Ice-bird
               ,
               which
               was
               so
               tame
               ,
               that
               we
               might
               have
               taken
               him
               up
               almost
               with
               our
               Hands
               ,
               but
               we
               would
               not
               go
               too
               near
               him
               with
               our
               Gun
               ,
               for
               fear
               that
               we
               should
               shoot
               him
               all
               in
               pieces
               ,
               and
               so
               spoil
               his
               curious
               Feathers
               ,
               so
               we
               missed
               him
               ,
               and
               he
               flew
               away
               .
            
             
               The
               Sun
               shined
               at
               that
               time
               upon
               him
               ,
               which
               made
               him
               look
               like
               Gold
               ,
               so
               as
               it
               dazled
               our
               Eyes
               almost
               .
               He
               was
               as
               big
               as
               a
               small
               Pigeon
               .
            
             
               I
               would
               willingly
               have
               delineated
               him
               ,
               if
               we
               could
               have
               catched
               him
               .
               I
               saw
               but
               this
               one
               of
               the
               Kind
               .
            
             
          
           
             
             
             
               II.
               Of
               the
               Pigeon
               .
            
             
               The
               Pigeon
               ,
               or
               rather
               the
               Pigeon-diver
               ,
               is
               also
               one
               of
               the
               beautifullest
               Birds
               of
               Spitzbergen
               .
               It
               is
               of
               the
               bigness
               of
               a
               Duck
               ,
               the
               Bill
               is
               somewhat
               long
               ,
               thin
               and
               sharp
               pointed
               ,
               at
               the
               point
               the
               upper
               Bill
               is
               somewhat
               crooked
               ,
               about
               two
               Inches
               long
               and
               hollow
               within
               .
               It
               hath
               but
               three
               red
               Toes
               on
               its
               Feet
               ,
               with
               crooked
               Claws
               ;
               it
               hath
               short
               redish
               Legs
               ,
               and
               a
               short
               Tail.
               
            
             
               Some
               of
               these
               Birds
               are
               black
               all
               their
               body
               over
               ;
               but
               others
               .
               and
               so
               was
               that
               which
               I
               delineated
               ;
               about
               their
               Wings
               ,
               and
               in
               the
               middle
               they
               are
               white
               pyed
               with
               black
               ,
               but
               underneath
               the
               Wings
               they
               are
               quite
               white
               ;
               others
               are
               in
               the
               middle
               of
               their
               Wings
               quite
               white
               ;
               their
               Bill
               is
               red
               within
               ;
               the
               Tongue
               is
               also
               red
               and
               hollow
               ;
               they
               cry
               like
               young
               Pigeons
               ,
               whence
               they
               have
               their
               Name
               ,
               for
               they
               are
               in
               nothing
               else
               like
               them
               .
               In
               their
               Crops
               I
               found
               Shrimps
               ,
               or
               Prawns
               ,
               and
               small
               Sand-stones
               .
            
             
               They
               do
               not
               flie
               high
               over
               the
               Sea
               ,
               and
               their
               flight
               is
               very
               like
               the
               Partridges
               :
               They
               do
               not
               flie
               many
               together
               as
               the
               Lumbs
               ,
               but
               usually
               by
               pares
               ,
               and
               sometimes
               one
               alone
               by
               its
               self
               .
            
             
               They
               can
               keep
               a
               great
               while
               under
               Water
               ;
               wherefore
               they
               may
               be
               called
               Diving
               Pigeons
               .
            
             
               But
               chiefly
               when
               they
               are
               pursed
               by
               Men
               ,
               or
               if
               their
               Wings
               be
               hurt
               by
               a
               Shot
               ,
               they
               will
               dive
               and
               keep
               a
               great
               while
               under
               Water
               ;
               and
               sometimes
               they
               get
               underneath
               the
               Ice
               ,
               and
               there
               they
               are
               suffocated
               ,
               they
               were
               as
               nimble
               and
               quick
               under
               Water
               (
               if
               their
               Wings
               or
               Feet
               are
               not
               quite
               shot
               off
               )
               as
               we
               could
               row
               with
               our
               Boat.
               Their
               
               Flesh
               is
               good
               to
               eat
               when
               the
               Fat
               is
               taken
               away
               from
               it
               ,
               if
               afterwards
               it
               be
               fryed
               in
               Butter
               .
            
             
               The
               first
               Diving
               Pigeon
               I
               got
               the
               23
               th
               .
               of
               May
               on
               the
               Ice
               ,
               and
               afterward
               at
               Spitzbergen
               ,
               where
               they
               are
               seen
               more
               frequently
               .
               See
               Tab.
               L.
               at
               b.
               
            
          
           
             
               III.
               Of
               the
               Lumb
               .
            
             
               This
               Bird
               is
               the
               likest
               in
               his
               Bill
               unto
               the
               Diving
               Pigeon
               ,
               only
               it
               is
               somewhat
               stronger
               and
               crookeder
               .
            
             
               He
               hath
               black
               Feet
               ,
               with
               three
               black
               Toes
               ,
               and
               as
               many
               black
               Nails
               ;
               his
               Legs
               are
               black
               also
               and
               short
               .
            
             
               He
               is
               quite
               black
               at
               the
               top
               ,
               but
               underneath
               his
               Belly
               even
               to
               the
               Neck
               he
               is
               snow
               white
               ;
               his
               Tail
               is
               short
               .
            
             
               His
               Cry
               is
               very
               unpleasant
               ,
               most
               like
               that
               of
               a
               Raven
               ,
               and
               they
               cry
               more
               than
               all
               the
               other
               Birds
               ,
               except
               the
               Rotger-divers
               ,
               he
               is
               bigger
               than
               the
               Diving
               Pigeon
               ,
               as
               big
               as
               a
               midling
               Duck.
               In
               their
               Crops
               I
               find
               small
               Fish
               and
               Prawns
               ,
               and
               also
               some
               Sand-stones
               ;
               and
               one
               of
               them
               flying
               over
               our
               Ship
               dropp'd
               a
               large
               red
               Prawn
               into
               the
               Ship.
               I
               also
               delineated
               it
               in
               the
               mentioned
               place
               .
               They
               say
               likewise
               ,
               that
               small
               fresh
               River
               Fish
               are
               their
               Prey
               ;
               but
               this
               I
               cannot
               relate
               for
               certain
               .
            
             
               When
               they
               have
               young
               ones
               ,
               they
               commonly
               sit
               by
               the
               old
               ones
               one
               or
               two
               on
               the
               Water
               ,
               who
               teach
               them
               to
               dive
               and
               swim
               .
               After
               the
               old
               ones
               have
               brought
               their
               young
               in
               their
               Bill
               ,
               from
               the
               Rocks
               to
               the
               Water
               ,
               the
               Preying
               Bird
               called
               Burgermeister
               sometimes
               catches
               the
               young
               ones
               ,
               when
               the
               old
               ones
               are
               not
               
               present
               ,
               and
               sometimes
               when
               they
               are
               also
               ,
               for
               they
               are
               not
               able
               to
               resist
               them
               .
            
             
               They
               love
               their
               young
               ones
               so
               well
               ,
               that
               they
               will
               be
               killed
               before
               they
               will
               leave
               them
               ,
               (
               and
               will
               defend
               them
               as
               a
               Hen
               doth
               her
               Chickens
               ,
               swimming
               about
               them
               )
               at
               other
               times
               they
               are
               very
               hard
               to
               be
               shot
               ;
               for
               as
               soon
               as
               they
               see
               the
               Fire
               ,
               they
               are
               immediately
               under
               Water
               ,
               or
               fly
               away
               .
               They
               fly
               in
               great
               flocks
               ,
               with
               pointed
               Wings
               like
               Swallows
               ,
               and
               move
               their
               Wings
               much
               in
               their
               flight
               .
               One
               can
               hardly
               know
               the
               young
               Lumbs
               from
               the
               old
               ones
               ,
               at
               the
               first
               sight
               ,
               if
               you
               do
               not
               take
               exact
               notice
               of
               their
               Bills
               ;
               for
               the
               upper
               part
               turns
               beside
               the
               under
               part
               ,
               at
               the
               point
               ,
               and
               the
               undermost
               beside
               the
               uppermost
               ,
               as
               you
               see
               in
               the
               Cross
               Bill
               ,
               yet
               not
               so
               much
               in
               these
               ;
               and
               it
               is
               commonly
               done
               in
               the
               15th
               ,
               16th
               ,
               to
               the
               20th
               year
               of
               their
               Age.
               The
               old
               ones
               are
               full
               of
               Flesh
               ,
               but
               it
               is
               very
               dry
               and
               tough
               ,
               and
               therefore
               unpleasant
               to
               eat
               .
            
             
               They
               boil
               them
               like
               the
               Pigeons
               ,
               and
               scum
               off
               the
               Fat
               when
               they
               boil
               ,
               then
               they
               fry
               them
               in
               Batter
               .
               I
               did
               not
               see
               them
               upon
               the
               Ice
               ,
               but
               abundance
               of
               them
               upon
               the
               Mountains
               :
               They
               go
               waddling
               from
               one
               side
               to
               the
               other
               ,
               like
               the
               diving
               Pigeons
               .
               I
               have
               seen
               many
               Thousands
               of
               them
               together
               in
               the
               Danish
               Harbour
               ,
               on
               the
               Mountains
               ,
               on
               that
               side
               where
               the
               East
               and
               Northern
               Winds
               could
               not
               blow
               hard
               or
               not
               fully
               upon
               them
               ,
               (
               and
               so
               do
               all
               other
               Birds
               chuse
               such
               places
               on
               the
               Mountains
               for
               their
               Habitations
               )
               where
               the
               Herbs
               do
               grow
               .
            
             
               But
               I
               saw
               not
               so
               many
               by
               the
               Haven
               of
               Magdalen
               ,
               where
               I
               drew
               my
               Figure
               on
               the
               25th
               of
               July
               .
               Afterwards
               I
               saw
               some
               of
               them
               in
               the
               
               Spanish
               and
               North
               Sea
               ,
               not
               far
               from
               the
               Heilgland
               .
               See
               Tab.
               M
               at
               a.
               
            
          
           
             
               IV.
               Of
               the
               Mew
               called
               Kutge-gehef
               .
            
             
               This
               is
               beautiful
               Mew
               ,
               and
               is
               called
               Kutge-gehef
               ,
               because
               it
               cryeth
               so
               :
               He
               hath
               a
               Bill
               somewhat
               bent
               ,
               as
               the
               Burgermeister
               ;
               on
               the
               undermost
               part
               of
               its
               Bill
               is
               a
               small
               knob
               or
               rising
               :
               About
               his
               black
               Eyes
               he
               hath
               a
               red
               circle
               ,
               as
               the
               Burgermeister
               ;
               and
               he
               hath
               but
               three
               Claws
               ,
               joyned
               together
               with
               a
               black
               Skin
               .
            
             
               The
               Legs
               are
               also
               black
               ,
               and
               but
               short
               ;
               the
               Tail
               is
               somewhat
               long
               and
               broad
               ,
               like
               a
               Fan.
               
            
             
               All
               the
               Belly
               is
               as
               white
               as
               Snow
               ;
               the
               Wings
               and
               Back
               are
               grey
               ,
               and
               the
               point
               of
               the
               Wings
               black
               .
               He
               is
               almost
               as
               big
               as
               an
               ordinary
               Mew
               ,
               but
               something
               less
               than
               the
               Strunt-jager
               .
               When
               we
               cut
               the
               fat
               off
               from
               the
               Whales
               ,
               we
               saw
               abundance
               of
               them
               fly
               by
               the
               Ship
               ,
               and
               heard
               them
               cry
               .
            
             
               When
               the
               Seamen
               have
               a
               mind
               to
               catch
               some
               of
               them
               ,
               they
               bait
               their
               Hooks
               with
               a
               piece
               of
               Whales
               Fat
               ,
               and
               so
               tye
               the
               Hooks
               to
               a
               Line
               ,
               and
               fling
               it
               into
               the
               Sea
               ,
               and
               so
               they
               catch
               not
               only
               these
               ,
               but
               all
               the
               other
               Birds
               of
               Prey
               .
               He
               flieth
               with
               small
               Wings
               as
               a
               common
               Mew
               ,
               and
               dives
               not
               .
               His
               Food
               is
               the
               Fat
               of
               the
               Whale
               .
               He
               is
               hunted
               by
               sthe
               Strunt-jager
               (
               in
               English
               Dung-hunter
               )
               who
               leave
               him
               not
               till
               he
               dungs
               ,
               which
               the
               Strunt-jager
               eats
               .
            
             
             
               This
               is
               not
               only
               to
               be
               understood
               of
               this
               Bird
               ,
               but
               also
               of
               all
               the
               rest
               ,
               for
               they
               look
               against
               the
               Wind
               ,
               that
               their
               Feathers
               may
               not
               be
               blown
               asunder
               and
               opened
               ;
               for
               if
               they
               should
               sit
               or
               swim
               with
               the
               Wind
               ,
               their
               Feathers
               would
               be
               blown
               asunder
               by
               the
               cold
               Wind
               ,
               and
               so
               the
               Cold
               would
               get
               in
               between
               them
               to
               their
               Skin
               ,
               which
               perhaps
               might
               prejudice
               their
               Health
               ,
               for
               Birds
               are
               covered
               with
               their
               Feathers
               as
               Men
               are
               with
               their
               Clothes
               .
            
             
               And
               so
               ,
               when
               they
               fly
               up
               ,
               they
               press
               against
               the
               Wind
               with
               their
               Bodies
               ,
               and
               expand
               their
               Wings
               ,
               and
               so
               fly
               away
               very
               swiftly
               ;
               also
               their
               Feathers
               would
               be
               entangled
               ,
               so
               that
               they
               could
               not
               have
               a
               sure
               and
               steddy
               flight
               ,
               but
               faulter
               in
               their
               flying
               ,
               like
               Birds
               that
               learn
               to
               fly
               .
               There
               is
               but
               little
               Meat
               upon
               them
               ;
               we
               eat
               but
               the
               Legs
               and
               the
               Breast
               ,
               for
               the
               Wings
               are
               nothing
               but
               Skin
               and
               Bone.
               We
               have
               a
               Proverb
               ,
               and
               say
               ,
               
                 Thou
                 art
                 as
                 light
                 as
                 a
                 Mew
                 :
              
               This
               we
               may
               very
               well
               say
               of
               these
               Mews
               .
               I
               have
               seen
               them
               since
               in
               the
               Spanish
               Sea
               ,
               and
               also
               in
               the
               
                 North
                 Sea
              
               ,
               but
               yet
               they
               differ
               from
               these
               ;
               and
               so
               do
               the
               Beasts
               of
               all
               Countries
               .
               See
               Tab.
               N.
               it
               is
               marked
               with
               a.
               
            
          
           
             
             
               V.
               Of
               the
               Burgermeister
               .
            
             
               The
               Burgermeister
               (
               in
               English
               Major
               )
               is
               the
               biggest
               of
               all
               the
               Birds
               of
               Spitsbergen
               ,
               wherefore
               this
               Name
               is
               given
               him
               as
               being
               the
               Chief
               of
               them
               .
               His
               Bill
               is
               crooked
               ,
               of
               a
               yellow
               colour
               ,
               narrow
               and
               thick
               ;
               his
               Under-bill
               is
               somewhat
               rising
               or
               knobby
               at
               the
               point
               orend
               ,
               a
               great
               deal
               more
               than
               the
               Kutge-gebefs
               ,
               which
               looketh
               very
               pretty
               ,
               as
               if
               he
               had
               a
               Cherry
               in
               his
               Mouth
               ;
               he
               hath
               longish
               Nostrils
               ,
               and
               a
               red
               Ring
               about
               his
               Eyes
               ,
               as
               I
               mentioned
               when
               I
               spoke
               of
               the
               Kutge-gehef
               ;
               he
               hath
               but
               three
               Claws
               ,
               of
               a
               grey
               colour
               ,
               his
               Legs
               are
               grey
               ,
               and
               not
               quite
               so
               long
               as
               those
               of
               a
               Stork
               ,
               yet
               he
               is
               almost
               equally
               big
               with
               him
               .
            
             
               His
               Tail
               is
               broad
               ,
               like
               a
               Fan
               ,
               and
               white
               ,
               which
               is
               chiefly
               to
               be
               understood
               of
               these
               Birds
               when
               they
               fly
               ;
               his
               Wings
               are
               of
               a
               pale
               colour
               ,
               and
               so
               is
               all
               the
               Back
               ,
               but
               the
               Wings
               are
               white
               at
               the
               tip
               ,
               and
               so
               is
               the
               whole
               Body
               .
               He
               Builds
               his
               Nest
               very
               high
               in
               the
               Clifts
               of
               the
               Rocks
               ,
               where
               you
               can
               neither
               shoot
               nor
               catch
               them
               any
               other
               way
               ;
               which
               was
               the
               reason
               I
               could
               not
               see
               their
               Nests
               .
               I
               have
               seen
               sometimes
               two
               ,
               three
               and
               four
               of
               their
               young
               ones
               together
               ;
               we
               shoot
               most
               of
               them
               when
               we
               draw
               a
               dead
               Whale
               behind
               our
               Ship
               ,
               where
               they
               flock
               in
               great
               numbers
               ,
               and
               bite
               off
               great
               pieces
               of
               the
               fat
               of
               the
               Whale
               ;
               at
               other
               times
               we
               must
               shoot
               at
               them
               a
               great
               distance
               ,
               as
               at
               other
               wild
               Birds
               ,
               such
               as
               Ravens
               ,
               Herns
               ,
               and
               the
               like
               .
            
             
             
             
               His
               Cry
               is
               like
               the
               Cry
               of
               some
               Ravens
               that
               I
               have
               sometimes
               heard
               ;
               he
               flyeth
               in
               the
               Air
               like
               a
               Stork
               ;
               he
               preys
               upon
               young
               Lumbs
               as
               the
               Hawk
               doth
               upon
               all
               sorts
               of
               Birds
               ;
               he
               feeds
               also
               upon
               the
               fat
               of
               the
               Whale
               ,
               whereof
               he
               doth
               swallow
               down
               peices
               as
               big
               as
               ones
               Hand
               whole
               .
            
             
               The
               Mallemucks
               are
               mightily
               afraid
               of
               him
               ,
               they
               will
               lye
               down
               before
               him
               (
               when
               they
               are
               upon
               the
               Carcass
               of
               a
               dead
               Whale
               )
               then
               he
               bites
               them
               about
               the
               Neck
               ,
               which
               I
               believe
               doth
               not
               hurt
               them
               much
               ,
               because
               they
               have
               a
               very
               thick
               Skin
               ,
               for
               else
               they
               would
               oppose
               and
               resist
               ,
               him
               ,
               or
               fly
               away
               ,
               but
               they
               do
               not
               matter
               it
               ,
               neither
               will
               they
               leave
               their
               Meal
               for
               his
               biting
               .
               I
               have
               seen
               him
               also
               about
               the
               Sea-Horses
               ,
               whose
               Dung
               he
               eats
               .
               He
               flyeth
               commonly
               single
               ,
               except
               when
               they
               meet
               at
               their
               Prey
               .
               He
               loves
               to
               rest
               on
               the
               water
               ,
               but
               doth
               not
               care
               much
               for
               diving
               ;
               we
               shot
               one
               before
               the
               Weibegat
               ,
               on
               the
               10th
               day
               of
               July
               .
               You
               see
               him
               at
               c
               in
               the
               Tab.
               L.
               
            
          
           
             
               VI.
               Of
               the
               Rotges
               .
            
             
               This
               Bird
               is
               a
               Diver
               ,
               and
               might
               be
               rather
               called
               the
               
                 Diving
                 Rotge
              
               .
               His
               Bill
               is
               crooked
               ,
               but
               short
               ,
               somewhat
               thick
               ,
               of
               a
               black
               colour
               ;
               his
               Feet
               have
               but
               three
               Claws
               ,
               with
               as
               many
               black
               Nails
               ,
               and
               are
               joyned
               by
               a
               black
               Skin
               ;
               his
               Legs
               are
               short
               and
               black
               ;
               he
               is
               almost
               all
               over
               black
               ,
               except
               his
               Belly
               ,
               which
               is
               white
               .
            
             
               Some
               of
               this
               kind
               have
               their
               Wings
               spotted
               with
               white
               and
               black
               ,
               like
               the
               diving
               Pigeon
               ;
               no
               Water
               sticketh
               to
               their
               Feathers
               ,
               no
               more
               than
               to
               a
               Swans
               ;
               they
               are
               most
               of
               them
               like
               Hair
               on
               a
               very
               thick
               Skin
               :
               Their
               Tail
               is
               short
               .
            
             
             
               They
               are
               very
               much
               like
               a
               Swallow
               in
               their
               shape
               ;
               I
               took
               them
               at
               first
               to
               be
               Swallows
               ,
               for
               they
               fly
               like
               them
               ;
               they
               are
               in
               great
               flocks
               together
               ,
               as
               the
               Swallows
               are
               when
               they
               are
               about
               to
               hide
               themselves
               against
               the
               Winter
               .
            
             
               They
               go
               wabbling
               from
               side
               to
               side
               ,
               as
               the
               Divers
               do
               ;
               they
               cry
               very
               loud
               
                 Rottet
                 ,
                 tet
                 ,
                 tet
                 ,
                 tet
                 ,
                 tet
                 ,
              
               at
               first
               high
               ,
               and
               so
               by
               degrees
               lower
               and
               lower
               ;
               and
               this
               their
               calling
               or
               crying
               is
               the
               occasion
               of
               their
               Name
               .
               They
               make
               more
               noise
               than
               any
               other
               Bird
               ,
               because
               their
               Voice
               is
               shriller
               ;
               but
               the
               Lumbs
               in
               this
               are
               not
               much
               inferior
               to
               them
               ,
               although
               they
               cry
               lower
               ;
               the
               Burgermeister
               ,
               Rathsher
               ,
               and
               the
               whole
               crew
               of
               Birds
               of
               Spitzbergen
               strike
               in
               with
               them
               ,
               so
               that
               one
               can
               hardly
               hear
               another's
               words
               .
            
             
               The
               calling
               or
               crying
               of
               the
               Rotages
               amongst
               one
               another
               sounds
               almost
               ,
               at
               a
               distance
               ,
               as
               if
               you
               hear
               a
               great
               many
               Women
               scolding
               together
               :
               They
               are
               somewhat
               bigger
               than
               a
               Starling
               .
            
             
               They
               build
               their
               Nests
               in
               the
               Clifts
               of
               the
               Rocks
               ,
               yet
               not
               all
               of
               them
               ,
               for
               some
               make
               their
               Nests
               upon
               the
               Hills
               or
               Mountains
               ,
               of
               Moss
               ,
               where
               we
               found
               them
               ,
               and
               we
               killed
               abundance
               of
               their
               young
               ones
               with
               Sticks
               .
               They
               feed
               upon
               the
               grey
               Worms
               that
               are
               like
               Craw-fish
               ,
               which
               are
               delineated
               hereafter
               :
               They
               also
               eat
               the
               red
               Shrimps
               or
               Prawns
               .
               We
               got
               the
               first
               of
               them
               on
               the
               Ice
               on
               the
               29th
               day
               of
               May
               ,
               and
               afterwards
               more
               of
               them
               by
               Spitzbergen
               .
            
             
               They
               are
               very
               good
               Food
               ,
               and
               the
               best
               next
               the
               Strandrunner
               ,
               are
               fleshy
               and
               fattish
               ;
               we
               boyl
               and
               then
               roast
               them
               .
               In
               Tab.
               M
               they
               are
               mark'd
               with
               b.
               
            
          
           
             
             
               VII
               .
               Of
               the
               Struntjager
               (
               or
               Dung-hunter
               .
               )
            
             
               This
               Bird
               hath
               a
               Bill
               somewhat
               blunt
               before
               ,
               and
               crooked
               ,
               and
               is
               thick
               ;
               if
               I
               remember
               ,
               it
               is
               black
               .
            
             
               He
               hath
               but
               three
               Claws
               ,
               which
               are
               joyned
               together
               with
               a
               black
               Skin
               ;
               his
               Legs
               are
               not
               very
               long
               ;
               his
               Tayl
               ,
               which
               is
               like
               unto
               a
               Fan
               ,
               hath
               this
               mark
               ,
               that
               one
               Feather
               thereof
               stands
               out
               before
               all
               the
               rest
               :
               He
               is
               black
               on
               the
               top
               of
               his
               Head
               :
               His
               Eyes
               are
               black
               ;
               about
               his
               Neck
               he
               hath
               a
               dark
               yellowish
               Ring
               or
               Cricle
               ;
               his
               Wings
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               his
               Back
               ,
               are
               brown
               ;
               underneatsh
               his
               Belly
               he
               is
               white
               ;
               he
               is
               somewhat
               bigger
               than
               the
               Mew
               called
               Kutge-gehef
               ;
               he
               hunts
               and
               flies
               in
               the
               Air
               after
               the
               Mew
               Kutge-gehef
               ,
               so
               long
               torments
               her
               ,
               until
               she
               avoideth
               her
               Dung
               ,
               on
               which
               this
               Bird
               feeds
               ,
               which
               he
               catches
               dexterously
               before
               it
               falls
               down
               into
               the
               Water
               ;
               and
               this
               is
               the
               reason
               why
               they
               call
               him
               Strunt-jager
               ,
               in
               English
               the
               Dung-hunter
               .
            
             
               He
               flyeth
               with
               the
               Mews
               called
               
                 Kutge
                 gehef
              
               ,
               which
               do
               not
               fear
               him
               in
               the
               least
               ,
               and
               they
               are
               both
               equally
               swift
               in
               their
               flying
               ,
               but
               when
               he
               intends
               to
               make
               them
               dung
               ,
               he
               hunts
               them
               and
               makes
               them
               cry
               out
               very
               loud
               ,
               but
               he
               himself
               seldom
               cries
               :
               He
               generally
               keepeth
               but
               to
               one
               Mew
               ,
               but
               if
               two
               or
               three
               of
               the
               Mews
               be
               togher
               ,
               and
               one
               makes
               her
               escape
               from
               him
               ,
               then
               he
               hunts
               the
               other
               two
               ,
               and
               flyeth
               sometimes
               above
               and
               sometimes
               underneath
               them
               .
               I
               could
               never
               see
               him
               hunt
               after
               any
               other
               Birds
               ,
               but
               once
               I
               saw
               him
               fly
               after
               a
               Mallemunck
               ,
               but
               I
               saw
               him
               soon
               leave
               her
               ,
               perhaps
               because
               her
               Dung
               did
               not
               please
               him
               .
               I
               am
               of
               opinion
               
               that
               this
               Dung
               ,
               because
               it
               is
               thin
               ,
               serves
               him
               instead
               of
               Drink
               ,
               for
               else
               he
               eats
               the
               Fat
               of
               the
               Whale
               for
               his
               Food
               :
               He
               builds
               his
               Nest
               not
               very
               high
               .
            
             
               He
               goes
               upright
               upon
               his
               Legs
               ,
               like
               the
               
                 Burgemeister
                 ,
                 Rhatsher
              
               ,
               or
               Kutge-gehef
               .
               It
               is
               a
               rare
               Bird
               ,
               and
               I
               saw
               but
               very
               few
               of
               them
               :
               He
               flies
               commonly
               alone
               ;
               I
               saw
               very
               seldom
               two
               or
               three
               of
               them
               together
               ;
               he
               flies
               like
               the
               Rhatsher
               ,
               or
               like
               a
               Crow
               ,
               but
               his
               Wings
               are
               somewhat
               more
               pointed
               at
               the
               ends
               .
            
             
               He
               hath
               a
               loud
               Voice
               ,
               when
               he
               cries
               it
               sounds
               as
               if
               he
               did
               say
               ,
               1
               Ja.
               To
               some
               it
               seemeth
               ,
               if
               it
               be
               at
               a
               distance
               ,
               as
               if
               he
               cried
               ,
               
                 Jo
                 han
              
               .
               His
               Flesh
               is
               not
               better
               than
               that
               of
               the
               other
               Birds
               of
               Prey
               .
               I
               got
               him
               on
               the
               11th
               of
               July
               near
               to
               the
               Dear-haven
               ,
               or
               Dear-bay
               ,
               in
               Spitzburgen
               ;
               afterwards
               I
               saw
               this
               Birds
               behind
               Scotland
               ,
               hunt
               after
               the
               new
               Kutge-gehef
               .
               In
               the
               Tab.
               L
               it
               is
               marked
               with
               d.
               
            
          
           
             
               VIII
               .
               Of
               the
               Diving
               Parret
               .
            
             
               This
               is
               commonly
               called
               the
               Parret
               .
               Amongst
               all
               the
               web-footed
               Birds
               that
               have
               three
               Claws
               ,
               this
               hath
               a
               peculiar
               Bill
               ;
               and
               because
               it
               seem'd
               to
               those
               that
               gave
               him
               this
               Name
               to
               be
               like
               that
               of
               a
               Parret
               ,
               therefore
               they
               called
               him
               also
               a
               Parret
               ;
               but
               in
               truth
               his
               Bill
               is
               not
               at
               all
               like
               that
               of
               a
               Parret
               ,
               its
               Bell
               is
               broad
               ,
               and
               full
               of
               slender
               strokes
               of
               several
               colours
               ,
               viz.
               red
               ,
               white
               ,
               and
               the
               broad
               part
               thereof
               is
               black
               ;
               the
               uppermost
               as
               well
               as
               the
               undremost
               are
               both
               pointed
               ;
               the
               uppermost
               arch
               is
               red
               ,
               and
               his
               upper
               Bill
               hath
               a
               thin
               bended
               Hook
               ;
               the
               undermost
               hath
               a
               yellowish
               arch
               ,
               and
               is
               towards
               the
               end
               downwards
               cut
               off
               somewhat
               
               sloaping
               :
               The
               upper
               part
               of
               its
               Bill
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               the
               lower
               part
               ,
               is
               about
               three
               fingers
               broad
               ,
               and
               about
               the
               same
               length
               ,
               if
               you
               measure
               the
               upper
               and
               undremost
               together
               :
               He
               hath
               of
               the
               upper
               Bill
               four
               arched
               or
               bended
               oblong
               pitted
               holes
               ,
               and
               on
               the
               lower
               he
               hath
               as
               many
               ,
               although
               the
               furthermost
               is
               not
               altogether
               so
               plain
               .
            
             
               These
               holes
               or
               pits
               of
               the
               upper
               and
               lower
               Bill
               make
               together
               a
               Half-moon
               ;
               and
               the
               parts
               that
               are
               elevated
               make
               in
               the
               same
               manner
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               the
               pitted
               or
               hollow
               ones
               ,
               a
               Half-moon
               .
            
             
               By
               these
               holes
               are
               as
               many
               raised
               or
               elevated
               parts
               ;
               the
               uppermost
               of
               them
               is
               as
               broad
               as
               the
               three
               furthermost
               ones
               together
               ,
               and
               hath
               underneath
               on
               each
               side
               a
               longish
               hole
               ,
               which
               without
               doubt
               are
               his
               Nostrils
               ;
               but
               the
               undermost
               on
               the
               under
               Bill
               is
               about
               a
               Straws
               breadth
               broader
               ;
               the
               upper
               broad
               part
               is
               blackish
               ,
               and
               sometimes
               blew
               .
            
             
               On
               this
               broad
               part
               of
               the
               upper
               Bill
               that
               is
               thus
               elevated
               above
               the
               rest
               ,
               is
               towards
               the
               Eye
               a
               long
               whitish
               piece
               of
               Cartilage
               that
               is
               full
               of
               holes
               ,
               whereon
               you
               see
               towards
               the
               inner
               part
               of
               the
               Mouth
               something
               like
               a
               Nerve
               ,
               which
               also
               reacheth
               towards
               the
               under
               part
               ,
               and
               there
               endeth
               itself
               ,
               whereby
               the
               Bill
               is
               opened
               and
               shut
               .
            
             
               His
               Feet
               have
               also
               but
               three
               Claws
               ,
               joyned
               with
               a
               red
               Skin
               between
               them
               ,
               with
               three
               short
               and
               strong
               Nails
               ;
               the
               Legs
               are
               but
               short
               ,
               and
               of
               a
               red
               colour
               ;
               he
               walks
               wabbling
               .
            
             
               About
               his
               Eyes
               he
               hath
               a
               red
               ring
               ,
               and
               above
               this
               Ring
               stands
               upright
               a
               little
               Horn
               ,
               and
               underneath
               the
               Eyes
               lyeth
               another
               little
               ,
               longish
               ,
               black
               Horn
               cross
               over
               ;
               as
               you
               may
               see
               in
               the
               Figure
               .
            
             
             
               His
               Tail
               is
               short
               :
               The
               Head
               is
               black
               at
               the
               top
               unto
               the
               Horn
               ;
               but
               his
               Cheeks
               are
               white
               ;
               about
               his
               Neck
               he
               hath
               a
               black
               Ring
               ;
               all
               his
               Back
               and
               Wings
               also
               ,
               at
               the
               top
               or
               the
               outside
               ,
               are
               black
               ,
               but
               underneath
               the
               Belly
               is
               white
               .
               They
               fly
               either
               singly
               or
               by
               pairs
               ,
               and
               have
               sharp
               pointed
               Wings
               like
               the
               Lumbs
               .
               He
               will
               keep
               a
               great
               while
               under
               Water
               .
               He
               eats
               like
               the
               rest
               ,
               red
               Shrimps
               or
               Prawns
               ,
               and
               Star-fish
               ,
               for
               I
               found
               something
               in
               his
               Stomach
               that
               looketh
               like
               pieces
               thereof
               ,
               but
               they
               were
               almost
               digested
               .
            
             
               He
               hath
               more
               Flesh
               upon
               him
               than
               the
               diving
               Pigieon
               ,
               and
               is
               very
               good
               to
               eat
               .
               I
               never
               saw
               him
               among
               the
               Ice
               .
               This
               whereof
               I
               shew
               you
               the
               draught
               was
               shot
               at
               Schmerenberg
               in
               Spitzbergen
               ,
               on
               the
               20th
               day
               of
               June
               ,
               but
               aftrerwards
               we
               got
               several
               more
               .
               In
               the
               Tab.
               K
               see
               d.
               
            
          
           
             
               IX
               .
               of
               the
               Mountain-Duck
               .
            
             
               Hitherto
               we
               have
               described
               the
               web-footed
               Birds
               that
               have
               three
               Claws
               that
               are
               not
               divided
               ,
               that
               I
               saw
               and
               got
               about
               Spitzbergen
               ;
               I
               must
               now
               describe
               those
               that
               have
               undivided
               Feet
               with
               four
               Claws
               ,
               whereof
               I
               found
               three
               sorts
               ,
               viz.
               the
               
                 Mountain-Duck
                 ,
                 kirmew
              
               ,
               and
               Mallemucke
               .
            
             
               The
               Mountain-Duck
               is
               a
               kind
               of
               our
               wild
               Duck
               ,
               or
               rather
               wild
               Goose
               ,
               for
               she
               is
               of
               the
               bigness
               of
               a
               middling
               Goose
               ,
               and
               is
               more
               like
               a
               Goose
               about
               the
               Bill
               .
               It
               is
               a
               very
               handsom
               Bird
               ,
               because
               of
               its
               delicate
               spotted
               Feathers
               .
               They
               dive
               under
               Water
               as
               other
               Ducks
               do
               .
               The
               Drake
               hath
               black
               and
               white
               spotted
               Feathers
               ,
               
               and
               the
               Duck
               hath
               Feathers
               of
               the
               colour
               of
               a
               Partridge
               .
               The
               hindmost
               Claw
               is
               broad
               and
               short
               ,
               with
               a
               short
               Nail
               ;
               the
               Tail
               is
               bobb'd
               ,
               like
               that
               of
               other
               Ducks
               .
               I
               could
               find
               nothing
               in
               their
               Mews
               or
               Gizzards
               that
               could
               make
               me
               certain
               of
               thier
               Food
               ,
               but
               only
               Sand-stones
               .
               They
               fly
               a
               great
               many
               of
               them
               in
               flocks
               like
               other
               wild
               Ducks
               ;
               when
               they
               do
               see
               any
               Men
               ,
               they
               hold
               up
               their
               Heads
               and
               make
               a
               very
               long
               Neck
               .
               They
               make
               their
               Nests
               upon
               the
               low
               Islands
               ;
               they
               make
               them
               of
               the
               Feathers
               of
               their
               Bellies
               ,
               which
               they
               mix
               with
               Moss
               ;
               but
               these
               are
               not
               the
               same
               Feathers
               which
               are
               called
               the
               Edder-down
               .
            
             
               We
               found
               their
               Nests
               with
               two
               ,
               three
               ,
               or
               four
               Eggs
               in
               them
               ,
               the
               most
               whereof
               were
               rotten
               when
               we
               came
               to
               Spitzbergen
               ,
               but
               some
               of
               them
               were
               good
               to
               eat
               ;
               they
               are
               of
               a
               pale
               green
               ,
               somewhat
               bigger
               than
               our
               Duck-eggs
               ;
               the
               Seamen
               made
               an
               hole
               at
               each
               end
               ,
               and
               so
               blew
               the
               White
               and
               the
               Yolk
               out
               ,
               and
               strung
               the
               Shells
               upon
               a
               Packthread
               .
               I
               would
               have
               brought
               some
               of
               them
               to
               Hamburgh
               ,
               but
               they
               began
               to
               stink
               ,
               so
               that
               I
               was
               forced
               to
               fling
               them
               away
               ,
               although
               the
               Shells
               were
               entire
               .
               These
               Ducks
               have
               a
               very
               good
               Flesh
               ,
               we
               boyl'd
               and
               rosted
               them
               as
               we
               did
               the
               other
               Birds
               ,
               but
               the
               fat
               of
               them
               we
               flung
               away
               ,
               for
               it
               tasted
               of
               Train-oyl
               ,
               and
               made
               us
               vomit
               .
            
             
               The
               Ships
               that
               arrived
               at
               Spitzbergen
               before
               us
               got
               a
               great
               many
               of
               them
               .
            
             
               These
               Mountain-Ducks
               are
               not
               at
               all
               shy
               ,
               or
               afraid
               of
               Men
               ,
               when
               we
               first
               arrive
               there
               ,
               but
               afterwards
               they
               grow
               quite
               wild
               ,
               so
               that
               you
               can
               hardly
               come
               near
               enough
               to
               shoot
               them
               .
               That
               which
               I
               have
               drawn
               here
               was
               shot
               in
               the
               
               
                 South
                 Bay
              
               (
               in
               Spitzbergen
               )
               on
               the
               18th
               of
               June
               ;
               it
               is
               marked
               with
               c
               in
               the
               Tab.
               M.
               
            
          
           
             
               X.
               Of
               the
               Kirmew
               .
            
             
               The
               Kirmew
               hath
               a
               thin
               sharp-pointed
               Bill
               ,
               as
               red
               as
               Blood
               ;
               the
               shews
               very
               large
               ,
               especially
               when
               she
               stands
               upright
               ,
               because
               of
               her
               long
               Wings
               ,
               and
               Feathers
               of
               her
               Tail
               ,
               but
               when
               the
               Feathers
               are
               off
               ,
               there
               is
               no
               more
               Meat
               than
               upon
               a
               Sparrow
               .
               It
               is
               peculiar
               to
               this
               Bird
               to
               have
               very
               sharp
               pointed
               Wings
               ,
               and
               its
               Tail
               is
               longer
               than
               that
               of
               a
               Swallow
               ,
               and
               as
               long
               as
               the
               longest
               Feather
               of
               the
               Wings
               .
               Because
               of
               these
               long
               and
               sharp-pointed
               Feathers
               in
               her
               Wing
               and
               Tail
               ,
               she
               might
               very
               properly
               be
               called
               the
               Swallow-mew
               ,
               but
               it
               is
               commonly
               called
               Kirmew
               from
               its
               Cry.
               The
               Claws
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               the
               Skin
               between
               them
               ,
               are
               as
               red
               as
               Blood
               ;
               the
               Nails
               are
               black
               on
               all
               the
               four
               Claws
               ;
               the
               hindmost
               Claw
               is
               very
               little
               :
               The
               Legs
               are
               short
               and
               red
               :
               it
               shews
               very
               brisk
               and
               pert
               when
               it
               stands
               upright
               on
               its
               Legs
               .
               The
               Head
               at
               the
               top
               is
               black
               ,
               like
               a
               black
               Cap
               ;
               the
               sides
               of
               the
               Head
               are
               Snow
               white
               ,
               and
               the
               whole
               Body
               is
               of
               a
               Silver
               colour
               ,
               or
               white
               enclining
               to
               grey
               ;
               the
               Wings
               and
               Tail
               are
               white
               underneath
               ;
               one
               side
               of
               the
               Feathers
               of
               the
               Wings
               are
               black
               .
               All
               these
               differing
               colours
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               Blood-red
               Bill
               ,
               red
               Legs
               and
               Feet
               ,
               make
               her
               very
               beautiful
               her
               Feathers
               are
               thready
               or
               hairy
               ;
               she
               flies
               singly
               ,
               for
               so
               I
               saw
               her
               always
               in
               the
               
                 South
                 Haven
              
               ,
               and
               in
               other
               places
               where
               we
               were
               .
               Where
               their
               Nests
               are
               they
               fly
               in
               great
               numbers
               ;
               These
               they
               make
               of
               Moss
               .
               One
               can
               hardly
               
               discern
               their
               Eggs
               from
               their
               Nests
               ,
               for
               both
               of
               them
               are
               of
               a
               dirty
               white
               ,
               but
               the
               Eggs
               have
               black
               specks
               ;
               they
               are
               of
               the
               bignest
               of
               a
               Pigeon's
               Egg
               ;
               I
               eat
               of
               them
               at
               Spttzbergen
               ,
               and
               found
               them
               very
               good
               ,
               they
               tasted
               like
               the
               Lapwings
               Eggs
               ;
               the
               Yolk
               was
               red
               ,
               and
               the
               White
               blewish
               ;
               they
               are
               very
               sharp-pointed
               at
               one
               end
               .
               She
               defends
               her
               Nest
               and
               Eggs
               ,
               and
               flies
               directly
               at
               a
               Man
               ,
               biting
               and
               crying
               .
               It
               is
               the
               same
               with
               her
               as
               what
               we
               say
               of
               the
               Lapwing
               ;
               she
               endeavours
               to
               defend
               all
               the
               Meadow
               ,
               and
               yet
               cannot
               defend
               her
               own
               Nest
               .
            
             
               I
               brought
               about
               thirty
               of
               their
               Eggs
               with
               me
               to
               Hamburgh
               ,
               but
               they
               were
               rotten
               and
               stunk
               .
               It
               is
               a
               kind
               of
               a
               Hawk
               ,
               and
               throws
               herself
               into
               the
               Water
               ,
               as
               othe
               Mews
               do
               .
            
             
               I
               am
               of
               an
               opinion
               ,
               that
               she
               feeds
               on
               thee
               small
               grey
               Worms
               ,
               and
               perhaps
               on
               Shrimps
               and
               Prawns
               ,
               for
               I
               found
               no
               other
               Food
               they
               could
               get
               .
            
             
               I
               shot
               but
               one
               single
               Bird
               of
               them
               flying
               ,
               whitch
               I
               did
               not
               eat
               of
               ,
               because
               the
               large
               shot
               had
               torn
               it
               very
               much
               .
            
             
               This
               Bird
               is
               quite
               grey
               in
               our
               Countries
               ,
               which
               differs
               much
               from
               that
               of
               Spizbergen
               ,
               whose
               Feathers
               are
               much
               finer
               .
               That
               here
               delineated
               ,
               was
               shot
               ,
               by
               the
               
                 Birds
                 Song
              
               in
               Spitzbergen
               ,
               on
               the
               20th
               of
               June
               .
               See
               it
               Tab.
               N
               ,
               at
               b.
               
            
          
           
             
               XI
               .
               Of
               the
               Mallemucke
               .
            
             
               This
               Bird
               hath
               a
               remarkable
               Bill
               ,
               which
               is
               severally
               divided
               :
               The
               uppermost
               Bill
               hath
               next
               to
               the
               Head
               oblong
               and
               small
               Nostrils
               ;
               underneath
               them
               groweth
               out
               as
               it
               was
               a
               new
               Bill
               ,
               that
               rises
               up
               ,
               is
               crooked
               and
               very
               sharp-pointed
               .
            
             
             
               The
               under
               part
               of
               the
               Bill
               consists
               partly
               of
               four
               pieces
               ,
               two
               whereof
               meet
               in
               a
               point
               together
               downwars
               ,
               the
               other
               two
               gape
               upwards
               ;
               the
               two
               undermost
               that
               meet
               in
               a
               point
               ,
               meet
               exactly
               with
               the
               point
               of
               the
               upper
               Bill
               .
               The
               hinder
               Claw
               of
               the
               Feet
               of
               this
               Bird
               is
               very
               small
               ,
               of
               a
               grey
               colour
               ,
               and
               so
               are
               the
               other
               Claws
               and
               the
               Skin
               between
               them
               .
               The
               Tail
               is
               somewaht
               broad
               ,
               the
               Wings
               are
               longish
               after
               the
               manner
               of
               the
               Kirmew
               .
               They
               are
               not
               always
               of
               the
               same
               colour
               ;
               some
               are
               quite
               grey
               ,
               which
               we
               take
               to
               be
               the
               oldest
               ,
               others
               are
               grey
               ,
               on
               their
               Back
               and
               Wings
               ,
               but
               their
               Head
               and
               Belly
               are
               white
               ,
               which
               are
               the
               young
               ones
               :
               This
               is
               generally
               thought
               ,
               but
               I
               am
               of
               opinion
               ,
               that
               this
               difference
               of
               colour
               proceeds
               rather
               form
               a
               difference
               in
               kind
               than
               from
               a
               difference
               in
               age
               ;
               for
               the
               grey
               ones
               I
               only
               saw
               about
               Spitzbergen
               ,
               but
               they
               grey
               and
               white
               ones
               ,
               although
               I
               have
               seen
               some
               few
               of
               them
               at
               Spitzbergen
               ,
               yet
               we
               saw
               abundance
               more
               about
               the
               
                 North
                 Cape
              
               ,
               and
               Also
               about
               Hitland
               and
               England
               .
               He
               flies
               like
               a
               great
               Mew
               ,
               hovers
               near
               the
               Water
               with
               a
               very
               small
               motion
               of
               his
               Wings
               .
            
             
               They
               do
               not
               avoid
               a
               Strorm
               as
               our
               Mews
               do
               ,
               but
               they
               take
               good
               and
               bad
               together
               ,
               as
               it
               happens
               ;
               ours
               bend
               themselves
               like
               an
               Ear
               of
               Corn
               with
               the
               Wind
               ,
               which
               the
               Mallemucks
               do
               not
               :
               They
               do
               not
               much
               care
               for
               diving
               ,
               but
               when
               they
               wash
               themselves
               they
               sit
               upon
               the
               Water
               ,
               and
               put
               their
               Wings
               a-cross
               one
               over
               the
               other
               :
               They
               fly
               singly
               ;
               when
               they
               go
               to
               fly
               up
               thye
               wabble
               a
               great
               way
               before
               they
               can
               raise
               themselves
               upon
               the
               Wind
               ,
               but
               the
               Lumbs
               and
               Parrets
               that
               have
               but
               small
               Wings
               do
               it
               more
               .
               When
               they
               ran
               upon
               the
               Deck
               of
               the
               Ship
               ,
               They
               could
               not
               fly
               up
               before
               they
               came
               
               to
               a
               place
               where
               a
               step
               went
               down
               ,
               or
               from
               some
               advantageous
               rise
               .
               They
               flock
               in
               great
               numbers
               when
               we
               catch
               Whales
               ,
               and
               light
               down
               upon
               the
               live
               Whales
               ,
               bite
               them
               in
               their
               Backs
               ,
               and
               pick
               out
               great
               pieces
               of
               his
               fat
               ,
               even
               when
               he
               is
               yet
               alive
               ,
               and
               when
               we
               cut
               up
               the
               dead
               Whales
               ,
               there
               came
               so
               many
               of
               them
               about
               us
               ,
               that
               we
               could
               not
               imagine
               from
               whence
               they
               could
               all
               come
               ,
               so
               that
               we
               were
               forced
               to
               kill
               them
               with
               Sticks
               and
               with
               broad
               Nets
               in
               Frames
               ,
               such
               as
               they
               use
               in
               the
               Tenis-Court
               ,
               to
               be
               rid
               of
               them
               :
               They
               are
               so
               bold
               ,
               that
               they
               would
               not
               fly
               away
               ,
               although
               they
               saw
               us
               caome
               upon
               them
               ,
               but
               suffered
               themselves
               to
               be
               killed
               in
               great
               numbers
               ,
               which
               we
               hung
               upon
               the
               Tackle
               of
               our
               Ship.
               
            
             
               But
               after
               they
               began
               to
               be
               more
               shy
               of
               us
               ,
               and
               would
               not
               stay
               so
               long
               .
               They
               flock
               in
               so
               great
               numbers
               after
               the
               Whales
               ,
               that
               many
               of
               them
               are
               discovered
               by
               them
               ;
               wherefore
               I
               fancy
               ,
               that
               he
               flings
               up
               some
               fat
               when
               he
               blows
               the
               Water
               out
               ,
               which
               the
               Mallemucks
               eat
               .
               But
               a
               great
               many
               more
               ,
               when
               the
               Whale
               is
               wounded
               ,
               follow
               the
               bloody
               track
               left
               in
               ther
               Water
               ,
               for
               then
               they
               are
               numberless
               .
               They
               also
               often
               discover
               a
               dead
               Whale
               ,
               and
               so
               we
               get
               them
               sometimes
               without
               any
               great
               trouble
               .
            
             
               His
               Name
               is
               given
               him
               ,
               because
               he
               is
               so
               silly
               or
               mad
               (
               which
               the
               Dutch
               call
               Mall
               )
               to
               suffer
               himself
               to
               be
               so
               easily
               killed
               ,
               whereunto
               is
               put
               the
               word
               Mucke
               ,
               which
               signifies
               a
               Gnatt
               ,
               because
               they
               are
               as
               numerous
               as
               Gantts
               ;
               so
               that
               the
               Name
               Mallemucke
               signifieth
               as
               much
               as
               silly
               Gnatts
               ,
               or
               mad
               Gantts
               .
            
             
               They
               eat
               so
               much
               of
               the
               fat
               of
               the
               Whales
               ,
               till
               they
               spew
               it
               up
               again
               ,
               and
               tumble
               them selves
               over
               and
               over
               in
               the
               water
               until
               they
               vomit
               
               up
               the
               Train-oyl
               ,
               and
               then
               they
               begin
               to
               eat
               afresh
               ,
               until
               they
               grow
               weary
               of
               eating
               :
               They
               bite
               one
               another
               ,
               and
               fight
               together
               ,
               which
               is
               very
               good
               sport
               ,
               about
               a
               piece
               of
               Fat
               ,
               fiercely
               ,
               although
               there
               is
               enough
               for
               them
               all
               ,
               and
               to
               spare
               .
            
             
               When
               they
               are
               full
               they
               rest
               upon
               the
               Ice
               or
               Water
               .
               I
               really
               believe
               it
               is
               the
               most
               devouring
               Bird
               of
               all
               ,
               for
               he
               eats
               till
               he
               can
               stand
               no
               longer
               ,
               but
               falls
               down
               .
               He
               bites
               very
               hard
               ,
               but
               the
               Burgermeister
               bites
               yet
               harder
               ,
               to
               whom
               he
               submits
               himself
               ,
               and
               lies
               down
               before
               him
               to
               be
               bit
               by
               the
               Burgermeister
               ,
               which
               he
               does
               very
               severely
               ,
               yet
               the
               Mallemucke
               feels
               little
               or
               nothing
               of
               it
               ,
               his
               Feathers
               are
               so
               thick
               ;
               which
               I
               conclude
               ,
               because
               he
               is
               not
               easily
               shot
               ,
               but
               will
               endure
               a
               great
               blow
               ;
               nor
               is
               it
               easie
               to
               kill
               him
               with
               a
               Stick
               at
               one
               blow
               .
               When
               they
               steer
               themselves
               in
               the
               Water
               with
               their
               Legs
               ,
               they
               have
               countinually
               an
               eye
               upon
               their
               Prey
               ,
               yet
               they
               mind
               both
               the
               Man
               and
               their
               Prey
               ;
               but
               if
               you
               have
               a
               long
               Stick
               ,
               they
               cannot
               get
               up
               so
               soon
               or
               swift
               but
               you
               may
               have
               a
               blow
               at
               them
               .
               He
               is
               the
               first
               and
               commonest
               Bird
               of
               all
               you
               see
               in
               Greenland
               ;
               they
               cry
               all
               togehter
               ,
               and
               it
               sounds
               afar
               off
               as
               if
               they
               were
               Frogs
               .
               He
               walks
               but
               ill
               upon
               the
               Land
               and
               Ice
               ,
               like
               a
               Child
               that
               just
               learns
               to
               go
               ,
               but
               he
               understands
               better
               to
               fly
               ;
               you
               see
               him
               always
               near
               unto
               the
               surface
               of
               the
               Water
               ,
               for
               he
               is
               very
               light
               .
               Of
               all
               the
               Birds
               of
               Prey
               ,
               I
               believe
               ,
               he
               hath
               the
               least
               Meat
               on
               him
               .
               He
               builds
               his
               Nest
               high
               on
               the
               Mountains
               ,
               yet
               not
               so
               very
               high
               as
               the
               Bungermeister
               ,
               yet
               it
               was
               too
               high
               for
               me
               ,
               I
               could
               not
               come
               at
               them
               .
               His
               Breast
               and
               Legs
               only
               are
               to
               be
               eaten
               ,
               they
               are
               tough
               ,
               and
               taste
               strong
               of
               Train
               oyl
               ;
               when
               
               you
               will
               eat
               them
               you
               must
               hang
               them
               up
               by
               the
               Legs
               ,
               that
               the
               Fat
               of
               the
               Whales
               ,
               or
               the
               Train-oyl
               ,
               may
               run
               out
               of
               them
               ,
               for
               two
               or
               three
               day
               ,
               and
               that
               the
               Wind
               may
               blow
               thro'
               them
               and
               the
               Frost
               pierce
               then
               also
               ;
               them
               you
               lay
               them
               into
               fresh
               Water
               ,
               that
               the
               rankness
               may
               be
               drawn
               out
               ,
               afterwards
               boil
               and
               fry
               them
               in
               Butter
               .
               They
               are
               every
               where
               seen
               in
               the
               North
               Sea
               ,
               as
               I
               have
               said
               before
               ,
               yet
               they
               are
               differing
               .
               This
               that
               you
               see
               here
               I
               did
               design
               among
               the
               Ice
               the
               first
               of
               June
               .
               Tab.
               N
               at
               c.
               
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             III.
             
          
           
             of
             some
             other
             Birds
             that
             I
             did
             not
             catch
             or
             delineate
             .
          
           
             AMongst
             these
             are
             the
             
               Red
               Gees
            
             ,
             which
             were
             shewn
             unto
             me
             as
             they
             were
             flying
             :
             They
             are
             Geese
             with
             long
             Legs
             ,
             that
             fly
             in
             flocks
             ;
             there
             is
             many
             of
             them
             in
             
               Russia
               ,
               Norway
            
             ,
             and
             Jutland
             .
          
           
             Then
             I
             saw
             another
             Bird
             flying
             singly
             with
             broad
             Feet
             ,
             a
             very
             handsom
             Bird
             ,
             called
             
               John
               of
               Ghent
            
             ;
             it
             is
             as
             big
             as
             a
             Stork
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             same
             shape
             with
             white
             and
             black
             Feathers
             ;
             he
             hovers
             in
             the
             Air
             ,
             and
             moveth
             his
             Wings
             but
             very
             little
             ;
             when
             he
             cometh
             to
             the
             Ice
             he
             turns
             back
             again
             .
             It
             is
             a
             kind
             of
             a
             Hawk
             ,
             and
             I
             have
             reason
             to
             believe
             that
             he
             hath
             a
             very
             sharp
             sight
             ,
             for
             he
             shoots
             down
             from
             a
             great
             height
             into
             the
             Water
             .
             They
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             Brains
             of
             this
             Bird
             are
             in
             great
             esteem
             ,
             but
             for
             what
             I
             could
             never
             learn.
             
          
           
           
             He
             is
             also
             seen
             in
             the
             Spanish
             Sea
             ,
             and
             every
             where
             in
             the
             North
             Sea
             ,
             but
             most
             commonly
             he
             is
             seen
             where
             they
             catch
             Herrings
             .
          
           
             I
             was
             also
             informed
             ,
             that
             a
             black
             Crow
             was
             seen
             in
             Spitzbergen
             ;
             other
             Birds
             are
             not
             seen
             there
             ,
             except
             it
             may
             be
             now
             and
             then
             a
             single
             one
             that
             strays
             and
             so
             cometh
             thither
             ,
             as
             the
             crow
             did
             .
             All
             these
             Birds
             come
             at
             certain
             times
             ,
             and
             abide
             at
             this
             place
             as
             long
             as
             the
             Sun
             shines
             ;
             afterwards
             ,
             when
             the
             Cold
             begins
             to
             encrease
             ,
             and
             the
             Nights
             lengthen
             ,
             every
             one
             of
             them
             returns
             to
             its
             own
             place
             again
             .
             When
             they
             are
             going
             from
             thence
             they
             gather
             all
             together
             ,
             and
             when
             they
             are
             all
             met
             they
             
               fly
               away
            
             ,
             every
             kind
             by
             themselves
             ,
             which
             hath
             been
             very
             often
             observed
             :
             Whence
             I
             conclude
             they
             cannot
             live
             in
             this
             intolerable
             cold
             place
             in
             the
             Winter
             .
             They
             rest
             as
             well
             upon
             the
             Water
             as
             the
             Land
             ,
             (
             and
             when
             they
             fly
             up
             they
             look
             against
             the
             Wind
             )
             for
             else
             they
             would
             quite
             be
             tired
             in
             this
             long
             Journey
             .
          
           
             Whether
             the
             Mew
             called
             Rathsher
             ,
             that
             does
             not
             love
             the
             Water
             ,
             performs
             its
             Journey
             in
             one
             day
             ,
             I
             cannot
             tell
             ;
             or
             whether
             Necessity
             compels
             him
             to
             rest
             upon
             the
             Water
             .
          
           
             Which
             way
             those
             Birds
             that
             have
             divided
             Claws
             on
             their
             Feet
             ,
             as
             the
             Snite
             ,
             the
             Snow-bird
             ,
             and
             the
             Ice-bird
             ,
             get
             over
             the
             Water
             ,
             I
             know
             not
             .
          
           
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             IV.
             
          
           
             Of
             the
             Four-footed
             Creatures
             .
          
           
             
               I.
               Of
               the
               Hart
               or
               Deer
               .
            
             
               This
               is
               not
               very
               unlike
               unto
               the
               Hart
               ,
               it
               hath
               cloven
               Feet
               like
               it
               ,
               and
               its
               Horns
               are
               also
               like
               unto
               a
               Hart
               or
               Elke
               ;
               they
               have
               three
               or
               four
               branches
               on
               each
               side
               ,
               which
               are
               about
               two
               inches
               broad
               ,
               and
               about
               a
               foot
               long
               ;
               their
               Ears
               are
               long
               ,
               and
               Tail
               very
               short
               :
               He
               is
               of
               a
               greyish
               yellow
               colour
               ,
               like
               an
               Hart
               or
               Deer
               .
               When
               they
               see
               a
               Man
               they
               run
               away
               ;
               if
               you
               stand
               still
               they
               stand
               also
               ,
               then
               you
               must
               immediately
               fire
               at
               them
               if
               you
               have
               a
               mind
               to
               hit
               them
               .
               They
               eat
               the
               Herbs
               and
               Grass
               .
               They
               are
               every
               where
               about
               Spitzbergen
               ,
               but
               above
               all
               in
               the
               Rene-field
               (
               or
               Deers-field
               )
               that
               hath
               its
               Name
               from
               thence
               ,
               where
               they
               'r
               very
               plentiful
               ,
               and
               also
               upon
               the
               Foreland
               near
               the
               
                 muscle
                 haven
              
               .
               I
               never
               saw
               them
               swim
               in
               the
               Water
               .
               As
               I
               was
               informed
               ,
               some
               Men
               did
               kill
               15
               or
               20
               of
               them
               on
               the
               
                 Vogel-song
                 (
                 Birds-song
              
               )
               the
               meat
               thereof
               roasted
               is
               of
               a
               very
               pleasant
               taste
               :
               We
               killed
               some
               of
               them
               presently
               ,
               at
               our
               first
               arrival
               in
               the
               Spring
               ,
               that
               were
               very
               lean
               ;
               wherefore
               we
               may
               conclude
               ,
               that
               they
               remain
               in
               this
               barren
               and
               cold
               Country
               of
               Spitzbergen
               all
               winter
               long
               ,
               and
               are
               contented
               with
               what
               they
               can
               get
               .
               See
               Tab.
               O
               ,
               at
               a.
               
            
          
           
             
             
               II.
               Of
               the
               Fox
               .
            
             
               Between
               our
               Foxes
               and
               those
               of
               Spitzbergen
               there
               is
               no
               great
               difference
               ;
               one
               of
               them
               I
               saw
               run
               by
               our
               Ship
               ,
               very
               near
               it
               ,
               his
               Head
               was
               black
               and
               Body
               white
               :
               They
               make
               such
               a
               noise
               ,
               as
               afar
               off
               it
               sounds
               as
               if
               a
               Man
               laugh'd
               .
               we
               saw
               them
               also
               run
               on
               the
               Ice
               .
               Their
               Food
               falls
               but
               short
               there
               ,
               they
               live
               upon
               Birds
               and
               Eggs.
               
            
             
               They
               go
               not
               at
               all
               into
               the
               Water
               ;
               we
               were
               hunting
               one
               of
               them
               in
               the
               
                 South
                 Haven
              
               ,
               and
               had
               surrounded
               him
               with
               twenty
               Men
               ,
               the
               Water
               was
               on
               one
               side
               of
               him
               ,
               and
               we
               endeavoured
               to
               drive
               him
               into
               it
               ,
               but
               he
               would
               not
               ,
               but
               jumped
               through
               one
               Man's
               Legs
               ,
               and
               run
               up
               into
               the
               Mountains
               ,
               where
               we
               could
               not
               follow
               him
               .
            
             
               The
               Ships
               Crew
               inform'd
               me
               ,
               that
               when
               he
               is
               hungry
               he
               lies
               down
               as
               if
               he
               was
               dead
               ,
               until
               the
               Birds
               fly
               to
               him
               to
               eat
               him
               ,
               which
               by
               that
               trick
               he
               catches
               and
               eats
               .
               But
               I
               believe
               that
               this
               is
               a
               Fable
               .
               Tab.
               O
               ,
               see
               b.
               
            
          
           
             
               III.
               Of
               the
               white
               Bear.
               
            
             
               These
               Bears
               are
               quite
               otherwise
               shaped
               than
               those
               that
               are
               seen
               in
               our
               Country
               ;
               they
               have
               a
               long
               Head
               like
               unto
               a
               Dog
               ,
               and
               a
               long
               Neck
               ,
               and
               they
               bark
               like
               Dogs
               that
               are
               hoarse
               ,
               and
               all
               their
               whole
               Body
               is
               much
               otherways
               shaped
               than
               ours
               .
               They
               are
               slenderer
               in
               the
               Body
               ,
               and
               a
               great
               deal
               swifter
               .
            
             
               Their
               Skins
               are
               brought
               to
               us
               ,
               which
               are
               very
               comfortable
               to
               those
               that
               travel
               in
               the
               Winter
               ;
               they
               prepare
               or
               dress
               the
               Skins
               at
               
               Coffins
               that
               are
               opened
               .
               They
               also
               eat
               Birds
               and
               Eggs.
               We
               kill
               them
               with
               Guns
               ,
               or
               any
               other
               way
               we
               can
               .
               We
               caught
               three
               of
               them
               ,
               one
               whereof
               I
               drew
               after
               the
               life
               ,
               on
               the
               13th
               of
               July
               .
            
             
               What
               becometh
               of
               these
               Bears
               and
               Foxes
               .
               in
               the
               Winter-time
               I
               do
               not
               know
               ,
               in
               the
               Summer
               they
               have
               in
               some
               places
               ,
               for
               a
               few
               months
               ,
               Provision
               enough
               ,
               but
               in
               the
               Winter
               ,
               when
               the
               Rocks
               and
               Hills
               are
               covered
               with
               Snow
               ,
               there
               is
               but
               very
               little
               to
               be
               had
               for
               them
               ;
               yet
               being
               it
               is
               supposed
               that
               the
               Deer
               stay
               also
               there
               all
               Winter
               long
               ,
               I
               believe
               that
               these
               Beasts
               do
               the
               same
               .
               Tab
               O
               ,
               see
               e.
               
            
          
           
             
               IV.
               Of
               the
               Sea-dogs
               ,
               called
               Rubbs
               and
               Seales
               .
            
             
               I
               have
               still
               two
               more
               Beasts
               to
               describe
               ,
               that
               live
               as
               well
               in
               the
               Water
               as
               on
               the
               Land
               and
               Ice
               ,
               and
               they
               have
               also
               on
               their
               Feet
               five
               Claws
               like
               Fingers
               ,
               that
               are
               joyned
               together
               with
               a
               thick
               Skin
               ,
               like
               unto
               the
               Feet
               of
               a
               Goose
               :
               The
               most
               known
               of
               these
               is
               the
               Seale
               ,
               which
               they
               also
               call
               Salldogg
               and
               Rubbe
               ,
               in
               the
               German
               Language
               ;
               the
               Head
               thereof
               is
               like
               unto
               a
               Dog's
               Head
               ,
               with
               cropt
               Ears
               :
               Their
               Heads
               are
               not
               all
               alike
               ,
               sor
               some
               are
               rounder
               ,
               and
               others
               longer
               or
               leaner
               :
               he
               hath
               a
               Beard
               about
               his
               Mouth
               ,
               and
               Hair
               on
               the
               Nose
               and
               the
               Eye-lids
               ,
               yet
               seldom
               above
               four
               :
               the
               Eyes
               are
               very
               large
               ,
               hollow
               ,
               and
               very
               clear
               :
               their
               Skin
               is
               grown
               over
               with
               short
               Hair
               :
               they
               are
               of
               several
               colours
               ,
               spotted
               like
               Tygers
               ,
               some
               are
               black
               with
               white
               spots
               ,
               some
               yellow
               ,
               some
               grey
               ,
               and
               others
               red
               :
               their
               Teeth
               are
               sharp
               like
               a
               Dogs
               ,
               wherewith
               he
               can
               bite
               off
               a
               Stick
               as
               thick
               as
               ones
               Arm
               :
               On
               their
               Toes
               they
               have
               black
               ,
               
               long
               ,
               and
               sharp
               Nails
               or
               Claws
               ;
               their
               Tail
               is
               short
               ;
               they
               bark
               like
               hoarse
               Dogs
               ;
               their
               little
               or
               young
               ones
               mew
               like
               Cats
               ;
               they
               go
               lame
               behind
               ;
               they
               can
               climb
               upon
               the
               high
               Ice
               ,
               whereon
               I
               saw
               them
               sleep
               ,
               chiefly
               when
               the
               Sun
               shined
               ,
               wherein
               they
               take
               great
               pleasure
               ,
               but
               when
               it
               is
               stormy
               weather
               they
               must
               march
               off
               and
               leave
               it
               ,
               for
               the
               Waves
               of
               the
               Sea
               beat
               with
               great
               violence
               against
               it
               ,
               as
               if
               it
               were
               against
               Rocks
               ,
               as
               I
               have
               mentioned
               already
               in
               the
               Chapter
               of
               Ice
               .
            
             
               We
               saw
               most
               of
               them
               upon
               the
               Ice
               about
               the
               West
               side
               near
               to
               the
               shoar
               ,
               where
               there
               was
               an
               incredible
               number
               of
               them
               ,
               that
               if
               the
               Master
               of
               a
               Ship
               should
               not
               catch
               Whales
               enough
               ,
               they
               might
               lade
               their
               Ship
               with
               Seales
               only
               ;
               and
               we
               have
               Examples
               that
               little
               Ships
               have
               taken
               their
               Lading
               only
               of
               them
               ,
               but
               it
               is
               very
               troublesome
               to
               flea
               them
               :
               Nor
               are
               they
               all
               alike
               fat
               at
               the
               time
               when
               we
               arrive
               there
               .
            
             
               By
               Spitzbergen
               we
               see
               but
               a
               few
               of
               them
               ,
               but
               instead
               of
               them
               there
               is
               plenty
               of
               Sea-horses
               .
               Where
               many
               Seales
               are
               seen
               ,
               that
               is
               not
               a
               good
               place
               to
               catch
               Whales
               in
               .
               It
               seemeth
               as
               if
               they
               leave
               but
               very
               little
               for
               the
               Whale
               to
               live
               upon
               ,
               because
               there
               is
               so
               great
               a
               number
               of
               them
               .
               They
               feed
               upon
               small
               Fishes
               ,
               as
               far
               as
               I
               could
               understand
               ;
               we
               cut
               open
               several
               of
               them
               ,
               and
               found
               nothing
               in
               their
               Stomachs
               but
               great
               and
               long
               whitish
               Worms
               of
               the
               thickness
               of
               ones
               little
               Finger
               .
               We
               come
               up
               to
               them
               where
               they
               〈…〉
               the
               large
               sheets
               of
               Ice
               ;
               we
               make
               a
               〈…〉
               with
               shouting
               ,
               which
               astonisheth
               〈…〉
               ,
               or
               else
               out
               of
               novelty
               they
               hold
               〈…〉
               Noses
               very
               high
               ,
               and
               make
               a
               long
               〈…〉
               Grey-hounds
               do
               ,
               and
               bark
               :
               in
               
               Spitzbergen
               after
               this
               manner
               :
               They
               heat
               Saw-dust
               ,
               and
               tread
               these
               Skins
               in
               it
               ,
               which
               sucks
               up
               the
               Fat
               ,
               and
               the
               Skins
               become
               to
               be
               dry
               ,
               after
               the
               same
               manner
               as
               we
               use
               to
               take
               out
               spots
               of
               Fat
               out
               of
               sine
               Linnen
               or
               other
               Clothes
               ,
               when
               we
               hold
               it
               against
               the
               Sun
               :
               They
               are
               of
               the
               same
               bigness
               as
               ours
               ,
               great
               and
               small
               :
               Their
               Hair
               is
               long
               ,
               and
               as
               soft
               as
               Wool
               :
               their
               Nose
               and
               Mouth
               are
               black
               before
               ,
               and
               their
               Talons
               also
               black
               :
               The
               fat
               of
               their
               Feet
               melted
               out
               ,
               is
               used
               for
               pain
               of
               the
               Limbs
               ;
               it
               is
               also
               given
               to
               Women
               in
               travail
               ,
               to
               bring
               away
               the
               Child
               ;
               it
               causes
               also
               a
               plentiful
               Sweat.
               The
               said
               Fat
               is
               very
               spongy
               ,
               and
               feels
               very
               soft
               ;
               it
               is
               best
               to
               try
               it
               up
               there
               presently
               :
               I
               strove
               to
               keep
               it
               until
               I
               should
               come
               home
               ,
               but
               it
               grew
               foul
               ,
               rancid
               ,
               and
               stinking
               .
               I
               believe
               it
               would
               be
               very
               good
               to
               try
               it
               up
               with
               Orris-root
               ,
               for
               then
               it
               would
               remain
               the
               longer
               good
               and
               smell
               well
               .
            
             
               The
               other
               is
               like
               Suet
               when
               it
               is
               tryed
               up
               ,
               it
               becometh
               thin
               like
               Train-oyl
               ,
               or
               the
               fat
               of
               Whales
               :
               But
               this
               is
               not
               to
               be
               compared
               to
               the
               other
               for
               Vertue
               and
               Goodness
               ,
               it
               is
               only
               used
               in
               Lamps
               ,
               where
               it
               does
               not
               stink
               so
               much
               as
               the
               Train-oyl
               :
               The
               Skippers
               met
               it
               out
               there
               ,
               and
               bring
               it
               home
               with
               them
               to
               sell
               it
               for
               Train-oyl
               .
               Their
               Flesh
               is
               whitish
               and
               fat
               ,
               like
               that
               of
               a
               Sheep
               ,
               but
               I
               did
               not
               care
               to
               try
               how
               it
               tasted
               ,
               for
               I
               was
               afraid
               that
               my
               Hair
               would
               turn
               grey
               before
               its
               time
               ,
               for
               the
               Seamen
               are
               of
               opinion
               ,
               that
               if
               they
               eat
               of
               it
               ,
               it
               makes
               their
               Hair
               grey
               .
               They
               suckle
               their
               .
               Young
               with
               their
               Milk
               ,
               which
               is
               very
               white
               and
               fat
               ,
               as
               I
               observed
               ,
               when
               we
               cut
               up
               an
               old
               suckling
               She
               one
               .
               They
               say
               our
               Bears
               have
               a
               very
               ●●ft
               Head
               ,
               but
               I
               round
               the
               contary
               in
               
               these
               at
               
                 Spitzbergen
                 ▪
              
               for
               we
               struck
               them
               with
               large
               and
               thick
               Cudgels
               ,
               upon
               their
               Heads
               ,
               with
               such
               blows
               that
               would
               have
               knock'd
               down
               a
               Bullock
               ,
               and
               yet
               they
               did
               not
               matter
               it
               at
               all
               .
               When
               we
               had
               a
               mind
               to
               kill
               them
               ,
               we
               were
               forced
               to
               run
               them
               through
               with
               our
               Launces
               .
            
             
               They
               swim
               from
               one
               sheet
               of
               Ice
               to
               the
               other
               ,
               they
               also
               dive
               under
               Water
               ,
               when
               they
               were
               at
               one
               side
               of
               our
               Long-boat
               ,
               they
               did
               dive
               ,
               and
               came
               up
               again
               on
               the
               other
               .
               They
               also
               run
               upon
               the
               Land.
               I
               did
               not
               hear
               them
               roar
               so
               as
               ours
               do
               ,
               but
               they
               only
               bark
               .
            
             
               We
               could
               not
               discern
               the
               young
               ones
               from
               the
               old
               ones
               ,
               but
               only
               by
               the
               two
               furthermost
               long
               Teeth
               ,
               which
               in
               the
               young
               were
               hollow
               within
               ,
               but
               those
               of
               the
               old
               ones
               were
               close
               and
               solid
               .
               If
               you
               burn
               their
               Teeth
               ,
               and
               powder
               them
               ,
               and
               give
               them
               inwardly
               ,
               it
               disperseth
               coagulated
               Blood.
               The
               young
               ones
               keep
               constantly
               close
               to
               the
               old
               ones
               ;
               we
               observed
               that
               two
               young
               ones
               and
               an
               old
               one
               would
               not
               leave
               one
               another
               ,
               for
               if
               one
               ran
               away
               ,
               it
               turn'd
               back
               again
               immediately
               as
               soon
               as
               it
               did
               hear
               the
               others
               ,
               as
               if
               it
               would
               come
               to
               help
               them
               .
               The
               old
               one
               run
               to
               the
               young
               one
               ,
               and
               the
               young
               one
               to
               the
               old
               one
               ,
               and
               rather
               than
               they
               would
               leave
               one
               another
               ,
               they
               would
               suffer
               themselves
               to
               be
               all
               killed
               .
            
             
               They
               feed
               upon
               the
               Carcasses
               of
               Whales
               ,
               and
               near
               them
               we
               killed
               the
               most
               :
               They
               also
               eat
               Men
               alive
               when
               they
               have
               an
               opportunity
               to
               master
               them
               :
               They
               remove
               or
               roll
               away
               the
               Stones
               of
               the
               burying
               places
               ,
               open
               the
               Coffins
               ,
               and
               eat
               the
               dead
               Men
               ,
               which
               many
               have
               seen
               ,
               and
               we
               can
               also
               conclude
               it
               from
               hence
               ,
               because
               we
               find
               the
               dead
               Mens
               Bones
               lye
               by
               the
               
               rest
               are
               the
               same
               ,
               for
               when
               we
               thought
               that
               they
               lay
               dead
               in
               our
               Long-boats
               ,
               they
               snapt
               about
               them
               ,
               so
               that
               we
               were
               forced
               to
               kill
               them
               .
            
             
               For
               Sports
               sake
               I
               went
               once
               along
               with
               them
               upon
               the
               Ice
               ,
               and
               run
               one
               through
               the
               Body
               with
               my
               Sword
               several
               times
               ,
               which
               he
               did
               not
               matter
               at
               all
               ;
               I
               fell
               into
               the
               Snow
               up
               to
               my
               Knees
               ,
               and
               he
               barked
               at
               me
               ,
               and
               offered
               to
               bite
               me
               ,
               which
               I
               avoided
               ,
               and
               when
               I
               got
               up
               again
               I
               ran
               after
               him
               ,
               and
               gave
               him
               several
               wounds
               more
               ,
               which
               he
               was
               not
               concerned
               at
               ,
               but
               ran
               swifter
               than
               I
               could
               ,
               and
               flung
               himself
               off
               from
               the
               Ice
               into
               the
               Sea
               ,
               and
               went
               down
               to
               the
               bottom
               .
               Tab.
               P
               ,
               see
               a.
               
            
          
           
             
               V.
               Of
               the
               Sea-horse
               ,
               called
               by
               some
               the
               Morse
               .
            
             
               The
               Sea-horse
               is
               not
               unlike
               unto
               the
               Seale
               in
               the
               shape
               of
               the
               Body
               ,
               only
               is
               much
               bigger
               than
               the
               other
               :
               He
               is
               as
               big
               as
               an
               Ox
               :
               Their
               Legs
               are
               also
               like
               those
               of
               the
               Seale
               ,
               for
               they
               have
               five
               Claws
               as
               well
               on
               the
               fore
               as
               the
               hinder
               Feet
               ,
               but
               they
               have
               only
               short
               Nails
               :
               Their
               Head
               is
               thicker
               ,
               and
               rounder
               ,
               and
               also
               much
               stronger
               :
               Their
               Skin
               is
               an
               inch
               thick
               ,
               chiefly
               about
               the
               Neck
               ,
               covered
               with
               short
               Mouse-coloured
               Hair
               ,
               some
               reddish
               ,
               some
               grey
               ,
               some
               have
               but
               little
               Hair
               ,
               and
               are
               mangy
               ,
               and
               full
               of
               Scarrs
               that
               are
               bitten
               ,
               and
               look
               as
               if
               they
               were
               flea'd
               ;
               every
               where
               about
               their
               Joints
               their
               Skin
               is
               full
               of
               Lines
               ,
               as
               the
               inside
               of
               a
               Man's
               Hand
               :
               They
               have
               two
               great
               and
               long
               Teeth
               in
               their
               upper
               Jaw-bone
               ,
               that
               hang
               down
               below
               their
               under
               Lips
               ,
               that
               are
               about
               a
               foot
               and
               two
               foot
               long
               ,
               sometimes
               they
               are
               longer
               :
               The
               young
               ones
               have
               no
               great
               Teeth
               
               at
               all
               ,
               but
               they
               grow
               in
               time
               as
               they
               grow
               older
               .
               All
               the
               Sea-horses
               have
               two
               firm
               long
               Teeth
               ;
               yet
               I
               have
               seen
               old
               ones
               that
               had
               but
               one
               ;
               it
               may
               be
               that
               sometimes
               they
               loose
               them
               when
               they
               fight
               ,
               or
               otherwise
               they
               may
               fall
               out
               of
               themselves
               ,
               for
               I
               observed
               that
               some
               of
               them
               had
               foul
               ,
               hollow
               ,
               rotten
               Teeth
               .
               These
               two
               long
               Teeth
               are
               esteemed
               beyond
               Ivory
               ,
               because
               they
               are
               so
               very
               white
               ,
               and
               are
               dearer
               ;
               they
               are
               close
               and
               firm
               within
               ,
               and
               heavy
               ,
               but
               the
               Root
               thereof
               is
               hollow
               .
               Of
               their
               Teeth
               are
               made
               Knife-hafts
               ,
               Boxes
               ,
               &c.
               
               The
               Jutlanders
               make
               Buttons
               for
               their
               Clothes
               of
               the
               other
               Teeth
               .
               Their
               Mouth
               is
               very
               broad
               before
               ,
               like
               a
               Bullocks
               ,
               whereon
               grow
               above
               and
               underneath
               several
               Bristles
               that
               are
               hollow
               within
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               bigness
               of
               a
               Straw
               :
               Of
               these
               Bristles
               the
               Seamen
               make
               Rings
               ,
               which
               they
               wear
               on
               their
               Fingers
               for
               the
               Cramp
               .
               Above
               the
               uppermost
               Beard
               they
               have
               two
               semicircular
               Nostrils
               ,
               whereout
               he
               blows
               the
               Water
               ,
               like
               the
               Whale
               ,
               yet
               with
               a
               less
               noise
               .
               Their
               Eyes
               are
               at
               a
               good
               distance
               from
               the
               Nose
               ;
               they
               have
               Eyelids
               as
               other
               fourfooted
               Beasts
               have
               ;
               his
               Eyes
               are
               naturally
               as
               red
               as
               Blood
               when
               he
               doth
               not
               turn
               them
               ,
               and
               I
               could
               see
               no
               difference
               when
               they
               were
               moved
               ,
               for
               they
               always
               turn'd
               their
               Eyes
               when
               they
               did
               look
               upon
               me
               ,
               and
               then
               they
               look
               much
               uglier
               ,
               though
               they
               are
               never
               handsom
               .
               Their
               Ears
               are
               somewhat
               higher
               than
               the
               Eyes
               ,
               but
               very
               near
               to
               them
               ,
               which
               are
               like
               those
               of
               the
               Seales
               .
               Their
               Tongue
               is
               at
               least
               as
               big
               as
               a
               Neat's
               ,
               when
               it
               is
               but
               newly
               boiled
               it
               may
               be
               eaten
               ,
               but
               if
               it
               is
               laid
               by
               for
               two
               or
               three
               days
               ,
               it
               becomes
               rank
               ,
               like
               Train-oyl
               .
               Their
               Neck
               is
               very
               thick
               ,
               wherefore
               he
               does
               not
               readily
               
               this
               fright
               of
               theirs
               we
               strike
               them
               with
               Half-pikes
               ,
               or
               long
               Poles
               upon
               their
               Noses
               ,
               and
               knock
               them
               down
               half
               dead
               ,
               but
               for
               all
               that
               ,
               they
               recover
               themselves
               ,
               and
               rise
               again
               :
               Some
               of
               them
               stand
               upon
               their
               defence
               ,
               bite
               at
               ,
               and
               run
               after
               the
               Men
               ,
               and
               they
               run
               as
               fast
               as
               a
               Man
               ,
               and
               their
               lame
               way
               of
               going
               doth
               not
               hinder
               them
               at
               all
               ,
               for
               they
               shove
               themselves
               along
               just
               like
               an
               Eel
               :
               Some
               run
               from
               the
               Ice
               to
               the
               Water
               ,
               and
               leave
               a
               yellow
               Dung
               behind
               them
               ,
               which
               they
               squirt
               out
               at
               their
               Hunters
               ,
               as
               the
               Hern
               does
               :
               They
               stink
               naturally
               abominably
               .
               Others
               stand
               in
               the
               Water
               with
               half
               their
               Belly
               ,
               and
               look
               about
               them
               to
               see
               what
               is
               done
               upon
               the
               Ice
               :
               When
               they
               are
               going
               to
               dive
               under
               the
               Water
               ,
               they
               hold
               up
               their
               Noses
               ,
               and
               make
               a
               long
               Neck
               :
               When
               they
               jump
               from
               the
               Ice
               under
               Water
               ,
               and
               also
               when
               they
               make
               a
               dance
               of
               Seales
               ,
               as
               they
               call
               it
               ,
               about
               the
               Ships
               ,
               they
               constantly
               dive
               with
               their
               Heads
               under
               water
               .
               They
               have
               their
               young
               ones
               by
               them
               ,
               one
               whereof
               we
               took
               away
               with
               us
               to
               the
               Ship
               alive
               ,
               but
               it
               would
               not
               eat
               any
               thing
               ,
               but
               did
               mew
               just
               like
               a
               Cat
               ,
               and
               if
               we
               touch'd
               him
               he
               would
               snap
               at
               us
               ,
               so
               we
               killed
               him
               .
               The
               biggest
               of
               them
               that
               I
               have
               seen
               were
               from
               five
               to
               eight
               foot
               long
               ,
               out
               of
               which
               we
               cut
               so
               much
               fat
               ,
               that
               we
               filled
               half
               a
               Barrel
               with
               it
               .
               He
               that
               I
               have
               drawn
               here
               was
               eight
               foot
               long
               .
               Their
               Fat
               is
               about
               three
               or
               four
               Fingers
               thick
               ,
               it
               covers
               the
               Flesh
               just
               under
               the
               Skin
               ,
               and
               we
               do
               flea
               it
               off
               as
               a
               Skin
               :
               This
               Fat
               yields
               the
               best
               Train-oyl
               ;
               the
               Flesh
               is
               quite
               black
               .
               They
               have
               abundance
               of
               Blood
               ,
               as
               if
               they
               were
               only
               filled
               up
               with
               it
               .
               They
               have
               great
               Livers
               ,
               Lungs
               ,
               and
               Hearts
               ,
               which
               we
               eat
               after
               we
               have
               drawn
               out
               the
               rankness
               with
               
               Water
               ,
               we
               boil
               them
               ,
               but
               this
               Disn
               is
               very
               loathsom
               ,
               so
               that
               I
               could
               not
               eat
               it
               ,
               it
               tasted
               so
               of
               Train-oyl
               .
               He
               hath
               abundance
               of
               Guts
               ,
               which
               are
               very
               small
               :
               I
               found
               no
               Fat
               within
               them
               ;
               their
               parts
               of
               generation
               is
               a
               hard
               Bone
               ,
               like
               unto
               that
               of
               a
               Dog
               ,
               about
               a
               span
               long
               ,
               covered
               with
               Sinews
               ;
               some
               were
               hardly
               so
               long
               as
               your
               little
               finger
               ,
               and
               yet
               they
               were
               not
               young
               ones
               neither
               .
               The
               Crystal
               of
               their
               Eye
               is
               not
               of
               the
               same
               colour
               always
               ,
               for
               some
               were
               like
               a
               Crystal
               ,
               others
               white
               ,
               others
               yellowish
               ,
               others
               reddish
               ;
               they
               are
               bigger
               than
               a
               Pea
               ;
               if
               one
               will
               keep
               them
               he
               must
               let
               them
               dry
               gently
               ,
               or
               one
               may
               wrap
               them
               in
               Linnen
               Rags
               ,
               and
               so
               lay
               them
               in
               a
               moist
               place
               ,
               for
               else
               they
               fly
               or
               crack
               to
               pieces
               .
               I
               am
               informed
               ,
               that
               when
               they
               couple
               they
               are
               very
               fierce
               ,
               so
               that
               a
               Man
               dares
               not
               come
               near
               them
               upon
               the
               Ice
               ,
               then
               they
               bring
               their
               Long
               boats
               near
               the
               Ice
               ,
               and
               so
               kill
               them
               out
               of
               the
               Boats.
               They
               do
               not
               quickly
               dye
               when
               the
               Blood
               is
               almost
               all
               run
               out
               ,
               after
               they
               have
               been
               mortally
               wounded
               and
               flea'd
               ,
               they
               still
               live
               ,
               and
               it
               looks
               ill
               to
               see
               them
               tumble
               themselves
               about
               in
               their
               own
               Blood.
               We
               had
               an
               Example
               of
               that
               in
               him
               that
               was
               eight
               foot
               long
               ,
               for
               when
               he
               was
               flea●d
               ,
               and
               most
               of
               the
               Fat
               cut
               off
               ,
               notwithstanding
               all
               the
               blows
               he
               had
               had
               upon
               his
               Head
               and
               Nose
               ,
               he
               would
               still
               snap
               at
               us
               ,
               and
               bite
               about
               him
               ,
               and
               took
               hold
               of
               a
               short
               Pike
               with
               his
               Teeth
               after
               such
               a
               rate
               ,
               as
               if
               nothing
               ailed
               him
               .
               Then
               we
               run
               a
               short
               Pike
               through
               his
               very
               Heart
               and
               Liver
               ,
               and
               there
               ran
               out
               as
               much
               Blood
               as
               if
               it
               had
               been
               a
               Bullock
               .
               The
               Masters
               of
               the
               Ships
               will
               not
               suffer
               these
               nasty
               doings
               in
               their
               Ships
               ,
               for
               it
               fouls
               them
               mightily
               .
               Not
               only
               this
               was
               so
               vivacious
               ,
               but
               all
               the
               
               turn
               his
               Head
               about
               ,
               and
               this
               is
               the
               reason
               why
               he
               turneth
               his
               Eyes
               generally
               .
               Their
               Tails
               are
               short
               ,
               like
               those
               of
               the
               Seale
               .
            
             
               From
               their
               Flesh
               we
               cut
               no
               Fat
               ,
               it
               is
               all
               mixed
               together
               like
               unto
               Hogs-flesh
               ,
               to
               which
               it
               is
               the
               likest
               :
               Their
               Heart
               and
               Liver
               we
               did
               eat
               ;
               they
               taste
               well
               enough
               ,
               chiefly
               where
               we
               have
               no
               great
               variety
               of
               Dishes
               .
               Their
               Yards
               are
               of
               a
               hard
               Bone
               ,
               about
               two
               foot
               long
               ,
               thick
               at
               the
               bottom
               ,
               and
               less
               before
               ,
               somewhat
               bent
               in
               the
               middle
               ,
               at
               the
               side
               towards
               their
               Belly
               it
               is
               flat
               ,
               but
               it
               is
               round
               without
               ,
               and
               it
               is
               every
               where
               covered
               over
               with
               Sinews
               .
               They
               turn
               also
               
                 Knife
                 hafts
              
               and
               other
               things
               out
               of
               this
               Bone.
               What
               their
               Food
               is
               I
               cannot
               certainly
               tell
               ,
               they
               may
               perhaps
               eat
               both
               Herbs
               and
               Fish
               ;
               that
               they
               eat
               Herbs
               ,
               I
               conclude
               from
               hence
               ,
               that
               their
               Dung
               looks
               like
               Horse-dung
               :
               That
               they
               eat
               Fish
               I
               judge
               ,
               because
               when
               we
               cut
               the
               Fat
               off
               a
               Whale
               one
               of
               them
               did
               often
               take
               the
               Skin
               with
               him
               under
               Water
               ,
               he
               did
               also
               fling
               it
               up
               ,
               and
               catch
               it
               again
               .
               The
               Burgermeister
               doth
               eat
               his
               Dung
               ,
               as
               is
               said
               before
               when
               I
               writ
               of
               the
               Birds
               .
               The
               Sea●horses
               keep
               generally
               about
               Spitzbergen
               ,
               for
               amongst
               the
               Ice-hills
               I
               saw
               none
               .
               They
               lay
               upon
               the
               Ice
               ,
               as
               I
               have
               already
               mentioned
               in
               the
               First
               Part
               ,
               by
               the
               12th
               of
               July
               very
               nastily
               ,
               as
               the
               Seales
               in
               great
               numbers
               ,
               and
               roar
               most
               terribly
               .
               They
               dive
               with
               their
               Head
               under
               the
               Water
               before
               ,
               like
               the
               Seales
               .
               They
               sleep
               and
               snore
               ,
               not
               only
               upon
               the
               Ice
               ,
               but
               also
               in
               the
               Water
               ,
               so
               that
               we
               take
               them
               several
               times
               for
               dead
               ones
               .
            
             
               They
               are
               very
               stout
               and
               unda●nted
               Creatures
               ,
               they
               stand
               by
               one
               another
               as
               long
               as
               they
               have
               Life
               ,
               and
               if
               any
               of
               them
               be
               wounded
               they
               make
               to
               the
               Long-boat
               ,
               notwithstanding
               
               that
               the
               Men
               strike
               ,
               and
               cut
               ,
               and
               push
               at
               them
               ▪
               some
               will
               dive
               under
               the
               Water
               near
               unto
               the
               Long-boats
               ,
               and
               cut
               holes
               in
               them
               with
               their
               great
               Teeth
               under
               Water
               ;
               and
               others
               without
               any
               fear
               at
               all
               make
               to
               the
               Boat
               ,
               and
               stand
               up
               with
               half
               their
               Body
               out
               of
               the
               Water
               ,
               and
               endeavour
               to
               get
               into
               the
               Boat.
               
            
             
               In
               such
               a
               Battel
               a
               Sea-horse
               did
               once
               strike
               with
               his
               Teeth
               or
               Tushes
               into
               the
               Boat
               ,
               and
               took
               hold
               of
               our
               Harponier
               with
               his
               long
               Tooth
               ,
               between
               his
               Shirt
               and
               the
               Wastband
               of
               his
               Breeches
               ,
               so
               that
               the
               Wastband
               broke
               ,
               otherwise
               he
               had
               pulled
               him
               under
               Water
               .
            
             
               When
               they
               roar
               ,
               if
               they
               are
               imitated
               ,
               they
               strive
               which
               shall
               get
               underneath
               the
               Water
               ,
               and
               fall
               a
               fighting
               and
               biting
               one
               another
               till
               they
               fetch
               Blood
               :
               Others
               strive
               to
               set
               at
               liberty
               the
               Sea-horses
               taken
               by
               the
               Men
               ,
               striving
               before
               each
               other
               to
               get
               to
               the
               Boat
               ,
               biting
               and
               g●ashing
               with
               their
               Teeth
               ,
               and
               roaring
               terribly
               :
               They
               never
               give
               over
               so
               long
               as
               one
               of
               them
               is
               alive
               ,
               and
               if
               you
               are
               forced
               to
               fly
               ,
               because
               of
               their
               unspeakable
               number
               ,
               they
               will
               follow
               the
               Boat
               till
               you
               lose
               them
               out
               of
               sight
               ,
               for
               they
               cannot
               follow
               far
               ,
               their
               great
               number
               hindring
               one
               another
               .
               This
               we
               found
               by
               
                 Weiheg
                 at
              
               by
               Spitzbergen
               ,
               where
               they
               got
               together
               in
               great
               numbers
               ,
               and
               made
               our
               Boat
               take
               in
               Water
               ,
               so
               that
               we
               were
               forced
               to
               flee
               ,
               yet
               they
               followed
               us
               as
               long
               as
               we
               could
               see
               them
               ,
               on
               the
               12th
               day
               of
               July
               .
               We
               take
               them
               only
               for
               their
               Teeth
               :
               You
               shall
               see
               almost
               a
               hundred
               of
               them
               before
               you
               find
               one
               that
               hath
               good
               Teeth
               ,
               for
               some
               of
               them
               are
               but
               small
               ,
               others
               have
               but
               one
               ,
               and
               others
               none
               at
               all
               .
            
             
             
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             V.
             
          
           
             Of
             the
             Crustaceous
             Fish
             that
             I
             observed
             .
          
           
             I
             Found
             two
             sorts
             of
             them
             ,
             
               viz.
               Crawfish
            
             and
             Starfish
             ;
             of
             the
             Crawfish
             I
             saw
             four
             sorts
             ,
             the
             Sea-spider
             ,
             as
             the
             French-men
             call
             them
             ,
             the
             
               red
               Prawn
            
             ,
             the
             
               small
               Prawn
            
             ,
             or
             the
             little
             small
             Shrimp
             ,
             and
             the
             
               Whale's
               Louse
            
             .
          
           
             The
             Starfish
             I
             put
             to
             them
             also
             ,
             because
             they
             have
             their
             Arms
             or
             Legs
             ,
             wherewith
             they
             move
             themselves
             ,
             and
             are
             incrustrated
             with
             Shells
             .
          
           
             
               I.
               Of
               the
               Sea
               Crawfish
               without
               a
               Tail
               ,
               or
               Sea
               Spider
               .
            
             
               This
               sort
               of
               Crawfish
               has
               no
               Tail
               ,
               but
               six
               Feet
               and
               two
               Claws
               .
               They
               are
               else
               very
               like
               Lobsters
               in
               the
               shape
               of
               their
               Body
               .
               They
               are
               of
               a
               dark
               brownish
               colour
               ,
               somewhat
               prickly
               on
               their
               Backs
               ,
               and
               hairy
               all
               over
               their
               Body
               .
               I
               have
               seen
               many
               of
               this
               kind
               with
               six
               Feet
               and
               
               two
               Claws
               ,
               in
               my
               Voyage
               to
               Spain
               ,
               whereof
               I
               have
               also
               made
               a
               draught
               in
               my
               Voyage
               into
               Spain
               ,
               (
               which
               I
               shall
               ,
               God
               willing
               ,
               communicate
               to
               the
               Curious
               )
               but
               they
               differ
               form
               these
               of
               Spitzbergen
               in
               their
               Bigness
               and
               Head
               ;
               this
               of
               Spizbergen
               hath
               a
               Head
               like
               a
               Lobster
               ,
               but
               the
               male
               of
               them
               that
               I
               saw
               in
               my
               Voyage
               to
               Spain
               ,
               made
               with
               its
               Head
               and
               Tail
               just
               the
               shape
               of
               a
               Lute
               .
               I
               did
               not
               eat
               any
               of
               the
               
                 Spitzbergen
                 Sea
                 Crawfish
              
               ,
               neither
               have
               I
               drawn
               them
               at
               Spitzbergen
               for
               want
               of
               time
               ,
               for
               I
               thought
               to
               have
               them
               brought
               along
               with
               me
               ,
               but
               they
               were
               carried
               away
               by
               the
               Rats
               .
               I
               got
               them
               in
               the
               
                 English
                 Haven
              
               ,
               on
               the
               19th
               of
               June
               ,
               I
               afterwards
               saw
               them
               in
               the
               North
               Sea
               ,
               not
               far
               from
               England
               ,
               where
               we
               bought
               from
               the
               Hilgeland
               -
               Fishermen
               a
               great
               Tarbut
               ,
               in
               whose
               Stomach
               we
               found
               a
               Sea
               Crawfish
               two
               spans
               long
               when
               its
               Feet
               were
               spread
               out
               .
            
          
           
             
               II.
               Of
               the
               Garnels
               or
               Prawns
               .
            
             
               Betwixt
               our
               Prawns
               and
               those
               of
               Spitzbergen
               .
               is
               no
               difference
               ,
               only
               that
               those
               of
               Spitzbergen
               are
               red
               before
               they
               are
               boiled
               .
               Their
               Head
               is
               peculiar
               ,
               consisting
               of
               two
               parts
               ,
               with
               several
               Horns
               ;
               the
               whole
               Head
               is
               broad
               ,
               at
               the
               end
               of
               the
               Head
               are
               the
               Eyes
               ,
               which
               stand
               out
               as
               Crawfishes
               do
               ;
               he
               doth
               not
               look
               downwards
               ,
               but
               streight
               before
               ,
               and
               sidewards
               .
               The
               Scale
               of
               his
               Back
               is
               like
               a
               Back-piece
               of
               Armour
               ,
               which
               also
               behind
               the
               Head
               ,
               in
               his
               Neck
               ,
               is
               somewhat
               bended
               in
               ,
               and
               behind
               it
               ,
               is
               a
               Prickle
               .
               After
               that
               follow
               six
               Plates
               ,
               like
               the
               Armour
               for
               the
               Arms
               and
               Legs
               ,
               and
               about
               the
               brims
               thereof
               are
               small
               black
               spots
               ,
               as
               if
               they
               were
               the
               Nails
               of
               the
               Armour
               .
               These
               Plates
               lye
               exactly
               round
               
               one
               upon
               the
               other
               .
               The
               Tall
               consisteth
               also
               of
               five
               parts
               ;
               when
               he
               expands
               it
               ,
               it
               is
               like
               the
               Tail
               of
               a
               Bird.
               He
               hath
               two
               Claws
               before
               ,
               the
               further
               part
               whereof
               looks
               somewhat
               like
               the
               Phangs
               of
               a
               Tooth-drawer
               .
               He
               hath
               18
               Legs
               ,
               wherof
               those
               that
               are
               nearest
               to
               the
               Claws
               are
               the
               shortest
               .
               The
               first
               eight
               Legs
               have
               four
               Joints
               ,
               whereof
               the
               uppermost
               is
               the
               longest
               ,
               and
               the
               undermost
               the
               shortest
               :
               They
               are
               not
               hairy
               at
               all
               .
               The
               ten
               hindmost
               Legs
               ,
               whereof
               the
               furthermost
               are
               the
               longest
               ,
               and
               the
               uppermost
               Joint
               is
               much
               thicker
               and
               shorter
               than
               the
               lowermost
               long
               ones
               have
               but
               two
               Joints
               ,
               the
               Feet
               whereof
               are
               somewhat
               bended
               under
               ,
               and
               are
               hairy
               .
               On
               these
               hindmost
               and
               undermost
               Joints
               grow
               out
               two
               shoots
               below
               ,
               on
               the
               rest
               but
               one
               .
               He
               shoots
               very
               swiftly
               along
               in
               the
               Water
               .
               He
               was
               as
               big
               as
               I
               have
               delineated
               him
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               Life
               .
               They
               are
               Food
               for
               the
               Birds
               ,
               as
               I
               have
               mentioned
               before
               .
            
          
           
             
               III.
               Of
               the
               lesser
               Garnel
               or
               Shrimp
               .
            
             
               I
               have
               also
               taken
               notice
               ,
               in
               my
               Voyage
               to
               Spitzbergen
               ,
               a
               sort
               of
               Shrimps
               that
               are
               like
               Worms
               ;
               the
               Head
               thereof
               is
               like
               the
               Head
               of
               a
               Fly
               ;
               it
               hath
               on
               the
               foremost
               part
               of
               its
               Head
               two
               Horns
               standing
               out
               ;
               it
               hath
               Scales
               like
               the
               Hog●louse
               ;
               its
               Back
               is
               round
               ,
               and
               broad
               downwards
               ;
               it
               hath
               12
               Legs
               ;
               on
               each
               side
               of
               the
               foremost
               .
               Scale
               it
               hath
               three
               Legs
               ;
               after
               you
               have
               told
               four
               Scales
               more
               ,
               there
               is
               on
               each
               side
               three
               Legs
               more
               ;
               they
               are
               no
               bigger
               than
               I
               have
               drawn
               them
               .
               The
               Birds
               eat
               them
               as
               their
               best
               Food
               ,
               being
               always
               in
               great
               numbers
               in
               those
               places
               where
               these
               Worms
               were
               .
               I
               
               found
               great
               plenty
               of
               them
               in
               the
               Danish
               Harbour
               ;
               between
               and
               underneath
               the
               Stones
               in
               the
               Water
               ;
               afterwards
               on
               the
               Eighth
               of
               July
               I
               found
               them
               in
               the
               Mussel-haven
               .
               I
               have
               also
               found
               them
               in
               the
               Seed
               of
               the
               Whales
               that
               swam
               upon
               the
               Water
               .
               See
               c
               in
               the
               Tab.
               P.
               
            
          
           
             
               IV.
               Of
               the
               Louse
               of
               the
               Whale
               .
            
             
               The
               
                 Whale's
                 Louse
              
               hath
               no
               resemblance
               at
               all
               to
               our
               Lice
               ,
               except
               in
               the
               Head
               ,
               and
               therefore
               it
               belongs
               rather
               to
               the
               Crustaceous
               Animals
               .
               Their
               Scales
               are
               as
               hard
               as
               those
               of
               the
               Prawns
               .
               They
               have
               a
               Head
               like
               a
               Louse
               ,
               with
               4
               Horns
               ;
               the
               two
               short
               Horns
               that
               stand
               out
               before
               have
               two
               knobs
               ,
               like
               Kettledrum-sticks
               ;
               the
               two
               other
               bended
               Horns
               are
               sharp
               before
               .
               It
               s
               Head
               hath
               almost
               th
               shape
               of
               an
               Acorn
               ,
               is
               cut
               very
               deep
               behind
               .
               It
               hath
               two
               Eyes
               ,
               and
               but
               one
               Nostril
               .
               The
               Neck
               is
               not
               made
               of
               stiff
               Scales
               ,
               but
               its
               Skin
               is
               like
               that
               between
               two
               Scales
               or
               Plates
               of
               a
               Lobster
               .
               It
               hath
               six
               Plates
               on
               the
               Back
               ;
               the
               foremost
               of
               them
               is
               shaped
               like
               a
               Weaver's
               Shutle
               .
               The
               Tail
               might
               be
               compared
               unto
               a
               Shield
               ,
               but
               it
               is
               very
               short
               .
               On
               the
               foremost
               Plate
               it
               hath
               Feet
               shaped
               like
               a
               Sythe
               ;
               they
               are
               round
               before
               ,
               and
               bent
               ,
               like
               the
               first
               Quarter
               of
               the
               Moon
               ;
               but
               on
               the
               inside
               they
               are
               toothed
               like
               a
               Saw
               ,
               and
               at
               the
               end
               thereof
               there
               is
               a
               sharp
               point
               :
               On
               each
               side
               of
               the
               second
               and
               third
               Plait
               grow
               out
               four
               Legs
               that
               are
               his
               Oars
               ;
               they
               have
               a
               short
               Joint
               below
               ,
               wherein
               these
               Oars
               are
               moved
               ;
               these
               they
               lay
               in
               a
               cross
               one
               over
               the
               other
               ,
               upon
               their
               Back
               ,
               when
               they
               feed
               upon
               the
               Whale
               ;
               or
               they
               put
               them
               upwards
               together
               ,
               as
               the
               Vaulters
               do
               when
               they
               jump
               over
               Swords
               :
               The
               six
               hindmost
               
               Legs
               are
               like
               those
               of
               a
               Crawfish
               ;
               they
               have
               three
               Joints
               on
               each
               Leg
               ,
               the
               foremost
               whereof
               are
               crooked
               like
               a
               Half-moon
               ,
               but
               before
               ,
               or
               on
               their
               ends
               they
               are
               very
               sharp
               pointed
               ,
               so
               that
               they
               can
               take
               firm
               hold
               as
               well
               of
               the
               Skin
               of
               Men
               as
               of
               that
               of
               the
               Whale
               ,
               so
               that
               you
               must
               cut
               them
               in
               pieces
               before
               you
               can
               pull
               them
               from
               the
               Skin
               .
               He
               that
               will
               have
               them
               alive
               ,
               must
               cut
               the
               Skin
               of
               the
               Whale
               out
               with
               them
               .
               They
               sit
               on
               certain
               places
               of
               the
               Whale's
               Body
               (
               as
               between
               his
               Finns
               ,
               on
               his
               P●denda
               ,
               and
               on
               his
               Lips
               )
               where
               he
               cannot
               easily
               rub
               himself
               ,
               and
               bite
               pieces
               out
               of
               his
               Skin
               ,
               as
               if
               the
               Birds
               had
               eaten
               him
               .
            
             
               Some
               Whales
               are
               full
               of
               Lice
               ,
               and
               others
               have
               never
               a
               one
               :
               The
               warmer
               the
               Weather
               is
               ,
               the
               more
               Lice
               they
               get
               ,
               as
               I
               am
               informed
               .
               The
               Figure
               ,
               that
               I
               give
               you
               here
               I
               delineated
               in
               the
               Mussel-haven
               ,
               on
               the
               7th
               of
               July
               .
               See
               Tab.
               Q
               at
               d.
               
            
          
           
             
               V.
               Of
               the
               Star-fish
               .
            
             
               I
               have
               seen
               but
               two
               sorts
               of
               these
               in
               my
               Voyage
               ,
               the
               first
               of
               them
               hath
               five
               Points
               or
               Rays
               like
               Legs
               ;
               it
               is
               quite
               otherwise
               shaped
               than
               those
               that
               I
               have
               seen
               in
               the
               
                 North
                 ,
                 Spanish
              
               ,
               and
               
                 Mediterranean
                 Seas
              
               .
               It
               is
               of
               a
               red
               colour
               :
               Above
               ,
               upon
               the
               plain
               of
               its
               Body
               it
               hath
               five
               double
               rows
               of
               sharp
               knobs
               or
               grains
               ;
               between
               each
               of
               these
               double
               rows
               is
               a
               Tingle
               row
               of
               the
               some
               knobs
               ,
               so
               that
               in
               all
               there
               is
               15
               rows
               of
               knobs
               on
               the
               whole
               plain
               .
               These
               15
               rows
               together
               make
               a
               Star
               of
               five
               outward
               bended
               points
               .
            
             
             
               As
               for
               the
               rest
               ,
               this
               Plain
               looketh
               like
               the
               Back
               of
               a
               Spider
               ,
               but
               if
               he
               is
               turned
               he
               looketh
               neatly
               ,
               and
               in
               this
               posture
               is
               seen
               in
               the
               middle
               a
               five-corner'd
               plain
               Star
               ,
               which
               I
               take
               to
               be
               its
               Mouth
               ,
               which
               he
               can
               open
               and
               draw
               together
               like
               a
               Purse
               .
               Round
               about
               this
               Star
               are
               small
               black
               Spots
               ,
               in
               rows
               ,
               of
               the
               shape
               of
               a
               Star.
               Further
               forwards
               ,
               about
               the
               middle
               Star
               or
               his
               Mouth
               a
               broader
               one
               is
               ,
               like
               unto
               the
               Flower
               of
               the
               Crowsfoot
               .
               From
               the
               middle
               Star
               proceed
               five
               Legs
               or
               Arms
               ,
               which
               have
               no
               knobs
               where
               they
               begin
               ,
               but
               begin
               first
               to
               have
               some
               behind
               the
               Flower
               like
               shaped
               Star
               ,
               on
               both
               sides
               to
               the
               end
               .
               The
               knobs
               between
               the
               Legs
               are
               soft
               to
               the
               touch
               ,
               like
               the
               Skin
               of
               an
               Egg.
               Their
               Legs
               are
               scaley
               ,
               about
               three
               fingers
               breadth
               long
               ,
               broader
               at
               their
               beginning
               ,
               where
               they
               have
               knobs
               ,
               and
               afterwards
               by
               degrees
               they
               grow
               narrower
               .
               Between
               the
               Scales
               on
               both
               sides
               the
               Knobs
               come
               out
               commonly
               three
               or
               four
               together
               ,
               and
               look
               like
               Warts
               .
               When
               he
               swims
               in
               the
               Water
               he
               spreads
               out
               these
               Knobs
               on
               each
               side
               ,
               just
               as
               a
               Bird
               doth
               his
               Feathers
               when
               it
               is
               going
               to
               fly
               .
               See
               Tab.
               
                 P
                 ▪
              
               at
               d.
               
            
             
               
                 Of
                 the
                 Second
                 Starfish
                 .
              
               
                 Besides
                 this
                 ,
                 another
                 fine
                 Starfish
                 came
                 to
                 my
                 Hands
                 ,
                 which
                 rather
                 ought
                 to
                 be
                 called
                 the
                 Co●alfish
                 ,
                 because
                 he
                 is
                 like
                 Twigs
                 of
                 Coral
                 ,
                 for
                 which
                 I
                 took
                 them
                 also
                 ,
                 before
                 I
                 perceived
                 that
                 he
                 was
                 alive
                 .
                 This
                 is
                 of
                 a
                 brighter
                 colour
                 than
                 the
                 other
                 ,
                 for
                 the
                 other
                 is
                 dark●red
                 .
                 It
                 s
                 Body
                 hath
                 ten
                 corners
                 ,
                 and
                 it
                 hath
                 a
                 Star
                 above
                 with
                 as
                 many
                 Rays
                 ;
                 each
                 of
                 these
                 one
                 may
                 compare
                 
                 unto
                 a
                 Sail
                 of
                 the
                 Windmills
                 that
                 the
                 Children
                 run
                 against
                 the
                 Wind
                 withal
                 ,
                 or
                 to
                 a
                 piece
                 of
                 such
                 Crosses
                 that
                 are
                 broad
                 before
                 ,
                 and
                 narrow
                 where
                 they
                 meet
                 together
                 ;
                 that
                 is
                 to
                 say
                 ,
                 of
                 the
                 shape
                 of
                 a
                 Dove-tail
                 :
                 It
                 feeleth
                 rough
                 :
                 The
                 lower
                 part
                 of
                 the
                 Body
                 is
                 very
                 neat
                 ;
                 in
                 the
                 middle
                 thereof
                 is
                 a
                 Star
                 with
                 six
                 points
                 ,
                 which
                 I
                 take
                 to
                 be
                 his
                 Mouth
                 :
                 About
                 the
                 Mouth
                 he
                 is
                 soft
                 ,
                 to
                 the
                 place
                 where
                 his
                 Legs
                 begin
                 :
                 Between
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 his
                 Legs
                 he
                 had
                 soft
                 Cavities
                 .
                 His
                 Legs
                 are
                 where
                 they
                 begin
                 thick
                 ,
                 and
                 have
                 in
                 the
                 middle
                 a
                 longish
                 hollow
                 or
                 gutter
                 ,
                 which
                 feeleth
                 soft
                 ;
                 on
                 the
                 Brim
                 they
                 are
                 adorned
                 with
                 Scales
                 that
                 lye
                 one
                 over
                 the
                 other
                 ,
                 no
                 otherwise
                 than
                 if
                 they
                 were
                 a
                 row
                 of
                 Coral
                 ,
                 but
                 underneath
                 the
                 Scales
                 are
                 twisted
                 ,
                 and
                 have
                 in
                 the
                 middle
                 forwards
                 small
                 black
                 Strokes
                 ,
                 but
                 the
                 Scales
                 lye
                 over
                 one
                 another
                 like
                 unto
                 the
                 Plaits
                 of
                 the
                 Crawfish
                 :
                 Besides
                 ,
                 where
                 the
                 Legs
                 come
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Body
                 ,
                 they
                 spread
                 themselves
                 double
                 into
                 Twigs
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 ,
                 as
                 is
                 said
                 before
                 ,
                 hollow
                 in
                 the
                 middle
                 ,
                 until
                 the
                 place
                 where
                 they
                 divide
                 themselves
                 into
                 several
                 Branches
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 grow
                 slenderer
                 by
                 degrees
                 .
                 The
                 undermost
                 small
                 Branches
                 are
                 scaley
                 all
                 round
                 ,
                 but
                 not
                 twisted
                 like
                 Ropes
                 ;
                 they
                 are
                 sharp
                 pointed
                 on
                 their
                 ends
                 like
                 unto
                 the
                 Feet
                 of
                 a
                 Spider
                 ,
                 wherefore
                 the
                 Seamen
                 call
                 them
                 Sea-spiders
                 .
                 When
                 they
                 swim
                 in
                 the
                 Water
                 they
                 hold
                 their
                 Legs
                 together
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 they
                 row
                 along
                 .
                 I
                 had
                 one
                 of
                 this
                 sort
                 that
                 was
                 a
                 span
                 long
                 ,
                 from
                 the
                 extremity
                 of
                 one
                 Foot
                 to
                 the
                 other
                 ;
                 but
                 this
                 I
                 have
                 delineated
                 is
                 less
                 .
                 The
                 biggest
                 are
                 the
                 handsomost
                 for
                 colour
                 .
                 They
                 dye
                 soon
                 after
                 they
                 are
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Water
                 ,
                 and
                 when
                 they
                 are
                 a
                 dying
                 they
                 bend
                 their
                 Legs
                 towards
                 the
                 Mouth
                 .
                 The
                 
                 Body
                 ,
                 when
                 it
                 is
                 dead
                 ,
                 soon
                 breaks
                 to
                 pieces
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 the
                 reason
                 that
                 I
                 could
                 not
                 keep
                 the
                 great
                 ones
                 .
                 See
                 Tab
                 P
                 ,
                 at
                 
                   e.
                   Rondeletius
                
                 ,
                 in
                 his
                 Book
                 of
                 Fish
                 ,
                 hath
                 delineated
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 same
                 shape
                 ,
                 but
                 this
                 is
                 not
                 the
                 same
                 species
                 ,
                 for
                 his
                 is
                 black
                 ;
                 neither
                 do
                 I
                 find
                 the
                 Plaits
                 in
                 his
                 ,
                 except
                 he
                 that
                 drew
                 it
                 did
                 not
                 observe
                 them
                 .
                 Some
                 of
                 both
                 these
                 sorts
                 I
                 got
                 on
                 the
                 fifth
                 of
                 July
                 ,
                 before
                 the
                 Weihegat
                 ,
                 where
                 a
                 Whale
                 made
                 his
                 escape
                 from
                 us
                 ,
                 because
                 the
                 Line
                 whereunto
                 the
                 Harpoon
                 was
                 fasten'd
                 was
                 entangled
                 about
                 a
                 Rock
                 :
                 On
                 this
                 they
                 hung
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 I
                 got
                 them
                 alive
                 .
              
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             VI.
             
          
           
             BEfore
             I
             come
             to
             treat
             of
             the
             Whale
             ,
             I
             think
             it
             convenient
             to
             say
             something
             of
             some
             Finn'd
             Fishes
             ,
             which
             I
             met
             withal
             in
             my
             Voyage
             to
             Spitzbergen
             ,
             some
             whereof
             are
             propagated
             by
             the
             shooting
             of
             their
             Row
             ,
             and
             others
             bear
             and
             bring
             forth
             young
             ones
             alive
             .
          
           
             I
             will
             begin
             with
             the
             First
             kind
             ,
             whereof
             the
             first
             that
             I
             met
             withal
             was
             the
             Fish
             that
             we
             call
             Macarel
             .
          
           
             
               I.
               Of
               the
               Macarel
               .
            
             
               This
               Fish
               is
               like
               unto
               a
               Herring
               in
               his
               shape
               ,
               but
               hath
               on
               his
               Back
               a
               large
               Finn
               ,
               and
               somewhat
               below
               it
               a
               very
               small
               one
               .
               Then
               lower
               there
               is
               another
               greater
               and
               broader
               one
               ,
               but
               
               not
               so
               high
               as
               the
               uppermost
               :
               Underneath
               this
               are
               five
               small
               ones
               ,
               that
               are
               all
               of
               the
               same
               bigness
               ,
               and
               at
               an
               equal
               distance
               one
               from
               another
               .
               Very
               near
               to
               the
               Tail
               there
               is
               another
               less
               one
               ;
               so
               that
               on
               the
               whole
               Back
               there
               is
               two
               great
               ones
               ,
               and
               seven
               little
               ones
               .
               Near
               unto
               the
               Gills
               is
               a
               Finn
               on
               each
               side
               :
               underneath
               the
               Belly
               there
               are
               again
               on
               each
               side
               one
               almost
               of
               the
               same
               bigness
               of
               that
               that
               is
               near
               to
               the
               Gills
               .
               Underneath
               towards
               the
               Tail
               is
               one
               of
               the
               same
               bigness
               of
               the
               third
               on
               the
               Back
               .
               Behind
               this
               there
               are
               again
               five
               of
               an
               equal
               bigness
               ;
               and
               below
               that
               still
               a
               less
               one
               ;
               so
               that
               those
               of
               the
               lower
               part
               of
               the
               Back
               are
               equal
               to
               those
               of
               the
               lower
               part
               of
               the
               Belly
               .
               Their
               Head
               is
               like
               unto
               that
               of
               a
               Herring
               .
               He
               hath
               a
               great
               many
               small
               holes
               on
               the
               Cover
               of
               his
               Gills
               ,
               and
               also
               underneath
               the
               Eyes
               .
               They
               have
               a
               great
               variety
               of
               colours
               ,
               that
               look
               more
               glorious
               when
               they
               are
               alive
               than
               when
               they
               are
               dead
               ,
               for
               when
               they
               are
               a
               dying
               the
               colours
               fade
               and
               grow
               pale
               .
               From
               his
               Back
               towards
               the
               Side
               he
               hath
               black
               Stroaks
               .
               The
               uppermost
               part
               of
               his
               Back
               is
               blew
               till
               to
               the
               midle
               ,
               and
               the
               other
               half
               underneath
               it
               is
               green
               ,
               and
               as
               if
               some
               blew
               did
               shine
               through
               it
               .
               Underneath
               his
               Belly
               he
               is
               as
               white
               as
               Silver
               ,
               and
               his
               Finns
               are
               white
               every
               where
               .
               All
               the
               colours
               of
               this
               Fish
               shine
               like
               to
               a
               Silver
               or
               Golden
               Ground
               ,
               done
               over
               with
               thin
               ,
               transparent
               or
               illuminating
               colours
               .
               Their
               Eyes
               are
               black
               .
               It
               is
               the
               beautifulest
               Fish
               of
               all
               that
               ever
               I
               saw
               .
               This
               that
               I
               describe
               here
               was
               catched
               in
               the
               North
               Sea
               ;
               afterwards
               ,
               on
               the
               27th
               day
               of
               June
               ,
               in
               the
               Year
               1673.
               we
               did
               catch
               some
               Macarels
               behind
               Scotland
               ,
               by
               the
               Island
               of
               
                 St.
                 Kilda
              
               ,
               which
               were
               half
               blind
               ;
               it
               is
               occasioned
               
               by
               a
               black
               Skin
               that
               groweth
               over
               their
               Eyes
               in
               the
               Winter
               ,
               and
               cometh
               off
               again
               in
               the
               beginning
               of
               the
               Summer
               .
               We
               do
               not
               see
               them
               in
               the
               Winter
               ,
               for
               they
               run
               towards
               the
               North
               :
               In
               the
               Summer
               we
               see
               them
               in
               the
               North
               Sea
               ,
               and
               I
               have
               seen
               them
               also
               in
               Spain
               .
               We
               caught
               them
               after
               the
               following
               manner
               ;
               we
               fastened
               a
               Bullet
               that
               weighed
               about
               two
               or
               three
               pounds
               to
               a
               Line
               ,
               about
               a
               Fathom
               distance
               from
               the
               end
               ,
               whereon
               we
               had
               fastened
               a
               Hook
               ;
               this
               Hook
               we
               baited
               with
               a
               piece
               of
               a
               red
               Cloth
               ,
               and
               so
               we
               flung
               it
               into
               the
               Sea
               ,
               and
               towed
               it
               behind
               our
               Ship
               ,
               then
               when
               the
               Macarel
               doth
               
                 swiftly
                 shoot
              
               at
               it
               ,
               he
               bites
               upon
               the
               Hook
               ,
               and
               so
               is
               hung
               ,
               which
               you
               presently
               ,
               perceive
               by
               its
               pulling
               ,
               as
               you
               do
               when
               you
               catch
               any
               other
               Fish
               ,
               notwithstanding
               that
               the
               Rope
               of
               its
               own
               accord
               doth
               pull
               or
               draw
               very
               hard
               ,
               by
               reason
               of
               the
               Sea
               ,
               so
               that
               if
               you
               should
               rowl
               it
               about
               your
               Hand
               ,
               it
               would
               benumb
               your
               Hand
               in
               a
               little
               time
               to
               that
               degree
               ,
               that
               you
               would
               not
               be
               sensible
               ,
               if
               one
               should
               cut
               it
               ;
               wherefore
               they
               tye
               their
               Ropes
               to
               the
               carved
               Work
               on
               the
               Stern
               of
               the
               Ship
               ,
               so
               that
               sometimes
               many
               of
               them
               are
               tyed
               to
               the
               Ship
               by
               one
               another
               ,
               when
               the
               Ship
               sails
               apace
               ,
               but
               this
               doth
               hinder
               the
               Ship
               very
               much
               in
               its
               sailing
               ,
               and
               I
               dare
               say
               two
               such
               Ropes
               draw
               as
               much
               as
               a
               Man's
               Strength
               .
               They
               catch
               them
               also
               with
               Herring
               ,
               with
               a
               piece
               whereof
               they
               bait
               the
               Hook
               ,
               at
               which
               they
               bite
               sooner
               than
               at
               a
               red
               piece
               of
               Rag
               of
               Cloth.
               They
               eat
               best
               if
               you
               boil
               ,
               or
               broil
               ,
               or
               roast
               them
               fresh
               as
               they
               are
               caught
               ,
               or
               dry
               them
               :
               They
               are
               hard
               to
               be
               digested
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               II.
               Of
               the
               Dragon-fish
               .
            
             
               It
               is
               peculiar
               to
               this
               Fish
               to
               have
               two
               Finns
               on
               his
               Back
               ,
               the
               foremost
               whereof
               hath
               very
               long
               Strings
               ,
               about
               two
               inches
               high
               above
               the
               Back
               ,
               the
               hindmost
               Finn
               of
               the
               Back
               is
               not
               so
               high
               ,
               but
               yet
               it
               goeth
               a
               great
               way
               all
               along
               the
               Back
               and
               hath
               no
               such
               Strings
               .
               He
               hath
               no
               Gills
               ,
               in
               the
               room
               of
               them
               he
               hath
               two
               blowing
               holes
               in
               his
               Neck
               ,
               and
               on
               each
               side
               of
               these
               holes
               there
               are
               two
               short
               Finns
               ,
               and
               underneath
               these
               ,
               on
               each
               side
               a
               broad
               one
               :
               Underneath
               his
               Belly
               he
               hath
               a
               long
               very
               narrow
               Finn
               ,
               that
               reaches
               to
               the
               Tail.
               His
               Head
               is
               oblong
               ,
               composed
               of
               many
               Bones
               :
               He
               hath
               before
               on
               his
               Nose
               a
               raised
               part
               :
               His
               Tail
               is
               about
               an
               inch
               broad
               :
               His
               Body
               is
               long
               ,
               thin
               ,
               and
               roundish
               ,
               of
               a
               greyish
               Silver
               colour
               ,
               and
               shining
               :
               His
               Shape
               is
               likest
               to
               that
               of
               a
               young
               Hay
               ,
               as
               well
               the
               Head
               as
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               Body
               .
               They
               are
               caught
               between
               the
               Bears-Island
               and
               Spitzbergen
               .
               We
               got
               one
               off
               of
               Hitland
               ,
               when
               our
               Cook
               flung
               out
               his
               Bucket
               for
               Water
               ,
               in
               which
               he
               took
               up
               one
               with
               some
               small
               Fish
               of
               the
               shape
               of
               an
               Herring
               ,
               but
               they
               were
               not
               bigger
               than
               a
               joint
               of
               your
               little
               Finger
               .
               Our
               Seamen
               informed
               me
               of
               some
               other
               small
               Fish
               ,
               that
               are
               in
               the
               deep
               holes
               between
               the
               high
               Mountains
               ,
               in
               the
               
                 South
                 Haven
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               III.
               Of
               the
               Dolphin
               .
            
             
               This
               is
               also
               a
               common
               Fish
               ,
               because
               we
               see
               them
               in
               great
               numbers
               ,
               every
               where
               in
               the
               Sea
               ,
               chiefly
               before
               a
               Storm
               or
               hard
               Weather
               ,
               for
               then
               they
               jump
               in
               great
               numbers
               out
               of
               the
               Sea
               ,
               
               like
               Seales
               .
               The
               Head
               of
               it
               ,
               chiefly
               the
               Nose
               ,
               is
               very
               like
               that
               of
               the
               
               Place's
               Head
               Its
               Mouth
               is
               full
               of
               little
               sharp
               Teeth
               .
               He
               hath
               a
               Finn
               on
               the
               middle
               of
               his
               Back
               ,
               which
               is
               hollowed
               out
               towards
               the
               Tail
               ,
               like
               an
               Half-moon
               .
               On
               its
               Belly
               are
               two
               Finns
               ,
               like
               those
               of
               the
               Whale
               ;
               these
               Finns
               are
               not
               like
               them
               of
               small
               or
               little
               Fishes
               ,
               that
               are
               boney
               ,
               joined
               together
               with
               a
               thin
               Skin
               ,
               but
               they
               are
               all
               over
               fleshy
               ,
               and
               covered
               with
               a
               thick
               Skin
               ,
               and
               made
               of
               jointed
               Bones
               within
               .
               The
               Tail
               is
               broad
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               same
               shape
               as
               that
               of
               the
               Whale
               ,
               but
               it
               is
               not
               cut
               in
               ,
               and
               is
               crooked
               from
               one
               end
               to
               the
               other
               ,
               like
               a
               Sickle
               .
               He
               hath
               two
               small
               round
               Eyes
               .
               The
               greatest
               part
               of
               the
               Body
               is
               of
               a
               black
               colour
               ,
               but
               the
               Belly
               is
               white
               ;
               they
               are
               five
               or
               six
               feet
               long
               .
               They
               run
               very
               swift
               against
               the
               Wind
               ,
               as
               an
               Arrow
               :
               They
               are
               generally
               caught
               by
               chance
               .
               Because
               Figures
               thereof
               are
               in
               other
               Books
               ,
               I
               did
               not
               think
               it
               convenient
               ot
               delineate
               him
               .
            
          
           
             
               IV.
               Of
               the
               Butskopf
               ,
               or
               Place's
               Head.
               
            
             
               The
               
               Butskopf's
               Head
               is
               blunt
               before
               ,
               whereon
               is
               a
               Bill
               or
               Beak
               of
               an
               equal
               bigness
               all-along
               ,
               which
               distinguishes
               him
               from
               the
               Dolphin
               ,
               which
               is
               thicker
               behind
               ,
               and
               more
               pointed
               before
               .
               The
               Finns
               are
               like
               those
               of
               the
               Dolphin
               ,
               but
               the
               foremost
               on
               his
               Belly
               are
               liker
               those
               of
               the
               Whale
               ;
               its
               Tail
               is
               also
               liker
               a
               Whale's
               .
               He
               hath
               a
               Spout-hole
               above
               in
               his
               Nekh
               ,
               whereout
               he
               spouts
               the
               Water
               ,
               but
               not
               with
               such
               a
               strenght
               ,
               nor
               so
               high
               as
               a
               Whale
               doth
               .
               There
               is
               also
               a
               difference
               in
               the
               sound
               of
               the
               Fishes
               ,
               for
               this
               ,
               when
               he
               bloweth
               out
               Water
               ,
               makes
               but
               a
               small
               noise
               ,
               but
               the
               blowing
               of
               a
               Whale
               
               roareth
               that
               you
               may
               hear
               it
               afar
               off
               .
               His
               Eyes
               are
               very
               small
               in
               proportion
               to
               his
               bigness
               .
               I
               have
               seen
               them
               sixteen
               ,
               eighteen
               ,
               and
               sometimes
               twenty
               foot
               long
               .
               Their
               Back
               is
               of
               a
               brown
               colour
               ;
               the
               Head
               brown
               and
               marbled
               ;
               underneath
               their
               Belly
               they
               are
               white
               .
               They
               run
               very
               near
               unto
               the
               Ships
               ,
               so
               that
               one
               may
               push
               at
               them
               with
               a
               Stick
               ,
               and
               they
               keep
               up
               with
               a
               Ship
               for
               a
               long
               time
               ,
               which
               other
               Fishes
               do
               not
               ,
               for
               when
               they
               see
               the
               Ships
               they
               are
               afraid
               of
               them
               .
               They
               all
               swin
               against
               the
               Wind
               ,
               as
               
                 Whales
                 ,
                 Finn-fish
              
               ,
               and
               Dolphins
               .
               I
               am
               of
               opinion
               ,
               that
               they
               endeavour
               to
               run
               away
               from
               the
               storm
               ,
               and
               that
               they
               find
               some
               Pain
               or
               other
               in
               their
               Bodies
               some
               days
               before
               ,
               for
               you
               shall
               see
               some
               Fish
               tumble
               about
               strangely
               in
               the
               Water
               ,
               which
               I
               do
               not
               take
               to
               be
               playing
               ,
               and
               this
               generally
               continues
               until
               their
               Tormenter
               the
               
                 East
                 Wind
              
               ceases
               .
               We
               saw
               another
               sort
               of
               great
               Fishes
               ,
               that
               might
               rightly
               be
               called
               Butskopf
               ,
               for
               their
               Head
               is
               quite
               blunt
               before
               ,
               and
               have
               a
               Finn
               that
               stands
               up
               three
               times
               higher
               than
               the
               other
               Butskopf
               has
               ;
               they
               are
               somewhat
               of
               a
               darker
               brown
               colour
               ,
               but
               of
               the
               same
               bigness
               .
               We
               saw
               them
               tumble
               several
               times
               out
               of
               the
               Water
               ;
               one
               might
               easily
               take
               them
               ,
               because
               of
               their
               high
               Finn
               that
               stands
               on
               the
               top
               of
               their
               Back
               .
               They
               are
               not
               Sword-fish
               ,
               nor
               of
               the
               same
               kind
               we
               call
               Tumblers
               ,
               which
               we
               see
               between
               the
               Elbe
               and
               the
               Hilgeland
               .
            
          
           
             
               V.
               Of
               the
               White
               fish
               .
            
             
               I
               do
               not
               by
               this
               Name
               mean
               the
               Fish
               we
               call
               so
               here
               in
               our
               Country
               ,
               that
               are
               but
               small
               ,
               but
               I
               mean
               a
               bigger●sort
               ,
               as
               large
               as
               a
               Butskopf
               ,
               
               in
               shape
               like
               a
               Whale
               ,
               and
               without
               Finns
               on
               his
               Back
               ;
               he
               hath
               two
               Finns
               on
               his
               Belly
               ,
               as
               I
               am
               informed
               by
               others
               that
               have
               caught
               them
               .
               The
               Tail
               is
               like
               unto
               a
               Whale's
               .
               He
               hath
               a
               
                 Spout
                 hole
              
               on
               his
               Head
               ;
               he
               hath
               also
               an
               Hoffel
               on
               his
               Head
               like
               a
               Whale
               .
               He
               is
               of
               yellowish
               white
               colour
               .
               He
               hath
               fat
               enough
               in
               proportion
               to
               his
               bigness
               ;
               I
               was
               told
               by
               them
               that
               had
               caught
               one
               ,
               that
               they
               did
               fill
               a
               Barrel
               of
               Fat
               from
               one
               ;
               but
               this
               Fat
               is
               very
               〈◊〉
               ,
               and
               the
               Harpoon
               easily
               breaks
               out
               ,
               wherefore
               they
               do
               not
               care
               to
               catch
               them
               .
               When
               we
               see
               plenty
               of
               them
               ,
               the
               Skippers
               say
               ,
               it
               is
               a
               sign
               of
               a
               good
               year
               for
               catching
               of
               Whales
               ;
               for
               ,
               if
               these
               find
               good
               Food
               ,
               the
               Whales
               find
               the
               same
               also
               .
               We
               saw
               on
               the
               19th
               of
               June
               some
               hundreds
               of
               them
               .
            
          
           
             
               VI.
               Of
               the
               Unicorn
               .
            
             
               The
               Unicorn
               is
               but
               seldom
               seen
               in
               these
               parts
               ,
               neither
               had
               I
               the
               good
               Fortune
               to
               meet
               with
               one
               in
               all
               my
               Voyage
               ;
               and
               yet
               sometimes
               many
               of
               them
               are
               seen
               .
               I
               do
               not
               find
               that
               the
               Cuts
               that
               I
               have
               seen
               in
               some
               Books
               agree
               with
               the
               description
               that
               I
               heard
               thereof
               ;
               for
               I
               was
               informed
               ,
               that
               he
               hath
               no
               Finn
               on
               his
               Back
               ,
               as
               he
               is
               drawn
               ,
               he
               hath
               also
               a
               Spout-hole
               in
               his
               Neck
               .
               When
               they
               swim
               swiftly
               in
               the
               Water
               they
               say
               that
               they
               hold
               up
               their
               Horns
               ,
               or
               rather
               Teeth
               ,
               out
               of
               the
               Water
               ,
               and
               so
               go
               in
               great
               shoals
               .
               The
               Shape
               of
               their
               Body
               is
               like
               a
               Seal
               ;
               the
               undermost
               Finns
               ,
               and
               the
               Tail
               ,
               are
               like
               unto
               those
               of
               the
               Whale
               .
               The
               Skin
               of
               some
               of
               them
               is
               black
               ,
               some
               like
               a
               grey
               dapled
               Horse
               ;
               underneath
               their
               Belly
               they
               are
               white
               ▪
               They
               are
               from
               sixteen
               to
               twenty
               foot
               long
               .
            
             
             
               They
               swim
               very
               swiftly
               ,
               that
               although
               they
               are
               seen
               ,
               yet
               they
               are
               but
               seldom
               caught
               .
            
          
           
             
               VII
               .
               Of
               the
               Saw-fish
               ,
               sometimes
               called
               the
               Sword-fish
               .
            
             
               This
               Fish
               hath
               his
               Name
               from
               a
               Saw
               ,
               which
               is
               a
               long
               broad
               Bone
               fixed
               to
               his
               Nose
               ,
               that
               hath
               on
               each
               side
               many
               pointed
               Teeth
               or
               Peggs
               ,
               like
               a
               Comb.
               He
               hath
               two
               Finns
               on
               his
               Back
               ,
               the
               uppermost
               of
               them
               is
               like
               the
               
               Butskopf's
               ,
               the
               undermost
               hath
               behind
               ,
               towards
               the
               Tail
               a
               hollowness
               like
               unto
               a
               Sickle
               .
               Underneath
               his
               Belly
               he
               hath
               ●our
               ,
               on
               each
               side
               two
               ,
               the
               uppermost
               thereof
               towards
               the
               Head
               are
               the
               broadest
               and
               longest
               ,
               but
               the
               lowermost
               are
               somewhat
               shorter
               ,
               and
               narrower
               ;
               they
               stand
               directly
               underneath
               the
               uppermost
               Finns
               of
               the
               Back
               .
               The
               Tail
               is
               like
               unto
               a
               piece
               of
               Board
               ,
               whereon
               the
               Dyers
               widen
               of
               stretch
               their
               Stockins
               ,
               which
               is
               pointed
               behind
               and
               underneath
               .
               The
               Tail
               is
               not
               divided
               ,
               &c.
               
               Towards
               the
               undermost
               Finn
               of
               the
               Back
               the
               Tail
               is
               thinner
               .
               The
               other
               shape
               ,
               from
               the
               top
               to
               the
               Tail
               ,
               is
               like
               a
               Man's
               naked
               Arm.
               The
               Nostrils
               are
               oblong
               .
               The
               Eyes
               stand
               high
               out
               of
               his
               Head.
               Their
               Mouths
               are
               just
               directly
               underneath
               the
               Eyes
               .
               They
               are
               in
               bigness
               from
               two
               to
               twenty
               foot
               .
            
             
               These
               Saw
               or
               Sword-fish
               are
               great
               Enemies
               to
               the
               Whale
               and
               Finn-fish
               .
               Many
               of
               them
               gather
               about
               him
               ,
               and
               they
               do
               not
               leave
               the
               Whale
               until
               they
               have
               killed
               him
               ,
               then
               they
               eat
               of
               him
               only
               the
               Tongue
               ,
               all
               the
               rest
               they
               leave
               behind
               them
               ,
               as
               doth
               appear
               by
               the
               Whales
               that
               are
               killed
               by
               the
               Sword-fish
               .
               I
               saw
               my self
               ,
               in
               our
               Home-voyage
               or
               Return
               ,
               a
               Fight
               between
               a
               
               Whale
               and
               a
               Sword-fish
               ,
               where
               both
               of
               them
               made
               a
               great
               bustle
               ,
               beating
               and
               jumping
               about
               ;
               and
               I
               understood
               that
               in
               calm
               Weather
               the
               Seamen
               let
               them
               alone
               until
               the
               Whale
               be
               killed
               ,
               where
               they
               take
               him
               without
               any
               trouble
               .
               But
               if
               they
               set
               out
               their
               Long
               boats
               after
               the
               Whale
               ,
               they
               frighten
               the
               Sword-fish
               ,
               and
               so
               the
               Whale
               escapes
               .
            
          
           
             
               VIII
               .
               Of
               the
               Hay
               .
            
             
               There
               are
               several
               sorts
               of
               them
               ;
               they
               have
               two
               Finns
               on
               their
               Backs
               ,
               the
               highest
               whereof
               is
               like
               to
               the
               uppermost
               of
               the
               Butskopf
               ,
               but
               the
               lowermost
               is
               of
               an
               equal
               breadth
               at
               the
               top
               and
               bottom
               ,
               but
               it
               is
               hollowed
               out
               like
               a
               Sickle
               :
               He
               hath
               six
               Finns
               underneath
               his
               Belly
               ,
               whereof
               the
               foremost
               two
               are
               the
               longest
               ,
               and
               shaped
               like
               a
               Tongue
               ,
               but
               the
               two
               middlemost
               are
               somewhat
               broader
               than
               those
               towards
               the
               Tail
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               same
               shape
               ;
               the
               two
               last
               underneath
               by
               the
               Tail
               are
               of
               an
               equal
               breadth
               from
               top
               to
               bottom
               ,
               something
               shorter
               than
               the
               middle
               ones
               .
               The
               Tail
               is
               of
               a
               peculiar
               shape
               ,
               like
               unto
               one
               half
               part
               of
               that
               of
               the
               Sword-fish
               ,
               but
               it
               is
               split
               below
               ;
               and
               the
               other
               part
               is
               like
               a
               Leaf
               of
               a
               Lilly.
               He
               hath
               a
               long
               Nose
               .
               The
               whole
               Fish
               is
               long
               ,
               round
               ,
               and
               thin
               ,
               and
               he
               is
               thickest
               towards
               the
               Head
               :
               his
               Mouth
               is
               shap'd
               as
               that
               of
               the
               Sword-fish
               ;
               it
               is
               full
               of
               sharp
               Teeth
               ,
               three
               upper
               and
               three
               under
               rows
               ,
               one
               by
               the
               other
               :
               his
               Eyes
               stand
               something
               more
               out
               before
               than
               behind
               ,
               after
               the
               same
               fashion
               as
               those
               of
               the
               Sword-fish
               ,
               they
               are
               oblong
               ,
               and
               very
               clear
               :
               he
               hath
               five
               Gills
               on
               each
               side
               ,
               as
               the
               Sword-fish
               :
               his
               Skin
               is
               hard
               and
               thick
               ,
               and
               rough
               if
               you
               touch
               it
               or
               strike
               it
               upwards
               ;
               it
               is
               of
               a
               greyish
               
               colour
               ;
               they
               are
               from
               one
               fathom
               long
               to
               three
               :
               It
               is
               a
               very
               devouring
               Fish
               ,
               and
               bites
               great
               pieces
               form
               the
               Whale
               ,
               as
               if
               they
               had
               been
               dug
               out
               with
               Shovels
               .
               They
               devour
               of
               many
               Whales
               ,
               all
               the
               Fat
               underneath
               the
               Water
               ,
               and
               this
               is
               the
               reason
               that
               the
               Seamen
               say
               ,
               
                 They
                 have
                 caught
                 half
                 a
                 Whale
                 that
                 was
                 dead
                 .
              
               And
               the
               Birds
               do
               help
               them
               also
               ,
               and
               what
               is
               not
               taken
               away
               underneath
               ,
               ferments
               out
               at
               the
               top
               .
               They
               have
               a
               large
               Liver
               ,
               whereof
               they
               make
               Oyl
               .
               Out
               of
               their
               Backs
               we
               cut
               the
               Flesh
               ,
               which
               we
               hang
               up
               for
               some
               days
               in
               the
               open
               Air
               ,
               then
               we
               boil
               and
               roast
               it
               ,
               and
               this
               tasts
               very
               well
               ,
               when
               we
               have
               nothing
               that
               is
               better
               .
               They
               do
               not
               fling
               away
               the
               Hays
               in
               Spain
               ,
               but
               sell
               them
               :
               The
               little
               ones
               are
               the
               best
               .
               They
               are
               very
               eager
               after
               Man's
               Flesh
               ,
               and
               eat
               many
               a
               Man
               that
               goeth
               to
               swim
               or
               wash
               in
               the
               Sea
               ,
               whereof
               we
               have
               many
               Instances
               .
               They
               are
               easily
               caught
               after
               the
               following
               manner
               ;
               we
               take
               a
               great
               Hook
               fastned
               to
               a
               strong
               Iron
               Chain
               ,
               baited
               with
               a
               piece
               of
               Flesh
               ,
               and
               let
               it
               hang
               down
               into
               the
               Sea
               ;
               the
               Hay
               as
               soon
               as
               he
               doth
               perceive
               it
               ,
               snaps
               at
               it
               ,
               and
               is
               catch'd
               ;
               but
               when
               the
               Hay
               ,
               perceives
               that
               he
               is
               fast
               ,
               he
               doth
               use
               his
               utmost
               endeavour
               to
               bite
               off
               the
               Hook
               ,
               which
               he
               cannot
               for
               the
               Iron
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             VII
             .
          
           
             
               Of
               the
               Whale
               .
            
             
               THE
               Fish
               properly
               called
               the
               Whale
               ,
               for
               whose
               sake
               our
               Ships
               chiefly
               undertake
               the
               Voyage
               to
               Spitzbergen
               ,
               is
               differing
               from
               other
               Whales
               in
               his
               Finns
               and
               Mouth
               ,
               which
               is
               without
               Teeth
               ,
               but
               instead
               thereof
               long
               ,
               black
               ,
               somewhat
               broad
               ,
               and
               horny
               Flakes
               ,
               all
               jagged
               like
               Hairs
               :
               he
               differs
               from
               the
               Finn-fish
               in
               his
               Finns
               ,
               for
               the
               Finn-fish
               hath
               a
               great
               Finn
               on
               his
               Back
               ,
               but
               the
               Whale
               ,
               properly
               so
               called
               ,
               hath
               none
               on
               his
               Back
               ;
               and
               there
               is
               two
               Finns
               behind
               his
               Eyes
               of
               a
               bigness
               proportionable
               to
               the
               Whale
               ,
               covered
               with
               a
               thick
               black
               Skin
               ,
               delicately
               marbled
               with
               white
               Strokes
               ,
               or
               as
               you
               see
               in
               Marble
               ,
               Trees
               ,
               Houses
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               things
               represented
               .
               In
               the
               Tail
               of
               one
               of
               the
               Fishes
               was
               marbled
               very
               delicately
               this
               number
               1222
               very
               even
               and
               exact
               ,
               as
               if
               they
               had
               been
               painted
               upon
               it
               on
               purpose
               .
               This
               marbling
               on
               the
               Whale
               is
               like
               Veins
               in
               a
               piece
               of
               Wood
               ,
               that
               run
               streight
               through
               ,
               or
               else
               round
               about
               the
               center
               or
               pith
               of
               a
               Tree
               ;
               and
               so
               go
               both
               white
               and
               yellow
               strokes
               through
               the
               thick
               and
               the
               thin
               strokes
               ,
               that
               is
               like
               Parchment
               or
               Vellam
               ,
               and
               give
               to
               the
               Whale
               an
               incomparable
               Beauty
               and
               Ornament
               .
               When
               these
               Finns
               are
               cut
               up
               ,
               you
               find
               underneath
               the
               thick
               Skin
               Bones
               that
               look
               like
               unto
               a
               Man's
               Hand
               ;
               when
               it
               is
               opened
               ,
               and
               the
               Fingers
               are
               expanded
               or
               spread
               ,
               between
               these
               Joynts
               there
               are
               stiff
               Sinews
               ,
               which
               flye
               up
               and
               rebound
               again
               
               
               if
               you
               f●ing
               them
               hard
               against
               the
               Ground
               ,
               as
               the
               Sinews
               of
               great
               Fish
               ,
               as
               of
               a
               Sturgeon
               ,
               or
               of
               some
               four
               footed
               Beasts
               generally
               do
               .
               You
               may
               cut
               pieces
               of
               these
               Sinews
               of
               the
               bigness
               of
               your
               Head
               ,
               they
               squeeze
               together
               when
               thrown
               on
               the
               Ground
               ,
               and
               so
               rebound
               very
               high
               ,
               and
               as
               swift
               as
               an
               Arrow
               from
               the
               String
               of
               a
               long
               Bow.
               The
               Whale
               hath
               no
               other
               Finns
               but
               these
               two
               wherewith
               he
               steers
               himself
               ,
               as
               a
               Boat
               is
               rowed
               with
               two
               Oars
               .
            
             
               Their
               Tail
               doth
               not
               stand
               up
               as
               the
               Tails
               of
               almost
               any
               other
               Fish
               ,
               but
               it
               doth
               lye
               horizontal
               ,
               as
               that
               of
               the
               
                 Finn-fish
                 ,
                 Butskopf
                 ,
                 Dolphin
              
               ,
               and
               the
               like
               ,
               and
               it
               is
               three
               ,
               three
               and
               an
               half
               ,
               and
               four
               fathoms
               broad
               .
               The
               Head
               is
               the
               third
               part
               of
               the
               Fish
               ,
               and
               some
               have
               bigger
               Heads
               ;
               on
               the
               upper
               and
               under
               Lip
               are
               short
               Hairs
               before
               .
               Their
               Lips
               are
               quite
               plain
               ,
               somewhat
               bended
               like
               an
               S
               ,
               and
               they
               end
               underneath
               the
               Eyes
               before
               the
               two
               Finns
               :
               Above
               the
               uppermost
               bended
               Lip
               he
               hath
               black
               Streaks
               ,
               some
               are
               darkish
               brown
               ,
               and
               they
               are
               crooked
               as
               the
               Lips
               are
               .
               Their
               Lips
               are
               smooth
               ,
               and
               quite
               black
               ,
               round
               like
               the
               quarter
               of
               a
               Circle
               ;
               when
               they
               draw
               them
               together
               they
               lock
               into
               one
               another
               :
               Within
               ,
               on
               the
               uppermost
               Lip
               is
               the
               Whale-bone
               ,
               of
               a
               brown
               ,
               black
               ,
               and
               yellow
               colour
               ,
               with
               streaks
               of
               several
               colours
               ,
               as
               the
               Bones
               of
               a
               Finn-fish
               .
               The
               Whale-bones
               of
               some
               Whales
               are
               blew
               ,
               and
               light
               blew
               ,
               which
               two
               are
               reckoned
               to
               come
               from
               young
               Whales
               .
               In
               one
               of
               my
               Cutts
               here
               you
               may
               see
               the
               Whale-bone
               in
               the
               Tab.
               Q
               marked
               with
               a.
               In
               the
               other
               Cutt
               ,
               where
               his
               Mouth
               is
               shut
               up
               ,
               you
               do
               not
               see
               the
               Whale
               bone
               .
               Just
               before
               ,
               on
               the
               under
               Lip
               ,
               is
               a
               cavity
               or
               hole
               which
               the
               upper
               Lip
               fits
               exactly
               into
               ,
               as
               a
               Knife
               into
               a
               
               Sheath
               .
               I
               do
               really
               believe
               ,
               that
               he
               draws
               the
               Water
               that
               he
               bloweth
               out
               through
               this
               hole
               ,
               and
               so
               I
               have
               been
               informed
               also
               by
               Seamen
               .
            
             
               Within
               his
               Mouth
               is
               the
               Whale-bone
               ,
               all
               hairy
               as
               a
               Horse's
               Hair
               ,
               as
               it
               is
               also
               in
               the
               Finn-fish
               ,
               and
               it
               hangs
               down
               from
               both
               sides
               all
               about
               his
               Tongue
               .
               The
               Whale-bone
               of
               some
               Whales
               is
               somewhat
               bended
               like
               unto
               a
               Cimeter
               ,
               and
               others
               like
               unto
               a
               half-Moon
               .
            
             
               The
               smallest
               Whale-bone
               is
               before
               ,
               in
               his
               Mouth
               ,
               and
               behind
               towards
               his
               Throat
               ;
               and
               the
               middlemost
               is
               the
               greatest
               and
               longest
               ,
               it
               is
               sometimes
               about
               two
               or
               three
               Men's
               length
               ,
               from
               whence
               you
               may
               easily
               conjecture
               how
               large
               this
               Fish
               must
               be
               .
               On
               one
               side
               ,
               all
               in
               a
               row
               ,
               there
               is
               two
               hundred
               and
               fifty
               pieces
               of
               Whale
               bone
               ,
               and
               as
               many
               also
               on
               the
               other
               side
               ,
               which
               maketh
               five
               hundred
               in
               all
               ,
               and
               there
               is
               more
               over
               and
               above
               this
               number
               ,
               for
               they
               let
               the
               least
               Whale-bone
               of
               all
               remain
               ,
               because
               they
               cannot
               well
               come
               at
               it
               to
               cut
               it
               out
               ,
               because
               it
               is
               very
               narrow
               where
               the
               two
               Lips
               meet
               together
               .
               The
               Whale-bone
               is
               in
               a
               flat
               row
               one
               piece
               by
               the
               other
               ,
               somewhat
               bended
               within
               ,
               and
               towards
               the
               Lips
               every
               where
               like
               a
               half-Moon
               .
            
             
               The
               Whale-bone
               is
               broad
               at
               the
               top
               ,
               where
               it
               sticketh
               fast
               to
               the
               upper
               Lip
               ,
               every
               where
               overgrown
               with
               hard
               and
               white
               Sinews
               towards
               the
               Root
               ,
               so
               that
               between
               two
               pieces
               of
               Whale-bone
               you
               may
               put
               in
               your
               hand
               .
               These
               white
               Sinews
               look
               like
               boiled
               Sea-catts
               or
               Black-fish
               (
               in
               Spanish
               called
               
                 Cattula
                 la
                 Mar
              
               )
               they
               are
               of
               a
               pleasant
               Smell
               ,
               so
               that
               we
               might
               eat
               of
               them
               ;
               they
               are
               not
               tough
               at
               all
               ,
               but
               break
               as
               easily
               as
               Cheese
               ,
               but
               they
               did
               not
               taste
               so
               well
               ;
               when
               
               they
               putrifie
               or
               rot
               they
               smell
               horribly
               ,
               just
               like
               unto
               a
               foul
               or
               rotten
               Tooth
               .
               Where
               the
               Whale-bone
               is
               broadest
               ,
               as
               underneath
               by
               the
               Root
               ,
               there
               groweth
               small
               Whale-bone
               ,
               the
               other
               greater
               ,
               as
               you
               see
               small
               and
               large
               Trees
               one
               amongst
               the
               other
               in
               a
               Wood.
               I
               believe
               the
               small
               Whale-bone
               doth
               not
               grow
               bigger
               ,
               as
               one
               might
               think
               that
               some
               of
               the
               great
               pieces
               thereof
               might
               come
               out
               ,
               and
               that
               so
               this
               small
               Whale-bone
               might
               grow
               up
               again
               in
               the
               room
               thereof
               ,
               or
               as
               in
               Children
               the
               Hair
               grows
               again
               when
               cut
               off
               ;
               but
               it
               is
               not
               so
               ,
               for
               this
               Whale-bone
               is
               quite
               another
               sort
               ,
               for
               it
               is
               from
               one
               end
               to
               t'other
               of
               an
               equal
               thickness
               and
               full
               of
               long
               Jacks
               like
               Horses
               Hair.
               The
               Whale-bone
               is
               underneath
               narrow
               and
               pointed
               ,
               and
               all
               overgrown
               with
               Hair
               ,
               that
               it
               may
               not
               hurt
               that
               that
               is
               young
               :
               But
               without
               the
               Whale-bone
               hath
               a
               Cavity
               ,
               for
               it
               is
               turned
               just
               like
               unto
               a
               Gutter
               wherein
               the
               Water
               runs
               ,
               where
               it
               lyeth
               one
               over
               the
               other
               ,
               as
               the
               Shields
               or
               Plaits
               of
               Craw-fish
               ,
               or
               the
               Pan-tiles
               of
               an
               House
               ,
               that
               lye
               one
               over
               the
               other
               ,
               for
               else
               it
               might
               easily
               wound
               or
               hurt
               the
               under
               Lips.
               I
               am
               of
               opinion
               that
               one
               might
               use
               Whale-bone
               in
               any
               thing
               that
               we
               use
               Boards
               for
               ,
               for
               they
               make
               of
               Whale-bone
               ,
               Boxes
               ,
               Knife-hafts
               ,
               Walking-sticks
               ,
               and
               the
               like
               .
               I
               should
               think
               that
               out
               of
               the
               Hair
               of
               the
               Fish
               might
               be
               made
               something
               ,
               as
               the
               Spaniards
               do
               out
               of
               the
               wild
               
                 Sempervive
                 Aloes
              
               ,
               (
               by
               them
               called
               Savila
               )
               they
               prepare
               it
               like
               Flax
               or
               Hemp
               ,
               and
               so
               make
               Packthreads
               Clothes
               and
               the
               like
               Manufactures
               of
               it
               .
            
             
               To
               cut
               the
               Whale-bones
               out
               is
               also
               a
               peculiar
               Trade
               ,
               and
               abundance
               of
               Iron
               Tools
               belong
               thereunto
               .
               The
               lower
               part
               of
               the
               Whale's
               Mouth
               is
               commonly
               white
               .
               The
               Tongue
               lyeth
               
               amongst
               the
               Whale-bones
               ;
               it
               is
               very
               close
               tyed
               to
               the
               undermost
               Chap
               or
               Lip
               ;
               it
               is
               very
               large
               and
               white
               ,
               with
               black
               spots
               at
               the
               edges
               :
               It
               is
               a
               soft
               spongy
               Fat
               ,
               which
               cannot
               easily
               be
               cut
               ;
               it
               makes
               a
               great
               deal
               of
               work
               to
               the
               Cutter
               (
               for
               so
               they
               call
               the
               Man
               that
               doth
               cut
               the
               Fat
               into
               small
               pieces
               with
               a
               large
               Knife
               ,
               which
               cannot
               well
               be
               done
               with
               other
               Knifes
               ,
               because
               it
               is
               tough
               and
               soft
               )
               wherefore
               they
               fling
               the
               Tongue
               away
               ,
               else
               they
               might
               get
               five
               ,
               six
               or
               seven
               Barrels
               of
               Train-oyl
               out
               of
               it
               ;
               but
               ,
               as
               I
               said
               before
               ,
               they
               fling
               it
               away
               ,
               because
               of
               its
               softness
               ;
               and
               this
               is
               the
               most
               pleasing
               Food
               for
               the
               Sword-fish
               .
               Upon
               his
               Head
               is
               the
               Hovel
               or
               Bump
               before
               the
               Eyes
               and
               Finns
               :
               At
               the
               top
               of
               this
               Bump
               ,
               on
               each
               side
               ,
               is
               a
               Spout-hole
               ,
               two
               over-against
               one
               another
               ,
               which
               are
               bended
               on
               each
               side
               like
               an
               S
               ,
               or
               as
               the
               hole
               that
               is
               cut
               on
               a
               Violin
               ,
               whereout
               he
               doth
               blow
               the
               Water
               very
               fiercely
               ,
               that
               it
               roars
               like
               a
               hollow
               Wind
               which
               we
               hear
               when
               the
               Wind
               bloweth
               into
               a
               Cave
               ,
               or
               against
               the
               corner
               of
               a
               Board
               ,
               or
               like
               an
               Organ-pipe
               .
               This
               may
               be
               heard
               at
               a
               leagues
               distance
               ,
               although
               you
               do
               not
               see
               him
               by
               reason
               of
               the
               thick
               and
               foggy
               Air.
               The
               Whale
               bloweth
               or
               spouts
               the
               Water
               fiercest
               of
               all
               when
               he
               is
               wounded
               ,
               then
               it
               sounds
               as
               the
               roaring
               of
               the
               Sea
               in
               a
               great
               Storm
               ,
               and
               as
               we
               hear
               the
               Wind
               in
               a
               very
               hard
               Storm
               .
               Behind
               this
               Bump
               the
               Whale
               is
               somewhat
               more
               bended
               in
               than
               the
               Finn-fish
               ,
               yet
               when
               they
               swim
               you
               cannot
               well
               discern
               one
               from
               the
               other
               ,
               except
               you
               observe
               it
               very
               exactly
               ,
               for
               it
               is
               only
               the
               Finn
               on
               the
               
               Finn-fish's
               Back
               that
               distinguishes
               him
               from
               the
               Whale
               .
               The
               Head
               of
               the
               Whale
               is
               not
               round
               at
               the
               top
               ,
               but
               somewhat
               flat
               ,
               and
               goeth
               down
               sloaping
               ,
               
               like
               unto
               the
               tyling
               of
               an
               House
               ,
               to
               the
               under
               Lip.
               The
               under
               Lip
               is
               broader
               than
               the
               Whale
               is
               in
               any
               part
               of
               the
               Body
               ,
               and
               broadest
               in
               the
               middle
               ;
               before
               and
               behind
               it
               is
               something
               narrower
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               shape
               of
               the
               Head.
               In
               one
               word
               ,
               all
               the
               whole
               Fish
               is
               shaped
               like
               unto
               a
               Shoomaker
               's
               Last
               ,
               if
               you
               look
               upon
               it
               from
               beneath
               .
               Behind
               the
               Knob
               or
               Bump
               where
               the
               Finns
               are
               ,
               between
               that
               and
               the
               Finns
               ,
               are
               his
               Eyes
               ,
               which
               are
               not
               much
               bigger
               than
               those
               of
               a
               Bullock
               ,
               with
               Eye-lids
               and
               Hair
               ,
               like
               Mens
               Eyes
               .
               The
               Crystal
               of
               the
               Eye
               is
               not
               much
               bigger
               than
               a
               Pea
               ,
               clear
               ,
               white
               ,
               and
               transparent
               as
               Crystal
               ;
               the
               colour
               of
               some
               is
               yellowish
               ,
               of
               others
               quite
               white
               :
               The
               
               Seale's
               are
               three
               times
               as
               big
               as
               those
               of
               the
               Whale
               .
               The
               Eyes
               of
               the
               Whale
               are
               placed
               very
               low
               ,
               almost
               at
               the
               end
               of
               the
               upper
               Lip.
               Some
               bring
               along
               with
               them
               from
               Spitzbergen
               some
               Bones
               ,
               which
               they
               pretend
               to
               be
               the
               Ears
               of
               the
               Whale
               ;
               but
               I
               can
               say
               nothing
               to
               this
               ,
               because
               I
               never
               saw
               any
               ;
               but
               thus
               much
               I
               do
               remember
               ,
               that
               I
               have
               heard
               them
               say
               that
               they
               lye
               very
               deep
               .
            
             
               The
               Whale
               doth
               not
               hear
               when
               he
               spouts
               the
               Water
               ,
               wherefore
               he
               is
               easiest
               to
               be
               struck
               at
               that
               time
               .
               His
               Belly
               and
               Back
               are
               quite
               red
               ,
               and
               underneath
               the
               Belly
               they
               are
               commonly
               white
               ,
               yet
               some
               of
               them
               are
               Coal
               black
               ;
               most
               of
               them
               that
               I
               saw
               were
               white
               .
               They
               look
               very
               beautiful
               when
               the
               Sun
               shines
               upon
               them
               ,
               the
               small
               clear
               Waves
               of
               the
               Sea
               that
               are
               over
               him
               glisten
               like
               Silver
               .
               Some
               of
               them
               are
               marbled
               on
               their
               Back
               and
               Tail.
               Where
               he
               hath
               been
               wounded
               there
               remaineth
               always
               a
               white
               Scar.
               I
               understood
               of
               one
               of
               our
               Harpooniers
               that
               he
               once
               caught
               a
               Whale
               at
               Spitzbergen
               that
               was
               white
               all
               over
               .
               Half
               white
               I
               
               have
               seen
               some
               ,
               but
               one
               above
               the
               rest
               ,
               which
               was
               a
               Female
               ,
               was
               a
               beautiful
               one
               ;
               she
               was
               all
               over
               marbled
               black
               and
               yellow
               :
               Those
               that
               are
               black
               are
               not
               all
               of
               the
               same
               colour
               ,
               for
               some
               of
               them
               are
               as
               black
               as
               Velvet
               ,
               others
               of
               a
               Coal
               black
               ,
               others
               of
               the
               colour
               of
               a
               Tench
               .
               When
               they
               are
               well
               they
               are
               as
               slippery
               as
               an
               Eel
               ,
               but
               one
               may
               stand
               upon
               them
               ,
               because
               they
               are
               so
               soft
               ,
               that
               the
               Flesh
               thereof
               giveth
               way
               to
               our
               weight
               :
               And
               the
               outward
               Skin
               is
               thin
               ,
               like
               Parchment
               ,
               and
               is
               easily
               pulled
               off
               with
               ones
               Hands
               when
               the
               Fish
               grows
               hot
               .
               I
               know
               not
               whether
               the
               Skin
               is
               thus
               burnt
               by
               the
               inward
               heat
               of
               the
               Fish
               when
               he
               lies
               dry
               a
               floating
               upon
               the
               Water
               .
               The
               Sun
               beams
               seem
               not
               to
               have
               so
               great
               power
               as
               to
               dry
               the
               Skin
               so
               .
               We
               found
               our
               first
               Whale
               was
               so
               much
               heated
               by
               his
               hard
               swimming
               that
               he
               stunk
               alive
               ;
               we
               could
               pull
               off
               great
               pieces
               of
               the
               Skin
               ,
               of
               the
               length
               of
               a
               Man
               ,
               which
               we
               could
               not
               do
               to
               other
               Fishes
               that
               were
               not
               so
               much
               heated
               :
               But
               from
               Whales
               that
               have
               been
               dead
               some
               days
               ,
               and
               are
               dry
               ,
               where
               also
               the
               Sun
               shines
               upon
               them
               ,
               or
               when
               it
               doth
               not
               rain
               ,
               one
               may
               pull
               off
               a
               great
               deal
               of
               the
               Skin
               ,
               but
               it
               stinks
               basely
               of
               Train-oyl
               ,
               or
               Fat
               ,
               that
               ferments
               thro'
               the
               Pores
               of
               the
               Skin
               .
               I
               know
               not
               what
               use
               to
               make
               of
               this
               Skin
               ,
               but
               I
               have
               seen
               Women
               tye
               their
               Flax
               with
               it
               about
               the
               Distaff
               .
            
             
               The
               Whale
               loseth
               this
               beautiful
               white
               colour
               when
               it
               groweth
               dry
               ,
               for
               before
               there
               is
               more
               black
               amongst
               it
               ,
               which
               maketh
               the
               white
               shew
               the
               better
               ,
               neither
               doth
               the
               black
               look
               so
               well
               after
               it
               is
               dry
               ,
               for
               it
               groweth
               then
               brownish
               .
               When
               you
               hold
               the
               Skin
               against
               the
               light
               ,
               you
               see
               many
               small
               Pores
               in
               it
               ,
               where
               the
               Sweat
               cometh
               through
               .
            
             
             
               The
               Yard
               of
               the
               Whale
               is
               a
               strong
               Sinew
               ,
               and
               according
               as
               they
               are
               in
               bigness
               ,
               six
               ,
               seven
               or
               eight
               foot
               long
               ,
               as
               I
               have
               seen
               my self
               .
               Where
               this
               Yard
               is
               fixed
               the
               Skin
               is
               doubled
               ,
               so
               that
               it
               lies
               just
               like
               a
               Knife
               in
               a
               Sheath
               ,
               where
               you
               can
               see
               nothing
               of
               the
               Knife
               but
               only
               a
               little
               of
               the
               Ha●t
               .
               The
               part
               of
               Generation
               in
               the
               Female
               is
               just
               shaped
               like
               as
               that
               of
               four-legged
               Beasts
               .
               At
               the
               sides
               of
               Pudendum
               stand
               out
               the
               two
               Breasts
               ,
               with
               Nipples
               on
               them
               ,
               like
               unto
               those
               of
               Cows
               :
               Some
               of
               these
               Breasts
               are
               quite
               white
               ,
               some
               are
               speckled
               with
               black
               and
               blew
               spots
               ,
               like
               a
               
               Lapwing's
               Egg.
               When
               they
               have
               no
               young
               ones
               they
               have
               but
               small
               Breasts
               .
               I
               am
               informed
               ,
               that
               when
               they
               couple
               together
               they
               stand
               upright
               ,
               close
               to
               one
               another
               ,
               with
               their
               Heads
               out
               of
               the
               Water
               ;
               which
               seemeth
               very
               probable
               ,
               because
               they
               cannot
               keep
               long
               under
               Water
               ,
               and
               chefily
               in
               such
               a
               heat
               .
               They
               say
               that
               they
               have
               but
               two
               young
               ones
               at
               a
               time
               ,
               for
               they
               have
               never
               found
               more
               than
               two
               young
               ones
               within
               them
               .
               How
               long
               they
               carry
               their
               young
               is
               not
               easily
               determined
               ;
               some
               say
               they
               go
               as
               long
               as
               a
               Cow
               ,
               but
               it
               is
               very
               uncertain
               ,
               he
               that
               will
               believe
               it
               may
               .
               The
               Sperm
               of
               a
               Whale
               ,
               when
               it
               is
               fresh
               ,
               smells
               like
               Wheaten-flower
               that
               is
               boiled
               in
               Water
               ,
               when
               it
               is
               still
               hot
               it
               is
               very
               white
               ;
               one
               may
               draw
               it
               out
               in
               Threads
               like
               hot
               Sealing-wax
               ,
               Glew
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               ;
               when
               it
               groweth
               cold
               it
               turns
               to
               a
               Musk-colour
               ,
               and
               smells
               strong
               ,
               and
               little
               red
               Worms
               grow
               in
               it
               ,
               like
               unto
               the
               grey
               ones
               ,
               that
               you
               may
               see
               in
               the
               Tab.
               P.
               marked
               with
               C.
               I
               have
               tryed
               several
               ways
               to
               keep
               this
               Sperm
               sweet
               and
               fresh
               ,
               but
               I
               could
               never
               make
               it
               like
               unto
               that
               Sperma-caeti
               which
               the
               Apothecaries
               sell
               in
               their
               Shops
               .
               One
               may
               dip
               
               of
               this
               Sperm
               whole
               Pails-full
               out
               of
               the
               Water
               ,
               for
               as
               well
               this
               as
               that
               of
               the
               Sea-horses
               and
               Seals
               swims
               upon
               the
               Sea
               like
               Fat
               ,
               and
               we
               see
               abundance
               of
               it
               in
               calm
               weather
               ,
               so
               that
               it
               doth
               make
               the
               Sea
               all
               foul
               and
               slimy
               .
               I
               tryed
               to
               dry
               this
               Sperm
               of
               a
               Whale
               in
               the
               Sun
               ,
               and
               it
               lookt
               like
               Snot
               ,
               and
               when
               the
               thin
               Slime
               was
               dryed
               away
               from
               it
               ,
               looked
               like
               unto
               
                 Fila
                 meteorica
              
               ,
               save
               only
               that
               they
               are
               thicker
               and
               more
               heavy
               .
               Another
               parcel
               I
               boiled
               in
               Sea-water
               ,
               just
               as
               I
               took
               it
               out
               of
               the
               Water
               ,
               until
               the
               Water
               was
               evaporated
               from
               it
               ,
               then
               I
               had
               some
               Sea-salt
               ,
               and
               a
               nasty
               brown
               Slime
               .
               The
               third
               parcel
               I
               boiled
               in
               fresh
               Water
               ,
               and
               afterwards
               again
               in
               Sea-water
               ,
               and
               the
               longer
               I
               kept
               it
               afterwards
               the
               more
               it
               stunk
               ,
               and
               the
               harder
               it
               grew
               .
               The
               fourth
               parcel
               I
               intended
               to
               keep
               in
               the
               Salt
               Water
               ,
               with
               an
               intention
               to
               carry
               it
               along
               with
               me
               to
               Hamburgh
               ,
               but
               it
               dissolved
               in
               the
               Water
               ,
               like
               Glew
               ,
               and
               the
               Water
               became
               foul
               and
               stinking
               ,
               so
               that
               I
               could
               no
               ways
               make
               it
               like
               the
               Sperma-ceti
               of
               the
               Apothecaries
               .
               Where
               the
               Yard
               doth
               begin
               it
               is
               four-square
               ,
               consisting
               of
               many
               strong
               Sinews
               ;
               if
               you
               dry
               them
               they
               are
               as
               transparent
               as
               Fish-glew
               ;
               out
               of
               these
               Sinews
               the
               Seamen
               make
               twisted
               Whips
               .
               Their
               Bones
               are
               hard
               ,
               like
               unto
               them
               of
               great
               four-footed
               Beasts
               ,
               but
               porous
               ,
               like
               unto
               a
               Spunge
               ,
               and
               filled
               with
               Marrow
               ,
               when
               that
               is
               consumed
               out
               they
               will
               hold
               a
               great
               deal
               of
               Water
               ,
               for
               the
               holes
               are
               big
               ,
               like
               unto
               the
               Wax
               of
               a
               Honey-comb
               .
               Two
               great
               and
               strong
               Bones
               hold
               up
               the
               under
               Lip
               ,
               they
               lye
               one
               against
               the
               other
               ,
               and
               both
               of
               them
               make
               a
               Figure
               like
               unto
               an
               Half-moon
               ,
               but
               one
               alone
               by
               itself
               makes
               a
               Figure
               like
               to
               a
               quarter
               of
               the
               Moon
               .
               Some
               of
               these
               Bones
               I
               saw
               at
               Spitzbergen
               ,
               lying
               on
               the
               
               Strand
               ,
               about
               20
               foot
               long
               ,
               of
               a
               very
               white
               colour
               ,
               as
               if
               they
               had
               been
               calcined
               .
               Our
               Seamen
               bring
               some
               of
               these
               along
               with
               them
               home
               ,
               to
               shew
               us
               how
               big
               some
               Whales
               are
               ,
               which
               are
               already
               whitened
               to
               their
               Hands
               ,
               for
               those
               that
               come
               fresh
               from
               a
               Whale
               stink
               abominably
               ,
               because
               of
               the
               Marrow
               that
               is
               in
               them
               .
               Their
               Flesh
               is
               course
               and
               hard
               ,
               m
               and
               it
               doth
               look
               like
               unto
               that
               of
               a
               Bull
               ;
               it
               is
               intermixd
               with
               many
               Sinews
               ;
               it
               is
               very
               dry
               and
               lean
               when
               it
               is
               boiled
               ,
               because
               their
               Fat
               is
               only
               between
               their
               Flesh
               and
               Skin
               :
               Some
               looks
               green
               and
               blew
               as
               our
               Pouder'd
               Beef
               ,
               chiefly
               where
               the
               Muscles
               meet
               together
               ;
               if
               one
               lets
               it
               lye
               a
               little
               ,
               it
               grows
               black
               and
               stinking
               .
               The
               Flesh
               of
               the
               Tail
               boils
               tenderest
               ,
               and
               is
               not
               quite
               so
               dry
               as
               that
               of
               the
               Body
               .
               When
               we
               have
               a
               mind
               to
               eat
               of
               a
               Whale
               ,
               we
               cut
               great
               pieces
               off
               before
               the
               Tail
               ,
               where
               it
               is
               four-square
               ,
               and
               boil
               it
               like
               other
               Meat
               ;
               good
               Beef
               I
               prefer
               far
               before
               it
               ,
               yet
               rather
               than
               be
               starved
               ,
               I
               advise
               to
               eat
               
                 Whale's
                 Flesh
              
               ,
               for
               none
               of
               our
               Men
               dyed
               of
               it
               ,
               and
               the
               French-men
               did
               eat
               almost
               daily
               of
               it
               ,
               they
               fling
               it
               sometimes
               on
               the
               tops
               of
               their
               Tubs
               ,
               and
               let
               it
               lye
               until
               it
               is
               black
               ,
               and
               yet
               they
               eat
               it
               for
               all
               that
               .
               The
               Flesh
               of
               a
               Whale
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               that
               of
               the
               Seales
               ,
               is
               alone
               by
               itself
               ,
               and
               the
               Fat
               at
               the
               top
               thereof
               ,
               between
               the
               Flesh
               and
               Skin
               .
               It
               is
               about
               six
               inches
               thick
               on
               the
               Back
               and
               Belly
               ,
               but
               I
               have
               also
               seen
               it
               a
               foot
               thick
               ,
               upon
               a
               Finn
               ,
               according
               as
               they
               are
               great
               or
               little
               Fish
               .
               The
               Fat
               of
               their
               under
               Lip
               is
               thicker
               than
               two
               foot
               ,
               and
               is
               the
               thickest
               of
               all
               the
               Whale
               .
               The
               Tongue
               ,
               as
               I
               have
               said
               before
               ,
               is
               fasten'd
               to
               it
               ,
               but
               very
               soft
               ,
               but
               it
               costs
               too
               much
               labour
               to
               cut
               it
               .
               The
               Fat
               of
               some
               Whales
               is
               much
               thicker
               than
               than
               that
               of
               others
               ,
               as
               it
               is
               
               with
               other
               Animals
               or
               Men
               ,
               where
               one
               is
               much
               leaner
               that
               another
               .
               In
               the
               Fat
               are
               little
               Sinews
               ,
               interspersed
               which
               hold
               the
               Oyl
               ,
               as
               a
               Sponge
               does
               Water
               ,
               which
               one
               may
               squeeze
               out
               .
               The
               other
               strong
               Sinews
               are
               chiefly
               about
               the
               Tail
               ,
               where
               it
               is
               thinnest
               ,
               for
               with
               it
               he
               turns
               and
               winds
               himself
               ,
               as
               a
               Ship
               is
               turned
               by
               the
               Rudder
               ,
               but
               his
               Finns
               are
               his
               Oars
               ,
               and
               according
               to
               his
               bigness
               he
               rows
               himself
               along
               with
               them
               as
               swiftly
               as
               a
               Bird
               flies
               ,
               and
               doth
               make
               a
               long
               track
               in
               the
               Sea
               ,
               as
               a
               great
               Ship
               doth
               when
               under
               Sail
               ,
               so
               that
               it
               remains
               dividid
               for
               a
               while
               .
            
             
               The
               
                 Whales
                 of
                 the
                 North
                 Cape
              
               (
               they
               are
               so
               called
               ,
               because
               they
               are
               caught
               between
               Spitzbergen
               and
               Norway
               )
               being
               not
               so
               big
               ,
               therefore
               do
               not
               yield
               so
               much
               Fat
               as
               those
               of
               Spitzbergen
               ,
               for
               of
               those
               of
               the
               
                 North
                 Cape
              
               you
               shall
               not
               fill
               above
               ten
               ,
               twenty
               ,
               or
               thirty
               Cardels
               of
               Fat
               ;
               the
               middling
               sort
               of
               those
               of
               Spitzbergen
               yield
               commonly
               seventy
               ,
               eighty
               ,
               or
               ninety
               ,
               and
               they
               are
               about
               fifty
               or
               sixty
               foot
               long
               .
               Our
               biggest
               Whale
               was
               fifty
               three
               foot
               long
               ,
               and
               we
               cut
               off
               him
               as
               much
               Fat
               as
               filled
               seventy
               Cardels
               ;
               his
               Tail
               was
               about
               three
               fathom
               and
               an
               half
               broad
               .
               The
               Skipper
               
                 Peter
                 Peterson
              
               of
               Friesland
               informed
               me
               ,
               that
               they
               found
               a
               dead
               Whale
               ,
               whereof
               they
               did
               cut
               as
               much
               fat
               as
               filled
               One
               hundred
               and
               thirty
               Cardels
               ,
               his
               Tail
               was
               three
               fathom
               and
               an
               half
               broad
               ,
               but
               he
               was
               not
               much
               longer
               than
               our
               biggest
               ,
               as
               one
               may
               guess
               by
               the
               Tail
               also
               ,
               yet
               much
               thicker
               and
               fatter
               ;
               from
               whence
               one
               may
               in●er
               ,
               that
               they
               do
               not
               grow
               much
               longer
               ,
               but
               only
               in
               thickness
               or
               fatness
               ,
               as
               we
               daily
               see
               :
               Nor
               did
               I
               ever
               hear
               that
               a
               bigger
               or
               fatter
               Whale
               was
               ever
               caught
               ,
               and
               even
               those
               but
               seldom
               ,
               for
               if
               there
               were
               many
               such
               ,
               our
               
               Ships
               could
               not
               hold
               so
               much
               Fat
               as
               is
               cut
               from
               ten
               ,
               fifteen
               ,
               or
               twenty
               Whales
               ,
               as
               some
               of
               them
               have
               sometimes
               taken
               in
               .
            
             
               Over
               the
               Fat
               is
               ,
               besides
               the
               uppermost
               thin
               Skin
               already
               described
               ,
               another
               Skin
               of
               about
               an
               inch
               thick
               ,
               proportionable
               to
               the
               bigness
               of
               the
               Whale
               ;
               it
               is
               coloured
               according
               to
               the
               colour
               of
               the
               Fish
               ;
               if
               the
               Fish
               be
               black
               ,
               this
               undermost
               thick
               Skin
               is
               so
               ;
               if
               the
               outmost
               Skin
               that
               is
               like
               Parchment
               is
               white
               or
               yellow
               ,
               the
               thick
               one
               underneath
               it
               is
               of
               the
               same
               colour
               .
               This
               thick
               Skin
               is
               not
               stiff
               nor
               tough
               at
               all
               ,
               so
               that
               one
               might
               dress
               it
               like
               Leather
               ,
               but
               it
               dries
               just
               like
               unto
               the
               Fungus
               that
               grows
               on
               Elder
               ,
               which
               we
               call
               Jews-ears
               ,
               which
               are
               thick
               and
               turgid
               when
               they
               are
               green
               and
               fresh
               ,
               but
               brittle
               when
               they
               are
               dried
               ;
               wherefore
               this
               Skin
               is
               not
               esteemed
               at
               all
               .
               This
               and
               the
               uppermost
               thin
               Skin
               that
               covers
               this
               ,
               are
               the
               occasion
               that
               the
               Whale
               ,
               which
               I
               take
               to
               be
               the
               strongest
               and
               biggest
               of
               all
               Creatures
               in
               the
               Water
               ,
               cannot
               make
               use
               of
               his
               Strength
               ,
               because
               they
               are
               too
               soft
               to
               do
               much
               .
            
             
               I
               have
               nothing
               to
               relate
               of
               the
               inward
               parts
               of
               the
               Whale
               ,
               but
               only
               that
               his
               Guts
               seem
               to
               be
               of
               a
               Flesh
               colour
               ;
               they
               were
               full
               of
               Wind
               ,
               and
               the
               Dung
               that
               was
               within
               them
               was
               yellow
               .
            
             
               The
               Food
               of
               the
               Whale
               ,
               as
               it
               is
               believed
               ,
               are
               the
               small
               Sea-Snails
               ,
               the
               Draught
               whereof
               you
               may
               see
               at
               c
               ,
               in
               the
               Tab.
               Q
               ,
               whereof
               I
               have
               made
               mention
               in
               another
               place
               ,
               which
               some
               take
               for
               Spiders
               ;
               whether
               these
               afford
               such
               great
               nourishment
               ,
               I
               cannot
               exactly
               tell
               .
               Some
               say
               ,
               that
               they
               live
               only
               by
               the
               Wind
               ,
               but
               then
               methinks
               they
               must
               have
               nothing
               in
               them
               but
               Wind
               ,
               which
               I
               found
               otherwise
               .
               I
               was
               informed
               
               by
               others
               ,
               that
               about
               Hitland
               a
               small
               Whale
               was
               caught
               ,
               had
               about
               a
               Barrel
               of
               Herrings
               in
               his
               Belly
               .
               They
               are
               smaller
               Whales
               than
               those
               we
               catch
               at
               Spitzbergen
               ,
               but
               there
               is
               more
               danger
               in
               catching
               of
               them
               ,
               they
               being
               less
               and
               nimbler
               than
               the
               great
               ones
               ,
               to
               whom
               the
               Water
               doth
               not
               so
               easily
               give
               way
               as
               to
               these
               ,
               for
               they
               jump
               and
               play
               in
               the
               Water
               ,
               and
               keep
               their
               Tail
               commonly
               above
               Water
               ,
               so
               that
               one
               dare
               not
               come
               near
               to
               them
               to
               launce
               them
               .
               Concerning
               the
               
               Whale's
               Valour
               ,
               we
               do
               find
               that
               he
               is
               not
               very
               couragious
               ,
               according
               to
               his
               strength
               and
               bigness
               ,
               for
               if
               he
               sees
               a
               Man
               o●
               a
               Long-boat
               ,
               he
               goeth
               under
               Water
               ,
               and
               runs
               away
               .
               I
               did
               never
               see
               nor
               hear
               ,
               that
               out
               of
               his
               own
               Malice
               he
               endeavour'd
               to
               hurt
               any
               Man
               ,
               but
               when
               he
               is
               in
               danger
               ;
               what
               then
               he
               doth
               is
               of
               necessity
               ,
               and
               then
               he
               doth
               not
               value
               a
               man
               no
               more
               than
               a
               Sand
               ,
               nor
               a
               Long-boat
               ,
               for
               he
               doth
               beat
               them
               all
               into
               Splinters
               .
               His
               Strength
               may
               be
               guess'd
               by
               the
               Fishermen
               that
               catch
               with
               great
               Nets
               other
               Fishes
               ,
               when
               they
               are
               going
               to
               draw
               their
               Nets
               towards
               the
               Land
               ,
               what
               a
               great
               Strength
               they
               must
               use
               ,
               which
               is
               nothing
               at
               all
               to
               be
               compared
               to
               his
               Strength
               .
               The
               Whale
               doth
               swim
               sometimes
               away
               with
               some
               thousand
               fathoms
               of
               Rope-line
               ,
               swifter
               a
               great
               deal
               than
               a
               Ship
               can
               ●ail
               ,
               or
               a
               Bird
               can
               fly
               ,
               so
               that
               it
               makes
               their
               Heads
               giddy
               ;
               yet
               a
               great
               Ship
               is
               too
               many
               for
               him
               ,
               for
               although
               he
               should
               strike
               against
               it
               with
               his
               Tail
               ,
               yet
               it
               doth
               him
               more
               hurt
               than
               he
               does
               the
               Ship.
               
            
             
               The
               Whales
               keep
               ,
               in
               the
               Spring
               ,
               Westward
               from
               Spitzbergen
               ,
               near
               old
               Greenland
               and
               the
               Island
               of
               
                 John
                 Majen
              
               ;
               then
               they
               run
               Eastwards
               to
               Spitzbergen
               :
               After
               them
               come
               the
               Finn-fish
               ,
               
               and
               then
               there
               is
               no
               more
               Whales
               seen
               .
               It
               is
               probable
               they
               go
               after
               a
               tolerable
               cold
               place
               ;
               for
               after
               that
               ,
               I
               have
               seen
               Finn-fish
               in
               the
               Spanish
               Sea
               in
               the
               year
               1671.
               in
               the
               Month
               of
               December
               ,
               and
               in
               the
               Year
               1672.
               in
               January
               ,
               and
               also
               afterwards
               in
               the
               year
               1673.
               in
               the
               Straights
               of
               Gibralter
               in
               March
               ,
               and
               also
               in
               the
               Mediterranean
               .
            
             
               He
               swims
               against
               the
               Wind
               ,
               as
               all
               other
               Whales
               or
               great
               Fish
               do
               .
               The
               Sword-fish
               is
               his
               mortal
               Enemy
               ,
               he
               might
               rather
               be
               called
               Comb-fish
               ,
               because
               his
               long
               Tooth
               is
               on
               each
               side
               full
               of
               Teeth
               or
               Prickles
               ,
               most
               like
               a
               Comb.
               In
               our
               Home-Voyage
               to
               Hamburg
               I
               saw
               an
               Example
               of
               this
               Enmity
               of
               a
               Northcaper-Whale
               and
               a
               Sword-fish
               ,
               near
               to
               Hitland
               ,
               they
               fought
               and
               struck
               at
               one
               another
               so
               vehemently
               ,
               that
               the
               Water
               flew
               about
               like
               Dust
               ,
               sometimes
               one
               and
               sometimes
               the
               other
               was
               uppermost
               ;
               the
               weather
               was
               a
               little
               stormy
               ,
               or
               else
               we
               had
               stayed
               to
               have
               seen
               the
               end
               of
               the
               Battel
               ,
               so
               we
               were
               forced
               to
               leave
               them
               .
            
             
               The
               dead
               Whale
               killed
               by
               the
               Sword-fish
               stinks
               at
               a
               great
               distance
               ,
               but
               not
               presently
               ,
               and
               those
               that
               have
               been
               wounded
               some
               days
               before
               they
               are
               caught
               smell
               the
               worst
               ,
               and
               drive
               high
               above
               the
               Sea-water
               ,
               when
               others
               drive
               even
               with
               the
               Water
               ;
               and
               some
               sink
               .
            
             
               The
               Whales
               have
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               other
               Beasts
               ,
               their
               peculiar
               Distempers
               and
               Aliments
               ,
               but
               I
               can
               only
               write
               of
               what
               I
               know
               by
               Hear-say
               .
               An
               ancient
               and
               experienc'd
               Harpoonier
               informed
               me
               ,
               that
               he
               did
               once
               catch
               a
               Whale
               that
               was
               very
               feeble
               ,
               and
               that
               all
               his
               Skin
               ,
               but
               chiefly
               near
               unto
               the
               Tail
               and
               Finns
               ,
               hung
               like
               Films
               ,
               as
               if
               they
               were
               old
               Rags
               dragg'd
               along
               
               behind
               him
               ,
               and
               that
               he
               was
               quite
               fean
               ,
               so
               they
               made
               but
               very
               little
               Train
               oyl
               of
               his
               ●at
               ,
               for
               the
               fat
               was
               quite
               white
               ,
               and
               light
               withal
               as
               an
               empty
               Honey-comb
               .
               Before
               a
               Tempest
               they
               beat
               the
               Water
               ,
               that
               it
               doth
               fly
               about
               like
               upon
               Dust
               ,
               with
               their
               Tail
               ;
               but
               they
               have
               the
               greatest
               strength
               when
               they
               strike
               sidewards
               as
               if
               they
               did
               mow
               ,
               so
               that
               one
               might
               think
               that
               they
               were
               in
               a
               great
               agony
               ,
               and
               a
               dying
               .
               They
               are
               mightily
               tormented
               by
               the
               Lice
               ,
               whereof
               I
               have
               treated
               more
               at
               large
               above
               :
               The
               Draught
               of
               this
               Louse
               you
               may
               see
               at
               d
               ,
               in
               the
               Tab.
               Q.
               
            
             
               The
               Wounds
               that
               are
               given
               unto
               the
               Whale
               by
               the
               Harpoons
               ,
               into
               the
               fat
               ,
               heal
               up
               again
               of
               their
               own
               accord
               ,
               for
               the
               Salt-water
               cannot
               stick
               on
               it
               .
               Many
               
                 such
                 Fishes
              
               are
               caught
               ,
               that
               have
               been
               struck
               by
               others
               with
               a
               Harpoon
               ,
               and
               are
               healed
               up
               again
               ,
               and
               so
               have
               white
               Scarrs
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             VIII
             .
          
           
             How
             they
             Catch
             the
             Whale
             .
          
           
             FIrst
             ,
             it
             is
             to
             be
             observed
             ,
             that
             when
             it
             is
             like
             to
             be
             a
             good
             Year
             to
             catch
             Whales
             in
             ,
             there
             is
             many
             White-fish
             to
             be
             seen
             before
             :
             But
             where
             we
             see
             many
             Seales
             ,
             there
             we
             do
             not
             expect
             to
             meet
             with
             many
             Whales
             ;
             for
             they
             say
             ,
             that
             they
             eat
             up
             the
             Food
             of
             the
             Whale
             ,
             wherefore
             the
             Whales
             will
             not
             stay
             in
             such
             empty
             places
             ,
             but
             go
             to
             find
             out
             better
             ,
             and
             so
             come
             to
             Spitzbergen
             ,
             for
             there
             ,
             at
             the
             Shoar
             ,
             we
             see
             great
             plenty
             of
             the
             small
             Sea-snails
             ,
             (
             you
             may
             see
             them
             marked
             with
             e
             in
             the
             Tab.
             Q
             )
             and
             perhaps
             some
             other
             small
             Fish
             .
             They
             are
             caught
             after
             the
             following
             manner
             :
             When
             they
             see
             Whales
             ,
             or
             when
             they
             hear
             them
             blow
             or
             spout
             ,
             they
             call
             in
             to
             the
             Ship
             ,
             
               Fall
               ,
               fall
            
             ;
             then
             every
             Body
             must
             be
             ready
             to
             get
             into
             the
             Long-boat
             that
             he
             doth
             belong
             to
             ,
             commonly
             six
             Men
             go
             into
             every
             Long-boat
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             seven
             ,
             according
             as
             the
             Long-boats
             are
             in
             bigness
             ,
             they
             all
             of
             them
             row
             until
             they
             come
             very
             near
             unto
             the
             whale
             ,
             then
             doth
             the
             Harpoonier
             arise
             ,
             who
             sits
             always
             before
             in
             the
             Boat
             ,
             where
             the
             Harpoon
             or
             the
             sharp
             Iron
             made
             like
             unto
             an
             Arrow
             fixed
             to
             a
             Stick
             ,
             doth
             also
             lye
             on
             the
             foremost
             Board
             of
             the
             Long-boat
             ,
             which
             the
             Seamen
             call
             the
             Staffen
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             the
             broad
             piece
             of
             Wood
             that
             cometh
             up
             before
             the
             Boat
             from
             
             the
             bottom
             ,
             and
             stands
             up
             higher
             than
             all
             the
             rest
             .
             But
             when
             the
             Whale
             runs
             streight
             down
             towards
             the
             bottom
             underneath
             the
             Water
             ,
             then
             he
             doth
             draw
             the
             Rope
             very
             hard
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             Long-boat
             is
             even
             with
             the
             surface
             of
             the
             Water
             ;
             nay
             ,
             he
             would
             certainly
             pull
             it
             down
             to
             the
             bottom
             ,
             if
             they
             should
             not
             give
             him
             Rope
             enough
             :
             This
             he
             doth
             commonly
             where
             the
             Sea
             is
             deepest
             ;
             and
             this
             doth
             require
             an
             incredible
             force
             to
             draw
             so
             many
             hundred
             fathoms
             of
             Rope
             under
             Water
             .
             This
             giveth
             me
             occasion
             to
             remember
             ,
             that
             when
             we
             on
             the
             27th
             of
             April
             ,
             in
             the
             Year
             1672.
             did
             fling
             out
             our
             Lead
             ,
             near
             St.
             Kilda
             ,
             behind
             Scotland
             ,
             into
             the
             Sea
             ,
             where
             it
             was
             120
             fathom
             deep
             when
             the
             Weather
             was
             calm
             ,
             and
             when
             we
             would
             pull
             it
             up
             again
             ,
             it
             was
             so
             heavy
             that
             20
             Men
             had
             much
             to
             do
             to
             heave
             it
             .
             The
             Harpoonier
             taketh
             his
             Harpoon
             ,
             and
             holds
             the
             Point
             or
             the
             Iron
             thereof
             ,
             together
             with
             the
             Fore-runner
             ,
             towards
             his
             Left
             hand
             :
             this
             is
             a
             Rope
             or
             Line
             of
             five
             or
             seven
             fathom
             long
             ,
             about
             an
             inch
             thick
             ,
             and
             is
             laid
             up
             round
             like
             a
             Ring
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             not
             hinder
             the
             Harpoon
             when
             it
             is
             flung
             ,
             for
             as
             soon
             as
             he
             doth
             fling
             or
             dart
             the
             Harpoon
             this
             Line
             follows
             ,
             for
             it
             is
             more
             plyable
             than
             the
             rest
             that
             are
             fastened
             to
             it
             ,
             wherewith
             they
             pursue
             the
             Whale
             .
             It
             is
             made
             of
             the
             finest
             and
             softest
             Hemp
             ,
             and
             not
             daubed
             with
             Tarr
             ,
             but
             it
             doth
             swell
             in
             the
             Water
             ,
             and
             so
             it
             grows
             hard
             .
             The
             Harpoonier
             darts
             his
             Harpoon
             with
             the
             Right
             hand
             at
             the
             Fish
             ;
             as
             you
             may
             see
             by
             m
             in
             the
             Tab.
             A.
             When
             the
             Whale
             is
             hit
             with
             the
             Harpoon
             ,
             all
             the
             Men
             that
             are
             in
             the
             Long-boat
             turn
             themselves
             about
             and
             look
             before
             them
             ,
             and
             they
             lay
             their
             Oars
             nimbly
             upon
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             Long-boat
             .
             There
             
             is
             a
             Man
             in
             the
             Long-boat
             ,
             whose
             business
             it
             is
             to
             look
             after
             the
             Rope
             ;
             as
             you
             may
             see
             at
             N
             ,
             in
             the
             Tab.
             A
             ;
             for
             in
             each
             of
             these
             Long-boats
             there
             is
             a
             whole
             heap
             of
             Lines
             ,
             between
             the
             two
             Seats
             or
             Benches
             ;
             this
             Heap
             is
             divided
             into
             three
             ,
             four
             ,
             or
             five
             parts
             ,
             and
             each
             of
             them
             is
             of
             eighty
             ,
             ninety
             ,
             to
             one
             hundred
             fathoms
             long
             .
             The
             first
             of
             them
             is
             tyed
             to
             the
             Forerunner
             ,
             or
             small
             Line
             ;
             as
             the
             Whale
             runs
             under
             the
             Water
             ,
             they
             tye
             more
             and
             more
             Line
             to
             it
             ,
             and
             if
             in
             one
             Boat
             there
             should
             not
             be
             enough
             ,
             they
             make
             use
             of
             those
             that
             are
             in
             the
             other
             Long
             boats
             .
             These
             Ropes
             or
             Lines
             are
             thicker
             and
             stronger
             than
             the
             Fore-runner
             ,
             and
             are
             made
             of
             strong
             and
             tough
             Hemp
             ,
             and
             Tarred
             over
             .
             The
             Line-furnisher
             ,
             or
             the
             man
             that
             doth
             look
             after
             the
             Ropes
             ,
             and
             also
             the
             other
             Men
             that
             are
             in
             the
             Long-boat
             ,
             must
             have
             great
             care
             that
             the
             Ropes
             or
             Lines
             may
             not
             be
             entangled
             when
             they
             run
             out
             so
             swift
             ,
             or
             that
             they
             may
             not
             run
             towards
             the
             side
             of
             the
             Long-boat
             ,
             for
             then
             the
             Long-boat
             would
             be
             overset
             ,
             and
             many
             Men
             lose
             their
             Lives
             ,
             if
             other
             Long-boats
             were
             not
             near
             to
             their
             assistance
             .
             The
             Line
             must
             run
             just
             before
             ,
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Long-boat
             ,
             that
             is
             called
             the
             Stave
             by
             the
             Seamen
             ,
             and
             by
             reason
             of
             this
             strong
             and
             violent
             motion
             the
             Wood
             and
             Rope
             ,
             would
             be
             set
             on
             fire
             .
             But
             to
             prevent
             this
             ,
             the
             Harpoonier
             hath
             a
             wet
             Rag
             tied
             to
             a
             Stick
             (
             like
             unto
             a
             Mop
             )
             ready
             at
             hand
             ,
             wherewith
             he
             wets
             the
             Wood
             without
             ceasing
             .
             The
             other
             three
             Men
             that
             are
             in
             the
             Long-boats
             take
             also
             care
             of
             the
             Lines
             ,
             as
             well
             when
             they
             are
             let
             out
             ,
             as
             when
             they
             are
             taken
             in
             again
             ,
             and
             when
             they
             cannot
             hold
             it
             with
             their
             Hands
             ,
             they
             wind
             it
             about
             the
             Staves
             of
             the
             Boat
             ,
             and
             so
             they
             do
             stop
             it
             
             
             
             
             
             from
             going
             any
             further
             .
             Another
             that
             is
             called
             the
             Steerman
             ,
             stands
             behind
             in
             the
             Long-boat
             ,
             as
             you
             may
             see
             by
             o
             in
             the
             Tab.
             A
             ,
             and
             steers
             the
             Boat
             with
             an
             Oar
             ,
             and
             he
             takes
             great
             care
             ,
             and
             minds
             the
             Rope
             ,
             to
             see
             which
             way
             it
             runs
             out
             ,
             for
             if
             it
             doth
             go
             towards
             either
             side
             ,
             and
             doth
             not
             run
             just
             before
             over
             the
             Stave
             ,
             he
             so
             guides
             the
             Boat
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             run
             exactly
             out
             before
             .
             The
             Whale
             runs
             away
             with
             the
             Long-boat
             as
             swift
             as
             the
             Wind.
             If
             the
             Harpoonier
             can
             ,
             he
             doth
             dart
             the
             Harpoon
             just
             behind
             the
             Spout-hole
             of
             the
             Whale
             or
             in
             the
             thick
             Fat
             of
             his
             Back
             ,
             where
             they
             also
             do
             launce
             him
             ,
             for
             that
             maketh
             him
             spout
             Blood
             sooner
             than
             if
             wounded
             in
             any
             other
             place
             ,
             and
             dye
             sooner
             than
             if
             you
             should
             launce
             them
             into
             their
             Belly
             ,
             or
             through
             the
             Guts
             .
             The
             first
             Whale
             ,
             we
             caught
             spouted
             Blood
             ,
             in
             such
             a
             quantity
             ,
             that
             the
             Sea
             was
             tinged
             by
             it
             where-ever
             he
             swam
             ,
             whereunto
             the
             Mallemucks
             flock'd
             in
             great
             numbers
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             mentioned
             before
             .
             They
             also
             launce
             the
             Whales
             near
             their
             privy
             parts
             ,
             if
             they
             can
             come
             at
             it
             ,
             for
             if
             they
             are
             run
             in
             there
             it
             doth
             pain
             them
             very
             much
             ;
             nay
             ,
             even
             when
             they
             are
             almost
             dead
             ,
             if
             you
             run
             in
             your
             Launce
             thereabout
             ,
             it
             causes
             the
             whole
             Body
             to
             tremble
             .
             For
             the
             most
             part
             they
             do
             not
             much
             mind
             where
             they
             launce
             or
             push
             them
             ,
             for
             there
             is
             no
             time
             to
             take
             great
             deliberation
             ,
             but
             they
             strike
             at
             him
             as
             well
             as
             they
             can
             .
             But
             about
             the
             Head
             the
             Harpoon
             can
             do
             him
             no
             hurt
             ,
             because
             the
             Fat
             is
             but
             very
             thin
             there
             upon
             the
             Bones
             ,
             which
             the
             Whales
             know
             as
             well
             as
             we
             ;
             for
             when
             they
             find
             themselves
             in
             danger
             ,
             so
             that
             they
             cannot
             escape
             the
             Harpoon
             ,
             they
             rather
             leave
             their
             Head
             than
             their
             Back
             undefended
             ,
             for
             there
             the
             Harpoon
             breaks
             out
             easier
             ,
             
             and
             so
             the
             Whale
             gets
             away
             ,
             like
             one
             that
             hath
             no
             mind
             to
             fight
             any
             longer
             .
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             Harpoon
             is
             ,
             to
             tye
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             the
             Whales
             with
             them
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             not
             run
             away
             :
             It
             is
             shaped
             like
             an
             Arrow
             before
             ,
             as
             you
             may
             see
             at
             f
             ,
             in
             the
             Tab.
             que
             it
             hath
             two
             sharp
             Beards
             ,
             they
             are
             sharp
             at
             the
             edge
             ,
             and
             have
             a
             broad
             Back
             ,
             like
             unto
             a
             Hatchet
             that
             is
             sharp
             before
             and
             blunt
             behind
             ,
             or
             on
             the
             Back
             ,
             so
             that
             it
             may
             not
             cut
             with
             its
             Back
             ,
             for
             else
             it
             would
             tear
             out
             and
             all
             your
             Labour
             would
             be
             lost
             .
             The
             Iron
             Handle
             is
             thicker
             behind
             than
             before
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             hollow
             ,
             whereinto
             they
             put
             the
             Stick
             ,
             as
             you
             may
             see
             in
             the
             Tab.
             Q
             ,
             marked
             with
             h.
             Before
             this
             hollow
             part
             ,
             the
             Fore-goer
             is
             fasten'd
             or
             tyed
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             the
             foremost
             Rope
             ,
             as
             you
             may
             see
             in
             the
             Tab.
             Q
             ,
             marked
             with
             i.
             Those
             are
             the
             best
             Harpoons
             that
             are
             made
             of
             clean
             and
             fine
             Steel
             ,
             and
             are
             not
             hardened
             too
             much
             ,
             so
             that
             you
             may
             bend
             it
             without
             snapping
             ,
             for
             oftentimes
             Two
             hundred
             Pounds
             are
             lost
             (
             for
             a
             midling
             Whale
             is
             esteem'd
             at
             so
             much
             )
             in
             a
             minutes
             time
             for
             want
             of
             a
             good
             and
             well-temper'd
             Harpoon
             .
             The
             Wooden
             Stick
             is
             fastened
             within
             the
             Iron
             Collet
             or
             Funnel
             of
             the
             Harpoon
             ,
             with
             Packthread
             wound
             all
             about
             the
             Iron
             ;
             somewhat
             higher
             up
             ,
             about
             two
             spans
             off
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             hole
             made
             through
             the
             Stick
             ,
             as
             you
             may
             see
             marked
             with
             k
             ,
             in
             the
             Tab.
             Q.
             The
             Harpoon
             is
             light
             behind
             ,
             and
             heavy
             towards
             the
             point
             ,
             or
             before
             ,
             like
             an
             Arrow
             ,
             that
             is
             made
             heavy
             before
             with
             Iron
             ,
             and
             light
             behind
             with
             Feathers
             ,
             so
             that
             fling
             it
             which
             way
             you
             will
             ,
             it
             doth
             fall
             always
             upon
             the
             point
             .
             Through
             this
             hole
             cometh
             a
             piece
             of
             Pack-thread
             ,
             wherewith
             the
             end
             of
             the
             Fore-runner
             is
             fastened
             to
             the
             Handle
             or
             Stick
             of
             the
             Harpoon
             ,
             
             but
             this
             is
             soon
             torn
             off
             ,
             and
             it
             serveth
             for
             nothing
             more
             after
             the
             Harpoon
             sticks
             in
             the
             Body
             of
             the
             Whale
             ;
             neither
             is
             the
             Wooden
             Handle
             of
             any
             further
             use
             ,
             and
             so
             it
             doth
             soon
             come
             out
             from
             the
             Iron
             .
             When
             the
             Whale
             is
             struck
             with
             the
             Harpoon
             ,
             all
             the
             other
             Long-boats
             row
             out
             before
             ,
             and
             take
             notice
             which
             way
             the
             Line
             doth
             stand
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             they
             pull
             at
             the
             Rope
             or
             Line
             (
             as
             you
             may
             see
             in
             the
             Tab.
             A
             ,
             marked
             with
             p.
             )
             If
             it
             is
             stiff
             and
             heavy
             ,
             the
             Whale
             doth
             draw
             it
             still
             with
             his
             might
             ;
             but
             if
             it
             doth
             hang
             loose
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             Long-boat
             is
             before
             and
             behind
             equally
             high
             out
             of
             the
             Water
             ,
             then
             the
             Men
             pull
             in
             the
             Rope
             again
             ,
             (
             as
             you
             may
             see
             in
             the
             Tab.
             A
             ,
             marked
             with
             q
             )
             and
             the
             Rope-giver
             layeth
             it
             down
             in
             very
             good
             order
             (
             as
             you
             may
             see
             at
             n
             ,
             in
             the
             Tab.
             A
             )
             round
             ,
             and
             one
             row
             above
             the
             other
             ,
             that
             if
             the
             Whale
             should
             draw
             on
             again
             ,
             he
             may
             have
             it
             ready
             to
             give
             him
             without
             being
             entangled
             .
             Here
             is
             also
             this
             to
             be
             observed
             ,
             that
             if
             the
             Whale
             runs
             upon
             the
             level
             they
             must
             not
             give
             him
             too
             much
             Rope
             ,
             for
             if
             he
             should
             turn
             and
             wind
             himself
             much
             and
             often
             about
             ,
             he
             might
             easily
             wind
             the
             Rope
             about
             a
             Rock
             or
             heavy
             Stone
             ,
             and
             so
             fasten
             it
             to
             it
             ,
             and
             so
             the
             Harpoon
             would
             come
             out
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             Labour
             would
             be
             lost
             ;
             which
             hath
             often
             hapned
             ,
             and
             we
             ourselves
             lost
             one
             that
             way
             .
             The
             other
             Long-boats
             that
             are
             towed
             behind
             ,
             wherein
             the
             Men
             look
             all
             before
             them
             ,
             and
             sit
             still
             ,
             and
             let
             the
             Whale
             draw
             them
             along
             :
             If
             the
             Whale
             doth
             rowl
             upon
             the
             Ground
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             Long-boats
             or
             Sloops
             lye
             still
             ,
             they
             draw
             their
             Lines
             in
             again
             by
             degrees
             ,
             and
             the
             Rope-master
             doth
             lay
             them
             down
             again
             in
             their
             proper
             places
             ,
             as
             they
             had
             been
             laid
             before
             .
             When
             
             they
             kill
             the
             Whale
             with
             Launces
             ,
             they
             also
             pull
             their
             Lines
             in
             again
             ,
             until
             they
             come
             near
             to
             the
             Whale
             ,
             yet
             at
             some
             distance
             ,
             that
             the
             others
             may
             have
             room
             to
             launce
             :
             But
             they
             must
             have
             great
             care
             ,
             that
             all
             the
             Lines
             of
             every
             Sloop
             may
             not
             be
             cut
             off
             together
             ,
             because
             some
             Whales
             sink
             ,
             and
             others
             do
             swim
             even
             with
             the
             Water
             when
             they
             are
             dead
             ,
             which
             no
             body
             can
             tell
             before-hand
             ,
             whether
             they
             will
             do
             one
             or
             the
             other
             .
             The
             fat
             ones
             do
             not
             sink
             presently
             after
             they
             are
             fresh
             killed
             ,
             but
             the
             lean
             ones
             sink
             immediately
             after
             they
             are
             dead
             ,
             but
             after
             some
             few
             days
             they
             come
             up
             again
             ,
             and
             swim
             on
             the
             Water
             :
             But
             it
             would
             be
             too
             long
             a
             while
             for
             a
             Man
             to
             stay
             until
             he
             cometh
             up
             again
             ,
             and
             the
             Sea
             is
             never
             so
             quiet
             that
             one
             can
             stay
             long
             in
             the
             same
             place
             ,
             and
             where
             the
             Sea
             is
             quiet
             ,
             and
             without
             Waves
             ,
             there
             the
             Stream
             doth
             carry
             the
             Ships
             and
             the
             Ice
             along
             together
             ,
             so
             that
             we
             should
             be
             forced
             to
             leave
             the
             Whale
             unto
             others
             ,
             that
             would
             find
             him
             dead
             some
             days
             after
             .
             '
             T'
             is
             true
             ,
             this
             is
             the
             easiest
             way
             to
             catch
             Whales
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             very
             nasty
             and
             stinking
             work
             ;
             for
             long
             and
             white
             Maggots
             grow
             in
             their
             Flesh
             ,
             they
             are
             flat
             like
             unto
             Worms
             that
             breed
             in
             Mens
             Bellies
             ,
             and
             they
             smell
             worse
             than
             ever
             I
             smelt
             any
             thing
             in
             my
             Life
             .
             The
             longer
             the
             Whale
             lies
             dead
             in
             the
             Water
             ,
             the
             higher
             he
             doth
             swim
             above
             it
             ;
             some
             swim
             a
             foot
             high
             above
             the
             Water
             ,
             others
             to
             their
             middle
             ,
             and
             then
             they
             do
             burst
             easily
             ,
             and
             give
             a
             very
             great
             report
             .
             They
             begin
             immediately
             to
             stink
             ,
             and
             this
             encreases
             hourly
             ,
             and
             their
             Flesh
             boils
             and
             ferments
             like
             unto
             Beer
             or
             Ale
             ,
             and
             holes
             break
             in
             their
             Bellies
             ,
             that
             their
             Guts
             come
             out
             .
             If
             any
             Man
             is
             enclined
             to
             sore
             Eyes
             ,
             this
             Vapour
             enflames
             them
             immediately
             ,
             as
             if
             Quicklime
             
             was
             flung
             into
             them
             .
             But
             when
             the
             live
             Whales
             rise
             and
             swim
             again
             ,
             some
             of
             them
             are
             astonish'd
             ,
             others
             wild
             or
             stark
             mad
             :
             To
             those
             that
             are
             wild
             we
             come
             softly
             or
             gently
             from
             behind
             ,
             as
             we
             do
             when
             we
             are
             going
             to
             trapan
             them
             ;
             for
             when
             the
             Wind
             is
             down
             ,
             the
             Weather
             calm
             ,
             and
             A●
             serene
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             Sea
             doth
             not
             foam
             or
             roar
             ,
             the
             Whales
             hear
             immediately
             the
             striking
             of
             the
             Oars
             .
          
           
             If
             many
             small
             Ice-sheets
             lye
             near
             to
             one
             another
             ,
             so
             that
             we
             cannot
             follow
             the
             Whale
             with
             our
             Sloops
             or
             Long-boats
             ,
             we
             fetch
             in
             our
             Line
             with
             all
             might
             and
             strength
             ,
             and
             if
             with
             one
             or
             more
             pulls
             we
             can
             fetch
             out
             the
             Harpoon
             it
             is
             well
             ,
             if
             not
             ,
             we
             chop
             off
             the
             Rope
             or
             Line
             .
             The
             Whale
             is
             best
             and
             surest
             struck
             with
             a
             Harpoon
             when
             he
             spouts
             Water
             ,
             as
             is
             already
             said
             above
             ,
             for
             we
             do
             observe
             ,
             that
             when
             they
             lye
             still
             and
             very
             quiet
             ,
             that
             they
             then
             listen
             ,
             and
             are
             sometimes
             under
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             above
             Water
             ,
             so
             that
             their
             Back
             doth
             not
             quite
             dry
             ,
             and
             before
             we
             are
             aware
             of
             it
             he
             flings
             up
             his
             Tail
             behind
             out
             of
             the
             Sea
             ,
             and
             so
             bids
             us
             good-b●wy
             ;
             as
             you
             may
             see
             at
             s
             ,
             in
             the
             Tab.
             A.
             The
             Whales
             ,
             may
             easily
             be
             caught
             when
             the
             Air
             is
             very
             serene
             and
             clear
             ,
             and
             the
             Sea
             quiet
             ,
             and
             where
             there
             float
             neither
             great
             nor
             small
             Ice-sheets
             ,
             so
             that
             we
             may
             go
             in
             between
             them
             with
             our
             Boats
             or
             Sloops
             ,
             to
             follow
             them
             ;
             ●or
             at
             the
             Ice-fields
             the
             Whales
             do
             commonly
             lye
             and
             rub
             themselves
             at
             them
             ,
             perhaps
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Lice
             that
             bite
             them
             .
             Besides
             ,
             against
             the
             Ice-sheets
             the
             Sea
             beats
             ,
             dashes
             ,
             and
             foams
             ,
             with
             small
             curling
             Waves
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             Whales
             do
             not
             observe
             nor
             mind
             the
             striking
             of
             the
             Oars
             ,
             and
             so
             they
             are
             easily
             struck
             with
             the
             Harpoon
             .
             It
             is
             
             very
             dangerous
             to
             kill
             a
             Female
             ,
             chiefly
             when
             she
             is
             big
             with
             young
             ,
             for
             they
             defend
             themselves
             very
             long
             ,
             and
             are
             harder
             to
             be
             killed
             than
             a
             Male
             one
             .
             Oftentimes
             the
             Long-boats
             wait
             six
             or
             seven
             hours
             ,
             nay
             ,
             a
             whole
             day
             ,
             for
             a
             Whale
             ;
             before
             they
             see
             one
             .
          
           
             Where
             great
             quantity
             of
             small
             Ice
             is
             crowded
             together
             ,
             there
             it
             is
             also
             very
             dangerous
             ,
             and
             hard
             to
             come
             to
             the
             Whale
             ,
             for
             he
             is
             so
             cunning
             ,
             that
             when
             he
             perceives
             where
             the
             Ice
             is
             he
             retires
             thither
             immediately
             .
             The
             Harpoonier
             stands
             at
             the
             Head
             of
             the
             Long-boat
             ,
             and
             doth
             draw
             on
             the
             Rope
             ,
             as
             you
             may
             see
             at
             p
             ,
             in
             the
             Tab.
             A
             ,
             to
             try
             whether
             it
             is
             heavy
             or
             light
             ;
             if
             it
             feels
             heavy
             ,
             so
             that
             we
             are
             afraid
             that
             it
             will
             pull
             the
             Boat
             under
             Water
             ,
             then
             we
             give
             him
             more
             Rope
             ,
             if
             he
             runs
             streight
             out
             before
             ,
             he
             draweth
             the
             Sloops
             after
             him
             .
             If
             he
             doth
             run
             underneath
             a
             great
             Ice-field
             ,
             the
             Harpoonier
             taketh
             a
             Knife
             into
             his
             Hand
             ,
             as
             you
             may
             see
             at
             R
             ,
             in
             the
             Tab
             A
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             the
             Chopping-Knife
             ,
             and
             if
             the
             Ice-field
             be
             hollow
             ,
             or
             spungy
             ,
             or
             full
             of
             holes
             in
             the
             middle
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             Whale
             can
             fetch
             breath
             underneath
             it
             ,
             and
             the
             Rope
             is
             not
             long
             enough
             to
             follow
             him
             ,
             and
             if
             the
             Ice
             be
             several
             miles
             long
             ,
             they
             draw
             the
             Rope
             in
             as
             much
             as
             possibly
             they
             can
             ,
             until
             it
             be
             streight
             ,
             and
             then
             he
             chops
             it
             off
             ,
             loosing
             the
             piece
             of
             the
             Rope
             whereon
             the
             Harpoon
             is
             fastened
             ,
             that
             sticketh
             in
             the
             Body
             of
             the
             Whale
             ,
             yet
             not
             without
             great
             loss
             ,
             for
             oftentimes
             they
             run
             away
             with
             the
             Lines
             that
             belong
             to
             five
             and
             more
             Sloops
             .
             It
             happens
             very
             often
             ,
             that
             they
             run
             to
             the
             Ice
             with
             the
             Long-boats
             ,
             so
             that
             they
             dash
             against
             it
             ,
             as
             if
             they
             would
             break
             it
             into
             pieces
             ,
             which
             also
             very
             often
             happens
             .
             But
             
             when
             the
             Whale
             rises
             again
             ,
             they
             oftentimes
             fling
             one
             or
             two
             more
             Harpoons
             into
             him
             ,
             according
             as
             they
             find
             he
             is
             tired
             more
             or
             less
             ,
             then
             he
             dives
             under
             Water
             again
             .
             Some
             swim
             or
             run
             even
             all
             along
             on
             the
             Water
             ,
             and
             they
             play
             with
             their
             Tail
             and
             Finns
             ,
             so
             that
             we
             must
             have
             great
             care
             that
             we
             may
             not
             come
             too
             near
             them
             .
             When
             the
             Whales
             fling
             their
             Tails
             about
             after
             this
             manner
             ,
             they
             wind
             the
             Line
             about
             their
             Tail
             ,
             so
             that
             we
             need
             not
             to
             fear
             the
             Harpoon
             tearing
             out
             ,
             for
             then
             they
             are
             ty'd
             strong
             and
             firm
             enough
             with
             the
             Rope
             .
             After
             they
             are
             wounded
             ,
             they
             spout
             with
             all
             their
             might
             and
             main
             ,
             so
             that
             you
             may
             hear
             them
             as
             far
             off
             as
             you
             may
             a
             Cannon
             ;
             but
             when
             they
             are
             quite
             tired
             ,
             it
             cometh
             out
             only
             by
             drops
             ,
             for
             he
             hath
             not
             strength
             enough
             to
             force
             the
             Water
             up
             ,
             and
             therefore
             it
             sounds
             as
             if
             you
             held
             an
             empty
             Mug
             or
             Bottle
             under
             Water
             ,
             and
             the
             Water
             runs
             into
             it
             .
             And
             this
             sound
             is
             a
             certain
             sign
             of
             his
             feebleness
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             is
             going
             to
             expire
             .
             Some
             Whales
             blow
             Blood
             to
             the
             very
             last
             ,
             after
             they
             have
             been
             wounded
             ,
             and
             these
             dash
             the
             Men
             in
             the
             Long-boats
             most
             filthily
             ,
             and
             dye
             the
             Sloops
             as
             red
             as
             if
             they
             were
             painted
             with
             a
             red
             colour
             ;
             nay
             ,
             the
             very
             Sea
             is
             tinged
             red
             all
             along
             where
             they
             swim
             .
             Those
             Whales
             that
             are
             mortally
             wounded
             heat
             themselves
             ,
             that
             they
             reek
             while
             they
             are
             alive
             ,
             and
             the
             Birds
             sit
             on
             them
             ,
             and
             eat
             on
             them
             while
             they
             are
             still
             alive
             .
             When
             the
             Whales
             blow
             up
             the
             Water
             ,
             they
             fling
             out
             with
             it
             some
             fattish
             substance
             that
             floats
             upon
             the
             Sea
             ,
             like
             Sperm
             ,
             and
             this
             Fat
             the
             Mallemucks
             devour
             greedily
             ,
             of
             which
             several
             thousands
             attend
             him
             ,
             so
             that
             a
             Whale
             often
             hath
             more
             Attendants
             than
             a
             King
             hath
             Servants
             ;
             as
             you
             
             may
             see
             by
             T
             ,
             in
             the
             Tab.
             A.
             Sometimes
             also
             the
             Harpoons
             break
             out
             ;
             then
             often
             Long-boats
             of
             other
             Ships
             attend
             ,
             and
             as
             soon
             as
             they
             see
             that
             the
             Harpoon
             is
             come
             out
             ,
             they
             ●●ing
             their
             own
             into
             him
             ,
             and
             the
             Whale
             is
             theirs
             ,
             although
             the
             first
             Harpoon
             hath
             almost
             killed
             the
             whale
             ,
             yet
             if
             he
             doth
             get
             loose
             ,
             the
             second
             Party
             claims
             him
             ,
             and
             the
             first
             must
             look
             for
             another
             .
             Sometimes
             at
             the
             same
             time
             two
             Harpoons
             ,
             belonging
             to
             two
             several
             Ships
             are
             struck
             into
             the
             Whale
             ,
             such
             ones
             are
             divided
             equally
             ,
             and
             each
             one
             hath
             half
             ;
             as
             you
             may
             see
             at
             MM
             ,
             in
             the
             Tab.
             A
             ;
             the
             other
             two
             ,
             or
             three
             ,
             or
             more
             Sloops
             ,
             as
             many
             as
             there
             is
             of
             them
             ,
             wait
             for
             the
             
             Whale's
             coming
             up
             again
             ,
             and
             when
             they
             see
             that
             he
             is
             tired
             ,
             they
             kill
             him
             outright
             with
             Launces
             .
             In
             doing
             this
             is
             the
             greatest
             danger
             ,
             for
             the
             first
             that
             do
             ●●ing
             the
             Harpoon
             into
             him
             are
             drawn
             along
             by
             the
             Whale
             ,
             and
             are
             at
             a
             good
             distance
             from
             him
             ,
             but
             those
             that
             kill
             him
             with
             Launces
             are
             as
             well
             upon
             his
             Body
             as
             at
             his
             Sides
             ,
             according
             as
             the
             Whale
             turns
             and
             winds
             himself
             ,
             and
             they
             receive
             many
             severe
             Blows
             .
             Here
             the
             Steersman
             must
             take
             care
             to
             observe
             how
             the
             Whale
             runs
             and
             turns
             himself
             about
             ,
             that
             the
             Harpoonier
             may
             reach
             him
             with
             his
             Launces
             ;
             all
             the
             other
             Men
             in
             the
             Sloops
             row
             diligently
             ,
             sometimes
             forwards
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             backwards
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             
               rowing
               on
            
             and
             striking
             ,
             and
             when
             the
             Whale
             lifts
             up
             himself
             out
             of
             the
             Water
             ,
             he
             commonly
             doth
             strike
             about
             with
             his
             Tail
             and
             Finns
             ,
             that
             the
             Water
             dasheth
             up
             like
             Dust
             .
             A
             Long-boat
             he
             values
             no
             more
             than
             Dust
             ,
             for
             he
             can
             beat
             it
             all
             into
             shatters
             at
             a
             blow
             :
             but
             a
             great
             Ship
             is
             too
             hard
             for
             him
             ,
             and
             if
             he
             strikes
             against
             it
             with
             his
             Tail
             ,
             he
             feels
             it
             more
             that
             the
             Ship
             ,
             
             for
             he
             doth
             so
             paint
             the
             Ship
             with
             his
             own
             Blood
             ,
             that
             it
             maketh
             him
             very
             feeble
             .
             A
             good
             Steerman
             is
             next
             unto
             the
             Harpoonier
             most
             useful
             in
             the
             Sloop
             ;
             he
             steers
             with
             one
             Oar
             ,
             and
             doth
             look
             out
             before
             :
             the
             other
             four
             Men
             turn
             their
             Back
             to
             the
             Head
             ,
             and
             look
             towards
             the
             Stern
             ,
             therefore
             doth
             the
             Steerman
             and
             Harpoonier
             always
             cry
             ,
             
               Row
               on
            
             ,
             or
             strike
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             row
             near
             to
             the
             Whale
             ,
             or
             else
             keep
             farther
             off
             .
             The
             Launces
             have
             a
             Wooden
             Stick
             or
             Handle
             above
             two
             fathoms
             long
             ,
             or
             somewhat
             shorter
             than
             a
             Pikestaff
             ;
             as
             in
             the
             Tab.
             Q.
             you
             may
             see
             at
             g
             ;
             the
             Iron
             thereof
             is
             commonly
             a
             fathom
             long
             ,
             and
             pointed
             before
             like
             unto
             a
             Pike
             ;
             it
             is
             made
             of
             Steel
             or
             tough
             Iron
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             bend
             without
             breaking
             :
             for
             after
             you
             have
             made
             a
             deep
             hole
             in
             his
             Body
             with
             your
             Launces
             ,
             you
             poke
             into
             it
             with
             them
             one
             way
             and
             the
             other
             way
             ,
             as
             they
             do
             when
             they
             poke
             for
             Eels
             ,
             as
             you
             may
             see
             at
             Z
             ,
             in
             the
             Tab.
             A
             ;
             but
             if
             he
             doth
             get
             one
             or
             more
             out
             of
             your
             Hands
             ,
             you
             take
             another
             ,
             for
             every
             Sloop
             hath
             at
             least
             five
             ,
             six
             ,
             or
             seven
             ,
             and
             yet
             sometimes
             he
             has
             them
             all
             out
             of
             three
             ,
             four
             ,
             or
             more
             Boats
             sticking
             in
             his
             Body
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             IX
             .
          
           
             What
             they
             do
             with
             the
             dead
             Whale
             .
          
           
             AFter
             the
             Whale
             is
             killed
             they
             cut
             off
             his
             Tail
             ;
             some
             keep
             the
             Tail
             and
             Finns
             ,
             and
             hang
             them
             up
             at
             the
             outside
             of
             their
             Ship
             ,
             for
             that
             defends
             them
             from
             the
             Ice
             when
             it
             presseth
             upon
             the
             Ship
             :
             The
             Tail
             hinders
             the
             Boat
             in
             its
             course
             ,
             because
             it
             doth
             lye
             cross
             ,
             and
             that
             is
             the
             reason
             why
             they
             cut
             it
             off
             .
             Before
             the
             Tail
             they
             fasten
             to
             a
             piece
             of
             a
             Rope
             ,
             and
             at
             the
             other
             end
             at
             the
             Stern
             of
             the
             last
             Sloop
             ,
             as
             you
             may
             see
             in
             the
             Tab.
             A
             ,
             marked
             with
             W.
             There
             is
             in
             all
             four
             or
             five
             Sloops
             fastened
             to
             one
             another
             behind
             ,
             and
             so
             they
             row
             one
             behind
             the
             other
             to
             the
             great
             Ship.
             When
             they
             have
             brought
             the
             Whale
             to
             the
             Ship
             ,
             they
             tye
             it
             with
             Ropes
             fast
             to
             the
             Ship
             ;
             that
             part
             where
             the
             Tail
             is
             cut
             off
             they
             fasten
             the
             fore-part
             of
             the
             Ship
             ,
             and
             the
             Head
             towards
             the
             Stern
             ,
             about
             the
             middle
             ,
             near
             the
             great
             Shrowds
             of
             the
             Mainmast
             on
             the
             Larboard
             of
             the
             Ship
             ;
             it
             is
             seldom
             that
             a
             Whale
             doth
             reach
             farther
             than
             from
             the
             Poop
             to
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Ship
             ,
             except
             the
             Vessels
             are
             very
             small
             ;
             as
             you
             may
             see
             at
             X
             ,
             in
             the
             Tab.
             A.
             
          
           
             By
             the
             Larboard
             is
             to
             be
             understood
             that
             side
             of
             the
             Ship
             that
             is
             at
             your
             Right
             Hand
             as
             you
             go
             from
             before
             towards
             the
             Stern
             ;
             but
             that
             side
             of
             the
             Ship
             that
             is
             on
             your
             Right
             Hand
             as
             you
             
             go
             from
             the
             Stern
             towards
             the
             Fore-part
             is
             called
             Star-board
             ,
             because
             you
             go
             from
             the
             Steer
             forward
             .
          
           
             Whoever
             of
             the
             Ships
             Crew
             sees
             a
             dead
             Whale
             ,
             cries
             out
             
               Fish
               mine
            
             ,
             and
             therefore
             the
             Merchants
             must
             pay
             him
             a
             Ducat
             ,
             for
             his
             Care
             and
             Vigilance
             .
             Many
             of
             them
             climb
             often
             up
             into
             the
             Mast
             in
             hopes
             to
             have
             a
             Ducat
             ,
             but
             in
             vain
             .
          
           
             When
             the
             dead
             Whale
             is
             thus
             fastened
             to
             the
             Ship
             ,
             two
             Sloops
             hold
             on
             the
             other
             side
             of
             the
             Fish
             or
             Whale
             ,
             and
             in
             each
             of
             them
             doth
             stand
             a
             Man
             or
             Boy
             ,
             that
             has
             a
             long
             Hook
             in
             his
             Hands
             ,
             wherewith
             he
             doth
             hold
             the
             Boat
             to
             the
             Ship
             ,
             and
             the
             Harpoonier
             stands
             before
             in
             the
             Sloop
             ,
             or
             upon
             the
             Whale
             ,
             with
             a
             Leathern
             Suit
             on
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             they
             have
             boots
             on
             .
             Underneath
             the
             Hook
             are
             some
             sharp
             Nails
             fixed
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             be
             able
             to
             stand
             firm
             ,
             for
             the
             Whale
             is
             very
             slippery
             ,
             so
             that
             one
             may
             easily
             fall
             ,
             as
             upon
             slippery
             Ice
             .
             These
             two
             Men
             that
             cut
             the
             Fat
             off
             have
             their
             peculiar
             Wages
             for
             it
             ,
             viz.
             about
             four
             or
             five
             Rix
             Dollars
             .
             First
             ,
             they
             cut
             a
             large
             piece
             from
             behind
             the
             Head
             ,
             by
             the
             Eyes
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             the
             
               Kenter
               piece
            
             ,
             that
             is
             as
             much
             as
             to
             say
             the
             Wnding-piece
             ;
             for
             ,
             as
             they
             cut
             all
             the
             other
             Fat
             all
             in
             rows
             ,
             from
             the
             Whale
             towards
             the
             end
             ,
             so
             they
             cut
             this
             great
             Kenter-piece
             larger
             and
             wider
             than
             all
             the
             rest
             .
             This
             piece
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             cut
             round
             about
             from
             the
             Whale
             ,
             reaches
             from
             the
             Water
             to
             the
             Cradle
             ,
             (
             that
             is
             the
             round
             Circle
             that
             goeth
             round
             about
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Mast
             ,
             and
             is
             made
             in
             the
             shape
             of
             a
             Basket
             )
             from
             whence
             you
             may
             guess
             at
             the
             bigness
             of
             a
             Whale
             .
             A
             strong
             and
             thick
             Rope
             is
             fixed
             to
             this
             Kenter-piece
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             end
             is
             fixed
             underneath
             
             the
             Cradle
             ,
             whereby
             the
             Whale
             is
             as
             it
             was
             born
             up
             out
             of
             the
             Water
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             come
             at
             it
             ,
             and
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             great
             weight
             of
             the
             Whale
             ,
             the
             Ship
             leans
             towards
             that
             side
             .
             One
             may
             judge
             how
             tough
             the
             Fat
             is
             ,
             for
             in
             this
             piece
             an
             hole
             is
             made
             ,
             through
             which
             the
             Rope
             is
             fastened
             ,
             yet
             not
             deep
             into
             the
             Fat
             ,
             wherewith
             they
             turn
             the
             Fish
             at
             pleasure
             ;
             as
             you
             may
             see
             at
             K
             ,
             in
             the
             Tab.
             A.
             Then
             ,
             as
             is
             before
             said
             ,
             they
             cut
             another
             piece
             down
             hard
             by
             this
             ,
             that
             is
             also
             halled
             up
             to
             the
             Ship
             ;
             as
             you
             may
             see
             at
             L
             ,
             in
             the
             Tab.
             A
             ;
             and
             then
             in
             the
             Ship
             they
             cut
             it
             into
             less
             pieces
             about
             a
             foot
             square
             .
             These
             two
             Men
             have
             in
             their
             Hands
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             those
             that
             stand
             on
             the
             Whale
             ,
             long
             Knives
             ,
             wherewith
             they
             cut
             these
             square
             pieces
             .
             These
             Knives
             are
             ,
             with
             their
             Ha●ts
             ,
             about
             the
             length
             of
             a
             Man
             ;
             and
             the
             more
             the
             Fat
             of
             the
             Whale
             is
             loosened
             ,
             just
             as
             the
             Hide
             is
             flea'd
             from
             an
             Ox
             ,
             the
             higher
             must
             they
             pull
             up
             the
             Fat
             with
             their
             Pulleys
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             cut
             it
             the
             easier
             .
             And
             when
             they
             have
             drawn
             up
             this
             Fat
             ,
             the
             Men
             take
             it
             in
             to
             them
             into
             the
             Ship
             ,
             and
             loosen
             the
             Rope
             that
             is
             was
             fastened
             unto
             .
             The
             Rope
             is
             fastened
             with
             a
             Ring
             ,
             whereinto
             they
             put
             a
             great
             Iron
             Hook
             ,
             which
             is
             fastened
             to
             a
             strong
             Tackle
             ,
             and
             also
             sometimes
             ,
             before
             in
             the
             Ship
             ,
             are
             fixed
             two
             other
             Tackle
             ,
             wherewith
             all
             the
             Fat
             is
             drawn
             up
             into
             the
             Ship.
             In
             the
             Ship
             stand
             two
             Men
             ,
             with
             Hooks
             as
             long
             as
             a
             Man
             ,
             wherewith
             they
             hold
             the
             great
             piece
             of
             Fat
             ,
             which
             the
             two
             Men
             cut
             into
             square
             pieces
             with
             their
             long
             Knives
             .
             By
             them
             stands
             another
             ,
             that
             hath
             a
             short
             Hook
             with
             a
             Ring
             in
             his
             Hands
             ,
             which
             he
             thrusts
             into
             the
             pieces
             of
             Fat
             that
             are
             cut
             square
             ,
             and
             puts
             it
             upon
             the
             Bench
             or
             Dressing-board
             ,
             where
             
             it
             is
             cut
             by
             others
             into
             less
             pieces
             .
             The
             two
             first
             Men
             with
             their
             long
             Knives
             ,
             that
             cut
             the
             large
             pieces
             of
             Fat
             ,
             stand
             near
             the
             Larboard
             of
             the
             Ship
             ,
             at
             that
             side
             where
             the
             Whale
             is
             fixed
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             Men
             that
             afterwards
             cut
             it
             into
             less
             pieces
             ,
             stand
             on
             the
             other
             side
             called
             Star-board
             ,
             as
             you
             may
             see
             at
             I
             ,
             in
             the
             Tab.
             A.
             when
             it
             is
             a
             good
             time
             to
             catch
             Whales
             ,
             and
             they
             will
             not
             lose
             it
             ,
             they
             tow
             sometimes
             several
             Fish
             behind
             their
             Ship
             ,
             and
             catch
             more
             ;
             and
             they
             cut
             only
             the
             great
             pieces
             of
             Fat
             of
             them
             ,
             and
             fling
             them
             underneath
             into
             the
             Ship-But
             when
             they
             have
             no
             more
             Vessels
             to
             put
             their
             Fat
             into
             ,
             they
             sail
             into
             an
             Harbour
             ;
             or
             if
             it
             be
             calm
             weather
             ,
             and
             not
             windy
             ,
             they
             stay
             in
             the
             Sea
             ,
             and
             fasten
             themselves
             to
             a
             sheet
             of
             Ice
             ,
             and
             so
             they
             drive
             along
             with
             the
             Stream
             .
             The
             other
             Men
             cut
             the
             Fat
             into
             small
             pieces
             ,
             on
             a
             Table
             ;
             on
             the
             further
             side
             of
             the
             Table
             is
             a
             Nail
             fastened
             ,
             whereunto
             they
             fasten
             a
             Hook
             ,
             which
             they
             put
             into
             the
             Fat
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             lye
             steddy
             when
             they
             cut
             it
             into
             small
             pieces
             ,
             the
             Fat
             is
             tough
             to
             cut
             ,
             wherefore
             it
             must
             lye
             firm
             .
             That
             side
             whereon
             the
             Skin
             is
             they
             lay
             undermost
             ,
             and
             so
             cut
             the
             Fat
             from
             it
             by
             pieces
             .
             The
             Knives
             wherewith
             they
             cut
             the
             Fat
             into
             small
             pieces
             are
             less
             than
             the
             other
             ,
             about
             three
             foot
             long
             with
             their
             Ha●ts
             .
             They
             all
             cut
             from
             them
             that
             they
             may
             not
             be
             bedaubed
             with
             the
             Fat
             ,
             which
             might
             occasion
             a
             shrinking
             up
             and
             lameness
             of
             the
             Sinews
             of
             their
             Hands
             and
             Arms.
             One
             of
             them
             cuts
             the
             soft
             and
             tough
             Fat
             into
             small
             pieces
             with
             a
             long
             Knife
             ;
             this
             Man
             they
             call
             the
             Chopper
             ,
             and
             he
             is
             mightily
             daubed
             ,
             wherefore
             he
             doth
             hang
             about
             him
             all
             sorts
             of
             Rags
             and
             Clouts
             he
             can
             get
             .
             The
             Fat
             of
             some
             Whales
             is
             white
             ,
             of
             others
             yellow
             ,
             and
             of
             some
             
             red
             .
             The
             white
             Fat
             is
             full
             of
             small
             Sinews
             ,
             and
             it
             does
             not
             yield
             so
             much
             Oyl
             as
             the
             yellow
             .
             The
             yellow
             Fat
             that
             looks
             like
             Butter
             is
             the
             best
             .
             The
             red
             and
             watery
             Fat
             cometh
             from
             dead
             Whales
             ,
             for
             in
             the
             place
             where
             the
             Fat
             runs
             out
             the
             Blood
             settles
             in
             its
             room
             ,
             and
             yields
             the
             worst
             and
             least
             Oyl
             .
             Before
             the
             Table
             is
             a
             Gutter
             made
             of
             two
             Boards
             nailed
             together
             ,
             whereinto
             the
             small
             or
             minced
             Fat
             is
             flung
             ;
             by
             it
             stands
             a
             Boy
             that
             shuffles
             the
             Fat
             by
             degrees
             into
             a
             Bag
             that
             is
             fixed
             to
             the
             end
             of
             the
             Gutter
             ,
             and
             is
             like
             unto
             a
             Pudding-bag
             ,
             so
             long
             that
             it
             reaches
             down
             into
             the
             Ship
             ;
             out
             of
             this
             Bag
             the
             Fat
             runs
             down
             into
             a
             Tub
             or
             Wooden
             Funnel
             ,
             which
             they
             put
             upon
             empty
             Vessels
             or
             Cardels
             ,
             as
             they
             call
             them
             ,
             and
             the
             Men
             that
             are
             below
             in
             the
             Ship
             fill
             them
             with
             it
             ,
             and
             so
             it
             is
             kept
             until
             they
             try
             it
             up
             into
             Train-oyl
             .
             When
             the
             Fat
             is
             cut
             off
             from
             one
             side
             of
             the
             Whale
             ,
             before
             they
             turn
             him
             ,
             they
             cut
             out
             the
             Whale-bone
             in
             one
             entire
             piece
             ,
             and
             this
             is
             so
             heavy
             ,
             that
             all
             the
             Ship
             's
             Crew
             hath
             enough
             to
             do
             to
             pull
             it
             up
             .
             They
             make
             use
             ,
             for
             that
             purpose
             ,
             of
             a
             peculiar
             sort
             of
             Hooks
             ,
             two
             whereof
             they
             fix
             on
             the
             sides
             ,
             and
             one
             on
             the
             middle
             of
             it
             ,
             very
             well
             provided
             with
             strong
             Tackle
             ,
             as
             you
             may
             see
             in
             the
             Tab.
             R
             ,
             and
             afterwards
             they
             cut
             out
             the
             Whale-bone
             of
             the
             other
             side
             of
             the
             Fish
             ,
             and
             draw
             it
             up
             also
             with
             Pulleys
             into
             the
             Ship
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             cut
             into
             such
             pieces
             as
             they
             bring
             it
             hither
             in
             .
             The
             Whale-bone
             doth
             only
             belong
             to
             the
             owners
             of
             the
             Ship
             ,
             and
             the
             others
             that
             run
             their
             hazard
             ,
             whether
             they
             catch
             few
             or
             many
             Whales
             .
             The
             rest
             ,
             which
             take
             their
             Pay
             by
             the
             Month
             ,
             receive
             their
             Money
             when
             they
             come
             home
             ,
             whether
             they
             have
             caught
             many
             or
             none
             ,
             and
             the
             Loss
             
             or
             Gain
             falls
             upon
             the
             Merchants
             .
             The
             Hooks
             that
             they
             crane
             up
             the
             Whale-bone
             withal
             are
             made
             on
             purpose
             for
             it
             ,
             like
             a
             Beam
             of
             a
             pair
             of
             Scales
             ;
             on
             each
             end
             are
             two
             sharp
             points
             ,
             which
             they
             knock
             in
             between
             the
             Whale-bone
             ;
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Beam
             is
             fastened
             a
             long
             Handle
             with
             a
             Ring
             ,
             whereon
             the
             Ropes
             are
             fastened
             ;
             on
             this
             Handle
             there
             are
             fixed
             two
             other
             crooked
             Hooks
             like
             Birds
             Claws
             ;
             in
             the
             Ring
             where
             the
             Ropes
             are
             fastened
             is
             another
             crooked
             Hook
             ,
             at
             the
             top
             fastened
             by
             a
             Ring
             ,
             such
             a
             one
             as
             we
             make
             use
             of
             here
             when
             we
             wind
             any
             thing
             up
             by
             a
             Crane
             ;
             but
             in
             the
             middle
             between
             these
             two
             Hooks
             is
             fastened
             another
             Rope
             ,
             which
             keeps
             the
             lowermost
             Hook
             steddy
             ;
             the
             two
             hindmost
             points
             are
             knocked
             into
             the
             Whale-bone
             behind
             ,
             and
             the
             two
             foremost
             short
             ones
             before
             ,
             which
             hold
             the
             Whale-bone
             fast
             between
             them
             when
             it
             is
             wound
             or
             pulled
             up
             .
          
           
             The
             dead
             Whales
             ,
             when
             the
             Fat
             is
             cut
             off
             of
             them
             ,
             they
             let
             float
             ,
             and
             are
             the
             Food
             of
             the
             Birds
             of
             Prey
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             hungry
             ,
             but
             but
             they
             had
             rather
             have
             dead
             Whales
             that
             have
             still
             their
             Fat
             left
             on
             them
             .
             The
             white
             Bear
             is
             generally
             not
             far
             off
             ,
             whether
             there
             be
             any
             Fat
             left
             on
             them
             or
             no
             ,
             and
             look
             like
             Dogs
             that
             only
             feed
             upon
             Carrion
             ,
             and
             at
             that
             time
             their
             white
             Furr
             is
             turned
             into
             a
             yellow
             colour
             ,
             and
             at
             the
             same
             time
             they
             shed
             their
             Hair
             ,
             and
             their
             Skins
             are
             worth
             very
             little
             .
             Where
             a
             dead
             Whale
             is
             near
             we
             see
             it
             by
             the
             Birds
             ,
             whereof
             are
             many
             ,
             and
             also
             the
             white
             Bears
             discover
             it
             ,
             as
             you
             may
             see
             at
             g
             in
             the
             Tab.
             B
             ,
             chiefly
             in
             the
             Spring
             ,
             when
             but
             a
             few
             Whales
             are
             caught
             ,
             for
             then
             they
             are
             greedy
             of
             their
             Prey
             ;
             afterwards
             when
             many
             Whales
             float
             on
             the
             Sea
             ,
             they
             have
             
             their
             Bellies
             full
             ,
             and
             we
             do
             not
             find
             so
             many
             by
             a
             Whale
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             dispersed
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             X.
             
          
           
             Of
             the
             Trying
             out
             of
             the
             Train-oyl
             from
             ▪
             the
             Fat.
             
          
           
             Formerly
             the
             Dutch
             did
             try
             out
             their
             Train-oyl
             in
             Spitzbergen
             ,
             at
             Smerenberg
             ,
             and
             about
             the
             Cookery
             of
             Harlingen
             ,
             where
             still
             ,
             for
             a
             remembrance
             ,
             all
             sorts
             of
             Tools
             belonging
             thereunto
             are
             to
             be
             seen
             ,
             whereof
             I
             have
             make
             mention
             before
             .
             The
             French-men
             try
             up
             their
             Train-oyl
             in
             their
             Ships
             ,
             and
             by
             that
             means
             many
             Ships
             are
             burnt
             at
             Spitzbergen
             ,
             and
             this
             was
             the
             occasion
             of
             the
             burning
             of
             two
             Ships
             in
             my
             time
             .
             They
             try
             out
             their
             Train-oyl
             at
             Spitzbergen
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             load
             the
             more
             Fat
             in
             their
             Ships
             ;
             and
             they
             believe
             it
             to
             be
             very
             profitable
             ,
             for
             they
             go
             their
             Voyage
             upon
             part
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             they
             receive
             more
             or
             less
             ,
             according
             to
             what
             they
             catch
             ;
             But
             I
             do
             not
             account
             it
             Wisdom
             to
             fill
             up
             the
             room
             of
             the
             Ship
             with
             Wood
             ,
             where
             they
             might
             stow
             Vessels
             .
             But
             our
             Country-men
             ,
             as
             I
             told
             you
             before
             ,
             put
             the
             Fat
             into
             the
             Vessels
             ,
             wherein
             it
             doth
             ferment
             just
             like
             Beer
             ,
             and
             I
             know
             no
             instance
             that
             ever
             any
             Vessel
             did
             fly
             in
             pieces
             ,
             although
             they
             are
             stopt
             up
             very
             close
             ,
             and
             so
             it
             becometh
             for
             the
             greatest
             part
             Train-oyl
             in
             them
             .
             Of
             the
             fresh
             Fat
             of
             Whales
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             burnt
             out
             you
             lose
             Twenty
             in
             the
             Hundred
             ,
             more
             or
             less
             ,
             according
             
             as
             it
             is
             in
             goodness
             .
             At
             the
             place
             where
             they
             try
             up
             the
             Fat
             into
             Train-oyl
             ,
             near
             Hamburgh
             ,
             they
             put
             the
             Fat
             out
             of
             the
             Vessels
             into
             a
             great
             wooden
             Trough
             or
             Tub
             ,
             and
             out
             of
             this
             two
             Men
             empty
             it
             into
             a
             great
             Kettle
             that
             stands
             near
             it
             ,
             that
             doth
             hold
             two
             Cardels
             of
             Fat
             ,
             that
             makes
             120
             ,
             130
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             140
             Gallons
             :
             Underneath
             this
             Copper
             that
             is
             made-up
             with
             Bricks
             they
             put
             the
             Fire
             ,
             and
             so
             they
             boil
             it
             ,
             and
             try
             it
             up
             into
             Train-oyl
             ,
             as
             you
             try
             up
             other
             Fat.
             This
             Copper
             is
             very
             well
             secured
             ,
             as
             the
             Dyers
             Coppers
             use
             to
             be
             :
             it
             is
             very
             broad
             and
             flat
             ,
             just
             like
             a
             Frying-pan
             ,
             made
             of
             Copper
             .
             When
             the
             Fat
             is
             well
             tryed
             or
             fryed
             out
             ,
             they
             take
             it
             out
             of
             the
             Pan
             with
             small
             Kettles
             ,
             into
             a
             great
             Sieve
             ,
             that
             the
             liquid
             only
             may
             run
             through
             ,
             the
             rest
             is
             thrown
             away
             .
             This
             Sieve
             stands
             over
             a
             great
             Tub
             ,
             which
             is
             above
             half
             filled
             with
             cold
             Water
             ,
             that
             the
             hot
             Train-oyl
             may
             be
             cooled
             ,
             and
             that
             what
             is
             unclean
             and
             dirty
             of
             the
             Blood
             and
             other
             Soil
             may
             fall
             to
             the
             bottom
             ,
             and
             only
             the
             clear
             Train-oyl
             swim
             at
             the
             top
             of
             the
             Water
             ,
             like
             other
             Oyl
             .
             In
             this
             great
             Tub
             or
             Trough
             is
             a
             small
             Spout
             or
             Tap
             which
             doth
             run
             out
             over
             another
             as
             big
             as
             a
             Tub
             ,
             out
             of
             which
             the
             Train-oyl
             runs
             into
             another
             Tub
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             almost
             ready
             to
             run
             over
             ,
             which
             is
             also
             filled
             with
             cold
             Water
             to
             the
             middle
             ,
             wherein
             it
             is
             more
             cooled
             ,
             and
             becomes
             clearer
             ,
             and
             more
             refined
             than
             it
             was
             before
             .
             In
             this
             Trough
             is
             another
             Spout
             ,
             through
             which
             the
             Train
             oyl
             runs
             into
             the
             Warehouse
             into
             a
             Vatt
             ,
             whereout
             they
             fill
             it
             into
             Cardels
             or
             Vessels
             .
             Some
             have
             but
             two
             Tubs
             .
             A
             Cardel
             or
             Hogshead
             holds
             64
             Gallons
             .
             A
             true
             Train
             oyl
             Barrel
             doth
             hold
             32
             Gallons
             .
             The
             Greaves
             they
             try
             up
             the
             second
             time
             ,
             and
             
             make
             brown
             Train-oyl
             out
             of
             it
             ,
             others
             that
             think
             it
             not
             worth
             their
             while
             fling
             them
             away
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XI
             .
          
           
             Of
             the
             Finn-fish
             .
          
           
             THE
             Finn-fish
             is
             of
             the
             length
             of
             a
             Whale
             ,
             but
             in
             bulk
             the
             Whale
             is
             three
             times
             as
             big
             .
             They
             know
             the
             Finn-fish
             by
             the
             Finns
             that
             are
             upon
             his
             Back
             ,
             near
             unto
             his
             Tail
             ,
             and
             also
             by
             his
             vehement
             blowing
             and
             spouting
             up
             of
             the
             Water
             ,
             which
             the
             Whale
             doth
             not
             do
             .
             His
             Knob
             on
             the
             Head
             is
             split
             in
             length
             ,
             that
             is
             at
             his
             blowing
             hole
             ,
             through
             which
             he
             forces
             up
             the
             Water
             higher
             than
             the
             Whale
             ,
             and
             with
             more
             fierceness
             ,
             which
             is
             not
             so
             high
             as
             that
             of
             the
             Whale
             ,
             neither
             is
             the
             Back
             bended
             or
             dented
             in
             so
             much
             .
             His
             Lips
             are
             of
             a
             brownish
             colour
             ,
             and
             like
             a
             twisted
             Rope
             .
             On
             his
             upper
             Lip
             the
             Whale-bone
             hangs
             ,
             as
             it
             doth
             on
             the
             Whale
             ;
             but
             whether
             he
             doth
             open
             and
             shut
             his
             Mouth
             there
             are
             different
             Opinions
             :
             Some
             believe
             that
             he
             cannot
             open
             his
             Mouth
             ,
             yet
             this
             is
             not
             true
             ;
             but
             he
             doth
             not
             always
             run
             open
             Mouth'd
             ,
             that
             the
             Whale-bone
             may
             not
             hang
             out
             of
             his
             Mouth
             at
             the
             sides
             ,
             as
             it
             doth
             in
             Whales
             ,
             for
             else
             he
             can
             open
             his
             Mouth
             if
             he
             pleases
             .
             Within
             his
             Mouth
             ,
             between
             the
             Whale-bone
             ,
             he
             is
             all
             over
             hairy
             ,
             like
             unto
             Horses
             Hairs
             ,
             which
             grows
             within
             to
             the
             Whale-bone
             that
             is
             but
             new
             growing
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             
             of
             a
             blew
             colour
             .
             The
             other
             Whale-bone
             is
             of
             a
             brown
             colour
             ,
             and
             dark
             brownish
             with
             yellow
             stroaks
             ,
             which
             are
             esteemed
             to
             be
             the
             oldest
             :
             The
             blew
             Whale-bone
             cometh
             from
             young
             Whales
             and
             Finn
             fishes
             .
             He
             is
             not
             as
             black
             as
             Velvet
             ,
             as
             the
             Whale
             is
             ,
             but
             like
             a
             Tench
             .
             The
             shape
             of
             his
             Body
             is
             long
             and
             small
             ,
             neither
             is
             he
             so
             fat
             as
             a
             Whale
             ,
             wherefore
             we
             do
             not
             much
             care
             to
             catch
             him
             for
             he
             doth
             not
             pay
             us
             for
             our
             Labour
             .
             It
             is
             much
             more
             dangerous
             to
             kill
             him
             than
             to
             kill
             a
             Whale
             ,
             because
             he
             moves
             quicker
             ,
             and
             beats
             about
             him
             with
             his
             Tail
             ,
             and
             from
             him
             with
             his
             Finns
             ,
             so
             that
             we
             dare
             not
             come
             near
             unto
             him
             with
             our
             Sloops
             or
             Long-boats
             ,
             for
             the
             Launces
             kill
             him
             soonest
             .
             I
             was
             informed
             ,
             that
             once
             some
             ,
             before
             they
             were
             aware
             of
             it
             ,
             did
             fling
             ,
             by
             a
             mistake
             ,
             their
             Harpoon
             into
             a
             Finn-fish
             ,
             whereupon
             he
             drew
             both
             Boat
             and
             Men
             ,
             all
             on
             a
             sudden
             ,
             underneath
             a
             large
             Ice-sheet
             before
             they
             were
             aware
             of
             it
             ,
             and
             not
             one
             of
             them
             escap'd
             .
             His
             Tail
             lies
             flat
             ,
             like
             unto
             that
             of
             the
             Whale
             .
             When
             these
             Finn-fishes
             appear
             we
             see
             no
             more
             Whales
             .
          
           
             The
             Train-oyl
             of
             the
             Whale
             is
             used
             by
             several
             ,
             viz.
             by
             the
             
               Frize-makers
               ,
               Curriers
               ,
               Cloath-workers
            
             ,
             and
             Soap-boilers
             ;
             but
             the
             greatest
             use
             that
             is
             made
             of
             it
             ,
             is
             to
             burn
             it
             in
             Lamps
             instead
             of
             other
             Oyl
             .
          
           
             The
             Greenland
             Ships
             carry
             30
             or
             40
             Men
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             more
             ,
             chiefly
             the
             great
             Ships
             ,
             that
             have
             six
             Sloops
             belonging
             to
             them
             ,
             such
             Ships
             hold
             from
             800
             to
             1000
             Cardels
             of
             Fat
             ;
             the
             less
             .
             Ships
             have
             commonly
             fewer
             Cardels
             or
             Vessels
             ,
             from
             400
             to
             700
             ,
             and
             have
             commonly
             five
             Sloops
             or
             Boats
             belonging
             to
             them
             .
             There
             also
             go
             Galliots
             to
             Spitzbergen
             to
             catch
             Whales
             ;
             
             they
             have
             three
             or
             four
             Sloops
             belonging
             to
             them
             :
             Some
             put
             the
             Sloops
             upon
             the
             Deck
             of
             the
             Ships
             ,
             others
             hang
             them
             overboard
             ,
             as
             they
             do
             at
             Spitzbergen
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             amongst
             the
             Ice
             ,
             that
             as
             soon
             as
             they
             call
             
               Fall
               ,
               fall
            
             ,
             they
             may
             immediately
             let
             down
             their
             Sloops
             into
             the
             Water
             .
          
           
             Then
             there
             remains
             onboard
             in
             the
             Ships
             the
             Steersman
             ,
             the
             Barber
             ,
             the
             Chyrurgion
             ,
             the
             Cooper
             ,
             and
             a
             Boy
             ,
             to
             look
             after
             the
             Ship
             ;
             the
             Skipper
             or
             Commander
             himself
             goeth
             out
             with
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Men
             ,
             for
             they
             are
             all
             obliged
             to
             go
             a
             Whale
             catching
             .
          
           
             In
             each
             Ship
             there
             are
             sixty
             Launces
             ,
             six
             Sea-horse
             Launces
             ,
             forty
             Harpoons
             ,
             ten
             long
             Harpoons
             wherewith
             they
             strike
             the
             Whales
             under
             Water
             ,
             six
             small
             Sea-horse
             Harpoons
             ,
             thirty
             Lines
             or
             Ropes
             ,
             and
             each
             of
             them
             is
             about
             eighty
             or
             ninety
             fathoms
             long
             .
             When
             they
             go
             a
             hunting
             they
             take
             along
             with
             them
             into
             each
             Sloop
             two
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             three
             Harpoons
             ,
             six
             Launces
             ,
             two
             or
             three
             Sea-horse
             Launces
             ,
             three
             Lines
             ,
             and
             five
             or
             six
             Men
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             bigness
             of
             the
             Sloops
             ,
             therein
             is
             the
             Harpoonier
             ,
             Line-keeper
             or
             Giver
             ,
             and
             the
             Steersman
             :
             They
             all
             row
             equally
             ,
             until
             they
             come
             near
             to
             the
             Whale
             ,
             except
             the
             Steersman
             ,
             for
             he
             guides
             the
             Boat
             with
             his
             Rudder
             .
             They
             also
             have
             in
             each
             Sloop
             a
             Chopping-knife
             ,
             to
             cut
             off
             the
             Rope
             when
             they
             cannot
             follow
             the
             Whale
             ,
             and
             a
             Hammer
             ,
             and
             other
             Instruments
             ,
             as
             Hatchets
             ,
             Drags
             ,
             and
             several
             sorts
             of
             Knives
             ,
             wherewithal
             they
             cut
             the
             Whales
             .
             Meat
             and
             Drink
             is
             also
             given
             them
             according
             to
             the
             usual
             Custom
             ,
             he
             that
             will
             have
             better
             must
             take
             it
             along
             with
             him
             .
             Lazy
             Fellows
             are
             in
             this
             Voyage
             troubled
             with
             the
             Scurvy
             ,
             but
             those
             
             that
             fear
             neither
             Air
             nor
             Wind
             ,
             and
             bestir
             themselves
             ,
             escape
             pretty
             well
             ;
             else
             the
             Scurvy
             is
             the
             common
             Distemper
             in
             this
             Voyage
             ,
             besides
             Feavers
             ,
             Imposthumes
             ,
             and
             other
             accidental
             Distempers
             ,
             and
             therefore
             the
             Chyrurgion
             must
             take
             care
             to
             provide
             himself
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XII
             .
          
           
             Of
             ROtz-fishes
             and
             Sea-qualms
             .
          
           
             Rotz-fish
             (
             or
             Slime-fishes
             )
             I
             call
             these
             ,
             that
             in
             themselves
             are
             nothing
             else
             but
             Slime
             ,
             and
             they
             are
             transparent
             .
             I
             have
             observed
             several
             kinds
             of
             these
             ,
             some
             whereof
             have
             parts
             like
             Finns
             ,
             as
             that
             same
             which
             I
             call
             the
             
               Sea
               May-flye
            
             .
             Others
             are
             like
             unto
             the
             flat
             Snails
             ,
             only
             instead
             of
             Finns
             they
             have
             Stalks
             like
             unto
             Feathers
             .
             Besides
             these
             ,
             I
             have
             seen
             four
             other
             sorts
             ,
             that
             are
             quite
             differing
             in
             shape
             from
             the
             others
             ,
             and
             are
             called
             Sea-qualms
             by
             the
             Seamen
             ,
             as
             if
             they
             were
             a
             thick
             Scum
             of
             the
             Sea
             coagulated
             together
             .
             They
             are
             also
             called
             after
             the
             Latin
             Name
             Sea-nettles
             ,
             because
             they
             cause
             a
             burning
             Pain
             like
             unto
             Nettles
             .
             I
             have
             formerly
             had
             some
             Thoughts
             ,
             that
             the
             Rotz
             or
             
               Slime
               fishes
            
             might
             be
             a
             Seed
             flung
             out
             and
             so
             putrefied
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             did
             cause
             this
             burning
             Pain
             by
             reason
             of
             their
             putrefaction
             ;
             and
             so
             I
             did
             think
             that
             they
             received
             their
             shape
             or
             form
             according
             to
             the
             several
             kinds
             of
             Fishes
             from
             whence
             they
             came
             ,
             and
             that
             some
             did
             take
             after
             
             Thornbacks
             ,
             others
             after
             Whales
             ,
             and
             the
             like
             ;
             but
             this
             doth
             not
             seem
             to
             be
             agreeable
             to
             Reason
             ,
             for
             I
             have
             considered
             it
             better
             since
             ,
             and
             find
             Life
             to
             be
             a
             far
             more
             boble
             thing
             ,
             than
             that
             it
             should
             proceed
             from
             putrefied
             Seed
             cast
             away
             .
             They
             cleanse
             the
             Sea
             mightily
             ,
             for
             all
             the
             filth
             and
             uncleannese
             sticks
             to
             them
             ,
             just
             as
             a
             Burr
             doth
             unto
             Cloth.
             
          
           
             
               I.
               Of
               the
               Sea-May-flye
               .
            
             
               These
               small
               Fish
               are
               very
               like
               unto
               the
               Sea-nettles
               ,
               because
               of
               their
               transparent
               Body
               ,
               and
               they
               also
               dissolve
               like
               the
               same
               ,
               if
               you
               hold
               them
               in
               your
               hand
               .
               They
               have
               two
               Finns
               underneath
               ,
               about
               the
               Neck
               ,
               which
               are
               likest
               unto
               those
               of
               the
               Whale
               .
               They
               are
               in
               their
               shape
               like
               unto
               our
               white
               Rowls
               ,
               broad
               and
               thick
               in
               the
               middle
               ,
               and
               thin
               and
               pointed
               at
               each
               end
               .
               As
               for
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               Body
               ,
               it
               is
               very
               like
               unto
               our
               May-flye
               ,
               save
               only
               that
               the
               Tail
               or
               Body
               is
               all
               along
               thicker
               ,
               and
               only
               begins
               to
               be
               pointed
               towards
               the
               end
               .
               The
               Head
               is
               broad
               and
               round
               ,
               split
               in
               the
               middle
               ;
               it
               hath
               small
               horns
               about
               the
               breadth
               of
               a
               Straw
               ;
               on
               his
               Head
               before
               it
               hath
               two
               rows
               of
               six
               red
               little
               Knobs
               ,
               three
               of
               them
               in
               each
               row
               ;
               whether
               they
               be
               Eyes
               or
               no
               I
               cannot
               exactly
               tell
               .
               It
               s
               Mouth
               is
               divided
               or
               split
               .
               From
               his
               Mouth
               down
               into
               his
               Belly
               are
               its
               Guts
               ,
               which
               one
               may
               easily
               see
               because
               of
               its
               transparency
               .
               It
               is
               of
               yellow
               and
               black
               colour
               ;
               but
               the
               colour
               of
               the
               whole
               Fish
               is
               like
               unto
               the
               White
               of
               an
               Egg.
               He
               moves
               in
               the
               Water
               just
               like
               a
               Sea-nettle
               .
               I
               have
               drawn
               him
               here
               in
               his
               proper
               bigness
               .
               I
               am
               of
               opinion
               ,
               that
               the
               Birds
               feed
               upon
               them
               ,
               because
               the
               
                 Lumbs
                 ,
                 Pigeon-divers
              
               ,
               and
               Parret-divers
               ,
               
               are
               plentifully
               seen
               in
               those
               places
               where
               these
               Fish
               or
               Sea
               Insects
               are
               seen
               .
               The
               same
               that
               I
               have
               delineated
               here
               I
               found
               in
               the
               
                 South
                 Bay
              
               in
               Spitzbergen
               ,
               on
               the
               20th
               of
               June
               ;
               in
               the
               Tab.
               P
               it
               is
               marked
               with
               f.
               
            
          
           
             
               II.
               Of
               the
               Snail
               Slime-fish
               .
            
             
               These
               are
               also
               quite
               transparent
               ,
               like
               unto
               the
               Sea-nettles
               ,
               but
               they
               are
               flat
               ,
               and
               wound
               about
               like
               a
               Snail
               ,
               and
               so
               we
               find
               upon
               the
               Land
               the
               She●ls
               of
               such
               flat
               Snails
               .
               It
               is
               very
               remarkable
               ,
               that
               out
               of
               the
               utmost
               part
               of
               him
               come
               two
               Stalks
               ,
               like
               unto
               the
               Beam
               of
               a
               pair
               of
               Scales
               ,
               hairy
               or
               rough
               on
               each
               side
               ,
               like
               unto
               a
               Feather
               .
               With
               these
               Stalks
               he
               moves
               himself
               up
               and
               down
               like
               the
               Sea-nettle
               .
               They
               are
               of
               a
               brown
               colour
               :
               They
               swim
               in
               great
               numbers
               in
               the
               Sea
               ,
               as
               numerous
               as
               the
               Dust
               in
               the
               Sun.
               It
               is
               believed
               that
               the
               Whales
               feed
               upon
               them
               ,
               but
               I
               cannot
               believe
               that
               they
               can
               be
               so
               nourishing
               a
               Food
               for
               the
               Whales
               ,
               as
               to
               make
               them
               so
               fat
               ;
               I
               rather
               believe
               that
               the
               
                 Lumbs
                 ,
                 Pigeon-divers
              
               ,
               and
               the
               Parret-divers
               feed
               upon
               them
               .
               They
               are
               not
               bigger
               than
               I
               have
               delineated
               them
               .
               We
               saw
               many
               of
               them
               in
               the
               
                 South
                 Harbour
              
               at
               Spitzbergen
               ,
               on
               the
               20th
               day
               of
               June
               ,
               Amongst
               the
               Ice
               I
               saw
               none
               .
               The
               Seamen
               take
               these
               small
               Fish
               for
               Spiders
               ,
               and
               I
               should
               also
               have
               taken
               them
               to
               be
               such
               ,
               if
               I
               had
               not
               had
               them
               in
               my
               Hand
               ,
               and
               looked
               more
               couriously
               upon
               them
               ,
               and
               found
               they
               they
               had
               no
               aff●nity
               at
               all
               with
               the
               Spiders
               .
               In
               the
               Tab.
               Q
               it
               is
               marked
               with
               e.
               
            
          
           
             
             
               III.
               Of
               the
               Hat
               Slime-fish
               .
            
             
               It
               s
               upper
               part
               is
               like
               the
               Fungusses
               or
               Toad-stools
               ,
               for
               it
               is
               as
               it
               were
               a
               round
               and
               thick
               Stalk
               ,
               that
               goes
               just
               into
               the
               middle
               of
               the
               Head.
               It
               hath
               a
               blew
               Button
               or
               Knob
               ,
               that
               is
               as
               thick
               again
               as
               the
               Stalk
               :
               And
               this
               upper
               part
               may
               also
               be
               compared
               unto
               such
               a
               Straw
               Hat
               as
               our
               Women
               wear
               .
               From
               the
               Stalk
               downwards
               it
               doth
               grow
               thick
               again
               ,
               and
               round
               ,
               yet
               it
               is
               a
               great
               deal
               less
               than
               the
               Button
               .
               I
               have
               seen
               them
               force
               themselves
               up
               from
               below
               ,
               and
               then
               from
               the
               top
               down
               again
               ,
               just
               as
               a
               Stick
               that
               is
               forced
               down
               underneath
               the
               Water
               reboundeth
               up
               again
               .
               I
               got
               them
               in
               the
               
                 North
                 Sea
              
               ,
               between
               Holly-Land
               and
               the
               Elbe
               ,
               where
               the
               Sea-water
               mingles
               with
               that
               of
               the
               Elbe
               .
               I
               have
               also
               seen
               them
               at
               Kuck's-Haven
               in
               the
               Elbe
               .
               And
               I
               am
               also
               informed
               ,
               that
               sometimes
               ,
               they
               come
               as
               far
               down
               as
               to
               Freyburg
               .
               By
               reason
               of
               its
               shape
               ,
               it
               may
               be
               called
               
                 The
                 Hat
                 Slime-fish
              
               ,
               or
               
                 Stalk
                 Slime-fish
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               IV.
               Of
               the
               Rose-like-shaped
               Slime-fish
               .
            
             
               This
               Slime-fish
               is
               a
               round
               as
               a
               Circle
               ,
               yet
               in
               his
               circumference
               between
               his
               double
               strokes
               a
               little
               indented
               .
               The
               Rays
               spring
               out
               single
               from
               the
               middle
               of
               the
               Body
               ,
               and
               there
               are
               sixteen
               of
               them
               in
               number
               ,
               but
               they
               divide
               themselves
               into
               two
               branches
               ,
               wheer
               they
               run
               somewhat
               closer
               together
               ,
               and
               are
               split
               in
               two
               .
               The
               Body
               thereof
               is
               white
               and
               transparent
               ,
               as
               
               is
               mentioned
               before
               ;
               he
               draws
               it
               together
               ,
               and
               opens
               it
               again
               as
               he
               pleaseth
               ;
               but
               the
               Rays
               or
               Spokes
               are
               brownish
               red
               .
               On
               the
               end
               of
               these
               Spokes
               ,
               towards
               the
               outward
               circumference
               are
               several
               Spots
               ,
               32
               in
               number
               .
               In
               the
               middle
               of
               this
               Plate
               is
               another
               small
               Circle
               ,
               and
               from
               the
               circumference
               of
               that
               the
               before-named
               Spokes
               begin
               .
               It
               is
               hollow
               within
               ,
               which
               Cavity
               may
               perhaps
               be
               his
               Belly
               ,
               wherein
               I
               found
               two
               or
               three
               of
               the
               small
               Shrimps
               .
               Round
               about
               did
               hang
               down
               seven
               brown
               small
               Threads
               ,
               like
               spun
               Silk
               ,
               or
               like
               unto
               the
               Threads
               that
               flye
               in
               the
               Air
               about
               Autumn
               ;
               he
               cannot
               move
               these
               .
               I
               believe
               he
               weigh'd
               about
               half
               a
               pound
               ;
               he
               was
               about
               half
               a
               span
               broad
               ;
               the
               Threads
               were
               about
               a
               span
               long
               .
               This
               sort
               we
               got
               about
               Hitland
               .
               One
               might
               very
               well
               call
               him
               the
               Plate
               ,
               or
               
                 Rose-like
                 Slime-fish
              
               ,
               by
               reason
               of
               his
               figure
               and
               shape
               .
               I
               have
               heard
               some
               relate
               ,
               that
               the
               Macarels
               do
               suck
               their
               Colour
               out
               of
               these
               two
               ,
               but
               I
               cannot
               affirm
               it
               ,
               but
               leave
               it
               undecided
               ,
               until
               I
               can
               assert
               it
               by
               my
               own
               Experience
               .
               These
               three
               first
               Sea-qualms
               are
               numerous
               in
               the
               
                 North
                 Sea
              
               as
               Atomes
               in
               the
               Air
               ,
               but
               about
               Spitzbergen
               we
               do
               not
               find
               many
               of
               them
               .
               I
               have
               seen
               them
               swim
               at
               top
               only
               in
               calm
               weather
               ,
               but
               in
               stormy
               weather
               they
               sink
               to
               the
               bottom
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               V.
               Of
               the
               Slime-fish
               like
               a
               Cap.
               
            
             
               At
               Spitzbergen
               ,
               near
               the
               Muscle-Harbour
               ,
               on
               the
               8th
               of
               July
               ,
               when
               the
               weather
               was
               calm
               ,
               I
               saw
               two
               sorts
               of
               Slime-fish
               ,
               whereof
               one
               had
               six
               ,
               the
               other
               eight
               Corners
               :
               That
               with
               six
               Corners
               had
               also
               six
               purple
               Streaks
               with
               blew
               Brims
               .
               Between
               these
               Streaks
               the
               Body
               is
               divided
               like
               unto
               a
               Pumpkin
               into
               six
               Ribs
               .
               From
               the
               middle
               of
               his
               Body
               hang
               down
               two
               Threads
               that
               are
               red
               like
               Vermilion
               ,
               and
               rough
               ,
               of
               small
               Hairs
               ,
               they
               are
               shaped
               like
               unto
               the
               Letter
               [
               V
               ]
               .
               I
               did
               not
               see
               him
               move
               them
               when
               he
               swam
               .
               Within
               his
               Body
               he
               hath
               other
               broader
               Streaks
               ,
               of
               a
               purple
               colour
               ,
               and
               on
               the
               edges
               or
               brims
               of
               a
               lightish
               blew
               one
               ;
               they
               represent
               themselves
               like
               unto
               a
               great
               [
               W
               ]
               .
               The
               whole
               Body
               is
               as
               white
               as
               Milk
               ,
               and
               not
               so
               transparent
               as
               th●
               Body
               of
               that
               that
               cometh
               next
               .
               It
               is
               shaped
               just
               like
               a
               Cap
               with
               Corners
               ,
               wherefore
               one
               might
               call
               it
               the
               Cap-like
               Fish.
               
            
             
               It
               is
               about
               as
               big
               again
               as
               it
               is
               delineated
               here
               .
               It
               weighed
               about
               two
               ounces
               .
               I
               did
               not
               perceive
               ,
               when
               I
               had
               him
               in
               my
               Hand
               ,
               that
               he
               did
               burn
               me
               ,
               but
               it
               dissolved
               like
               snot
               or
               Slime
               .
               In
               the
               Tab.
               P
               it
               is
               marked
               with
               g.
               
            
          
           
             
             
               VI.
               Of
               the
               Slime-fish
               like
               a
               Fountain
               .
            
             
               The
               sixth
               and
               last
               is
               a
               very
               notable
               Fish
               ;
               it
               hath
               a
               hole
               at
               the
               top
               like
               unto
               a
               Quill
               of
               a
               Goose
               (
               that
               may
               perhaps
               be
               his
               Mouth
               )
               which
               goes
               into
               a
               cavity
               like
               a
               Funnel
               ,
               wherefore
               we
               might
               call
               him
               a
               Funnel-fish
               .
               From
               this
               hole
               coem
               down
               four
               Strokes
               ,
               two
               and
               two
               ,
               exactly
               opposite
               to
               one
               another
               ;
               two
               of
               them
               are
               cut
               transversedly
               ,
               and
               two
               are
               not
               cut
               .
               Those
               that
               are
               not
               cut
               are
               about
               half
               the
               breadth
               of
               a
               Straw
               ,
               and
               the
               others
               that
               are
               like
               unto
               the
               Back●bones
               of
               a
               Snake
               ,
               are
               as
               broad
               as
               a
               Straw
               ;
               both
               of
               them
               come
               down
               beyond
               the
               middle
               of
               the
               whole
               Body
               .
               From
               the
               middle
               of
               the
               Funnel
               come
               down
               four
               others
               ,
               like
               unto
               the
               Back
               bones
               of
               a
               Snake
               ,
               and
               they
               come
               down
               lower
               than
               the
               others
               ;
               so
               that
               all
               of
               them
               make
               eight
               in
               number
               .
               They
               changed
               their
               colour
               as
               we
               looked
               upon
               them
               ,
               into
               blew
               ,
               yellow
               ,
               and
               red
               ,
               with
               such
               delicate
               colours
               as
               a
               Rainbow
               .
               They
               looked
               in
               my
               Eyes
               to
               be
               like
               unto
               a
               Fountain
               with
               eight
               Streams
               or
               Spouts
               ,
               wherefore
               we
               might
               call
               it
               a
               Fountain-fish
               with
               eight
               Streams
               .
               Within
               him
               came
               down
               from
               the
               end
               of
               the
               Funnel
               something
               like
               a
               Cloud
               that
               divides
               itself
               into
               rows
               ,
               which
               I
               take
               to
               be
               his
               Intrails
               .
               Where
               the
               before-mentioned
               outward
               Streaks
               end
               themselves
               the
               Body
               is
               first
               bent
               in
               somewhat
               ,
               then
               it
               turns
               round
               ,
               and
               there
               it
               hath
               many
               small
               Streaks
               .
               The
               whole
               Body
               is
               as
               white
               as
               Milk
               ,
               of
               the
               same
               bigness
               as
               it
               is
               here
               delineated
               .
               I
               believe
               it
               weighed
               about
               four
               ounces
               .
               I
               did
               not
               
               perceive
               that
               he
               did
               burn
               ones
               Skin
               ,
               but
               he
               did
               ,
               like
               him
               I
               mentioned
               before
               ,
               dissolve
               like
               Slime
               .
            
             
               Since
               I
               have
               seen
               other
               sorts
               of
               these
               Sea-nettles
               in
               the
               
                 Spanish
                 Sea
              
               ,
               that
               weighed
               several
               pounds
               ,
               and
               they
               were
               of
               a
               blew
               ,
               purple
               ,
               yellowish
               ,
               and
               white
               colour
               ,
               that
               burn
               more
               violently
               than
               those
               of
               the
               
                 North
                 Sea
              
               ;
               they
               suck
               themselves
               so
               close
               to
               the
               Skin
               ,
               that
               they
               raise
               Blisters
               ,
               and
               cause
               sometimes
               St.
               
               Anthony's
               Fire
               .
               The
               Cutts
               whereof
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               Description
               ,
               I
               hope
               to
               communicate
               to
               the
               Reader
               at
               another
               time
               .
               This
               is
               marked
               with
               h
               in
               the
               Tab.
               P.
               
               
               
                 
                   The
                   Whale
                   fishing
                   &
                   killing
                   of
                   Morsses
                   .
                   Supplem
                   
                   t.
                   Tab
                   :
                   S.
                   Pag.
                   179.
                   
                
              
            
          
        
      
       
         
         
           A
           SUPPLEMENT
           To
           Capt.
           
           Wood's
           and
           
           Marten's
           North-East
           Voyages
           .
           CONTAINING
           Some
           Observations
           and
           Navigations
           to
           the
           North-West
           ,
           of
           Groneland
           ,
           and
           other
           Northern
           Regions
           .
        
      
       
         
         
         
           A
           SUPPLEMENT
           To
           Capt.
           Wood's
           and
           Marten's
           North-east
           Voyages
           ,
           &c.
           
        
         
           
             CHERRY
             -
             and
             other
             Islands
             .
          
           
             OUR
             Men
             conceive
             Greenland
             to
             be
             broken
             ken
             Land
             ,
             
             or
             a
             great
             number
             of
             Islands
             at
             least
             ,
             very
             near
             to
             one
             another
             .
             On
             the
             West
             side
             they
             discovered
             as
             far
             as
             82
             deg
             .
             the
             most
             Northerly
             Point
             they
             called
             
               Point
               Purchas
            
             ,
             there
             they
             found
             very
             many
             Islands
             ,
             which
             they
             thought
             not
             worthy
             to
             give
             Names
             to
             ,
             being
             careful
             only
             to
             take
             notice
             of
             those
             six
             or
             eight
             Harbours
             which
             were
             commodious
             for
             their
             Fishing
             .
             On
             the
             East
             side
             ,
             they
             went
             no
             farther
             than
             78
             deg
             .
             because
             the
             Dutch
             disturbed
             their
             Trading
             on
             that
             side
             .
             There
             are
             also
             many
             Islands
             ,
             some
             of
             which
             are
             named
             ,
             
             as
             Hope-Island
             ,
             discovered
             in
             1613
             ▪
             which
             may
             be
             that
             the
             Dutch
             call
             Willoughby's-land
             ,
             or
             
               John
               Mayen's
               Island
            
             ,
             though
             indeed
             it
             corresponds
             well
             to
             neither
             ;
             but
             rather
             to
             the
             later
             .
             I
             belongeth
             to
             Greenland
             ,
             and
             is
             
             but
             a
             small
             Island
             ,
             and
             lies
             North-east
             and
             South-west
             ;
             whereas
             the
             Country
             Sir
             
               H.
               Willoughby
            
             landed
             upon
             ,
             was
             a
             large
             Countrey
             ,
             (
             inasmuch
             as
             he
             sailed
             many
             days
             by
             the
             side
             of
             it
             )
             and
             lies
             North
             and
             South
             ,
             which
             must
             be
             Greenland
             .
             
             Edges-Island
             was
             discovered
             1616
             ,
             by
             Capt.
             
               T.
               Edge
            
             ,
             who
             had
             made
             that
             Voyage
             ten
             times
             .
             Wyches-Island
             (
             so
             called
             from
             a
             Gentleman
             of
             that
             Name
             )
             
             was
             found
             out
             1617
             ,
             but
             there
             being
             nothing
             remarkable
             come
             to
             our
             knowledge
             concerning
             these
             ,
             we
             pass
             them
             over
             .
             Only
             it
             is
             worth
             noting
             ,
             that
             both
             the
             Whale
             and
             Morss-fishing
             was
             known
             and
             practised
             800
             years
             ago
             ,
             as
             appears
             by
             the
             Relation
             which
             Octber
             the
             Norwegian
             made
             to
             his
             .
             Lord
             Alfred
             King
             of
             England
             ;
             where
             he
             also
             saith
             ,
             that
             the
             Morsses
             were
             hunted
             for
             their
             Teeth
             ,
             which
             were
             mightily
             esteemed
             .
          
           
             Cherry-Island
             ,
             
             when
             first
             discovered
             I
             know
             not
             ,
             but
             it
             received
             not
             its
             Name
             ,
             nor
             was
             known
             to
             be
             of
             any
             profit
             till
             1603
             ,
             when
             a
             Ship
             set
             out
             at
             the
             charges
             of
             Sir
             
               Franc●●
               Cherry
            
             touched
             upon
             it
             ,
             and
             found
             there
             some
             Lead
             ,
             and
             a
             Morsses
             Tooth
             ;
             but
             stayed
             not
             to
             fish
             ,
             because
             the
             year
             was
             too
             far
             spent
             .
             However
             ,
             they
             called
             it
             (
             in
             honour
             of
             Sir
             
               Franc●s
               Cherry
            
             ,
             for
             whose
             use
             they
             took
             possession
             of
             it
             )
             Cherry-Island
             .
          
           
             In
             1604.
             
             a
             Ship
             set
             sail
             (
             Mr.
             Welden
             the
             Merchant
             ,
             and
             
               Stephen
               Bennet
            
             the
             Master
             )
             from
             
               London
               ,
               April
               15
            
             ,
             and
             arrived
             at
             Cola
             in
             
               Lapland
               May
               I.
            
             They
             stayed
             in
             Lapland
             till
             
               July
               1.
            
             and
             
               July
               8
            
             ,
             they
             came
             in
             sight
             of
             Cherry
             ;
             and
             they
             came
             to
             an
             Anchor
             on
             the
             South-south-east
             side
             ,
             but
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             Stream
             ,
             could
             not
             land
             :
             so
             that
             they
             sailed
             round
             about
             the
             Isle
             ,
             and
             at
             length
             anchored
             two
             miles
             from
             the
             Shore
             .
             
             Going
             on
             Land
             ,
             one
             of
             them
             with
             his
             〈…〉
             as
             many
             Fowl
             as
             almost
             laded
             their
             Boat.
             
               July
               9.
            
             they
             found
             on
             Shore
             nothing
             but
             store
             of
             Foxes
             ;
             that
             part
             of
             the
             Island
             was
             in
             74
             deg
             .
             45
             min.
             
               July
               10.
            
             they
             weighed
             Anchor
             ,
             and
             stood
             into
             another
             Bay
             ,
             and
             came
             to
             an
             Anchor
             in
             eight
             fathoms
             ,
             where
             they
             saw
             an
             incredible
             number
             of
             Morsses
             swimming
             in
             the
             Sea.
             Coming
             to
             shore
             ,
             they
             espied
             a
             vast
             company
             of
             them
             lying
             on
             the
             Ground
             ;
             they
             shot
             at
             them
             with
             three
             Guns
             they
             carried
             with
             them
             ,
             but
             with
             all
             their
             Weapons
             they
             could
             kill
             but
             fifteen
             of
             above
             1000
             ,
             that
             lay
             there
             like
             Hogs
             huddling
             together
             on
             heaps
             ,
             but
             they
             found
             as
             many
             Teeth
             as
             filled
             an
             Hogshead
             .
             Before
             the
             13th
             ,
             they
             killed
             near
             100
             more
             ,
             making
             use
             only
             of
             their
             Teeth
             .
          
           
             In
             1605
             ,
             the
             same
             persons
             went
             again
             ,
             arriving
             there
             
               July
               2.
            
             
             They
             went
             on
             Shore
             ,
             and
             
               July
               6.
            
             slew
             abundance
             of
             Morsses
             ,
             and
             not
             only
             with
             Shot
             ,
             as
             they
             did
             the
             year
             before
             ,
             but
             with
             Launces
             dexterously
             used
             ,
             directing
             them
             to
             certain
             places
             of
             their
             Bodies
             ;
             they
             began
             also
             to
             boil
             their
             Blubber
             ,
             and
             made
             eleven
             Tuns
             of
             Oyl
             ,
             (
             five
             of
             their
             Bellies
             will
             yield
             one
             Hogshead
             )
             and
             abundance
             of
             Teeth
             .
             Here
             also
             they
             found
             a
             Lead-mine
             under
             Mount-misery
             ,
             and
             brought
             away
             about
             Thirty
             Tun
             of
             the
             Oar.
             
          
           
             In
             1606.
             the
             same
             Ship
             with
             the
             same
             Persons
             was
             sent
             again
             ,
             and
             landed
             
               July
               3
            
             ,
             in
             74
             deg
             .
             55
             min.
             where
             they
             stayed
             till
             the
             Ice
             was
             all
             cleared
             ;
             for
             the
             Morsses
             will
             not
             come
             to
             Shore
             till
             the
             Ice
             be
             all
             vanished
             ,
             where
             ,
             at
             one
             time
             in
             six
             hours
             ,
             they
             slew
             betwixt
             Seven
             and
             Eight
             Hundred
             Morsses
             ,
             and
             Two
             great
             
             〈…〉
             they
             made
             22
             Tuns
             of
             Oyl
             ,
             and
             〈…〉
             Hogsheads
             of
             Teeth
             .
          
           
             In
             1608.
             
             
               June
               21
            
             ,
             was
             so
             hot
             that
             the
             melted
             ●itch
             ran
             down
             the
             sides
             of
             their
             Ship
             :
             〈…〉
             hours
             time
             they
             slew
             above
             900
             Morsses
             ,
             making
             〈…〉
             Tuns
             of
             Oyl
             ,
             and
             above
             2
             Hogsheads
             of
             Teeth
             ,
             besides
             40
             more
             .
             They
             took
             alive
             into
             their
             Ship
             two
             young
             Morsses
             ,
             a
             Male
             and
             Female
             ;
             the
             Female
             died
             ,
             the
             Male
             lived
             ten
             weeks
             in
             England
             ,
             where
             they
             taught
             it
             many
             things
             .
          
           
             In
             1610
             at
             another
             Voyage
             with
             two
             Ships
             ,
             they
             killed
             many
             Bears
             ,
             and
             saw
             divers
             young
             ones
             ,
             no
             bigger
             than
             young
             Lambs
             ,
             very
             gamesome
             and
             lusty
             ;
             they
             brought-two
             of
             them
             into
             England
             .
             Much
             Fowl
             also
             they
             slew
             ,
             and
             many
             Seals
             ;
             and
             
               June
               15
            
             set
             up
             an
             Ensign
             in
             token
             of
             possession
             of
             the
             Island
             for
             the
             Muscovia
             Company
             :
             in
             
               Gull
               Island
            
             they
             found
             three
             Lead
             mines
             ,
             and
             a
             Coal-mine
             on
             the
             North
             side
             of
             the
             Island
             .
             Three
             Ships
             more
             also
             came
             to
             fish
             at
             Cherry-Island
             ,
             they
             killed
             500
             Morsses
             at
             one
             time
             ,
             at
             other
             times
             near
             300
             more
             ,
             one
             Man
             killing
             40
             with
             his
             Launce
             at
             one
             days
             hunting
             .
          
           
             The
             Morss
             ,
             
             Walrush
             ,
             Horse-whale
             ,
             Rosmarus
             ,
             or
             Sea-horse
             ,
             (
             for
             so
             he
             is
             by
             the
             Ancients
             often
             called
             ,
             though
             of
             late
             they
             have
             discovered
             another
             Fish
             not
             unlike
             him
             ,
             with
             streight
             Teeth
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             the
             Sea-horse
             )
             hath
             a
             Skin
             like
             a
             Sea-calf
             ,
             (
             with
             short
             and
             sad
             yellow
             Fur
             )
             a
             Mouth
             like
             a
             Lion
             ;
             if
             any
             ,
             hardly
             discernable
             ,
             Ears
             ,
             yet
             they
             hear
             well
             ,
             and
             are
             frighted
             with
             noise
             ;
             (
             which
             also
             is
             said
             of
             the
             Whale
             ,
             that
             he
             is
             driven
             away
             with
             the
             sound
             of
             a
             Trumpet
             )
             large
             Breast
             ,
             short
             Thighs
             ,
             four
             Feet
             ,
             and
             upon
             each
             Foot
             five
             Toes
             with
             short
             sharp
             
             Nails
             ,
             with
             which
             they
             climb
             the
             Ice
             ;
             and
             as
             large
             as
             a
             great
             Ox
             ,
             having
             a
             great
             semicircular
             Tusk
             growing
             on
             each
             side
             of
             their
             upper
             Jaw
             ,
             which
             are
             very
             much
             valued
             ,
             especially
             by
             the
             Northern
             People
             ,
             partly
             for
             their
             uses
             in
             Medicines
             ,
             as
             to
             make
             Cramp-rings
             ,
             (
             which
             they
             make
             also
             of
             the
             Bristles
             upon
             his
             Cheeks
             )
             to
             resist
             Poison
             ,
             and
             other
             malignant
             Diseases
             ,
             wherein
             they
             are
             at
             least
             equal
             to
             that
             called
             the
             Unicorn's
             Horn
             ;
             but
             more
             for
             their
             Beautry
             ,
             which
             is
             equal
             to
             ,
             if
             not
             surpassing
             Ivory
             .
             The
             heaviness
             of
             it
             makes
             it
             much
             sought
             after
             for
             Handles
             of
             Swords
             .
             Their
             Skins
             ,
             being
             dressed
             ,
             are
             thicker
             than
             two
             Ox-hides
             ,
             yet
             light
             ,
             and
             excellent
             to
             make
             Targets
             against
             Darts
             and
             Arrows
             of
             the
             Savages
             .
             They
             feed
             upon
             Fish
             and
             Herbs
             ,
             and
             sleep
             ,
             if
             there
             be
             Ice
             ,
             upon
             that
             ;
             where
             if
             surprized
             ,
             the
             female
             casts
             her
             young
             ones
             (
             of
             which
             she
             hath
             commonly
             two
             at
             a
             time
             )
             into
             the
             Sea
             ,
             and
             her self
             after
             them
             ,
             swimming
             away
             with
             them
             in
             her
             Arms
             ;
             and
             if
             provoked
             ,
             after
             she
             hath
             secured
             them
             ,
             returning
             many
             times
             to
             set
             upon
             the
             Boat
             ,
             into
             which
             if
             she
             can
             fasten
             her
             Teeth
             ,
             she
             will
             easily
             sink
             it
             .
             But
             if
             they
             be
             farther
             from
             the
             Water
             ,
             they
             all
             arise
             up
             together
             ,
             and
             with
             their
             weight
             and
             force
             falling
             upon
             the
             Ice
             ,
             endeavour
             to
             break
             it
             ;
             as
             they
             did
             when
             surprized
             by
             
               Jonas
               Pool
            
             1610
             ,
             where
             himself
             and
             divers
             of
             his
             Men
             escaped
             drowning
             very
             narrowly
             ;
             one
             of
             them
             being
             in
             the
             Sea
             ,
             the
             Morsses
             set
             upon
             him
             with
             their
             Teeth
             ,
             but
             with
             very
             great
             labour
             and
             hazard
             of
             his
             company
             he
             escaped
             Death
             ,
             though
             sore
             wounded
             .
             Frequently
             also
             they
             sleep
             on
             the
             shore
             ,
             and
             if
             they
             have
             convenience
             ,
             upon
             an
             high
             and
             steep
             place
             .
             They
             always
             go
             in
             great
             companies
             ,
             and
             set
             one
             to
             
             keep
             watch
             ;
             which
             if
             surprized
             asleep
             ,
             't
             is
             an
             easie
             matter
             to
             kill
             all
             the
             rest
             ;
             but
             if
             he
             give
             warning
             by
             grunting
             ,
             they
             clap
             their
             hinder
             Feet
             under
             their
             two
             Tusks
             ,
             and
             so
             roll
             into
             the
             Sea.
             But
             if
             they
             be
             caught
             on
             plain
             ground
             ,
             yet
             are
             they
             hardly
             slain
             ,
             being
             both
             strong
             and
             fierce
             ,
             and
             all
             hasting
             one
             way
             to
             the
             Water
             .
             The
             Dutch
             at
             first
             were
             very
             much
             troubled
             to
             kill
             them
             ,
             their
             Shot
             the
             Beast
             valued
             not
             much
             ,
             their
             Hatchets
             and
             Half-pikes
             would
             not
             pierce
             them
             ;
             nor
             did
             they
             think
             they
             could
             be
             killed
             ,
             except
             struck
             with
             great
             force
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             the
             Forehead
             .
             The
             first
             time
             they
             set
             upon
             them
             ,
             of
             200
             they
             could
             not
             kill
             one
             ,
             but
             went
             for
             their
             Ordnance
             to
             shoot
             them
             .
             Our
             Men
             ,
             after
             a
             little
             experience
             ,
             found
             the
             way
             to
             dispatch
             them
             with
             Javelins
             ,
             as
             is
             before
             rehearsed
             .
          
           
             Some
             imagine
             this
             to
             be
             
               John
               Mayen's
               Island
            
             ,
             but
             it
             seems
             rather
             that
             is
             not
             ;
             for
             the
             Northermost
             point
             of
             that
             is
             in
             71
             d.
             23
             m.
             whereas
             this
             is
             74
             d.
             55
             m.
             except
             the
             Dutch
             be
             not
             so
             accurate
             in
             their
             Observations
             and
             Calculations
             as
             were
             to
             be
             wish'd
             ,
             which
             I
             much
             suspect
             ,
             
               v.
               Nova-Zembla
            
             .
             Besides
             ,
             Cherry-Island
             is
             round
             ,
             not
             frequented
             with
             Whales
             ,
             but
             Morsses
             .
             Our
             Men
             also
             have
             travelled
             it
             on
             Foot
             from
             North
             to
             South
             ,
             which
             on
             
               Mayen's
               Island
            
             cannot
             be
             done
             ;
             and
             though
             they
             tell
             many
             particulars
             of
             the
             place
             ,
             yet
             they
             never
             mention
             the
             great
             
               Beerenberg
               .
               Hope-Island
            
             indeed
             is
             a
             long
             Island
             ,
             lies
             much
             what
             as
             they
             say
             of
             
             Mayen's
             ,
             and
             hath
             been
             visited
             by
             the
             Whale-fishers
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             more
             North
             than
             they
             place
             their
             Island
             .
             The
             itch
             of
             ascribing
             Discoveries
             to
             themselves
             hath
             brought
             (
             as
             I
             fear
             )
             Confusion
             both
             in
             this
             and
             many
             other
             matters
             of
             this
             nature
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             JOHN
             MAYEN's
             Island
             .
          
           
             
               JObn
               Mayen's
               Island
            
             ,
             so
             called
             from
             the
             name
             of
             the
             first
             Discoverer
             ,
             (
             as
             the
             Dutch
             pretend
             )
             seems
             by
             the
             English
             to
             be
             called
             Hope-Island
             ,
             or
             if
             not
             ,
             I
             know
             not
             whether
             the
             English
             have
             been
             upon
             it
             .
             It
             seems
             not
             to
             be
             of
             any
             great
             consequence
             ,
             all
             that
             is
             spoken
             of
             it
             being
             that
             it
             extends
             in
             length
             from
             South-west
             to
             North-east
             The
             farther
             it
             shoots
             out
             in
             length
             ,
             the
             more
             contracted
             and
             narrower
             it
             grows
             in
             breadth
             ;
             so
             that
             in
             the
             middle
             the
             distance
             is
             very
             small
             between
             both
             Shores.
             Before
             the
             Whale-fishing
             was
             removed
             to
             Greenland
             ,
             in
             the
             Summer-time
             this
             Island
             was
             much
             frequented
             by
             the
             Seamen
             whom
             Trade
             invited
             thither
             ;
             and
             the
             Island
             was
             well
             known
             to
             most
             of
             the
             Northern
             Adventurers
             of
             Europe
             ;
             but
             since
             the
             Whales
             have
             deserted
             those
             Shores
             ,
             and
             have
             removed
             their
             Sea-quarters
             farther
             to
             the
             North
             ,
             the
             Seamen
             and
             Fishermen
             have
             been
             forced
             to
             follow
             their
             Prey
             to
             Greenland
             .
             For
             it
             seems
             the
             Whales
             ,
             either
             weary
             of
             the
             place
             ,
             or
             sensible
             of
             their
             own
             danger
             ,
             do
             often
             change
             their
             Harbours
             .
             In
             the
             Spring
             time
             the
             western
             side
             of
             the
             Island
             is
             not
             so
             much
             enclosed
             with
             Ice
             ,
             as
             that
             which
             lies
             in
             the
             North
             ,
             where
             it
             runs
             out
             into
             the
             Sea
             ,
             with
             a
             sharp
             point
             behind
             the
             
               Mountain
               of
               Bears
            
             ;
             for
             on
             this
             side
             ,
             all
             the
             year
             long
             ,
             the
             Ice
             never
             removes
             from
             the
             Shore
             ,
             above
             ten
             miles
             ;
             and
             in
             the
             Spring
             time
             so
             besieges
             it
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             no
             passage
             through
             it
             .
             For
             which
             reason
             the
             Mariners
             ,
             who
             are
             bound
             for
             this
             Island
             ,
             use
             all
             the
             care
             they
             can
             to
             avoid
             the
             
             Eastern
             ,
             and
             to
             make
             directly
             to
             the
             Western
             Shore
             ,
             there
             to
             lye
             while
             the
             Fishing-season
             continues
             ;
             if
             by
             miscarriage
             they
             come
             upon
             the
             East-side
             ,
             they
             are
             then
             forced
             to
             fetch
             a
             compass
             about
             the
             North
             part
             of
             the
             Island
             ,
             whereby
             they
             are
             not
             only
             exposed
             to
             the
             terrible
             winds
             that
             blow
             off
             from
             Bears-Mountain
             ,
             but
             also
             to
             the
             dangers
             of
             the
             floating
             Ice
             :
             for
             here
             the
             Sea
             flows
             from
             South
             to
             North
             ,
             and
             ebbs
             from
             North
             to
             South
             .
             At
             the
             Northern
             end
             of
             the
             Island
             appears
             the
             Bears-Mountain
             ,
             of
             a
             prodigious
             height
             ,
             and
             so
             perpendicularly
             steep
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             impossible
             to
             climb
             to
             the
             top
             of
             it
             .
             This
             Mountain
             ,
             from
             the
             Bears
             there
             frequently
             seen
             ,
             called
             Beerenberg
             or
             the
             Bears-Mountain
             ,
             at
             the
             bottom
             takes
             up
             the
             whole
             space
             beween
             the
             Eastern
             and
             the
             Western
             Shore
             ;
             on
             the
             North
             side
             it
             leaves
             a
             little
             room
             for
             leveller
             ground
             to
             the
             Ocean
             ;
             and
             being
             of
             prodigious
             height
             ,
             may
             be
             descryed
             30
             miles
             off
             at
             Sea.
             
          
           
             The
             Sea-coast
             lies
             thus
             :
             1.
             
             Noords-hoeck
             ,
             or
             the
             
               Northern
               Angle
            
             ,
             is
             the
             extream
             point
             shooting
             out
             to
             the
             North.
             2.
             
             Oosthoeck
             is
             the
             most
             Eastern
             point
             .
             Ysbergh
             ,
             mark'd
             1
             ,
             2
             ,
             3
             ,
             are
             three
             Mountains
             of
             Ice
             ,
             or
             rather
             vast
             heaps
             of
             congealed
             Snow
             ,
             which
             dissolved
             by
             the
             heat
             of
             the
             Sun
             ,
             falls
             from
             the
             top
             of
             Bears-Mountain
             ,
             but
             upon
             the
             Sun
             's
             retiring
             freezes
             again
             .
             3.
             
             Zuydoost-hoeck
             is
             the
             South-east
             Angle
             .
             From
             this
             point
             the
             Shore
             extends
             itself
             from
             East
             to
             West
             to
             a
             little
             Island
             ,
             and
             then
             winds
             again
             to
             the
             West
             and
             South
             ;
             in
             some
             places
             not
             passable
             by
             reason
             of
             its
             steepness
             ,
             in
             others
             smooth
             enough
             .
             4.
             
             
               Cleyn
               Sand-bay
            
             or
             
               Little
               Sand-bay
               ,
               Eyerland
            
             ,
             or
             Eggland
             ,
             being
             certain
             Rocks
             full
             of
             Birds
             ;
             here
             ,
             about
             a
             Musket
             shot
             from
             the
             shore
             ,
             the
             Sea
             is
             60
             fathom
             deep
             ,
             and
             a
             little
             farther
             ,
             
             
             
               
                 The
                 Habits
                 of
                 the
                 Gronelanders
                 .
                 Supplem
                 
                 t.
                 Tab
                 :
                 R.
                 Pag.
                 187.
                 
              
            
             
             the
             sounding
             line
             will
             not
             reach
             to
             the
             bottom
             .
             5.
             
             
               Groote
               Hoot-bay
            
             or
             great
             Wood-bay
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             great
             pieces
             of
             rotten
             Timber
             ,
             that
             are
             there
             found
             .
             In
             this
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             narrowest
             part
             of
             the
             Island
             ,
             are
             certain
             Mountains
             not
             very
             steep
             ,
             from
             the
             top
             whereof
             any
             person
             calling
             them
             that
             stand
             upon
             either
             shore
             ,
             may
             be
             heard
             by
             both
             6.
             
             
               Cleyn
               Hoot-bay
            
             ,
             or
             
               Little
               Wood-bay
            
             .
             7.
             
             
               English
               Bay
            
             ,
             and
             several
             others
             ,
             to
             which
             the
             Dutch
             have
             given
             such
             Names
             as
             they
             thought
             fit
             .
          
        
         
           
             GRONELAND
             .
          
           
             CAlled
             also
             Groenland
             ,
             
             Groinland
             ,
             and
             more
             anciently
             Engroenland
             ,
             lies
             (
             as
             the
             Islanders
             say
             )
             like
             an
             Half-moon
             about
             the
             North
             of
             their
             Countrey
             ,
             at
             the
             distance
             of
             four
             days
             sailing
             .
             But
             it
             seems
             not
             to
             lye
             so
             much
             East
             ,
             but
             rather
             on
             the
             North
             of
             America
             .
             From
             
               Cape
               Farewell
            
             ,
             in
             60
             deg
             .
             30
             min.
             on
             the
             South
             ,
             it
             is
             unknown
             to
             how
             many
             degrees
             in
             the
             North.
             The
             East
             and
             West
             are
             encompass'd
             by
             two
             great
             .
             Oceans
             ,
             but
             at
             what
             degrees
             of
             Longitude
             is
             not
             yet
             discover'd
             .
             Only
             Mr.
             Fotherby
             found
             it
             near
             the
             Coast
             of
             Groneland
             ,
             in
             71
             deg
             .
             and
             the
             South
             of
             Greenland
             to
             be
             above
             two
             hundred
             Laeagues
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             said
             to
             have
             been
             discovered
             first
             by
             a
             Norwegian
             Gentleman
             ,
             
             whose
             Name
             was
             
               Eric
               Rotcop
            
             ,
             or
             
               Red
               Head
            
             ;
             who
             having
             committed
             a
             Murther
             in
             Iseland
             ,
             to
             save
             his
             Life
             ,
             resolved
             a
             adventure
             to
             andother
             Country
             ,
             whereof
             he
             had
             
             heard
             some
             obscure
             flying
             Reports
             .
             He
             succeeded
             so
             well
             ,
             that
             he
             arrived
             in
             a
             safe
             Harbour
             called
             Sandstasm
             ,
             lying
             between
             two
             Mountainous
             Promontories
             ;
             the
             one
             upon
             an
             Island
             over
             against
             Groneland
             ,
             which
             he
             called
             H●idserken
             ,
             on
             
               Wbite
               Sbirs
            
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             Snow
             upon
             it
             :
             the
             other
             on
             the
             Continent
             ,
             called
             
               Huarf
               Eric
            
             .
             He
             winter'd
             in
             the
             Island
             ,
             but
             when
             the
             season
             suffer'd
             pass'd
             into
             the
             Continent
             :
             which
             because
             of
             its
             greenness
             and
             flourishing
             he
             called
             Groneland
             .
             Thence
             he
             sent
             his
             Son
             to
             
               Ola●●
               Trugger
            
             King
             of
             Norway
             ,
             to
             get
             his
             Pardon
             ,
             which
             was
             easily
             granted
             ,
             when
             he
             was
             inform'd
             by
             him
             of
             this
             new
             Discovery
             .
             Whereupon
             divers
             Gentlemen
             adventur'd
             to
             plant
             there
             ,
             who
             multiplying
             ,
             not
             long
             after
             divided
             the
             whole
             Country
             into
             the
             Easten
             and
             Western
             ,
             and
             built
             two
             Cities
             ,
             Garde
             and
             Albe
             .
             In
             Albe
             was
             a
             Bishop's
             See
             ,
             and
             a
             Cathedral
             Church
             dedicated
             to
             St.
             Anthony
             ;
             the
             Seat
             also
             of
             the
             Viceroy
             sent
             thither
             from
             time
             to
             time
             by
             the
             Norwegian
             .
             They
             write
             also
             of
             a
             great
             Monastery
             called
             of
             St.
             Thomas
             ,
             wherein
             was
             a
             Spring
             ,
             whose
             Water
             was
             so
             hot
             ,
             that
             it
             dressed
             all
             their
             Meat
             ;
             and
             being
             conveyed
             into
             the
             Cells
             and
             other
             Rooms
             in
             Pipes
             ,
             heated
             all
             the
             Monastery
             as
             if
             it
             had
             been
             so
             many
             Stoves
             .
             They
             say
             also
             ,
             that
             this
             Monastery
             is
             built
             all
             of
             Pumice-stones
             ,
             and
             that
             this
             hot
             Water
             falling
             upon
             them
             ,
             mixeth
             with
             the
             outer
             parts
             ,
             and
             produces
             a
             sort
             of
             clammy
             matter
             ,
             which
             serves
             instead
             of
             Lime
             .
          
           
             But
             what
             the
             Norwegians
             conquered
             or
             possessed
             in
             this
             Country
             was
             an
             inconsiderable
             corner
             of
             that
             large
             Continent
             .
             
             Themselves
             mention
             a
             Nation
             ,
             whom
             they
             call
             Skrelingers
             ,
             to
             have
             inhabited
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Land
             ,
             
             but
             what
             they
             were
             we
             know
             not
             .
             But
             whether
             their
             Paucity
             exposed
             them
             to
             the
             mercilesness
             of
             the
             Natives
             ,
             or
             whether
             it
             were
             an
             Epidemical
             Disease
             ,
             which
             they
             called
             the
             
               black
               Plague
            
             ,
             which
             swept
             away
             not
             only
             most
             of
             that
             Nation
             in
             Groneland
             ,
             but
             also
             the
             Merchants
             and
             Meriners
             in
             Norway
             ,
             that
             maintained
             that
             Traffick
             ;
             or
             whether
             it
             were
             some
             other
             Reason
             ,
             which
             is
             now
             forgotten
             :
             so
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             since
             1349
             ,
             little
             Intelligence
             hath
             descended
             to
             us
             concerning
             Groneland
             ,
             till
             seeking
             the
             North-west
             passage
             to
             China
             ,
             occasioned
             more
             knowledge
             of
             it
             .
             In
             1389.
             they
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             King
             of
             Denmark
             sent
             a
             Fleet
             thither
             ,
             with
             intention
             to
             re-establish
             his
             Dominion
             in
             those
             parts
             ;
             but
             that
             being
             cast
             away
             ,
             discouraged
             him
             from
             any
             further
             Enterprize
             ;
             till
             new
             of
             late
             Christian
             IV.
             renewed
             somewhat
             again
             of
             that
             Navigation
             ,
             of
             which
             by
             and
             by
             .
             In
             1406.
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Drontheim
             sent
             a
             Priest
             (
             called
             Andreas
             )
             to
             succeed
             Henry
             Bishop
             of
             Garda
             ,
             if
             dead
             ;
             if
             alive
             ,
             to
             return
             and
             bring
             notice
             of
             the
             stute
             of
             the
             Church
             there
             .
             But
             Andreas
             never
             came
             back
             ;
             nor
             hath
             there
             been
             since
             any
             further
             care
             taken
             to
             supply
             Bishops
             ,
             or
             maintain
             Christianity
             there
             .
             There
             is
             a
             Relation
             in
             
             Purchas's
             Pilgrim
             ,
             par
             .
             3.
             of
             one
             
               Ivor
               Boty
               a
               Gronelander
            
             ,
             translated
             1560
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             Norweighish
             Language
             ,
             which
             gives
             a
             sufficiently
             particular
             account
             of
             all
             the
             places
             in
             that
             Country
             inhabited
             by
             Christians
             ,
             but
             nothing
             besides
             .
          
           
             The
             occasion
             of
             our
             Voyages
             to
             those
             Coast
             was
             to
             find
             out
             a
             way
             to
             China
             ,
             
             &c.
             by
             the
             North-west
             ,
             which
             had
             been
             fruitlesly
             sought
             toward
             the
             North-east
             .
          
           
           
             The
             first
             whom
             we
             read
             to
             have
             searched
             the
             North-west
             for
             a
             passage
             ,
             was
             
               Martyn
               Frobisher
            
             ,
             
             who
             in
             1576
             ,
             with
             two
             Barks
             coming
             to
             the
             height
             of
             62
             deg
             .
             found
             a
             great
             Inlet
             ,
             called
             by
             him
             
             Forbisher's
             Straits
             ,
             whereinto
             having
             sailed
             60
             leagues
             with
             main
             Land
             on
             either
             side
             ,
             returned
             .
             He
             found
             there
             a
             certain
             Oar
             ,
             which
             he
             conceived
             to
             be
             of
             Gold
             ;
             and
             the
             next
             year
             he
             made
             a
             second
             Voyage
             to
             fetch
             a
             quantity
             of
             it
             ,
             but
             it
             proving
             to
             be
             nothing
             but
             black
             Lead
             ,
             answer'd
             not
             expectation
             ;
             yet
             they
             found
             a
             Silver
             Mine
             ,
             which
             lay
             so
             deep
             and
             fast
             in
             the
             Rocks
             ,
             that
             they
             could
             not
             dig
             it
             .
             They
             melted
             Gold
             also
             ,
             but
             in
             very
             small
             quantities
             ,
             out
             of
             several
             Stones
             they
             found
             there
             upon
             
             Smith's
             Isle
             .
             They
             found
             also
             a
             dead
             Fish
             ,
             of
             about
             twelve
             foot
             long
             ,
             not
             unlike
             in
             shape
             to
             a
             Porpoise
             ,
             having
             an
             Horn
             six
             foot
             long
             (
             such
             as
             is
             commonly
             called
             Unicorn's
             Horn
             )
             growing
             out
             of
             his
             Snout
             ,
             which
             is
             still
             kept
             at
             Windsor
             .
             In
             1578.
             he
             went
             out
             again
             upon
             a
             Discovery
             ,
             wherein
             passing
             as
             far
             as
             he
             thought
             good
             ,
             he
             took
             possession
             of
             the
             Land
             in
             the
             name
             of
             Queen
             Elizabeth
             ,
             calling
             it
             
               Meta
               incognita
            
             .
          
           
             In
             1583.
             
             
             Sir
             
               Humphrey
               Gilbert
            
             upon
             the
             same
             design
             went
             to
             the
             great
             River
             of
             St.
             Lawrence
             ,
             in
             Canada
             ,
             took
             possession
             of
             the
             Countrey
             ,
             and
             setled
             a
             Fishing-trade
             there
             .
             This
             Voyage
             I
             suppose
             was
             made
             upon
             suggestion
             of
             a
             Greek
             Mariner
             ,
             who
             assured
             some
             of
             our
             Nation
             ,
             that
             himself
             had
             passed
             a
             great
             Strait
             ,
             North
             of
             Virginia
             ,
             from
             the
             West
             or
             South
             Ocean
             ,
             and
             offered
             to
             be
             Pilot
             for
             the
             Discovery
             ,
             but
             died
             before
             he
             came
             into
             England
             .
          
           
           
             In
             1585.
             
             
             Mr.
             
               John
               Davis
            
             was
             employ●●
             with
             two
             Barks
             to
             the
             same
             search
             .
             The
             first
             Land
             he
             came
             to
             ,
             he
             named
             the
             
               Land
               of
               Desolation
            
             ,
             and
             is
             one
             part
             of
             Groneland
             ;
             then
             he
             arrived
             in
             64
             deg
             .
             15
             min.
             in
             
             Gilbert's
             Sound
             ,
             where
             they
             found
             a
             great
             quantity
             of
             that
             Oar
             which
             Frobisher
             brought
             into
             England
             ,
             and
             also
             
               Lapis
               Specularis
            
             .
             Thence
             they
             went
             to
             66
             deg
             .
             40
             min.
             to
             
               Mount
               Raleigh
               ,
               Totness
               Sound
               ,
               &c.
            
             where
             they
             saw
             some
             few
             low
             Shrubs
             ,
             but
             nothing
             else
             worth
             noting
             .
          
           
             In
             1586.
             he
             made
             a
             second
             Voyage
             to
             the
             same
             place
             ,
             where
             he
             found
             amongst
             the
             Natives
             Copper
             Oar
             ,
             as
             also
             black
             and
             red
             Copper
             .
             Thence
             they
             searched
             many
             places
             Westward
             ,
             and
             returned
             with
             good
             hopes
             of
             discovering
             the
             desired
             passage
             .
          
           
             In
             1587.
             he
             made
             a
             third
             Voyage
             ,
             to
             72
             deg
             .
             12
             min.
             the
             Compass
             varying
             to
             82
             deg
             .
             Westward
             ,
             the
             Land
             they
             called
             London-Coast
             ;
             and
             there
             they
             found
             an
             open
             Sea
             ,
             and
             forty
             leagues
             between
             Land
             and
             Land
             ,
             thinking
             this
             to
             be
             the
             most
             likely
             place
             to
             find
             the
             passage
             ;
             and
             it
             was
             from
             him
             called
             
               Fretum
               Davis
            
             .
          
           
             Thus
             from
             time
             to
             time
             proceeded
             the
             discovery
             of
             these
             Countries
             ,
             but
             now
             not
             upon
             hopes
             of
             a
             passage
             to
             the
             Indies
             ,
             
             but
             for
             the
             profit
             of
             Trading
             ;
             till
             Mr.
             Hudson
             ,
             in
             1610
             ,
             after
             he
             was
             satisfied
             that
             there
             was
             no
             passage
             North-easterly
             ,
             was
             sent
             to
             make
             a
             Tryal
             here
             also
             .
             He
             proceeded
             an
             hundred
             leagues
             farther
             than
             any
             before
             had
             done
             ;
             and
             gave
             Names
             to
             certain
             places
             ,
             as
             
               Desire-provokes
               ,
               Isle
               of
               God's
               Mercies
               ,
               
               Prince
               Henry's
               Cape
               ,
               King
               James's
               Cape
               ,
               Queen
               Ann's
               Cape
               ,
            
             and
             the
             like
             ;
             but
             the
             Ice
             hindered
             him
             from
             going
             further
             ,
             and
             the
             Sedition
             of
             his
             Men
             from
             returning
             home
             .
          
           
             In
             1612.
             
             
             
               James
               Hall
            
             returning
             into
             England
             ,
             and
             with
             him
             
               Willian
               Baffin
            
             ,
             who
             discovored
             
               Cockin's
               Sound
            
             ,
             in-the
             height
             of
             65
             deg
             .
             20
             min.
             which
             differed
             in
             Longitude
             from
             London
             60
             deg
             .
             30
             min.
             Westward
             .
             They
             saw
             also
             the
             footing
             of
             a
             great
             Beast
             they
             supposed
             in
             Elk
             ,
             or
             the
             like
             .
             
               James
               Hall
            
             was
             killed
             in
             the
             Boat
             by
             a
             Native
             pretending
             to
             trade
             with
             them
             .
             They
             tryed
             the
             Mine
             at
             
             Cunningham's
             River
             ,
             which
             the
             Danes
             had
             digged
             before
             ,
             and
             found
             it
             to
             be
             nothing
             worth
             .
             There
             were
             Rocks
             of
             very
             pure
             Stone
             ,
             finer
             and
             whiter
             that
             Alabaster
             ,
             and
             Angelica
             growing
             plentifully
             in
             many
             places
             ,
             which
             the
             Savages
             use
             to
             eat
             .
          
           
             In
             1615.
             
             
             Mr.
             Baffin
             was
             sent
             again
             ;
             he
             found
             Fair-Point
             to
             differ
             in
             Longitude
             from
             London
             74
             deg
             .
             and
             5.
             min.
             Westward
             .
             But
             the
             chief
             thing
             they
             discover'd
             was
             ,
             that
             there
             was
             no
             passage
             in
             the
             North
             of
             
               Davis
               Straits
            
             ,
             it
             being
             no
             other
             than
             a
             great
             Bay
             ;
             but
             that
             profit
             might
             be
             made
             by
             fishing
             for
             Whales
             ,
             Morsses
             ,
             and
             Unicorns
             ,
             of
             which
             there
             are
             good
             store
             .
          
           
             In
             1616.
             
             Mr.
             Baffin
             went
             again
             .
             In
             Sir
             Tho.
             Smith's
             Sound
             ,
             78
             deg
             .
             Lat.
             their
             Compass
             varied
             56
             deg
             .
             Westward
             ,
             the
             greatest
             variation
             that
             is
             any
             where
             known
             .
             Despairing
             to
             discover
             their
             desired
             North-west
             passage
             ,
             they
             returned
             home
             ,
             and
             since
             that
             we
             hear
             of
             no
             more
             Voyages
             made
             from
             England
             upon
             that
             design
             ,
             except
             by
             Capt.
             James
             ,
             in
             1631.
             
          
           
           
             This
             Ingenious
             and
             most
             Skilful
             Navigator
             ,
             Capt.
             
               Theo.
               James
            
             was
             pester'd
             with
             much
             Ice
             in
             these
             North-west
             Seas
             in
             June
             and
             July
             ,
             sailing
             from
             Cape-Farewell
             ,
             by
             the
             Island
             of
             Resolution
             ,
             to
             
             Mill's
             and
             
               Nottingham
               Isles
            
             ,
             as
             also
             that
             call'd
             Mansfield
             ,
             from
             whence
             he
             steer'd
             over
             a
             great
             Bay
             to
             the
             Westward
             ,
             near
             Port-Nelson
             ,
             and
             named
             the
             Land
             
               New
               South-Wales
            
             .
             He
             met
             hereabouts
             with
             Capt.
             Fox
             ,
             in
             one
             of
             his
             Majesty's
             Ships
             ,
             who
             had
             been
             in
             Port-Nelson
             ,
             but
             they
             were
             soon
             parted
             by
             bad
             weather
             .
             Capt.
             James
             continued
             to
             roving
             up
             and
             down
             these
             Seas
             ,
             and
             giving
             Names
             to
             his
             Discoveries
             ,
             as
             
               Cape
               Henrietta
               Maria
               ,
               Lord
               Weston's
               Island
               ,
               The
               Earl
               of
               Bristol's
               Island
               ,
               Sir
               Thomas
               Roe's
               Island
               ,
               Earl
               of
               Danby's
               Island
               ,
               Charlton
               Island
               ,
            
             where
             he
             winter'd
             in
             the
             Lat.
             of
             52
             deg
             .
             03
             min.
             from
             whence
             he
             returned
             home
             in
             1632.
             having
             built
             a
             little
             Pinnace
             out
             of
             his
             Ship
             ,
             in
             which
             he
             passed
             over
             to
             
               Cary's
               Swans-Nest
            
             ,
             and
             so
             by
             
               Cape
               Charles
            
             and
             Salisbury-Isle
             homewards
             ,
             having
             made
             many
             additional
             Discoveries
             beyond
             
               Hudson
               ,
               Button
            
             ,
             and
             Baffin
             .
          
           
             This
             Island
             (
             saith
             Capt.
             James
             )
             and
             all
             the
             rest
             (
             as
             well
             as
             the
             Main
             )
             is
             a
             light
             white
             Sand
             ,
             cover'd
             over
             with
             a
             white
             Moss
             ,
             and
             full
             of
             Shrubs
             and
             low
             Bushes
             ,
             excepting
             some
             bare
             Hills
             and
             Patches
             ,
             where
             the
             Sand
             will
             drive
             with
             the
             Wind
             like
             Dust
             .
             'T
             is
             full
             of
             Trees
             ,
             as
             
               Spruce
               Firrs
            
             ,
             and
             Juniper
             ,
             which
             together
             with
             the
             Moss
             will
             take
             fire
             like
             Torches
             or
             Flax.
             We
             found
             great
             store
             of
             an
             Herb
             like
             Scurvy-grass
             ,
             which
             boil'd
             ,
             did
             extreamly
             refresh
             us
             .
             We
             saw
             some
             Deer
             ,
             abundance
             of
             Foxes
             ,
             a
             few
             Bears
             ,
             and
             some
             little
             Beasts
             .
             In
             May
             there
             came
             some
             Fowl
             ,
             as
             Ducks
             and
             Geese
             ;
             white
             
             Partridges
             we
             saw
             ;
             Fish
             we
             could
             never
             see
             any
             in
             the
             Sea
             ,
             nor
             any
             Bones
             of
             Fish
             on
             the
             Shore
             side
             ,
             excepting
             a
             few
             Cockle-shells
             .
             The
             Muskitoes
             upon
             our
             coming
             away
             in
             July
             were
             most
             intolerable
             ,
             there
             being
             no
             Fence
             against
             them
             .
             The
             Climate
             (
             of
             the
             
               Isle
               of
               Charleton
            
             )
             is
             most
             unnatural
             ,
             the
             Days
             in
             Summer
             being
             excessive
             hot
             ,
             and
             the
             Nights
             sharp
             Frosts
             ,
             even
             to
             an
             inch
             thickness
             in
             the
             Ponds
             ,
             and
             all
             this
             in
             June
             and
             July
             .
             Here
             are
             divers
             sorts
             of
             Flies
             ,
             as
             Butter-flies
             ,
             Butchers-flies
             ,
             Horse-flies
             ,
             infinite
             numbers
             of
             Ants
             and
             Frogs
             ,
             plenty
             of
             Vetches
             ,
             which
             recover'd
             our
             Scorbutick
             Men.
             And
             yet
             that
             which
             is
             most
             wonderful
             ,
             the
             Winter
             is
             as
             severe
             here
             as
             in
             any
             place
             lying
             30
             degrees
             more
             Northerly
             .
          
           
             The
             King
             of
             Denmark
             also
             ,
             partly
             to
             advance
             the
             Trading
             of
             his
             own
             ,
             
             and
             partly
             to
             renew
             his
             ancient
             Pretence
             to
             that
             Country
             ,
             if
             any
             thing
             should
             be
             discover'd
             worth
             the
             claiming
             ,
             whilst
             the
             English
             were
             busie
             in
             these
             Discoveries
             ,
             set
             out
             two
             Ships
             and
             a
             Pinnace
             1605.
             the
             Admiral
             was
             Capt.
             
               John
               Cunningham
            
             a
             
               Scot
               ,
               Godske
               Lindenaw
            
             a
             noble
             Dane
             was
             Vice
             Admiral
             ,
             the
             chief
             Pilots
             were
             
               James
               Hall
            
             and
             
               John
               Knight
               ,
               Englishmen
               .
               Godske
            
             arrived
             on
             some
             part
             of
             the
             Countrey
             where
             he
             traffick'd
             some
             small
             matters
             with
             the
             Natives
             ,
             took
             two
             of
             them
             ,
             and
             returned
             into
             Denmark
             .
             The
             other
             two
             Ships
             arrived
             at
             
               Cape
               Farewell
            
             ,
             thence
             went
             to
             
               Frobisher's
               Straits
            
             ,
             gave
             Danish
             Names
             to
             divers
             places
             ,
             traded
             with
             the
             Natives
             ,
             of
             whom
             they
             brought
             away
             three
             ,
             and
             found
             certain
             Stones
             in
             a
             place
             called
             
               Cunningham's
               Ford
            
             ,
             out
             of
             an
             hundred
             pound
             of
             which
             were
             extracted
             twenty-six
             ounces
             of
             fine
             Silver
             .
          
           
           
             In
             1606.
             he
             sent
             again
             four
             Ships
             and
             a
             Pinnace
             ,
             
               Godske
               Lindenaw
            
             Admiral
             ,
             and
             
               James
               Hall
            
             Pilot-General
             ,
             they
             brought
             away
             five
             of
             the
             Natives
             .
          
           
             In
             1607.
             
             
               James
               Hall
            
             was
             sent
             again
             ,
             but
             the
             Seamen
             mutining
             as
             soon
             as
             he
             came
             to
             the
             Coast
             ,
             brought
             the
             Ship
             back
             again
             into
             Denmark
             ,
             without
             any
             thing
             done
             .
          
           
             The
             King
             of
             Denmark
             set
             out
             two
             Ships
             more
             ,
             under
             
               Christian
               Richardson
            
             an
             Holsteiner
             ,
             with
             Norwegian
             and
             Iselandish
             Mariners
             ,
             who
             returned
             before
             they
             saw
             Shore
             .
             More
             of
             their
             Expeditions
             we
             know
             not
             ,
             till
             1619
             ,
             when
             he
             sent
             out
             
               John
               Munck
            
             with
             two
             Ships
             .
             They
             arrived
             safe
             at
             
               Cape
               Farewell
            
             60
             deg
             .
             30
             min.
             where
             their
             Tackle
             was
             so
             frozen
             ,
             and
             full
             of
             Isicles
             ,
             that
             they
             could
             not
             handle
             them
             ;
             the
             next
             day
             was
             so
             hot
             ;
             that
             they
             could
             not
             endure
             their
             Clothes
             ,
             but
             wrought
             in
             their
             shirts
             .
             The
             South
             part
             of
             
               Hudson's
               Bay
            
             he
             called
             
               Mare
               Novum
            
             ;
             that
             part
             towards
             
               Groneland
               ,
               Mare
               Christianum
            
             .
             He
             arriv'd
             in
             63
             deg
             .
             20
             min.
             where
             he
             winter'd
             ,
             and
             called
             it
             
               Munck's
               Winter-harbour
            
             ,
             and
             the
             Country
             
               New
               Denmark
            
             ,
             (
             it
             seems
             to
             be
             near
             
               Digg's
               Island
            
             .
             )
             In
             that
             long
             Winter
             he
             there
             endured
             ,
             little
             of
             note
             happen'd
             ,
             but
             that
             in
             April
             it
             rained
             ,
             and
             then
             came
             thither
             vast
             quantities
             of
             Fowls
             ,
             of
             divers
             sorts
             ,
             to
             breed
             in
             those
             quiet
             ,
             undisturbed
             places
             .
             Of
             all
             his
             Company
             ,
             which
             was
             forty-six
             in
             one
             Ship
             ,
             and
             sixteen
             in
             the
             Pinnace
             ,
             scarce
             so
             many
             were
             left
             alive
             ,
             as
             were
             able
             to
             bring
             the
             Pinnace
             thorow
             very
             horrid
             dangers
             ,
             to
             their
             own
             Country
             .
          
           
           
             If
             any
             one
             desire
             to
             know
             what
             became
             of
             the
             eight
             Gronelanders
             brought
             at
             several
             times
             into
             Denmark
             ,
             
             the
             account
             is
             this
             :
             The
             King
             commanded
             great
             care
             should
             be
             taken
             of
             them
             ,
             appointed
             certain
             persons
             to
             attend
             them
             ,
             to
             give
             them
             liberty
             enough
             ,
             so
             as
             they
             prevented
             their
             escape
             .
             No
             Necessary
             or
             Convenience
             was
             wanting
             ;
             their
             Food
             such
             as
             they
             could
             eat
             ,
             Milk
             ,
             Butter
             ,
             Cheese
             ,
             Flesh
             ,
             and
             Fish
             ,
             but
             raw
             .
             They
             could
             eat
             no
             Bread
             ,
             nor
             boil'd
             Meat
             ,
             but
             nothing
             so
             much
             abhorr'd
             by
             them
             as
             Wine
             ,
             or
             Brandy
             .
             Their
             pleasantest
             Beuvrage
             was
             Train-Oyl
             .
             But
             whatever
             was
             done
             to
             ,
             or
             for
             them
             ,
             could
             never
             take
             away
             that
             Melancholy
             and
             Chagrin
             which
             they
             continually
             lived
             in
             for
             the
             want
             of
             their
             beloved
             Country
             .
             They
             could
             never
             be
             brought
             to
             learn
             much
             of
             the
             Danish
             Language
             ,
             or
             to
             apprehend
             any
             thing
             of
             Christian
             Religion
             .
             Three
             of
             them
             were
             sent
             back
             towards
             their
             own
             Country
             1606.
             the
             most
             towardly
             and
             hopeful
             ,
             who
             might
             serve
             for
             Interpreters
             and
             Brokers
             to
             the
             Danes
             ;
             but
             two
             of
             them
             ,
             Oxo
             and
             Omeg
             ,
             died
             in
             the
             Ship
             ,
             and
             the
             third
             (
             because
             the
             Danes
             durst
             not
             land
             or
             trade
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             great
             numbers
             of
             Natives
             that
             appeared
             in
             Arms
             on
             the
             Coast
             ,
             ready
             to
             revenge
             them
             that
             had
             been
             before
             carried
             away
             )
             was
             brought
             back
             into
             Denmark
             ,
             to
             his
             former
             Treatment
             .
             An
             Ambassador
             arriving
             there
             from
             Spain
             ,
             the
             King
             was
             pleased
             to
             shew
             him
             those
             Savages
             ,
             and
             their
             dexterity
             in
             rowing
             ,
             which
             was
             by
             all
             the
             Spectators
             admired
             .
             The
             Ambassador
             sending
             them
             Money
             ,
             one
             of
             them
             had
             the
             courage
             to
             buy
             him
             Clothes
             after
             the
             Danish
             Fashion
             ,
             got
             a
             Feather
             in
             his
             Cap
             ,
             Boots
             and
             Spurs
             ,
             and
             all
             things
             
               ala
               cavaliere
            
             ;
             he
             came
             
             also
             to
             the
             King
             ,
             and
             desired
             to
             serve
             him
             ;
             but
             this
             fervor
             was
             quickly
             decay'd
             ,
             and
             the
             poor
             man
             returned
             to
             his
             sadness
             and
             complaints
             .
             Some
             of
             them
             endeavoured
             to
             get
             to
             Sea
             in
             their
             little
             Boats
             ,
             but
             being
             retrieved
             ,
             dyed
             of
             Melancholy
             .
             Two
             lived
             divers
             years
             at
             Koldingen
             in
             Jutland
             ,
             where
             they
             were
             employ'd
             in
             diving
             for
             Pearl-Muscles
             ;
             in
             which
             their
             skill
             and
             dexterity
             was
             such
             ,
             that
             every
             one
             that
             saw
             them
             believed
             they
             had
             practised
             the
             same
             employment
             in
             their
             own
             Country
             .
             Such
             fuccess
             they
             had
             ,
             that
             the
             Governour
             promised
             himself
             great
             Profit
             thereby
             ;
             and
             that
             in
             a
             short
             time
             he
             should
             sell
             Pearls
             by
             the
             quart
             ,
             if
             they
             continued
             .
             But
             his
             Covetousness
             destroyed
             his
             Gain
             ;
             for
             not
             content
             with
             what
             they
             fished
             in
             Summer
             ,
             he
             also
             compelled
             them
             under
             the
             Ice
             in
             Winter
             time
             ;
             where
             one
             of
             them
             fell
             into
             such
             a
             Disease
             ,
             from
             the
             cold
             so
             contracted
             ,
             that
             he
             dyed
             .
             After
             whose
             death
             the
             other
             never
             enjoyed
             himself
             ;
             but
             finding
             an
             opportunity
             ,
             he
             got
             his
             little
             Boat
             ,
             and
             before
             he
             was
             overtaken
             got
             to
             the
             main
             Sea.
             But
             being
             brought
             back
             ,
             they
             represented
             to
             him
             the
             impossibility
             of
             his
             ever
             getting
             home
             to
             Groneland
             ;
             but
             he
             slighted
             their
             Advice
             ,
             and
             told
             them
             ,
             That
             he
             intended
             to
             go
             northward
             so
             far
             ,
             and
             when
             he
             was
             there
             the
             Stars
             would
             direct
             him
             into
             his
             own
             Country
             .
          
           
             The
             Country
             is
             mostly
             all
             High-land
             and
             Mountains
             ,
             cover'd
             with
             Snow
             all
             the
             Year
             ,
             but
             the
             southern
             parts
             more
             than
             the
             northern
             .
             
             They
             have
             very
             little
             or
             no
             Wood
             growing
             there
             ,
             except
             some
             few
             Bushes
             ,
             and
             not
             many
             Plants
             or
             Herbs
             ;
             consequently
             not
             many
             Beasts
             
             there
             nourished
             ,
             but
             their
             chief
             subsistence
             is
             upon
             Fishing
             .
             There
             are
             divers
             Mountains
             ,
             which
             promise
             rich
             Mines
             of
             Metal
             ;
             and
             some
             have
             been
             found
             to
             contain
             it
             actually
             ,
             others
             only
             to
             make
             a
             shew
             .
             The
             Inhabitants
             know
             neither
             sowing
             nor
             planting
             ;
             tho'
             the
             Soil
             seem'd
             to
             be
             fertile
             and
             pleasant
             ,
             especially
             between
             the
             Mountains
             .
             The
             northern
             parts
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             terrible
             Ice
             and
             Cold
             ,
             are
             wholly
             undiscover'd
             ;
             the
             southern
             consist
             of
             many
             Islands
             ,
             different
             in
             shapes
             and
             bigness
             :
             which
             seems
             to
             be
             the
             reason
             ,
             that
             in
             these
             Seas
             are
             many
             various
             and
             strong
             currents
             ,
             and
             (
             as
             
               Ivor
               Boty
            
             saith
             )
             very
             many
             dangerous
             Whirlpools
             towards
             the
             West
             and
             North
             ,
             none
             of
             which
             however
             have
             been
             found
             by
             our
             Mariners
             .
             The
             Country
             seems
             much
             subject
             to
             Earthquakes
             ,
             else
             very
             healthful
             ;
             only
             it
             was
             observed
             ,
             that
             those
             who
             went
             thither
             infected
             with
             any
             Venereal
             Disease
             grew
             worse
             immediately
             ,
             and
             could
             not
             there
             be
             cured
             .
             Which
             they
             attributed
             to
             the
             purity
             of
             the
             Air
             ,
             perhaps
             they
             might
             have
             done
             it
             more
             rationally
             to
             the
             Cold.
             
          
           
             
               Ivor
               Boty
            
             speaks
             much
             also
             of
             their
             great
             numbers
             of
             Cows
             and
             Sheep
             ;
             
             but
             our
             Men
             found
             no
             Beasts
             there
             ,
             but
             Bears
             ,
             Foxes
             ,
             (
             very
             many
             of
             which
             are
             black
             )
             Rain-Deer
             ,
             and
             Dogs
             ,
             whereof
             are
             two
             sorts
             ,
             a
             bigger
             ,
             which
             they
             use
             to
             draw
             their
             Sleds
             ;
             and
             a
             lesser
             ,
             which
             they
             feed
             for
             their
             Tables
             .
             Our
             Men
             observed
             this
             peculiarity
             both
             in
             their
             Foxes
             and
             Dogs
             ,
             that
             their
             Pizzles
             were
             of
             Bone.
             Tho'
             it
             is
             very
             likely
             ,
             that
             there
             are
             the
             same
             sorts
             which
             are
             in
             Lapland
             and
             Sam●ieda
             ;
             but
             
             our
             Men
             have
             not
             searched
             any
             more
             than
             the
             Shores
             ,
             both
             because
             of
             their
             short
             stay
             ,
             and
             the
             Treachery
             of
             the
             Inhabitants
             .
          
           
             Of
             Fishes
             there
             is
             great
             both
             Plenty
             and
             Variety
             ,
             
             Whales
             ,
             Seals
             Dog-●ish
             ;
             but
             in
             these
             are
             caught
             the
             greatest
             quantity
             of
             Sea
             Unicorns
             ,
             whose
             Horns
             are
             so
             much
             esteemed
             ,
             and
             kept
             as
             Rarities
             in
             the
             Cabinets
             of
             Princes
             .
             The
             Natives
             here
             are
             so
             well
             stored
             with
             it
             ,
             that
             they
             have
             sufficient
             both
             for
             truck
             and
             their
             own
             use
             .
             They
             make
             of
             them
             (
             besides
             other
             Utensils
             )
             Swords
             ,
             and
             Heads
             for
             their
             Darts
             and
             Arrows
             ;
             which
             they
             work
             and
             grind
             with
             Stones
             ,
             till
             they
             make
             them
             as
             sharp-piercing
             as
             ours
             .
             This
             Horn
             grows
             in
             the
             Snout
             of
             the
             Fish
             ,
             and
             is
             his
             Weapon
             ,
             wherewith
             he
             fears
             not
             to
             fight
             the
             Whale
             ,
             and
             to
             assault
             and
             sometimes
             endanger
             a
             Ship.
             The
             Fish
             itself
             is
             as
             large
             as
             an
             Ox
             ,
             very
             strong
             ,
             swift
             ,
             and
             hard
             to
             be
             caught
             ,
             except
             left
             on
             the
             Shore
             by
             the
             Tide
             ,
             or
             entangled
             by
             the
             Weeds
             .
          
           
             Fowls
             are
             here
             in
             great
             abundance
             and
             variety
             .
             
             Our
             Men
             have
             seen
             those
             they
             call
             Bass-Geese
             ,
             or
             such
             as
             once
             a
             year
             come
             to
             breed
             in
             the
             Bass
             ,
             a
             famous
             Rock
             or
             Island
             near
             Edinburgh
             .
             The
             Natives
             also
             have
             a
             very
             great
             Art
             and
             Dexterity
             in
             making
             and
             setting
             Snares
             and
             Springs
             to
             catch
             them
             ;
             which
             they
             do
             chiefly
             for
             their
             Skins
             and
             Feathers
             .
             Two
             or
             three
             of
             our
             Men
             with
             their
             Guns
             killed
             in
             one
             day
             Fifteen
             hundred
             ,
             and
             found
             them
             worse
             tasted
             ,
             but
             better
             clothed
             than
             those
             of
             the
             same
             kind
             in
             these
             Countries
             ;
             they
             could
             not
             eat
             them
             till
             ●●ay'd
             ,
             their
             Skins
             being
             very
             thick
             ,
             tough
             ,
             
             and
             more
             cover'd
             with
             Feathers
             ;
             which
             also
             were
             not
             easily
             pluck'd
             off
             ;
             which
             is
             the
             reason
             that
             the
             Natives
             dress
             their
             Skins
             as
             they
             do
             those
             of
             Beasts
             ,
             and
             Seals
             ,
             and
             make
             Garments
             of
             them
             ,
             using
             them
             to
             all
             purposes
             like
             other
             Furrs
             ;
             with
             the
             Feathers
             outward
             in
             Summer
             ,
             inward
             in
             Winter
             :
             which
             is
             also
             observed
             in
             all
             other
             cold
             Countries
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             Groneland
             .
          
           
             All
             Persons
             ,
             
             that
             have
             been
             there
             ,
             give
             a
             wonderful
             and
             strange
             account
             of
             a
             certain
             North-light
             ,
             as
             they
             call
             it
             ,
             not
             easily
             conceived
             by
             them
             who
             have
             not
             seen
             it
             .
             It
             appears
             usually
             about
             the
             time
             of
             the
             new
             Moon
             ,
             and
             tho'
             only
             in
             the
             North
             ,
             yet
             doth
             it
             enlighten
             the
             whole
             Country
             :
             sometimes
             also
             
               Norway
               ,
               Iseland
            
             ,
             and
             even
             these
             Regions
             of
             ours
             ,
             as
             
               Gassendus
               (
               vita
               Piresk
               ,
               &
               exercit
               .
               In
               Doctorem
               Flud
               )
            
             saith
             ,
             himself
             observed
             ,
             and
             at
             large
             describes
             .
             Nor
             should
             I
             much
             doubt
             to
             affirm
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             that
             which
             is
             sometimes
             seen
             in
             England
             ,
             and
             especially
             in
             the
             Northern
             parts
             ,
             call'd
             Streaming
             .
             It
             is
             said
             to
             be
             like
             a
             great
             Pillar
             (
             or
             Beam
             )
             of
             Fire
             ,
             yet
             darting
             out
             Rays
             and
             Streams
             every
             way
             ,
             moving
             also
             from
             place
             to
             place
             ,
             and
             leaving
             behind
             it
             a
             Mist
             or
             Cloud
             ;
             continuing
             also
             till
             the
             Sun-beams
             hide
             it
             .
          
           
             The
             Country
             seems
             to
             be
             inhabited
             by
             divers
             Nations
             ,
             
             differing
             in
             habit
             ,
             manners
             ,
             and
             language
             .
             Those
             whom
             
               James
               Hall
            
             found
             and
             brought
             with
             him
             ,
             differed
             much
             from
             those
             with
             whom
             
               Gotske
               Lindenaw
            
             had
             to
             do
             .
             That
             part
             which
             the
             Norwegians
             are
             said
             to
             have
             anciently
             possessed
             ,
             was
             an
             inconsiderable
             part
             of
             that
             whole
             Country
             ,
             and
             they
             found
             several
             
             Nations
             there
             besides
             themselves
             ;
             govern'd
             by
             several
             Kings
             ;
             tho'
             they
             write
             not
             ,
             that
             they
             had
             Wars
             one
             with
             another
             ,
             but
             only
             against
             them
             .
             Our
             late
             Discoverers
             in
             66
             deg
             .
             50
             min.
             found
             a
             Country
             which
             the
             Natives
             (
             as
             they
             could
             understand
             them
             )
             called
             Secanunga
             ,
             who
             also
             said
             ,
             that
             they
             had
             a
             great
             King
             ,
             carried
             upon
             Mens
             Shoulders
             ,
             and
             they
             called
             him
             Cachico
             .
             But
             more
             particulars
             than
             these
             ,
             I
             find
             not
             .
          
           
             The
             Inhabitants
             are
             generally
             of
             a
             low
             stature
             ,
             
             black
             hair
             ,
             flat
             nos'd
             ,
             broad
             fac'd
             ,
             lips
             turned
             up
             ,
             and
             of
             a
             ripe
             Olive
             colour
             ,
             some
             of
             them
             also
             quite
             black
             .
             Their
             Women
             (
             for
             their
             greater
             ornament
             doubtless
             )
             stain
             their
             saces
             in
             blew
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             in
             black
             streaks
             ,
             which
             colour
             they
             let
             into
             the
             Skin
             ,
             by
             pricking
             it
             with
             a
             sharp
             Bone
             ,
             that
             it
             will
             never
             be
             taken
             nor
             worn
             out
             .
             In
             all
             things
             they
             resemble
             the
             Samoieds
             and
             Laplanders
             .
             They
             are
             very
             active
             and
             strong
             ,
             yet
             could
             some
             of
             our
             English
             run
             swifter
             ,
             and
             leap
             farther
             than
             any
             of
             them
             ;
             but
             they
             were
             hard
             enough
             for
             any
             of
             ours
             at
             wrastling
             .
             They
             are
             also
             very
             couragious
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             desperate
             ;
             for
             rather
             than
             be
             taken
             by
             our
             Men
             ,
             they
             would
             throw
             themselves
             down
             the
             Rocks
             and
             Mountains
             .
             Extreamly
             thievish
             ,
             treacherous
             ,
             and
             revengeful
             they
             proved
             ;
             nor
             could
             any
             kindness
             or
             fair-dealing
             win
             them
             ;
             but
             as
             true
             Barbarians
             ,
             never
             omitted
             any
             opportunity
             of
             fulfilling
             their
             Desires
             ;
             they
             would
             steal
             when
             they
             saw
             the
             Mariners
             look
             upon
             them
             .
             After
             they
             had
             been
             well
             used
             and
             treated
             at
             their
             Tables
             ,
             they
             would
             shoot
             at
             ,
             sling
             Stones
             ,
             wound
             and
             kill
             our
             Men
             ,
             
             if
             they
             could
             .
             Yet
             are
             they
             apprehensive
             enough
             ,
             and
             quickly
             conceive
             yours
             ,
             and
             express
             their
             own
             meaning
             .
             If
             they
             had
             not
             seen
             what
             was
             asked
             them
             ,
             they
             winked
             ,
             or
             cover'd
             their
             Eyes
             ;
             if
             they
             understood
             not
             ,
             stopt
             their
             Ears
             ,
             and
             the
             like
             .
             They
             delight
             exceedingly
             in
             Musick
             ,
             to
             which
             they
             would
             keep
             time
             both
             with
             their
             voice
             ,
             hands
             ,
             and
             feet
             :
             wonderful
             also
             affectionate
             one
             to
             another
             ,
             and
             to
             their
             Country
             .
             In
             one
             Voyage
             there
             went
             a
             Danish
             Mariner
             ,
             with
             black
             hair
             ,
             flat
             nos'd
             ,
             and
             other
             ,
             though
             not
             very
             exact
             ,
             resemblances
             of
             a
             Gronelander
             ;
             as
             soon
             as
             they
             saw
             him
             ,
             they
             came
             about
             him
             ,
             kissed
             him
             ,
             hung
             upon
             him
             ,
             and
             shewed
             to
             him
             all
             possible
             demonstrations
             of
             Kindness
             and
             Affection
             .
             And
             those
             who
             were
             in
             Denmark
             never
             enjoy'd
             themselves
             ,
             nor
             had
             any
             content
             ,
             but
             continually
             pined
             away
             ,
             and
             languish'd
             with
             Discontent
             for
             their
             condition
             ,
             and
             love
             of
             their
             country
             .
             Their
             Religion
             ,
             such
             as
             it
             is
             ,
             seems
             to
             be
             unto
             the
             Sun
             ;
             for
             when
             our
             People
             invited
             them
             to
             conversation
             ,
             bartering
             ,
             &c.
             they
             held
             up
             their
             hands
             towards
             the
             Sun
             ,
             and
             cried
             ●otan
             ;
             nor
             would
             they
             come
             near
             us
             ,
             till
             our
             men
             had
             done
             the
             like
             .
             But
             
               John
               Munck
            
             ,
             and
             divers
             others
             ,
             having
             gone
             farther
             into
             the
             country
             ,
             found
             images
             ,
             such
             as
             we
             make
             of
             Devils
             ,
             with
             horns
             ,
             beaks
             ,
             claws
             ,
             cloven
             feet
             ,
             &c
             very
             ill
             made
             ;
             Altars
             also
             and
             quantities
             of
             Bones
             of
             Beasts
             ,
             as
             of
             Deer
             ,
             Foxes
             ,
             Dogs
             ,
             and
             the
             like
             ,
             near
             unto
             them
             .
             They
             seem
             also
             ,
             as
             all
             Idolaters
             ,
             given
             to
             Enchantments
             and
             Sorceries
             .
             Our
             men
             have
             seen
             them
             lying
             flat
             upon
             the
             Earth
             ,
             and
             muttering
             their
             Prayers
             or
             Charms
             into
             the
             Ground
             ,
             worshiping
             the
             Devil
             ,
             whose
             proper
             habitation
             they
             
             conceive
             to
             be
             under
             them
             .
             In
             some
             Diseases
             they
             tye
             a
             stick
             to
             a
             great
             stone
             ,
             to
             which
             they
             pay
             their
             Devotions
             ;
             and
             if
             they
             can
             lift
             it
             up
             easily
             and
             lightly
             ,
             they
             think
             their
             Prayers
             are
             heard
             ,
             and
             Recovery
             granted
             .
             In
             Winter
             they
             retire
             from
             the
             Sea
             side
             ,
             unto
             the
             warmer
             Valleys
             ,
             where
             they
             have
             their
             Houses
             and
             Towns
             ,
             which
             are
             commonly
             Caves
             at
             the
             foot
             of
             an
             hill
             ,
             round
             like
             an
             Oven
             ,
             close
             to
             one
             another
             ,
             and
             passage
             in
             the
             inner
             parts
             from
             one
             to
             another
             ;
             their
             Doors
             ,
             which
             are
             low
             and
             round
             ,
             open
             to
             the
             south
             ;
             and
             they
             dig
             trenches
             also
             to
             draw
             away
             the
             water
             that
             falls
             or
             drains
             from
             the
             hill
             .
             The
             entrance
             ,
             and
             some
             part
             of
             their
             house
             ,
             stands
             without
             the
             cave
             ,
             which
             they
             frame
             very
             handsomly
             and
             commodiously
             of
             the
             ribs
             of
             Whales
             join'd
             artificially
             at
             the
             top
             ,
             and
             cover'd
             with
             Seals
             skins
             .
             They
             raise
             also
             one
             part
             of
             their
             floor
             higher
             than
             another
             ,
             which
             they
             strow
             with
             moss
             to
             sleep
             upon
             .
             But
             in
             their
             fishing-time
             they
             have
             Tents
             ,
             which
             they
             remove
             from
             place
             to
             place
             in
             their
             larger
             Boats.
             They
             set
             up
             four
             Poles
             ,
             and
             cover
             them
             with
             Skins
             ,
             which
             serves
             very
             well
             in
             summer
             :
             when
             fishing
             is
             done
             ,
             they
             return
             with
             them
             to
             their
             Houses
             .
             Their
             manner
             of
             bartering
             ,
             is
             to
             make
             two
             heaps
             ,
             one
             of
             such
             things
             as
             they
             desire
             ,
             the
             other
             of
             what
             they
             would
             part
             with
             ;
             and
             they
             cease
             not
             to
             take
             away
             from
             the
             one
             or
             other
             ,
             till
             the
             Trade
             is
             ballanced
             .
             The
             chiefest
             things
             of
             our
             which
             they
             valued
             ▪
             were
             Knives
             ,
             Needles
             ,
             little
             pieces
             of
             ●oon
             ,
             Looking
             glasses
             ,
             &c.
             for
             these
             they
             would
             sell
             their
             ;
             B●wg
             and
             Arrows
             ;
             their
             Boaid
             ,
             and
             s●rip
             bhem
             ?
             sewes
             of
             their
             Clothes
             ,
             but
             never
             ,
             like
             some
             other
             Barbarians
             ,
             sell
             their
             Wives
             and
             Children
             .
          
           
           
             Their
             clothing
             is
             either
             of
             Birds-skins
             ,
             
             with
             the
             Feathers
             and
             Down
             upon
             them
             ,
             or
             Seals
             ,
             Dogfish
             ,
             or
             the
             like
             .
             Seals
             they
             use
             most
             in
             their
             fishing
             ,
             because
             that
             fish
             there
             abounds
             ,
             and
             are
             easily
             deceived
             ,
             by
             seeing
             one
             clad
             ▪
             in
             their
             own
             Livery
             :
             besides
             ,
             that
             these
             kind
             of
             Furs
             are
             not
             so
             apt
             to
             be
             wet
             ,
             though
             dip'd
             in
             Water
             .
             They
             wear
             the
             hair
             sides
             outward
             in
             summer
             ,
             inward
             in
             winter
             ,
             and
             in
             great
             colds
             carry
             two
             or
             more
             suits
             one
             upon
             another
             .
             They
             dress
             their
             Skins
             very
             well
             ,
             making
             them
             dry
             ,
             soft
             ,
             and
             durable
             ,
             and
             sow
             them
             also
             very
             strong
             with
             Sinews
             of
             Beasts
             ,
             and
             Needles
             made
             of
             Fish-bones
             .
          
           
             But
             in
             nothing
             do
             they
             shew
             so
             much
             Art
             ,
             
             as
             in
             their
             Boats
             or
             Canoes
             .
             They
             are
             made
             of
             that
             we
             call
             Whalebone
             ,
             about
             in
             inch
             thick
             and
             broad
             ,
             and
             these
             not
             set
             like
             ribs
             ,
             but
             all
             along
             from
             prow
             to
             poop
             ,
             fast
             sowed
             to
             one
             another
             with
             strong
             Sinews
             ,
             and
             covered
             over
             with
             Seals-skin
             .
             They
             are
             from
             ten
             to
             twenty
             foot
             long
             ,
             and
             about
             two
             foot
             broad
             ,
             made
             like
             a
             Weaver's
             Shutle
             ,
             sharp
             at
             both
             ends
             ,
             so
             that
             he
             can
             row
             either
             way
             ;
             and
             in
             making
             this
             pointedness
             they
             are
             of
             all
             things
             most
             curious
             ,
             for
             therein
             consists
             the
             strength
             of
             their
             Vessel
             .
             In
             the
             middle
             of
             it
             are
             the
             ribs
             ,
             both
             to
             keep
             the
             sides
             asunder
             ,
             and
             to
             make
             the
             hole
             in
             the
             covering
             ,
             wherein
             the
             Rower
             sits
             .
             They
             have
             a
             deck
             made
             of
             the
             same
             materials
             ,
             which
             is
             closely
             fasten'd
             to
             the
             sides
             ,
             in
             the
             midst
             whereof
             is
             a
             round
             hole
             ,
             as
             big
             as
             the
             middle
             of
             a
             Man
             ;
             so
             that
             when
             he
             goes
             to
             Sea
             ,
             he
             sets
             himself
             in
             that
             hole
             ,
             stretching
             out
             his
             feet
             forward
             
             into
             the
             hollow
             of
             the
             Boat
             ;
             he
             stops
             up
             the
             hole
             so
             close
             with
             his
             frock
             ,
             or
             loose
             upper
             garment
             ,
             that
             no
             water
             can
             enter
             ,
             tho'
             it
             were
             in
             the
             bottom
             of
             the
             Sea.
             His
             frock
             is
             strait
             tyed
             at
             the
             hand-wrists
             ,
             and
             to
             his
             neck
             ,
             and
             his
             capouch
             sowed
             also
             close
             to
             it
             ;
             so
             that
             if
             the
             Boat
             be
             overturned
             or
             overwhelmed
             in
             the
             Sea
             ,
             he
             rises
             up
             again
             ,
             without
             any
             wet
             either
             upon
             his
             Skin
             or
             in
             his
             Boat.
             They
             have
             but
             one
             Oar
             ,
             which
             is
             about
             six
             foot
             long
             ,
             with
             a
             paddle
             six
             inches
             broad
             at
             either
             end
             ;
             this
             serves
             him
             both
             to
             ballance
             his
             Boat
             and
             move
             it
             ;
             which
             he
             doth
             with
             that
             incredible
             scelerity
             ,
             that
             one
             of
             our
             Boats
             with
             ten
             Oars
             is
             not
             able
             to
             keep
             company
             with
             them
             :
             The
             Danish
             relation
             saith
             ,
             that
             they
             rowed
             so
             swift
             ,
             that
             they
             even
             dazled
             the
             Eyes
             of
             the
             Spectators
             ;
             and
             tho'
             they
             crossed
             frequently
             ,
             yet
             never
             interfered
             or
             hit
             one
             another
             .
          
           
             Their
             fishing
             ordinarily
             is
             darting
             ;
             
             their
             darts
             are
             long
             ,
             strongly
             barbed
             ,
             and
             at
             the
             other
             end
             have
             Bladders
             fastened
             to
             them
             ,
             that
             when
             they
             have
             struck
             the
             Fish
             ,
             he
             may
             spend
             himself
             with
             strugling
             to
             get
             under
             water
             ,
             which
             yet
             he
             cannot
             do
             ,
             and
             so
             is
             easily
             taken
             .
          
           
             Besides
             these
             ,
             they
             have
             greater
             Boats
             for
             the
             removing
             their
             Tents
             and
             other
             Utensils
             ,
             as
             also
             to
             carry
             their
             Fish
             they
             have
             caught
             to
             their
             Houses
             ;
             these
             are
             thirty
             and
             forty
             foot
             long
             ,
             and
             have
             sometimes
             ten
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             more
             seats
             for
             Rowers
             .
             Cardinal
             Bembus
             (
             in
             his
             Venetian
             History
             )
             saith
             ,
             that
             in
             his
             time
             one
             of
             these
             ,
             with
             seven
             Persons
             in
             it
             ,
             was
             by
             storm
             cast
             upon
             the
             coast
             of
             Britany
             .
             I
             know
             not
             whether
             
             it
             be
             worth
             mentioning
             ,
             that
             they
             have
             Kettles
             and
             Pans
             made
             of
             Stone
             (
             some
             say
             of
             Loadstone
             )
             that
             endures
             the
             fire
             wonderfully
             ,
             but
             not
             having
             tools
             fit
             to
             hollow
             them
             sufficiently
             ,
             they
             make
             up
             the
             edges
             of
             Whalebone
             .
          
        
         
           
             FREESLAND
             ,
             or
             FRISELAND
             ,
          
           
             LIeth
             in
             60
             deg
             .
             more
             westerly
             than
             any
             part
             of
             Europe
             :
             distant
             from
             Iseland
             leagues
             .
             It
             is
             reported
             in
             bigness
             not
             to
             be
             much
             lesser
             than
             England
             ;
             a
             ragged
             and
             high
             land
             ,
             the
             mountains
             cover'd
             with
             snow
             ,
             and
             the
             coast
             so
             full
             of
             drift
             Ice
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             almost
             inaccessible
             .
          
           
             It
             was
             first
             discovered
             to
             us
             by
             Nicolao
             and
             
               Antonio
               Zani
            
             ,
             two
             Venetian
             Gentlemen
             ,
             
             that
             were
             here
             shipwrack'd
             .
             They
             describe
             the
             Inhabitants
             to
             be
             good
             Christians
             ,
             very
             civil
             ,
             and
             to
             be
             governed
             by
             a
             great
             Lord
             whose
             Name
             was
             Zichmay
             ,
             whose
             mighty
             conquests
             ,
             and
             strange
             accidents
             may
             be
             read
             in
             Hackluit
             .
             It
             is
             not
             our
             business
             to
             write
             or
             repeat
             Romances
             .
             Those
             men
             whom
             our
             Seamen
             (
             touching
             there
             accidently
             )
             saw
             ,
             were
             like
             in
             all
             things
             to
             the
             Gronelanders
             ,
             both
             in
             features
             of
             body
             ,
             and
             manner
             of
             living
             ,
             as
             much
             as
             they
             could
             judge
             ;
             so
             like
             ,
             that
             many
             of
             them
             thought
             it
             continued
             to
             Groneland
             ;
             in
             which
             opinion
             also
             they
             were
             confirm'd
             by
             the
             multitudes
             of
             the
             Islands
             of
             ice
             ,
             
             which
             coming
             from
             the
             north
             ,
             argued
             land
             to
             be
             that
             way
             :
             for
             many
             of
             our
             Mariners
             hold
             ,
             that
             salt
             water
             doth
             not
             freeze
             ,
             but
             that
             all
             the
             Ice
             they
             find
             in
             the
             Sea
             comes
             from
             the
             Bays
             ,
             and
             mouths
             of
             fresh-water
             Rivers
             ;
             for
             the
             ice
             it self
             is
             sweet
             and
             fresh
             ,
             being
             dissolved
             ,
             and
             serves
             to
             all
             purposes
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             Spring
             or
             River
             water
             .
             Besides
             ,
             the
             salt
             Sea
             (
             they
             say
             )
             is
             always
             in
             motion
             ,
             and
             so
             cannot
             freeze
             .
             But
             the
             Dutch
             ,
             who
             winter'd
             in
             
               Nova
               Zembla
            
             ,
             took
             notice
             ,
             that
             the
             salt
             water
             freez'd
             ,
             and
             that
             two
             inches
             thick
             in
             one
             night
             .
          
           
             There
             seems
             to
             be
             good
             fishing
             every
             where
             upon
             the
             coast
             .
             In
             their
             soundings
             they
             brought
             up
             a
             sort
             of
             pale
             Coral
             ,
             and
             little
             Stones
             clear
             as
             Crystal
             .
             They
             call'd
             it
             
               West
               England
            
             ,
             and
             one
             of
             the
             highest
             mountains
             they
             called
             Charing-Cross
             .
          
           
             THE
             END
             .
          
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
         
         
         
         
         
         
           
        
         
         
           
        
         
         
           
        
         
         
           
        
         
         
           
        
      
       
         Notes, typically marginal, from the original text
         
           Notes for div A52618-e63150
           
             Northern
             Islands
             .
          
           
             Hope-Island
             .
          
           
             Edges-Island
             .
          
           
             Wyches-Island
             .
          
           
             Cherry-Island
             .
          
           
             Morss-fishing
             .
          
           
             Morsses
             .
          
           
             The
             Name
             and
             Situation
             .
          
           
             Ancient
             Discoveries
             
          
           
             
               By
               the
            
             Norwegians
             .
          
           
             Later
             Discoveries
             by
             the
             English
             .
          
           
             Sir
             
               Martin
               Frobisher
            
             .
          
           
             Sir
             Hum.
             Gilbert
             .
          
           
             Mr.
             Davi●
          
           
             Mr.
             Hudson
             .
          
           
             James
             Hall.
             
          
           
             Mr.
             Baffin
             .
          
           
             By
             the
             Danes
             .
          
           
             Gronelanders
             in
             Denmark
             .
          
           
             The
             Soil
             ,
             &c.
             of
             Groneland
          
           
             Beasts
             .
          
           
             Fishes
             .
          
           
             Fowls
             .
          
           
             Of
             the
             North
             light
             
          
           
             Division
             of
             the
             Country
             .
          
           
             Inhabitants
             
          
           
             Their
             Cloathing
             .
          
           
             Their
             Boats
             
          
           
             Their
             Fishing
             .
          
           
             Its
             Discoveries
             .